pr ~

4k
 FM 6-40
Cl

Change HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 1 WASHINGTON, D.C. 30 September, 1976

FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON GUNNERY

FM 6-40, 28 June 1974, is changed as follows:

j. Using pen and ink, make the following corrections:

Page Paragraph Remarks

1-1 1-1 Change last sentence to read "...in the significant loss of either speed or
accuracy without marked improvement in artillery support should be
questioned."
1-1 1-3 Change "ATSF-CTD-DL" to read "ATSF-TD-TM".
1-2 Section II
title Delete.
1-2 1-8 Change title to read "Classes of Cannon Artillery".
1-2 1-9 After paragraph title add "(deleted)"; delete remainder of paragraph.
1-5 Section III Change to read "Section II".
1-5 1-10 Delete last sentence.
1-5 1-14 Delete the note
2-5 Fig 2-5 Label left side of graph "Muzzle Velocity Variation from First Round
Fired."
2-9 2-10b In third line, change "fixed" to read "fired".
2-27 2-41 After paragraph title add "(deleted)"; delete remainder of paragraph.
2-34 Add the following: "2-48 Delivery Accuracy. (See FM 6-40-5 for a detailed
discussion of delivery accuracy)."
2-34 After page number add: "(next numbered page is 4-1)".
7-1 7-1b Change last sentence to read "Employment... described in appropriate
doctrinal manuals."
7-1 7-3 Change "6-140" to read "6-40-5".
7-2 7-5d After last sentence, add "See FM 6-40-5 for a more detailed discussion of
observer duties and tactics on the highly mobile modern battlefield."
19-13 19-29c Change "paragraphs 13-17 and 13-18" to read "chapter 13, section IV."
19-13 19-30c In line 4, change ff... 1 ROUND," to read "... ADJUST,"
19-14 19-33c Change "HCD" to read "HCO".
20-1 20-3 In the Example, line 4, change "The base piece" to read "The registering
piece".
20-2 Fig 20-1 Change "base piece" to read "registering piece".
20-3 20-7a In line 9, change "base" to read "registering".
20-5 20-7 Add "e. See FM 6-40-5 on how to apply GFT settings to the GFT fan."
20-6 20-12, Change all references to "base piece" to read "registering piece".
Fig 20-3
21-2 Section II After title, add "(Concurrent met)".
title
Cl, FM 6-40

Page Paragraph Remarks

21-3 21-7a In line 13, change "nearest meters" to read "nearest 100 meters"; in line 14,
change "may be" to read "is not."
21-3 21-7a In the example, change "above gun +263." to read "above gun +300."; in
Height of target above gun, delete "(+263)" and "(+72.3)"; change "+72
meters" to read "+83 meters"; change "7092 (7020 + 72)" to read "7103
(7020 + 83)."
21-7b Delete.
21-11 21-16b In line 6, change "graphically" to read "manually."
21-12 21-16g In lines 1 and 4, change "base piece" to read "registering piece."
22-4 22-11c Delete "the weapons may be laid for direction by any of the methods de-
scribed in chapter 4."
22-5 22-11c Change last sentence to read "... be located by survey."
22-5 22-11d In first sentence, change "the target acquisition battalion" to read "a
target acquisition unit."
22-5 22-1Id In line 11, change sentence to read "the OP's must be located by accurate
survey. Each observer records... "
22-5 22-13a In line 1, change sentence to read "When a target acquisition unit pro-
vides...
22-6 22-14b(3) In line 4, change "(table G)" to read "(table G, TFT)".
22-7 22-16b In line 1, change "(table F)" to read "(table F, TFT)"
22-7 22-17a In line 2, change "(table E)" to read "(table E, TFT)".
23-2 23-2c In line 8, change "invididual" to read "individual."
24-1 24-4c Delete.
24-2 24-5b(2) Change first sentence to read "Determine (at the initial chart range) from
the Ground Data Table, (Table F, TFT) the correction. ... "
24-2 24-5b(4) In the example, add "Initial chart range ..... 5980 meters"; delete "Comp
range (VI + 30 meters)...+ 6 meters." Change entry range to read "Entry
range (5980 = 6000) ....6000 meters." Change "corrected range...." to read
"Corrected fire-for-effect range...."
24-2 24-6, After each paragraph title add "(See FM 6-40-5)"; delete remainder of
24-7 paragraphs.
24-3 24-9a Change "13-6 and 13-7" to read "13-3 and 13-4".
24-6 24-18 Change "computer's record" to read "Record of Fire".
24-6 24-18f Change "13-7" to read "13-4".
24-9 24-23b Change "S3" to read "FDO".
24-9 24-24 Delete remainder of paragraph; after paragraph title, add "(See FM 6-
40-5)".
24-10 24-27a Change "13-5 through 13-20" to read "13-12 through 13-17"; change "S3"
to read "FDO".
24-12 24-35a After "Firing Battery" add "(See FM 6-50)"; delete remainder of subpara-
graph.
24-15 24-36a-d Delete all down to 24-36e.
24-15 24-36e Change subparagraph title to read "Determination of QE and Fuze Setting
for HE Projectile"; delete "to the wind-displaced plot", add "Chart

24-15 24-36f(2)
range ... 6970 meters."
In line 1, change "table A" to read "table A, FT 155-ADD-El-, chg 5G,..."
*
24-20 24-45b(2) Change "total" to read "GFT".
24-20 24-47c(2) Change "concurrent" to read "current".

2
 Cl, FM 6-40

Page Paragraph Remarks

24-41 24-69b(2) In line 5, delete "10 or..."

26-3 26-7c(1) Change "average fuze" to read "known fuze"; add a second sentence:
"Place the manufacturer's hair line (MHL) over this value."
26-3 26-7c(2) Change "adjusted time" to read "corrected time under the MHL."
26-8 26-23d Delete "...and separate deflection correction scales."
26-12 26-36b In line 2, change "the deflection correction scale to..." to read "the GFT
deflection correction to ... "

26-13 26-37a(1) Delete last sentence.

26-13 26-39 In title and in line 1, change "Computer's Records" to read "Records of Fire."
26-13 26-39c(1) In line 3, change "FROM" to read "SHIFT."
26-13 26-39d In line 7 of the Example, change "AF 7401" to read "AF 741"; in line 13,
change "Total deflection correction from deflection correction scale" to
read "Total deflection correction."
29-3 Table In next-to-last column, change "Maximum effective range (yards)" to read
29-1 "Maximum effective range (meters)"; delete last column.
30-1 30-1a Change first sentence to read "Tank guns normally are not used in the
field artillery (indirect fire) role because of the small bursting radius of
the high velocity, flat trajectory ammunition and the short tube life of
the tank guns."
30-1 30-4a(2) In line 12, delete "as outlined in chapter 20".
2. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below. New or changed material is indicated by
a vertical bar in the margin of the page. New or revised illustrations, tables, paragraphs, or sections are
indicated by a vertical bar adjacent to the identification number.

Remove pages Insert pages

i through iv (blank) i through iv (blank)

1-3, 1-4 1-3, 1-4
2-1 through 2-4 2-1 through 2-4
3-1 through 3-4 (blank) None
4-1 through 4-30 (blank) 4-1 through 4-6
5-1 through 5-10 None
6-1 through 6-6 None
8-1 through 8-8 8-1 through 8-6
9-1 through 9-6 (blank) None
10-1 through 10-12 10-1 through 10-10 (blank)
11-1 through 11-4 (blank) 11-1, 11-2
12-1 through 12-4 (blank) 12-1 through 12-4 (blank)
13-1 through 13-16 13-1 through 13-14 (blank)
14-1 through 14-16 None
15-1 through 15-4 15-1 through 15-4
16-1 through 16-16 (blank) 16-1 through 16-14
17-1 through 17-4 17-1 through 17-4
18-1 through 18-18 18-1 through 18-16
19-1 through 19-12 19-1, 19-2
19-15 through 19-22 (blank) 19-15 through 19-22 (blank)
20-7 through 20-12 20-7 through 20-10
21-5 through 21-10 21-5 through 21-10
23-3 through 23-8 (blank) 23-3 through 23-8
3
Cl, FM 6-40

Remove pages Insert pages

24-7, 24-8 24-7, 24-8
24-13, 24-14 24-13, 24-14
24-17, 24-18 24-17, 24-18
24-21 through 24-40 24-21 through 24-40
25-1 through 25-8 (blank) 25-1 through 25-6
27-1 through 27-8 (blank) 27-1, 27-2 (blank)
28-1 through 28-8 (blank) None
A-1 through A-4 (blank) A-1 through A-4
Index-1 through Index-16 Index-1 through Index 18 (blank)
B-1 through B-14 None
C-1 through C-8 (blank) None
3. The word "he" as used in this publication is intended to include both the masculine and the feminine
genders. Any exceptions to this will be so noted.
4. These transmittal sheets should be filed in front of the manual for reference purposes.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

FRED C. WEYAND
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff

Official:
PAUL T. SMITH
Major General, United States Army
The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION:
ActiveArmy, USAR, ARNG. To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-11 A, Requirements
for Field Artillery Cannon Gunnery (Qty rqr block no. 44).
Additional copies can be requisitioned (DA Form 17) from the U.S. Army Adjutant General
Publications Center, 2800 Eastern Boulevard, Baltimore, MD 21220.

4
0
cl * FM 6-40

FIELD MANUAL HEADQUARTERS

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 6-40 Washington, D.C., 28 June 1974

FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON GUNNERY

Paragraphs Page
PART ONE. GENERAL
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
...1-1-1-9.1 1-1
Section I. G e n e r al ..... ........................... .........................
.. .......... ...........

CHAPTER
II.
II.
2.
C annon artillery (D eleted) ----------------------------------------------
A m mu n ition ----------------------------------------------------------------------
FUNDAMENTALS OF FIELD ARTILLERY I 1-10-1-14 1-5

GUNNERY
Section I. E lem ents of fi ring d ata - .-.............................................. 2-1-2-5 2-1
II. ... 2-6-2-9
In terio r b a llistics -------------------------------------------------------------- 2-3
III. E x terior b a llistics . .......................................................... .... 2-10-2-27 2-9
IV. D ispersion and probability -------------------------------------------- 2-28-2-48 2-20
PART TWO. FIRING BATTERY
CHAPTER 3. FIRING BATTERY, GENERAL (Deleted) ..............
4. FIRING BATTERY PROCEDURES
Section I. Laying the battery (Deleted) ------------------------------------------
II. Minimum quadrant elevation (Deleted) ....................
III. Determining and reporting data(Deleted) ................ ...4-1-4-19
IV. Fire commands and their execution ............................ 4-1
V. Assault and direct fire (Deleted) ------------------------------------
CHAPTER 5. FIRING BATTERY OPERATIONS AND
TRAINING (Deleted)
CHAPTER 6. DUTIES OF THE SAFETY OFFICER (Deleted)
PART THREE. OBSERVED FIRE
CHAPTER 7. FIELD ARTILLERY OBSERVER
Section I. ....
I ntr o ductio n ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-1-7-3 7-1
II. P reparatory operations -------------------------------------------------- 7-4-7-8 7-1
CHAPTER 8. LOCATION OF TARGETS ------------------------------------------ .... 8-1-8-8 8-1
CHAPTER 9. CALLS FOR FIRE (Deleted) ....................... I
10. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE BY GROUND
OBSERVER
SECTION I. .... 10-1-10-6
G e ne r al ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10-1
II. A djustm en t of deviation ------------------------------------------------ .... 10-7, 10-8 10-4
III. A dju stm en t of rang e -------------------------------------------------------- .... 10-9-10-11.1 10-5
IV. A djustm ent of height of burst ---------------------------------------- .... 10-2-10-16 10-6
V. Su bsequen t corrections -------------------------------------------------- .... 10-17-10-33 10-7
CHAPTER 11. FIRE FOR EFFECT
Section I. P recisio n fire (Deleted) ...................... .............................
II. A rea fi re ---------------------------------------------------.---------------...- 11-5-11-8 11-1
CHAPTER .12. ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE BY THE AIR
OBSERVER
Section I. In tr o ductio n ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 12-1-12-3 12-1
II. P reflig h t p rep aration s .................................................... 12-4, 12-5 12-1
III. Determination of initial data ........................................ 12-6-12-9 12-1
IV. A dju stm en t p roced ures -... .............................................. 12-10-12-12 12-2
CHAPTER 13. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FOR SPECIAL

Section Io
II.
III.
SITUATIONS
Conduct of fire with chemical projectiles .................. .... 13-1, 13-2
I
B a ttlefield illu m in atio n .................................................. .... 13-3-13-5
Conduct of assault fire -.............................................. ----- 13-6-13-11.1
13-1
13-1
13-6

* This manual supersedes FM 6-40, 5 October 1967, including all changes, and FM 6-135,
14 February 1969.
Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page
IV. Conduct of fire by use of combined observation .......... 13-12-13-17 13-8
V. Adjustment of high-angle fire and auxiliary
adjustment point .............................................................. 13-18-13-22 13-10
VI. Conduct of fire when observer is not oriented .............. 13-23-13-25 13-10
VII. Adjustment of fire by sound-.........................................-13-26, 13-7 13-11
VIII. Aerial field artillery (Deleted) ......................................
IX. A BCA precision fire (Deleted) ------------------------------------------
X. M oving target m issions ------------------------------------------------------ 13-33- 13-35 13-11
CHAPTER 14. ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES (Deleted) A
PART FOUR. FIRE DIRECTION
CHAPTER 15 FIRE DIRECTION, GENERAL
S ection I. Introd uction .......................................................................... 15-1- 15-3 15-1
II. Fire direction center, general --------------------------.--.-......... 15-4- 15-6 15-1
III. FDC personnel in the battalion ........... .........................15-7-15-16 15-2
CHAPTER 16. CHART DATA
Section I Firing charts ............................................. 16-1- 16-6 16-1
II. P lo tting --------- 16 -7 - 16-19
...........................................................................- 16-2
III. Determ ination of chart data .----------------............................. 16-20 - 16-27 16-11
C H APTER 17.
CHAPTER 18. FIRE DIRECTION PROCEDURES
I
FIR IN G D A TA ......................................................................- 17-1- 17-13 17-1

Section I. Battalion FDC procedures ---------------------------------------- _-....--- 18-1-18-22 18-1

II. B attery fire direction ------------------------------------------------------------ 18-23- 18-25 18-11
III. Communications .............................................................. 18-26, 18-27 18-11
IV . Sam ple m issions -...............................................................-18-28, 18-29 18-13
CHAPTER 19. CONDUCT OF REGISTRATIONS
S ectio ns I. G en eral ....................................................................................- 19-1- 19-3 19-1
II. Precision registration (Deleted) ...................................
III. V alidity of registrations (Deleted) .....................................
IV. Mean-point-of-impact and high-burst registrations .. 19-27-19-39 19-2
V. Registration with more than one ammunition lot ...... 19-40, 19-41 19-20
VI. Fire direction procedures for ABCA precision
fire (D ele te d ) ................................................
CHAPTER 20. DETERMINATION AND APPLICATION OF
REGISTRATION CORRECTIONS
Section I. Introduction..........................................................................20-1, 20-2 20-1
II. Registration range corrections ........................................- 20-3-20-11 20-1
III. Registration deflection corrections .................................. 20-12-20-16 20-6
IV. Replotting targets ............................................................- 20-17-20-22 20-7 I
CHAPTER 21. METEOROLOGICAL CORRECTIONS AND
VELOCITY ERROR
Section I. The meteorological message.............................................. 21-1-21-4 21-1
II. Position velocity error (Concurrent Met)-...................-21-5-21-10 21-2
III. Application of meteorological and velocity error
corrections (subsequent met) ---------------------------............ 21-11-21-16 21-7 U
IV . Experience corrections ------------------------------------------ 21-17- 21-21
............. 21-12
CHAPTER 22. CALIBRATION
S ectio n I. G enera l ................................................................................... 2 2 -1- 2 2-7 22-1
II. Chronograph calibration ..................................................- 22-8- 22-10 22-2
III. Fall-of-shot comparative calibration .............................. 22-11-22-19 22-4
IV. Fall-of-shot absolute calibration -------------------------------------- 22-20-22-23 22-9
V. Redistribution of weapons ........................... 22-23, 22-24 22-10
CHAPTER 23. CALIBRATION, POSITION, AND SPECIAL
CORRECTIONS
Section II. Calibration corrections ...................................................... 23-1-23-3 23-1
II. P osition corrections ------------------.-........................................... 23-4- 23-6 23-3
III. S pecial corrections ---------------------------------------------------------------- 23-7- 23-9
CHAPTER 24 FDC PROCEDURES FOR SPECIAL SITUATIONS
Section I. Introduction ......................................................... . . . . ..........-24-1, 24-2 24-1
II. C hem ical projectiles ------------------------------------------------------------ 24-3- 24-8 24-1
 Cl, FM 6-40

III. Illum inatin g projectiles ---------------------------------------------------- .24-9-24-18 24-3

IV. P ro p ag an da projectile ------------------------------------------------------ .24-19, 24-20 24-8
V. Assault fire .24-21, 24-22 24-8
VI D estruction m ission s -------------------------------------------------------- 24-23, 24-24 24-9
VII. F ina l p ro tectiv e fires ---------------------------------------------------------- 24-25, 24-26 24-10
VIII. Combined adjustment-..... 24-27, 24-28 24-10
Ix. Sound, flash, and radar missions ---.---------------------------- 24-29-24-34 24-11
X. Gunnery .,1.
procedures for improved conventional
munitions.........................................................................24-35, 24-36 24-12
XI. Dead space .............................................................................. 24-37-24-40 24-15
XII. Miscellaneous ........................................................................ 24-41-24-43 24-17
XIII. 8-inch howitzer nuclear delivery-..................................-24-44-24-56 24-20
XIV. 155-mm howitzer nuclear delivery...............24-57-24-64 24-33
XV. Firing without a firing chart-.........................................-24-65-24-72 24-41
CHAPTER 25. FDC PROCEDURES FOR HIGH-ANGLE FIRE 25-1-25-13 25-1
CHAPTER 26. OBSERVED FIRING CHARTS
Section I. Introduction ........................................... ............................. 26-1, 26-2 26-1
II. Battery observed firing charts ........................................ 26-3-26-11 26-1
III. Battalion observed firing chart ------------.......................... 26-12-26-15 26-4
IV. Replotting targets on the observed firing chart. .......... 26-16-26-20 26-7
V. Observed firing chart for more than one battalion ...... 26-22-26-24 26-8
VI. Observed firing chart with incomplete survey ........ 26-25, 26-26 26-9
VII. Radar firing charts-..........................................................-26-27-26-34 26-9
VIII. Transfer from observed firing chart to survey firing
chart .....................................................................
... . . . . -. -. .......- 26-35- 26-39 26-12
PART .. FIVE. MISCELLANEOUS
CHAPTER 27. TARGET ANALYSIS AND ATTACK (Deleted) ........ 27-1
CHAPTER 28. SERVICE PRACTICE (Deleted)
CHAPTER 29. NAVAL GUNFIRE SUPPORT
Section I. Introduction ......... ........................................... 29-1- 29-3 29-1
II. C all for fire -------------- .................. 29-4, 29-5
......... ............................ 29-1
III. A djustm ent procedure .. ---------------------------------------------------. 29-6, 29-7 29-4
CHAPTER 30. ARMOR EMPLOYED IN A FIELD ARTILLERY
M ISSION --------------------------------------------...................... ....... 30-1- 30-6 30-1
APPENDIX A. REFERENCES A-1
B. QSTAG 225, CALL FOR FIRE FORMATS (Deleted)
C. QSTAG 246, RADIO TELEPHONE

INDEX
PROCEDURES FOR THE CONDUCT OF
ARTILLERY FIRE (Deleted)-..................................
I Index-1

iii
(iv BLANK)
 Cl, FM 6-40

I 1-9. Map and Azimuth Terms Grid convergence is indicated in the marginal
data of maps as east or west of the north.
The map and azimuth terms used in the firing
battery are defined in a through j below. j. Declination Constant. Declination constant
a. Grid line. A grid line is a line extend- (fig 1-1) is a constant correction applied to the
ing north and south or east and west on a map, readings of a compass instrument which
photomap, or grid sheet. A grid is composed of two represents the horizontal clockwise angle between
intersecting sets of lines. The east-west lines are grid north and magnetic north as indicated by
parallel to the central meridian and the north- that instrument. The declination constant for
south lines are perpendicular to the central meri- each instrument is recorded and is applied to
dian of the grid zone in question. The parallel lines determine the azimuth of grid north from the
are normally 1,000 meters apart and are used to measured azimuth of magnetic north. The
measure grid coordinates (1:50,000 maps). constant for any instrument may vary in different
b. Magnetic North. Magnetic north (fig 1-1) localities and the constants of different
is the direction to the magnetic North Pole. instruments in the same locality may vary.
c. True North. True north (fig 1-1) is the di-
Grid north
rection to the geographic North Pole.
north
d. Grid North. Grid north (fig 1-1) is the
north direction of the vertical grid lines on a mili-
tary map, photomap, or grid sheet.
e. Azimuth. Azimuth is a direction expressed
as a horizontal clockwise angle measured from
Grid
north. This angle may be a-
(1) Magnetic azimuth (fig 1-1), measured Decli nation
constant
from magnetic north.
(2) True azimuth (fig 1-1), measured from
true north. Magnetic
(3) Grid azimuth (fig 1-1), measured from variation

grid north. Grid azimuth is the azimuth normally

employed in the field artillery. The artilleryman
also uses the terms "azimuth" and "direction" as
synonyms of grid azimuth. The command to the
executive officer to indicate the grid azimuth of
Figure 1-1. Map and azimuth terms.
the target is AZIMUTH (so much). The for-
ward observer announces the grid azimuth to his 1-9.1. Artillery Firing Battery Terms
adjusting point as DIRECTION (so much). a. Battery Center. The battery center is a point
f. Back-Azimuth. A back-azimuth is the re- materialized on the ground at the geometric center
verse direction of an azimuth. The back-azimuth of the howitzer (gun) sections. It is the point which
is equal to the azimuth plus or minus 3,200 mils, is plotted on the firing charts to represent the
whichever gives a result between 0 and 6,400 location of the battery.
mils.
b. Base Piece. The base piece normally is the
g. Grid-Magnetic Angle. The grid-magnetic piece with the shooting strength closest to the
angle is the smaller angle between grid north
average shooting strength of the battery. It is
and magnetic north. It is measured east or west
placed on or near the battery center and normally
from grid north and is the grid azimuth of mag- is used for registrations.
netic north. This angle is shown in the marginal
data of military maps. c. Gun-Target Line. The gun-target line is an
h. Magnetic Variation. Magnetic variation is imaginary straight line from the gun to the target.
the smaller angle between true north and mag- Line of fire and direction of fire are familiar
netic north. This angle is measured as east or
west of true north and is indicated in the marginal expressions in the artillery vocabulary which are
data of maps. Since the magnetic variation sometimes used as synonyms for the gun-target
changes slightly from year to year, a correction line. However, direction of fire is most often used
factor (the annual magnetic change) also is shown when the battery is laid with the tubes pointed
in the marginal data of military maps. toward the center of the zone of fire.
i. Grid Convergence. Grid convergence is the d. Orienting Line. An orienting line is a line of
smaller angle between true north and grid north. known direction established on the ground near

1-3
.Cl, FM 6-40

the firing battery to serve as a basis for laying for prominent and easily located point on the terrain
direction. The azimuth of the orienting line is and is used for orientation. This may be used as a
stated as the direction from the orienting station distant aiming point or as an alternate aiming
to a designated end of the orienting line. The end point.
of the orienting line may be marked by any h. Deflection. Deflection is the horizontal,
sharply defined point, such as a steeple, flagpole, clockwise angle measured from the line of fire, or
or stake. the rearward extension of the line of fire, to the line
e. Orienting Station. An orienting station is a of sight to a designated aiming point, with the
point on the orienting line near the gun position vertex at the instrument.
over which the aiming circle is emplaced when i. Refer. To refer is to measure the deflection to
orienting the battery. a given point without moving the tube of the
f. Orienting Angle. An orienting angle is the weapon or the orientation (0 to 3200)line of the
horizontal clockwise angle from the line of fire to instrument. The command REFER means to
the orienting line. measure and to report the deflection. If the
deflection is to be recorded, the command,
g. Reference Point. A reference point is a RECORD REFERRED DEFLECTION, is given.

1-4
 C1, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 2
FUNDAMENTALS OF FIELD ARTILLERY GUNNERY

Section I. ELEMENTS OF FIRING DATA

2-1. General 2-5. Distribution of Bursts
a. The data required to lay (point) an artil- Distribution of bursts is the pattern of bursts in
lery cannon so that the projectile, when fired, will the target area. Normally, all pieces of a battery
burst at the desired location are called firing fire with the same deflection, fuze setting, and
data. These data are based on the direction, hori- quadrant elevation. When firing units occupy
zontal range, vertical interval, and meteorological terrain rather than geometric formations, it may
conditions from the weapons to the target and on be necessary to adjust the pattern of bursts. This is
the desired pattern of bursts at the target. done by computing and applying individual piece
b. The principal unit of angular measurment corrections (terrain gun position corrections; see
in field artillery is the mil. A mil is the angle FM 6-40-5). Also, since targets may be of various
subtended by an arc which is 1/6400 of the cir- shapes and sizes, it is sometimes desirable to
cumference of a circle. adjust the pattern of bursts to the shape and size of
the target (see chapter 23).
2-2. Direction
Direction is expressed as a horizontal angle mea- 2-5.1. Sheaf
sured from a fixed reference. The field artillery The term "sheaf' is used to denote the lateral
normally uses grid north (the direction of the distribution of the bursts of two or more pieces
north-south grid lines on a military map) for the fired together. The width of the sheaf is the lateral
fixed reference and measures the angle clockwise distance (perpendicular to the direction of fire)
from grid north. When pieces are emplaced, they between the centers of the flank bursts. The front
are laid for direction, and the direction in which covered by any sheaf is the width of the sheaf plus
they are laid is used as a basis for angular shifts the effective width of one burst. A sheaf may be
to point the pieces at the target. The direction to formed in any one of the following patterns:
the target may be computed, determined graphi- a. Parallel Sheaf. A parallel sheaf is one in
cally or estimated. which the trajectories of all pieces are parallel (fig
2-1).
2-3. Range
Range is the horizontal distance from the gun to
the target and is expressed in meters. Range may
be computed, measured graphically, or estimated.
The range achieved by a projectile is a function of
the charge (muzzle velocity) and the vertical
angle (elevation) to which the tube is raised. (For
other factors affecting range, see paragraph 2-9).

2-4. Vertical Interval

Vertical interval is the difference in altitude be-
tween the battery or observation post and the
target or point of burst. The altitudes are deter-
mined from a map, by surveys, or by a shift
from a known point.

Figure 2-1. Parallelsheaf

2-1
 C1, FM 6-40

b. Converged Sheaf. A converged sheaf is one d. Standard Sheaf A standard sheaf is the
in which the horizontal and vertical planes of the sheaf used in the computation of terrain gun
trajectories intersect at the target (fig 2-2). position corrections (table 2-1.1 and fig 2-3.1).
c. Open Sheaf. An open sheaf is one in which e. Special Sheaf. A special sheaf is any sheaf
the lateral distance between the center of two other than the one of those described in a through
adjacent bursts is equal to the maximum effective d above.
width of one burst (table 2-1 and fig 2-3).

U Figure2-3. Open sheaf.

N Figure 2-2. Converged sheaf.

I Figure 2-3.1. Standard sheaf.

2-2
 C1, FM 6-40
a Table 2-1. Open Sheafs
Width (in meters) of Front (in meters) covered
open sheaf by an open sheaf
2-piece 4-piece 6-piece 2-piece 4-piece 6-piece
Caliber battery battery battery battery hattery battery

105-mm 30 90 150 60 120 180

155- mm 50 150 250 100 200 300

175- rnm 95 285 190 380

8-inch 80 240 160 320 -

Il Table 2-1.1. Standard Sheafs

Width (in meters) of Front (in meters) covered
standard sheaf by a standard sheaf
2-- piece 4---piece 6-piece 2--piece 4--piece 6-piece
Caliber battery battery battery battery battery battery

105-mm 20 60 100 50 90 130

155-mm 40 120 200 90 170 250

175-mm 60 180 155 275 --

8--inch 60 180 140 260 --

Section II. INTERIOR BALLISTICS

2-6. General propellant develop pressure sufficient to overcome
Interior ballistics is the science which deals with initial bore resistance, the projectile begins to
the factors affecting the motion of projectiles be- move.
fore they leave the muzzle of the piece. The total b. The gas pressure builds up quickly to a peak
effect of all interior ballistic factors determines and gradually subsides shortly after the pro-
the velocity with which the projectile leaves the jectile begins to move. The peak pressure, toget-
muzzle. This velocity is called the muzzle velocity her with the travel of the projectile in the bore
and is expressed in meters per second. Actual mea-
surements of the muzzle velocity of a series of
rounds, corrected for nonstandard conditions, de-
pict the performance of a certain weapon-
ammunition combination. The variation from
standard can be obtained by comparison of the
results of these measurements with the standard a Undesirable pressure- travel curve
velocities listed in the firing table for the charge (initial excessive pressure )
fired. Application of corrections to compensate
for nonstandard muzzle velocity is one of the most
important elements in the preparation of accurate
firing data.

2-7. Nature of Propellants and Projectile

b. Undesirable pressure- travel curve
Movement (delayed excessive pressure)
a. A propellant is a low-order explosive which
burns rather than detonates. In artillery cannons
using separate-loading ammunition, the propel-
lant is burned in a chamber consisting of the
powder chamber and the base of the projectile;
in cannons using fixed and semifixed ammuni-
tion, the propellant is burned in a chamber con-
sisting of the shell case and the base of the pro- c. Desirable pressure- travel curve.
jectile. When the gases generated by the burning Figure 2-4. Pressure-travelcurves.

2-3
 FM 6-40

pressure-travel curve), determines the speed at have an identical influence on the performance of
which the projectile leaves the tube (fig 2-4). both lots. This assumption, although accurate
c. Various factors which affect the velocity enough for firing tests, is not entirely correct and
performance of a weapon-ammunition combina- allows a certain amount of error in propellant
tion are given in (1) through (5) below. assessment procedures. (Assessment procedures
(1) An increase in the rate of burning of a include correcting charge weights for the tested
propellant increases gas pressure. lot to match the velocity developed by the con-
(2) An increase in the size of the powder trol lot during the test.) Therefore, a wide varia-
chamber without a corresponding increase in the tion in the performance of ammunition under
amount of propellant decreases gas pressure. field conditions can be expected even though
(3) Gas escaping around the projectile in quality control over manufacture is exercised.
the tube decreases pressure. For example, if a cannon develops a muzzle velo-
(4) An increase in bore resistance to pro- city 3.0 meters per second faster (or slower)
jectile movement before peak pressure further in- than another weapon with the same charge lot,
creases pressure. it will not necessarily do the same with any other
(5) An increase in bore resistance at any charge of any other lot. However, weapon-
time has a dragging effect on the projectile and ammunition performance is not so unstable that
decreases velocity. Temporary variations in bore the prediction of future performance based on past
resistance are caused by extraneous deposits in results should not be attempted.
the tube and on the projectile and by differences
in heat between the inner and outer surfaces of
2-9. Factors Causing Nonstandard Muzzle
the tube.
Velocity
2-8. Standard Muzzle Velocity In gunnery techniques, nonstandard velocity is
a. Appropriate firing tables give the standard expressed as a variation (plus or minus so many
value of muzzle velocity for each charge. These
meters per second) from an accepted standard.
standard values are based on an assumed standard
Round-to-round corrections for dispersion can-
tube. The standard values are points of depar-
not be made. In the discussion in a through p
ture, not absolute standards, since they cannot be
below, each factor is treated as a single entity,
reproduced in a given instance; that is, a specific
assuming no influence from related factors.
weapon-ammunition combination cannot be se-
lected with the knowldege that it will result in a a. Velocity Trends. Not all rounds of a series
standard muzzle velocity when fired. fired from the same weapon using the same am-
b. Charge velocities are established indirectly munition lot will develop the same muzzle velo-
by the military characteristics of a weapon. Can- city. The variations in muzzle velocity follow a
nons capable of high-angle fire (howitzers) re- normal probability distribution about the average
quire a greater choice in number of charges than muzzle velocity. This phenomenon is called velo-
do cannons primarily capable of low-angle fire city dispersion. Under most conditions, the first
(guns). This greater choice is needed in order few rounds follow a somewhat regular pattern
to achieve range overlap between charges in high- rather than the random pattern associated wth
angle fire and to achieve the desired range- normal dispersion. This phenomenon is called
trajectory combination in low-angle fire. Other velocity trend. The magnitude and extent (num-
factors considered in establishing charge velo- ber of rounds) of velocity trends vary with the
cities are the maximum range specified for the cannon, the charge and tube condition at round 1
weapon and the maximum elevation and charge of the series, and firings preceding the series.
(with resulting maximum pressure) which the Velocity trends cannot be accurately predicted;
weapon can accommodate. therefore, any attempt to correct for the effect of
a velocity trend is impractical. Characteristic
c. Manufacturing specifications for ammuni- velocity trends for some weapons, however, can be
tion include the required velocity performance detected. Figure 2-5 shows a comparison of vel-
within certain tolerances. The ammunition lots ocity trends for a 105mm howitzer when a series
are subjected to firing tests which include mea- of rounds is fired starting with an oily tube, a
suring the performance of the lots tested against
series is fired starting with a tube that has been
the concurrent performance of a control or refer- cleaned with rags only, and a series is fired start-
ence lot. Both the control lot and the lot being ing with a tube that has been cleaned with soap
tested are fired through the same tube, the as- and water. Generally, the magnitude and dura-
sumption being that the characteristics of the tube tion of velocity trends can be minimized when

2-4
 Cl, FM 6-40

PART TWO
FIRING BATTERY
CHAPTER 3
(Superseded by FM 6-50, THE FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTERY)

FIRING BATTERY PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 4
Sections I, II, III, and V
(Superseded by FM 6-50, THE FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTERY)

Section IV. FIRE COMMANDS AND THEIR EXECUTION

4-1. General
a. Fire commands are the means by which the NUMBER PRONOUNCED AS
FDC gives the cannon section all of the
information it needs to start, conduct, and cease 0 Ze-ro
firing. The initial fire commands include all 1 Wun
elements necessary for laying, loading, and firing 2 Too
the pieces. Subsequent fire commands include 3 Tree
only those elements that are changed, with the4Fow-er
exception of quadrant elevation, which is always
announced. 5 Fife
6 Six
b. Normally, fire commands come from the fire 7 Sev-en
direction center. The FDC receives fire missions 8 Alt
from a forward observer, from a supported unit, or
from the FDC of another headquarters and 9 Nin-er
converts this mission information into fire 44 Fow-er fow-er
commands. The fire commands are sent to the 80 Ait ze-ro
cannon sections by the best available means of 100.7 Wun ze-ro ze-ro point sev-en
communications. 136 Wun tree six

c. Since numbers make up a large portion of all 500 Fife huin-dred

commands received or given in the firing battery, 1478 Wun Fow-er Sev-en ait
they must be announced in a clear, precise 3200 Tree too hun-dred
manner, with snap - like a command - and in a 7000 Sev-en tou-sand
voice loud enough to be properly understood. six _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _
.16,000_ _ __ _
N um bers are pronounced as follow s:

4-1
 Cl, FM 6-40
4-2. Sequence of Fire Commands
a. Fire commands are announced to a firing SEQUENCE WHEN ANNOUNCED
battery in the following sequence: Initial Subsequent
Element fire fire
commands commands
SEQUENCE WHEN ANNOUNCED
5. Ammunition When When
Initial Subsequent lot * other than changed
Element fire fire standard
commands commands
6. Charge Always When
1. Warning Always Never changed
order
7. Fuze/fuze When When
2. Pieces to Always When setting* other than changed
follow/ applicable standard
pieces to
fire/* 8. Direction Always When
method of changed
fire*
9. Quadrant Always Always
3. Special When When elevation
instructions applicable applicable
10. Method When When
* Do not of fire applicable changed
load for effect
" At my
command
" By piece at b. Fire commands are given to the field artillery
battery in a prescribed sequence to:
my command
(1) Save time. Issuing fire commands in the
* High angle proper sequence allows time for the commands to
be announced as rapidly as they can be
* Use gunner's understood and complied with by the personnel of
quadrant the firing battery and also prevents the omission
* Azimuth of an element of data. A prescribed sequence
allows several operations to be executed
" Special simultaneously. For example, the battery is first
corrections alerted and then the data pertaining to
ammunition are given followed by the deflection
* Primary (left and quadrant elevation. This sequence allows the
right) sector
ammunition to be prepared for loading while the
* Cancel terrain piece is being laid for direction and quadrant
corrections elevation.
(2) Eliminate errors. Each member of the
4. Projectile* When other When cannon section must know the meaning of each
than standard changed
element of the fire command and the sequence in
which the elements are announced. Each
*These elements may be designated as standard.
crewman can then distinguish the numerical
Elements so designated will be announced only portion of one element from that of another
when something other than standard is to be fired. element and can be on the alert for the element(s)
See FM 6-40-5 for a discussion of fire command pertaining to his duties.
standards.

4-2
 Cl, FM 6-40

c. The chief of section is not permitted to fire his that prohibits the loading and firing of the
weapon until he has received a complete set of weapon(s). The section cuts the charge, sets the
commands. Explanations and examples of all fuze setter, and lays the weapon on the given
elements of the fire commands are presented in deflection and quadrant elevation or applicable
paragraphs 4-3 through 4-17. Some of the elements loading elevation, but does not load the round into
listed are used only under special circumstances the weapon. When these tasks have been
and are not announced when they do not apply. completed, the chief of section reports NUMBER
(so-and-so) IS LAID. When the round(s) is to be
fired the FDC commands CANCEL DO NOT
4-3. Warning Order
LOAD and gives the appropriate quadrant
A warning order of FIRE MISSION will be elevation.
announced to the guns as a fire mission is received
by the battery. This will alert the crews to stand by b. A T MY COMMAND (or B Y PIECE A T MY
their posts and be ready to receive data. COMMAND) is a restrictive command that
prohibits the battery (section) from firing until
4-4. Pieces to Follow/Pieces to Fire/ directed to do so by the FDC. The sections lay and
Method of Fire
load their weapons and the chiefs of section report
This element designates the weapons to follow to FDC, NUMBER (so-and-so) IS READY. The
the mission and actually take part in firing. FDC will tell the section chief(s) when to fire. To
a. Pieces to follow/pieces to fire alert the return control of firing to the section chiefs, the
battery as to which sections will fire on the target, FDC announces - CANCEL AT MY COMMAND
either initially or after an adjustment has been (BY PIECE AT MY COMMAND) and gives the
made. This command also tells the battery which appropriate quadrant elevation.
sections should follow the commands and load if c. HIGHANGLE is announced to alert the crew
appropriate. BATTERY ADJUST indicates that that the mission is to be fired at an angle of
fire will be adjusted onto the target and that the elevation over 800 mils. Light artillery weapons
entire battery should follow the commands and can be elevated before loading to expedite the
fire on the target after the adjustment has been mission; medium and heavy artillery weapons
completed. The method of adjustment and rounds must be loaded at a loading elevation.
to be fired in effect are announced in later d. USE GUNNER'S QUADRANT is
elements. Any weapon or combination of weapons announced whenever FDC desires that the
may be announced in this element, e.g., LEFT gunner's quadrant be used.
ADJUST, NUMBER 3 ADJUST. BATTERY (so e. AZIMUTH, followed by an azimuth in mils,
many) ROUNDS indicates that a fire for effect may be sent to the guns to alert them to a large
mission (no adjustment) is to be fired. Any shift in azimuth.
combination of weapons may be announced here f. SPECIAL CORRECTIONS is announced
also. any time that a separate time, deflection, and/or
b. Method of fire tells the battery how many quadrant will be sent to one or more gun sections.
rounds are to be fired during the adjustment and g. PRIMARY (LEFT) (RIGHT) SECTOR is
in what manner. This portion may be announced when terrain gun position corrections
standardized; e.g., the base piece fires one round. are being used. Ordinarily, the corrections for the
If a weapon other than the designated standard is primary sector are set on the gunner's aids of all
to be fired, this information must be announced at the weapons in the battery. These corrections are
this time. BATTERY ADJUST, NUMBER 4 ONE announced administratively. To change sectors,
ROUND indicates that the battery is to follow the FDC commands LEFT SECTOR or RIGHT
commands and fire after the adjustment is SECTOR. Upon termination of the mission, the
completed and that number 4 is the adjusting howitzer sections reapply the corrections that
piece for this particular mission. Special methods were in effect prior to the mission.
of fire used in unusual circumstances are h. CANCEL TERRAIN CORRECTIONS
discussed in paragraph 4-13. indicates that all howitzer sections are to set their
4-5. Special Instructions gunners aid counters to zero. After completion of
Special instructions are used whenever actions the mission, the terrain gun position corrections
different from normal are required. They include: that were in effect prior to the mission will be
a. DO NOT LOAD is a restrictive command reapplied unless the FDC indicates otherwise.

4-3
 Cl, FM 6-40

4-6. Projectile adopted by the firing battery as local SOP. These

The type of projectile that will be used to attack a procedures often impact on the FDC and, hence,
target is announced in the initial commands require FDC personnel to be knowledgeable in
unless it has been designated as standard. The handling these situations. Three of the more
projectile is not announced in the subsequent prominent of these alternatives are:
command unless a change is desired. Loading on the command DEFLECTION (so
4-7. Ammunition Lot much).
a. The element ammunition lot indicates the lot Adjusting piece(s) loading subsequent rounds
number to be fired. The lot number is announced immediately after firing.
in the initial fire commands unless a specific lot Nonadjusting pieces loading the shell to be fired
has been designated standard. The lot number is in effect upon receipt of initial fire commands.
not repeated in subsequent commands unless a
change is desired. THE DECISION TO USE THESE
b. The lot numbers for semifixed ammunition TECHNIQUES IS MADE BY THE
pertain to an assembled projectile-propellant COMMANDER, AND IS INFLUENCED
combination and, for simplicity, are coded lot X, BY THE STATE OF TRAINING OF
lot Y, etc. The lot numbers for a specific projectile- THE FDC AND GUN CREWS.
propellant combination of components of
separate-loading ammunition are combined. For a. Loading on deflection. This procedure is
example, in the command LOTXY, X indicates the especially effective for those units where loading
projectile lot and Y indicates the propellant lot. will not interfere with receipt of the remaining fire
c. Large-quantity lots are set aside to be fired commands. For self-propelled units, adoption of
during registrations, and missions when more this procedure may require that the FDC pause
uniform effect is important. Small-quantity lots momentarily between the commands for
should be used for adjust fire and other missions deflection and quadrant. In any case, the FDC
when uniform effect is not critical. The sections must insure that there are no long delays between
must segregate ammunition by lot number and the commands deflection and quadrant so that
maintain accurate records of the number of rounds are not loaded and left in the tube for an
rounds on hand, by lot number. extended period of time.
b. Adjusting piece(s) load subsequent rounds
4-8. Charge immediately after firing. Using this SOP, it is
The element charge indicates the amount of possible, when entering FFE, that the adjusting
propellant to be used. As soon as the charge is piece(s) may not have the correct, shell/fuze
announced, all powder increments for the round combination loaded. The chief of section will at
being fired are inspected and excess increments the end of the mission, (as always), report if his
are removed. piece fired other than the ammunition announced
4-9. Fuze/Fuze Setting in the fire command. In the example, NUMBER 4
The type of fuze to be used is announced in the FIRED 1 QUICK AND 2 VT IN EFFECT*, the
initial fire commands only when it is other than FDC will correct the ammunition count on the
the designated standard. It is announced as a Record of Fire to reflect the report.
subsequent command only when a change is
desired. When VT or time fuzes are fired, this *Rather than 3 VT.
element includes the fuze setting; e.g., FUZE VT,
59.0. c. Nonadjusting pieces load the shell to be
4-10. Direction fired in effect upon receipt of the initial fire
Direction is always announced as a four-digit commands. This SOP is particularly valuable
deflection; e.g., DEFLECTION 3248. The gunner when the FFE fuze is fuze quick and is obviously
sets the commanded deflection on his panoramic not applicable to mechanical time fuzes. When the
telescope and traverses the tube until he is sighted FFE fuze is fuze VT, the FDC calculates and sends
to the nonadjusting pieces the VT fuze setting to
on the proper aiming point.
the initial target location. If terrain, weather, and
4-1 1. Quadrant Elevation enemy capabilities allow it, an alternative
The command QUADRANT (so much) is procedure is to use the VT minimum safe time.
permission for the chief of section to load and fire 4-12. Method of Fire for Effect
the round unless otherwise restricted by special This element indicates the number of rounds, and
instructions. Alternative procedures may be type of ammunition to be used in effect, when

4-4
 Cl, FM 6-40

applicable. It is announced after the quadrant in designated piece or pieces fire under the control of
adjust fire missions so as not to delay the firing of the chief(s) of section as the situation and target
initial data. For example, if the initial commands necessitate.
include BATTERY ADJUST, the method of fire 4-14. Check Firing/Cease Loading
for effect might be 2 ROUNDS IN EFFECT. a. The command CHECK FIRING is normally
4-13. Special Methods of Fire given by the FDC but may be given by anyone
a. ZONE FIRE. This method of fire is used present. On this command, regardless of its
when the standard sheaf does not adequately source, firing will cease immediately. The signal
cover the target and more depth is required. The for CHECK FIRING is to raise the hand in front of
number of mils in the zone and the number of the forehead, palm to the front, and swing the
quadrants to be fired will be announced by the hand and forearm up and down in front of the face.
FDC. For example, upon receipt of the command Another signal for CHECK FIRING is one long
ZONE 5 MILS, 5 QUADRANTS, each chief of blast on a whistle. Firing is resumed at the
section computes the required quadrants and then announcement of CANCEL CHECK FIRING and
fires them after the initial quadrant announced in the quadrant elevation.
the fire command. If in this example, the b. The command CEASE LOADING is similar
announced quadrant is 310, it would be fired first; to CHECK FIRING. Upon receipt of this
the remaining quadrants would be 320, 315, 305, command, the cannoneers may fire the weapons
and 300, fired in any order. that are already loaded, but no additional rounds
b. SWEEPING FIRE. This method of fire is may be chambered. Firing is resumed at the
similar to zone fire but provides for firing several announcement of CANCEL CEASE LOADING
deflections with one quadrant. For example, and the quadrant elevation.
SWEEP 10 MILS, 3 DEFLECTIONS. As in zone 4-15. End of Mission
fire, each chief of section computes the required The command END OF MISSION means that
deflections and fires them after the initial the fire mission has been completed. All
deflection has been fired. For example, if, the corrections applied to the fire control equipment
announced deflection is 3220, it would be fired for that mission are to be removed. Primary
first; the remaining deflections would be 3230 and terrain gun position corrections are to remain on
3210 and would be fired in any order. the gunners aid counters unless commanded
c. ZONE AND SWEEP. This method of fire otherwise by the fire direction center. If a priority
combines zone fire and sweeping fire. The chief of target has been assigned, each gun will lay on the
section will first fire the announced deflection and firing data for its assigned target.
quadrant and then fire all combinations of the Note. The assigned targets may not always be
computed deflections and quadrants. For located in the primary sector so the applicable
example, SWEEP 10 MILS, 3 DEFLECTIONS, position corrections (primary, left, right) must be
ZONE 4, MILS, 3 QUADRANTS. If the applied to the gunners aid prior to setting off and
announced deflection is 3200 and the announced laying on the assigned target data.
quadrant, 310, the three deflections to be fired 4-16. Repetition of Commands
would be 3200, 3210, and 3190 and the three a. Voice Communications. Chiefs of section
quadrants to be fired would be 310, 306, and 314. repeat the commands FIRE, CHECK FIRING,
Each quadrant would be fired with each deflection and CEASE LOADING. Any other fire
(total of nine rounds). Deflection 3200 and commands are repeated only when requested or
quadrant 310 would be fired first. when they obviously have not been heard or
d. CONTINUOUS FIRE. When it is desired to understood. The request for repetition is stated as
fire continuously at a target, the command is a question; e.g., DEFLECTION NUMBER (so-
CONTINUOUS FIRE. At this command, the and-so)?
crews load and fire as rapidly as possible, b. Intrabattery Communications. When radio
consistent with accuracy and within the or wire communications are used between the
prescribed rates of fire for the pieces. The crews FDC and the individual gun sections, the
continue to fire until commanded to CHECK readback of elements of the fire commands is
FIRING or CEASE LOADING. governed by unit SOP. One piece should be
e. FIRE A T WILL. If the method of fire is for designated to read back all fire commands. If the
pieces to fire at will, the command is TARGET (so- howitzer loudspeakers are not working, the person
and-so), FIRE AT WILL. If a method of close designated by the chief of section to operate the
defense has been prearranged, the command is radio or telephone must announce each element of
simply FIRE AT WILL. At this command, the the fire command to the section.

4-5
 Cl, FM 6-40

c. FDC. The repetition of commands by the that affect the firing of his weapon in support of
FDC is always preceded by THE COMMAND the battery mission. In the conduct of firing the
WAS; e.g., THE COMMAND WAS DEFLEC- following specific reports are made:
TION 2768. a. SHOT NUMBER (so-and-so) after each
4-17. Planned Targets round of a fire mission has been fired. ]If a round or
a. At times the battery will be assigned planned fuze other than the one announced by the FDC is
targets which must be fired quickly. One of these fired, it must be reported to the FDC.
will be designated by the FDC as the priority b. ROUNDS COMPLETE NUMBER (so-and-
target, and each weapon will be laid on its so) when the final round of fire for effect (other
assigned priority target when not actively than one round) has been fired.
engaged in a mission. Appropriate ammunition
c. MISFIRE NUMBER (so-and-so) when there
will be kept on hand and personnel at the piece will
has been a misfire. The chief of section reports
begin firing the weapon as soon as a command is
NUMBER (so-and-so) IS READY when the piece
received. is ready to fire.
b. One common type of priority target is the
d. NUMBER (so-and-so) IS 0UT (reason) when
final protective fire (FPF). To order the FPF to be
a piece has been called out of action.
fired, the command FIRE THE FPF or a
e. Number of rounds expended, by type and lot
prearranged signal is given.
number (when required).
c. In offensive operations, suppressive fires are
f. Errors. Chiefs of section must tell the FDC if
frequently delivered by the artillery battery. Some
any round has been fired with improper data. The
of these may be planned fires; if so, each section
executive officer has the error(s) corrected and
maintains firing data on these targets as directed
reports to the FDC, e.g., NUMBER 2 FIRED 20
by the FDC. These targets are recorded at the
MILS RIGHT.
section as follows:

PRIORITY TARGETS
TGT SP
NO. INST RDS SH LOT CHG FZ TI DF QE
43 -- 2 HE XY 6 0 - 3210 402
54 2 HE XY 6 VT 29.0 3190 418
1 57 --" 4 1SMK TY 6 TI 131.0 3182 432
I
In this case the sections in the platoon would lay 4-19. Correcting Fire Commands
on target 43. The command from FDC to fire would a. If an incorrect command has been given but
be (so-and-so) SUPPRESS, followed by the target the command QUADRANT has not been
number; e.g., RIGHT SUPPRESS, 43. If target 54 announced, the FDC commands CORRECTION
or 57 are to be fired, the command would be and then gives the correct command and all
RIGHT SUPPRESS 54 which means the platoon subsequent elements.
would re-lay and fire the data for target 54. b. If QUADRANT has been announced, the
4-18. Reports FDC commands CHECK FIRING. Then
The section chief reports to the FDC all actions CANCEL CHECK FIRING, is announced
followed by the proper element and all subsequent
elements.

CHAPTER 5
FIRING BATTERY OPERATIONS AND TRAINING
(Superseded by FM 6-50, THE FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTERY)

CHAPTER 6
DUTIES OF THE SAFETY OFFICER
(Superseded by FM 6-50, THE FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON BATTERY)

4-6 (next numbered page is 7-1) 0

 Cl, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 8
LOCATION OF TARGETS

8-1. General gets, or bursts in order to determine basic data

The most accurate means available are employed and to adjust artillery fire effectively. Distances
in locating targets and determining initial data in can be determined by estimation or by computa-
order to insure the safety of friendly troops, to save tion.
ammunition, to save time in adjustment, and to a. Estimation of Distance. The observer can
increase the effectiveness of fire. Full use is made facilitate estimation of distance by establishing
of data from all previous firing in the area and of a yardstick on the ground in the target area.
maps, photographs, diagrams, or panoramic This yardstick can be established by ranging
sketches of the area. The preparatory operations rounds that are 400 meters apart in range. The
discussed in chapter 7 are desirable and rangng rounds may be fired by a single piece or
necessary; however, failure to complete them on by a platoon. The observer can also establish a
occupation of an observation post will not known distance in the target area by determining
preclude the observer from calling for fire as soon from his map or photograph the distance be-
as he locates a target. Firing often begins before tween two points that he can identify positively
the preparatory phase is completed, whether the both on the map and on the ground. The observer
firing be precision fire in which fire is placed on a can estimate the approximate distance from his
specific point, or area fire in which a given area is position to a sound source (e.g., bursting shell,
I covered with fire. In area fire, the observer weapon firing, etc.) by timing sound. The speed
*conducts the fire mission by using a standard of sound in still air at 59' F. is approximately
sequence and procedure as follows: 340 meters per second. Wind and variations in
a. He locates the target. temperature alter this speed somewhat. For pra-
b. He makes the call for fire to the FDC. ctical use, the observer may assume the speed of
c. He adjusts fire, if necessary.
sound to be 350 meters per second under all con-
d. He conducts surveillance of fire for effect.
ditions. He can time the sound with a watch or
8-2. Target Location
by counting from the time a burst or flash ap-
a. Methods. There are threemethods by which
the observer can designate the locations of targets pears until he hears the sound. For example, the
so that FDC personnel may plot them on their observer counts "one-thousand one, one-thousand
charts: two" (and so on), to determine the approximate
(1) By grid coordinates (para 8-5). time in seconds. He then multiplies the time in
(2) By shift from a known point (para 8-6). seconds by 350 to obtain the approximate dis-
(3) By polar coordinates (para 8-7). tance in meters.
b. Accuracies and Announcement of Data. All Example: The observer desires to determine
data for target locations in calls for fire and the approximate distance from his position to
subsequent corrections are determined to an
a burst. He begins counting when the burst ap-
accuracy consistent with the equipment used for pears and stops counting when he hears the sound.
determination. The observer will normally
He counts 4 seconds; therefore, the distance from
announce his data as follows:
(1) Direction to the nearest 10 mils. the burst to his position is approximately 1,400
(2) Deviation to the nearest 10 meters. meters (350 x 4).
(3) Vertical change to the nearest 5 meters. b. Computation of Distance. Using the angle
(4) Range to the nearest 100 meters. measured from one point to another and the
(5) Grid coordinates to the nearest 100 meters. known lateral distance between the two points,
8-3. Determination of Distance the observer may compute the distance by ap-
The observer must be able to determine quickly plying the mil relation. The mil relation is based
and accurately the distance between objects, tar- on the assumption that an angle of 1 mi will

8-1
Cl, FM 6-40

subtend a width of 1 meter at a distance of 8-5. Target Location by Grid Coordinates

1,000 meters. The relation is expressed as if a. Auxil'ary map data greatly simplfies the
R- where #i is the angular measurement in r determination of accurate gr'd coordinates of a
R nils
target. When the observer sees a target that is
between the two points, R is the distance in located where it cannot be plotted by rapid in-
thousands of meters (expressed to the neairest spect'on, he must first determine the grid azimuth
100) to the known point, and W is the width in to the target. He determnes the azimuth by
meters between the points from which angle using any of the methods described in paragraph
was measured (fig 8-1). 7-5.
Example: An observer measures an angle o)f 5 b. After the observer has determined his loca-
mils between the ends of a flat car that is 16 tion and the azimuth to the target, he refers to
meters long. He determines the distance fitom the corresponding line of direction on the map (or
his position to the flat car by substituting in the observed fire fan). He selects the point on this line
W 16 that best describes the target location. He may
relation R = (R 3.2). The distanc locate this point by comparing map features with
3,200 meters. ground features or by estimating the distance
from his position to the target. In figure 8-3, the
observer has measured an azimuth of 680 mils
to a target that is located on a small hill an
(W) estimated distance of 3,000 meters from the ob-
server's location. He has pinpointed the target
on the map by plotting a distance equivalent to
approximately 3,000 meters along a ray corres-
ponding to an azimuth of 680 mils on the ob-
served fire fan. A study of the contour lines aids
Frw the observer in locating the target more accur-
Figure 8-1. The mu relation. ately.

8-4. Measurement of Angles

An observer usually uses some angle-measuring
device, such as field glasses, an aiming circle, or
a battery commander's periscope (BC scope), to
measure angles. When instruments are not avail-
able, he can measure angles by using the hand
and finger held at a fixed distance from the eye.
Before he goes to the field, he must determine
the specific angles subtended by the hand in vari-
ous attitudes and must record and memorize
them for rapid use (fig 8-2).

\jo / <1

Figure 8-3. Use of observed fire fan to assist in

70~ reading coordinates.
( LJ

c. After the observer has located the target on

the map, he marks the location and determines the
grid coordinates by estimation or by use of the
coordinate scale. Generally, estimation is
Figure 8-2. Examples of measuring angles sufficiently accurate. However, there may be
with the hand. occasions when 8-place accuracy is desired (e.g.,

8-2
 Cl, FM 6-40

registration point). When properly used, the and FI)C personnel must know their locations
coordinate scale enables the observer to measure aId designations. Registration points, promin-
both easting (E) and northing (N) coordinates ent terrain features, and previously fired targets
with one placement of the scale. To measure the '11,0 COMnm9uly used as known po;nts. To locate a
coordinates of a target, the observer first target by a shift from a known point, the observer
determines the grid coordinates of the lower left must determine the observer-target (OT) direction,
corner of the grid square containing the target. a horizontal shift, and a vertical shift.
Starting at this grid intersection, he slides the
coordinate scale in coincidence with the E-W grid
line, until the target is reached by the vertical a. Obseruer-Target direction. Normally, the
scale. ie then reads the distance east and the observer determines the observer-target direction
distance north from the scale (fig 8-4) and adds by measuring the angular deviation from a
these readings to the coordinates of the target. For reference point to the target and applying the
example, the grid coordinates of the target shown measured deviation to the direction from his
in figure 8-4 are 53152175. position to the reference point. The measured
deviation is added if the target is to the right of the
reference point and subtracted if the target is to
the left of the reference point. Observer-target
direction may also be measured with a properly
declinated magnetic instrument.

b. Horizontal Shift. The horizontal shift from a

known point to the target consists of a lateral shift
in meters and a range shift in meters. The lateral
shift is the distance from the known point to the
OT line along a perpendicular dropped from the
known point. The range shift is the distance from
the intersection of the perpendicular with the OT
line to the target. The shifts are plotted in the FDC
on a target grid oriented on the OT direction. The
method used by the observer to compute the
horizontal shift depends on the size of the angular
deviation measured from the known point to the
target.

Figure - . ('se, of coordinate scale.

(1) Deviation of less than 600 mils. When
d. He may determine grid coordinates by the angular deviation from a known point to the
relating the target location to one of several target is less than 600 mils, the observer uses
ground features marked on the map. This system the mil relation (para 8-3b) in computing the
should be used with extreme care, especially in lateral shift. He determines the shift in range by
deceptive terrain, unless the location is such as to comparing the distance from his position to the
preclude error (e.g., road junction, building, known point with the distance from his position
bridge, etc.). He can make a rapid check of the to the target.
accuracy of the coordinates by use of the contour
lines of the map. If the altitude determined from Example: An observer measures the angu-
the target plot shows marked disagreement with lar deviation from registration point 1 to the
the actual ground conformation, the plot should be target as right 250 mils. He knows the distance
verified. to registration point 1 to be 3,200 meters and
8-6. Target Location by Shift from a estimates the distance to the target to be 3,700
Known Point meters (fig 8-5). He determines the lateral shift
In order to locate a ttrget 1,v :. shift from a by substituting in the relation W = R7#i (W
known point, F!l(' personnel irtist have the lo- = 3.2 x 250, or right 800 meters). The range
ciition of the known point plotted on their charts. shift is add 500 (3700 - 3200 = 500 meters).
Eitlier the observer or the S3 may select point,-, The observer announces the shift as RIGHT 800,
for use as known points, iut both the observer ADD 500.

8-3
Cl, FM 6-40

The formula for use of the sine factor is F -

W
D)where F is the sine factor for the angular
deviation rA (value taken to the nearest 100 mils),
Add 500
D is the distance to the known point (hypotenuse),
Reg ptI and W is the width of the side opposite the angle
800 ,. Note that D, or distance, is not reduced to
units of thousands of meters when sine factors
are used. The sine factors are as follows:
OT=3,700 meters
Angle Sine
Note: OT' distance is assum- in mile factor
ed to equal observer-reg pt 100 .. 0.1
I distance. 200 _... ____.. 0.2
300 0.3
400 ____0.4
5 00 ---------
----------------
-------. 0.5
6 00 ---
--------------
------------------------------. 0 .6
7 00 ------------------------------ --------0 .6
--------
8 00 -------------------- -------0 .7
9 00 ------------------------------------
-----------0 .8
1000 0.8
1100 0.9
1200 0.9
1300 1.0
1400 _- -1.0
1500 ------------------------------------- 1.0
1600 -1.0

Observer
Figure 8-5. Computation of lateral and range shifts.
(2) Devtation of 600 mils or greater.When the The observer computes the lateral shift by sub-
angular deviation from a known point to the stituting in the relation W = F x D, where F
target is 600 mils or greater, the mil relation is not is the sine factor of the angular deviation from
suitable for computing the lateral shift. If the a known point to the target and D is the dis-
target cannot be located by grid coordinates or tance (to the nearest 100 meters) to the known
polar plot, a trigonometric function must be used point. To determine the range shift, the observer
for determining the horizontal shift. A must first determine the distance from his posi-
trigonometric function is the ratio between two tion to the point at which a perpendicular from
sides of a right triangle. One of these the known point to the OT line strikes the OT
trigonometric functions is the sine (sin). In figure line (T'). He accomplishes this by substituting
8-6, the sine angle A is the length of the side
again in the relation W = F x D, where, this
opposite angle A divided by the length of the
time, F is the sine factor of the angle comple-
hypotenuse.
mentary to the angular deviation and D is,
again, the distance from the observer to the
known point. He determines the range shift by
Side Hypotenuse
comparing the OT' distance with the OT dis-
opposite tance.
Example: An observer measures the angu-
lar deviation from registration point 1 to the
target as left 700 mils. The distance from the
observer to registration point 1 is 2,500 meters,
and the estimated distance from the observer to
Right Angle A
ongle
the target is 3,100 meters (fig 8-7). The lateral
(1,600 mils) adjacent shift, or W, = 0.6 (sine factor for 700 mils)
side opposite x2500, or left 1500. OT', or W, =- 0.8 (sine
Sine of angle A =ihpote
hypotenuse factor for 900 mils) x 2500 = 2,000 meters. The
Figure 8-6. Sine function. range shift is ADD 1100 (meters).

8-4
 Cl, FM 6-40

c. Vertical Shift. When the shift from normally estimated; however, it may be com-
a known point method is used, a vertical shift puted if an angle-measuring instrument (M2
must be announced if there is an obvious differ- compass, aiming circle, or BC scope) is avail-
ence in the altitude of the known point and able. The following procedure is used for com-
the altitude of the target. The vertical shift is puting a vertical shift: The observer measures
the vertical angle to the known point. Knowing
the distance from his observation post to the
known point and using the mil relation, the ob-
server determines the vertical interval, or the
amount in meters by which the known point is
above or below his observation post. He then
computes the vertical interval between his OP
and the target. By comparing the known point
vertical interval, with the target vertical inter-
val, he determines the vertical shift (up or down)
from his known point to the target.
Example: An observer measures a vertical
angle of minus 10 mils from the OP to a target (fig
8-8). The distance to the target is 2,500 meters. The
distance and the vertical angle from the OP to the
known point are 2000 meters and minus 20 mils,
respectively. In the relation W = R$, W represents
the vertical interval to the target (known point), rA
represents the measured angle in mils to the target
(known point), and R represents the distance to
the target (known point) in thousands of meters.
Therefore, W = -10 x 2.5 = -25 meters vertical
interval between the OP and the target and W = -20
x 2.0 = -40 meters vertical interval between the OP
and the known point. A comparison of results
Figure 8-7. Computation of lateraland range shifts by shows the target to be 15 meters above the known
use of sine factor. point. Thus, the vertical shift would be announced
as UP 15.

2,500 meters

OP2000 meters - - Horizontal

. I0 Mils
,40meters 2mtr

REG P
(Sketch isnot to scale)
Vertical interval, OP-REG PT=-20x2.0=-40meters
Vertical interval, OP-target=-lO x 2.5=- 25 meters
Vertical shift = UPIS

I Figurc 8-8. D,known

termination of di~erence
point and target. in heights of

8-5
C1, FM 6-40

8-7. Target Location by Polar Coordinates the target. This vertical angle is measured from
(Polar Plot) the horizontal plane through the observer's lo-
Polar coordinates consist of the direction anc cation to the target. Substituting this measured
distance from the observer to the target, and, ii vertical angle for 7i1and the estimated distance
there is an obvious difference in altitude be. to the target for R in the mil relation, the ob-
tween the observer's location and the target, e server computes the vertical shift.
vertical shift. The observer's location must b( Example: The observer measures the vertical
plotted on the charts at the FDC if the polai
angle to the target as +20 mils. The estimated
coordinate method is to be used. The principa
distance to the target from the observation post
advantage of the polar coordinates method is thE is 2,000 meters. According to the mil relation,
rapidity with which the observer can determinE 20 = W, W = 40 meters. The observer would
the target location. If the direction is correct
2.0
and accurate corrections are applied to firing report the polar coordinates of the target as fol-
data, the first round(s) fired should fall on or lows: DIRECTION 1000, DISTANCE 2000, UP
close to the line that passes through the observa- 40.
tion post and the target (OT line). Subsequent
corrections are then easier to determine. As in 8-8. Marking Rounds
the grid coordinate method, the observer mea- Poor visibility, unreliable maps, deceptive ter-
sures or computes the direction and estimates rain, or rapid movement through unfamiliar ter-
the distance to the target. In figure 8-9, rain sometimes makes it difficult, if not im-
possible, for the observer to orient himself. The
observer may call for a marking round(s) to
Lone tree be fired on a registration point, a previously
Dir 1270 fired target, or a prominent terrain feature (e.g.,
MARK REGISTRATION POINT OR MARK
HILL 437). As a last resort, the observer may call
00 I - for a round(s) to be fired into the center of the
Mochine target area (e.g., MARK CENTER OF SEC-
TOR). The observer usually calls for a type of
2 70 projectile that is easily identifiable, such as white
/ ,I phosphorus, or for a high airburst. The FDC
/
prepares data that will place the round(s) at the
/
7- -C point of impact or point of burst requested by the
observer. If the observer fails to see the round(s),
the FDC prepares new data that will move the
next round(s) to a different point of impact or
that will raise the burst higher in the air. This
procedure is continued until the observer posi-
tively identifies the round(s). He then orders a
shift from the point of impact (burst) of the
Figure 8-9. Polarcoordinates (polar plot).
identified round(s) to a target or an object that
is permanent or semipermanent in nature, such
the direction and distance to the target would as a tree, a road junction, a barn, or the ruins
be reported to the FDC as DIRECTION 1000,
of a building. Once this point has been located by
DISTANCE 1400. A vertical shift must be made
adjustment of fire and has been plotted at the
if there is an obvious difference in altitude be-
tween the observer's location and the target. The FDC, the observer may use it as a known point
observer, using a BC scope, an aiming circle, or from which shifts may be made to subsequent
an M2 compass, measures the vertical angle to targets.

CHAPTER 9

CALLS FOR FIRE

(Superseded by FM 6-40-5, MODERN BATTLEFIELD CANNON GUNNERY)

8-6 (next numbered page is 10-1)

 C1, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 10
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE BY GROUND OBSERVER

Section 1. GENERAL

10-1. When to Adjust a. Shell HE, Airburst, Fuze Time or Fuze VT.
When the observer cannot locate the target with A fuze time or fuze VT airburst is characterized
sufficient accuracy to warrant firing for effect, by a flash, a sharp explosion, and a puff of black
he will conduct an adjustment. Lack of accuracy smoke that becomes elongated along the tra-
in the location may be the result of poor visibil- jectory. The effect of fragments on the terrain
ity, deceptive terrain, poor maps, or difficulty on may be seen below the burst if the burst is not too
the part of the observer in pinpointing the tar- high and soil conditions are favorable.
get. If, in his opinion, fire for effect can be de- b. Shell, HE, Fuze Delay, Ricochet. A ricochet
livered on the basis of the target location and burst is a low airburst characterized by a flash,
surprise is desired, he will request FIRE FOR a sharp explosion, and a ball of smoke (usually
EFFECT (FFE) in his call for fire. If registra- black). Dirt is kicked up by the shell fragments
tion has not been accomplished recently, the fire from the side and base spray. Burst appearance
direction officer may direct that an adjustment be depends on the nature and condition of the soil
conducted, regardless of the accuracy of the target and the attitude of the projectile as it bursts.
location. Normally, one gun is used in adjustment. The characteristic flash, black smoke, and sharp
Special situations where more than one gun is explosion of an airburst are indications of an
used are so noted throughout the text. effective ricochet burst.
c. Shell HE, Fuze Quick. A burst resulting
10-2. Adjusting Point from a fuze quick detonation is characterized by
The observer must select a point upon which to
black smoke, discolored by dirt, which spreads
adjust (adjusting point). In precision fire, the
both upward and outward. If the impact occurs
adjusting point is the target. In area fire, the
on a hard surface, such as a rock, a flash may
adjusting point should be a well-defined point
near the center of the area occupied by the tar- also appear. Fuze quick fired into a wooded area
will sometimes result in an airburst caused by
get (fig 10-1).
the projectile striking the trees and detonating
before it reaches the ground.
d. Shell HE, Fuze Delay, Mine Action. A mine
action burst is characterized by the eruption of
a vertical column of earth, often with clods of
earth. There is very little smoke, and the explo-
sion is muffled.
e. HC Smoke, Fuze Time. Functioning of an
HC smoke shell with fuze time is characterized by
a small burst in the air, produced by the expelling
charge, which ejects the smoke canisters from the
base of the shell. As the canisters fall to the
ground, they emit smoke in thin streams. The
smoke streams travel an appreciable distance and
Figure 10-1. Adjusting point in area fire. then billow out.
f. Shell WP, Fuze Quick. A fuze quick WP shell
10-3. Appearance of Bursts
The observer must be able to identify the type burst is characterized by a fountain of brilliant
of shell and fuze used from the appearance of the white smoke and burning phosphorus. Small par-
burst(s). Descriptions of the types of shells and ticles of phosphorus are spread upward and out-
fuzes with which an observer normally will be ward as a pillar of smoke forms and rises.,
m concerned are given in a through g below; how- g. Improved Conventional Munitions
ever, the sizes of the bursts will vary in accord- (ICM). Functioning of an ICM shell with fuze
ance with the caliber of the weapon. time is characterized by a small burst high in the

10-1
 Cl, FM 6-40

air produced by the expelling charge which ejects trate the ground. As the angle of impact in-
bomblets from the base of the shell. These creases the tendency to penetrate increases.
bomblets spread out as they fall, distributing their When the projectile penetrates the ground, the
lethality over a large area rather than burst will produce either a crater or a camou-
concentrating it in a limited area of wasted flet, depending on the depth of the burst, type of
overkill. Small airbursts, near ground level, soil, and force of detonation. If the penetration
appear as each bomblet detonates. is very great, the burst may produce a camou-
10-4. Fuze Selection for High-Explosive flet; that is, a hole will be formed underground,
Projectiles but the surface of the ground will remain un-
I The effect obtained with an HE projectile depends cratered.
on the fuze action. (3) When penetration occurs and the shell
a. Fuze VT. A VT fuze is a radio-activated is in the earth at the instant of detonation, frag-
fuze that detonates the projectile automatically mentation effect above the ground is very small.
at a predetermined height above the earth's sur- Penetration into a bunker or dugout will produce
face. Therefore, a height-of-burst adjustment is casualties by blast effect and fragmentation.
not required. There is a point detonating back- Penetration into a structure built of logs, sand-
up mechanism in case of failure of the radio bags, or similar materials results in the blowing
activation. During the adjustment, fuze quick apart of constituent units. The effectiveness de-
normally is employed to obtain greater speed pends on the amount of high-explosive filler in
and to facilitate observer spottings. Fuze VT is the penetrating projectile. Use of concrete-
suitable for use against- piercing (CP) fuze increases the depth of pene-
(1) Personnel in the open. tration and the angle at which penetration may
(2) Personnel in entrenchments (low-angle be obtained against reinforced concrete or heavy
fire only). masonry targets.
(3) Area targets when neutralization is de- (4) Ricochet fire should be used only against
sired. personnel in shallow foxholes or shallow trench-
b. Fuze Time. A time fuze detonates the pro- es. The effect obtained with ricochet fire against
jectile on operation of a preset time mechanism these targets is somewhat better than the effect
or on impact. The height of burst is controlled obtained with VT or time fuze because of the
by the observer. Since the observer must adjust lower height of burst and the nose-up attitude of
the height of burst, use of this fuze is more the projectile. The lowered height of burst re-
time consuming than use of fuze VT. However, duces the effect obtained against deeply *en-
with fuze time the observer may obtain any trenched targets. In order for a given number of
height of burst desired. Fuze time is ineffective rounds fired with fuze delay to be as effective as
in high-angle fire, because of the large height- the same number of rounds fired with fuze quick
of-burst probable error involved in the long time against troops prone in the open, 50 percent of
of flight. Fuze time is suitable for use against the the rounds fired with fuze delay must produce
same types of targets as those against which ricochet action. Therefore, ricochet fire is not
fuze VT is used, within the limits imposed by used against troops in the open. Factors which de-
the vertical probable error of the fuze. termine whether a projectile will ricochet cannot
c. Fuze Delay. When delay action of the fuze be evaluated for a particular point of impact until
is used, the projectile has time after impact and the bursts are spotted. Ricochet fire must be ob-
before detonation either to penetrate and pro-
served. Another type of fuze must be used if rico-
duce mine action or to ricochet and produce a
chet action cannot be expected from at least 50 V
low airburst. Fuze delay is used with shell HE
percent of the rounds fired in fire for effect.
for destruction missions that require penetra-
d. Fuze Quick. Quick (superquick) fuze action
tion and for ricochet fire. bursts the projectile immediately on impact.
(1) Factors which determine whether a Ease of spotting a fuze quick burst, together
shell will ricochet are the angle of impact; shape, with the fact that no height-of-burst adjustment
weight, and terminal velocity of projectile; the
is necessary, makes possible a rapid adjustment.
use of fuze delay; and the condition of the sur- Fuze quick is suitable for use against--
face of the ground, including the composition of
(1) Personnel standing in the open (very
the soil. effective in high-angle fire).
(2) When the angle of impact is small, the
(2) Personnel in sparsely wooded terrain
projectile tends to ricochet rather than to pene- where tree bursts give the effect of low airbursts.

10-2
 Cl, FM 6-40

(3) Materiel when penetration of the ma- (1) A round may be lost for various reasons: it
terial is not required for producing damage. may be a dud, resulting in no visual or audible
(4) Armored vehicles when the concussion identification; the terrain may prevent the
effect of heavy artillery is sufficient for produc- observer from sighting the round or its smoke; the
ing damage. weather may also prevent the observer from
e. Combined Fuze Action in Fire for Effect. hearing or seeing it; the FO may simply have
When the target is such that more than one type failed to spot the round; and finally, errors by the
of fuze action will add to the effectiveness of fire observers, FDC, or the firing piece may cause the
for effect, the observer will include the fuzes de- round to be lost.
sired in the call for fire or in subsequent correc- (2) When dealing with a lost round, the FO
tions. must consider his own experience, the level of
FDC/gun training, and the location of friendly
10-5. Spottings
Determination by the observer of the location of a elements with respect to the target. The observer
burst or group of bursts with respect to the should take corrective action based on his
adjusting point as observed along the OT line is confidence in the target location, the accuracy of
fire on previous missions, whether the lost round
called a spotting. Spottings are made for range,
is an initial round or a subsequent round, and the
deviation, and height of burst. Spottings must be
made by the observer at the instant the burst urgency of the mission.
(1) When a round is lost, positive action must
occurs except when it is necessary to delay a
be taken. The observer can initiate a number of
spotting to take advantage of drifting smoke or
corrective procedures, such as one or more of the
dust.
following:
a. The observer should be required to announce
(a) Initiate a data check throughout the
his spottings during his early training. As an
system starting with his target location data and
observer gains experience, spottings need not be
his call for fire.
announced.
(b) Request a 200 meter air burst on the next
b. Under certain conditions the observer may
round.
be able to make a spotting even though he is
(c) Repeat.
unable to see the burst. For example, if the
(d) End the mission and initiate a new
observer hears but does not see a burst and the
mission.
only possible place where the burst could occur
(e) Make a bold shift. The observer should
and not be visible to the observer is in a ravine
exercise caution before making a bold range or
beyond the adjusting point, then he should
deviation change when the target plots in the
assume that the burst is beyond the adjusting
vicinity of friendly troops.
point.
c. If visibility is temporarily impaired (e.g., FO 10-6. Corrections
had to take cover from incoming enemy fire or The observer causes the mean point of impact or
target area visibility obstructed by smoke, dirt, burst to be placed on, or sufficiently close to, the
etc.), or if the observer is unable to obtain an target by making appropriate corrections during
accurate spotting (e.g., when FO cannot determine the adjustment. From his spottings, the observer
which burst among several is his), he reports
UNOBSERVED, REPEAT.
d. If the observer is unable to identify the burst,
the round is spotted as lost.
determines deviation and range corrections in
meters; he announces these corrections to the FDC
using the sequence of subsequent corrections as
shown in section V.
I
10-3
 Cl, FM 6-40

Section II. ADJUSTMENT OF DEVIATION

10-7. Deviation Spottings c. The deviation correction is expressed to the

a. Deviation is the lateral distance from the nearest 10 meters and is announced to the FDC
burst center to the OT line. A deviation spotting is as LEFT (RIGHT) (so much). The direction of
the angular amount and direction of the deviation. the correction is always opposite the direction
During the conduct of fires, the observer of the spotting.
measures, in mils, the angular deviation from the
OT line to the center of each burst or group of d. When the angle between the OT line and the
U bursts (fig 10-2). gun target (GT) line (angle T) is 500 mils or
greater, the fire direction center will notify the
observer of this fact after the first SHOT is given
-N 4z Target (fig 10-3).

Torget

Observer

Adjusting
Piece

Figure 10-2. Deviuation.

b. A burst, or the center of a group of bursts,

may be on the OT line, or it may be right or left of
the OT line. A deviation spotting is determined as
LINE or (so much) RIGHT (LEFT). For example,
the observer sees a burst and measures the
angular deviation as 20 mils to the right of the OT
line. His deviation spotting in this instance is 20 Gun
RIGHT. position
Observer
10-8. Deviation Corrections
a. A deviation correction is the distance in
meters perpendicular to the OT required to move a Figure 10-3. Angle T.
subsequent group of bursts to the OT line. In the
I adjustment phase on an area mission, minor When the angle T is large, the observer should
deviations (20 meters or less) should be ignored. consider the range dispersion of the weapon when
b. The observer computes a deviation correc- determining corrections. What the observer sees
tion by multiplying the deviation spotting by as deviation may be due, wholly or partly, to range
the OT factor. The OT factor is the OT distance dispersion, which cannot be corrected by
in thousands of meters. If the OT distance is 1,000 deviation corrections. In figure 10-4 the two
meters or greater, the OT factor is expressed to rounds shown were fired at the same deflection
the nearest thousand. If the OT distance is less and quadrant elevation. The difference in
locations of the bursts is due to range dispersion
than 1,000 meters, the OT factor is expressed to
along the GT line. As viewed by observer 1, from
the nearest hundred. The following are examples
whose location the angle T is relatively small,
of computations of deviation corrections:
there appears to be little difference in the amount
OT OT Deviation
diatance factor Spotting correction of deviation correction needed to bring the bursts
3600 4 40 RIGHT ---- LEFT 160. to the OT line. However, as viewed by observer 2,
3400 3 50 LEFT - RIGHT 150. the second burst appears to be twice as far from
800 0.8 40 LEFT . RIGHT 30. the OT line as the first burst.

10-4
 C1, FM 6-40

e. The observer must exercise caution in mak-

ing deviation corrections in the direction of
friendly troops who are close to the target.

Observer I Observer 2

Adjusting piece

Figure 10-4. The effect of angle T when Iieuing

range dispersion.

Section III. ADJUSTMENT OF RANGE

10-9. General 10-10. Range Spottings

A technique for the adjustment of range is to a. Definite range spottings are required for
establish a bracket along the OT line (fig 10-5). A making a proper range adjustment. Any range
bracket is established when one round falls over spotting other than LOST (UNOBSERVED) is
the adjusting point and one round falls short of the definite.
adjusting point. The observer establishes the (1) A burst or group of bursts on the OT line
bracket early in the adjustment and then normally gives a definite range spotting. Figure
successively decreases the size of the bracket until 10-6 is a guide showing approximate areas for the U
it is appropriate to enter fire for effect. See FM 6-40- various spottings.
5 for other techniques used in the adjustment of
Direction of
fire. OT line

First Round

Bracket
a rget
Doubtful Doubtful

Second Round

) Figure 10-6. Range spottings.

(2) The observer may make a definite range

spotting when the burst(s) is not on the OT
line by using his knowledge of the terrain, drift-
ing smoke, shadows, and wind. However, even
Observer experienced observers must exercise caution and
good judgment when making such spottings.
Figure 10-5. Establishing a bracket for range. (3) Spottings of airbursts for range are based

10-5
C1, FM 6-40

on the locations of the burst fragmentation pat- subsequent range changes. For example, if' the
terns on the ground. observer adds 8()() after an initial range spotting of
b. Possible range spottings are as follows: SHORT, and the second range spotting is OVER,
(1) Over. A burst(s) that appears beyond but the bursts are much closer t.( the adjusting
the adjusting point is spotted OVER. point then the initial rounds, a range change of
(2) Short. A burst (s) that appears between I)ROP 200 would be appropriate,
the observer and the adjusting point is spotted d. When the observer requests an adjustment
SHORT. on a target close to friendly troops, he makes range
(3) Target. An impact burst that hits the corrections toward fIriendly elements in
target is spotted TARGET. This spotting is used increments that he considers safe. He does not
oWY iv precision fire. necessarily attempt to) bracket the target with any
(1) Ratigec(,rrect. A burst or center ofa group successive corrections. As his c(orrectiorns bring
oft bursts that is at the proper range is spotted the bursts closer to the target, definite range
RANGE (ORRECT. spottings ('an be easily made. Making small, safe
(5) I)ou /u!. A burst that, can be observed shifts rather than establishing the normal bracket
but can not, be determined as over, short, target, or may result in a greater expenditure of ammunition
range ('orrect is spotted I)OUBTFI1 and time but may be necessary to insure safety (fig
10-1 1. Successive Bracketing 10-7). An adjustment made in this manner is
The hasty bracket technique is preferred, but referred to as cref)itlg and should be used
when using the successive bracketing technique, exclusively during I)ANGER CI,)SE missions.
the observer should make a range correction that
can be expected to result in a range spotting in the
opposite direction, e.g., if the first definite range
spotting is SHORT, the observer should add Trajectory
of first round
enough to obtain an OVER on the next round or
group of rounds.
b. Once a bracket has been established, it is Trajectory as a
result of drop 400
successivelv decreased, normally by splitting,
until it is appropriate to enter fire for effect. Fire Target
for effect is normally asked for in area fire when a
400 meters
I 0()-meter )racket is split or when fire on the target
is observed. Figure 10-7. Need for crecpmlg u'licti closc to,
c. The procedures in a and b above are not to be lyt roops.
/i'
considered inflexible. The observer must use his
knowledge of the terrain, knowledge gained from 10-11.1. Hasty Bracket
previous firing and general experience, and good See FM 6-40-5 for hasty bracketing and other
judgment in determining the size of the initial and techniques used in adjustment of' fire.

Section IV. ADJUSTMENT OF HEIGHT OF BURST

10-12. General deviation shifts. The proper height of burst for

In firing fuze time in area fire, the observer fire for effect is normally 20 meters above the
must adjust the height of burst, The observer target. Any time two bursts are widely separ-
conducts the adjustment of deviation and range ated in height, the observer must report this fact
with fuze quick and then, upon splitting the ap- to the FDC. When fuze delay is being used for
propriate range bracket, normally 100 meters, or r icochet fire, no correction for height of burst can
obtaining a range correct spotting, begins the be made. When VT fuze is used, only malfunc-
adjustment of height of burst. Normally, further tions and graze bursts are reported
corrections to deviation and range are not re-
10-13. Height-of-Burst Spottings
quired. The observer spots height of lurst and Height-of-burst spottings for fuze time are as fol-
determines the corrections to the nearest 5 meters lows:
to raise or lower the bursts to the desired height. a. A ir. A round or group of rounds bursting
He announces the correction as UP (DOWN) (so in the air is spotted AIR.
much). He computes height-of-burst shifts by b. Graze. A round or group of rounds burst-
using the mil relation in the same manner as for ing on impact is spotted GRAZE.

10-6
 Cl, FM 6-40

c. Mixed. A group of rounds resulting in an observer applies UP 20 and enters fire for effect.
equal number of air-bursts and graze bursts is (4) The observer must report widely separ-
spotted MIXED. ated bursts to the FDC and, in most cases, give
d. Mixed Air. A group of rounds resulting in a repeat command; e.g., REPEAT, 100-METER
both airbursts and graze bursts is spotted MIXED HEIGHT-OF-BURST SPREAD; 60-METER
AIR when the majority of the bursts are air- MEAN HEIGIT OF BURST.
bursts. c. The observer determines the height of burst
e. Mixed Graze. A group of rounds resulting by measuring the vertical deviation in mils be-
in both airbursts and graze bursts is spotted tween the target and the burst or the center of
MIXED GRAZE when the majority of the bursts the group of bursts and then multiplying the
are graze bursts. vertical deviation by the OT factor. He com-
putes the correction by comparing the height of
10-14. Height of Burst Adjustment burst thus determined with the desired height of

I
a. The adjustment of time fuze (with 2 guns) is
burst.
begun with the objective of obtairiing a 20-meter
height of burst. Fire for effect is entered only when Example: The OT factor is 3. The observer
a correct height of burst (20 meters) is assured. measures the vertical deviation from the target
to the burst as plus 20 mils. Therefore, the height
b. During the adjustment of time fuze with
of burst is 60 meters above the target (W = R
two pieces, there are three possible height-of-
x i, = 3 x 20). The correction is DOWN 40,
burst spottings-AIR, GRAZE, or MIXED. Rules
FFE (the desired height of burst is 20 meters
for height-of-burst adjustment are as follows:
and the 60 meters is 40 meters above the desired
(1) When the initial rounds are AIR, the height of burst).
observer adjusts to a 20-meter height of burst 10-15. Fuze Delay
and enters fire for effect. However, if very high When fuze delay is employed for ricochet action,
airbursts are obtained and the observer is not no adjustment of height of burst is possible. The
sure that the next correction will produce a 20- observer notes the number of airbursts and graze
meter height of burst, a correction to height of

I
bursts. If 50 percent or more of the rounds that
burst without entering fire for effect is appropri- establish the appropriate range bracket result in
ate (judgment and experience are the governing airburst, the observer enters fire for effect with
factors). fuze delay. If more than 50 percent of the rounds
result in graze bursts, the observer requests VT or
(2) When the initial rounds are GRAZE, the QUICK, whichever is more appropriate, in fire for
observer applies UP 40 and continues the effect.
adjustment. A 40-meter height-of-burst correction
will be applied until spottings of AIR or MIXED 10-16. Fuze VT
are obtained and then the rule in (1) above or (3) No adjustment of height of burst is possible with
below applies. fuze VT. Burst height is controlled by the
(3) When the initial rounds are MIXED, the mechanism within the fuze.

Section V. SUBSEQUENT CORRECTIONS'

10-17. General (4) Method of fire

a. After the initial burst(s) appears, the ob- (5) Distribution
server transmits subsequent corrections until the (6) Projectile
mission is completed. These corrections include (7) Fuze
appropriate changes in elements previously trans- (8) Volume
mitted and the necessary corrections for devia- (9) Deviation
tion, range, and height of burst. Elements that (10) Range
may require correcting and the order in which (11) Height of Burst
corrections are announced are as follows: (12) Control
(13) Splash
(1) Observer-target direction

I (2) Danger close

(3) Trajectory
b. Any element for which a change or correc-
tion is not desired is omitted.

10-7
 Cl, FM 6-40

10-18. Change in Observer-Target Direction to pieces firing in order from left to right, the
A change in observer-target direction is given observer requests PLATOON LEFT. He may
when it deviates from the announced direction by request this change to take advantage of the wind
100 mils or greater. For example, an observer when smoke shells are being fired or to clarify
begins an adjustment on several self-propelled spottings when one burst is obscuring another. He
guns, using a tree at direction 5620 as the cancels PLATOON LEFT by announcing.
adjusting point. During the adjustment, the self- CANCEL PLATOON LEFT.
propelled guns move to a new position an
appreciable distance from the adjusting point. 10-22. Change in Distribution
The observer selects a new adjusting point in the If the observer desires a sheaf other than parallel,
vicinity of the target and measures direction 5840 he must specify the type desired; e.g., CON-
to that point. The first element of his next VERGE (OPEN), SHEAF 100 METERS. If the
correction is DIRECTION 5840. observer wishes to change to a parallel sheaf
10-19. Danger Close during adjustment or fire for effect, he requests
It may become necessary for an observer to adjust CANCEL CONVERGE (OPEN), SHEAF 100
artillery fire close to friendly troops. If artillery METERS.
fires come within 600 meters of friendly troops, the
observer must transmit DANGER CLOSE to the 10-23. Chanqe in Proiectile
FDC to inform them of this fact. This will alert the When the observer desires to change the type of
FDC to have the gun sections use their gunners projectile, he announces the desired change; e.g.,
quadrants in setting quadrant elevations on the WP or HC.
guns. The observer will have to adjust the entire
battery, rather than just one gun, when firing 10-24. Change in Fuze
Danger Close. The observer should make range When the observer desires to change the type of
changes by creeping the rounds to the target fuze or fuze action, he announces the desired
rather than making large range corrections, thus change; e.g., VT or DELAY.
insuring greater protection for friendly troops. If
the adjustment of fire moves the rounds more than
600 meters from friendly troops, the observer 10-25. Change in Volume
transmits CANCEL DANGER CLOSE. When the observer desires to change the volume of
10-20. Change in Trajectory fire, he announces the desired change; e.g., TWO
The observer requests a change in the trajectory ROUNDS or THREE ROUNDS.
during a low-angle adjustment when it becomes
apparent that high-angle fire will be necessary or 10-26. Correction for Deviation
during a high-angle adjustment when it becomes The observer transmits deviation corrections to
apparent that high-angle fire is no longer re- the nearest 10 meters as RIGHT (LEFT) (so much).
quired. For example, an observer is making an In area fire missions, deviation of 20 meters or less
adjustment on some moving armored personnel are ignored. See FM 6-40-5 for a discussion of
carriers. During the adjustment the carriers move deviation corrections in precision fire missions.
into a deep gully for cover. Knowing from pre- 10-27. Correction for Range
vious firing in the area that high-angle fire will The observer transmits range corrections as ADD
be necessary to bring effective fire into the gully, (DROP) (so much).
the observer requests HIGH ANGLE. Conver- a. ADD. ADD is used by the observer to move
sely, an observer is making a high-angle adjust- subsequent burst(s) away from the observer along
ment on a column of vehicles halted in a town or parallel to the OT line. If the burst(s) falls short V
along a street with tall buildings. During the of the target, the observer commands ADD (so
adjustment the vehicles move out toward the edge much).
of town. As soon as he notices the vehicles em- b. DROP. DROP is used by the observer to move
erging from the town, the observer should re- subsequent burst(s) toward the observer along or
quest CANCEL HIGH ANGLE to expedite the parallel to the OT line. If the burst(s) appears
firing. beyond the target, the observer commands DROP
(so much).
10-21o Change in Method of Fire 10-28. Correction for Height of Burst
The observer must announce any change he de- The observer transmits height-of-burst
sires in the method of fire. For example, in corrections to the nearest 5 meters as UP (DOWN)
order to change from pieces firing simultaneously (so much).

10-8
 Cl, FM 6-40

10-29. Change in Control which rounds to observe, he would request RE-

When the observer desires to change the method of PEAT or WP REPEAT.
control (other than AT MY COMMAND), he
announces the new method of control; e.g., FIRE b. REPEAT is also used by the observer to in-
FOR EFFECT. dicate that he wants fire for effect repeated with
* 10-30. Splash or without changes or corrections to any of the
If an observer is having difficulty identifying his elements; e.g., ADD 50, REPEAT.
rounds due to other fire missions being conducted
in the area, he may request assistance from the 10-32. Correction of Errors
FDC by requesting SPLASH. The FDC will If the observer discovers an error in the
inform the observer that his round is about to transmission or read-back of a subsequent
correction, he corrects the error as outlined in FM
impact by announcing SPLASH five seconds
prior to impact. The observer may terminate this
help by announcing CANCEL SPLASH.
6-40-5. 1
10-31. Repeating Previously Fired Data 10-33. Additional Information
a. REPEAT is used by the observer to indicate If the observer desires to transmit information
that he desires a subsequent round or group of necessary to the conduct of a mission and there
rounds fired with no corrections to deviation, is no specific format prescribed, he should trans-
range, or height of burst. For example, if sev- mit the information in clear, concise language
eral rounds burst in the area of observation simu- and in the sequence least likely to cause con-
ltaneously and the observer could not determine fusion and most likely to expedite the mission.

10-9
(10-10 Blank)
 Cl, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 11

FIRE.FOR EFFECT

U Section I. PRECISION FIRE

11-1 through 11-4. (Deleted)
(Superseded by FM 6-40-5, MODERN BATTLEFIELD CANNON GUNNERY)

USection 1I. AREA FIRE

11-5. General ricochet fire, fire for effect is entered with fuze
a. In area fire, the observer normally requests delay only if 50 percent or more of the bursts that
fire for effect at the conclusion of an adjustment. established the final range bracket were airbursts.
However, he may fire for effect when his target
location is accurate enough to preclude the need 11-7. Distribution
for adjustment. a. Normally, the FDO determines the proper
b. The type and volume of fire delivered in fire distribution of fire for a target. His decision is
for effect are determined by the FDO. His decision based on the observer's call for fire and other
is based on the observer's request, the description available information. Unless the FDO directs,
of the target, the effect sought, and the status of because of the nature and the size of the target, the
ammunition supply, and on other considerations. use of a sheaf other than that normally fired,
If fire for effect is ineffective or insufficient, the artillery fires are delivered at center range in a
necessary corrections are made and additional parallel sheaf (see d below). The FDO may also
fire for effect is requested. direct the battery or batteries to fire through
c. Upon completion of fire for effect, the different elevations for greater range coverage.
observer sends refinement data and END OF b. When appropriate, the observer may call for
MISSION. He reports the effect observed. a special sheaf. This should be announced in the
11-6. Fire for Effect After Adjustment call for fire when possible. It may be announced in
subsequent corrections if the sheaf being fired
a. Deviation. Deviation errors of 30 meters or
does not provide satisfactory distribution. In
more are corrected during the adjustment by the
making such a request, the observer announces
observer. Therefore, it should not be necessary to
the type of sheaf desired; e.g., OPEN or SHEAF, 50
make a large shift upon entering fire for effect.
b. Range. The adjustment of range is complete METERS.
when the observer has obtained a burst at the c. When the number of pieces allocated to the
same range as the adjusting point (range correct mission is not adequate to cover the target with an
or target hit) or when he has split the appropriate open sheaf, the observer may make successive
range bracket. When the target is fixed, of little shifts in fire for effect to insure coverage of the
depth, and clearly visible or when the fires of more target.
than one battery are massed on the target, it is d. When the unit has occupied by terrain, TGP
appropriate to split a 100-meter range bracket. corrections are fired based upon the appropriate
When the target is moving, is of substantial depth, standard sheaf for the caliber of weapon.
or is poorly defined, it may be appropriate to enter 11-8. Surveillance of Fire for Effect
fire for effect on splitting a 200-meter range The observer carefully observes the results of the
bracket. When the range probable error is 38 fire for effect and then takes whatever action is
meters or larger, the FDC will notify the observer necessary to complete the mission.
to enter fire for effect on splitting a 200-meter a. If the fire has been effective and sufficient,
lange bracket. the observer announces END OF MISSION and
c. Height of Burst. When time fuze is being reports the effect observed; for example, 20
used, fire for effect is not called for until the height CASUALTIES, INFANTRY DISPERSED. If the
of burst is correct or until a correction can be mean point of impact (mean point of burst) is not
expected to result in the correct height of burst directly on (20 meters above) the adjusting point,
(para 10-14). When fuze delay is being used for the observer will make a correction to improve the

11-1
 Cl, FM 6-40

accuracy of the replot of the target and end the d. If ricochet action with fuze delay was desired,
mission; e.g., LEFT 20, DOWN 5, immediately but was not obtained from at least 50 percent of the
followed by END OF MISSION rounds fired in fire for effect, and additional fire is
b. If the fire has been insufficient but accurate, needed, the observer must request a change to fuze
including an effective height of burst, the observer VT, time, or quick and repeat fire for effect. He
may request REPEAT to obtain additional fire. could also change to shell ICM.
c. If any element of the fire for effect (deviation, e. If the observer desires that the target be
range, or height of burst) was sufficiently in error replotted for future use, he announces the
that the effect sought was not obtained, the appropriate corrections (e.g., RIGHT 10,
observer should correct the element(s) in error and RECORD AS TARGET, END OF MISSION) and
continue fire for effect; for example, ADD 50, reports the effect observed.
DOWN 10, REPEAT.

11-2
 Cl, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 12
ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE BY THE AIR OBSERVER

Section I. INTRODUCTION

12-1. General threat air defense environment, see TC 6-40-6, The

Observation and adjustment of artillery fires Field Artillery Aerial Observer Team Operations.
may be accomplished from the air by use of or-
ganic Army aircraft or Air Force high-perform-
ance aircraft. An air observer normally is em- 12-3. Observation From High-Performance
ployed, since it is difficult for a pilot to navigate Aircraft
Use of high-performance aircraft provides obser-
and observe at the same time. However, the vation deep into enemy territory beyond the limits
pilot should be well trained in the adjustment of
of organic Army aircraft. The pilot and observer
fire, since such knowledge is invaluable in training
can fly over enemy territory to sufficient depth
a new air observer and enables the pilot to adjust to observe and adjust long-range artillery fire.
fire in the event an observer is not available. Usually two aircraft are used on a mission-one
12-2. Observation From Army Aircraft to adjust the fire and the other to observe for
a. Observation from organic Army aircraft- hostile aircraft. Danger from both hostile air
normally is limited to altitudes and locations that defense artillery and hostile planes usually in-
allow the aircraft to avoid enemy ground fire and creases as the duration of the flight and the
enemy fighter aircraft. depth into hostile territory increase. For this
l b. For a detailed discussion of employment and reason the air observer must minimize the time
operations of the air observer team in a high- required for an adjustment.

Section II. PREFLIGHT PREPARATIONS

12-4. General (3) The, surveillance required, the time of
The air observer and pilot should be given a pre- the mission, the type of adjustment to be made,
flight briefing by the intelligence officer (S2) and the maps and*photographs to be used, known
operations officer (S3). enemy air defense, flight instructions, and secu-
12-5. Preflight Briefing rity restrictions.
a. All pilots and observers flying a mission (4) The communication details, to include
should be briefed on all points pertinent to the the locations of ground radios and panel stations,
mission, including- the channels to be used, the call signs to be ured,
(1) The locations of battery position areas,
the check-in time(s), and prearranged signals.
registration points, confirmed targets, known
points, suspected targets, and areas to be search-
ed and the spotting lines to be used in making b. All important enemy locations, lines and
corrections (if the GT line is not used). areas discussed in the briefing are recorded on
(2) The tactical situation, to include the lo- appropriate maps. Photographs, oblique or verti-
cations of friendly troops, no-fire and fire sup- cal, are gridded when possible and the direction
port coordination lines and the zones of action of and locations of critical points, lines, and areas
supported troops. are marked on the photographs.

Section III. DETERMINATION OF INITIAL DATA

12-6. Call for Fire

The procedures used by the air observer are similar to those used by the ground observer. The call for fire
and subsequent corrections from an air observer are transmitted in the same manner as those from a
ground observer.

12-1
 C1, FM 6-40

I 12-7. Determination of the Spotting Line b. Other Line of Known Direction. The air
Since the aircraft is constantly moving, the observer may select as his spotting line a terrain
observer's perspective of the target (and hence his feature, such as a road, railroad, stream, or
OT line) will also change. In some cases it may be ridgeline, or a series of terrain features. The air
convenient for the aerial observer to establish a observer, either prior to or during flight, must
constant direction along which all corrections are make known to the FDC personnel the
made. This is called the spotting line. The FDC identification of the feature(s) so that they can
must know the correct spotting line in order to determine the direction established thereby. If the
accurately convert corrections to firing data for air observer can accurately visualize a cardinal
the guns. Examples of spotting lines are: compass direction on the ground, he may use the
a. Gun-Target Line. The air observer may cardinal direction as a spotting line.
select as his spotting line the gun-target line. If he
knows the location of the adjusting battery and 12-8. Location of Targets I
can identify that location while in flight, he can When a target is observed, its location is
visualize the gun-target line. If he does not know determined and transmitted to the FDC using:
the location of the adjusting battery, he can a. Grid coordinates.
request RANGING ROUNDS in his call for fire b. Shift from a known point and the spotting
(distribution of fire). In such a case, the FDC line. If no direction is sent, the shifts will be made
personnel will cause the adjusting battery to fire on the G-T line.
two rounds at the same deflection but 400 meters c. Prearranged code to fire on a previously
apart in range so that the air observer can coordinated target.
visualize the gun-target line. After the air observer 12-9. Determination of Distance
has determined the gun-target line, he should The observer can determine distance on the
select a terrain feature, such as a road, stream, or ground by requesting RANGING ROUNDS. The
ridgeline, that will assist him in remembering the 400-meter range spread obtained from ranging
direction of the gun-target line. If the spotting line rounds not only will allow accurate visualization
has not been prearranged with the FDC and the of the GT line (para 12-7a) but also will establish a
air observer does not indicate a spotting line in his yardstick for estimating subsequent range and
call for fire, the gun-target line will be used. deviation corrections.

Section IV. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES

12-10. General in the target area as a result of the illumination.

Adjustment procedures for the air observer are the Orientation may also be a problem, especially on
same as those for the ground observer except as very dark nights. However, effective fire can be
noted in paragraph 12-11. placed on the target by a well-trained observer.
a. Considerations for the selection of an c. The air observer may use AT MY
adjusting point are the same for both air and COMMAND during the adjustment so that the
ground observers. aircraft can be positioned for proper observation
b. The air observer can adjust artillery fire at of each group of rounds. The time of flight is
night by using standard procedures. However,
artificial illumination may be necessary to make
always sent to the observer immediately following I
the message to the observer to facilitate aircraft
the target area discernible. The illumination may orientation. A new time of flight will be
be accomplished by searchlight, illuminating announced when it changes more than 5 seconds
shells, or parachute flares. When parachute flares from that originally announced. A 5-second
are used, the flares should be released from an splash warning is transmitted from the FDC to
aircraft other than the observer's aircraft so that the observer for each group of rounds.
the observer will not be looking into the target 12-11. Adjustments
area directly past a burning flare. Night a. Adjustment of Deviation. The air observer
adjustment missions should be planned during determines deviation in meters, with respect to the
daylight hours. Plans should include a daylight spotting line, and announces corrections in
* recon of the proposed area of operation for the meters. In some instances, it may be faster and
selection of checkpoints and for general terrain more accurate to bracket the spotting line for
orientation. The air observer must consider the deviation than to attempt precise deviation
different shapes and shadows that will be formed corrections to the spotting line.

12-2
 Cl, FM 6-40

requested to adjust height of burst. The observer

b. Adjustment of Range. The air observer spots
can differentiate between air and graze bursts and
bursts for range with respect to the chosen
may be asked to observe TI or VT missions for that
spotting line and the target. Using the bracket specific purpose.
method of adjustment, he announces range 12-12. Fire for Effect
corrections in meters.
The air observer calls for fire for effect and
c. Adjustment of Height of Burst. The air
announces refinements during fire for effect in the
observer cannot readily determine differences in manner described for a ground observer.
height of burst, consequently, he seldom will be

12-3
(12-4 blank)
 Cl, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 13
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FOR SPECIAL SITUATIONS

Section I. CONDUCT OF FIRE WITH CHEMICAL PROJECTILES

13-1. Chemical Projectiles maintaining a smokescreen because the white

Chemical projectiles for cannon artillery consist phosphorus smoke rises rapidly. Since white
of HC smoke projectiles, white phosphorus (WP) phosphorus possesses incendiary and casualty-
projectiles, and gas projectiles. producing effects as well as smoke effect, the
proximity of friendly troops must be carefully
considered when it is used for screening. When
a. HC Smoke. HC (white) smoke is a base- white phosphorus is used against frame houses
ejection projectile that is fired with a time fuze. or other objects of flammable material, some fuz-
HC smoke is used primarily for screening against es should be set at delay to effect penetration
enemy observation; it produces no casualty ef- before bursting and thus increase the incendiary
fect. HC smoke may be used for signaling, for effect of the burning phosphorus particles. Cas-
marking a target for an airstrike, and for aid- ualties are caused by the small particles of phos-
ing an observer in locating his rounds under dif- phorus adhering to the clothing and skin, caus-
ficult observing conditions. ing painful burns.
b. White Phosphorus. White phosphorus is a c. Gas. The gas projectile is a burster-type
burster-type projectile that usually is fired with projectile that is fired with an impact fuze or
an impact fuze. In some cases wherein white phos- a time fuze, depending on the type of filler. Gases
phorus is used for aiding an observer in locating available are irritant agents and lethal agents.
his rounds under difficult observing conditions, it
is fired with a time fuze. White phosphorus is 13-2. Types of Missions
very effective in the initial buildup of a smoke-
screen, but it is not as effective as HC smoke in
(See FM 6-40-5 for a detailed discussion of the
types of smoke missions.) I
Section II. BATTLEFIELD ILLUMINATION
13-3. General 13-4. Conduct of Fire With Illuminating
The purpose of battlefield illumination is to pro- Projectile
vide friendly forces with light to assist them in a. Uses. Illuminating projectiles are used
night ground operations, offensive or defensive. for-
The artillery observer is concerned primarily (1) Illuminating areas of suspected enemy
with two means of illumination-illuminating movements.
projectiles and searchlights. When properly used,
night illumination increases the morale of friend- (2) Providing illumination for night adjust-
ment or surveillance of artillery fire by an air
Jy forces, facilitates operations, and harasses and
observer or a ground observer.
blinds the enemy. The artillery is responsible
for providing illumination with illuminating pro- (3) Harassing enemy positions or installa-
jectiles and searchlights. Any artillery observer tions.
may be called upon to conduct an illumination (4) Furnishing direction to friendly troops
mission. for attacks or patrol activities. (Illumination

13-1
 Cl, FM 6-40
flares must be placed well in advance of friendly N 5
troops to avoid illuminating the troops.)
(5) Guiding low-level tactical aircraft on
important targets within artillery range.
b. Ammunition. Table 13-1 gives some of the
factors to be considered in the employment of
artillery illuminating projectiles. Data are ap-
proximate and vary with nonstandard conditions.
c. Call for Fire. When the observer desires to (600 meters)
illuminate the battlefield using illuminating pro-
jectiles, he calls for fire, using the procedures
described in chapters 8 and 9. The method of
engagement element in the call for fire will re-
quire special consideration when determining
the--
(1) Type of projectile. Illuminating must be
specified.
(2) Type of fuze. Fuze time is used with
illuminating projectile. Therefore, this element
is omitted from the call for fire. Figure 13-1. Field Artillery Illumination-FourGuns.
(3) Distribution of fire. The size and shape
of the area to be illuminated, the OT distance, except that the adjustment is considered com-
conditions of visibility, and the candlepower of plete when the illumination is within 200 meters
the projectile influence the selection of the distri- of the desired location. Normally, deviation,
bution of fire. Distribution of fire is indicated as range, and height of burst are adjusted concur-
follows: rently. If the height of burst is drastically in
(a) One gun. One round from one gun. error, it may be necessary for the observer to
(b) Two guns. One round from each of adjust the height of burst before adjusting the
two guns firing simultaneously with the same other elements in order to have enough light to
data and at approximately the same point in the see the target.
air.
(2) The correct position of the flare relative
(c) Two guns, lateral spread. One round
from each of two guns firing simultaneously at to the adjusting point depends on the terrain
the same range but at different deflections. (For and the wind. Generally, the flare should be to
distances between bursts, see table 13-1.) All one flank of the adjusting point and at about the
spreads are made with respect to the GT line. same range. In a strong wind, the point of burst
must be some distance from the adjusting point
(d) Two guns, range spread. One round
from each of two guns firing simultaneously but because of the drift of the flare. If the target is
at different ranges along the GT line. (For dis- on a forward slope, the flare should be on the
tances between bursts, see table 13-1.) flank and at a slightly shorter range. If the ad-
(e) Fourguns. One round from each of four justing point is a prominent target, better visi-
guns firing simultaneously in a diamond pat- bility may be obtained by placing the flare be-
tern (fig 13-1). yond the target so that the target is silhouetted.
d. Adjustment. (3) The proper height of burst is that which
(1) Range and deviation adjustments are will allow the flare to strike the ground just as
made by using standard observed fire procedures, it stops burning. Changes in height of burst are

Table 13-1. Illuminating Projectile Characteristics

Cannon Projectile Initial Distance Burning Rate of Rate of fail
height of between time continuous (meters per
illumination burst (seconds) illumina- second)
(meters) (spread) tion
(meters) (rounds per
minute)
105-mm ............... M314A2 750 800 60 2 10
105-mm .............. M314A2E1 750 800 70 to 75 2 10
155-mm .............. M118 750 800 60 2 10
155-mm -------------- M485 600 1000 120 1 5

13-2
 Cl, FM 6-40

made in multiples of 50 meters. Variations in target during the period of maximum

the time of burning of flares cause any finer ad- illumination. An alternate method is to include by
justment of the height of burst to be useless. SHELL, AT MY COMMAND in the method o;f
(4) When the point of burst is too high, the control. This indicates that both HE and
height-of-burst change is estimated from the illuminating rounds will be fired only at the
height of the flare at the time it burned out. observer's command. As soon as the FDC reports
When the point of burst is too low, the change that illuminating and HE fires are ready, the
required is estimated from the length of time observer gives the command to fire the
illuminating round and then gives the command
(T) in seconds that the flare burned on the
to fire the HE rounds so that the HE rounds will
ground. By multiplying T by the approximate
arrive during the period of maximum illumination
rate of fall of the projectile flare, the observer
of the target.
can determine the approximate correction re-
f. Example Mission
quired. (1) The observer hears a number of heavy
Example: An M314A2 projectile flare burned vehicles at an azimuth estimated at 5800. He
13 seconds on the ground; 13 x 10 = 130; the cannot detect any lights and the entire area is in
correction is UP 150 (answer rounded off to complete darkness. Judging from the sounds and
nearest 50 meters). (Refer to table 13-1 for rate a study of his map, the observer estimates the
of fall for different types of ammunition.) source of the noises as grid 725365. This is about
(5) After the observer has adjusted the 2,000 meters from his observation post. He sends
flare to the desired location, he should control the the following fire request:
rate of fire and number of pieces firing to reduce B8H18 THIS IS B8H25 ADJUST FIRE,
ammunition expenditure to the minimum neces- OVER. GRID 725365, OVER.
sary for the required observation. ILLUMINATING, 1 GUN, OVER.
(2) The first illuminating round bursts about
e. Illumination for HE Adjustment. 100 mils left of the suspected area and 150 meters
(1) If the adjustment of illuminating pro- too high. Using an OT factor of 2, the observer
jectile discloses a suitable artillery target, the ob- transmits -
server should request CONTINUOUS ILLUMI- DIRECTION 5800, RIGHT 200,
NATION while he adjusts HE fire on the tar- DOWN 150, OVER.
get. (3) The second round bursts short near the OT
(2) As soon as the observer has located a line but is too low; the round burns 4 seconds on
suitable target for HE fire, he should initiate a the ground. The observer requests -
normal call for fire. If no better means of de- ADD 400, UP 50 (4 x 10 = 40150),
signating the location of the target is possible, OVER.
the burst center of the illumination can be used (4) The third round bursts at the appropriate
as a reference point. height over the suspected area; but haze, along
with the distance of the area from the observer,
(3) If the HE adjustment is made on an makes visibility poor with only one round of
immobile target, such as a disabled tank or a illuminating shell. The observer feels that two
JK I bridge, the observer may be able to conserve rounds will be adequate but desires a lateral
illuminating ammunition by coordinating spread along a section of road that he is observing
illumination with the adjustment of HE. The in order to extend the visible area and reduce
observer requests COORDINATED ILLUMI- shadows. The observer requests -
NATION instead of CONTINUOUS 2 GUNS, LATERAL SPREAD, OVER.
ILLUMINATION. When the illumination has (5) Two rounds burst in a spread over the
been adjusted to yield the best light, the observer suspected area, and the observer notices two tanks
announces ILLUMINATION MARK to the FDC and a number of infantrymen moving over to the
to notify the FDC of the exact time when the target right at the extreme edge of the illuminated area.
is best illuminated. The FDC times the interval He determines a shift from the center of
between the actual firing of the illuminating illumination and transmits -
round and receipt of the observer's RIGHT 400, CONTINUOUS ILIUMINA-
ILLUMINATION MARK. By comparison of this TION, FROM ILLUMINATION, DIREC-
time interval with the time of flight of the HE, the TION 6100, ADD 200, 2 TANKS AND
FDC can control the firing of both the HE and PLATOON OF INFANTRY, ICM IN
illumination rounds so that the HE arrives at the EFFECT, ADJUST FIRE , OVER.

13-3
 Cl, FM 6-40

(6) Continuous illumination is begun over the width of the spread beam is 120 mils. Examples
desired point, disclosing two additional tanks and of observer corrections are as follows:
more infantry. The FO acknowledges the FDC's (1) RIGHT 60 MILS or RIGHT 2 BEAMS.
report of SHOT (for the HE) and gives a new (2) UP 15 MILS or UP 1/2 BEAM.
description of the target at this time as 4 TANKS d. The smallest correction in mils that can be
AND PLATOON OF INFANTRY. made by the observer is 5 mils. In the beam-
(7) The observer adjusts HE during width method, the smallest correction is a 1/4
continuous illumination and then orders DROP beam width shift. It is not necessary to give a
50, FFE. The fire for effect apparently causes change in both deviation and elevation each time
several casualties among infantry troops. an adjustment is desired; it is necessary to give
(8) The observer notices tanks and infantry only the element to be corrected. Omission of
moving out to the northwest away from the the other element indicates it is to remain the
observer. It is necessary to shift illumination, and same. If it is desired to change the degree of
the observer desires to repeat fire for effect against beam spread from focused beam to defocused
the target. He orders - beam, the command is DEFOCUS AND HOLD
ILLUMINATING, ADD 400, OVER, AT MY COMMAND. If spread beam is desired,
ICM, LEFT 50, ADD 100, REPEAT, OVER. the command is SPREAD BEAM. This correc-
(9) Tanks and infantry have moved out of tion precedes the deviation and elevation correc-
observation of the observer; therefore, he orders- tions.
END OF MISSION, TANKS AND INFAN-
e. On occasion, the searchlight may be used in
TRY DISPERSED TO NORTHWEST,
a continuous sweep or in a sweep in one direction
ESTIMATE 20 CASUALTIES, OVER.
of the searchlight beam. The searchlight may
be used in this manner in either the visible or
13-5. Conduct of Fire With Searchlight infrared mode; however, infrared is the normal
Illumination mode in which the sweep is made. If the observer
a. The primary use of searchlights by the ob- wishes to exercise a greater degree of control,
server is for illumination of areas of suspected he may command SWEEP RIGHT (LEFT)
enemy movement for night adjustment or sur- AND HOLD AT MY COMMAND. Visible light
veillance of artillery fire from air or ground ob- is rarely used in this manner because potential
servation posts. Searchlights are also used to targets can normally hide or conceal their loca-
guide friendly elements, mark coordinating lines, tions as the light approaches. Infrared illumina-
mark targets for close air support missions, and tion may be employed in this manner unless the
illuminate objectives in an attack (FM 6-115). enemy is equipped with infrared viewers. When
b. The number of lights used in any mission the searchlight is employed in a continuous
will depend on the number available and the sweep, the searchlight crew must observe the
situation at that particular time. Normally, sweep so that they can keep the light on the
when direct illumination is used, a single light terrain in the manner which best uses the infra-
will suffice. red illumination.
c. The observer procedure for the adjustment
of the searchlight beam is similar to that em- f. Elements of the illumination request are as
ployed in a fire mission. However, the observer follows:
makes the adjustment on the searchlight-target (1) Identification of observer. Identification
line in deviation and elevation. Corrections are of the observer in an illumination request is the
made in one of two ways. The observer can move same as that in a call for fire.
the beam right or left and up or down in in- (2) Warning order. The warning for a
crements of 1/4, 1/2 or 1 beam width or he may searchlight mission is ILLUMINATION
make these shifts in mils. In most cases, the MISSION. Since this term is used only for a
beam-width is simpler and faster for the ob- searchlight mission, it alerts all personnel
server, since his yardstick is the width of the involved to pass the mission to the searchlight
beam itself. For the 30-inch searchlight, the light direction center (LDC). Operators in the
width of the focus beam is 30 mils wide, and the communication network must be familiar with
spread beam is 180 mils wide. The spread beam this warning signal and the action to be taken.
cannot be used when the infrared lenses are on "(3) Target location. The target may be lo-
the searchlight. For the 23-inch searchlight, the cated by any of the methods described in chapter
width of the focus beam is 9 to 13 mils, and the
8.

13-4
 Cl, FM 6-40

(4) Description of target. The description

of the target is preceded by the word
SUSPECTED if the target cannot be positively
identified. If the target is identified, the proce-
dure is the same as that for a call for fire. This
element will enable the LDC to determine the --
priority of the mission.
(5) Method of engagement.
-.REFLECTED . "
(a) Type of adjustment. If the type of DIGLHT
adjustment is omitted in the illumination request,
the observer will receive one light in adjust-
ment. The observer may request two or more
lights if he desires.
(b) Type of illumination. The observer
has a choice of direct or indirect illumination.
Direct illumination (fig 13-2) requires a clear line
Figure 13-3. Indirect illumination,, reflected light. I
of sight between the searchlight and the target
area. k !!
DIFFUSED LIT

U Figure 13-2. Direct illuminatiol. Figure 13-4. Indirect illumination, difflsed light.
For an observer looking away from the light
Visibility into the illuminated area is nearly
equivalent to daylight observation if the light source, visibility in the illuminated area is equal to
visibility under a quarter moon. The diffused light
source is behind the observer. When a single beam
of indirect illumination reaches into hollows,
is used at a low angle of elevation, deep shadows
are cast by brush and other small objects. draws, and tree-lined roads. An observer in an
Intersecting beams may be used to eliminate area illuminated by diffused light can detect with
shadows in the immediate target area. Direct the naked eye a man standing at ranges up to 150
illumination eases control. It is, however, more meters. With the aid of binoculars, an observer can
vulnerable to enemy fire than indirect detect a man moving at considerably greater
illumination. Direct illumination may impair the ranges. Indirect illumination can be employed for
night vision of friendly forces and may silhouette longer periods of time than direct lighting because
friendly troops and installations. The observer the light source is less •vulnerable to enemy
must avoid both of these situations. If the observer interference. However, indirect illumination does
does not specify indirect illumination, the LDC provide sufficient light for limited surveillance.
will assume that he desires direct illumination. When the observer is looking away from the light
Indirect illumination utilizes the diffused or source, visibility in the illuminated area is
reflected light rays from the main searchlight approximately three times as great as that when
beams (fig 13-3 and 13-4). he is looking toward the light source.

13-5
 C1, FM 6-40

(4) Description of target. The description

of the target is preceded by the word
SUSPECTED if the target cannot be positively
identified. If the target is identified, the proce-
dure is the same as that for a call for fire. This
element will enable the LDC to determine the
priority of the mission.
(5) Method of engagement.
(a) Type of adjustment. If the type of
adjustment is omitted in the illumination request,
the observer will receive one light in adjust-
ment. The observer may request two or more
lights if he desires.
(b) Type of illumination. The observer
has a choice of direct or indirect illumination.
Direct illumination (fig 13-2) requires a clear line
of sight between the searchlight and the target Figure 13-3. IndIrcct ill/niitatiwi, reflected light.
area.

DIFFUSED LIGHT

5 Figurm 1r'-2. l)irect i/lu in iation.

Figure 13-4. Indirect illuninatimi, difu(sed light.

Visibility into the illuminated area is nearly For an observer looking away from the light
equivalent to daylight observation if the light source, visibility in the illuminated area is equal to
source is behind the observer. When a single beam visibility under a quarter moon. The diffused light
is used at a low angle of elevation, deep shadows of indirect illumination reaches into hollows,
are cast by brush and other small objects. draws, and tree-lined roads. An observer in an
Intersecting beams may be used to eliminate area illuminated by diffused light can detect with
At
shadows in the immediate target area. Direct the naked eye a man standing at ranges up to 150
illumination eases control. It is, however, more meters. With the aid of binoculars, an observer can
vulnerable to enemy fire than indirect detect a man moving at considerably greater
illumination. Direct illumination may impair the ranges. Indirect illumination can be employed for
night vision of friendly forces and may silhouette longer periods of time than direct lighting because
friendly troops and installations. The observer the light source is less vulnerable to enemy
must avoid both of these situations. If the observer interference. However, indirect illumination does
does not specify indirect illumination, the LL)C provide sufficient light for limited surveillance.
will assume that he desires direct illumination. When the observer is looking away from the light
Indirect illumination utilizes the diffused or source, visibility in the illuminated area is
reflected light rays from the main searchlight approximately three times as great as that when
beams (fig 13-3 and 13-I). he is looking toward the light source.

13-5
 Cl, FM 6-40

(c) Degree of beam spread. The observer Searchlights are available and a study of the
requests the beam spread necessary to illuminate terrain indicates that it is possible to illuminate
the area under observation. The degree of beam
spread is designated in the illumination request
as FOCUS, DEFOCUS, or SPREAD BEAM. If
the tank directly. He sends the following mission:
B8T 18, THIS IS B8T 25, ILLUMINATION
MISSION, OVER. GRID 672444,. OVER,
0
the observer omits this element, focus beam will SUSPECTED ACTIVITY VICINITY
be used. DISABLED TANK, 2 LIGHTS, ADJUST
(6) Control. ADJUST LIGHT is the only LIGHTS, OVER.
method of control used with searchlights. If the (2) The left beam appears below the target,
observer desires to control the time of turning and the right beam is 2 beam widths to the left. He
the light on, he includes AT MY COMMAND orders -
immediately preceding ADJUST LIGHT. To pre- DIRECTION 780, NUMBER 1, RIGHT
vent personnel from misinterpreting fire com- 2 BEAMS; NUMBER 2, UP 1/2 BEAM,
mands, the observer uses the command FLICK OVER.
to order the lights turned on. (3) Both beams having been centered on the
g. Some of the terms used in an illumination target, the observer orders HOLD. The command
mission that are not common to field artillery HOLD causes the lights to be held on the target
are defined in (1) through (4) below. and allows the observer to call for a destruction
(1) FLICK-Put light in action (corres- mission on the tank. After the tank has been
ponds to the command FIRE). destroyed, the observer will terminate the mission
(2) ACTION COMPLETE-Pointing data as indicated below.
have been set on light (corresponds to the com- END OF MISSION, STALLED TANK
mand SHOT). DESTROYED, OVER.
(3) CUT-Put light out of action (corres- (4) If, in the course of the HE mission, the
ponds to the command CHECK FIRING). observer decides that it is better to cut off the lights
(4) HOLD-Keep the light on the same yet he wants to hold the position of the lights, he
azimuth, elevation, and beam spread (corres- orders HOLD, CUT. To restore light to the target,
ponds to the command REPEAT). he next orders FLICK.
(5) Using these commands, together with his
h. Searchlight mission artillery fire AT MY COMMAND, the observer is
(1) The observer hears movement and able to light the target for surveillance or
suspects that an attempt is being made to repair a adjustment and hold to a minimum the exposure
disabled tank that is blocking a road in his sector. of friendly light positions.

Section III. CONDUCT OF ASSAULT FIRE

13-6. General ineffective. Self-propelled artillery is best suited
a. Assault fire is a special technique of indirect for this task because of its maneuverability and
fire in which the maximum charge that will clear ease of emplacement and displacement.
intervening crests is used to effect maximum b. Projectile. Shell HE normally is used for
muzzle velocity and penetration. Firing is assault fire.
conducted at short range from a defiladed weapon c. Fuzes. Concrete-piercing (CP) fuzes are
position to attain pinpoint accuracy against a appropriate for destruction of fortifications. Fuze
stationary target. The short range and flat quick or fuze concrete-piercing, nondelay, is used
trajectory make possible successive hits on the for adjustment and for clearing away rubble. Fuze
same portion of the target. Only one gun is used on concrete-piercing, delay, may be used in fire for
a mission, and the FDC for the mission normally effect to effect penetration. Fuze M557, delay, may
is located at or near the weapon position. be used in fire for effect if concrete-piercing fuze is
b. Assault fire is used for the destruction of not available. Fuze M557, quick, is used to cut
caves, pillboxes, or other fixed fortifications by through a parapet or an earth covering, after
firing on the vertical portion of the target.
which the appropriate fuze, CP or M557, delay, is
13-7. Materiel Used For Assault Fire
used to effect destruction of the fortification. If
excessive ricochets result from the use of concrete-
a. Weapons. Any artillery cannon can be used piercing delay fuze, nondelay fuze should be used
for assault fire; however, any caliber smaller than until enough cratering has been effected to
155-mm is considered uneconomical and prevent ricochet of the delay fuze.

13-6
 Cl, FM 6-40

13-8. Preparatory Operations time the observer normally is able to estimate

The observer and all personnel concerned with vertical error more accurately than he can esti-
an assault fire mission should prepare detailed mate range error. Therefore, the observer makes
plans for the mission. Thorough planning, recon- corrections for altitude rather than range. After
naissance, and coordination must be completed a 50-meter range bracket has been split, the
before the weapon position is occupied. The ob- smallest appropriate correction in direction or
server must occupy an observation post as near altitude is one-half meter. The observer con-
as possible to the target and on or near the gun- tinues to send a correction to the FDC for each
target line. round fired. All rounds are fired singly or as
requested by the observer to permit the desired
13-9. Initial Data corrections or changes in ammunition to be
Normally, personnel prepare initial data in ad-
made between rounds. The observer is responsible
vance by use of the best means available (usu-
for controlling and ending the mission.
ally survey) to locate the target with respect
b. The observer usually will be able to see
to the assault weapon position. Therefore, in each round in flight as it travels to the target.
most cases, a complete call for fire from the ob-
By noting the position of each round at the in-
server is not necessary.
stant before the burst rather than by judging
from the burst itself, the observer can make
13-10. Adjustment more accurate spottings and thus can make the
The observer uses a modified adjustment pro- small corrections necessary for pinpoint accur-
cedure in which he exercises complete control of acy.
fire throughout the mission. He gives corrections
in meters for each successive round until the 13-11.1 Sample Mission 0
point of impact is on the desired portion of the The target is a concrete pillbox on the forward
target. The observer corrects an off-line burst to slope of a hill. The pillbox has several gun ports
bring subsequent bursts to the line through norm- from which machineguns are firing; one opening
al adjustment procedure except that he gives faces the observer. The mission is to neutralize the
deviation corrections to the nearest meter. He pillbox. The material is a 155-mm howitzer (SP);
brackets the target for range, and successively gun-target range, 2,000 meters; observer-target
splits the bracket. distance, 500 meters. The mission has been
prearranged in detail, and a complete call for fire
13-11. Fire for Effect is unnecessary. The observer reports when he is
a. When the observer splits a 50-meter range ready to adjust, and the FDC announces
bracket, he is in fire for effect although no an- commands to the gun to fire the first round. Table
nouncement of fire for effect is made. At this 13-2 below reflects the sequence of events.

BTable 13-2. Conduct of Assault Fire

Remarks Observer corrections

i
First round bursts 20 mils right of OT line, short LEFT 10,
on terrain. ADD 50, OVER
Second round bursts 8 mils left of OT line, over RIGHT 4,
on terrain. DROP 25, OVER
Third round strikes pillbox 4 mils above center. CONCRETE-PIERCING, DELAY, DOWN 2,
(Vertical instead of range changes OVER
are now appropriate.)
Fourth round strikes at lower left corner of opening. RIGHT 1/2, UP 1, OVER
Fifth round strikes center causing great damage. REPEAT, OVER
Sixth round strikes same hole. Rubble now closing CONCRETE-PIERCING, NONDELAY, REPEAT,
opening. (Observer requests nondelay fuze OVER
to blast away rubble).
Seventh round strikes pile of rubble, blasting most CONCRETE-PIERCING, DELAY, REPEAT,
of it away. OVER
Eigi-th round pierces pillbox, explodes inside. No END OF MISSION, PILLBOX DESTROYED,
further activity from pillbox. RESISTANCE CEASED, ESTIMATE 6
CASUALTIES, OVER

13-7
 Cl, FM 6-40

Section IV. CONDUCT OF FIRE BY USE OF COMBINED OBSERVATION

13-12. General time fuze is used. (For FDC procedures, see
a. Combined observation is that type of ob- paragraphs 19-27 through 19-36.)
servation in which two or more observers at dif- b. Orientation of Observer.
In a high-burst
ferent locations are employed to obtain spottings
on the same target. For effective conduct of fire registration, two observers (01 and 02) usually are
employed. The location of each observer and the
by use of combined observation, the angle of in-
desired point of burst must be known at the fire
tersection of the OT lines should not be less than
direction center. The fire direction center will
150 mils. An angle of 300 to 500 mils is pre-
determine and furnish to each observer the
ferred. direction and vertical angle to the expected point
b. Combined observation is used for the fol- of burst. A typical message to the observers from
lowing types of missions: the FDC is as follows: OBSERVE HIGH-BURST
(1) High-burst registration. REGISTRATION. 01 DIRECTION 1164,
(2) Mean-point-of-impact registration. VERTICAL ANGLE PLUS 12, MEASURE THE
(3) Fire to obtain surprise through use of VERTICAL ANGLE. 02 DIRECTION 718,
fire-for-effect transfers. VERTICAL ANGLE MINUS 3. REPORT WHEN
(4) Surveillance of planned fires. READY TO OBSERVE.
c. Conduct of Registration. Each observer
ori-
c. Observation posts should be established dur- ents his instrument on the direction and vertical
ing daylight so that instruments may be oriented
angle given and reports when ready to observe.
and a line materialized on the ground for orien-
(As soon as practicable after orientation of his
tation after dark. The OT directions of targets instrument, the observer will set out, on a known
discovered during daylight are recorded by all direction, a stake that can be equipped with a
observers. An observer may locate a target at light for night orientation.) The FDO directs the 0
night by placing the illuminated crosshairs of firing of one orienting round. The observer will
an observing instrument on the flash of an orient the center of the reticle of his instrument
enemy weapon. The vertical angle and direction
on the point of burst. After the orienting round,
are recorded if adjustment is not started at once.
the observer will not change the orientation of
As an expedient, the direction to a flash may be
his instrument. Instead, he combines the ob-
materialized on the ground by a piece of white
served deviation on the reticle with the reading
tape or two stakes.
set on the azimuth scale and azimuth microm-
13-13. Equipment eter to derive the measured direction. The same
a. To obtain optimum accuracy, each observ- general procedure is used to measure the verti-
er should be equipped with a BC scope or an aim- cal angle. Both observers report direction read-
ing circle. ings, but only the designated observer will re-
b. If a line of known direction is not available, port the vertical reading (e.g., on the message
initial direction to the target can be obtained to the observers in b above, only 01 would re-
by the use of a compass. Subsequent deviations port vertical angles.)
from the OT line can be measured with binocu-
lars if a BC scope or an aiming circle is not 13-15. Mea n-Point-of-Impact Registration
available. However, the use of a compass and A mean-point-of-impact registration is conducted
binoculars for combined observation is inaccur- in the same manner as a high-burst registra-
ate. Lack of a BC scope or an aiming circle tion (para 13-17) except that impact fuze is
may preclude the use of combined observation used instead of time fuze.
during darkness.
13-16. Combined Observation for Missions
13-14. High-Burst Registration Other Than High-Burst or Mean
a. General. At night, visual adjustment of fire
on a ground registration point is impossible Point of Impact Registration
without illumination. In desert, jungle, or arctic a. General. At long OT distances (more than
4,000 meters), the use of combined observation
operations, clearly defined registration points in
may conserve ammunition. Combined observa-
the target areas often are not available. Special
tion is especially important for heavy artil-
procedures have been developed to permit regis-
lery, since observing distances are normally so
tration under these conditions. One such pro- great that adjustment by normal procedure is
cedure is the high-burst registration in which
very difficult.

13-8
 Cl, FM 6-40

b. Procedures. After the observation posts

are plotted on the FDC charts, the following
procedures apply:
(1) Target location and orientation of ob-
servation posts.
(a) When an accurate target location is
furnished by higher headquarters, the FDC, us-
ing the procedures described in paragraph 13-
17b, orients the observation posts.
(b) When one observer locates the tar-
get accurately, the FDC, using the target loca- ENDS OF BASE INTERVISIBLE
tion, orients the other observer.
(c) When one observer locates a target,
he may orient the other observer on the location
of the target. Both observers may then report
directions to the target, and the FDC can lo-
cate the target by intersection.
(2) Procedure during adjustment. When
both observers report READY TO OBSERVE,
firing is begun. After each round is fired, each
observer reports the direction, and the designat-
ed observer reports the vertical angle to each
0 "kTO AZ MARKER 01
burst. If so directed, the observers report devia-
tions (number of mils right or left of the OT ENDS OF BASE NOT INTERVISIBLE
line) rather than directions. Figure 13-5. Target area (short base).
13-17. Target Area Base c. The 01 observer solves the distance from
A target area (short) base (fig 13-5) may be 01 to the target by using the law of sines, as
established to locate targets rapidly and accurate- follows:
ly. A target area base consists of two observa- Distance 01 to target length of base
tion posts from which points in the target area Sin angle at 02 sin apex angle
can be located by a combination of intersection
When the law of sines is applied, the supplemen-
and polar plotting. Distances are computed, but
tary angle may be substituted for the interior
the targets are placed on the firing chart by
angle at 02, since the sines of supplementary
polar plotting. The base must be long enough so
angles are equal.
that the apex angle (the angle at the target
d. The military slide rule is arranged to pro-
formed by the intersection of the lines of sight
vide a rapid and simple solution to the short
from the two observation posts) is at least 150
mils. The base should be as nearly perpendicular base problem. The steps in the solution are as
follows:
to the direction to the target area as possible. (1) Place the hairline of the cursor over
Both 01 and 02 must be plotted on the firing
the value of the angle at 02 on the scale marked
chart and the distance and direction between ''opposite angle."
them determined.
(2) Move the slide until the value of the
apex angle of the scale marked "apex angle" is
a. When the ends of the base are intervisible,
under the hairline.
the observers measure the interior angles at 01
and 02. If the ends of the base are not inter- (3) Move the cursor until the hairline is
visible, the target area base personnel compute over the length of the base on the C (base)
the interior angles by comparing the direction scale.
of the base with the direction from each observa- (4) Read the distance from 01 to the target
tion post to the point being located (FM 6-2). on the D (range) scale.
b. The observers determine the apex angle by
subtracting the sum of the interior angles at 01 e. The observer reports the target location to
and 02 from 3200. the FDC by polar coordinates from 01 as DI-
RECTION (so much), DISTANCE (so much),
UP (DOWN) (so much).

13-9
 Cl, FM 6-40

Section V. ADJUSTMENT OF HIGH-ANGLE FIRE AND AUXILIARY

ADJUSTING POINT
13-18. General
a. Fire delivered at elevations greater than
c. Quick and VT fuzes give excellent effect
the elevation for maximum range is called high-
from side spray because of the steep angle of
angle fire. High-angle fire is often required when
fall. VT fuzes produce a lower height of burst
the weapons fire out of deep defilade, from with-
than that normally obtained with low-angle fire.
in cities, or over high terrain features near
friendly troops. High-angle fire may also be re-
quired when the targets are located directly be- 13-21. Adjustment
hind hill crests, in jungles, or in deep gullies or a. The observer procedure for the adjustment
ravines and cannot be reached by low-angle fire. of high-angle fire is the same as that for the ad-
b. Most artillery weapons are capable of high- justment of low-angle fire.
angle fire. Generally, those cannon with a maxi- b. The observer must realize that small devia-
tion corrections during adjustment may be un-
mum elevation substantially in excess of 800 mils
necessary and time consuming because of the
have the capability of firing high-angle fire. increased dispersion experienced during high-
angle fire.
13-19. Determining Requirements for High- c. Since the time of flight is long in both ad-
Angle Fire justment and fire for effect, the FDC will an-
nounce SHOT when the round(s) is fired and
Usually, an observer can determine whether
will announce SPLASH 5 seconds before the
high-angle fire is required for any given target;
burst(s) occurs.
if he cannot determine this, he notifies the FDC
that high-angle fire may be necessary. In that 13-22. Auxiliary Adjusting Point
case; the FDO decides whether high-angle fire is In order to acbieve surprise, the observer may
to be used and notifies the observer. decide not to adjust on the target but to adjust
on a nearby point. This nearby point, the auxili-
13-20. Call for Fire ary adjusting point, must be far enough away
a. When high-angle fire is desired, the observ- from the target that the rcal purpose of the ad-
er so indicates in his call for fire. justment is obscured. At the same time, the
b. The excessive height-of-burst probable er- auxiliary adjusting point must be so selected
ror associated with a long time of flight makes that an accurate (preferably lateral) shift to
fire with mechanical time fuze undesirable for the target can be determined. When the adjust-
use in high-angle fire. Because of the steep angle ment on the auxiliary adjusting point is com-
of fall, ricochet fire is seldom possible. plete, the shift to the target is made.

Section VI. CONDUCT OF FIRE WHEN OBSERVER IS NOT ORIENTED

13-25. Gun-Target Line Method of

13-23. General Adjustment
In a fast-moving situation, an observer may be-
When the observer cannot determine the OT di-
come confused and disoriented. An observer in a rection or when the OT direction is changing fre-
moving vehicle has a problem in orientation be- quently (for example, when the observer is with an
cause his OT direction is constantly changing. armored or mechanized infantry unit), the ob-
To bring fire upon a target when the direction server may decide to adjust with respect to the
is changing rapidly or is unknown, both the ob- gun-target line. To determine the direction of the
server and the FDC must exercise judgment and GT line, it may be necessary for the observer to
initiative. request ranging rounds (two rounds fired at the
same deflection but 400 meters apart in range;
13-24. Target Location corrections are made from the NEAR or FAR
If possible, the target location is determined by
round). If the observer does not identify from
use of the procedures prescribed in chapter 8.
If target location by normal means is not pos-
sible, the observer must request that a round be
fired at a point where he can identify it and use
which rounds he is making corrections, the FDC
will call and ask. When the observer is adjusting
with respect to the GT line, the battalion FDO
I
should select a unit to fire whose location will
that round as his known point. result in the smallest angle T.

13-10
 Cl, FM 6-40

Section Vii. ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE BY SOUND

13-26. General adjust onto the target. He can determine dis-

During operations when observer visibility is tance by measuring the time that it takes for
restricted, fire may be adjusted by the use of the sound of the burst to reach him and multi-
sound alone. plying the time interval by the speed of sound,
which is 350 meters per second. (In this case,
13-27. Adjustment of Fire by Sound the time of impact must be announced by the
a. Target Location. Target locations may be fire direction center.)
reported to the observer by the supported unit, (3) The observer must exercise caution in
or they may be determined by the observer. If very broken terrain. In hills or mountains the
the observer can hear noises at the enemy posi- sound may travel around a hill mass before it
tion (for example, weapons firing, vehicles, or reaches the observer and thus produce a false
troop movement), he can estimate a direction direction to the burst. If this occurs, it may be
and distance from his position. necessary to fire a high airburst(s) initially.
d. Adjustment With More Than One Observ-
b. The Call for Fire. When adjustment by er.
sound is to be used, the observer so indicates (1) A more accurate target location can be
in the call for fire. derived if two or more observers can hear the
c. Adjustment. noises produced at the enemy location. Each ob-
(1) Upon hearing the burst of the adjusting server reports an estimated direction to the
round, the observer estimates the direction to enemy location. The FDC can plot the data and
the burst and compares it with the direction determine the ground location by intersection.
to the target. He converts the deviation to a (2) During the adjustment, each observer
lateral shift in meters by using the estimated reports the direction to the burst, and the FDC
distance from his position to the target. .plots the data. The FDC determines the impact
(2) Distance to the adjusting burst is dif- point of the round by intersection and applies
ficult to judge; therefore, it may be necessary the appropriate corrections to the subsequent
for the observer to use creeping techniques to round to bring it to the target.

* Section VIII. AERIAL FIELD ARTILLERY (DELETED)

13-28. (Deleted)

Section IX. ABCA PRECISION FIRE (DELETED)

13-29 through 13-32. (Deleted)

(See FM 6-40-5 for detailed discussion of precision fire.)

Section X. MOVING TARGET MISSIONS

* 13-33. General
The field artilleryman cannot ignore the fact that this action cannot be taken lightly, since it
there will be times on the modern battlefield when restricts the enemy's vision, makes his command
he will find himself assigned the task of attacking and control more difficult, and increases his
highly mobile targets with indirect fire. Armored vulnerability to other antitank weapons. Fire of
vehicles belong to this category of targets. The sufficient intensity can demoralize the enemy and
difference between armor and other types of break up his attack or force him to deploy
moving targets is that an armored vehicle is an prematurely into attack formations. Artillery fire
extremely hard target and is therefore difficult to can be used to separate accompanying infantry
destroy with indirect artillery fire. With the from armored vehicles, thus making the enemy
munitions currently available, our objective will armor more susceptible to successful engagement
normally be to reduce the effectiveness of armor by other armor-defeating means. These fires can
rather than to destroy it. Field artillery fire forces also be used to canalize enemy armor toward our
the enemy armor to button up. The importance of strongest anti-tank defenses or toward the least

13-11
C1, FM 6-40

favorable terrain. High-explosive projectiles, both Example: B8H18, THIS IS B8H24, FIRE
conventional and ICM (dual-purpose), may be FOR EFFECT AB701, OVER, 5 TRUCKS
used to damage fire control equipment, antennas, MOVING, VT, AT MY COMMAND, OVER.
and externally-mounted weapons as well as to
rupture exterior fuel tanks. Smoke and WP d. If the target is moving too rapidly or if the
projectiles can be used to blind or screen the enemy observer is so busy that he misses the crossing of
and possibly to ignite fuel spilled from ruptured the IP, other IP's may be selected on which the
fuel tanks. In short, while we may have difficulty target is engaged. If a target IP is changed, the call
killing a tank, we are capable of blinding, for fire must be changed immediately in order to
diverting, or disabling it. Whatever the objective, allow the FDC and the guns sufficient time to
field artillery fires must be accurate in order to be react. It should be clear at this point that several
effective. Thus, the artilleryman must understand IP's may be necessary for an observer to place
the observed fire and fire direction procedures fires on a moving target; therefore,an observer can
necessary to successfully engage moving targets achieve greater flexibility by selecting as many
and must be able to employ these procedures. additional IP's as time permits.
13-36. Time to Fire
13-34. Advance Planning a. There are two methods which may be used to
Advance planning is necessary to be prepared for get the rounds on the target at the correct time.
firing on moving targets. As time permits, the (1) The FO estimates the time the target will
observer should make the following reach the IP and calls for a time-on-target at that
preparations: time (e.g., TOT 2 MINUTES FROM .... NOW).
a. Select intercept points (IP) along likely (2) The FO receives the time from the FDC (an
avenues of approach. AT MY COMMAND mission) and commands
b. Notify the FDC of the location of each IP. The FIRE so that the rounds and target reach the IP at
FDC will assign a target number to each IP and the same time. This method is difficult for a long
will determine and maintain updated firing data time of flight.
for each IP. b. If the IP is located at a choke point, the
c. Check rounds should be fired on as many of observer can command FIRE prior to arrival of
the IP's as possible so that the probability of first the target at the IP, forcing the enemy to halt or
round accuracy will be increased. Check rounds drive through the wall of steel.
should be fired periodically to insure that firing 13-37. Adjustment of Fire for Effect
data is current. a. If the fire for effect misses the IP, an
13-35. Conduct of Fire adjustment should be made to move the effect onto
a. Time is extremely critical once a moving the target (fig 13-6).
target appears. Therefore, all firing data must
have been determined as soon as the IP's for that
target were selected and must be available in the INITIAL
firing battery for immediate firing. IP
b. As soon as the target is sighted, the observer
determines the probable route the target will take
and selects IP's along the route. He determines the 2002M
IP for target engagement (target IP) and sends the
call for fire as soon as possible.
c. The call for fire will include the following:
(1) Identification of observer. OT DIR
64000
(2) Warning order. If a target IP has not been
selected, the observer will send FIRE FOR
OBSVR
EFFECT, OVER and will pause until the target IP
is selected.
(3) Target number. Target number of target Figure 13-6. FFE misses the initial IP
I P.
(4) Nature of target. In order to alert the FDC b. As the target continues to move out of the
that moving target procedures are being used, the area of the original IP, a new IP should be selected.
nature of the target will include the fact that the Firing for effect on the new IP, however, would
target is moving. miss the new IP by approximately the same
(5) Control. AT MY COMMAND will be used distance the FFE missed the original IP. To
to allow the observer to place fires on the target at compensate for the miss distance, the FO must
the moment the target crosses the Il1. send the FDC the refinement corrections
13-12
 Cl, FM 6-40
(determined at the first IP) to be applied to the RIGHT 200, ADD 200, OVER.
second IP (fig 13-7). d. A new time to fire is then determined. In such
a case, time becomes even more critical than
AIMPOINT before. The FDC must now take the new grid,
TO GET FFE
ON SECOND IP apply corrections based on the OT direction to the
original target IP, compute new firing data to
include the time of flight, and send new data to the
INITIAL
guns. The cannoneers must then set the firing
lip lip1 data and load the guns. The observer must
'(AIM- compute a new firing time based on a new time of
* POINT) flight. All of this takes time. Therefore, the new IP
must be far enough from the originaltarget IP to
FFE allow for these actions. After firing data have been
ROUNDS I OT DIR
6400 1
determined to the second target IP, the direction to
the second target IP must be determined by the FO
so that if necessary, corrections may be applied to
* Figure 13-7. Refinement correctionsapplied a third target IP.
I to the second IP. e. If the observer's timing was off and the
rounds were on the original IP but were not
c. The FO must therefore send to the FDC: NEW effective, the procedures are the same except that
GRID_- , DIRECTION (to original IP) 6400, no adjustment is announced.

CHAPTER 14
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES
(Superseded by FM 6-40-5, Modern Battlefield
Cannon Gunnery)

13-13 (next numbered page is 15 1)

 Cl, FM 6-40

PART FOUR
FIRE DIRECTION

CHAPTER 15.
FIRE DIRECTION, GENERAL

Section I. INTRODUCTION

15-1. Definitions 15-2. Objectives of Fire Direction

a. Fire Direction. Fire direction is the tactical The methods employed in fire direction must
employment of fire power and includes the insure that the following objectives are met:
a. Continuous, accurate, and timely fire support
exercise of tactical command of one or more units
in the selection of targets, the concentration or under all conditions of weather, visibility, and
terrain.
distribution of fire, and the allocation of
ammunition for each mission. Fire direction b. Flexibility sufficient to engage all types of
incorporates the method and techniques used in targets over a wide area.
c. Prompt massing of fires of all available units
fire direction centers to convert calls for fire into
in any area within range of the units.
appropriate fire commands.
d. Prompt distribution of fires simultaneously
(1) Tactical Fire Direction. Tactical fire on numerous targets within range.
direction is the exercise of tactical command of 15-3. Command and Scope
one or more units in the selection of targets, the a. Artillery headquarters control the fires of
designation of units to fire, and the allocation of subordinate units. The headquarters may allocate
ammunition for each mission. reinforcing artillery fires in order to further the
plan of the force commander. Division, group, and
(2) Technical Fire Direction. Technical fire corps, and artillery headquarters are concerned
direction is the conversion of calls for fire to with tactical fire direction.
appropriate firing data and fire commands. b. Fire direction, as exercised by a cannon
b. Fire Direction Center. The fire direction
center (FDC) is the element of the artillery
headquarters that consists of the operations,
intelligence, and communications personnel and
equipment with which the commander directs
artillery battalion, consists of technical fire
direction as well as tactical fire direction.
c. This manual is concerned primarily with
technical fire direction for field artillery cannon
battalions and batteries. For a discussion of
I
artillery fire. tactical fire direction, see FM 6-20.

Section II. FIRE DIRECTION CENTER, GENERAL

15-4. Role of the Fire Direction Center a. Centralized System. This manual is
The fire direction center is the element of the concerned primarily with a centralized fire
gunnery team that receives the call for fire from direction system. In this centralized system
the observer or higher headquarters, determines observer fire missions are normally received and
the firing data, and announces the fire commands converted to firing data and fire commands by the
to the firing battery. The fire direction center also battalion FDC. However, this*process may be
determines and applies corrections to standard accomplished in a battery FDC under the
firing table values in order to achieve the accuracy following conditions:
in firing that is characteristic of field artillery. (1) The battery is operating independently.
15-5. Production of Firing Data (2) The battery FDC is directed to process a
Observer fire missions may be received and mission. For example, if the battalion FDC is
converted to firing data and fire commands by processing two missions simultaneously, the
either the battalion FDC (centralized system) or battery FDC may be directed to produce data for a
the battery FDC's (decentralized system). mission.

15-1
 Cl, FM 6-40

b. DecentralizedSystem. (For details, see FM 6- not have to be totally centralized or totally

40-5.) decentralized - there is a whole range of options
(1) In the decentralized mode, tactical fire in between. The amount of control exercised by the
direction is still the responsibility of the battalion battalion FDO will depend on:
FDC, but technical fire direction, i.e., computation - the quality, experience, and state of training
of firing data, is generally performed at battery of the battery FDO's
level (though battalion provides a back-up and - the amount of detailed guidance issued by the
overload capability as well as orchestration for commander or battalion FDO
massed fire missions). The forward observer sends - the existence of unit orders and SOP's for the
his call for fire to the appropriate FDC; most attack of certain types of targets
targets of opportunity go to the battery FDC; - the habitual presence (or absence) of the
large, important targets and counterfire requests battery commander or XO in the battery FDC
go directly to battalion. The battalion FDC - the tactical situation.
monitors all fire nets and hears all fire requests If, for example, the battery FDO's are all capable,
(either directly or by listening to the battery FDC's experienced officers and have been given firm
readback to the FO). The responding battery FDC guidance (e.g., "ask for a battalion mass on any
begins computation of firing data without delay. target larger than a squad"), the battalion FDO
If the battalion FDO feels a battalion mass can generally operate as described in paragraph b
mission is appropriate and the battery does not above. If not, he can institute a variety of
request it, he will immediately interject his order measures to give himself more positive control
to that effect. If he disagrees with the volume or over each mission. He could, for example, pick one
type of ammunition selected by the battery FDO of these (in ascending order of centralization):
(as indicated by the Message to Observer), he can -battalion FDC specifically acknowledges
override that decision. If he agrees with the having monitored the fire request; silence
battery's plan of attack, he gives his approval by thereafter implies consent
remaining silent. When the latter situation - battalion FDC specifically concurs in the
prevails, this system provides the maximum in battery plan of attack
responsiveness. No time is lost in filtering the fire - battery FDO consults with battalion FDO
request through the battalion FDC before before issuing his fire order
computations begin. Alternatively, no wasted
motion is expended in having all batteries begin
computations pending battalion issuing a fire
order. Excessive radio communications are
- battalion FDO issues an abbreviated fire
order to the battery ("hit it with 3 rounds of ICM")
- all missions are sent directly to battalion
where the FDO issues a complete fire order
0
avoided by not computing data in the battalion - all data is computed at battalion and fire
FDC. commands are sent to the battery (totally
(2) The decentralized system is designed for centralized).
maximum responsiveness. Although the The battalion FDO must adopt the method of
battalion FDO is kept in the loop, more operation which best fits his circumstances. He
responsibility is placed on the shoulders of the may in fact loosen or tighten his control as the
battery FDO than in the centralized system. situation changes.
c. Options Available. Fire direction systems do 15-6. (Deleted)

Section III. FDC PERSONNEL IN THE BATTALION

15-7. Organization is assigned from the battalion communications
* A typical battalion FDC team is composed of the
platoon to install and operate the battalion FDC
S3, the assistant S3, one chief fire direction compu-
switchboard.
ter, one assistant chief fire direction computer, one
computer for each firing battery organic or
attached to the battalion, one horizontal control 15-8. Battalion S3 (Assistant 53)
The S3 is the operations and training officer cf
operator (HCO), one vertical control operator
the battalion. FM 6-20 contains a detailed dis-
(VCO), and the number of radiotelephone oper-
cussiol of his duties. The S3 is also the battalionD
ators necessary to monitor and operate the radio
and wire communication nets of the FDC. In ad- gunnery officer. He plans, coordinates, and super-
dition to these personnel, a switchboard operator vises the activities of the battalion and battery
fire direction centers and is responsil.'e for the

15-2
 Cl, FM 6-40
training of the fire direction personnel. The as- b. Maintain the necessary FDC records..
sistant S3 assists the S3 in the performance of c. Compute firing data, convert firing data to
his duties and must be able to perform theduties fire commands, and transmit-the fire commands
of the S3. The duties of the S3 when engaged in to the.battery in the proper sequence.
fire direction are to- d. Announce total height-of-burst correction to
a. Actively supervise the battalion fire direc- the nonadjusting battery computers when he is
ion center. acting as-the computer of the adjusting battery
b. Supervise the fufictioning of the battalion in a battalion mass mission,.
fire direction wire and radio nets. e. Assist. in the conduct of registrations and
c. Inspect the plot of each reported target, de- the determination and application of registration
cide how to attack the target, and issue-the fire corrections..
order... f. Compute :met, VE, and special, corrections
d. Direct and supervise the computation and when so directed.
transmission.of, corrections such as registration, .. Determine data for replot,- with the assist-
meteorological and velocity error (VE) correc- ance of .the. vertical control operator and the
tions. horizont.lcontrol operator.
e. Insure that-appropriate fire direction .-rec- h.- Transmit current chart data and correc-
ords are maintained.- tions to the battery fire direction center.
f. 'Supervise the- preparation and execution .,of Si. Record the battery executive officer's report.
prearranged fires., .. Prepare data sheets and maintain the record
Note..In order to 'maintain. continuous. (24-hour) of data sheets for prearranged fires sent to the
operation 'in .the FDC, it is necessary.to use officers other firing battery.
than the S3, the assistant S3, and the assistant executive
officer in the battalion and batteryfire direction centers.
The term fire direction officer (FDO), as used in this 15-1. Horizontal Control Operator
manual, refers to the officer in charge of the FDC at that The duties-of the-horizontal control operator are
particular time. to-
a, Prepare and maintain the horizontal con-
15-9. Chief Fire Direction Computer. trol chart.
(Assistant Chief Fire Direction b. Plot target locations.
Computer), . c. Determine and announce chart data.
The chief fire direct'on computer is. the senior
d. Determine the size-of angle T"and announce
enlisted: member.-of the battalion fire .direction
it; when necessary.
center. He must be thoroughly proficient in both
e. Assist the computer and vertical control op-
gunnery and. communication .procedures. He erator'in determining replot data.
must be capableof operating .and, supervising the
operation of the communication facilities within
f. Operate the gun direction computer M18
(FADAC).
the.fire, direction center. .His specific duties are
to-
15-12. Vertical Control Operator
a. Supervise all enlisted .members of the fire: Thespecific duties of the vertical control opera-
direction center. tor are to-
b. Supervise the computation of-registration, . Prepare. and maintain the vertical control
met, and velocity error corrections. chart, normally a grid sheet supplemented by a
c. Inform the battalion S2 of. the ,status .of 1:50,000 map.,
fire missions and render a report of firing to the b. Maintain overlays to include situation, fire
S2 on the termination of each fire mission., capabilities, and dead space overlays,.
d. Insure proper maintenance of the necessary c. Informfire direction officer when calls for
FDC records. fire plot close to friendly locations or patrols or
within no-fire lines. . .
15-10. Computer .d. Plot targets, record their altitudes, and an-
There is one fire: direction co0mputer ,f6r: each bat- nounce the altitudes when required..
tery in -the battalion fire :direction Center. The e. Compute the site for each battery, when
duties of the computer are to--..." necessary, and announce that site to the appro-
a. Record calls for fire,: fire orders, firing data,
priate computer when requested.
corrections, and all other data .as directed by the f.. Assist the computer and the horizontal con-
fire direction officer. ' . . troloperator in determining replot data.

15-3
 Cl, FM 6-40

g. Act as the horizontal control operator in d. Perform the necessary communications

the event of multiple missions. checks to insure that the FDC circuits operate
h. Provide a check for the horizontal control properly.
operator as time permits.
i. Assist the chief fire direction computer as 15-15. Continuous FDC Operation
directed. The fire direction center in any unit must be
organized for 24-hour operation. This means that
1,5-13. Radio Telephone Operator(s) additional personnel must be trained in FDC
The radiotelephone operator(s) must be trained procedures so that they may perform the duties
in FDC communications procedures. His specific of assigned FDC personnel when necessary. Al-
duties are to- lowing fatigued personnel to work in the FDC
a. Operate a radio or telephone in the fire di- promotes the possibility of error. Personnel cross-
rection center. trained in FDC procedures ordinarily are ob-
b. Install remote control or radio-wire inte- tained from sections that perform similarly ex-
gration circuits from the radio vehicle to the acting work, such as the battalion target ac-
fire direction center as necessary. quisition platoon.
c. Repeat calls for fire received by telephone 15-16. Battery Fire Direction Center
or radio and send the message to observer. The battery fire direction center is manned by
d. Make communications checks as directed. personnel assigned to the firing battery head-
quarters. Its composition is similar to that of
15-14. Switchboard Operator the battalion FDC except that it is organized
The switchboard operator must be trained in
on a smaller scale. The battery executive officer
FDC communications procedures. His specific
or, when directed, the assistant executive officer
duties are to-. serves as the battery fire direction officer. There
a. Install and operate the FDC switchboard.
is only one fire direction computer, and in some
b. Assist in the installation of radio-wire in-
cases one chart operator may serve as both
tegration and local FDC circuits.
the horizontal control operator and vertical con-
c. Prepare and maintain a traffic diagram.
trol operator.

15-4
 Cl, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 16

CHART DATA

Section 1. FIRING CHARTS

16-1. General 16-4. Grid Sheet
The firing chart is a photomap, a grid sheet, or a A grid sheet is a sheet of plain paper on which
sheet of plain paper on which are shown the rela- are printed equally spaced horizontal and verti-
tive locations of batteries, registration points, cal lines called grid lines. Since the grid sheet
and targets and other details needed in pre- bears no relation to the ground and basic infor-
paring firing data. mation must come from other sources, any scale
desired may be used. Grid sheets used by the
16-2. Map field artillery are normally printed to a scale of
A map is a graphic representation, drawn to 1:15,000, with the distance between grid lines
scale, of a portion of the earth's surface as seen representing 1,000 meters. The locations of all
from above. Maps (normally 1:50,000) are used points placed on the grid sheet must be deter-
as supplements to firing charts. A map is only mined either by survey or by firing. Horizontal
as accurate as the ground survey from which it and vertical control charts usually are grid
is made. Maps based on accurate ground survey sheets.
require the least amount of additional survey for
field artillery use. These maps provide direc- 16-5. Purpose'of Firing Chart
tion and horizontal and vertical control and can The firing chart is used for determining the range
be used as the basis for field artillery survey. and direction from the gun(s) to the target. The
If the map is not based on accurate and adequ- effectiveness of artillery fires depends, to a large
ate ground control, it should be used only for degree, on the accuracy and completeness of the
obtaining approximate locations and vertical con- firing chart.
trol to supplement a grid sheet firing chart.
16-6. Type of Firing Charts
16-3. Photomap There are two types of firing charts used in an
a. A photomap is a reproduction of an aerial
photograph or a mosaic on which are added FDC-the surveyed firing chart and the ob-
grid lines, marginal information, and place served firing chart. The procedures described in
names. A photomap must not be considered exact this chapter for determining data are applic-
until its accuracy has been verified. Errors caus- able to both the surveyed firing chart and the
ed by tilt, distortion due to relief, and errors due observed firing chart.
to poor assembly may be present in photomaps. a. The surveyed firing chart is a chart on
Points which cannot be located on the photomap which the locations of all critical points (bat-
by inspection may be located by survey. It will tery positions, registration points, OP's) are
be necessary to determine the scale of the map based either on survey (FM 6-2) or on map in-
before points can be located by survey. Normally spection. All plotted points are in correct rela-
vertical control can be established only by esti- tion to one another and are tied together by
mation. Some photomaps have spot elevations, actual map coordinates. When determination of
but interpolation is difficult and inaccurate. actual map coordinates has not been completed,
b. Even though the photomap may be used ini- assumed coordinates may be used initially to
tially, survey is started at once. This survey tie together the points to be plotted.
provides a check on the accuracy of the photo-
map. If the photomap proves to be inaccurate, b. The observed firing chart is a chart on
a grid sheet firing chart based on survey is con- which all chart locations must be established by
structed. firing. Relative locations of the batteries and

16-1
Cl, FM 6-40

targets can be established only by the adjustment Details pertaining to construction of an ob-
of fire, hence the name "observed firing chart." served firing chart are contained in chapter 26.

Section II. PLOTTING

16-7. General points and locations determined by survey com-
Fire direction center personnel must make every putations. This scale is graduated ;n meters and
effort to insure the accuracy of data shown on yards at scales 1:25,000 and 1:50,000.
the firing chart. All firing charts in the battal-
ion should be identical so that any chart can be g. Protractor. The protractor (6, fig 16-1) is
used to mass the fires of the battalion. a plastic angle-measuring instrument made in
the shape of a half circle. The arc of the half
circle is graduated in 10-mil increments w;th
16-8. FDC Equipment
The use of special equipment is required in the each 100-mil graduation numbered in a clock-
construction and use of a firing chart. The ac- wise sequence and a counter-clockwise sequence.
curacy obtained with this special equipment de- The hairline connecting the 0 and 3200 ril grad-
pends as much on plotting habits and care of uations is used as a baseline for measuring angles.
equipment as on the accuracy of the equipment. The straightedge of the protractor is graduated
a. The 6H Pencil. The 6H (hard lead) pencil in meters at scales of 1:25,000 (black) and
(1, fig 16-1), sharpened to a wedge point, is used 1:50,000 (red).
for drawing all lines from which measurements
will be made. This procedure is required if the h. Range-Deflection Protractor. The range-
necessary accuracy is to be achieved. deflection protractor (RDP) (7, fig 16-1) is
used for measuring angles and distances. It is
b. The 4H Pencil. The 4H pencil (1, fig 16-1)
used for measuring range and deflection from the
is used for lettering and for accentuating tick
battery to the target and for polar plotting. The
marks. It should be sharpened to a conical point.
left edge of the arm is graduated in 50 meter
c. Map Pins. Map pins (2, fig 16-1), com-
increments (1:25,000 scale) and is read to an
monly referred to as plotting pins, are used for
marking battery, radar, and OP positions and accuracy of 10 meters, visually interpolating,
if necessary. The arc of the range-deflecting pro-
for plotting all points on the firing chart.
tractor covers 1,000 mils and is graduated in 5-
d. Plotting Scale (Aluminum). The aluminum
mil increments with each 50-mil increment indi-
plotting scale (3, fig 16-1) is a square-shaped
cated by a long line. It is read to an accuracy
scale used for plotting and determining the grid
of one mil, visually interpolating, if necessary.
coordinates of targets and critical points. This is
graduated in meters and yards at scales of i. Military Slide Rule. The military slide rule
1:25,000 and 1:50,000. The scale has a projecting (MSR) (8, fig 16-1) is discussed in paragraph
knob for ease of handling. 13-17.
e. Plotting Scale. The plotting scale (4, fig 16-1) j. Graphical Firing Table. The graphical firing
can be used for measuring distances and for table (GFT) (9, fig 16-1) is discussed in para-
plotting and determining the coordinates of
graph 17-10.
critical points such as batteries, radar, OP's and
registration points, which must be located k. Graphical Firing Table. The graphical site
accurately. The scale can be used in plotting table (GST) (10, fig 16-1) is discussed in paragraph
coordinates determined by survey computations 17-7.
when the grid lines on the firing chart are not 1. GFT Fan. See FM 6-40-5.
exactly 1,000 meters apart. The scale is graduated I
in meters, yards, and inches. The meter and yard 16-9. Tick Marks
graduations are at scales of 1:25,000, 1:50,000, and a. The tick mark is the symbol used for mark-
1:62,500. The plotting scale should never be used ing the location of an installation or a target
as a straightedge for drawing lines. plotted on a firing chart. The tick mark (fig
f. Coordinate Scale (Plastic). The plastic co- 16-2) is constructed in the form of a cross start-
ordinate scale (5, fig 16-1)-is a r'ght-angled ing approximately 40 meters from the pinhole
scale used for plotting and determining the co- on the chart and extending approximately 150
ordinates of targets other than registration meters in length (1:25,000 scale). Normally, the

16-2
 Figure 16-1. FDC equipment.
lines of the tick mark are drawn parallel to the unit, both the call sign and the call number
grid lines; however, if the plotted point falls on will be used.)
or very close to a grid line, the tick mark is (4) Battalion observation post. The as-
drawn at a 450 angle to the grid lines. The tick. signed number of the observation post is shown
mark for a point located by firing (recorded in black.; e.g., 02.
targets) is drawn in red. (5) Registration points. The registration
b. The identification of the point is placed in point and the number assigned are shown in
the upper right quadrant of the tick mark. The black; e.g., reg-pt 3.
installation or activity is indicated in the follow- (6) Targets. The assigned target number is

I
ing manner (fig 16-2): shown in black; e.g., AF741.
(1) Battery. The letter designation is (7) Checkpoints. A blue tickmark with
shown in the appropriate color; i.e., A-red, B- checkpoint number added in -upper right-hand
black, C-blue, D-orange. If more than four corner.
lettered batteries are assigned to one battalion, c. The altitude, in meters, of the plotted point
the color coding starts again with red and con- is placed in the lower left quadrant in black.
tinues in the same sequence. The pieces of an ar-
tillery battery are sometimes widely dispersed, d. If the plotted point has been fired on, the
and it may be necessary to plot the location of fuze used in fire for effect may be placed in the
each piece or each platoon center. lower right quadrant.
(2) Radar. The military symbol is shown e. If the target has been fired on with high-
in green. angle fire, the letters HA may be placed in the
(3) Forward observation post. The military upper left quadrant.
symbol and the call number of the observer are f. The charge fired may also be placed in the
shown in black. (If the observer is from another upper left quadrant.

16-3
 C1, FM 6-40

REDTICK MARKSINDICATE
OBSERVEDFIRELOCATIONS
0
USEOF TARGET
HIGHANGLE NUMBER
CHARGE

_1~~!_
ALTITUDE FUSE USED
IN EFFECT
HA
CHG3 AF772

AF741 421 VT
AF720
. .3 81
541 D

0
(SURVEYED)
(OBSERVED) 279

BROKENLINESINDICATERED
(BLUETICKMARK)
0
OPTIONAL

Figure 16-2. Marking plotted points.

16-10. Numbering the Firing Chart

The firing chart is numbered to correspond to a
mapped area of the zone of action. The southwest
corner of the grid sheet is assigned easting and
northing coordinates so that the area of opera-
tions is covered and there is sufficient space to
plot all necessary points on the chart. The firing
chart is numbered with a 4H pencil.
i 16-10.1 Plotting Critical Points
0
Critical points are those points that are located by
survey, normally to an accuracy of 1 meter (10-
digit grid). Battery locations, observer locations,
radar locations, and registration points are
examples of critical points. To plot a critical point,
one of the following procedures is used:
a. Grid square lines 1000 meters apart(fig 16-3).
EASTING
(1) Locate the grid square in which the target
is to be plotted 0).
(2) Place the scale along the left edge of the
grid square with the 0 of the scale at the lower left
corner of the grid square ().
(3) Slide the scale to the right; read the
easting on the horizontal scale using the N-S grid
line as an index 0).
(4) Plot the northing on the vertical scale
using a plotting pin. This is the plotted location of
the critical point @. (The same procedure is used NORTHING
for plotting targets or noncritical points.)
b. Grid lines not 1000 meters apart. Grid lines
are sometimes closer together or farther apart
than normal because of poor manufacturing
processes or because of shrinking or stretching of
the grid paper.
Figure 16-3. Plotting criticalpoints, grid lines
1000 meters apart. I
16-4
 Cl, FM 6-40

(1) When grid lines are closer than normal, (3) In both cases, only easting or northing can
plot the point by inclining the scale so that the 0 of be plotted at one time. Therefore, a four-point
the scale is on one grid line and the 1,000-meter plotting technique must be used to determine the
graduation is on the other grid line, the point will location of a critical point when grid lines are not
be plotted in its true relation to the grid (fig 16-4). 1000 meters apart (fig 16-6). The chart operator
should:
(a) Locate the grid square in which the
target is to be plotted.
(b) Using plotting pins and an aluminum
37 plotting scale, plot the easting grid in the gridJ
squares immediately above and below the grid
square in which the critical point is located@j.
Remove the plotting pins and, with a 6H pencil
(wedge point), connect the pin holes with a fine,
light line. This establishes an easting line on
which the critical point is located.
(c) In a similar manner, plot the northing of
the critical point in the grid squares immediately
to the right and left of the grid square in which the
critical point is located (2). Remove the pins and,
again using a 6H pencil, connect the pinholes with
a fine, light line ().
(d) With a plotting pin, mark the point at
which the two pencil lines cross. This is the plotted
location of the critical point.
(e) Erase the fine lines drawn while plotting
Figure 16-4. Grid square lines closer than 1000
F
and tickmark the critical point@.
meters apart.
(2) If the grid lines are farther apart than 0B 07
normal, again incline the plotting scale so that the
0 of the scale is on one grid line and the 2,000 meter
graduation is on the adjacent grid line (fig 16-5).
Multiply the distance to be plotted by 2, and scale
the result. For example, to plot an easting of 62650,
place pin at 1300 of plotting scale.

371 "
0 0

I Figure 16-5. Grid square lines greater than 1000

I meters apart. Figure 16-6. Four-pointplotting technique.

16-5
 Cl, FM 6-40

Note. The plotting scale, triangular, may be used 16-15. Measuring and Plotting With a Range
in a similar manner to plot critical points. Deflection Protractor
a. When several angles and distances are to be
16-1 1. Measuring Grid Coordinates of a plotted or measured from one point and one re-
Point With a Plotting Scale ference direction (e.g., polar plotting from
Grid coordinates are measured in the same man-
radar), the procedure is facilitated by the use of
ner as that in which they are plotted, and the dis-
the range-deflection protractor.
tance is read directly between the point and the
b. The range-deflection protractor must be pre-
grid line. The first digit(s) of the easting grid
pared for polar plotting. The 100-mil graduations
coordinate is the number appearing at the top or
on the arc are numbered in black as follows:
bottom of the north-south line west of the point.
(1) Number the rightmost graduation "0."
The balance of the easting grid coordinate is the
(2) Number the succeeding 100-mil gradua-
distance of the point east of this north-south
tions 1 through 9; the leftmost graduation is
line as measured with the scale. The first digit(s)
marked with the letters "AZ" to differentiate
of the northing coordinate is obtained from the
from the deflection scale (para 16-21).
right or left of the east-west line south of the
c. Angles up to 1,000 mils can be measured
point. The balance of the northing grid coordin-
conveniently with the range-deflection protrac-
ate is the distance of the point north of this line
tor. The procedure for measuring an angle is as
as measured with the scale. If the grid lines are
follows:
closer together or farther apart than normal, mea-
(1) Place vertex of the RDP at the point
surements are made in the same manner as that
from which the measurement is to be made.
in which points are plotted.
(2) Place the left edge of the arm of the RDP
16-12. Use of Coordinate Scale so that it coincides with the line that represents
When rapid massing on targets of opportunity or the left limit of the angle to be measured and then
rapid plotting of targets for an adjustment is place a pin at the right most graduation on the
necessary, plotting may be done with the arc of the range-deflection protractor.
* coordinate scale (5, fig 16-1). To use a coordinate (3) Rotate the RDP until the left edge cl
scale for determination of coordinates, place the 0 the arm coincides with the line that represents
of the scale at the lower left corner of the grid the right limit of the angle and read the'value of
square. Keeping the scale on the lower horizontal the angle from the azimuth scale opposite the
grid line, slide it to the right until the point for pin placed along the arc.
which coordinates are desired touches the edge of d. To measure the distance in meters between
the scale. When reading coordinates, examine the two points, place the vertex of the RDP at one
two sides of the coordinate scale to insure that the of the points and the left edge of the arm against
horizontal scale is alined with the east-west grid the pin in the second point and read the distance
line and the vertical scale is parallel with the opposite the pin in the second point.
north-south grid line. e. The procedure for plotting an angle is as
16-13. Measuring and Plotting an Angle With follows:
a Protractor (1) Place the vertex of the RDP at the
Angles may be measured or plotted with the plastic point from which the angle is to be plotted.
protractor (6, fig 16-1). FM 21-26 describes the (2) Place the left edge of the arm so that
use of a plastic protractor graduated in degrees. it coincides with the line from which the angle is
to be plotted.
16-14. Measuring and Plotting Distance With (3) Place the pin opposite the leftmost
a Plotting Scale graduation on the arc if the angle is to the lef'-
or opposite the rightmost graduation if the angle
The most accurate device for determining
tance between two points plotted on a firingthechart
dis- is to the right.
(4) Use the pin as an index and rotate the
is the plotting scale. The chart operator must
RDP through the desired angle.
take care to use the correct scale on the plotting
(5) Place a pin against the left edge of the
scale. After the direction of a line has been estab-
lished on a chart, the length of the line may be arm.
(6) Draw a line from the vertex of the
plotted with the plotting scale. angle through the pin location.

16-6
 Cl, FM 6-40

(2) Place a pin opposite the number on the

16-16. Preparing Chart With Polar Indexes arc of the RDP corresponding to the last three
for a Range-Deflection Protractor
a. The point from which polar plotting is to digits of the azimuth in which the arm of the RDP
be performed must be plotted on the firing charl is oriented. This value will be 600, 200, 800, 400,
If a large number of angles are to be measured or or 0, depending on the initial orientation of the
plotted from a point, the chart should be indexed range-deflection protractor. The location of the
pin represents an azimuth index of 1,000, 3,000,
b. Azimuth indexes are constructed on the 4,000, 6,000, or 0 mils, respectively. To locate an
firing chart at 1,000-mil intervals throughout the azimuth index for 2,000 mils, place a pin 1,000
target area (fig 16-7). These indexes are mils right of the index for 1000, for 5,000 mils
constructed so that the left edge of the arm of the place a pin 1,000 mils right of the index for
range-deflection protractor is alined on an azi- 4000.
muth that is a multiple of 1000 when the appro-
priate index is opposite the rightmost gradua- (3) Move the RDP so that the left edge of
tion on the arc. The procedure for establishing the the arm is against the pin, remove the pin, and
appropriate azimuth indexes is as follows: draw the azimuth index with a wedge-pointed
(1) Place the vertex of the RDP against a 6H pencil. The index is a fine line approxima-
pin in the OP or radar position and aline the arm tely 2 inches long, extending 1 inch above and 1
parallel to a convenient grid line. This estab- inch below the pinhole. Beginning approximately
lishes a reference line (not drawn) at an azi- 1/8 inch beyond the pin hole, label the index with
muth of 1,600, 3,200, 4,800, or 0 mils.

Figure 16-7. Range-deflection protractorand chart

prepared for polar-plotting.

16-7
 Cl, FM 6-40

the appropriate identification (01, 24, radar sym- that the azimuth on the index used added to the
bol, etc.) and aximuth value along the left side of value read from the arc opposite the index is equal
the line. For radar, the lettering on the indexes is to the azimuth reported. The left edge of the arm
green; for observation posts, the lettering is black. will then be on the azimuth reported from the
(4) To establish an aximuth index 1,000 mils observation post.
right (left) of a previously established index, c. Place a pin along the left edge of the arm
place the leftmost (rightmost) graduation on the at the reported distance (in meters) from the ob-
arc over the previously established index and then servation post.
place a pin opposite the rightmost (leftmost) Example: A target at an azimuth of 1,960
graduation. Then construct the index at the pin mils and a distance of 10,700 meters from 01 is
location as described in (3) above. to be plotted. Place the vertex of the range-
c. When the firing chart is indexed as described deflection protractor against the pin in 01. Rotate
in b above and the arc of the range-deflection the RDP until 960 on the arc is directly over
protractor is marked as described in paragraph the index marked 01AZ1000. Without moving the
16-15b, the value of the azimuth measured or RDP, place a pin along the left edge of the arm
plotted is the sum of the azimuth marked on the at 10,700 meters from 01. The pin marks the lo-
azimuth index and the value read on the arc op- cation of the target.
posite that azimuth index.
16-19. Target Grid
16-17. Preparing Chart When Azimuth to a a. General. The target grid is a device used for
Known Point Has Been Reported From converting, by plotting, the observer's target lo-
a Radar Measurement cations and corrections with respect to the OT
There will be occasions when the azimuth to a (observer-target) line (or some other line of
point plotted on the firing chart can be measured known direction) to target locations and correc-
by radar. In such cases the procedure described tions with respect to the GT (gun-target) line. A
in a and b below will be used for constructing the target grid is operated in conjunction with each
azimuth index. of the charts in the battalion to plot the obser-
a. Place the vertex of the range-deflection pro- ver's shift from a known point and his subsequent
tractor against the pin in the radar location and corrections, and to measure rough angles. An ar-
the left edge of the arm against the pin in the row extends across the target grid, with the point
known point. of the arrow at the 0 mark of the azimuth
b. With the arc numbered as prescribed in circle. This arrow indicates the direction of the
paragraph 16-15b, place a pin opposite the grad- OT line. The azimuth scale is printed around the
uation on the arc that is equal to the reported edge of the grid. The scale is graduated in a
azimuth minus the next lower 1,000 mils; e.g., counterclockwise direction at 10-mil intervals
if the reported azimuth is 4350, place the pin from 0 to 6,400 mils; each 100 mil graduation is
opposite 350. The pin marks the location of the numbered. The azimuth scale is numbered in a
azimuth index for the next lower 1,000 mils; counterclockwise direction because the grid is ro-
in this case, azimuth 4000. tated and the index is stationary. The scale of the
target grid must be the same as that of the firing
chart. When the target grid is used with a firing
16-18. Plotting a Point Located by Polar chart with a scale of 1:25,000, the smallest
Coordinates graduation of the target grid represents a dis-
The procedure for plotting a point located by po-
lar coordinates from an OP (or a radar) is as tance of 100 meters (fig 16-8).
b. Positioning the Target Grid. The chart op-
follows: erator places the center of the target grid over ,
a. Place the
tractor against vertex of the range-deflection pro-
the pin in the OP location with point in the target area. This point may be the
initial plottel location of the target to be ad-
the arc over the proper OP azimuth index. There
justed on, a registration point, a meteorological
will be only one OP azimuth index that can be
checkpoint, a previously fired target, or an arbi-
used for polar plotting a given point. The index
to be used is the one numbered with the multiple trarily selected point, such as a grid intersec-
of 1000 that is next lower than the azimuth re- tion. If the chart operator selects a point other
than the target to be plotted, he must insure that
ported by the observer. both the selected point and the target fall be-
b. Orient the range-deflection protractor so
neath the target grid. If subsequent corrections

16-8
 Cl, FM 6-40

Figure 16-8. Plotting a target with the target grid by

shift from a known point.

16-9
Cl, FM 6-40

cause the target to plot off the target grid, the (4) The OT direction now represented by thef
chart operator moves the target grid to a suit- target grid is the correct OT direction.
able new position and reorients it on the same (5) This procedure should be used only if the
azimuth given in the call for fire. observer is using the observer-target line to adjust.
c. Orienting the Target Grid. To use the target
grid for plotting a shift from a known point or
3,6 t
eecte%
for plotting the observer's subsequent corrections,
the chart operator constructs a north index on the
chart at the edge of the target grid. He places
the center of the target grid over the known
point or target location and rotates it until the
arrow (or a line on the target grid parallel to the
arrow) is parallel to a north-south grid line and
the arrowhead is pointing north. The chart oper-
ator constructs a permanent north index if the
chart is being prepared to plot a shift from a
known point. He draws the index at 0 azimuth on
the chart 1 inch above and 1 inch below the edge
of the target grid and marks the index "N" to
prevent its being confused with other indexes
on the chart. If subsequent corrections are to be
plotted, the chart operator will not construct a
permanent north index. A pin set out at 0 azi-
muth in the same manner as described above is
sufficient since the initial target location is usually
only transitory. The chart operator orients the
target grid for both a shift from a known point
and for subsequent corrections by rotating it un-
til the figure opposite the north index is the same
as the OT direction announced by the observer.
This operation places the arrow and all lines
parallel to it on the same direction as the OT
line (fig 16-8). Figure 16-9. Correcting a misorientation of the
d. Procedures to Correct a Misoriented Target target grid.
Grid. If it appears to the FDC that the OT e. Plotting a Target by Shift From a Known
direction sent by the FO is incorrect, the FDC Point.
should contact the FO and have him verify his
direction. If an observer (e.g., an untrained (1) To use the target grid for plotting a
observer) is unable to send a correct OT direction, target by the shift from a known point method,
the FDC can use the following technique to correct a north index must have been constructed for
the direction. the known point. To construct the north index,
(1) In figure 16-9, the observer's first the chart operator places the center of the target
correction is ADD 400 (a line spotting). The chart grid over the known point and rotates the target
operator moves the target pin to a point equivalent grid so that the arrow and all lines parallel to
to 400 meters up the OT line, and a round is fired. the arrow are parallel to the north-south grid
(2) The observer's next correction of RIGHT lines on the firing chart. He draws the index on
200 indicates that the reported direction is in error the chart, at 0 azimuth, extending 1 inch above
(second round should have been a line shot if and 1 inch below the edge of the target grid
direction was correct). The chart operator moves and labels it "N" to prevent its being con-
the target pin to a point 200 meters right of its last fused with other indexes on the chart. The chart
position and notes the position of the constructed operator orients the target grid by rotating it un-
line shot. til the azimuth reading opposite the north index is
(3) While a round is being fired with these
the same as the OT direction announced by the ob-
data, the chart operator rotates the target grid server. This operation places the arrow and all
until the arrow is parallel to the line formed by the lines parallel to it on the same direction as the
line shot and constructed line shot. OT line (fig 16-8).

16-10
 Cl, FM 6-40

(2) To use the target grid when targets are of accuracy is not required. The chart operator
located by any means other than a shift from a measures an angle by placing the center of the
known point, a north index need not be con- target grid over the apex of the angle to be mea-
structed. A pin set out at 0 azimuth in the same sured and the 0 of the azimuth circle over the
manner as described above is sufficient since the right side of the angle. He then reads the size of
target location will not normally be known. the angle at the point on the azimuth circle that
f. Plotting Subsequent Corrections. Once the is intersected by the left side of the angle. See
HCO has announced to the computer the initial paragraph 18-11 for a discussion on determina-
range and deflection to the target, he will orient tion of angle T.
the target grid for subsequent corrections. This It. Marking the Target Grid. For convenience
is accomplished as described in c above. The tar- in plotting the chart the operator may mark the
get grid should be oriented only once for subse- target with a plus sign in the first and fourth
quent corrections unless the observer's corrections quadrants, a minus sign in the second and thrd
are so large that the plot does not fall under quadrants, an R to the right of the arrow near
the target grid. 4800, and an L to the left of the arrow near
g. Measuring an Angle. The target grid may be 1600 (fig 16-8).
used for measuring angles when a high degree

Section Ill. DETERMINATION OF CHART DATA

16-20. General plotted, and the deflection indexes must be con-

The purpose of a firing chart is to provide a gra- structed. When each piece or each platoon center
phic means for determining chart data. Chart is plotted on the firing chart, tick marks and de-
data consists of the range (in meters), direction flection indexes are identified by using the stand-
(deflection in mils), and vertical interval from ard battery color code together with the number
the battery center to the target. of the piece or platoon.
a. A horizontal control chart (usually a grd a. Deflection Index. The deflection index is used
sheet) is used for determining range and direc- in conjunction with the range-deflection protrac-
tion (deflection from the battery to the target). tor for determining chart deflection (fig 16-11).
The range-deflection protractor is the device used This index is constructed as follows:
for measuring range and deflection. (1) With the vertex of the range-deflection
b. A vertical control chart (usually a grid sheet protractor against the pin in the battery posi-
supplemented by a 1:50,000 map) is used for tion, orient the left edge of the arm in the direc-
determining the vertical interval between the bat- tion in which the battery is laid. If the battery
tery and the target. It may also be used for deter- is laid on a grid azimuth, plot the azimuth from
mining range and direction. the battery position. Using the procedure de-
scribed in paragraph 16-16b (1) and (2), place
16-21. Numbering the Range-Deflection a pin in the chart to represent the azimuth cor-
Protractor for Deflection responding to the largest multiple of 1000 con-
Direction normally is measured and announced tained in the azimuth of fire. (Do not draw an
in terms of deflection. To facilitate the determina- index, since indexes are drawn only for OP's
tion of deflection, number the mil scale on the and radar positions.) Move the RDP until the
arc of the range-deflection protractor as follows: last three digits of the azimuth of fire, as read
Number the left graduation of the mil scale 0. from the azimuth scale of the RDP, are opposite
Number the graduations in black to the right in the pin. The left edge of the RDP is now oriented
100-mil increments but omit the zeros represent- on the direction in which the battery is laid. If
ing hundreds; for example, write the numbers the battery is laid on the registration point, place
100, 200, and 300 as 1, 2, and 3, (fig 16-10). The the left edge of the RDP against the pin in the
last graduation on the right end of the arc is registration point.
marked "DF" to differentiate from the azimuth (2) Now place the pin in the chart at the
scale. 200-mil graduation. Move the RDP so that the
left edge of the arm is against this pin, remove
16-22. Preparing the Firing Chart the pin, and draw a fine line (with a 6H pencil)
Before the firing chart can be used for deter- on the chart along the range scale. Extend the line
mining chart data, the battery center must be 1 inch above and 1 inch below the pinhole. Label

16-11
Cl, FM 6-40

this index with the appropriate battery designa-

tion and the number 3. The 3 represents 3,000
mils. (For referred deflections of 2400 and 2800
the pin would be placed at the 4 and 8, respective-
ly, and the index would be labeled 2 for 2,000
mils).
150

45

140

135
INCH- -PINHOLE
130

125

120

115

110

105

100 Figure 16-11. Deflection indexes.

95

90 16-23. Preparing the Firing Chart for

85
0
6,4O-Mil Capability
so
AZ When firing in a 6,400-mil sector is required and
RANGE ) 75 the batteries are plotted in the center of the firing
ARM
To
chart, the indexes are constructed and numbered
65
as shown in figures 16-12 and 16-13.
so
AZ
55 a. Speed of adjustment is slowed somewhat by
50 the large deflection shifts sometimes required in
45 providing 6,400-mil coverage. The fire direction
officer can minimize this loss of time caused by

I.
40

35 shifting trails by announcing a rough azimuth or

30
a rough deflection as a special instruction. One
25 DEFLECTION method of determining and directing this rough
20
orientation is as follows. The howitzer crew
15
places azimuth stakes out in the firing battery for
10
the cardinal directions. The HCO initially
VERTEX determines a rough azimuth by visual estimation
or from a target grid placed face down over the
Figure 16-10. Range-deflection protractor numbered battery position and oriented on grid north. The
for measuring deflection and azimuth. computer announces this azimuth in the special
(3) Draw an arrowhead on the index point- instructions. The howitzer crew, using the
ing toward the battery at a point 1/8 inch beyond azimuth stakes, immediately begins pointing the
the pinhole. Use the appropriate battery color to weapon in the appropriate direction.
mark the arrowhead, battery designation, and b. When indexing the firing chart for 6,400-
number. mil capability, the chart operator may find that
b. Supplementary Deflection Indexes. Locate the RDP will measure a few mils more or less
the right (left) supplementary index by placing than 6,400 mils. When this is the case, he should
the leftmost (rightmost) graduation on the arc apply a proportionate part of the error to each
of the range-deflection protractor over the de- of the 1,000-mil deflection indexes. This will place
flection index and placing a pin opposite the a small error in each deflection index rather
rightmost (leftmost) graduation. Draw the in- than place all the error at one point.
dex as described in a(2) and (3) above. For
weapons with referred deflection of 3200, label 16-24. Determination of Chart Range and
the left supplementary index with the battery Deflection
designation and the number 4 and the right sup- Chart range and deflection are measured as fol-
plementary index with the battery designation lows:
and the number 2. a. Place the vertex of the range-deflection

16-12
 Cl, FM 6-40

Figure 16-12. Firing chart for 6400 mil capability using

the 0 to 6400 panoramic telescope.

protractor against the pin in the battery posi- altitude is disregarded.) The observation post is
the known point in a polar plot mission.
tion and the left edge of the arm against the pin
in the target location. (3) If the observer locates the target by grid
coordinates, the vertical control operator deter-
b. Read the range, in meters, on the scale of
mines the altitude from a map.
the arm opposite site the pin in the target loca-
b. The vertical control operator determines the
tion. Measure and announce the range to the
nearest 10 meters. vertical interval by subtracting the altitude of the
battery from the altitude of the target. If the
c. Read the chart deflection on the arc opposite
altitude of the target is greater than that of the
the appropriate deflection index. Determine the
value of this deflection by combining the read- battery, the sign of the vertical interval is plus.
If the altitude of the target is less than that of
ing on the arc at the deflection index with the
1,000-mil designation of that index. the battery, the sign of the vertical interval is
minus.
16-25. Target Altitude and Vertical Interval 16-26. Charts
a. The altitude of the target may have been a. S3 Chart. If the S3 desires, a separate chart
determined by survey, it may be given in the is constructed to show the fire' capabilities and the
call for fire, or it may be determined by FDC per- locations of the firing batteries, forward troops,
sonnel. coordinating measures, registration points, and
(1) If the call for fire is from another unit met checkpoints. This chart should be a map.
or a higher headquarters, the altitude normally b. Horizontal Control Chart. The horizontal
is given in the call for fire. control chart is usually a grid sheet on which are
(2) If the observer locates the target with re- plotted the locations of the firing batteries,
ference to a known point, the vertical control surveyed observation posts, field artillery radars,
operator determines the altitude of the target by registration points, met checkpoints, final
applying the vertical shift to the altitude of the protective fires, and targets as ordered by the FDO
known point. If no vertical shift is specified, the or requested by the observers. The horizontal
altitude of the target is assumed to be the same control operator (HCO) maintains'the horizontal
as the altitude of the known point. (The map control chart.

16-13
 Cl, FM 6-40

Figure 16-13. Firing chart for 6400 mil capability using

the 0 to 3200 panoramic telescope.

c. Vertical Control Chart. The vertical control coordinates and altitude of each firing battery and
chart is normally a grid sheet supplemented by a all critical points plotted on the chart should be
1:50,000 map on which are plotted the locations of attached to each chart. In addition, the azimuths
the firing batteries, surveyed observation posts, on which the batteries are laid, the azimuth of the
field artillery radars registration points, met orienting lines, the orienting angles, and the
checkpoints, final protective fires, and targets as reference direction for the surveyed observation
ordered by the FDO or requested by the observers. posts should be recorded.
The vertical control chart may be used during
multiple missions to produce horizontal data. The 16-27. Equipment
vertical control operator (VCO) maintains the a. Vertical Control Operator and Horizontal
vertical control chart and the 1:50,000 map. He Control Operator. In addition to the more com-
maintains the following overlays for use with the mon equipment, such as plotting pin and colored
map: pencils, each chart operator will have a coordin-
(1) A fire capabilites overlay (para 24-42). ate scale and a range deflection protractor. The
(2) A dead space overlay (para 24-40). vertical control operator will also have a graphi-
(3) A situation overlay on which are posted cal site table for each caliber of weapon for
the coordination measures, friendly locations, which he must compute site.
routes of current and planned patrols, registration b. Computer. Each computer will have a gra-
points, and recorded targets. phical firing table and a tabular firing table for
d. Report of/Surveyed Data. For convenience, a the caliber and type of weapon for which he is
sheet of paper on which are tabulated the grid computing.

16-14
 Cl, FM 6-40

greater than 100 mils must be computed by use of

"the military slide rule and tangent function.
17-11. Low-Angle Graphical Firing Table
(GFT) 3
b. The procedure for determining site is as The base of the GFT is 18 inches long and 32
follows: Move the hairline to the vertical inter- inches wide. On each side of the base are a set of
val in meters on the D scale, set the range in ballistic scales for a single charge (discussed in
..meters under the hairline on the appropriate site- order from top to bottom in a through h below),
range scale for the selected charge, and read the gagepoints (i, J, and k below), a range K line (1
site on the D scale opposite the M gagepoint. below), and a fuze K line (m below).
(Use the TAG scale if the vertical interval is a. ICM Scale. On all new GFT's, an ICM scale
positive; use the TBG scale if the vertical inter- is located above the HE scales. It consists of a
val is negative.) Since the site-range scales are quadrant elevation (QE) scale and a fuze setting
graduated every 100 meters, visual interpolation scale for determining ICM firing data. The QE
is usually necessary for setting off the range. If scale is graduated in mils and the fuze setting
the range for the charge being fired is not in- scale to the nearest 0.1 fuze setting increment.
included on the GST, site must be determined from This scale is applicable only for the ICM model
the firing tables as explained in paragraph 17-6f. number indicated at the left end of the scale.
c. The procedure for determining vertical in- b. Drift Scale. The drift (DRIFT) scale shows
terval when the angle of site and the range are projectile drift in mils, printed in black. Drift is
known is as follows: Set the M gagepoint over always to the right. Therefore, the correction is
the angle of site on the D scale, set the range always left. Elevations at which drift changes are
under the hairline on the C scale and read the printed in red'above the scale.
vertical interval under the hairline on the D c. 100IR Scale. The 100/R scale gives the
number of mils necessary to shift the point of burst
scale. The procedure for determining vertical in-
laterally or vertically 100 meters for a given range.
terval when the site and the range are known is
The numbers on the scale are printed in red.
as follows: Set the M gagepoint over the site on
d. Range Scale. The range scale is the basic
the D scale, set the range under the hairline on
scale and all other scales are plotted with
the appropriate site-range scale, and read the reference to it. Range is expressed logarithmically
vertical interval under the hairline on the D scale. in meters and varies for each charge. The range
The vertical interval takes the sign of the angle scale is developed to give as large a range spread
of site. as possible and still permit graduations large
enough for accurate readings. Range is read to the
17-9. Quadrant Elevation nearest 10 meters.
Quadrant elevation is the sum of elevation and
site or the sum of the angle of site and the eleva- e. Elevation Scale. The elevation (ELEV) scale
is graduated in mils to show elevation; elevation
tion corresponding to range plus complementary
increases from left to right and is read to the
range. Quadrant elevation is announced as
nearest 1 mil. The numbers on this scale are
QUADRANT (so much).
printed black and red. The red numbers denote the
17-10. Firing Tables elevations that are within range transfer limits for
The current tabular firing tables for each cannon the one-plot GFT setting. For the one-plot GFT
constitute the basic source of ballistic data for setting, the range-to the registration point or met
that cannon and, in most cases, the required data checkpoint must be between the leftmost and
can be extracted from the tables. However, deter- rightmost red elevation numbers.
mination of data from the tabular firing tables f. Fuze Setting Scale. The fuze setting (FS)
is time consuming. Graphical firing tables (GFT) scale gives the fuze setting for the M564 fuze and is
provide a simple means of quickly determining read to the nearest 0.1 increment.
firing data. Graphical firing tables are used prin- g. Fork Scale. The fork scale shows the change
cipally for determining elevations for ranges de- in elevation necessary to move the mean point of
termined from the firing chart. Each table con- impact 4 range probable errors. The numbers on
sists of one or more rules, and each rule consists this scale are printed in red.
of a base and a cursor. The construction of the h. Change to Fuze Setting for a 10-Meter
rules depends on whether the GFT is for low- Change in Height of Burst Scale. The change to
angle or high-angle fire. The high-angle GFT is fuze setting for a 10-meter change in height of
described in paragraph 25-2. The low-angle burst ( AFS/A 10 MHOB) scale is graduated in 0.1
GFT is described in paragraph 17-11. increments and is read to the nearest 0.01

17-3
 Cl, FM 6-40

increment. This scale indicates the amount of m. Fuze K Line. The fuze K line is a broken
correction that must be applied to the M564 fuze black line near the left edge of the rule. The angle
setting to raise or lower the height of burst 10 made by the fuze K line with the scales
meters at a given range. geometrically portrays the predicted rate at which
i. Met Check Gagepoints. Aboe the fuze setting the fuze K varies with range. A time gageline
line are red triangular gagepoints. The apex of drawn on the cursor parallel to the fuze K line will
each triangle points to the quadrant elevation indicate fuze settings that vary at the same
that, under standard conditions, results in the predicted rate as does fuze K.
maximum ordinate of the trajectory passing 17-12. GFTFan I
through a whole line number of a met message. The GFT fan consists of an RDP modified on the
The ranges and quadrant elevations at the met range arm to accept an all-charge ballistic scale.
check gagepoints are preferred for met plus VE The scale consists of the following subscales:
computations. a. Range Scale. A range scale matching the
j. Height-of-Burst Probable Error Gagepoints. range scale on the RDP arm is drawn on the left
Above the fork scale on all GFT's (except that for side of the ballistic scale.
charge 1) are two red triangular gagepoints. The b. Charge Scales. For each charge there are
gagepoint on the right indicates the range and three scales (described from top to bottom):
fuze setting at which the probable error in height (1) An M564 fuze setting scale (in red)
of burst is 15 meters. Large height-of-burst graduated every whole fuze setting increment and
dispersion must be expected when time fuze is read to the 0.1 fuze setting increment.
used with a particular charge at ranges exceeding (2) An HE elevation scale (in black) used as
that indicated by the right gagepoint. The the elevation scale on the GFT.
gagepoint on the left indicates the range at which (3) A drift scale (in black) again used as the
the probable error in height of burst for the next drift scale on the GFT.
lower charge is 15 meters. c. 100/R Scale. In black down the right side of
k. Range ProbableError Gagepoint. Above the the ballistic scale are the 100/R values used as the
change in fuze setting for a 10-meter change in 100/R values on the GFT.
height of burst scale is a black triangular 17-13. Determining Data With the GFT or
gagepoint. This gagepoint indicates the range and GFT Fan
elevation at which the range probable error is 25 a. The procedure for determining the elevation
meters. If the rule for a charge has no range and fuze setting with the graphical firing table
when no corrections are known is as follows:
probable error gagepoint shown, the range
probable error does not reach 25 meters for that
charge.
(1) Place the hairline over the measured chart
range (GFT) or place the target pin in the vertex of
the cursor (GFT fan).
I
1. Range K Line. The range K line is a broken (2) Read the elevation under the hairline from
black line near the right edge of the rule. The angle the elevation scale.
made by the range K line with the scales (3) Read the fuze setting under the hairline
geometrically portrays the predicted rate at which from the fuze setting scale.
the range K varies with range. An elevation b. Corrections determined from registration are
gageline drawn on the cursor parallel to the range applied to the GFT as described in chapter 20.
K line will indicate elevations that vary at the
same rate as does range K.
c. See FM 6-40-5 for a discussion of applying
GFT settings to the GFT fan. I

17-4
 Cl, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 17
FIRING DATA

17-1. General a prescribed range, the tube must be elevated

The data determined from the firing chart must from the horizontal to a vertical angle known as
be converted to settings to be placed on the can- elevation. The elevation can be determined from
non and ammunition so that the projectile may the tabular or graphical firing tables.
hit the point to which the chart data have been b. In the tabular firing tables, range is listed
measured. These data, called firing data, normal- every 100 meters and an elevation, valid under
ly are computed in the fire direction center. Fir- certain assumed standard conditions, is given for
ing data consists of the charge, deflection, fuze each listed range. Elevations corresponding to
setting (when applicable), and quadrant eleva- ranges between listed ranges are determined by
tion. interpolation.
c. On the GFT's and GFT fans, elevation, valid
17-2. Charge under assumed standard conditions, is
For cannons that fire semifixed or separate-load- determined from the elevation scale. The hairline
ing ammunition, the amount of propellant may of the cursor is placed over the range in question
be varied. The propellant is packaged in incre- and the elevation is read under the hairline on the
elevation scale.
ments, and the amount to be used is expressed in
increments as, for example, CHARGE 5. Charge
5 contains increments 1 through 5. 17-6. Site
a. If the target is at an altitude other than
that of the artillery piece(s) to be fired, the
17-3. Fuze Setting
trajectory may not pass through the target. This
a. When time fuze is to be fired, the computer
difference in altitude is a value known as the
will determine a fuze setting to be placed on the
vertical interval (VI). The sign of the vertical
fuze to cause it to function at the desired point
interval depends on whether the target is above
along the trajectory. The fuze setting is a function
or below the weapon(s) (e, below).
of elevation plus complementary angle of site.
b. The elevation from the firing tables com-
When the complementary angle of site is small,
pensates for the horizontal range (para 17-5a).
the fuze setting may be considered a function of
The vertical interval must also be compensated
elevation alone.
b. The fuze setting corresponding to the for; otherwise, in the case of a positive VI, a
round fired at the firing table elevation will fall
elevation (or elevation plus comp site) for fuze
M564 may be determined from either the tabular short. The opposite is true of a negative vertical
or graphical firing tables. interval. The VI is compensated for by the com-
putation of a vertical angle known as angle of
c. The fuze setting is announced as FUZE
I TIME, (so much). site. The angle of site takes the algebraic sign of
the vertical interval.
17-4. Deflection c. Another characteristic of the trajectory in
The deflection to be fired is termed the piece the atmosphere is that of nonrigidity. Unless this
deflection. The computer determines the piece is compensated for, a round fired from a tube
deflection by applying, according to the LARS raised to an angle the sum of elevation plus angle
rule, the total deflection correction determined of site will not strike the target. The value of the
from the deflection correction scale to the chart angle which compensates for nonrigidity of the
deflection announced by the horizontal control
trajectory is the complementary angle of site or
operator. The piece deflection is announced in the comp site. The comp site will also compensate for
fire commands as DEFLECTION (so much).
the slant range. The comp site is a signed value.
17-5. Elevation In low angle fire it has the same sign as the angle
a. In order that an artillery piece, firing a of site. In high angle fire it always has the op-
given charge, may cause a projectile to achieve posite sign.

17-1
 Cl, FM 6-40

d. The algebraic sum of the angle of site and a. The base contains the D scale, which is
the comp site is that value known as site. Site
identical with that of any slide rule. The D scale is
is defined as the angle formed by the base of the
the base scale of the GST and is used in all
trajectory and the line of site. computations made with the GST.

I.
e. The vertical control operator determines site.
b. The slide contains the C scale (range), yard
He may determine site by use of the tabular (YD) and meter (M) gagepoints, and the site-range
firing tables (f below) or by use of the graphical scales.
site table (GST) (para 17-8). Normally, the (1) The C scale, which is identical with
preferred method, because of its speed and ac- that on any slide rule, can be read in meters and
curacy, is by use of the graphical site table. Re- yards.
gardless of the method used, he must first de- (2) The M and YD gagepoints may be used
termine the vertical interval. He determines the for converting yards to meters or for converting
vertical interval by subtracting the altitude of meters to yards. To convert yards to meters
the battery from the altitude of the target. If the
(meters to yards), place the M gagepoint (YD
altitude of the target is greater than that of the gagepoint) opposite the range in yards (meters)
battery, the sign of the vertical interval is plus. on the D scale. Opposite the YD gagepoint (M
If the altitude of the target is less than that of
gagepoint), read the range in meters (yards).
the battery, the sign of the vertical interval is
(3) Two site-range scales are provided for
minus. each charge-one in black, marked "TAG" (tar-
f. Once the vertical control operator has deter-
get above gun), and one in red, marked "TBG"
mined the vertical interval, he may determine
(target below gun). The site-range scales are
site by individually determining its component
used, along with the D scale in computing site
parts, angle of site and comp site, and then or vertical interval. The site-range scales include
algebraically adding them together. the effect of comp site. This is reflected in the
(1) Angle of site is determined to the near- spacing of the 100-meter graduations on each
est 1/10 mil. For angles of site of 100 mils or less,
site-range scale. The TAG and TBG scales differ
the VCO uses the mil relation ih = W/R, in which
by small amounts because the comp site factor
Y= angle of site, W = vertical interval, and for a minus angle of site differs from that for a
R = chart range in thousands to the nearest 100
plus angle of site.
(e.g., range 4060 is expressed as 4.1). For angles
c. The GST possesses certain limitations,
of site greater than 100 mils, he uses the formula
which are printed in red on the back of the GST.
tangent of the angle of site equals the vertical
These limitations must not be exceeded or an
interval divided by the chart range. The angle of
error greater than 1 mi may be introduced into
site takes the sign of the vertical interval.
the computations. A short explanation of its use
(2) Comp site is determined to the nearest and illustrative examples are also printed on the
one-tenth mil. The VCO extracts the appropriate
back of the GST.
comp site factor from table G of the firing tables.
He multiplies the angle of site ((1) above) by 17-8. Computations With the GST
the comp site factor. The comp site takes the The GST may be used for computing angles of
same sign as the comp site factor. site of 100 mils or less, for computing site, or for
(3) Site is the sum of the angle of site and computing vertical interval when the angle of
comp site. Site is expressed to the nearest mil. site (vertical angle) or site and the range (dis-
tance) are known.
a. Angles of site of 100 mils or less are deter-
17-7. Graphical Site Table (GST) mined by use of the mil relation and the C and
The determination of site by use of angle of site
D scales. The procedure is as follows: Move the
and the comp site factor from the tabular firing
hairline to the vertical interval in meters on the
tables is time consuming. Use of the graphical D scale, set the range in thousands of meters
site table facilitates the computation of angle of
under the hairline on the C scale, and read the
site (vertical angle) or site. The GST can also angle of site on the D scale opposite the M gage-
be used for determining the vertical interval
point. The angle of site is determined to the
wvhen the site or angle of site (vertical angle)
nearest whole mil. Reading the value of the
and the range (distance) are known. The GST
angle of site under the meter gagepoint refines
consists of a base, a slide, and a cursor (a piece
the error in the mail relation (1.0186) that would
of clear plastic with a vertical hairline thi~ough
be incurred by straight division and, therefore,
the center). produces a more accurate solution. Angles of site

17-2
 Cl, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 18

FIRE DIRECTION PROCEDURES

Section I. BATTALION FDC PROCEDURES

*18-1. General through (10) in the sequence in which they are

The fire direction procedures presented in this transmitted.
section arefor technicalfire directionconducted at (1) Unit to fire.
battalion level (centralized). See FM 6-40-5 for a (2) Adjusting element/method of fire of
discussion of technical fire direction at the battery adjusting element.
level (decentralized). In either case the basic (3) Basis for corrections.
principles remain the same. (4) Distribution.
(5) Projectile.
18-2. FDC Organization (6) Ammunition lot and charge.
The personnel of the fire direction center are (7) Fuze.
assigned specific duties. To provide efficient fire (8) Number of rounds.
control, FDC personnel perform their duties in a (9) Range spread, lateral spread, zone or
prescribed sequence and manner. The organiza- sweep.
tion of the FDC and duties of FDC personnel (10) Time of opening fire.
are covered in chapter 15. c. To shorten and streamline the fire order,
designate fire order standards (see FM 6-40-5).
* 18-3. Recording the Call for Fire Every element of the fire order must be addressed
a. Missions coming to the battalion FDC by either in the established fire order standards or in
wire or radio are recorded and read back by a the verbal fire order issued before each mission.
radio-telephone operator (RTO). The radio- The computer will be guided entirely by the fire
telephone operator insures that all members of the order standards and the fire order issued by the
FDC are alerted to the mission by announcing FDO. Silence does not mean agreement with the
FIRE MISSION. call for fire, it means the standard is to be used.
b. All computers not actively engaged in Note. When operating in a centralized fire
another mission record the call for fire on DA direction mode, standards are only established in
Form 4504 (Record of Fire). (DA Form 4504 is the battalion FDC. In the decentralized mode,
available through normal AG publication supply they are established only in the battery FDC's.
d. The considerations affecting the elements of
channels.)
the fire order are explained in (1) through (10)
18-4. Plotting the Target Location below.
(1) Unit to fire. At battalion level,
When a call for fire is received, each chart opera- this
tor not engaged in another fire mission immedi- element gives the unit(s) to fire for effect and, if
ately plots the location of the new target. necessary, the adjusting unit. BATTALION
BRAVO means the battalion will fire for effect
0 18-5. Fire Order with Bravo battery adjusting. BRAVO means "B"
a. When a target is plotted, the FDO examines battery will adjust and fire for effect by itself. For
the target plot. He analyzes the target on the basis registrations and missions requiring battalion
of its location relative to friendly forces, fire fires, it is usually better to use the midrange
coordination measures, the zones of fire, and battery as the adjusting battery. If the battalion
registration points. From his analysis, he decides consists of different caliber weapons, the battery
whether the mission should be fired, and if so, how with the smallest caliber is normally used for
the target should be attacked. adjusting. The selection of the battery or bat-
b. If the mission is to be fired, the FDO issues teries to fire for effect in a mission depends on -
the fire order, which informs the FDC of the (a) The number of batteries available.
manner in which the mission will be fired. The fire (b) The size of the area to be covered
order consists of some or all of the elements in (1) and the accuracy of the location.

18-1
 Cl, FM 6-40

(c) The caliber and type of weapons and levels.

the number of weapons per battery. (b) For fixed and semifixed ammunition,
(d) Whether or not surprise fire is possi- the ammunition lot number pertains to an as-
ble. sembled projectile-propellant combination. For
(e) The importance of the target. simplicity, the lot number may be coded; e.g.,
(f) The locations of batteries relative to lot X. Letters at the beginning of the alphabet
each other and to the target. are used as prefixes of target numbers and should
(g) The type of fire desired (destruction, not be used to designate lots. This will prevent
neutralization, harassing or interdiction). confusion in the fire order. For separate-loading
(h) The battery with the most recent or ammunition, the lot number pertains to a specific
the best corrections in the zone to be covered. projectile-propellant combination. The lot may
(i) The status of ammunition. be coded, for example, as lot XY, with X de-
(j) The policies of the commander. signating the projectile lot and Y designating
(2) Adjusting element/method of fire of the propellant lot. Segregation and coding of
adjusting element. This element directs which fuzes by lot number is necessary for time fuzes
piece(s) within the adjusting unit ((1) above) will only.
actually fire the adjustment. Unless the observer (c) The mission, nature of the target and
requests a different method of fire, one gun will be terrain, ammunition available, type of fuze to be
used during the adjustment (i.e., NUMBER 3, used, range, and effects sought govern the
ONE ROUND). selection of the charge to be used.
(3) Basis for corrections. The standard for (d) If high angle fire is to be used, the FDO
this element is usually "Fastest Method". The will replace the charge selection with the phrase
FDO may order "USE GFT", "USE FADAC", or HIGH ANGLE. The computer will then select the
"USE TFT". charge.
(4) Distribution. When the FDO desires or (e) Each computer will have readily
the observer has requested a pattern of bursts available a list of GFT settings showing the lot
other than that set as the standard, the fire order numbers and charges used.
must include a command for distribution. When (f) When a mission requiring adjustment is
special corrections are desired, the FDO to be fired by only one battery, the lot number
commands SPECIAL CORRECTIONS followed specified should be one that implements the
by a description of the sheaf desired; e.g., battery commander's plans and policies with
SPECIAL CORRECTIONS, CONVERGED respect to expenditure of lots on hand; e.g.,
SHEAF. When the FDO wishes to adjust only the consume the smallest of the odd lots first.
width of the sheaf by the rapid computation and (g) If the battalion FDO desires to change
application of a deflection difference, he indicates the lot or charge for a particular mission, he
that wish by announcing the desired width of announces: BATTALION, ALFA, USE GFT;
sheaf; e.g., SHEAF 100 METERS. ALFA AND BRAVO LOT XRAY ZULU,
(5) Projectile. The projectile or combination CHARGE 5; CHARLIE, LOT XRAY YANKEE,
of projectiles selected depends on the mission and CHARGE 4.
the nature of the target. (7) Fuze. The mission, description of target
(6) Ammunition lot and charge. and terrain, fuzes available, range, and effects
sought govern the selection of the fuze to be used.
(a) There can be an appreciable differ-
ence in the ballistic characteristics of different (8) Number of rounds. The mission, the
propellant lots of ammunition. Disregard of pro- description of target, the batteries and
ammunition available, and pertinent orders from
pellant lot numbers can seriously impair the ac-
higher headquarters govern the number of rounds
curacy of fire. Mixing propellant lots in a single
to be fired in fire for effect. Each cannon within the
observed fire mission can materially increase the unit to fire element ((1) above) will fire the number
dispersion pattern and can even invalidate an
adjustment. Large propellant lots normally are of rounds specified.
(9) Range spread, lateral spread, zone or
reserved for registrations and subsequent trans-
sweep. The area to be covered, the accuracy of the
fers (observed and unobserved). Small propel-
target location, and the probable error of the
lant lots are expended on battery missions when weapon should be considered in determining the
adjustment is necessary. Accurate ammunition range spread, lateral spread, zone, or sweep to be
records, to include a record of lot numbers, must used. Normally, a battalion should not fire with a
be maintained at section, battery, and battalion range spread greater than 1 C (100 meters)

18-2
 Cl, FM 6-40

between batteries, because a greater spread will Table 18-2. "B" Battery Fire Order Standards.
not give uniform coverage of the target area. When
a zone (sweep) is to be fired, the fire order should ELEMENT STANDARD
specify the zone (sweep) in terms of mils and
UNIT TO FIRE BATTERY
quadrants (deflections); e.g., ZONE (SWEEP) 5
MILS 5 QUADRANTS (5 DEFLECTIONS). If ADJ ELEMENT/MOF # 30
OF ADJ ELEMENT
three quadrants (deflections) are to be fired, only
the zone (sweep) need be stated; e.g., ZONE BASIS FOR FASTEST METHOD
(SWEEP) 5 MILS. CORRECTIONS
DISTRIBUTION PARALLEL
(10) Time of opening fire. The mission, the
description of the target, and the effect desired PROJECTILE HE
govern the selection of time of opening fire. The AMMO LOT& CHG RT/4
time of opening fire may be stated as TIME ON FUZE Q
TARGET (TOT), AT MY COMMAND, or any NUMBER OF - _

specific time according to a prearranged schedule. ROUNDS

e. Table 18-1 is an example of a standard RANGE SPREAD,
battalion level fire order in a centralized fire LATERAL SPREAD, CENTER RG & DF
direction system. ZONE OR SWEEP
TIME OF WHEN READY
Table 18-1. Battalion Fire Order Standards OPENING FIRE
ELEMENT STANDARD 5b(1)), the adjusting element (para 18-5b(2)), the
number of rounds (para 18-5b(8)), and any
UNIT TO FIRE BN, B element(s) of the fire order that differs from the
ADJ ELEMENT/MOF # 30 corresponding element(s) of the call for fire are
OF ADJ ELEMENT transmitted to the observer. See FM 6-40-5 for a
BASIS FOR FASTEST METHOD discussion of the message to observer.
CORRECTIONS c. When DANGER CLOSE is included in the
DISTRIBUTION PARALLEL call for fire, the range probable error, in meters,
PROJECTILE HE will be included as the last element of the message
to observer.
AMMO LOT & CHG A & B: RT/4 C: RT/5
FUZE 0 18-7. Determining,, Recording,-and Trans-
NUMBER OF
ROUNDS
1 mitting Preliminary Fire Commands
Immediately upon receiving the fire order, each
I
RANGE SPREAD, computer determines, transmits to the battery,
LATERAL SPREAD, CENTER RG & DF and records all initial fire commands exceptthose
ZONE OR SWEEP determined from the chart and graphical
TIME OF WHEN READY equipment.
OPENING FIRE a. The adjusting battery computer records the
call for fire and the fire order on DA Form 4504.
f. Table 18-2 is an example of how the "B" From the fire order, he determines the initial fire
Battery computer would extract data from Table commands and records them on the form (fig 18-1).
18-1 as it applies to his battery. It would be "B" b. The procedure for the nonadjusting batteries
battery's standard fire order (and the standard is the same as that for the adjuSting battery (a
fire order that will be used throughout this above) except that the fire commands must
manual). include DO NOT LOAD; e.g., BATTERY 2
g. See FM 6-40-5 for more discussion of the fire ROUNDS, DO NOT LOAD. The transmission of
order. commands to nonadjusting batteries together
18-6. Announcing and Recording the Fire with DO NOT LOAD permits preparation of the
I Order
a. The fire order is announced to all personnel
ammunition and laying the pieces in the
approximate direction to the target to minimize
in the fire direction center. Each computer not the time required for preparing to fire when the
actively engaged in another mission records the command to fire for effect is received.
call for fire on DA Form 4504 as shown in figure c. The computer transmits the remaining fire
18-1. commands to the firing battery in the proper
b. In area fire, the unit to fire in effect (para 18- sequence as they are determined.

18-3
co
.b
RECORD OF FIRE I
'!1

Observer- I
1 fqCAL FOR FIRE
/Y
.FEF/IS/S
A-FS
i9 (4 Tgt10/
Gr id : .;l 34 a ,l O / I Co
0
Polar: Dir Dis- U/D VA+t /R
Shift "Dir- L/R +- U/D 20/R13
I Imp C."eep-tIml MEE L#IN E 4Si ' 10 110riSi HOB Corr
FIRE ORDER U -5 r-r C 14 Cr, " Df Corr 0 Si ,,
..
. ....................J. .... ........ C.

Sp Instr h Lt Chg: Fz Ti D
:i:;"
"'::::: ~~~~~
~~~~~....
.... ..........
: . :. ..'.'..'.. .-.....-.-.
,-. ..:1:1111

Tg t Location Priority
w/ Firilg
UnItg SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS AM
Dir, MF Dv R HOB MF, Sh FS Chart Df Corr Df Chart HOB Si
Sh Fz Dv R Corr Chg, Fz Cor r Ti El QEDf (0
Exp Tp) Fired Rg Corr (+I* )
o,, o +z-too ii:!:i:i~i::ii:i:::i:ii:....................
..........
.....................
::
::
o !ii~i
i~
~i o+ s iiii~ :~i
..........
::::::::: ...........
....................
.......... : - o '/o " ,3 iii: ~ i~ii(
, .5 7 ii~~i-.5,
::::::::::::::::L::30::+L60::
....................ii~i..
..i~i
i~i
6 7 70::::'''
...
..
!i
i~iiiillliiiii~iii

..... ... ........ 0

------- 67 6

Btry DTG ........

.. " .T...Re....Grd .Re lot...

DA1MAY. 76 4504
1AMAY Replaces DA Form 3622, 1 Jan 74
and DA Form 4007, 1 Jan 73.
For use of this form, See FM 6-40-5, The proponent agency is US Army Training and
Doctrine Command.

I Figure 18-1. Recording chart data and fire commands (adjusting battery).
 Cl, FM 6-40

18-8. Determining and Recording Chart Data b. At the beginning of a mission, the HCO
a. Initial chart data for all batteries to fire measures and announces the angle T to the
are determined by the horizontal control opera- nearest 10 mils. Normally, the announcement of
tor. The HCO announces range and deflection the value of the angle T is made after the computer
to each computer concerned- by saying, for ex- has sent the initial fire commands to the firing
ample, BRAVO, RANGE 6600, DEFLECTION battery.
3213. c. If the target grid is centered over the target
b. The data for the adjusting battery are an- and oriented on the observer's direction, the HCO
nounced first. The SOP should designate the se- measures the angle T by placing the vertex of the
quence to be followed in announcing data for the range-deflection protractor against the battery
nonadjusting batteries. pin and the left edge of the arm against th6 pin in
c. During the adjustment, data are determined the adjusting point. He determines the value of the
angle T from the azimuth scale of the target grid
and announced for all batteries.
between the point where the arm of the range-
deflection protractor intersects the scale and 0 or
3200, whichever is appropriate.
18-9. Determining and Announcing Site d. The HCO may compute the angle T by
a. Using the graphical site table, the vertical comparing the azimuth from the observer to the
control operator computes the site for each bat- target with the azimuth from the battery to the
tery to fire and records the computed site. target.
b. When each computer desires site, he re- Example: A call for fire has included an
quests it by saying, for example, SITE BRAVO. observer-target direction of 680 mils. The chart
The VCO announces the site to each computer as deflection to the target is 3463, the azimuth of lay
requested by saying, for example, SITE BRAVO, is 1200, and the referred deflection is 3200.
PLUS 5. The computer repeats SITE BRAVO, Deflection has increased from 3200 to 3463, or 263
PLUS 5 to insure he has received the correct mils, and, therefore, azimuth has decreased by the
site. same amount (1200 - 263- 937, or 940). The
azimuth on which the weapon is pointing, or the
18-10. Determining and Recording Fire gun-target direction is 940. Since the observer-
Commands Based on Chart Data target direction is 680, the angle T is 260, guns on
a. After receiving the chart data, the computer the left (940 - 680 - 260).
determines and announces the following data: e. The size of the angle T, to the nearest 100

I
(1) Deflection. The computer applies the total mils, is always announced to the observer when it
deflection correction (if any) to the chart deflection is 500 mils or greater. The size of the angle T may
and announces the total as DEFLECTION (so be requested by the observer at any time.
much). The total deflection correction remains
constant throughout a low-angle mission. 18-12. Procedure During Fire for Effect
(2) Quadrant elevation. The computer de- a. When fire for effect is requested, the HCO
termines the elevation by placing the hairline determines and announces chart data for all bat-
of the GFT over the chart range and reading teries that are to fire.
the elevation under the elevation gageline. If b. The adjusting battery computer announces
no elevation gageline has been constructed, he to the nonadjusting battery computers any
reads the elevation under the hairline. He then change in fuze and the total correction to height
adds the site, determined by the VCO, to the of burst made during adjustment. For example,
elevation and announces the sum as QUADRANT if in a fuze time mission the observer's total
(so much). height-of-burst correction during adjustment
b. The computer records on the Record of Fire was down 10 meters, the adjusting battery com-
(DA Form 4504) (figs 18-1 and 18-2) the chart data puter would announce TOTAL HOB CORREC-
announced by the HCO, the site announced by the

I
TION, DOWN 10. If no change in fuze or correc-
VCO, and the fire commands determined by the tion to height of burst was made, the adjusting
computer. battery computer would announce CORREC-
18-11. Measuring and Announcing the TIONS, NONE.
Angle T c. All computers convert the chart data to fir-
a. Angle T is the smaller angle formed at the ing data. Fire commands, including the method
target by the intersection of the gun-target line of fire specified in the fire order and the firing
and the observer-target line. data are announced to the firing battery.

18-5
00
61
RECORD OF FIRE "1
C OR FIRE6A A FS

Grid"'. l ,."" -100/137 ' 0'

Polar'. Dir Dis- U/D- VA + /R

shif,t o Di,_ L+- u/D 20/R
1A J,.Si'l ' 'O iHOB Corr
FIRE ORE ' i DIfCorr Si 7
. .. .. . .. . .. .
.. . . .

ITItALoRECtOnMPrNri[yFM E... FIRE.COMMANDS

............. MO
.U... ........

..........-...........................
...................

.S.p................................

.. .. . .. . . . . .. . _
. .. ..- C o r r ..
...... . . . .. .. . . . . . . . , . . . .. .. . ..

::
::
..::
..:::
::.
::::.
......: ::
...
:::-
:::
..::..
. ... ... :.. . . . .. .

, . .. . .....
.. ........ ... .. ., ..... . ....... . . . . . .

. .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .... .. . .. . .. : : : : : : . . . . . . .
•W..1 ............. •-, .....
•-.-.-.... ..............

::: :: ::::::::::::: ::::::

::::.
I. .. - . .-..
....
. . .. ' .. . . . ....
.. . .. . .. .
::::
....
:'
.....::
....
::
. . .. . . .. . . . "....
...
:........
....
..........-..
•.....................:., ::...::::.......:::
. -..-...
--.......-..... .......--.... .............. ...._...._......

G I~........
J ..........
.. o . ....
.... ..........
.

Replaces DA Form 3622, 1 Jm 1/4 For ise of this form,SeeFM(C,40 5, -Theroor c(ccr'
et (c,y USArcyTrainingqcrcld
DA FOR7 m 45Q4 and DA Form 4007 1 Jim /3. [Doct ri e Cotymand

Figure 18-2. Recording chart data and fire commands (nonadjusting battery).
 Cl, FM 6-40

d. When a range spread or 1/2 range spread mission is recorded by a second radiotelephone
has been directed in the fire order, the batter- operator and is plotted by the vertical control
ies will fire at different ranges. All chart data operator so that the FDO can examine the target
will be determined at center range. Normally, plot and reach a decision to fire. If the target is
the adjusting battery computer will determine suitable for attack by a battery, the FDO should
firing data based on the chart data announced assign the mission to a battery FDC to be
by the horizontal control operator. One nonad- processed. Since only two fire missions (one per
justing battery will fire beyond center range, chart) can be conveniently processed concurrently
and the other will fire short of center range. in the battalion FDC, the FDO must make a U
One nonadjusting battery computer will add 50 decision when two or more requests (requiring
meters or 100 meters, wh*chever is appropriate, more than one battery) are received in the fire
to the chart range announced by the horizontal direction center. The FDO may stop firing a M
control operator. The other nonadjusting bat- mission in order to attack a more important target;
tery computer will subtract 50 meters or 100 he may take the mission and notify the observer
meters, whichever is appropriate, from the that there will be a delay, he may call on an
chart range announced by the horizontal control attached or reinforcing battery, he may request
operator. The nonadjusting battery computers the fire through higher headquarters, or he may
determine firing data based on the modified decide that the target is not sufficiently important
chart range and the announced chart deflection. to be attacked and treat the call for fire only as
A procedure for a two battery mission should be intelligence information and so inform the
established so that all personnel, including ob- observer.
servers, will know whether the non-adjusting b. If a battalion adjust fire mission is in
battery is to fire beyond or short of the adjusting progress and the FDC receives a call for fire that
battery. requires the use of only one battery, the FDO may 3
assign the new mission to one of the nonadjusting
e. Each battery fires for effect as soon as it is
batteries at once.: The FDO would order the U
ready, except when delayed fire for effect has
selected battery to SUSPEND ON CURRENT
been requested by the observer. Delayed fire for
FIRE MISSION. The call for fire, which has
effect may be used advantageously when the
already been recorded, would be repeated to the
personnel or vehicles constituting the target are
selected battery computer. A fire order for the
not at the adjusting point but their arrival there
mission would be announced. END OF MISSION
at is anticipated; for example, at a construction followed by the new call for fire would be
site, bridge, or crossroad. Time-on-target announced by the computer to the firing battery. If
procedures can be used in such a situation. the battery should-complete its mission before the
f. When the first rounds are fired, the firing battalion mission is in fire-for-effect status, the U
battery reports SHOT to the fire direction cen- FDO might order this battery to RESUME ON
ter. The fire direction center transmits shot to the PREVIOUS MISSION.
observer, who reads back SHOT. When the last
battery to fire has reported ROUNDS COM- 18-14. Registration
PLETE, the fire direction center transmits
ROUNDS COMPLETE to the observer and he Normally, the FDO supervises registrations.
acknowledges with ROUNDS COMPLETE. When directed, to do so by the battalion FDC, a
battery may conduct a registration. To insure
g. When the observer sends END OF MIS-
uniform application of corrections, the officer who
SION (EM) and the results of the mission, the conducts the registration will immediately
fire direction center reads back and records the
transmit the corrections to all batteries and to the
message. battalion fire direction center. The corrections are U
h. Each battery computer records the observer's not applied until the FDO so directs. Each
report and, on completion of the mission, computer maintains a record of current GFT
announces to the battery END OF MISSION. settings and total deflection corrections.
18-13. Multiple Fire Missions 18-15. Procedure for Time Fuze Fire
a. Two fire missions can be processed in the
battalion FDC simultaneously. All calls for fire A 20-meter height of burst is a mean height
received at the FDC are acknowledged and suitable for all cannon artillery and will produce
recorded. When a battalion fire mission is in effective results without an excessive number of
progress and another mission is received, the graze bursts or high airbursts because of the

18-7
 Cl, FM 6-40

setting is 4 x 0.12 = 0.48, or -0.5. Applying

I used, the fuze is not cut until the command
vertical
CANCELprobable
DO NOT error.LOAD
Whenistime fuze is being
received. This
-0.5 to 17.5, the computer determines a fuze
setting to fire of 17.0. Assuming the observer's
procedure will preclude the setting of the fuze more next correction to be DOWN 20, FIRE FOR
than once if a different fuze setting is required EFFECT, the correction to fuze setting is 2 X
when the final time is announced. 0.12 = 0.24 or +0.2. Applying this correction to
a. When time fuze is to be used in fire for the last fuze setting fired, 17.0, the computer de-
effect, the adjustment is conducted with fuze termines the new time to be fired to be 17.2
quick. When the appropriate range bracket (nor- (17.0 + 0.2). Height of burst corrections by the
mally 100 meters) is split or when a range cor- observer are announced to the nearest 5 meters.
rect spotting is obtained, the observer will re- The change to fuze setting for a 10-meter
quest time fuze and conduct the adjustment of change in height of burst is determined at the
height of burst. initial fuze setting. In the case of a battalion
b. The computer determines the fuze setting mass mission, the nonadjusting batteries deter-
for time fuze by placing the hairline of the GFT mine FS at the final pin location. This procedure
over the chart range and reading the fuze setting is the same as that used by the adjusting bat-
under the time gageline. If no time gageline has tery. When the adjusting battery computer an-
been constructed, he reads the fuze setting cor- nounces total height of burst corrections (para
responding to the elevation to be fired. He an- 18-12b), the nonadjusting battery computers de-
nounces the fuze setting as TIME (so much). termine the fire for effect time by applying the
c. For the initial rounds of time fuze, the com- proper number of FS increments to the fuze
puter must compute an angle of site, based on a setting to the final Din location.
vertical interval of 20 meters and the initial GT e. Because fuze quick is used during the
(chart) range and add the angle of site to the adjustment, the initial fire commands to the
site determined for the ground location. (Com- adjusting battery will state, as part of the method
plementary angle of site for the increased verti- of fire for effect, the number of time-fuzed rounds
cal interval is insignificant and is ignored.) De- to be used in fire for effect. Typical fire commands
termination of this angle of site is simplified for an adjusting battery would be FIRE
MISSION, BATTERY ADJUST, CHARGE 5,
by use of the 100/R scale on the GFT. The value
of 100/R is a function of range and indicates
the number of mils required to move the burst
100 meters vertically or laterally. The value of
DEFLECTION 3132, QUADRANT 345, 3
ROUNDS TIME IN EFFECT.
f. For purposes of refinement data or repeat-
I.
ing fire for effect, the observer may desire to
100/R is determined at the initial chart range.
change the mean burst location. When this is the
Since, only a 20-meter height of burst is desired
case the following procedures will apply:
in time fire, only 0.2, or 1/5, of 100/R (20/R) is
(1) Range and/or deviation. If the observer
required. For example, when the range to the
sends a correction for range or deviation or if he
target is 6,000 meters, the 100/R factor is 17
sends corrections for both range and deviation,
mils. One-fifth, or 0.2, of 17 is 3.4 mils; thus,
the HCO will plot the correction (s) and deter-
3 mils must be added to the site to achieve a 20-
mine new chart data. The computer will deter-
meter height of burst. The computer combines
mine new firing data and will apply to the new
the angle of site for the height of burst with the
fuze setting the total fuze setting correction de-
site announced by the VCO and the elevation to
termined during the adjustment.
determine the quadrant elevation. He announces
(2) Height of burst. If the observer sends
quadrant elevation as QUADRANT (so much).
a correction for height of burst only, the correc-
d. When a height-of-burst correction is given tion is applied to the total site by use of the
by the observer, the computer converts the cor- 100/R factor, because a change in fuze setting
rection to a correction to fuze setting by deter- will cause both a range change and a deviation
mining, from the GFT, the change to fuze set- change. (The amounts of the changes depend on
ting for a 10-meter change in height of burst the size of the angle T.)
and multiplying it by the number of 10-meter (3) Range and/or deviation and height of
increments in the observer correction. For ex- burst. If the observer sends a correction for
ample, for charge 5 and a fuze setting of 17.5, range or deviation and a correction for height of
the change to fuze setting for a 10-meter change burst or if he sends corrections for range, devia-
in height of burst is 0.12. Assuming a height-of- tion, and height of burst, the procedures out-
burst correction of UP 40, the correction to fuze lined in (1) and (2) above apply.

18-8
 Cl, FM 6-40

18-16. Procedure using VT fuze target is determined. The time of flight to the
a. When VT fuze is used, as when time fuze target is that corresponding to the elevation to
is used, an additional angle of site must be added be fired. If the time of flight to the target is not
to the site determined for the ground location. a whole number, the next lower whole number
The additional angle of site for VT fuze is de- is used. For example, if the time of flight corres-
termined in the same manner as that for time ponding to the elevation to be fired is 24.2
fuze (para 18-15c). Application of this addition- seconds; the fuze setting for the VT fuze is 24
al angle of site compensates for the shortened seconds. This is announced as TIME 24.0.
range that would result if the fuze functioned e. When VT fuzes are used and the source of
on a trajectory determined for a ground impact data is graphical equipment that does not include
location (fig 18-3). The heights of burst (and, time-of-flight data, the fuze setting for the VT fuze
thus, the ranges) obtained with VT fuzes vary is the fuze setting for MTSQ that corresponds to
in different types of terrain. If an unsatisfactory the elevation to be used. If this fuze setting is not a
range results, the observer must make a range whole number, the next lower whole number is
correction to bring the effect to the desired loca- used.
tion. For future missions in the same area, a f. Since fuze quick is used in adjustment, the fire
similar correction may be applied for fire for ef- command "FUZE VT (so much)" is announced
fect with VT fuze. There is no need to compen- with fire for effect data for the adjusting battery.
sate for the shortened range in high-angle fire, The command "FUZE VT (so much)" is included
since the descending branch of the trajectory is in the initial commands for nonadjusting
nearly vertical. batteries (the time is not cut). However, the time
they fire is that time corresponding to the
f Tralectory with HOB elevation at the final pin location. If the observer
correction added reports that VT fuzes are bursting on impact, the
fuze setting for the VT fuze is decreased by 1.0.
g. New types of VT fuzes are being developed
Burst level of VT that will produce a height of burst of approxi-
mately 5 meters. When firing these fuzes, it is
T
Ground not necessary to apply a correction to site to
compensate for the shortened range as the
Amount effect would be short
if HOB correction were not amount of the shortened range is insignificant.
added
18-17. Procedure for Mission by Air
Figure 18-3. Result of height of burst correction
Observer
to VT fuze effect. a. The air observer, with no fixed location,
b. When VT fuze is to be used in fire for effect, normally omits direction in his call for fire. He
adjustment is made with fuze quick in order to usually adjusts with respect to the gun-target
facilitate spotting. The fire commands to the line. If grid coordinates are used initially to
adjusting battery include, as a part of the method locate the target, the chart operator centers the
of fire for effect, the number of VT-fuzed rounds to target grid on this plot and orients the grid so
be used. Typical fire commands for an adjusting that the 0 to 3200 line is parallel to the arm of
battery would be FIRE MISSION, BATTERY the range-deflection protractor. The vertex of the
ADJUST, CHARGE 5, DEFLECTION 3359, range-deflection protractor is at the adjusting
QUADRANT 352, 3 ROUNDS VT IN EFFECT. battery pin and the edge is against the pin at the
initial target location. The chart operator plots
c. The adjusting battery computer computes the
the observer's first correction with the target
height-of-burst correction (using 100/R at initial grid oriented as described above, and determines
chart range) and applies it as part of site on the chart data. The target grid need not'be
entering fire for effect. The nonadjusting battery reoriented after subsequent Corrections unless
computers determine the height-of-burst
there has been a change of 200 mils or more in

I
correction and apply it in the initial commands,
which are sent with DO NOT LOAD.
d. When VT fuzes are used and the source of
direction of fire during the mission. If neces-
sary, the chart operator may reorient the target
grid (using the target pin location as a pivot
data is tabular firing tables or graphical equip- point) by rotating the grid until the 0 to 3200
ment that includes time-of-flight data, a fuze line is again parallel to the arm of the
setting corresponding to the time of flight to the range-deflection protractor.

18-9
Cl, FM 6-40

b. To plot a target location as a shift from a be replotted (chap 20) if they are not surveyed
registration (known) point, the chart operator locations. Check rounds should be fired for the
must center the target grid over the registration observer to insure that firing data is correct.
point and orient the 0 to 3200 line parallel to b. The moving target mission will normally
the center battery-registration point line. The be fired as an "AT MY COMMAND, FIRE FOR
chart operator plots the observer's shift and de- EFFECT" mission. As standard procedure for
termines the chart data. He then reorients the moving target missions the FDC will include
target grid parallel to the adjusting battery- TF in the message to observer.
target line. Thereafter, the target grid need not c. If the fire is not effective, the fire-for-effect
be reoriented during the mission unless the direc- must be adjusted. If the fires were accurate, the
tion of fire changes more than 200 mils. mission would continue on as before on a new
c. The chart operator may also orient the tar- IP. If the fires were inaccurate, a reasonably
get grid with respect to a spotting line, such as a valid assumption (if the IP location was correct)
railroad, or the direction announced by the ob- may be made that conditions which caused the
server. In this case, the chart operator centers fire to miss the original IP will apply equally
the target grid over a predesignated point and to the new IP, both in direction and amount.
orients the 0 to 3200 line parallel to the spotting The procedure for repeating fire-for-effect would
line. The observer's corrections are with respect then essentially be a repetition of the initial
to the spotting line; so the target grid needs fire-for-effect except that the correction to bring
no reorientation. the fire to the first IP is applied to the grid of
d. When the observer's call for fire includes the new IP. The new IP is first plotted on the
MARK CENTER OF SECTOR, the chart opera- firing chart and then the observer corrections
tor centers the target grid over the point selected must be applied to this new point using the old
as the center of sector and orients the grid so OT direction. Once these corrections are applied,
that the 0 to 3200 line is parallel to the adjusting new firing data for each unit will be computed.
battery-target line. After he has plotted the ob- Once the firing data has been computed, the new
server's shift from this point, he follows the OT direction will be used.
procedures outlined in b above. 18-20. Procedure for Time-on-Target Missions
a. The time-on-target (TOT) technique is a
18-18. Procedure When Ground Observer special technique of firing the pieces of several
is Moving Rapidly units so that the projectiles of all the units firing
a. Occasionally, a ground observer, especially arrive at the target at the same time. This tech-
one mounted in a tank, finds it necessary to ad- nique gains the full value of the element of
just with respect to the gun-target line. The surprise. The fire direction officer may set the
fire direction procedures involved are the same time on target by giving the time of day that
as those prescribed for the air observer (para fire is to be delivered. For example, the order
18-17a and b). may state TIME ON TARGET is 0915 HOURS
b. When an observer is moving rapidly while (TIME IS 0905 NOW). Time on target
adjusting on the OT line, his OT direction may may also be ordered as TIME ON TARGET IS
change considerably during a mission. (so many) MINUTES FROM NOW.
b. In time-on-target missions, the target is
18-19. Procedures When Engaging Moving plotted and firing data and fire commands are
Targets
determined as usual except for the method of fire.
a. Time is extremely important in the engage- The fire order includes AT MY COMMAND and
ment of moving targets. The FDC should, as
TIME ON TARGET. The fire commands initially
much as possible, prepare in advance f r the
transmitted to the firing battery include DO NOT
attack of moving targets. For each likely inter-
LOAD. At the appropriate time, the method of fire
cept point (IP) received from the (firing officer) is changed to include AT MY COMMAND, TIME
FO, a target number will be assigned. For ON TARGET (so many) MINUTES FROM..
each of its firing units the FDC (battalion and NUW. Each battery coordinates the time of
battery) should compute firing data to each IP. loading so that the rounds are in the chambers for
This data should be recorded to save time and the shortest possible time prior to firing and
should be updated immediately upon re-registra- reports when the battery is ready. The appropriate
tion (chap 20), receipt of a new met message time for the battery to load can be determined by
(chap 21), etc. Check rounds should be fired on suhtracting the time of flight plus 30 seconds from
as many IP's as possible. These points should the time on target.

18-10
 Cl, FM 6-40

c. To coordinate the firing of all batteries, the to the battalion S2 as soon after the end of the
E battalion FDO initiates a count down mission as possible. For example:
approximately 10 seconds before the battery with BATTALION FIRED 48 ROUNDS ON 100
the longest time of flight must fire. The count INFANTRY DIGGING IN AT 60053687,
down is continued until all batteries have fired. ESTIMATE 20 CASUALTIES, REMAIND-
Each battery is given the command FIRE when ER WITHDRAWING.
n the battalion FDO announces the time in his
counting which corresponds to the time of flight 18-22. Records
for the battery plus 2 seconds. This 2 seconds is a. The battery computers will maintain a
added to the time of flight to allow for the interval temporary file of Records of Fire (DA Form 4504)
between the announced count and the actual for possible future reference.
firing of the pieces. b. A blackboard or sheet of acetate may be used
d. For example, the following message has been for posting current GFT settings, registration and
received from a division artillery fire direction met data, and any other information of immediate
center: use to the fire direction personnel. A record of
THIS IS (call sign), FIRE MISSION, registration and met data as well as velocity errors
BATTALION, TARGET ALFA YANKEE developed with specific ammunition lots should be
210, INFANTRY BATTALION ASSEMBLY kept for reference.
AREA, VT 2 ROUNDS, TIME ON TARGET c. The battalion chief computer and the battery
IS 10 MINUTES FROM.......NOW. computers should maintain a temporary file of
The battalion FDO starts his stopwatch at the registrations.
command NOW and begins his count by d. The computer maintains a temporary file of
announcing, at the appropriate time, "TIME ON data sheets for all prearranged fires sent to the
TARGET IS 60 SECONDS FROM NOW 50 battery.
40 30, 29, 28, 27, 26," etc., until e. The battery computers maintain a current
all batteries have fired. The computer of a battery record of all ammunition present in the battery.
which has a time of flight of 13 seconds for this
target would command fire at the announced f. The battalion chief computer keeps a current
master ammunition record that will be a
count of 15.
consolidation of the ammunition records of the
18-21. Report on Firing to Battalion S2 battery computers plus the amount of ammunition
The chief computer will report all missions fired in the battalion train.

Section II. BATTERY FIRE DIRECTION

* 18-23. General to the battery fire direction center by the computer
a. The battery fire direction center is the at the battalion fire direction center. The battery
installation within the firing battery where firing FDC is responsible for insuring that the fire
data is determined. The battery fire direction commands are received, recorded, read back, and
center is manned by personnel assigned to the relayed to the pieces. The fire commands are
firing battery headquarters. relayed to the pieces rapidly and.accurately. A
b. A battery in a battalion that normally wire bridge may connect the radiotelephone
exercises technical fire direction will determine operator's telephone and the computer's telephone
fire commands only when - in the battery FDC, enabling the computer in the
(1) Operating independently. battalion FDC to send commands directly to the
(2) Directed to do so by the S3. guns. If a wire bridge has not been established, or
c. Firing charts - one or two, the number being the radiotelephone operator is receiving
left to the discretion of the commander - are commands over the radio, the radiotelephone
maintained at the battery. If only one chart is operator reads back the commands to the
maintained, it should be a grid sheet battalion fire direction center. The computer in the
supplemented by a 1:50,000 map. battery FDC records the:commands and relays
18-24. Procedure at the Battery When the them to the pieces. The FDO must supervise the
Battalion is Determining Fire operations of the computer.
Commands b. During lulls in firing, the battery chart
a. When fire commands are being produced at operator(s) and computer receive, from the
the battalion FDC, the commands are transmitted battalion FDC, data for the construction of the

18-11
Cl, FM 6-40

firing chart and current registration and met data. battery headquarters constitute the FDC and
The GFT settings are kept current so that the assume the functions of their battalion
battery can determine fire commands when counterparts; e.g., the executive officer (or
required. whoever is in charge of the firing battery at the
time) assumes the duties of the S3, the battery
18=25. Procedures When the Battery is computer assumes the duties of the computer in
Producing Fire Commands
the battalion FDC, and so forth. See FM 6-40-5 for
When the battery is required to produce fire
commands, appropriate personnel of the firing
a discussion of decentralized technical fire
direction. I
Section III. COMMUNICATIONS

18-26. General terminal to and throughout the fire direction

a. Separate radio and wire systems are in- center. Radio operators will remote the radios.
stalled to provide the communications necessary The switchboard operator will conduct the nor-
for fire direction. These systems should parallel mal wire checks for those lines terminating in
each other so far as possible to provide an al- the switchboard.
ternate means of communication if either sys-
tem should fail. The radio and wire systems can
readily be adapted to units regardless of caliber 18-27. Wire
The extent of the wire system installed depends
or mission. All FDC personnel should be trained
on the length of time a position is occupied.
in both communication and gunnery techniques.
Neither wire nor radio can be considered the pri- a. If a battalion position is occupied for a
mary means of communication, since the presence short period, lack of time may preclude develop-
of both types of communication permits a selec- ing the wire system beyond installing the fire
tion of the best means to meet any situation. direction lines to the batteries. In this case, radio
Highest priority must be given to installing the will carry traffic to fire support officers and for-
wire lines between the battalion FDC and the ward observers.
fire direction centers in the firing batteries. For
detailed instructions pertaining to wire and ra- b. If a battalion position is occupied for a
dio communications, see FM 6-10. sufficient length of time, a complete wire system
b. Maximum use will be made of fire direction is installed. The installation of wire is started on
personnel to set up the communications within completion of reconnaissance. The system is ex-
the fire direction center. For example, wire per- panded and improved until the unit displaces
sonnel normally will lay wire to a terminal near from the position. Wire circuits parallel the radio
the fire direction center. The FDC personnel circuits. As the wire system is improved, radio
are responsible for the communications from the traffic is reduced.

18=12
 Cl, FM 6-40

Section IV. SAMPLE MISSIONS

Table 18-3. Standard Battery Fire Order.
18-28. One Battery, Fuze VT I

eI a. General. A 155-mm howitzer (M109) ELEMENT STANDARD

battalion has established OP's and a registration UNIT TO FIRE BATTERY
has been conducted. A GFT setting derived from a
ADJ ELEMENT/MOF # 3 Q)
registration is GFT B: charge 5, lot RT, range OF ADJ ELEMENT
6900, elevation 380, time 24.4. The installation of BASIS FOR FASTEST METHOD
wire lines to the OP's has not been completed. CORRECTIONS
Again the standard battery fire order that will be
DISTRIBUTION PARALLEL
used throughout this manual is given in table 18-3.
b. Procedures During Mission. (As Prescribed PROJECTILE HE
by ACP 125). See Figure 18-4. AMMO LOT & CHG RT/4
FUZE Q
NUMBER OF 1
ROUNDS
RANGE SPREAD,
LATERAL SPREAD, CENTER RG & DF
ZONE OR SWEEP
TIME OF WHEN READY
OPENINGFIRE
FO radiotelephone operator: B8H66, THIS IS B8H44, ADJUST FIRE, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator FIRE MISSION.
(to alert FDC personnel):
FDC radiotelephone operator: B8H44, THIS IS B8H66, ADJUST FIRE, OUT.
FO radiotelephone operator: GRID 983642, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: GRID 983642, OUT.
FO radiotelephone operator: INFANTRY COMPANY DIGGING IN, VT IN EFFECT, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: INFANTRY COMPANY DIGGING IN, VT IN EFFECT, AU-
THENTICATE PAPA ALFA, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: I AUTHENTICATE OSCAR, OUT.
The chart operators plot the target. The location of the target is checked against fire coordination
measures and the location of friendly troops. The S3 decides how to attack the target and issues the fire
order.
S3: BRAVO, USE GFT, CHARGE 5, 5 ROUNDS VT IN EFFECT.
FDC radiotelephone operator: BRAVO, 5 ROUNDS, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: BRAVO, 5 ROUNDS, OUT.
FO radiotelephone operator: DIRECTION 2140, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: DIRECTION 2140, OUT.
Battery B computer (to battery): FIRE MISSION, BATTERY ADJUST, CHARGE 5, 5 ROUNDS
VT IN EFFECT.
Battery B telephone operator: FIRE MISSION, BATTERY ADJUST, CHARGE 5, 5 ROUNDS
VT IN EFFECT.
HCO: BRAVO RANGE 7240.
Battery B computer: BRAVO RANGE 7240.
HCO: DEFLECTION 3229.
Battery B computer: DEFLECTION 3229.
Battery B computer determines and applies a deflection correction of L1.
Battery B computer (to battery): DEFLECTION 3230.
Battery B telephone operator: DEFLECTION 3230.
Battery B computer (to VCO): SITE BRAVO?
VCO: SITE BRAVO, PLUS 3.
Battery B computer: SITE BRAVO, PLUS 3.

18-13
=a
O
L., 0
400
RECORDOFFIRE I"n

Observer
Hqql* CAL FOR FIRE
FFE/IS/S
61'1'CA
A FS
ic
TgtA
Grid: Ts2j 4 AI 1100/R13
Polar: Dir_ _ _Dis__ U/D VA± _t GFT /R
ShiftDlri L/R/-U/D....FT L 20/R
IVF orn4Iyfli~iw it v~71 Si-IO l10 iHOB Corr
FIRE ORDER Df Corr Si
INITIAL
MS p
T
n r
~ ~~~~
FIRE COMMANDS:FMFI~~ MF~........
~~~~~~~~~~
.. . .. . . ..
"-....
. . . .. ... . ."''' Rg
''".-'.''-.---
C g
"72,V0 Cht Df 32 El
h L ot F
.. . ... ....
"''.........
...........
... ..... .... . . . . . . . .

]P E T
[, R
[ V... ........
......
S34T9TFnEf Ammo E;
Tgt Location Prity Frirng SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS AMMO
Dir, MF D R HOB MF,Sh Chart Df Corr
(LI )FiredDf
FS Chart HOB Si El
Sh, Fz Dev g Corr Chg,Fz Corr.Ti Df Rg Corr Q(EExpType
" z o ; .......

i3O ::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::
----
---
----
................... ' !] ........
.......... " " 13 t
h..../I -:
..
......... A31L 471 VV
' . .. ..
. . . . .. .. . . . . ... .

....................

...........
... ....
.................. . ..... .. .. . . .
....................

.................... W ....... sP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
........... ... . .. .. .. .
,$..............5
" ?" ,z T" A
..
...
.. .. ....
q .....
Btry....T... ---- .......
e...t.Grid e... Alt .
Btry~~~~~....
T... u;flg JeltGrdIepo ...~

Replaces DA Form 3622, 1 Jan 74 For use of this form, See FM 6-40-5;
DA 1 FORM7R
MAY 4504 and DA Form 4007, 1 Jan 73. Doctrine Command.
The proponent agency is US Army Training and

* Figure 18-4. Completed Record of Fire, fuze VT mission.

 Cl, FM 6-40

Battery B computer adds the site, +3, to elevation 408 and announces the sum to the firing battery
as quadrant.
Battery B computer (to battery): QUADRANT 411.
Battery B telephone operator: QUADRANT 411.
As time permits, Battery B computer will determine 100/R and 20/R and enter them on the Record
of Fire for use in determining the height of burst for VT fuze.
Battery B telephone operator: SHOT.
Battery B computer: SHOT.
FDC radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OUT... DROP 200, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: DROP 200, OUT.
HCO: RANGE 7050.
Battery B computer: RANGE 7050.
HCO: DEFLECTION 3219.
Battery B computer: DEFLECTION 3219.
Battery B computer (to battery): DEFLECTION 3220.
Battery B telephone operator: DEFLECTION 3220.
Battery B computer (to battery): QUADRANT 395.
Battery B telephone operator: QUADRANT 395.
Battery B computer: SHOT.
FDC radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OUT. .. RIGHT 30ADD 100, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: RIGHT 30, ADD 100, OUT.
HCO: RANGE 7140.
Battery B computer: RANGE 7140.
HCO: DEFLECTION 3220.
Battery B computer: DEFLECTION 3220.
Battery B computer (to battery): DEFLECTION 3221.
Battery B telephone operator: DEFLECTION 3221.
Battery B computer (to battery): QUADRANT 403.
Battery B telephone operator: QUADRANT 403.
Battery B computer: SHOT.
FDC radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OUT... DROP 50, FIRE FOR EFFECT, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: DROP 50, FIRE FOR EFFECT, OUT.
Battery B computer (to battery): BATTERY 5 ROUNDS, FUZE VT.
Battery B telephone operator: BATTERY 5 ROUNDS, FUZE VT.
HCO: RANGE 7090.
Battery B computer: RANGE 7090.
HCO: DEFLECTION 3219.
Battery B computer: DEFLECTION 3219.
Battery B computer adds 20/R, site, and elevation together to determine the quadrant to fire
(395 + (+3) + (+3) 401.
Battery B computer (to battery): TIME 25.0, DEFLECTION 3220, QUADRANT 401.
Battery B telephone operator: TIME 25.0, DEFLECTION 32210, QUADRANT 401 .... SHOT.
Battery B computer: SHOT.
FDC radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OUT. -
Battery B telephone operator: ROUNDS COMPLETE.
Battery B computer: ROUNDS COMPLETE. •...
FDC radiotelephone operator: ROUNDS COMPLETE, OVER.

18-15
Cl, FM 6-40

FO radiotelephone operator: ROUNDS COMPLETE, OUT... END OF MISSION, ESTIMATE

25 CASUALTIES, REMAINDER DISPERSED, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: END OF MISSION, ESTIMATE 25 CASUALTIES, REMAINDER
DISPERSED, OUT.
Battery B computer (to battery): END OF MISSION.
Battery B telephone operator: END OF MISSION.

18-29. Common Errors and Malpractices in or against the pin in an OP or radar position for
the Fire Direction Center polar plotting.
a. The formation of proper habits in training (3) Reading the data on the GFT from a
and the use of independent checks are the means position other than directly above the index and
of eliminating the common errors and malprac- scale, thus introducing parallax errors.
tices that occur in the fire direction center. (4) Reading deflections from the deflection
index of the wrong battery.
b. Common errors and malpractices in plot- (5) Misread ng the deflecton.
ting are- (6) Using the ball'stic scale for the wrong
(1) Using an improper scale of the coordin- charge.
ate scale.
(7) Reading drift instead of fork (F) or
(2) Using the yard scale instead of the
vice versa.
meter scale.
(3) Plotting the grid from the wrong grid d. Common errors and malpractices with the
line in the wrong direction, when the firing target grid are-
chart is so placed that north is toward the plot-
(1) Miscounting in increments of 100 me-
ter. ters in plotting shifts on the grid.
(4) Reading azimuths 1,600 or 3,200 m'ls
in error. (2) Failing to orient the target grid prop-
c. Common errors and malpractices pertain- erly by using the azimuth scale, which is gradu-
ing to the range-deflection protractor, and the ated in a counterclockwise direction.
GFT are- (3) Failing to label or construct the north
(1) Reading the wrong elevat'on or time index correctly. This error is especially common
gageline when more than one line is placed on a when direction of fire is other than north.
cursor. (4) Reversing the observer's target location,

I
(2) Failing to seat the vertex of the range- for example, plotting SHIFT REGISTRATION
deflection protractor against the pin in the bat- POINT, RIGHT 500 as 500 METERS LEFT (or
tery position when data are being determined over, or short) of the registration point.

18-16
 Cl, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 19-
CONDUCT OF REGISTRATIONS

Section I. GENERAL
19-1. Introduction firing data (called adjusted data) that will
If all conditions of materiel and weather were place the mean burst location of rounds fired
standard, firing a cannon at a particular eleva- with that data at a point of krkown location.
tion would cause the projectile to travel the dis- Registration data are used for determining
tance shown in the firing table corresponding to corrections which, when applied, will compensate
that elevation. Similarly, if the proper deflection for the cumulative errors caused by the factors
were set 'on the weapon (including the drift cor- listed in paragraph 19-1. Chapter 20 discusses the
rection from the firing table), the projectile determination and application of registration
would burst on the gun-target line. However, corrections.
standard conditions of materiel and weather sel-
dom exist simultaneously; thus, the projectile 19-3. Types of Registrations
will rarely hit the target when fired with stand- The types of registration are-
ard data for the chart range and deflection. In-
a. Precision Registration. Precision registra-
accuracies in survey and the firing chart and tion is a technique for determining, by adjust-
nonstandard conditions of material and the at- ment, the firing data that will cause the mean
mosphere may all contribute errors. The number point of impact of a group of rounds to occur
of meters by which the projectile bursts over or at a point of known location, called a registra-
short and right or left Of the target is the com- tion point.
bined effect of these errors. The magnitude of
the cumulative errors and the corrections for b. High-Burst and Mean-Point-of-Impact Reg-
those errors can be determined by registration. istrations. High-burst and mean-point-of-impact
registrations are techniques for determining the
19-2. Purpose of Registrations mean burst location of a group of rounds fired
The purpose of a registration is to determine the with a single set of firing data.

3 Section II. PRECISION REGISTRATION

19-4 through 19-21 (Deleted)

U Section III. VALIDITY OF REGISTRATIONS

19-22 through 19-26 (Deleted)

(Superseded by FM 6-40-5, MODERN BATTLEFIELD CANNON GUNNERY)

19-1
Cl, FM 6-40

Section IV. MEAN-POINT-OF-IMPACT AND HIGH-BURST

REGISTRATIONS

19-27. General AT MY COMMAND in the fire order because he

a. The opportunities to conduct registrations must choose, from among the rounds fired, six
on clearly defined, accurately located registration
points in the target area may be limited. At
night, the adjustment of fire on a registration
point without some type of illumination is im-
usable rounds and, once they have been chosen,
terminate the registration.
b. The point at which a mean-point-of impact
I
registration is to be fired should be-
possible. In desert, jungle, or arctic operations,
clearly defined registration points normally are (1) Close to the center of the zone into
not available. Either of two alternate registra- which the unit is expected to fire.
tion procedures may be used to overcome these (2) In a relatively level area, free of ra-
limitations. These procedures are known as the vines and objects that might obscure bursts.
mean-point-of-impact (MPI) registration, and
the high-burst (HB) registration. In an MPI or (3) In an area visible to the observers.
HB registration, the mean burst location of a (4) Located so that the apex angle is at
group of rounds (normally six) fired with a least 300 mils in order to provide the required
single set of data is determined. The HB and survey accuracy.
MPI registrations are very similar in that the
six rounds considered must be visible to two c. The point at which a high-burst registra-
surveyed observers, usually designated 01 and tion is to be fired should be-
02. This requirement for survey is the major
limitation of the HB and MPI registrations. (1) Over the center of the zone into which
b. An HB registration offers distinct advan- the unit is expected to fire.
tages over an MPI registration because time fuze (2) High enough to be visible to the obser-
is employed. Since airbursts are used, deflection, vers.
range, and fuze corrections may be determined
simultaneously. A HB registration is easier to (3) High enough that airbursts are assured
observe than a MPI registration, especially at but not so high that the quadrant elevation and
night, and corrections may be obtained for areas the vertical interval to the predicted burst point
concealed from ground observation. computed from the battery exceed the limitations
stated on the reverse side of the appropriate
19-28. Selection of Point at Which to Register GST. Exceeding these limitations introduces un-
a. The FDO selects the point toward which the acceptable errors. Fifty meters above the ground
HB/MPI registration will be fired. This point is is usually a good height of burst, but in no case
known as the orienting point. For convenience, should the predicted burst height be less than
the FDO normally selects a grid intersection as 2 height-of-burst probable errors.
the orienting point. Once he has selected the (4) Located so that the apex angle is at
orienting point, the FDO initiates the registration least 300 mils in order to provide the required
by issuing the fire order; e.g., HIGH BURST survey accuracy.
REGISTRATION AT GRID 6138, HEIGHT OF
BURST 50 METERS, USE GFT, FUZE TIME, AT 19-29. Orientation of the Observers
MY COMMAND. The FDO will usually include a. Once the orienting point has been selected,

19-2 (next numbered page is 19-13)

 Cl, FM 6-40

'ion to the fuze setting corresponding to the (1) Vertical interval = +86 (467 -381).
elevation plus complementary angle of site to (2) Site - +15 mils (+86/6240, GST,
the target. This is done by placing the elevation charge 5).

I
gageline over the elevation plus comp site and h. The computer determines and sends to the
reading the fuze setting under the time gageline battery the following fire commands: FIRE
(para 19-36, example problem 2). MISSION, BASE PIECE ADJUST, AT MY
COMMAND, CHARGE 5, FUZE TIME 20.8,
19-35. Example High-Burst Registration DEFLECTION 3177, QUADRANT 327.
a. A 155-mm howitzer M109 battalion has just
i. The base piece and both observers report
made a night occupation of position. Survey has
READY, and firing is begun. (As each round is
been completed. In order to accurately fire a pre-
observed, the observers report in numerical or-
dawn preparation, the S3 decides to fire a high-
der; e.g., 01, DIRECTION (So much), VERTI-
burst registration (charge 5). After studying the
map, the S3 decides to fire the high burst at CAL ANGLE (so much); 02, DIRECTION (so
much). FDC Personnel'record the directions and
grid intersection 6242 with a desired height of
vertical angles, and the next round is fired.
burst above the ground of 60 meters. The altitude
When six usable rounds have been observed, the
at the grid intersection is 407 meters.
mission is ended.)
*I b. Survey has furnished the following data: j. The coordinates of the mean burst location
Coordinates of Battery B 5708538148 are computed as shown in figure 19-5.
Altitude of Battery B 381 meters The grid coordinates of the high burst are
Coordinates of 01- _ 6159939123 6190341930; the altitude is 455.
Altitude of 01 -436 meters k. The chart operators plot the high-burst lo-
Coordinates of 02 - 6039639620 cation and determine the following chart data:
Altitude of 02 431 meters (1) HCO: range 6130; deflection 3178.
Distance 01 to 02 --- 1,302 meters (2) VCO: vertical interval +74 (455 -
Azimuth 01 to 02 5,199 mils 381) ; site 13 mils (+74/6130, charge 5).
*I c. B HCO constructs a firing chart and plots the The following is a tabulation of the essential
location of 01, 02, and all batteries on the chart. He information derived from this registration:
measures the azimuths and distances from 01 and Chart data Adjuated (fired) data
02 to the 6242 grid intersection. Deflection 3,178 mils Deflection 3,177 mils
(1) 01 to 6242-aximuth 141 mils, distance Range 6,130 meters QE 327 mils
2,900 meters. Site +13 mils Elevation 314 mils
(2) 02 to 6242-azimuth 604 mils, distance (327 - (+13))
Time 20.8
2,870 meters.
d. The VCO computes the vertical angles from 19-36. Radar Registrations
01 to 02 to the desired location of the high burst. a. General. The AN/MPQ-4A radar system is
(1) Desired altitude of the high burst is designed for employment in the countermortar
467 meters (407 + 60). and counterbattery role. However, the capabili-
(2) 01 vertical interval = +31 (467 -436). ties of this radar are such that it can be pro-
Vertical angle = 11 mils (31/2900, GST). fitably employed in observing high-burst and
(3) 02 vertical interval = +36 (467 -431). mean-point-of-impact registrations. When prop-
Vertical angle = + 13 mils (36/2870, GST). er techniques and procedures are employed, the
e. The FDC sends the following message to accuracy of registration corrections obtained by
the observers: OBSERVE HIGH-BURST REG- the radar observed method is comparable to that
ISTRATION; 01, DIRECTION 141, VERTI- of corrections obtained by other methods.
CAL ANGLE PLUS 11, MEASURE THE VER- b. Employment. Employment and position re-
TICAL ANGLE; 02, DIRECTION 604, VERTI- quirements for the radar set depend on the tacti-
CAL ANGLE PLUS 13, REPORT WHEN cal mission assigned the radar section and on
READY TO OBSERVE. certain technical and tactical factors that in-
f. The HCO measures and announces the fol- fluence the operation of the equipment. The com-
lowing chart data for Battery B: BRAVO, plete suitability of a radar site can be determined
RANGE 6240, DEFLECTION 3177. only by the accomplishment of the assigned mis-
g. The VCO computes and announces site sion from that site. The radar position should be
BRAVO, PLUS 15. located adjacent to one of the firing batteries.

,9_15
 Cl, FM 6-40

HIGH BURST (MEAN POINT OF IMPACT) REGISTRATION

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; thelwroponent agency is US Army Training and Doctrine Command.

COMPUTATION OF HB (MPI) LOCATION

Message to Observers

/*1 . C'! HI,

0 1 (OcLVE
14IVE~fp.T CA L4t,'N GLe
' 01Di0A1-002
01t
-.02C
-R0IST /9
01, 01(ZC T7o/v 9oq1 VEgTcCA3200
4 t G~L = 4- 13 #4 t 1FP o0 T WJ// r
REAOy TD o8S ,VE ___I Azo2-01 __77_
h
Data Fired c g 5 l Dt 3177 FS 7. op % QE 347
Observer Readings Interior Angles
Rd 01 02
No Az VA Az Ol on Loft 0I on Right

Az 01- HB (MPh) Az 02-HB (MP5I)

2 TO +6400 if +6400 it
0 1necessary "/ necessary

o
3 _/_0_1 .Total
Total 5-%09
4 /! 14 58 7 Az02-.-NB (MPI -Az 01-NHBMPI a0
5 /5- 7 5 APEX e41 APE 4_-7
6 Az 02 -. N B(MPI Az 02-.01

7 m, O +6400 if +6400 if
/0 . ......
necessary necessary
8 P 54?0 Total Total

9 -Az 02-01 -Az 02-HB (MPI)

10 .4at 02 .4-at 02 /
6 Total Bearing-
6400 - Az Bearing Az
Az 01--HB (MPI)-
dE- dE+ Bearing
'
- /O/ 7 ,. . Average dN +

Distance 01 HB (MPI)

Log base 01-02 10

+Log sin4at 02 9IV_/
-= , - OT
II
Sum 1-1 /07! 0 //
-Log sin Apex Angle I .Bearing
diff = Log dist01HB (MPh) Y IdEi1! go -
dN-d+
dE+
3 _ ___dN-
Bearing Bearing =
Dist DI-H-B 1MPh) MrI Az -3200 3200 -Az ( UNe~
Log of dE, dN, and dH
Log dit I Log dist I ogdist
0I--- HB ( n 31ysO I 01-HB (MP) 3 r31 'O 01-HB 3
(MPI)3 /S0I 1 8o3
Log sin
Sum =
Bearing 0C32!SysBearing
Log cos
v. <-
Sum
9I717 1161Vent 1
Log Tni
",7.4
Log dE , Y9 3 35suSm: 3 1!m-37
Coordinates of 01 E (, I5 7 I N :H N

-- E I I I- dN I - I o7 -d I

Location of HB (MPI) E (" 1 03 1N IIN 3o ' vs

COMPUTATION OF GFT SETTING

Alt HB ,MPII C IE fired

VI/NB 1MP I
Rg
1 n
A 1 4)
7 Chart data to HB
R GT" 2 l
PUlocation
eChorge
1 Dt- .
-. !. LotIme

Vane
_ AdEIeotlnto 3T/e
If
REPLACES CA FORM 6-55. 1 NOV 67. WHICH IS OBSOLETE.
DAtI FO
JANRM4201
7d 20

I Figure 19-5. Computation of high burst registration.

19-16
 Cl, FM 6-40

When selecting the optimum radar site, the radar (2) For a radar MPI registration, only ele-
officer should consider the range capabilities of ctrical line of sight is necessary. However, the
the radar in order that as many batteries as pointing elevation to the selected point is deter-
possible may take advantage of the registration mined in the same manner as for the high-
capabilities of the radar. This should be done burst registration to insure electrical beam clear-
without degradation of the countermortar or ance. A characteristic of the radar MPI regis-
counterbattery role. The radar should be placed in tration is that the rounds normally cannot be
defilade to afford personnel and equipment observed at impact because the radar is usually
protection from hostile fire and to reduce the sited behind a mask. Therefore, it is necessary
effects of electronic countermeasures. that the radar observe the artillery rounds at
c. Capabilities. A radar registration, when some place in space where they all pass through
compared with other methods of conducting a the radar beam. This place in space is called the
registration, has certain advantages. The primary selected datum plane-the theoretical horizontal
advantage is the reduction in the time required to plane of the radar beam from which the radar
prepare for observing the registration. Less personnel compute the "did hit," or chart, loca-
survey is required for radar than is required for tion of the six usable rounds (fig 19-6).
sound, flash, or target area bases, since only the e. Message to Observer. If radar registrations
radar and the registering piece must be on a are to be conducted efficiently and rapidly, cer-
common grid. Fewer communications facilities tain data must be furnished to the radar section
are required since only the radar and the FDC by the FDC. To provide these data, the FDC
need communicate. A radar-observed mean-point- prepares a message to observer. The message to
of-impact (MPI) registration can be conducted by observer consists of five elements which are dis-
the radar, since accuracies are maintained cussed below in the sequence in which they are
within acceptable limits. High-angle registrations
transmitted.
may be conducted by use of radar MPI techniques.
Depending on the tactical situation, the radar (1) Warning Order. The element warning
section can report data in one of the following order must always be included. It consists of the
ways: individual round, polar plot data; order OBSERVE HIGH BURST (MPI) REG-
individual round grid and vertical angle; average ISTRATION. This element informs the radar
grid and altitude; and average polar plot data. section of the type of registration to be fired and
Distances reported by the radar are slant that preparations are to begin immediately.
distances. However, for plotting and (2) Unit to fire. The element unit to fire
computational purposes, the horizontal error may be eliminated by standing operating proce-
introduced is insignificant and the radar distance dure when it is unnecessary for the radar section
is considered to be horizontal distance. to contact the battery to fire or to know the bat-
d. Selection of Orientation Point. Some coordi- tery location. It consists of the word FOR, and
nation and mutual understanding must exist be- the call sign or code name of the unit to fire.
tween the FDC and radar personnel in the choice (3) Orienting Data. The element orienting
of a high-burst (MPI) orientation point. The data must always be included. It specifies the grid
quadrant elevation and the vertical interval to of the orienting point.
the predicted burst point computed from the bat- (4) Altitude Report. The element altitude
tery center must not exceed the limitations stated report must always be included and consists of the
on the reverse of the appropriate GST. Exceed- command REPORT ALTITUDE. The radar
ing these limitations introduces unacceptable er- section will determine the vertical angle based on
rors. the radar elevation to a point 10 mils above the
(1) For a high-burst registration, the selected crest along the direction determined to the grid of
point must be optically visible from the radar. In the orienting point in the message to observer.

Iorder for the radar to measure the vertical angle,

the pointing elevation of the radar must be at least
10 mils above the elevation to the radar screening
crest. The radar operator measures the elevation
to the screening crest from the radar along the
azimuth to the selected burst point by sighting
through the optical telescope. The pointing
Using the vertical angle and the distance from the
radar to the orienting point, the radar will
determine the altitude of the orienting point. For a
high burst registration, the orienting point must be
2 PE HB above the ground. If the altitude
determined is not 2 PEHs above the ground, the
FDC will raise the orienting point to that altitude
elevation of the radar should not exceed 50 mils. required and determine and announce the new

19-17
 C1, FM 6-40

Sea Level

Where rounds actually impact

is of no consequence to the
solution of the Radar MPI
Registration.

Figure 19-6. Theoretical MPI selected datum plane.

altitude of the predicted burst point to the radar for radar-observed high-burst registration (charge
reorientation. For the MPI registration, the 5 green bag). Upon inspection of the map, the S3
vertical angle used by radar is the vertical angle decides to fire the high burst at grid intersection
determined for the selected datum plane. 6237. The altitude of the battery is 352 meters
(5) Report order. The element report order and the altitude of the radar is 358 meters.
consists of the order REPORT WHEN READY
TO OBSERVE. This element instructs the radar b. The HCO measures and announces the fol-
section to inform the FDC when the section is lowing data measured from Battery B to grid
ready to observe the registration. intersection 6237.
(1) RANGE 6420.
f. Conduct of RadarRegistrations.
(2) DEFLECTION 3287.
(1) Radar-observed MPI and high -burst
registration procedures are identical to standard c. B FDC sends the following message to
MPI and high-burst registration procedures observer: OBSERVE HIGH BURST REGIS-
except as noted in a through e above and in the TRATION FOR B8H66, GRID 6237, REPORT
examples in paragraphs 19-37, 19-38, and 19-39. ALTITUDE, REPORT WHEN READY TO
(2) In the conduct of radar high-burst reg- OBSERVE.
istrations, large vertical intervals (greater than d. Report from radar: ALTITUDE 456, AT MY
100 meters) are frequently encountered because COMMAND, REQUEST SPLASH, READY TO
of the positioning requirements of the radar. OBSERVE.
Large vertical intervals necessitate the considera- e. The VCO determines and announces, SITE
tion of the complementary angle of site in the BRAVO, PLUS 18 (VI + 104/6.42, GST).
determination of the total fuze correction as de- f. The computer determines and sends the
scribed in paragraph 19-34b and illustrated in following fire commands to the battery: FIRE
paragraph 19-38f. MISSION, BASE PIECE ADJUST, AT MY
COMMAND, CHARGE 5, FUZE TIME 21.6,
19-37. Example 1-Radar Registration DEFLECTION 3287, QUADRANT 342.
Example Problem 1. g. When the radar reports READY TO OB-
a. A 155-mm howitzer M109 battalion has just SERVE and the base piece reports READY, fir-
made a night occupation of position. Position ing is begun. If the first round is not visible
area survey has been completed. There are no in the telescope reticle and on the B-scope, the
surveyed observation posts. An AN/MPQ-4A ra- antenna will be reoriented to the center of the
dar section is located in a nearby direct support burst and the round will not be used. If the first
artillery battalion perimeter. In order to accur- round bursts more than 5 mils below the center of
ately deliver unobserved fires from this new posi- the reticle, the altitude must be increased and the
tion, the S3 decides to have Battery B fire a round is not used. If the section reports REQUEST

19-18
 Cl, FM 6-40
SITE INCREASE (DECREASE) early in the 355 meters and the altitude of the radar is 358
registration, the burst is occuring too low (HIGH). meters.

.1 The quadrant elevation must be increased

(decreased) by the number of mils necessary to
raise (lower) the burst approximately 2 PE HB
(1) The computer determines the PE. from
b. The HCO measures and announces the fol-
lowing data measured from Battery A to grid
intersection 6337.
(1) RANGE 6530.
the firing tables, interpolating with range to the (2) DISTANCE 3198.
nearest 100 meters: PEHB = 17, 2 PEIB = 30 c. A FDC sends the following message to
(17 X 2 = 34). 100/R = 16. and Site increase observer: OBSERVE HIGH BURST REGIS-
= +5 mils (30_x 16).
TRATION FOR B8H66, GRID 6337, REPORT
100 ALTITUDE, REPORT WHEN READY TO
(2) The quadrant previously fired is in- OBSERVE.
creased by 5 mils and the computer announces d. Report from radar: ALTITUDE PLUS 536,
QUADRANT 347 (342+5). AT MY COMMAND, REQUEST SPLASH,
(3) If the bursts continue to be either to READY TO OBSERVE.
low or to high, a further increase or decrease of e. The VCO determines and announces: SITE
the quadrant in smaller increments may be deem- ALFA, PLUS 32 (VI + 181/6.53 GST).
ed necessary. This precludes further orientation f. The computer determines and sends the
of the radar and permits the radar section to following fire commands to the battery: FIRE
provide optimum data to the mean location of the MISSION, BASE PIECE ADJUST, AT MY
usable rounds. COMMAND, CHARGE 5, FUZE TIME 22.0,
h. Assuming the FDC has asked for average DEFLECTION 3198, QUADRANT 363.
polar data, the radar section computes the mean Note. The computed data cannot exceed the previously
polar data and sends the following message to the stated limitations.
FDC: HIGH BURST REGISTRATION g. Again, the radar section computes the mean
OBSERVED, AVERAGE DIRECTION 6225, polar data and sends the following report to the
AVERAGE DISTANCE 5840, AVERAGE FDC: HIGH BURST REGISTRATION
VERTICAL ANGLE PLUS 14.. OBSERVED, AVERAGE DIRECTION 6310,
i. The chart operators polar plot the announced AVERAGE DISTANCE 5850, AVERAGE
high-burst location from the radar location and VERTICAL ANGLE PLUS 28.
determine and announce the following chart data: h. The chart operators polar plot the announced
(1) HCO: RANGE 6310, DEFLECTION high-burst location from the radar location and
3282. announce the following chart data:
(2) VCO: SITE PLUS 15 (VI + 86/6.31, (1) HCO: RANGE 6340, DEFLECTION
GST). 3191.
Note. Since the vertical interval does not exceed (2) VCO: SITE PLUS 30 (VI +167/6.34,
100 meters, standard procedures are followed.
GST).
j. The following data are derived from this ANGLE OF SITE +27 (167/
registration: 6.34, C and D scales, GST).
Chart data Adjusted data
Note. Since the vertical interval exceeds 100 meters,
Deflection 3282 Deflection ------ 3287
the complementary angle of site must be considered in
Range ------------ 6310 QE ------- 347
the determination of the total fuze correction.
Site ------------- -+15 Elevation ......... 332
i. The computer determines the total fuze
Time
(347- (+15)

GFT B: Chg 5, lot XZ, rg 6310, el 332, ti 21.6.

Total deflection correction L5.
21.6 correction and the adjusted fuze setting at the
level point.
(1) Complementary angle of site is +3 (+
I
19-38. Example 2-Radar Registration 30 - (+27)).
The following problem illustrates the conduct of (2) Adjusted elevation is 333 (363 - (
a high-burst registration and the determination 30)).
of registration corrections when the vertical in- (3) Adjusted elevation plus complementary
terval from the battery to the reported altitude angle of site is 336 (333 + ( +3) ).
of the radar high burst exceeds 100 meters. (4) Fuze setting for adjusted elevation plus
a. The 53 decides to have Battery A fire a complementary angle of site is 22.3.
radar-observed high-burst registration at grid in- (5) Total fuze correction is •-0.3 (22.0
tersection 6337. The altitude of the battery is -22.3).

19-19
Cl, FM 6-40

(6) Fuze setting for adjusted elevation is c. C FDC sends the following message to
22.1. observer: OBSERVE MPI REGISTRATION
(7) Adjusted fuze setting at the level point FOR B8H66, GRID 6336, REPORT ALTITUDE,
is 21.8 (22.1 + (-0.3)). REPORT WHEN READY TO OBSERVE.
j. The following data are derived from this d. Report from radar: ALTITUDE 422, AT MY
registration: COMMAND, REQUEST SPLASH, READY TO
OBSERVE.
Chart data Adjusted data e. The VCO determines and announces SITE
Deflection --- 3,191 mils Deflection 3,198 mils
Range ........ 6,340 meters QE 363 mils CHARLIE, PLUS 17 (VI +74/5.18, GST).
Site +--30 mils Elevation 333 mils f. The computer determines the following fire
Time 21.8 commands and sends them to the firing battery:
(at level point) FIRE MISSION, BASE PIECE 1 ROUND, AT
MY COMMAND, SHELL HE, LOT LIMA
GFT A: Chg 5, lot QN, rg 6340, el 333, ti 21.8. SIERRA, CHARGE 4, DEFLECTION 3047,
Total deflection correction L7. QUADRANT 337.
g. This time the radar section computes the
19-39. Exbmple 3-Radar Registration average grid and altitude of the mean point of
a. Battery C (155-mm howitzer) has just oc- impact in the selected datum plane.
cupied a position during an intense fog. Survey h. The chart operators plot the announced MPI
is complete but, because of the fog, the estab- location and determine the following data:
lished OP's have very limited visibility. An (1) Horizontal control operator: Range 4830,
AN/MPQ-4A radar section is located in an ad- deflection 3053.
jacent battery perimeter. The battery fire di- (2) Vertical control operator: Vertical
rection officer decides to fire a radar-observed interval +86 (434 -348). Site +20 (+86/4.83, GST).
mean-point-of-impact registration at grid inter- i. The following data are derived from this
section 6336 (charge 4). The altitude of the registration:
battery is 348 meters and the altitude of the Chart data Adjusted data
radar is 358 meters. Deflection 3,053 mils Deflection -- _ 3,047 mils
Range 4,830 meters QE 337 mils
b. The HCO measures and announces the fol- Site +20 mils Elevation 317 mils
lowing data measured from Battery C to grid (337 - (+20))
intersection 6336. GFT C: Chg 4, lot LS, rg 4830, el 317.
(1) RANGE 5180. Total deflection correction R6.
(2) DEFLECTION 3047.

Section V. REGISTRATION WITH MORE THAN ONE

AMMUNITION LOT

19-40. General 19-41. Procedure for Registration With More

Than One Lot
Although the ballistic characteristics of a. As soon as the adjusted quadrant elevation
propellants vary from one lot to another, the has been determined for the first lot, registration
ballistic differences between projectile lots are is begun with the second lot. The observer is sent
negligible. The corrections for difference in weight the message OBSERVE SECOND LOT, which
of projectile can be computed. Because of this, notifies him to reestablish the appropriate range
registration with the same propellant lot and bracket and complete the second lot registration
different projectile lots provide no appreciable by using the same procedures as for the first lot.
gain in accuracy and is not necessary. Only when b. The first round of the second lot is fired with
a large quantity of propellant from a particular lot the adjusted quadrant elevation of the first lot.
is on hand should a registration be made with the c. The correct deflection established for one lot
lot. The procedure described in this section applies is used for all lots because deflection is not affected
when more than one large quantity propellant lot appreciably by the ballistic difference between
is on hand. lots.

19-20
 Cl, FM 6-40

d. If a sufficient number of impact fuzes of out a given time registration. However, if time
one lot are available, fuzes of that lot should be fuzes of one lot are to be used with two or more
uSed throughout the impact registrations with propellant lots, the total fuze correction deter-
the first propellant lot and other propellant lots mined for that fuze lot with one of the propel-
of multiple-lot registrations. However, the use of lant lots normally is valid for use with the other
impact fuzes of different lots will not affect the propellant lots.
impact registration. f. See FM 6-40-5 for more details.
e. Time fuzes of one lot must be used through-

I Section VI. FIRE DIRECTION PROCEDURES FOR ABCA PRECISION FIRE

19-42 through 19-44 (Deleted)

(Superseded by FM 6-40-5, MODERN BATTLEFIELD CANNON GUNNERY)

19-21
(19-22 BLANK)
 Cl, FM 6-40

Deflection Corrections 20-15. Transfer Limits - Range i

20-14. a. One-Plot GFT Setting. Deflection transfer
a. The total deflection correction determined limits for the one-plot GFT setting are applicable
to a point is applicable only for the adjusted throughout the elevations printed in red on the
elevation to that point. As the elevation is elevation scale of the GFT.
changed, the resultant drift of the projectile b. Two-Plot GFT Setting. Deflection transfer
will change correspondingly and a correction for limits for the two-plot or multi-plot GFT setting
drift must be applied. are applicable throughout the full range of the
b. Drift is the departure of the projectile charge.
from a standard direction because of the com- 20-16. Transfer Limits-Deflection
bined action of air resistance, projectile spin, a. Deflection corrections determined by regis-
and gravity. Since all US cannons impart a right- tration or met plus yE computation are valid
hand spin to the projectile, the drift is always within specified deflection transfer limits.
to the right. Drift is a function of time of flight, (1) When the GFT setting range is 10,000
and time of flight is a function of elevation plus
meters or less, deflection corrections are valid
complementary angle of site. For practical pur-
between 400 mils left and 400 mils right of the
poses, drift is considered a function of elevation.
battery-registration point line.
c. As the elevation is increased, the projectile (2) When the GFT range is greater than
will drift farther to the right; therefore, a left 10,000 meters, deflection corrections are valid
correction (the difference between the drift that between 4000 meters left and 4000 meters right
will occur at the adjusted elevation and the of the battery-registration point line.
drift that will occur at the elevation to be fired)
b. Deflection corrections may be used through-
must be applied. As the elevation is decreased be-
out 6,400 mils if valid meteorological data have
low the adjusted elevation, drift will be less;
therefore, the correction for its effect will be less. been determined and applied in the form of an
8-directional met. The 8-directional met tech-
d. See FM 6-40-5 for a discussion of total and nique is described in paragraph 21-16.
GFT deflection corrections and their application.

Section IV. REPLOTTING TARGETS

differs for each type of fuze used in fire for effect.
20-17. General
a. Fire-for-effect chart data, particularly alti- 20-18. Point Detonating Fuze (Quick
tude (site), sometimes are not precise. Within and Delay)
the battalion, fire-for-effect data, if used again a. During the adjustment of point-detonating
without changing the ammunition lot, usually fuze, the observer seldom corrects for difference
will cause effective fire to fall on the target. How- in altitude; therefore, the site fired is often not
ever, if the target location is to be sent outside the true site to the target. Any error in site will
the battalion, the coordinates and altitude sent be reflected as a range error on the firing chart.
must reflect the actual ground location as ac- If the true site to the target is determined and
curately as possible. These may be determined then subtracted from the quadrant elevation
by a process known as replot. A valid GFT set- used in fire-for-effect, the resulting elevation can
ting for the time at which the target was fired be used to determine the true chart range to
is required for accurately replotting a target. the target. FDC personnel, using a map, deter-
The degree to which the target data determined mine true site by successive approximation.
by replot correspond to the actual ground loca-
b. Since the total deflection correction may not
tion of the target depends on the accuracy of
have been applied during the mission, or if used,
the corrections applied-the more accurate the may not have been the most valid, a replot
corrections, the more accurate the target data. deflection must be determined that will reflect the
b. FDC personnel replot a target only when the actual chart deflection to the target. The replot
* observer has requested or the FDO/FSO has deflection will be the fire-for-effect deflection to the
directed that the target be recorded. Replot data final pin location minus the total deflection
consist of the grid and altitude of the target, the correction that corresponds to the fire-for-effect
type of fuze fired in effect, and the target number. elevation to the final pin location (g below).
The procedure used for determining replot data

20-7
 Cl, FM 6-40
* c. The battery computer announces the replot The VCO plots these grid coordinates and deter-
deflection and range to the HCO. The replot mines the map altitude of the replotted location.
deflection is determined as in b above and the
This procedure, referred to as successive approxi-
replot range is the range read under the hairline
mation, is repeated until the site announced
when the elevation gageline is placed over the
by the VCO agrees within 1 mil of the site pre-
elevation corresponding to the final pin location.
viously computed.
The HCO polar plots the target from the battery
f. When the site announced by the VCO agrees
center of the adjusting battery at the range and
with, or within 1 mil of, the previous site com-
deflection announced by the computer, and
determines and announces the grid to the VCO. puted, the computer uses the final site to com-
The VCO plots the grid and determines the map pute the final replot elevation.
g. The computer announces the final replot
mines the map altitude at the replotted location.
range based on the final elevation. The HCO
Using this altitude and the replot range last polar plots the target at the deflection and range
announced by the computer, the VCO computes
announced by the computer. He then announces
the first apparent site and announces this site
to the computer the grid to be recorded. The
to the computer. VCO announces the altitude used to determine
d. If the site announced by the VCO does not
the final site. The computer records on the com-
agree within 1 mil of the site fired, the computer
puter's record the grid, altitude, fuze used in
subtracts the new site from the quadrant eleva-
fire for effect, and target number.
tion and uses the resulting elevation to deter-
Example: The GFT setting of Battery A
mine a new replot range. The replot deflection
(155-mm howitzer M109) is GFT A: Charge 4,
remains the same. lot ZT, range 5270, elevation 350. The total de-
e. The HCO polar plots the new data and an- flection correction from registration is left 8.
nounces the grid to the vertical control operator.
The altitude of the battery is 405 meters.

Fire-for-effect data: Target AF761 (charge 4, fuze quick).

Deflection fired
3,214 mils
Chart deflection 3,206 mils
Quadrant fired 373 mils
Site initially computed --------------------------------------------- -11 mils
Elevation corresponding to final pin location (373 - (-11))
384 mils
Computer to HCO:
Replot deflection (fire-for-effect deflection minus total deflection correc-
tion L9) ------------------------- ----------------------- ---------- 3,205 mils
Replot range (range corresponding to elevation 384) .................
5,630 meters
The HCO polar plots deflection 3205 and range 5630. He reads and
announces the grid 43713421 to the VCO. The VCO plots the grid
and determines the altitude of the point to be
366 meters
The VCO computes the first apparent site and announces it to the
computer (vertical interval -39 meters, range 5630) ...............
-8 mils
The computer determines the second apparent elevation (373 - (-8))
381 mils
Computer to HCO:
Replot deflection 3,205 mils
Replot range (range corresponding to elevation 381) 5,600 meters
The HCO polar plots, these data and announces grid 43743417 to the
VCO. The VCO plots the grid and determines the altitude of this
point to be 363 meters
The VCO computes the second apparent site and announces it to the
computer (vertical interval -42 meters, range 5600)-___ -9 mils
Site agrees within 1 mil of last site computed. The computer determines
the final replot elevation (373 - (- 9)) ............................ 382 mils
Computer to HCO:
Replot deflection 3,205 mils
Replot range (range corresponding to elevation 382) ................ 5,610 meters
The HCO polar plots these data and announces replot grid 43733416
to the computer. The VCO announces the altitude used to determine
final site (-9 mils):- 363 meters
Replot data are:
Grid 43733416, altitude 363, fuze quick, target AF761.

20-8
 Cl, FM 6-40

fire-for-effect time and reads the following data

20-19. Fuze VT under the hairline: range = 4,590 meters, 100/R
The procedure for replotting a target attacked
22 mils. Under the elevation gageline the
with VT fuze is the same as that for replotting
-

computer determines the elevation to be 292 mils

a target attacked with point-detonating fuze
and the total deflection correction corresponding
(para 20-18) except that the quadrant eleva-
to elevation 292 to be L7:
tion and site used in the successive approxima-
Computer to HCO:
tion are the quadrant elevation and site used in Replot
fire for effect minus the height-of-burst correc-
deflection .3,211 mils (3218 - L7)
tion that was fired.
Replot range 4,590 meters
20-20. Fuze Time
a. The procedure for replotting a target at- The HCO polar plots these data and announces
tacked with fuze time is based on the assumption the grid of the pin location to the computer:
that the observer adjusted the height of burst to grid 43863427. The computer records the coor-
20 meters and, thus, that the final fuze setting dinates and determines the ground site as fol-
is accurate. Consequently, when the time gage- lows:
line is over the fire-for-effect time, the range Quadrant elevation 307
read under the hairline is assumed to be the Minus correct elevation 292
correct range and the elevation read under the +15
Total site
elevation gageline is assumed to be the correct 100/R at replot range is 22 mils.
Therefore
elevation. Therefore, no successive approxima- 20/R is 4 mils.
tion is required. To obtain replot data, the com- Total site +15
puter places the time gageline over the fire-for- Minus 20//R
-(+4)
effect time, reads 100/R and the range under
the hairline, and reads the elevation under the Ground site +11
elevation gageline. Computer to VCO: Site +11.
b. The computer announces to the HCO the The VCO, using the GST, ground site, replot
replot deflection (FFE deflection minus total de- range, and altitude of the battery, determines
flection correction) and the range just deter- the target altitude and announces it to the com-
mined (replot range). To determine total site, puter:
the computer subtracts the correct elevation just Vertical
determined from the fire-for-effect quadrant ele- interval + 46 meters (+11 x 4.59)
vation. This total site is the algebraic sum of Plus battery
ground site and 20/R' The computer determines altitude 405 meters
ground site by subtracting the 20/R correspond- Target altitude - 451 meters
ing to the replot range from total site. He then Replot data are: 43863427, altitude 451, fuze
announces ground site to the VCO. time, target AF762.
c. The HCO announces to the computer the
replot grid of the plotted pin location. Using the 20-21. Replotting Targets with Refinement
GST, the ground site announced by the com-
Data
puter, and the replot range, the VCO determines a. Point-Detonating Fuze. When a mission
fired with point-detonating fuze is ended with
the vertical interval. He then algebraically adds
refinement data, the corrections are plotted on
the VI to the battery altitude and announces the
sum to the computer as the target altitude. the firing chart and new chart data are deter-
Example: The GFT setting of Battery A mined. A new FFE deflection and QE are deter-
(155-mm howitzer battalion (M109)) is: mined and replot is performed as outlined in
paragraph 20-18.
GFT A: Charge 4, lot ZT, range 5270, ele-
deflection correction L7.
vation 350, time 19.9 the b. Proximity Fuze. The procedure for re-
The altitude of battery is 405 meters. plotting a target fired with proximity fuze
J Fire-for-effect data: Target AF762 (Charge when refinement data are announced is the same
I4, fuze time)
Deflection fired -3,218 mils
as that described for a target fired with point-
detonating fuze except that the quadrant eleva-
Chart deflection ---3,211 mils tion used in the successive approximation is the
Quadrant fired _ 307 mils quadrant elevation determined to the final pin
Fire-for-effect time ...... 16.8 location minus the height-of-burst correction
The computer places the time gageline over the (20/R) that was fired.

20-9
 Cl, FM 6-40

c. Mechanical Time fuze. The procedure for 10) to the last site fired, using the 100/R factor,
replotting a target fired with mechanical time and applies the new total site to the refinement
fuze when refinement data are announced de- data elevation to determine the QE to fire. With
pends on the type(s) of correction(s) included the fuze setting, quadrant elevation, and deflec-
in the refinement data. tion to fire, the target is replotted as outlined in
(1) Range and/or deviation. If the refine- paragraph 20-20.
ment data include a correction for range or de-
(3) Height of burst. If the refinement data
viation or corrections for both range and devia- include a correction for height of burst only, it
tion, but no correction for height of burst, it
must be assumed that range and deviation are
must be assumed that the observer adjusted the
correct but that the height of burst is other than
height of burst to 20 meters. The horizontal con-
20 meters. For example, the observer sends UP
trol operator plots the corrections on the firing
10, RECORD AS TARGET, END OF MISSION.
chart and determines new firing data. The new
The computer applie the height-of-burst cor-
deflection is the replot deflection. The computer
rection (up 10) to the last site fired, using the
determines a new fuze setting and a new quad-
100/R factor, to determine the quadrant to fire.
rant elevation based on the new range. He ap-
The target is then replotted in the normal man-
plies the total fuze setting correction (deter-
ner.
mined during the adjustment) to the new fuze
setting to determine the fuze setting that would 20-22. Use of Corrections
be used if the data were to be fired. With the
fuze setting, deflection and quadrant elevation a. Valid corrections for nonstandard condi-
to fire, the target is replotted as outlined in para- tions must be available if replot is to be con-
graph 20-20. ducted. These corrections must be valid for the
(2) Range and/or deviation and height of time at which the target to be replotted was
burst. If the refinement data include a correction fired upon. These corrections are not necessarily
for range or deviation (or corrections for both those that were used to fire on the target, since
range and deviation) and a correction for height- an outdated GFT setting or no GFT setting at
of-burst, FDC personnel initially ignore the all may have been used at that time. However, if
height-of-burst correction. If the height-of-burst valid corrections for the time of firing are deter-
correction were considered in determining a new mined after firing, they are used in replotting
fuze setting, an error would be introduced into the target.
the replot location by the A FS used. For example,
b. Similarly, if replot is to be conducted and the
the observer sends LEFT 20, ADD 30, DOWN
mission was fired with an outdated total
10, RECORD AS TARGET, END OF MISSION.
deflection correction or with no total deflection
FDC personnel plot the range and deviation cor- correction, then the valid total deflection
rections (ignoring the height-of-burst correc- correction for the time of firing must be available.
tion) and determine the deflection, quadrant ele-
vation, and fuze setting as described in (1)
It is the total deflection correction corresponding f
above. It is assumed that these data will produce
to the fire-for-effect elevation from the mission. U
The total deflection correction is subtracted from
a mean burst location of range correct, line, and the fire-for-effect piece deflection. The result is the
a height of burst of 30 meters. The computer chart deflection and is used as the replot
now applies the height-of-burst correction (down deflection.

20-10
 Cl, FM 6-40

SHEET
MET DATACORRECTION
For use of this form, see FM 6-40; proponentagency is TRADOC.

BATTERYDATA MET MESSAGE

AO F S T LATITUDEFTYPEEMESSAGE OCT AEA/ UT

S..1.01 q ItOOAA9 300 FF0 3 DOIRANAS/'

......
LTOF O ,R
___
DATNOE
Cz....... TE
SoJ
0o3.o O
/oo /0.I0.0MP o of.
icaf
+PESSUR ? -

ALT OF O R : 0_____ _ SPEEDTAIRTEMP

________±43 '56/0 7.0 /4j0 RYR

WIND
COMPONENTS
AND DEFLECTION

OF .
RST'
HEISGHT...OF Co i' Rt'

L TFROTATIONT
" Pol t1P C.o v (rL0~
....... / o..
WHNDRCIN
FWN S 600000 AA A fe00S
F 5 C o S 05US1

I IEAULE
LESTA 00AA SUE CRC;OS _
2.NO5 ANDR VRAIOSFOM
MENDTCRANE
AND U 0
CORRECTION A S!S MINUS j

...... /03.1 .... _ , L

L. __ .__,
~RO~ 4L CROGATION0

1
:.co .V.(.R 10
DRIFT
C).ASCROSSCORSEO

FRA... &Z
O >....... --+. #zf .... h~ . _ _ I
0
OSCA-A C OMP
H 0 0 ORR R
KNOTS
FIND SFEED 1.0 oofC

H ;L 0OHA410U .0

AL
UVF + NF0W
VE- U AVG
VE MSS

TIO 2F9 AIR 100% METFAZECORRECTION__

DENSITY

WIND.... .3,0 4-o. ,UT . ZO ,0'OR

oltoVo h
II~~~~~~~~~OPTTO e esg
OFue212 cnurn e)
_
RAGE31WN.D
_.... _ _.' _ _ ,S_
METZ
Z .!
E F
4o.o&

METR3
IO-o.N ..........

0CFS~F O.•/SZ.l .......

AIR FM P / RF
N3 C FZ UOR
A00%U

D/A Figure
4200REPLACESODAFORM-1,APR67,VWHICHISOBSOLT
212 t msage
M cU
974 00
4)0.
3

21-5
 FM 6-40

1. Compute the crosswind correction and then (-3.8) + (-3.2)

add rotation correction for azimuth, dirft cor-
(2)
rection, and crosswind correction to determine VE determined at 1400 -4.5 m/s
the met deflection correction. Average VE to be used after 1400 -4.0
m. Enter the Fuze Setting Factors table m/s
(table J) at the chart time to the nearest listed (-4.5) + (-3.5)
value. (Chart time is the time corresponding to (2)
the adjusted elevation and is read under the
hairline on the GFT.) For example, the time b. A position VE is considered valid only for
corresponding to adjusted elevation 368 mils is the position, weapon, charge, and propellant for
24.3. Enter table J with a value of 24 and ex- which it was determined. When a unit has dis-
tract the unit corrections for muzzle velocity placed and cannot register immediately, the aver-
(extract both values), range wind, air temper- age VE from the previous position may be used
ature, air density, and projectile weight. Enter but transfers may not be accurate. Where posi-
the unit corrections in the appropriate spaces tion VE for the new position has been deter-
on the form. (The procedure for determining mined, it is used while the unit is in that posi-
the met fuze correction is explained in para- tion. It is also averaged with VE's from pre-
graph 21-10.) vious positions for use in a future position when
n. Determine the met range correction as fol- registration is not possible.
lows:
(1) Multiply the variations from standard 21-10. Computation of Meteorological Fuze
by the unit corrections and enter the results un- Correction
der the column headed Plus or Minus, whichever a. The fuze setting corresponding to the ad-
is appropriate. The sign of each range correc- justed elevation plus complementary angle of
tion is the same as the sign of the corresponding site approximates the correct fuze setting. In
unit correction. low-angle fire, comp site usually is negligible and
(2) Add the values in each column. Find has little effect on fuze setting. For this
reason,
the difference between the two columns (Plus comp site normally is considered only for nuclear
and Minus) and round off to the nearest meter; fires or for firing large vertical angles or ex-
the result is the met range correction. treme ranges. Since, under nonstandard condi-
Note. Exercise particular care in using the firing tions, fuze setting varies at a slower rate than
tables to insure that the correct values are extracted. For does elevation, a more accurate fuze setting can
instructions regarding entry into tables A, D, H, and I,
read the note at the bottom of each of those tables.
be obtained by correcting, for nonstandard con-
ditions, the fuze setting corresponding to the
adjusted elevation. The Fuze Setting Factors
21-9. Average Position Velocity Error
a. A position VE is computed whenever a table (table J) is designed to compensate for
registration and a met message are concurrent. the same nonstandard conditions that affect
The position VE includes all nonmeasurable vari- range.
ations from standard conditions. Some variations (1) Met fuze correction. The met fuze cor-
are relatively constant (for example, tube wear rection is equal to the algebraic sum of the indi-
and ballistic coefficient) whereas others are un- vidual fuze setting corrections required to com-
predictable (for example, propellant variation pensate for variations from standard conditions
and minor weather variations). In order to and is determined as follows: Extract the unit
smooth out these errors, FDC personnel aver- corrections from the firing tables. Multiply each
age each new position VE determined with the variation from standard by the appropriate unit
previous velocity error (which may be an aver- correction. Add separately those changes that
age VE) determined at the same position, This increase and those that decrease the fuze setting.
method gives most weight to the most recently Subtract the smaller sum from the larger sum.
determined VE but does not disregard the pre- The result expressed to the nearest tenth is the
vious velocity errors. met fuze correction. The sign of the correction is
that of the column with the larger sum.
Example: (2) Total fuze correction. Determine the to-
VE determined at 0800 -3.2 in/s tal fuze correction by subtracting the fuze set-
VE determined at 1000 -3.8 in/s ting corresponding to the adj usted elevation
Average VE to be used after 1000 -3.5 rn/s
from the adj usted time.

21-6
 Cl, FM 6-40

(3) Position fuze correction. Determine the ample in paragraph 21-8. GFT B: Charge 5, lot
position fuze correction by subtracting the met XY, range 7,230, elevation 368, time 24.6. The
fuze correction from the total fuze correction. total fuze correction is +0.3(24.6 -24.3). The
b. The use of the Fuze Setting Factors table concurrent met message is solved and yields a
eliminates the error in assuming that the total met fuze correction of +0.2. This is subtracted
fuze correction is constant. The technique in- from the total fuze correction and the resulting
volved is similar to that for determining velocity position fuze correction' (+0.1) is filed for fu-
error in that the effect of nonstandard condi- ture use. Later, a new met message is received.
tions on fuze setting is computed at the time of This message is solved as described in para-
the registration and subtracted from the total graph 21-11, and results in the following GFT
fuze correction. When a current met message is setting: GFT B: Charge 5, lot XY, range 7,230,
received, a met fuze correction is computed in elevation 370. The met fuze correction deter-
much the same manner as a met range correc- mined from the new met (+0.1) is added to
tion. The fuze setting corresponding to the new the position fuze correction determined from the
adjusted elevation is determined and the total earlier met (+0.1) to obtain the total fuze cor-
fuze correction (met fuze correction plus the po- rection (+0.2) to be applied to the fuze setting
sition fuze correction) is added to this fuze set- corresponding to the met corrected elevation
ting to obtain the new adjusted fuze setting. (370). Thus, the GFT fuze setting is 24.6 (24.4
Example: This is a continuation of the ex- + (+0.2)).

Section III. APPLICATION OF METEOROLOGICAL AND VELOCITY ERROR

CORRECTIONS (SUBSEQUENT MET) I
21-11. Application of Velocity Error the Decrease column if the AV is minus and from
Frequently, it is undesirable to register each the Increase column if the AV is plus.
time there is a significant change in weather. c. Use the total range and total fuze correc-
In order to keep corrections for nonstandard con- tions to determine an updated GFT setting as
ditions current in such a situation, FDC person- follows: Algebraically add the total range correc-
nel use a technique called met plus VE. The ma- tion to the GFT setting range. The result is the
jor changes in registration corrections are due to range corresponding to the adjusted elevation.
changes in met conditions and propellant temper- Place the hairline on the GFT over this range
ature. A new met message will provide data on and under the hairline read the elevation and the
correct met conditions; position VE and position fuze setting. The elevation is the new adjusted
fuze correction are virtually constant. elevation for the GFT setting. The fuze setting
a. Determine a new current total range correc- is the new chart time. Express the chart time to
tion by adding the current met range correction the nearest whole unit to determine the entry ar-
to a AV range correction determined from the gument into table J. Determine the chart time
position average VE in meters per second and the before determining the met fuze correction. Alge-
current correction to muzzle velocity for propel- braically add the met fuze correction to the posi-
lant temperature (b below). Determine a new tion fuze correction to determine the current total
fuze correction. Algebraically add this total fuze
current total fuze correction by algebraically ad-
ding the position fuze correction to the current correction to the chart time to determine the
new adjusted time for the GFT setting.
met fuze correction. Now use the updated total
range and total fuze corrections to determine an Example: 155-mm howitzer M109. A subse-
updated GFT setting (c below). A met message quent met is being solved for charge 5 green bag
solved by the met plus VE technique is referred to determine an updated GFT setting. The GFT
to as a subsequent met. (fig 21-3). setting range is 5,880 meters. The total range
b. Convert the AV in meters per second to a correction is + 110 meters. The range correspond-
AV range correction by multiplying the AV by ing to the adjusted elevation is 5,990 meters
the muzzle velocity unit correction; the result is (5880 + ( + 110) ). The hairline is placed over range
always given the sign of the unit correction used. 5,990, and elevation 295 and fuze setting 19.8 are
The unit correction is determined at the range read under the hairline. The elevation is the
used to solve the met message and is taken from adjusted elevation and the time is the new chart

21-7
 Cl, FM 6-40

METDATACORRECTION
SHEET
For use of this form, see FM 6-40; proponentagency is TRADOC.

BATTERYDATA METMESSAGE

SG 1. L -I3o meT" Bv~3 1 3Yy it3

DATE TIME ALTMOP PRESSURE

ALT....P 30o 03 oo o./ 03

ALTOF BURST
ABOVE
TARG
ET m=

ALTOP BTRT(RRPBS 3L I
(burt
HEIGHT .....
GUN.(N)
OF TARGET +1,1,0Io COMPRG 0"?z CHARTRG
30 7L 3o0
ENTRYRG

WINDCOMONENTSA C
DEFLECTION
...... STA.O.R....R..TOSPRPOvr
LESSTHENDIRFIREADD

CHART.D.R.C.ION.O.....D
Z.Yoo
CROSS WIND
_7 LCROSS
C.....
DRIFT

WIND
L
7.1
W D
IN : . E.SP
ED /
PROJRESOT i~ZieVT" x COMPM 0 . -? /
i+2!0
KNO
. TSI
..
.O
ZhrCORR .
___
. ~ .

KNOWN STANDARID VARIATIONS

FROM UNIT PU IU
VALUES VALUES STANDARD CORRECTIONSMNU

M 13
DIRECCOMPUTATIONDO4
o H /3
YE
-10.1II l,

AI DENSITY..III y
-.
PROP~~OR
ETCf-.'
00%CR
...
~ z
%' E
~is t,
17
........
WEIGHT D I +J40 .

.MET
........ RANGE
CORR.
COMPUTATION
-OF .V.

VE -2.3 ,,, 'D+14.3 CRRCTO

MP F FO PRPTE t CORRECTION
~
LO -TI: CORR
N.I AVRNGUE

...11O I
OLDVE + NEWVE2AVGOVE OS

A'
METFUZE CORRECTION

AS ___ ,.
STAN R.CORRECTION o.<>,.,OolA7 7o
AV... 1 O.o/- 0. 0.l

. E...T. 3*(. o. o19 . o.o~i 2 , o t

AIR......... "0-/-.00
o.. 32.
o , o. I 2!Z,
VV;ONO +0o.1
D
GHT 0105.........CORRECTION
..........
ETZEOO ~~TOTAL V.
..
U FUZE
OZ

O
FZ 'D EW FZ CORR--COO
0CO RE TIO
N 4 0
RFCTC000
T
TARGENO.
BATTERY
DATE,TIMEJ

OA
I FORM A JUN74
ff 0 REPLACES DA PORM 6-15, 1 APR 67, WHICH IS OBSOLETE
U.S. GPO:
"7UU4* 1974-580-841/8331

Figure 21-3. Application of velocity error.

21-8
 Cl, FM- 6-40

time. Table J is entered with a value of 20 (19.8 Chart deflection 3200 mils
20). The met fuze correction is algebraically Adjusted deflection
added to the position fuze correction to determine (initial registra-
the total fuze correction (-0.2). This value is tion at 1600
added to the chart time (19.8) to determine the hours ---- 3186 mils
new adjusted time of 19.6 (19.8 + (-0.2). Thus, Total deflection cor-
the updated GFT setting is GFT A: Charge 5, rection at the ad-
lot XY, range 5880, elevation 295, time 19.6. justed elevation
(1600 hours) R 14 mils
21-12. Determination of Range Corrections for Met deflection cor-
Targets Outside Transfer Limits rection (1600
a. The use of the position VE is not restricted to hours) -- - R 8 mils
transfer limits of the point at which the VE Position deflection
was determined. However, corrections determin- correction -R 6 mils
ed close to minimum and maximum usable ranges Note. The position deflection correction is held
for the charge are less accurate. constant and used only in the position for which it was
b. Corrections for targets outside transfer determined.
limits can be computed by use of the met plus (2) At 2200 hours, a new met message is
VE technique. The met corrections are deter- computed (no registration):
mined by use of the chart range, vertical interval, Met deflection cor-
and direction to the target in question. AV is rection (2200
converted to a AV range correction by use of the hours) R 10 mils
MV unit correction determined at the entry Position deflection
range for the target. correction R 6 mils
21-13. Deflection Corrections Total deflection cor-
a. Corrections for deflection and range are best rection at met cor-
determined from a registration. As a result of the rected elevation
initial registration, a GFT deflection correction is (R 10+ R 6) R 16 mils
determined (GFT DF CORR - TOTAL DF CORR - (3) The next morning at 0600 hours a se-
DF CORR FOR DRIFT). The GFT deflection cond registration is conducted and a new met
correction is used to determine the total deflection message is computed:
correction for a given elevation. The total Chart Deflection
deflection correction is equal to the met deflection (0600 hours) 3200 mils
correction plus the position deflection correction. Adjusted deflec-
b. A change of the total deflection correction as tion 3191 mils
determined from a second registration or by the Total deflection cor-
met plus VE technique will modify this GFT rection at the ad-
deflection correction. To modify the total justed elevation R 9 mils
deflection correction by the correction determined Met deflection cor-
from a met message, FDC personnel must know rection at 0600
the amount of the total deflection correction that hours R 1 mil
was due to weather. This can be determined from a Position deflection
met message taken concurrently with the correction R 8 mils
registration. If a later met message indicates a
Average position
weather change, a new GFT deflection correction
deflection correc-
must be determined. The new total deflection
tion R 7 mils
correction will be the algebraic sum of the posi-
tion deflection correction brought forward and (R6 + R8 =R14/2)
the new met deflection correction. Note. The position deflection corrections are
c. For example, a registration has been con- averaged to give most weight to the most recently deter-
mined position deflection correction.
ducted and a concurrent met message has been (4) At 1000 hours, new met corrections are
solved for a 155-mm howitzer M109 firing charge
computed (no registration):
5 green bag. Met deflection cor-
(1) Corrections from the registration and rection (1000
met message are as follows: hours) L 2 mils

21-9
 Cl, FM 6-40

Average position de- tion (1400

flection correc- hours) . . . . R 3 mils
tion R 7 mils Average position
Total deflection cor- deflection correc-
rection at met tion R 7 mils
corrected eleva- Total deflection cor-
tion . . R 5 mils rection at met cor-
(5) At 1400 hours, a new message is com- rected elevation-_ R 10 mils
puted (no registration): d. The data in c above may'be tabulated for
Met deflection correc- ready reference as follows:

Registration Data

21-14. Deflection Corrections Outside Transfer transfer limits by solving the current met mes-
Limits sage and determining the met deflection correc-
The FDC can determine a total deflection cor- tion to the target. The met deflection correction
rection for an accurately located target outside to the target is applied to the position deflection

21-10
 FM 6-40

Determine the difference in fuze setting for a the calibration correction in meters is plus
100-meter range change from the Ground Data (minus).
table at the elevation for the base piece. Extract
the fuze settings corresponding to the two listed f, When a GFT with a current GFT setting
elevations that bracket the base piece elevation is available, determine the corrections for each
and determine the difference in the two fuze set- piece as described in d(3) above and algebraically
tings. If the base piece elevation is listed in the add the corrections to the GFT range. Place the
firing table, use the fuze setting corresponding hairline of the GFT over the corrected range and
to the base piece elevation and that corresponding read the elevation and fuze setting under the
to the next higher (lower) listed elevation when appropriate gagelines.

Section II. POSITION CORRECTIONS

23-4. General ter of the board represents the battery center.

a. Position corrrections are corrections for in- b. To facilitate measurement, assign each
dividual pieces to compensate for the difference small square of the base of value of 5 meters.
between the pattern formed by the pieces in the If, for example, a piece is 30 meters right of,
position area and the desired pattern of burst at and 20 meters behind, the battery center, plot the
the target. Position corrections may be required piece location 6 squares right of, and 4 squares
because of abnormal dispersion or concentration below, the center of the board.
of the pieces or because of the location, size, or c. Place an index for reading deflections on the
shape of the target. base opposite the referred deflection. For weap-
b. Generally, position corrections are applied ons that are equipped with the 0 to 6400 mil
in area missions only if the depth of the position panoramic telescope, use the red arrow at the 0
is abnormally great. A deflection difference is index for reading deflections and renumber the
usually used in an area mission to correct for an scale as indicated in figure 23-2.
abnormal width of battery. d. For an open sheaf, draw on the base, lines
c. In rare cases, corrections may be needed for parallel to the direction-of-fire arrow (fig 23-2).
differences in the altitudes of the pieces. The Draw the lines to the same scale as that used for
correction for vertical displacement will be negli- plotting the piece locations and equally spaced
gible and is ignored unless the terrain is ex- according to the effective width of the burst. For
tremely rugged. The correction for the range a converged sheaf, the center of the board re-
effect is determined as follows: Use the GST to presents the point of convergence of the sheaf.
compute the amount of site necessary to correct For a special sheaf, plot each desired point of
for vertical displacement of the piece from the burst.
battery center. Multiply this change in site by
the meters per mil factor from the tabular firing 23-6. Computation and Application of Posi-
tables or, using the GFT, apply the site as a tion Corrections
change in elevation to determine the equivalent After the plotting board has been prepared, posi-
range correction. Combine the range correction tion corrections in meters for deflection and range
obtained with other position corrections to de- for each piece of the battery may be graphically
termine the total correction. obtained for any desired direction of fire. The
plotted positions represent not only the piece
23-5. Preparation of M1O or M17 Plotting positions but also the uncorrected burst positions
Board for Determining Position Correc- in the target area.
tions a. Set off the direction of fire on the plotting
When the M10 or M17 plotting board is used for board by rotating the transparent disk until the
determining position corrections, the piece loca- desired deflection is opposite the index.
tions and the desired sheaf must be plotted to b. The deflection correction in meters for each
scale on the transparent disk of the plotting piece (burst) corresponds to the distance and di-
'board. The piece locations are given in the bat- rection (right or left) between the plotted burst
tery executive officer's report (oral or sketch (fig and its appropriate place in the constructed sheaf.
23-1) ). Starting with the right burst, move each burst to
a. Aline the centerline of the transparent disk the nearest sheaf line, with no more than one
(red 32 at the top) so that it coincides with the burst to a line. The bursts need not be placed in
arrow on the gridded base of the board. The cen- the sheaf in the numerical order of piece num-

23-3
 Cl, FM 6-40

INo4 INo 2

40 meters 40 meters

No 3 BP

INo 6 15 meters
9 ____
Battery
center
L __
0 meters
35 meters I 15 met ers 30 meters 40 meters
-No I
30 meters
-I-
No 5

I Figure 23-1. Executive officer's sketch of an abnormal battery position.

bers. Convert the correction in meters to a cor- for charge 5,, GB, (M3 propellant), fuze quick,
rection in mils by dividing the shift in meters open sheaf.
by the chart range in thousands to the nearest (1) Remove the disk from the plotting board
hundred meters (mil relation). If a GST is avail- and draw six lines parallel to the arrow 50 meters
able, divide the shift in meters by the chart apart, with one of the two centerlines 25 meters
range in thousands to the nearest 10 meters by right and the other 25 meters left of the arrow.
use of the C and D scales and the M gage point (Scale is one small square = 5 meters.)
(e(1) below). Use procedures outlined in para- (2) Replace the disk and orient the 0-3200
graph f(1) below whenever the GST is available. line of the disk over the arrow, with the red 32
c. The range correction in meters for each on the disk at the head of the arrow.
piece (burst) corresponds to the distance and di- (3) Plot the pieces on the disk.
rection (over or short) between the plotted burst (4) Rotate the disk until 2850 (red scale)
and the line at chart range (center of board) is opposite the red arrow.
perpendicular to the direction of fire. (5) Determine the deflection correction in
(1) Convert the range correction in meters meters required to move each burst to the ap-
to a correction in mils of elevation by dividing propriate place in the sheaf.
the correction in meters by the meters per mil Number 1 right 55 meters
factor. Number 2 right 60 meters
(2) Convert the range correction to a time
correction in the manner described in paragraph
Number 3 right 25 meters
Number 4 left 47 meters
I
23-3e. Number 5 left 6 meters
d. The followin.g example illustrates the pro- Number 6 left 64 meters
cedure for computing and applying position cor-
(6) Convert the deflection correction in me-
rections by use of the plotting board. A 155-mm
ters to a correction in mils by dividing the cor-
howitzer M109 battery has been laid, collima-
rection in meters by the chart range in thousands
tors have been emplaced, and deflection has been
to the nearest hundred meters.
reset to 3200. The pieces are distributed as shown
Number 1 right 10 (55/5.7)
in figure 23-1. The final protective fire assigned
tc the battery is at a chart range of 5,710 meters.
The chart deflection to the FPF is 2,850 mils.
Number 2 right 11 (60/5.7)
Number 3 right 4 (25/5.7)
I
Number 4 left 8 (47/5.7)
The long axis of the FPF is perpendicular to the
Number 5 left 1 (6/5.7)
direction of fire. Determine position corrections
Number 6 left 11 (64/5.7)
23-4
 Cl, FM 6-40

(7) Determine the range correction in me- (1) Prepare the plotting board by following
ters required to bring each burst to the line at the steps in d(i) through (4) above.
chart range perpendicular to the direction of (2) Determine the deflection correction in
fire. meters for each piece (d(5) above).
Number 1 - 14 meters
Number 2 -- 48 meters (3) Convert each deflection correction in
* Number 3 0 meters meters to a deflection correction in mils by use
Number 4 - 33 meters of the C and D scales and M gagepoint on the
Number 5 + 38 meters GST.
*Number 6 + 22 meters Number 1 RIO (R55/5.71)
(8) Convert the range correction in meters
to a correction in mils of elevation by dividing
the correction in meters by the meters per mil
Number 2 R11 (R60/5.71)
Number 3 R4 (R25/5.71)
Number 4 L8 (L47/5.71)
I
factor for the chart range to the nearest 100 Number 5 L1 (L6/5.71)
meters. Number 6 Lii (L64/5.71)
Number 1 - 1 mil (- 14/16)
Number 2 - 3 mils (- 48/16) (4) Determine the deflection correction to
*Number 3 0 mils (0/16) be applied in the following manner. With the
Number 4 -2 mils (-33/16) manufacture's hairline over the chart range (57-
Number 5 + 2mils (+38/16) 10) the elevation (298) is read under the eleva-
Number 6 + 1 mil (+ 22/16) tion gageline. Enter the deflection correction
e. Position corrections may also be applied by scale and extract the total deflection correction
using the GFT in conjunction with the M17 plot- (L2). This value is then applied as follows:
ting board. This method should be employed when- Number 1 RIO + L2 = R8
ever possible, and especially when a'valid ' GFT Number 2 R11 + L2 = R9 U
setting is being used. If a valid deflection correc- Number 3 R4 + L2 = R2
tion scale is available, the total deflection correc- Number 4 R4 + L2 = R2
tion must be determined and algebraically ap- Number 5 Li + L2 = L3
plied to the position correction for deflection. Number 6 Li1 + L2 = L13
(1) The deflection correction for each piece The corrections jyst determined are applied
is determined as in b above except that the cor- to the chart deflection (2850) to determine the
rection in meters is converted to mils, using the deflection to fire each piece:
GST, by dividing the shift in meters by the
chart range in thousands to the nearest 10 me-
Number 1 2850 + R8 = 2842
Number 2 2850 + R9 = 2841
Number 3 2850 + R2 = 2848
I
ters. The total deflection correction (determin-
ed from the deflection correction scale at the Number 4 2850 + L10 = 2860
elevation corresponding to the target range and Number 5 2850 + L3 = 2853
using the GFT setting) is algebraically added to Number 6 2850 + L13 = 2863
the correction determined above. The result is
applied to the chart deflection using the LARS (5) Determine the range correction in me-
rule. ters for each piece (d(7) above).
(2) The individual elevations and times to (6) Determine the corrected range for each
be fired are obtained by applying the range cor- piece by applying the range correction to the
rections determined from the plotting board to nearest 10 meters to the chart range.
the chart ranges. The hairline is placed over Number 1 -14 (-10)
these corrected ranges and the corrected elevations Number 2 - 48 (-50)
and times are read under their respective gage- Number 3 0 (+0) I
lines. Number 4 - 33 ( -30)
I. The following example illustrates the pro- Number 5 + 38 (+.40)
cedure for applying position corrections by use Number 6 + 22 ( +20)
of the GFT in conjunction with the plotting board. Note. Since chart range is determined to the
Battery and target data are the same as those in nearest 10 meters each range correction is also expressed
the example in d above. The GFT setting in use to this accuracy.
is GFT B: Chg 5, lot XY, rg 6360, el 344, ti (7) Determine the elevation and times for
21.8. each piece (e (2) above'.

23-5
Cl, FM 6-40
Elevation Time Elevation Time
Number 1 297 19.1 Number 4 296 19.0
Number 2 295 18.9 Number 5 300 19.3
Number 3 298 19.1 Number 6 299 19.2

Figure23-2. Use of the M17 plotting board.

23-6
 Cl, FM 6-40

0I 23-6.1. Computation of Deflection

Difference
a. When the width of the desired sheaf is
(3) Divide the value determined in (2) above
by the range in thousands of meters.
c. The sheaf is opened when the width of the
different from the width of the battery front, the desired sheaf is greater than the width of the
deflection difference method can be used under the battery front and closed when the width of the
following conditions: desired sheaf is less than the width of the battery
(1) The azimuth of fire to the target is close to front.
the primary azimuth of fire. d. No corrections are applied to equalize the
(2) The pieces are positioned generally lateral intervals between adjacent bursts.
perpendicular to the primary azimuth of fire with Example: A 155-mm howitzer battery is in
approximately equal distance between guns. position with a battery front 250 meters wide. The
b. The sheaf is opened or closed on any desired FDO decides that he wants a SHEAF 100
piece (normally the base piece) a computed METERS AT 5000. He determines that the
number of mils. The amount by which the sheaf is difference between the width of the desired sheaf
opened or closed is determined in the following (100 meters) and the width of the battery front (250
manner: meters) is 150 meters. He divides 150 meters by 5
(1) Determine the difference between the (six pieces in the battery). He divides the result (30)
width of the desired sheaf and the width of the by the range in thousands of meters (5.0). The
battery front (with respect to the direction of fire). amount by which the sheaf is to be closed is 6 mils.
(2) Divide the value determined in (1) above The fire commands to the howitzers will include
by the number of pieces minus one. DEFLECTION 3239, ON NUMBER 3, CLOSE 6.

Section III. SPECIAL CORRECTIONS

23-7. General corrected range and read the elevation and time
Special corrections are individual piece under the hairline or, if a GFT setting has been
corrections applied to deflection, fuze setting, and constructed, under the respective gagelines.
quadrant elevation to place the burst in a precise c. Time. The special correction for fuze setting
pattern so that the burst of each piece falls is determined by the following formula:
(theoretically) at a planned point on the target. In
the rare cases in which they are used, special Special correction for
corrections normally are computed at the fire Special fuze correction range in meters
I direction center. Special corrections are a
combination of calibration corrections and
difference in fuze
setting for a 100-meter
100 meters

position corrections. change in range

23-8. Determination of Special Corrections Use the procedure described in paragraph 23-6e,
a. Deflection. The special correction for de- determine the difference in fuze setting for a
flection is solely a position correction and is de- 100-meter change in range at the elevation to
termined as described in paragraph 23-6b. If a the target before special corrections are applied.
total deflection correction can be determined it
is applied as outlined in paragraph 23-6f. 23-9. Application of Special Corrections
b. Range. To determine the special correction a. Deflection. The position correction for de-
for range for each piece, add the calibration flection is added to the chart deflection and total
correction in meters and the position correction deflection correction, and the total deflection for
for range in meters. Then, convert the total cor- each piece is announced.
rection in meters to a correction in mils of ele- b. Time. The special correction for time is ap-
vation by dividing the total correction by the plied to the common fuze setting, and the total
meters per mil factor determined at chart
time for each piece is announced.
range. When the GFT is being used, add the
special correction for range in meters to the c. Elevation. The special correction for eleva-
chart range to determine the corrected range. tion is added to the common quadrant elevation
To determine the elevation and time for each and the total quadrant elevation for each piece
piece, place the hairline of the GFT over the is announced.

23-7
Cl, FM 6-40

I I.
d. Example. The following is an example of the FUZE TIME #1, 23.9; #2, 24.2; #3, 23.8; #4,
commands for special corrections: 23.9; #5, 24.4; #6, 24.4.
FIRE MISSION DEFLECTION #1, 3249; #2, 3250; #3, 3250;
BATTERY 1 ROUND #4, 3253; #5, 3249; #6, 3252.
SPECIAL CORRECTIONS QUADRANT #1, 371; #2, 376; #3, 369; #4,
CHARGE 5 371; #5,380; #6,379.

23-8
 RECORD OF FIRE
CAL FOR FIRE - S,'0 A FS
Tgt 100/Rp/5'
Observer_14
__ _ _ _F"FFE/IS/S
0
Grid:7II
Polar: Dir Dis, U/D VA I/R "O 06
O/R13 7
Shift"DirL/R _ - _U/D 20/R
.S 45 IPeCrf r WKS,;
"A LL Uh TWN L 66. 4 4 Si-' 10 10rASi HOB Corr
FIRE ORDER4 ZR 056 6 5d ZI4L4m, Lr aw&cd ? AC Df Corr VS i
INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS::. F............ ...... Rg
RCht Df 34 El
I -%..............
.......................
E ....

SplInstr 5 hLL o Chg %Fz Ti D.... QE:...

MTO 4E 4 T [PE R [TF in Eff IAmmo Exp

Tgt _______
_____ V
Location Priority Unit
Firipg _ _ _ SUBSEQUENT
_ _ _ _ FIRE COMMANDS AMMO
Dir, MF Dev Rg HOB MF,Sh FS Ti Chart Df Corr'Df Chart HOB Si El QE Ex
Sh, Fz Corr Chg, Fz Corr Df ( ) Fired Rg Corr El

X-4L-e SOS..* 7

.... ,,
•.o.•. ........
........................
. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . ..........
:: .!-
:::::::::
::::::::::::::.....
----
.
ii
;!!~ "............
'....
__ ...
...........
,
......................
....
a ..- .-........ ... ................

------ 7r :.3,_72-- v

4/0 M ov fM tT

Btry jDTG 2Q % lop J4,l 7 & Tgt jReplot Grid fReplot Alt"
o')
Replaces DA Form 3622, 1 Jan 74 For use of this form, See FM 6-40-5; The proponent agency is US Army Training and
DA 1AMAY
FOR
M 76 4504 and DA Form 4007, 1 Jan 73. Doctrine Command.

N,
0
Figure 24-1. Completed record of fire, illumination mission.
 Cl, FM 6-40

Section IV. PROPAGANDA PROJECTILE

24-19. General 24-20. FDC Procedure for Firing Propaganda
a. Artillery may be used for delivering psy- Projectile
chological warfare leaflets. Pinpoint accuracy is The data for firing propaganda projectile are
not required for propaganda missions. Twenty- determined in the same manner as that for an
five rounds from a 105-mm howitzer normally HE mission with the following exceptions:
will cover an area 500 by 500 meters. Corps ar-
tillery or higher headquarters normally issue the a. The height of burst above ground is ini-
order to fire propaganda projectile and specify tially 100 meters. Wind velocity and direction
the area to be covered and the amount of am- may affect the leaflets in such a way that a lower
munition to be expended. height of burst may be requested by the observer.
b. There is no standard propaganda projec- b. A correction to compensate for the varia-
tile. Ordnance prepares and issues the ammuni- tion in weight from that of a standard projectile
tion. Usually, an HC smoke projectile with the must be determined and applied to chart range.
filler and booster replaced by leaflets is used. Or- Elevation and fuze setting are determined at the
dnance must weigh the projectile and mark the corrected range by use of the GFT. If available,
weight on the projectile. a GFT setting for HE should be used.

Section V. ASSAULT FIRE

24-21. General corrections. During the remainder of the mis-
a. Assault fire is a special technique of indi- sion, a two-man team, consisting of a deflection
rect fire. One weapon, emplaced in defilade, fires computer and a quadrant computer, determines
on a target at a short range with the maximum the data that will place the burst directly on the
charge that will clear the intervening crests. target.
Because of the small vertical probable error of
Note. If the angle T is less than 100 mils, the FDC
artillery weapons, assault fire is most effective team may use the 100/R and C factors during the adjust-
against a target with a significant vertical di- ment phase rather than plot the observer's corrections on
mension. the M17 plotting board.

I
b. The FDC for the mission normally is located (1) Before the start of the mission, the de-
at or near the weapon. Observer procedures for flection computer prepares a deflection shift card
assault fire are discussed in paragraphs 13-6 (fig 24-2) for the chart range to the target as
through 13-11.1. an aid in computing the required deflection
c. The assault fire mission must be carefully changes. He prepares the card by using the C and
planned and executed. FDC personnel, as part of D scales and M gagepoint of any GST. He sets
the assault fire team, plot the target on the firing
charts, compute initial data, and prepare deflec- Deflection shift card Chart range 1,500 meters
tion shift and quadrant change cards. Careful
preparations and planning and accurate initial Observer's deflection Deflection shift
data result in a short adjustment phase in an as- Correction (in meters) (in mils)
sault fire mission. 1/2 1/4
1
3/4
24-22. FDC Procedures for Assault Fire 2 1 1/4
a. Normal observed fire and FDC procedures 3 2
are used during the adjustment of an assault fire 4 3
mission. If FADAC is not available, the tabular 5 3
firing tables normally are used for determining
6 4
initial firing data because the shorter ranges for
7 5
the higher charges are not shown on the graphical
8 5
firing tables.
b. After the initial firing data have been de- 9 6
termined, the M17 (M10) plotting board is used 10 7
for determining corrections until the observer
announces vertical corrections rather than range
Figure 24-2. Deflection shift card.

24-8
 Cl, FM 6-40

b. Observer. c. Fire Direction Center.

(1) ICM is most effective against soft targets, (1) The procedure for computing data for
such as troops in the open. The observer must be firing ICM is applicable under the following con-
familiar with and must be capable of advising the ditions:
supported commander on the effects produced by (a) Observer adjustment. The adjustment
HE, and those produced by ICM and the may be conducted with either HE or ICM. Ad-
effectiveness of ICM in various types of terrain. justment with 1CM is not recommended since
(2) Some malfunctions (duds) do occur with it eliminates the element of surprise.
ICM, particularly from low air bursts. The (b) Met plus VE. Current met correc-
observer must report all duds and erratic rounds. tions must be available.
Duds should be treated as potential mines or (c) K-transfer. Current registration cor-
boobytraps. rections must be available.
(3) Surprise fire is most effective and
desirable with ICM. When current corrections are (2) FDC procedures for ICM involve the use of
not available, the observer should adjust with HE appropriate firing table addenda for determining
on a point near the target and then shift and fire ballistic corrections to give the proper trajectory
for effect with ICM on the target. for ICM.
(4) Procedures for the adjustment of ICM are (3) See FM 6-40-5 for a graphical solution to
similar to those for the adjustment of HE. Range the ICM gunnery problem.
and deviation are corrected from the center of the
effects pattern. Height of burst is corrected in 50- 24-36. Example
meter increments. How far UP or DOWN the The following example illustrates the procedures
observer should go depends on the experience for firing ICM. Although the M449A1 projectile
gained with adjustment of this round. The basic and M109 howitzer are used in the example, these
criterion is that if a large number of duds are procedures are applicable to all weapons when
observed or if the effects pattern appears too firing ICM (fig 24-5).
small, the observer should give an UP correction.
a. Known Conditions.
This correction should not exceed 100 meters until
Battery coordinates 3971016255
the observer becomes familiar with the effects of
Battery altitude 432 meters
changes in height of burst.
(5) When adjusting close-in fires with ICM, Target coordinates 3873023200
the observer must start the adjustment at least 600 Target altitude 451 meters
meters from friendly troops, depending on the Battery laying:
relative positioning of the weapons, target, and Azimuth 350 mils
friendly troops and on the wind direction and Referred deflection 3,200 mils
speed. The adjustment should be made with the GFT setting:
entire battery and corrections should be made GFT A: Chg 5, lot YZ, rg
from the near edge of the effects pattern. 6480, el 344, ti 22.4
(6) See FM 6-40-5 for more details on observer GFT deflection correction ..... R16
adjustment of ICM.

24-13
N
'1
RECORD OF FIRE
Ob ,,,#2 z CAL L F FIRE AFS
Grd: - T 7 2 3 ?.
0I~
-s/ g
Polar: Dir Dis- U/D VA + /R
Shifft DirLF /DZ 20/R
/A
"P, w' 7 4Si' 10 110 rA Si HOB Corri

UnIRSBSEUEORDRECOMRNSICM
Di,
F&T RDHB MFSh FSCarCDoorrDrCatSOB S
o't ~ ~ ~ ~ ...............
.........
-.-.--...
.-. ....,
............
••- .
. . .... . . .. ... .. . . . . .. .. . .
lii~
i~~lll~ii~
IN
F IRITE IA
COLMMANDS[ ':'FM :::::'
::MF
:::::
:::::
...
...
.................................
:.........:.....:.:
.......
::::::::::::::::::::::::
....
"........:::.
:::::
::::
:::::
:::::
:::::
=================
:::.
::.
::::::"-'.
:. ::::
:.
L6
............
.......
E.....-..
ii!!iiiiiii
....... .::.
...
....... ..
. . .- . ...
..... ...
. ......
.,.
. .. . .. . . . . .. ..

.. . ... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .'.''-''.''.''.''.Q'.E
. . .. .. .. . .
'.''.''.''.''.'.'-.'-'.-.'-.'.''.''
,'.''.:1.'i.::.::,1_'--'-._'_'..:.

. . .. . .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .>
.. . . . . .. . . . . . . .. .. . .
....•••. - •. . . •- . ••--.. . .... ....... .,•.. . ... ... .., -.... .... . ...... .. ... ..... ,
:.-1.-----:.:
.: . . :.:. . . ........
. ... ............. --....
...........

. - - ... .• ••..
•...
.•.... . ...•...•..... ..... . . ...... ...... ......
. .••...
..• .• • • ..
. ..
. . .. ... . . .. ..... .. ..... .... ........ . .. . ...
. . . ... . . .. ...
. ...•- .. ..... . .. . .. . . .. .... . ... . .. .. .

_._.
.... . .. . .. . .. . ...... . .._
. .. . ._
. . ••- ...... -.. ... .-. . .... . .... ...
.............
-..-
. .'....
.-'..'.':-::.'. .-... -.
-.
-.
-...
..
..
-.
:::::::::::.:..
:..
:..
:.:.:::: ...
..
..
..
...
..........
.
. . . ... .. .. . . ... .. ... ..... ...
.. ,.

D.. .
I.
.....
..
. ..7.._..T .... e..o
..
.. ...
..
..
e..
..A,..

anidDA UA 4rm7 1. , I
VA1MAY 76 4U and DA Form 4007, 1 Jan Jan 74 I-or use of this form, See FM 6-40-5; The proponent agency is US Army Training and
73. Doctrine Command.

I Figure 24-5. Record of fire, ICM mission.

v -1,
 Cl, FM 6-40

Section XII. MISCELLANEOUS

24-41. Data Recording b. Graphical Zone to Zone Transformation.

Since prearranged fires are fire-for-effect (1) Map construction. Each US military map
missions, the FDC must determine and maintain that covers an area within 25 miles of a UTM
up-to-date firing data for planned targets. To grid zone junction has printed around the border
facilitate maintaining current chart and firing two sets of grid line numbers. One set is printed
data, FDC personnel normally predetermine these in black and the other, corresponding to the ad-
data and record them on acetate covered joining zone, is printed in blue. The marginal
charts/forms in the FDC. If time permits,this data information indicates the color that applies to
is transferred to the Record of Fire (DA Form 4504) each zone.
for each cannon section. A sample Record of Fire
(2) Designation of the primary zone.
is shown in figure 24-7. The form is self
explanatory in such that the subsequent (a) Either of the two adjoining zones may
be designated as the primary zone.
correction columns are retitled "Tgt", "Location",
(b) Designation of the primary zone is
"Priority", and "Firing Unit".
dependent on one or more of the following:
.24-42. Fire Capabilities Overlay 1. Where most of the action is expected
The fire capabilities overlay of the battalion to occur.
shows the area that can be reached by the 2. Unit SOP.
combined capabilities of the batteries of the 3. The commander's guidance.
battalion as directed. The fire capabilities overlay 4. Anticipated future operations.
of the battalion, as reported to higher artillery
headquarters, may show the area that can be (c) Generally, unit SOP dictates how the
reached by each battery or may show the primary zone will be designated and which pro-
combined coverage of all the batteries. The cedure will be used to determine the grid conver-
overlay is used in conjunction with the dead space gence factor; however, in the absence of an SOP,
overlay (made from the dead space chart) for these decisions are made by the controlling artil-
determining areas not covered by units to fire on lery headquarters.
targets. (3) Preparationof the maps.
(a) Once the primary zone has been de-
24-43. Universal Transverse Mercator Grid signated, the map is prepared for transformation
Zone Transformation of data from one zone to another. If more than
a. General. Occasionally, throughout the one map is used, fasten the two maps together,
world, operations may take place in an area where using the commoni UTM zone junction longitudinal
artillery is required to fire from one grid zone line for orientation.
into another. When this situation occurs, the grid (b) Superimpose the grid of the primary
coordinates of points and the azimuth of lines zone over the adjacent zone by use of a straight-
from the grid of one zone must be transformed edge.
to the grid of the adjacent zone. This transforma-
tion will put the target and the firing unit on a (c) Draw the east-west grid lines into the
common grid. Transformation of grid coordinates adjacent zone by alining the straightedge with the
and azimuths can be accomplished by means of tick marks around the border and number the
computations as outlined in FM 6-2 graphically grid lines with the appropriate values.
as outlined in b below, or by FADAC as outlined (d) Draw the north-south grid lines by
in FM 6-40-3. alining the straightedge with the appropriate

24-17
N) C)
RECORD OF FIRE in
00
CALL FOR FIRE A FS
Observer AF/FFE/IS/S Tg t 101 0
Grid: O/
Polar: Dir Dis- U/D- VA_ /R
Shif t Dir- L/R +- U/D 20/R
,-S i- O 10 r S i HOB Corr
FIRE ORDER Df Corr Si
INITIAL FIRE COMMANDSI-*.* FM MF l; : --:
*--**-*'-*'-*'--'-,Cht ;I mg Of El

Shp Fz Dev Rg Cot Chg, Fz Car.Ti..f.(.).Fir.....Cart.(.) . mmQ T p

,-.-._-.-..-.-..'....:.........'......I..'..-
L--.'.-2-'-.2-2.-2-2--2.2-.2-2--2-',

•,.
••............2............
-.....
,...,..,.................,

.. ..... . . . ........ ,. ..- .- ...-..

. ... . . -..
--..

. . .. .
.. ......
..... • ., ...... .. . .,...
.... ..... .... .......... .. ... ..
. . .. . ..
"f."
..'".' .. ..
'". . . ..
" . ... " '. "'" . .".
. . ... . . ...

................ T.........G .........r..

...

Replaces DA Form 3622, 1 Jan 74 For use of this form, See FM 6-40-5, The proponent agency is US Army Training and
DAOA1 MAY
FORM76 4504 and DA Form 4007, 1 Jan 73. Doctrine Command.

I Figure 24-7. Firing data for planned targets.

 Cl, FM 6-40

accuracy should equal or, possibly, exceed that of must be considered in the determination of the
the met plus VE technique. In the fringe areas total fuze correction. A greater fuze setting is
of the transfer limits, the accuracy can be ex- required for delivering a projectile to a point at a
@1 pected to decrease.
(3) The observer adjustment technique is
given range with a plus 200-meter vertical interval
than to a point at the same range but at the same
the least desirable method for several reasons. altitude as the weapon. This difference in fuze
The accuracy of this technique depends on the setting is in direct relationship to the
ability of the observer to see the effect of the complementary angle of site (complementary
burst on the ground and on the size of the range). (This is also true in the delivery of
observer's bracket. This technique is used when conventional high-explosive projectiles for all
the other techniques cannot be used. The disad- weapons. However, in firing conventional HE
vantages are the time consumed, loss of surprise, projectiles, the vertical intervals and
requirement for an observer to be in position, complementary angles of site are normally small
inaccuracy of fire (normally, a 100-meter bracket and, consequently, have a negligible effect on the
is split), and number of rounds (HES) used in fuze setting.) The procedure for determining the
adjustment. total fuze correction is as follows:
(a) Determine the angle of site and site
d. Time Requirements. The time required to (GST).
prepare the fire commands for delivery of a nu- (b) Determine the complementary angle
clear round depends on the situation and the data of site (site minus angle of site).
available. If a current GFT setting is available, (c) Determine the fuze setting for the
the K-transfer technique will be the fastest. The adjusted elevation plus the complementary angle
next most rapid solution is met plus VE. The K- of site (GFT).
transfer technique will be the slowest if a regis- (d) Subtract the fuze setting for the
tration must be fired, because of the time re- adjusted elevation plus the complementary angle
quired to register. The time required for the ob- of site from the fuze setting fired.
server adjustment technique depends on the speed Note. When using the tabular firing tables for
of adjustment. determining the total fuze correction, add the comple-
mentary range to the chart range for the achieved high-
e. Ballistic Correction. Except for table M, burst location and then interpolating for elevation plus
the firing tables used for determing firing data for complementary angle of site in table F of the firing
delivery of the 8-inch nuclear round (projectile tables.
NUC M422) are based on firing of the spotting (2) The following example illustrates the
round (projectile HES M424). Table M is based determination of the total fuze correction with
on comparative firing of projectile HES M424 and the GFT and GST (charge 1, projectile HES):
projectile NUC M422. Because of ballistic differ- Chart data to high-burst location:
ences, a spotting round and a nuclear round fired Range 3,490 meters
with the same data will not burst at the same Height of burst
point. Therefore, when a nuclear round is to be above gun + 162 meters
fired, corrections to quadrant elevation and fuze Adjusted Data for the
setting must be determined. For each quadrant high burst:
elevation listed, table M gives a correction for QE ---- 389 mils
quadrant elevation and a correction for fuze Fuze setting 15.9
setting to compensate for the ballistic differ- Total fuze correction:
ences between the two rounds. To determine the Fuze setting fired 15.9
corrections, enter table M with the final quadrant Site to high burst
elevation determined for projectile HES M424 to ( + 162/3490; chg
the nearest listed value and the height of burst 1, TAG, GST) +53 mils
above gun to the nearest 1 meter. The values of Angle of site ( + 162/
the corrections can usually be determined by 3490; C and D
visual interpolation. scales GST) +47 mils
f. Determinationof Total Fuze Correction. Comp site ( + 53 -
(1) Because of the large vertical intervals (+47)) +6 mils
involved in the delivery of nuclear rounds, com- Adj usted elevation
plementary angle of site (complementary range) (389 - ( +53) ) 336 mils

24-21
Cl, FM 6-40

Adjusted elevation plus 24-49. Example-Determination of Position

comp site (336 + VE, Position Deflection Correction, and
(+6)) 342 mils Position Fuse Correction
Fuze setting for ad- a. Chart Data to Point Selected for High Burst.
justed elevation plus Deflection -- 3,148 mils
comp site (GFT) 16.5 Range -11,220 meters
Total fuze correction Height above gun + 180 meters
(15.9 - 16.5) - -0.6 b. Determination of Firing Data for High-
(3) The total fuze correction is added to the Burst Registration (Charge 3, Shell HES). It
fuze setting for the elevation plus complementary is mandatory that the first round of the high-
angle of site to the target. burst registration be observed. Therefore, the fir-
g. Position Velocity Error. ing data for the high-burst registration must re-
(1) Position VE includes the total deviation flect as many of the known nonstandard condi-
from standard for the weapon, ammunition, fir- tions as possible. The average position VE of the
ing chart, and survey which cannot be accounted weapon and current met data should be applied
for and for which corrections cannot be deter- to the firing data.
mined except by firing. The following factors in (1) QE to be fired.
relation to position VE for nuclear delivery must Total range correction
be considered: based on the average
(a) Nuclear delivery units will have a position VE and cur-
higher survey priority than other units. rent met ................. -130 meters
(b) If registration is permitted, only one Elevation for corrected
registration may be fired for each position. range (11,220 +
(c) Manufacturer's tolerances are more

I
exacting for the spotting and nuclear rounds than
for conventional ammunition.
(2) Accordingly, the position VE is contin-
-130) ...................
Site (+180/11,220; chg
3, TAG, GST) .............
388 mils

+19 mils
QE (388 +(+19)) ............. 407 mils
ually averaged at every opportunity. Judgment (2) Fuze setting to be fired.
must be used in the continual averaging of these Angle of site (+180/
velocity errors. A large deviation of a new posi- 11,220; C and D
tion VE from the average position VE should be scales, GST) .............. +16 mils
viewed critically, and the reason for the deviation Comp site (+19 -
should be determined and isolated. If the reason (+16)).. .... +3 mil
cannot be determined, it is usually better to omit Elevation plus comp
this position VE when the average is being com- site (388 +(+3)) ............ o391 mils
puted. Fuze setting EL + CPS ..... 33.5
24-48. Met Plus VE Met fuze correction ......... 0.0
a. Determination of Position Velocity Error, Average position fuze
and Total Deflection Correction. The procedures correction ........... .... -0.1
for determining the position VE and total de- Fuze setting to fire .......... 33.4
flection correction for shell HES are the same as (3) Deflection to be fired.
those for determining the position VE and total Current met deflection
deflection correction for HE as described in chap- correction ................ R4 mils
ter 21. The position VE and total deflection Deflection (3148 +
R4)...................3,144 mils
correction for nuclear delivery should be deter-
mined as soon as possible after occupation of posi- Note. When using the tabular firing tables for de-
tion and should not be delayed until the receipt termining the quadrant elevation and fuze setting to be
fired, determine the entry range from the complementary
of a nuclear mission. range table. Use the entry range to determine the eleva-
b. Determination of the Total Fuze Correction. tion plus complementary angle of site to determine the
The procedure for determining the total fuze cor- quadrant elevation.
rection for shell HES is the same as that for c. Chart Data to the Achieved High-Burst Lo-
determining the fuze correction for HE as out- cation (GraphicSolution or Computed).
lined in chapter 21 except that comp site must Deflection ........................ 3,140 m ils
he taken into account as outlined in paragraph
24-47f.

24-22
Range ......................... 11,240 m eters
Height of burst above gun ........ +157 meters
1*
 Cl, FM 6-40
d. Determination of the Total Range Correc- fuze correction are determined as shown in figure
tion. 24-8.
QE fired ..................... 407 mils 1. Determination of Position Deflection Cor-
Site (+157/11,240, chg 3, rection.
TAG, GST) ................. +16 mils Total deflection correction ....L4 mils
Adjusted elevation (407 Met deflection correction ...... R2 mils
-(+16)) ..................... 391 mils Position deflection correc-
Range for elevation 391 tion ........................ L6 m ils
(GFT) ...................... 11,140 meters j. Results.
Total range correction Avg position VE.............-1.5 m/s
(11,140-11,240)............-100 meters Avg position fuze correc-
Note. When determining the total range correction tion ........................ -0.2
from the tabular firing tables, subtract the range corre- Avg position deflection
sponding to the elevation plus complementary angle of
site from the entry range to the achieved high burst. correction .................. L6 mils
e. Determination of the Total Fuze Correction.
Fuze setting fired ............ 33.4
Angle of site (+157/11.24,
24-50. Application of MET Plus VE
a. The met plus VE technique will be used
I
GST) ...................... +14 mils when the target is outside transfer limits or if
Comp site (+16 - the GFT setting is not correct. When the met
(+14))....................... +2 mil plus VE technique is used, the data will be
Elevation + Comp (site computed to the target.
391 +(+2)) .................. 393 mils b. The ballistic corrections are determined as
Fuze setting corresponding indicated in the example in paragraph 24-51.
to elevation plus comp
site (393) ................... 33.6
Total fuze correction
24-51. Example-Application of Met Plus VE *
This example is a continuation of the example
(33.4-33.6) ................. -0.2 in paragraph 24-49. The worksheet for the com-
f. Determination of the Total Deflection Cor- putations (DA Form 4207) is shown in figure
rection. 24-10. DA Form 4207 is attached to the Record
Deflection fired..............3,144 mils of Fire, on which are recorded the fire mission,
Deflection to chart location the fire order, the initial fire commands, and the
of high burst ............... 3,140 mils statement "See attached nuclear worksheet."
HB registration deflection a. Chart Data to Target.
correction (total deflec- Range ....................... 10,520 meters
tion correction) ............. L4 mils Desired height of burst
g. Determination of the Met Range Correction, above gun .................. +150 meters
Met Deflection Correction, and Met Fuze Cor- Deflection..................2,752 mils
rection. The met corrections are determined as b. Solution of Met Message for Met Range
shown in figure 24-8. Correction, Met Deflection Correction, and Met
Battery laid on azimuth, Fuze Correction. The met message is solved as
0800, deflection 3200 shown in figure 24-9.
Azimuth fired...............856 mils Weight of projectile............241 pounds
Weight of projectile............244 pounds Propellant temperature ....... 750 F
Altitude of gun ............... 365 meters Altitude of battery.............365 meters
Altitude of burst .............. 522 meters Altitude of target ............. 375 meters
Propellant temperature........640 F Height of burst above
Latitude of gun..............340 N target ...................... +140 meters
Concurrent ballistic met
message: Chart deflection to target ..... 2,752 mils
Battery laid on azimuth........800 mils
METB39 MIFMIF 251500 025982 Referred deflection............3,200 mils
002618 009976 012618 009978 Position VE ...................- 1.5 m/s
022720 009978 032927 004981 Position deflection cor-
042818 002980 053129 004987 rection ..................... L6 mils
h. Determination of Position VE and Position Position fuze correction........-0.2
Faze Correction. The position VE and position Charge ...................... 3

24-23
Clo FM 6-40

MET DATA CORRECTION SHEET

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATA MET MESSAGE

CHRECATRG TITU E T PE ESSGE OCTANT UREA/UNIT

_I O
YcO7N eT . ? m3
ALT OF TRY (10 M) 3P/ / 0 S
LSEN0, IRD DIR SPEEDAIREP
WIND AR DENSITY
ALTOF OP5_0
_o_.._3-_
_________
_2.oo ,8 o*O
I0 0.

BTRT P I
s
1- / 0 O+
A hCORRECTIO
j
ALTO..AR.ET (nReTErR -. *LC .
~
........ I 7
(naetECORRECTED VALUES 0p 9 .
HEIGHT
OF BURST
ABOVETARGET
ONOWD I

ALT OFBUST$:;__ ____

(burs) ABOVOEGUN
OPTAGE
(M) ____
rCOMP _21
RU COURTRU
a
ENTRYRU

WINDCOMPONENTS
AND DEFLECTION

WHE.DIRECTIOO
WINDIS..
LESSTHANDIRFIREADD MpTO
T07 P DO
o t RR COR

....... /.... .OSZ --m " oo .

poPSDF2CORAyL. _

IWIO/
CROS CoM
EDIRECSTOARDORWINDU
L. 17 .7-T
o
EOS pS .....R ..ETS... PLU
DRIFT

W1I..
DL SR .

METRANGECORRECTION

VALUES VALUES STANDARD CORRECTIONS PU IU

AIR.D.N.IT. 0%
-o/.
?d7. 1_ CORR R I
PRO
WEIGHT
/o .t .. D z SETSUUECOR
/ ~

COMPUTATION
.OFVE

VE -5. TOTALSRGE
+ETFUEORCORRECTIORN

PROP e CHANGETOSMV SETR

SUGE
TEMP PF FORPROPTEMP M-f- Z,-3 CORRECTIOR

MV UT4. UVRANGE
AV
M/SS VRRECTNZ3 -47 CORRECTIOR

MET FUZE CORRECTION

,STANDARD CV ETV

USe2..
.'.
002.R!L:
3... U ROAVE ./
13
5 ~
*a
55°Z~.J

o
OLDFE ?
am.

AIRDENSITY I
* 4 + NEW ZCORR
l-- OS7 /20
2=
+ AVG FZMCORR
1
___ 2WIGHT 10 .Oi CORECTION O

TOOC
lUE
4 ~
A)fflRELACS
A OR
ATTETET
6151 AR 7,WHCHISOSOET
FUZE
O 0

TARGT 0BATERY TETIM

0
DA I
UAFORM
JAN 74 420
420 REPLACES DA FORM 6-15, 1 APR 67, CH ISOBSOLETE
WVHI, U.S. GPO: 1974-580-841/8331

Figure24-8. Met data correction sheet (DA Form 4200) (K-transfer, 8-inch nuclear round).

24-24
 Cl, FM 6-40

MET DATA CORRECTION SHEET

Foruse of thisform,see FM 6-40;proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATA MET MESSAGE

AGE
LOATIUDETYPEMESS 0 CTANT AREDI/UNIT
CHAiRGE AD QE RG
CHART

3 3( oo.
50 16 ET a3 in Ip:
PRESSURE

d•
. . ( TIALTM
mDATE
O

ALTOFSTY(10. 30 / 50
6?o, AIRDENSITY
ALTOF MOP
DOc 0 .... nnc....
LNENO. RIcO N InoDNPEED AIRTEMP
0.0
/P ;'1200,20%~t o.I
....... 3 7(A").-A/.0.A.It.CORRECTION I - 0.
ALT OF TARGETneart 3 VALUES/
CORRECTED

ABOVE TARGET

ALTOFBUSTT:I
ALTOF BTRY
meter)
T 3
COMP
RG CHART RG ENTRYRG

HEIGHTOF TARGET42.
(burot) GROVEGAO(M) 4Z0
WIND COMPONENTS AND DEFLECTION

WHEN DIRECTIONOF WINDIS 6400

LESSTHAN DIRFIRE ADD

OFWIND
DIRECTION

DRFIRE
DIRECTION f~CDRtRR DRIFT

OFWIND
CHARTODIRECTION 3 COLRR L
CROSS
WINDL
CROSS WINDLL

WIND SPEED . C05 L , 0 KNOS GIT CORR CORR

TILMET DOFF4V 5.
RANGEWIND S C
WIND SPEED XCOMFK

MET RANGE CORRECTION

FROM UNIT PLUS MINUS

KNOWN STANDARD VARIATIONS
ALUES STANDARD CORRECTIONS
VALUES

RANGESWIND / 94 . 'V.
AIRTEMP /00K D100%45

AIRDENSITTYOD100% . ?.
..... ,/ 2qz.. I / -~o .0
ROTA,- 35" ,. _ 7 30.
"
100.

METRANGECORRuo.-

COMPUTATION OF VE

PROP
TEMP
TO V4b
CHANGE
FFOR PROPTEMP + /0 MSC
UNITET RANGE
ORRECTION b
..... VUNITV V H-GE
A
V 5
AV )o 5/S Lb 40
CORRECTIVN CVRRECCTIVN
4WD
CORRECTION.
TOTALRANGE .ql
M/S
2m AVGVE
OLDVE +NEWVE

7 0 MET FUZE CORRECTION

FROVM CORRECTIO LStU C

AV o5 0. O/ Os oL %SsA
0
.0006..60 . S1.
RANGERIND

AIRTERMP
L~ps9 At.
1 (.200 . . . ,I

... o I0 o.I
DENWITY-G 0 .I CORR ECTIO

............. C..R A1 o (
°
DlA FORM 420flf
tL U
EPLACESDA FORM 6 15 1APR 67, HICHIs OBsOLETE
U.S. GPO: 1974-S50-8041/0331
1MJAN 74

round) plus yE.

*I Figure 24-9. Met data correction sheet (DA Form 4200) (met plus yE, 8-inch nuclear

24-25
Cl, FM 6-40

Current ballistic message: listed QE and the height of burst above gun
METB39 MIFMIF 260750 035996 to the nearest meter. These are the same
004211 011970 014214 011971 entry arguments used to obtain the ballistic
024320 009971 034422 009973 correction for QE).
044215 008973 054229 008972 Fuze setting to be fired ........ 30.1
Note. The line number to be used in solving the Note. When determining the fuze setting from
met message can be determined by use of table B. How- the tabular firing tables, add the fuze setting corre-
ever, a more accurate determination can be made by use sponding to the elevation plus complementary angle of
of an inferred QE and table A. A QE can be inferred site (d above) to the total fuze correction and the fuze
correction for the ballistic difference.
from the current GFT setting and the chart data to the
target. f. Determination of Deflection.
c. Application of Position VE. The application Chart deflection .............. 2,752 mils
of position VE to determine the total range cor- Position deflection cor-
rection is shown in figure 24-9. rection ..................... L6 mils
d. Determination of Quadrant Elevation. Met deflection correction ...... L5 mils
Total range correction....... -250 meters Total deflection correction .... LIi mils
Chart range .................. 10,520 meters Deflection to be fired .......... 2,763 mils
Corrected range g. Firing Data.
(10,520 +-250) .............. 10,270 meters Fuze setting .................. 29.7
Elevation for corrected Deflection.. ..... 2,763 mils
range ...................... 339 mils QE .......................... 364 m ils
Site (+150/10,520, GST) ....... +16 mils 24-52. K-Transfer GFT Technique I
Q E ........................ . 355 mils a. General. The K-transfer GFT technique is I
QE correction for ballistic based on a GFT setting and a GFT deflection
difference .................. +9 mils correction. Corrections are determined from an
(Enter the ballistic correction table, table HB registration, normally with three rounds of
M, in the tabular firing table with the HES shell. The ballistic difference between the
nearest listed QE and the height of burst spotting round and the nuclear round must be
above gun to the nearest meter. If the applied in the same manner as in the met plus VE
QE falls exactly halfway between two technique. The difference, if any, between the
listed values, the more even entry argu- projectile weights and the propellant
ment is selected. For example, HES QE temperatures of the spotting round and the
315 falls halfway between listed values 310 nuclear round must also be applied.
and 320. Therefore, 320 is selected as the b. Determination of GFT Setting. The proce-
entry argument into table M). dure for determining the GFT setting is the same
QE to be fired------------364 mils as that for HE ammunition except in the con-
Note. When determining the QE from the tabular struction of the time gageline which is construct-
firing tables, obtain the elevation plus complementary ed as follows:
angle of site for the total range correction plus the entry (1) Determine the complementary angle of
range (chart range plus complementary range) to the
site.
target and add the angle of site and the ballistic cor-
rection to determine the quadrant elevation to be fired.
(2) Determine the fuze setting for the ad-
e. Determination of the Fuze Setting. justed elevation plus comp site.
Angle of site (+150/10,520; (3) Determine the total fuze correction by
C and D scales .............. +14 mils subtracting the fuze setting corresponding to ele-
Comp site (+16 - (+14)) ......... +2 mils vation plus comp site from the fuze setting used
Elevation plus comp site ...... 341 mils to fire the high-burst registration.
Fuze setting for elevation (4) Add the total fuze correction to the fuze
plus comp site .............. 29.8 setting corresponding to the adjusted elevation.
The result is the adjusted (GFT) fuze setting
Position fuze correction........-0.2
at the level point. Move the hairline of the cursor
Met fuze correction ........... +0.1
to the GFT setting range and construct the ele-
Total fuze correction..........-0.1
vation gageline at the adjusted elevation and the
Fuze setting (29.8 +(-0.1)) ...... 29.7
Fuze correction for the time gageline at the adjusted fuze setting to
ballistic difference...........+0.4 the level point.
(Enter the ballistic correction table, table M, c. Determinationof GET Deflection Correction.
in the tabular firing table, with the nearest
The total deflection correction is determined in the I
24-26
 Cl, FM 6-40

8-INCH NUCLEAR COMPUTATION

MET PLUS VE
For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRA.DOC.

BATTERY 6 DATE /0 AUQ" PIECE NUMBER Z TARGET NUMBER y% til

ITEM
....................
..................

1. HOB ABOVE GUN (from met form) +150

. .............

2, CHART RG TO TGT 1 0
....................
....................

....................
3. TOTAL RG CORR (from met) ....................
.................... 00

4. CORR RG, 2__plus_3 (1Om) 10132 0

...................................
5. EL -4 (414+L) 3Y2.
6. SITE (VI 1 AT RG 2)

7. ANGLE OF SITE (C & D SCALES) ___,,___"

8. QE FOR SPOTTER, 5 plus 6 351

9. BAL CORR FOR NUC (TABLE M) (lri)
...................
10. QE TO FIRE, 8 plus 9 30
................................
11. COMP SITE, 6 minus 7 1 i
12. EL_5
13. EL plus COMP SITE, 11 plus 12 :'(, I
14. FS - 13

15. TOTAL FZ CORR (to tgt)

1.6. FS FOR SPOTTER, 14 plus 15 .........................................

/ O.Y
................... . . .

17. BAL FZ CORR FOR NUC (TABLE M) iiiiiiiiii~l+ii

__ __
.o.........

18. FS TO FIRE, 16 plus 17

... .. ... ...... ..

19. DF TO TGT

20. TOTAL DF CORR (to tgt)

21. DF TO FIRE, 19 plus 20 7.zI_

DA FORM 4207, 1 Jan 74

0 Figure 24-10. DA Form 4207, 8-inch nuclear met plus VE worksheet.

normal manner; that is, go from chart deflection to as indicated in paragraph 24-47e. The deflection
adjusted ,deflection and establish a deflection correction is determined in the same manner as is
correction scale. The transfer limits are the same done with conventional ammunition.
I as those for conventional HE ammunition. 24-53. Example-Determination of GFT
d. Application of Data to a Target. The GFT Setting, and GFT Deflection
setting is used in the normal manner for deter- Correction
mining the elevation. The fuze setting is deter- a. Known Data.
mined by placing the elevation gageline over the Shell--------------------HES
elevation plus comp site and reading the fuze set- Lot---------------------XY
ting under the time gageline. The QE and fuze Charges 3
setting are corrected for the ballistic differences Weight of projectile 241 pounds

24-27
Cl, FM 6-40

Propellant temperature 660 F Desired height of burst above

Altitude of battery 318 meters target ±150 meters
b. Fired (Adjusted) Datafor High-Burst b. Determination of Entry Range. Entry range
Registration. is necessary for determination of unit correc-
Deflection . 3,239 mils tions for projectile weight and propellant temper-
Fuze setting . . . 26.7 ature (c below). Visual interpolation usually is

1I
QE - -- 325 mils possible because entry range is used to the near-
c. ChartData to High-Burst Location. est 100 meters.
Deflection 3,235 mils
Complementary range (Enter
Range ----------------- 9,370 meters table B at chart range and
Height of burst above gun + 184 meters height of burst above gun
d. Determinationof Adjusted Elevation. to the nearest listed value)... +33 meters
Site (+184/9370; chg 3, Chart range .... I............. 10,470 meters
TAG, GST) +21 mils Entry range ................. 10,503 meters
Elevation (325 - (+21) 304 mils c. Determination of Corrections for Difference
in Projectile Weight and Propellant Temperature.
e. Determinationof GFT Fuze Setting.
(1) Correctionfor projectile weight.
Site ----- +21
Weight of projectile
Angle of site (+ 185/9370 C
(nuclear) -- 240 pounds
and D scales, GST) ....... +20 mils
Weight of projectile
Comp site (+21 - (+20)) +1 mil
used for registration - 241 pounds
Adjusted elevation -- 304 mils
Variation from registra-
Adjusted elevation plus comp
tion value-----------Decrease/1
site (304 + (+1)) 305 mils pound
Fuze setting fired 26.7
Unit correction deter-
Fuze setting for elevation
mined at entry range
plus comp site 27.1
(10,500) - 1 meter
Total fuze correction (26.7 - - 1 meter
Correction
27.1)--------------- --- 0.4
(2) Correctionfor propellant temperature.
Fuze 'setting for adjusted
Change to muzzle veloc-
elevation ------- 27.1
ity for current pro-
GFT fuze setting 26.7
pellant temperature
f. Determinationof Total Deflection Correction. (740 F) + 0.8 m/s
Total deflection correction .... L4 Change to muzzle veloc-
-Drift EL 304................L5 ity for propellant tem-
GFT DF correction............R1 perature at registra-
g. Results. tion (660 F)- - - 0.8 m/s
GFT B: Chg 3, lot XY, rg 9370, Variation from registra- Increase
el 304, ti 26.7 tion value---- 1.6 m/s
Total deflection correction __ Left 4 mils Unit correction (deter-
The worksheet (DA Form 4208) for the com- mined at entry range) - 22.4 meters
putations used in determining the GFT setting, Correction 36 meters
total fuze correction, and total deflection correc-
tion is illustrated in figure 24-11. (3) Total range correction for projectile
weight and propellant temperature.
24-54. Example-Application of K-Transfer Correction for projectile
Technique
This problem is a continuation of the problem weight plus correction
in paragraph 24-53. Projectile weight (shell nu- for propellant tem-
clear) is 240 pounds; current propellent tempera- perature ((-1) +
ture is 740° F. (-36) = -37 or
-40.)
a. Chart Data to Target. d. Determinationof QuadrantElevation.
Range ---- 10,470 meters Range plus projectile weight
Deflection 3,132 mils and propellant tempera-
Altitude of target 341 meters ture differences (10,470 +

24-28
 Cl, FM 6-40

(-40)) ------ 10,430 meters 20 meters. Deflection, elevation, site, 100/R, and
Elevation (use GFT with fuze setting are determined in the same manner
GFT setting) -364 mils as those for the HE projectile. The fuze setting
Site (+173/10,470; chg 3, is not determined by use of the elevation plus
TAG, GST) -- - +19 mils comp site method during the adjustment phase
QE shell HES (364 + because the vertical interval will automatically
(+19))----------------383 mils correct for small errors during the adjustment.
QE ballistic correction (En- b. Initial Data. For the first spotting round,
ter the ballistic correction an angle of site based on a vertical interval of 20
table in the tabular firing meters and the GT range must be computed and
tables with the QE to the added to the site for the ground location in the
nearest listed value and the same manner as that for conventional time fire.
HOB above gun to the When a subsequent height of burst correction
nearest meter.) - +10 mils is given by the observer, the computer uses the
QE to be fired_------------393 mils 100/R factor to determine the height-of-burst
e. Determinationof Fuze Setting. correction in mils which is applied to the previous
Site---------------------+19 mils site. For example, the observer's height-of-burst
Angle of site (+173/10,470 correction is UP 20, 100/R is 29 mils, and the
C and D scales, GST) + 17 mils previous site is + 8 mils. Multiply 29 mils by 0.2
Compsite((+19) - (+17)) +2 mils and determine a height-of-burst correction of
Elevation----------------364 mils + 5.8 mils, or +6 mils. Combine this with the
Elevation plus comp site (364 previous site and determine a new site of +14
+ (+2)) --- 366 mils mils.
Fuze setting for elevation c. Fire-for-Effect Data.
plus comp site (time gage- (1) The chart data are determined in the
line)-------------------31.3 same manner as in the adjustment phase. The
Ballistic fuze correction observer's fire-for-effect request should place the
(table M) +0.5 burst over the target with a height of burst of 20
Fuze setting to be fired 31.8 meters. The height above the target must be cor-
Determination of Deflection to be Fired. rected by the difference between the height of
Chart deflection .............. 3,132 mils the last round in the adjustment and the desired
Deflection correction height above target for the nuclear round. For
(R1 + L6=L5) ............... Left 5 mils example if the observer requests LEFT 20, ADD
Deflection to be fired...........3,137 mils 50, UP 5, FIRE FOR EFFECT and the desired
g. FiringData. height of burst above target for the nuclear
Target ....................... YX11O round is +180 meters, a height-of-burst correc-
Shell ........................ Nuclear tion of UP 165 must be applied. Since the ob-
Lot ........................... WY server is striving for a 20-meter height of burst,
Charge ...................... 3 the request for UP 5 indicates that the last round
Fuze setting .................. 31.8 was 15 meters (20 - 5 = 15) above the target.
Deflection..................3,137 mils Subtracting the 15 meters already achieved from
QE .......................... 393 m ils the desired 180 meters results in a height-of-burst
h. Computation of the K-transfer problem is correction of UP 165 meters. If the observer
simplified by use of a K-transfer worksheet (DA requests LEFT 20, ADD 50, FIRE FOR EF-
Form 4208) (fig 24-11). FECT and the desired height above target is
+ 180 meters, a height-of-burst correction of UP
24-55. Observer Adjustment 160 must be applied (180 - 20 = 160). Since
a. General. If the information necessary to the observer did not make a height-of-burst correc-
employ either the met plus VE or the K-transfer tion, the height of burst is correct (20 meters).
technique is not available, an adjustment may be
made with shell HES followed by fire for effect (2) Because of the large height-of-burst cor-
with shell NUC. The procedure will differ from rection required, site (angle of site plus comp
the normal HE adjustment in that the observer site) instead of the 100/R value (which is only
must conduct a simultaneous adjustment of de- an angle of site) must be considered. Also, the
~viation, range, and height of burst to the normal fuze setting must be corrected by the amount of

24-29
Cl, FM 6-40

8-INCH NUCLEAR COMPUTATION

K-TRANSFER
For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY 13 DATE I DlVG j PIECE NUMBER . TARGET NUMBER YX 110

]
ITEM
.............

1. ALT OF TGT 31I ..................................

2. ALT OF BURST ABOVETGT __+t0T" .............

.............
..................................

3. ALT OF BURST, Iplus 2 "11

.............
4. ALT OF BTRY
.............

5 VI,3minus 4 .1
6. CHART RG TO TGT to 410 (coont Cc f3l)
7. ENTRY RG (TABLE B, VI0) Oo5o3 0O s'o
.............
8. NUC WT vo
.............
9. SPOTTER WT v /-
10. DIFFERENCE, 8 minus 9-
11. UNIT CORR (TABLE F) I ..................................
12. CORR FOR PROJ WT, 10 X 11(1 m)
..........
..................

13. NUC TEMP CORR (TABLE E) 4 4. ___ .............

.....................
... ... .. .. .. .. .. ... ..

14. SPOTTER TEMP CORR (TABLE E) ,( 0 %

. .. .. ... .. .
.... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .
.

15. DIFFERENCE, 13 minus 14 :::: :: :: :: :::: ::: ::

.... .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .
. .. .. .. .. ... .

. .. .. .. .. ... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .. .

16. UNIT CORR (TABLE F)

.. ........................... . .
17. CORR FOR PROP TEMP, 15 X 16 (1m)
.... . . .................. . .

18. CORR RG, 6 plus (12 plus 17 (IOm)) ...............

'Ode,

.................................
MMI'll -------------
20. SITE (VI_5 ATRG6
....................
.................... .............
21. ANGLE OF SITE (C & D SCALES) ,-171
.............
22. QE FOR SPOTTER, 19 plus 20 3t 30 .................................
.............
............
23. BAL CORR FOR NUC (TABLE M) (lr?) +to ....................
24. QE TO FIRE, 22 plus 23 ...................

25. COMP SITE, 20 minus 21 +-2,

.............
....................
26. EL 193 (a ............
27. EL plus COMP SITE, 25 plus 26 .................................
----
------
28. FS- 27 (GFT)
Uss
29. BAL CORR FOR NUC (TABLE M) .i. o S7
30. FS TO FIRE, 28 plus 29
3/1
31. DF TO TGT
3132
32. DF CORR (FROM SCALE USING EL 19 L.S*
33. DF TO FIR E 3._1plus 32
3137
DA FORM 4208, 1 Jin 74

Figure 24-11. DA Form 4208, 8-inch nuclear (K-transfer) worksheet.

24-30
 Cl, FM 6-40

comp site involved. Therefore, both site and angle Projectile temperature (HES
of site must be computed by use of the height- and NUC)- -- 700 F
of-burst correction and the fire-for-effect range. b. Determination of Initial Data For Charge
The site is included as the height-of-burst cor- 1. The initial data for charge 1 are shown in
rection to the last site fired. The comp site is figure 24-12.
determined (site minus angle of site) and added c. Determination of Subsequent Data. Subse-
to the elevation for the fire-for-effect range in quent data are shown in figure 24-12.
determining the fuze setting. A range correction d. Determinationof Fire-for-Effect Data. Fire-
for the differences in projectile weight and in for-effect data are shown in figure 24-12.
propellant temperature must be applied, if ap- (1) Determinationof quadrant elevation.
propriate, before the elevation and the fuze set- Height of burst in rela-
ting are determined. tion to the target and
(3) The QE for the spotting round is the the last round fired
(20-5)-----------+15 meters
elevation corresponding to the chart range plus
the range corrections for propellant temperature Desired height of burst
and the projectile weight, plus the site for the above target--------+ 180 meters
additional height above target, plus the last site Height-of-burst correc-
fired. tion (180 - 15) +165 meters
Site correction ( + 165/
(4) Ballistic corrections to QE and fuze set- 3500; chg 1, TAG,
ting are determined at the QE for the spotting GST)-------------+54 mils

I
round and the total height of burst above gun Entry range (3500 +
(sum of initial vertical interval, the observer's (+63)) (not required
net height-of-burst corrections, and the desired in this example be-
height of burst above the target). cause PT and PW cor-
(5) The QE to be fired is the QE for the rections are not neces-
spotting round ((3) above) plus the ballistic sary --- ---- 3,563 meters
QE correction. Elevation for range 3500
(6) The fire-for-effect deflection is the chart (GFT)------------319 mils
deflection to the final target pin location. Site (last site fired (+9)
+ site correction
(7) The time to be fired is the fuze setting mils
(+54))------------+63
corresponding to the elevation plus comp site,
QE for spotting round 382 mils
plus the total fuze correction (if any), plus the
-

ballistic correction ((4) above). Total target height

above gun (desired
Example-Observer Adjustment Tech- HOB above target
24-56.
nique (+180) + vertical
The FDC Record of Fire for an observer adjusted interval (+18) +
mission is shown in figure 24-12. observer's net correc-
tion (- 5))---------+193 meters
a. Chart data to Initial Location Requested by QE ballistic correction
Observer. (+ 193 HOB and 380
Range-----------------3,460 meters QE)--------------+10 mils
Deflection-- --- 3,289 mils QE to fire nuclear
Altitude of the battery 318 meters round -_392 mils
Map altitude of the target _ 336 meters (2) Determinationof fuze setting.
Desired height of burst above Angle of site for HOB
tirget---------+180 meters correction ( + 165/
Projectile weight (TIES and 3500; C and D scales,
NUC)---------242 pounds GST)-------+ 48 mils

24-31
K)
N) C)
RECORDOFFIRE ______ ______

CALL FOR FIREI -n

AFS
Observer__________ AF/FFE/1S/S Tg tI10R
Grid: AIfp37r&
_I/ .i~h

I
0
Polar: Dir __VA t
Shift "~ Dir lRrA/i

[FIRE ORDER .W 4T60& /# rS Zg &Y #4stAW feDf orrA

I.ITIAL.FIRE.CMMANDS:::
F......R g 10 Cht Of Z2Y___9____

NTgtALocati OnMProrit FirFgUBSEUENTFIR.COMANDSAMM

Fz H O_B.__ _ _.__
Dev rrCRg~~~~~.....
_ _._ _._
,
Sphnt _____
,Fz
_____ rr Ch
_____
Ti S Df Dfor.fCar.OBE.Q.xp
MFS.F.hat
(..).F.ed.Rg Corr.........__ __._
Tp _

E________

C _ __ _ __ _ __0 _ _ _ _.....0 .u.....

_...._.._..6 .. .....
.. . .. . .. . .

Btry R DTGvO MY h S Tiat Creplot rid hart O i E Elo xAl

SFz 9 Cor ',C C.-Fz Cor Df (6 ) Fird r- W

UA 1 MAY7 6 450 riepiac-s UA trr jOLL, I Jan /7 F-or use of this form, See FM 6-40-5; The proponent agency is US Army Training and
and DA Form 4007, 1 Jan 73. Doctrine Command.

I Figure24-12. Observer adjustment technique.

1
0
 Cl, FM 6-40

Elevation + comp site (3) Determination of deflection.

(382 -58) 324 mils Deflection (chart deflec-
Fuze setting for eleva- tion to FFE location) 3,297 mils
tion plus copm site, (4) Fire-for-effect data.
(3 2 4 ....................................- 15 .7 Deflection --- --------- 3,297 mils
Ballistic fuze correction Fuze setting 16.0
( +198 HOB and 380
QE 392 mils
QE ) ......................................- +0 .3
Fuze setting to fire
(+15.7 + (+0.3)) 16.0

Section XIV. 155-MM HOWITZER-NUCLEAR DELIVERY

24-57. General in which position VE and position fuze correc-

a. Procedure. This section describes the fire tions are assumed to be zero.
direction techniques for delivery of the 155-mm d. Alternate Techniques. If the information
howitzer nuclear round. Nuclear delivery tech- for the employment of the preferred technique
niques for the 155-mm howitzer parallel standard is not available, the following techniques may be
gunnery procedures whenever possible; however, used:
the lack of a ballistically matched spotting round (1) Adjustment with HE rounds and fire
requires modifications to normal procedures. Test for effect with nuclear rounds.
firings have indicated that corrections derived (2) K-transfer (HE GFT setting).
from a high-burst registration with projectile
HE M107 introduce errors when these corrections 24-58. Requirements for Delivery Techniques
are applied to data for the nuclear round. The The requirements for the use of the various de-
magnitude of these errors is comparable to that livery techniques for 155-mm nuclear rounds are
of errors introduced when the position VE and as follows:
position fuze correction for the nuclear rounds a. Met Correction Techniques. The following
are assumed to be zero. When the met correction data must be available:
technique is used, all nonmeasurable conditions (1) Accurate survey data for the gun and
(position VE and position fuze correction) are target.
assumed to be standard and corrections are com- (2) Current met data.
puted only for those conditions which are re- b. Observer Adjustment. The observer must
ported in a met message and by the firing bat- be in a position from which he can observe and
tery. In those cases in which survey or met data adjust the rounds.
are not available, an adjustment may be con- c. K-Transfer (HE GFT Setting).
ducted on the target with HE projectiles armed (1) A valid GFT setting and a valid deflec-
with mechanical time fuzes. When the adjust- tion correction must be available.
ment phase is completed, the ballistic corrections (2) The target location must be accurate.
are added to the HE data and the nuclear round (3) The target must be within transfer
is fired in effect. If current met data are not limits.
available but a valid HE GFT setting exists, the
24-59. Accuracy
K-transfer procedure can be used when weapon
All data are determined to the same accuracy as
and target locations are known and the target
that for standard gunnery procedures.
is within transfer limits. The HE data to the
target are computed, ballistic corrections are ad-
24-60. Selection of Delivery Technique
ded, and the nuclear round is fired in effect.
a. Considerations in Selection -of Delivery
b. Nomenclature. The 155-mm nuclear round Technique. Listed below are some of the consider-
consists of the M454 projectile, the XM32E1 ations in the selection of a delivery technique.
sequential timer, the T361 VT fuze, and the M72 The S3 must evaluate all considerations in mak-
propellant. ing his decision.
c. Preferred Technique. The preferred tech- (1) The tactical situation.
nique for the delivery of nuclear rounds from a (2) The commander's guidance.
155-mm howitzer is-the met correction technique, (3) The desirability of surprise.

24-33
Cl, FM 6-40

(4) The availability of met. ment and elimination of the requirement for a
(5) The time available. current met message and computation of correc-
(6) Restrictions on registration. tions for the target.
(7) Survey. d. Time Requirements. The time required to
(8) The validity of the GFT setting and prepare fire commands for firing a nuclear round
deflection correction. depends on the situation and the data available.
b. Registrations. It is anticipated that the unit If a current GFT setting is available, the K-
will have adequate met support and will obtain transfer technique will be the fastest. The next
a valid HE GFT setting and a total deflection most rapid solution is the met correction tech-
correction by registering or by computation. nique. The K-transfer technique will be the slow-
c. Accuracy of Techniques. The accuracy of est if a registration must be fired, because of the
each technique depends on the situation and the time required to register. The time required for
available data. There are so many variables that the observer adjustment technique depends on
one technique cannot be considered the most ac- the speed of adjustment.
curate technique under all conditions. General e. Ballistic Corrections. The 155-mm howit-
guides are as follows: zer firing tables used for nuclear delivery are con-
(1) The met correction technique will pro-
bably be the most accurate method under most
structed for projectile, atomic, M454. When HE I
projectile M107 is used in the observer adjust-
conditions. Even though a current met message ment technique or when an HE GFT setting is
and an HE deflection correction are available, used for determining corrections, correction for
the assumption that the VE and fuze correction deflection, fuze setting, and quadrant elevation
are zero introduces some errors into the met to compensate for ballistic differences between
correction technique. These errors are approx. the HE projectile and the nuclear projectile must
imately the same as those that would occur if cor- be determined from table 0 of the firing tables.
rections obtained from registering with HE pro- Table 0 is entered with the final QE for projectile
jectile, M3 or M3A1 propellant (charges 4 and 5), HE.
and fuze time were applied to nuclear data
(charges 1 and 2). Theso errors are less than
those that would occur if corrections obtained
from registering with HE projectile and M4A1
or M4A2 propellant (charge 7) were applied
24-61. Example-Met Correction Technique
The met data correction sheet and Record of
fire for the following sample mission are shown
in figure 24-13 and figure 24-14, respectively.
I.O
to nuclear data (charge 3). The accuracy of this
technique depends on the amount (unknown) by a. Weapon-Ammunition Data.
which the VE varies from standard, on the vali- 155-mm howitzer M109
dity of the met message, and on the accuracy Altitude of battery 273 meters
of the target location. Latitude of battery 340 N
(2) The observer adjustment technique is Laying information:
required when a current met message is not avail- Azimuth -- 5,700 mils
able or when the battery or target is not ac- Deflection- - 3,200 mils
Propellant temperature 540 F
curately located. The disadvantages are the time
and HE ammunition consumed, the loss of sur- Projectile weight 118.5 pounds
prise, the inaccuracy of applying HE data to the Charge------ 3 GB (M3
nuclear round, and the inaccuracy of fire (nor- propellant)
mally, a 100-meter bracket is split). Timer temperature - 540 F
(3) The accuracy of the K-transfer techni- b. ChartData.
que when current registration data are used Deflection to registration
depends on the validity of applying HE data to point------------------3,180 mils
the nuclear round. If the target is accurately Deflection to target --- 3,014 mils
located and is in proximity to the registration Azimuth to target - -- 5,886 mils
point, the accuracy should approximate that of Range to target-----------11,440 meters
the observer adjustment technique. In the fringe Altitude of target 342 meters
areas of the transfer limits or outside the trans- Height of burst above target + 25 meters
fer limits, the accuracy can be expected to de-
c. Data from Registration.
crease. The principal advantages are the capa-
Adjusted deflection - 3,176 mils
bility of delivering nuclear fires without adjust-
Met deflection correction R6 mils

24-34
 Cl, FM 6-40

Total deflection correction- R4 mils c. Adjustment with Projectile M107, Fuze

Position deflection correction L2 mils Time, for 20-Meter Height of Burst.
d. Recent Ballistic MeteorologicalMessage. 1 -400
260750 021982 2 +200
METB31 344983
984017 011312 984025 3 -100.
001409
031217 959026 4 Time RIO+ 50
021115 968031
942017 051527 920009 5 U10,FFE
041422
d. Data Obtained from Round 5.
e. Qudrant Elevation. Add the entry range to M 107
Projectile ...................
the total range correction (fig 24-13) to deter- M 564
Fuze .........................
mine the corrected entry range. Determine the
Deflection..................3,324 mils
elevation plus comp site for the corrected entry Time......................23.1
range and the angle of site to obtain the quadrant 259 mils
QE ..........................
elevation.
e. Site Correction for 30-Meter Height of Burst
Corrected entry range
11,640 meters for Projectile M454.
(11,458 +(+187)) ............. +10 (12/100)= +1 mil
Elevation plus comp site for
f. Corrected QE for Projectile M107.
corrected entry range ....... 406 mils
258 + (+1) = 259 mils
Angle of site .................. +8 mils
g. Corrections from Table 0, FT 155AJ-2.
Quadrant elevation............414 mils
Deflection..................L2 mils
f. Deflection. Add the new met deflection +1.2
Timer setting ................
correction and the position deflection correction at Q E .......................... +25
the registration point to the chart deflection. from Table K, FT 155-AJ-2.
h. Corrections
Corrected deflection...........3,017 mils
Correction to timer for
g. Timer Setting.
timer temperature...........0
Timer setting for 11,640
35.1 i. Fire-for-Effect Data for Projectile M454.
meters .................. 24.3
Timer setting ................
Intermediate timer setting
34.9 Deflection..................3,326 mils
(35.1+(-0.2)) ................ 284 mils
QE ..........................
Correction for timer
temperature.............. 0 24-63. Example-K-Transfer Technique
Timer setting ................ 34.9 The Record of Fire for the following sample
h. Fire-For-Effect Data. mission is shown in figure 24-16.
Timer setting .............. 34.9 a. Weapon-Ammunition Data.
Deflection .................. 3,017 mils 155-mm howitzer M109
QE ....................... 414 mils Laying information:
24-62. Example-Observer Adjustment Azimuth ................... 6,200 mils
Technique Deflection................3,200 mils
The Record of Fire for the following sample M454 charge ................ 3
mission is shown in figure 24-15. Timer temperature............600 F
a. Weapon-Ammunition Data. b. Chart Data.
155-mm howitzer M109 Deflection to target............3,142 mils
Laying information: Range to target..............9,910 meters
Azimuth.................... 800 mils Vertical interval..............+47 meters
Deflection ................. 3,200 mils Desired height of burst.........30 meters
M107 charge ............... 7 c. GFT Setting and GFT Deflection Correction.
M454 charge.............3 GFT B: Chg 7, lot XY, rg 10,420, el 354, ti
Timer temperature............850 F 30.8
b. Chart Data. GFT deflection correction..R3 mils
Deflection to target .......... 3,327 mils
Range to target .............. 8,780 meters d. Data for ProjectileM107.
Site to target ................ +7 mils Site ....................... +49mils
100/R..................... 12 mils Deflection.................. 3,146 mils
Desired height of burst Time...................... 28.7
(M454)...................+430 meters QE........................ 335 mils

24-35
Cl, FM 6-40

MET DATA CORRECTION SHEET

For use of this form,see FM 6-40; proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATA MET MESSAGE

ALTMOP PRESSURE
TIM
DATE

AL. OF (10
.TRY 0 /0 0 4 3 O "' O

........ Po 0eo 0. I. Iol. 7

STR (O
A0) ......
Ah.. CORRECTION. 0. 1 0.,
...........
RGET meter) (nearest ..............
UE.I /01.1
ABO
VETARGET

..........T 367
ALTOP eTRmte:r

OF TARGET
HEIGHT
a- 3 COMPRG CHARTRG ENTRY
RG

WINDCOMPONENTS
AND DEFLECTION

ROENDIRECTION
OFWIND IS 6400
LESSTHANDIRFIREADD

DIRECTION
OP RIND f'o

DIRECTION
IRV.ROT.AT
OPFIRE ~~~COReRR 100.

CRASS WIN0 L.....OTS-0CROSSRI.L

WND SPEED LL COMP *M UNITCORR CORR 3
RANGE0100MET DEEL
RIND SPEED kCL COMP 0 V oHOT CR 0l

MET RANGECORRECTION

KNOWNS
VALUES STANDRD
VALUES VARIATIONSEFROM
STANDARD UNIT
CORRECTIONSMIU PLUS MINUS

..... ,. A. A __.__ + 1 ,y .
AIRTEMP DO00 1I f74 - 4.
AIRDENSITTY 100%lA 1 __ __ -*4#6 ?
PR01WEIGHT S '-iof f7 i.(
ROTATION 2). AMol7 ____T____I

_13o00
0
-,,PC.
RETRUAE CORR M ___4Y

COMPUTATION
OF VE

VEoCORRECTION
D~4(. TOTALRANGE

PROP CHANGE
TOMVor RM MET HASTE
TEMP FP FORPROPTEMP M S
/ CORRECTION

Gv -s O MVUIT +
CORRECTIONSIf.
4B1j&VARANGE
COHRECTIONL 7 "
RUSGE i+~
CORR.....TIO'
TOTAL
i~~*1 I
.........M!1"
+ NEWVE -2 7 AVG
VE
OLDVE

Tit 3' MET FUZE CORRECTION

VARIATION UNIT
FROM
STANDARD
CORRECTION PLUS J MITTs

__vAV

..... ....
ND
,
H
-5'
41Q -.
16o. o ,
oy0.
4 oo . 03L. oo1,
AIRTEMP ~ 0 .0b O
AIRDENSITYl ( o.o I o

.000.070o.2f~MET
. FUZE
CORECTIO N 0.-
-0-070 FUZE

CORRECTION o.

MET FAZECORR F -OM2-4 CORECTIONA

OLD FZ (.--?R _ _ + NEWFZ CORR 2 = AVGFZ CORR

1..........3dD
FORMAflREPLACES DA FORM 615, 1 APR67, WHICH IS OBSOLETE
4A6AT
1 JAN A74420 U.S. GPO: 1974-580-841/8331

1 Figure 24-13. Met data correction sheet.

24-36
 Dlo

RECORD OF FIRE
CALL FOR FIRE A FS
Observer AF/FFE/IS/S Tgf O0/R

' tf g
Polar: Dir . - U/D VA-
S h if t "i r L/ R 4 -/ -2U/ D_
A&AC T lZ - - ;45" ... 4s-,S '10 10 r S i HOB Corr
' D' C rr
F IRE ORDE R;#6, . t,.lW 77Cr jeX '. 7 I#Z o Si

...
............
........................ rthHO B i fS
&#'00'
we
wo
[INITIALFIRE
COM A NDSI: FM IMF:::-** ... ..........
::::
....-.....................-..

, . :, ,-,-
. -,-
. .,.o
. ,-.. . . = .= . . . . = ._,. ._..
, _.... . ,._.. . . . . .. . . .
:::::::::17:::
::
:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:..:_ .-......-..-..
........---..---
0 'A E::...:f:...:
mm...o::...:::...
~ ~ ~:::::::::::
~ ~ -..:::..
~ 4
~
::::::"MT
T...::
:::---:::,--in
~ ~ P..ER...
~ ~i::::::::::::::

.......-...
.. ..........
.!
.!
.....:::::::::::
..
..,. ...
:i~i
..ii
..
ii.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..........
....-
•---.....-.-.......
-
. ...........
. .... . . ..
. ..
....... ,....
. .. . . .........
........
:.
:-
...
-
:....
..-
.-.
.......'. .'...
.'.
......
'.i.
.............
.,
:;!:
*:
.
:!
......
.i
..
:.
:.:.
:%
...
. ... ....... . .
.............
. . .. . .. .. . . .. . .
i , , ;;;; ;:;; :;:.......':""............"" '""..... .... ....

....... ...-...... ...........

0
Replaces DA Form 3622, 1 Jan 74 For use of this form, See FM 6-40-5Cmadhe proponent agency isUS Army Traning and
DA 1 FORM
MAY 76 4504 and DA Form 4007, 1 Jan 73. Doctrine Command.
01
N

w,
S 'Figure 24-14. 155-mm nuclear met plus VE mission.
 0
-h
co RECORD OF FIRE
CALL FOR FIRE A FS
Observer AF/FF IS/S Tgt_ Co
100/13
Grid: 4(;73 AZ
Polar: Dir D* U/D -VA+ /R
Shif t ir L/R----- U/D 20/R
" C I.4Si 10 10 rii S i IHOB Cori
FIRE ORDER 4= ZZ Df orr
................ Si 20
JINITIAL FIRE COMMANDS MF ::.......................
-........
*........
*..... ------ Rg
*.......
.............
......
..........................
ht Df Ic
.................. ..... ........ ..-.-.-.-.-.-.-----................................
Sp Instr Sh ot Chg Fz Ti: Df'..-.... .. ... ....E
FL
TO AV-0TT 6V 4CR44 61YY Ar
f W..f AoWC
4T ER TF in Eff Ammo E)
koTlCr 1VAC4"j---, A' m TP
Tgt Location Priority Firip SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS A
V Un Itg
Dir, MF Dev Rg HOB MFV Sh FS Ti Chart Df Corr Df Chart HOB S' El
Sh Fz Corr Chg Fz Cor r Df (0 ) Fired Rg Corr QE Exp
.......................
.......... ..........
......................
....................
.................... ........
.........LQ.. ...... iW-D -072 YZ
..
....
..
.. ..
...
..
..
.....
....
..
....
...
...
..
..
.. ....
....
. ..
....
. ..
...
. ....
......... 33Z6 0 A ........
...........
-------...........
---------
..... 07
. .......
. .... A 0
.........
............
Moto 2V . ...........

......
.. .4..
... ...
.
.....
...
...
...
..
..
..
.. .
. .
...
..... ..
..
..
........
....
. ..............
. ....
.. ..
.... ..
.... ..
....
.. .
....
........
. ..
.. .
. ..
.. ..
..
. . .
..................... . .. ..
. ...
. ...
. ...
. ...
.. .
..
. .
..
..
. .
..
. .
....4..
. ....
..
..... ... . ... . ...
. . ...
.....
...................... . ..
.
.
. .
.
.. . . ................ ..................
......
OF . .
. .*.
..
.. ..
......
.... ..
,...................
... ......
..
.. ...
....
. .
..
....
. ....
..
...
. .......I........... .. ..
.. ........
.............. ...
.
. A .. ........
. . .
.. .-
. ......... ..
... ..
....
..
.
.... . ..
.. .......
..
. .... ..
.....
.....
.
..............
- . . . ..
. ..
. ..
... .- -
.-
.-.-
.-
.-
........... .-
..............-
...........
. -
..... .. . ...
..............
.. ...... .
...
..............
. .
.
.
.
..
CAW * ........ . . .............
......
....
. ... ........
....
............. ..
.. ... ...
Aff& a ... ..
....
................
............. ...............
.......... . ...............
..............
. . ..
. ..
....
. ..
.......
.....
..
............... ..
...
.
. .......... ............
..............
.............. -------------
............
... ........ .............. ...............

t DTG,;,g 16,70,1147,g ITg t eplot Grid Replot Alt

Replaces DA Form 3622, 1 Jan 74
DADA1MAY
FORM76 4504 and DA Form 4007, 1 Jan 73.
For use of this form, See FM 6-40-5,
Doctrine Command.
The proponent agency is US Army Training and

U Figure 24-15. 155-mm nuclear mission (observer adjustment).

 Cl, FM 6-40

option provides a higher probability of achieving

e. Correctionsfrom Table 0, FT 155-AJ-2. the desired height of burst than firing the
Deflection ................... L2 mils
projectile with the sequential timer option. When
Timer setting ................ +1.0
+20 the variable time option is used, the T361E2 VT
QE .......................... fuze is armed by the XM32E1 sequential timer at a
g. Corrections from Table L, FT 155-AJ-2. predetermined time. Establish this predetermined
Backofftime for VT fuze ...... -1.8 time by subtracting a back-off time from the fuze
h. Fire-for-Effect Data For Projectile M454. setting computed for the XM32E1 sequential
Deflection ................... 3,148 mils
27.9 timer. The back-off time varies with the fuze
Timer setting ................
355 mils temperature. Table L of the M454 firing tables lists
QE ..........................
the value to be subtracted from the computed time
24-64. VT Fuze in determining the time to be set on the XM32E1
Firing the M454 projectile with the variable time sequential timer.

24-39
0 0
0 RECORD OF FIRE
CALL FOR FIRE
A FS
Observer AF/FFE/IS/S 441
Tg t
Grid: . 2. 3f,(,? _ *PAP O/
Polar: Dir 0 - - U/D VA+
0/R 0
" /

Shf AVC _/7 / ,.S '1 0r Si HOB Corr

. ....... ...... C.... _ .. ..... .......

I

INITIALUFIREUCONMANS[':*:-:'::DFMAMMO HOBF S FSChar

Df orr Df CartE HO

.......
................
:
.........................
,-..-....-..-
lliilliil
-.----...---
..............

S....-..--.....-.--....En.
,.......
.. -.-..
,-- . - -. .. . .. . .. .. ... .. .. .. . ... .... ...... . .-....
.. •. .
Sp........... , 4..
•........................
. .. . .. . . ........... . ---...
... . . .. . ..F.
................
....... . .. . . .
......................
.. . .... . .. . ..-. ....... ...........
.....................
. .. . .... . . .. .

..................-.......-
:::-.,--.--..-

.............

DA 1 rMAY
ijst4504
76
Replaces DA Form 3622, 1 Jan 74
and DA Form 4007, 1 Jan 73.
For use of this form, See FM 6-40-5,
Doctrine Command.
The proponent agency is US Army Training and

$ Figure 24-16. 155-mm nuclear K-transfer mission.

 Cl, FM 6-40

CHAPTER 25
FDC PROCEDURES FOR HIGH-ANGLE FIRE

25-1. General b. Range. The range scale, on which range is

a. High-angle fire is fire delivered at elevations expressed logarithmically in meters, is applic-
greater than the elevation corresponding to the able to all charges appearing on one side of the
maximum range for a charge. Consequently, base. Range is read to the nearest 10 meters.
within the high-angle elevations for charge, range c. Elevation. Elevation is expressed in mils
decreases with an increase of elevation and and increases from right to left. Elevation is read
increases with a decrese of elevation. High-angle to the nearest mil.
fire is used in firing into or out of deep defilade. It d. 10-mil site. The values on the 10-mil site
may be requested by the observer or ordered by the scale denotes the site for each 10-mil angle of
I FDO. site for the elevation and charge selected. Num-
b. Most howitzers are capable of attacking bers are printed in red. The sign of the site is
targets effectively with high-angle fire. High- opposite that of the angle of site.
velocity weapons (guns) normally are not used e. Drift. The values on the drift scale are ex-
for high-angle fire because their high velocities pressed in mils and denote projectile drift. Drift
result in extremely high maximum ordinates, is always to the right.
long times of flight, and large probable errors. f. Time of flight. The time of flight scale is
Even with howitzers, high-angle fire results in graduated in seconds and indicates projectile
high maximum ordinate, and correspondingly time of flight.
long times of flight. g. Care must be taken in reading the high-
c. To assist the observer in identifying his angle GFT so as not to read the scales incor-
rounds, FDC personnel will announce SPLASH rectly. On the high-angle GFT, the elevation,
5 seconds prior to impact. They may give the drift, and time of flight scales increase in the
time of flight when they announce SHOT. They direction opposite to the range scale.
must always announce time of flight to an air
observer. To provide security for the battery lo- 25-3. Fire Order
cation, the FDC may code the time of flight. When high-angle fire is to be used, the FDO will U
d. The principal difference between low-angle omit the charge from the fire order. The charge is
determined by the battery computer (para 25-5). If
fire and high-angle fire is that in high-angle
fire an increase in elevation will cause a decrease the decision to fire high angle is made by the FDO, *
in range. based on his estimate of the situation, the words
"high angle" will be substituted in the fire order
25-2. High-Angle GFT for charge.
In high-angle fire, as in low angle fire, the basic
sources of ballistic data are the current tabular 25-4. Fire Commands
firing tables for each cannon. To simplify the a. Fire commands for high-angle fire must
determination of firing data FDC personnel may include the command HIGH-ANGLE to alert the
use the high-angle GFT. The high-angle GFT gun crews that a high-angle mission is to be fired.
consists of one rule, with ballistic data for This command is a special instruction. All other
charges 1 through 5 on one side and data for commands are the same as those for low angle fire.
charges 5 through 7 on the other side. Data for
charge 5 is included on both sides to facilitate b. The charge (which may change during the
changing charges during a mission. The scales adjustment), the fuze setting (for VT fuze),
on the high-angle GFT, from top to bottom, are and the quadrant elevation (which cannot be
as follows: used until the piece is to be loaded) are omitted
a. 100/R. The high-angle 100/R scale is identi- in the initial fire commands to the nonadjusting
cal to the low-angle 100/R scale. batteries. For example-

25-1
 Cl, FM 6-40

Adjusting Battery Nonadjusting Battery

angle fire against personnel in trenches or fox-
holes, regardless of the fuze used.

0
FIRE MISSION............. FIRE MISSION
BATTERY ADJUST......... BATTERY 4 ROUNDS
HIGH ANGLE.............. HIGH ANGLE 25-7. Deflection
CHARGE 4 ................... (no charge given) a. Drift is a function of time of flight. (For
DEFLECTION 2992.......... DEFLECTION 2847 convenience in low-angle fire, drift is considered
QUADRANT 1173........... WAIT, OUT (further com- a function of elevation.) Thus, drift is appre-
mands are not given until ciably greater in high-angle fire than in low-
fire for effect). angle fire because of the increased time of flight.
c. The charge, the fuze setting (if any), and the b. In high-angle fire, drift changes rapidly.
quadrant elevation for the nonadjusting batteries Because drift changes a great amount for a
are determined and announced when fire for effect relatively small range change, a correction to
is ordered. compensate for drift, which is determined at the
25-5. Selection of Charge elevation to be fired, is included in each deflection
In selecting the charge to be used, the computer, to be fired. Since drift is to the right, the correction
* supervised by the FDO, selects the charge that is is always to the left. The correction is always
least likely to require changing because of applied to the sum of the chart deflection and the
subsequent corrections from the observer. There is GFT deflection correction (if any).
some degree of overlap in ranges covered by Example: 155-mm howitzer, charge 5, high
various charges. If there appears to be a choice angle.
between two charges, the computer selects the
lower charge in order to reduce time of flight and
tube wear. It may be necessary to change charges
Range

8500
Elevation

1062
Chart
deflection

3200
GFT
Deflection Drift
correction correction

0 L45
Piece
deflection

3245
I
during an adjustment if the observer's initial
25-8. Site
target location was inaccurate. Although site has a relatively small effect be-
25-6. Fuze cause of the large angle of fall in high-angle
The most effective fragmentation of any burst fire, site always is included in a registration, in
occurs in a plane at approximately right angles a transfer mission, and in a mass mission. In
to the line of fall. This fragmentation is almost other high-angle missions, site is ignored if the
parallel to the ground in high-angle fire. Conse- angle of site is no larger than plus or minus 30
quently, if time fuze is fired, a very slight error mils. Since in high-angle fire range decreases as
in height of burst may result in a burst suffi- elevation increases and range increases as eleva-
ciently high to cause significant loss of fragmen- tion decreases, a minus site must be used to
tation effect. Because of the large height-of-burst compensate for a plus vertical interval and a plus
probable error, time fuze normally is not em- site must be used to compensate for a minus ver-
ployed in high-angle fire. The steep angle of fall tical interval.
eliminates the possibility of ricochet fire. Fuze a. Standard FDC procedures concerning site
quick or fuze VT normally is used. in high-angle fire are as follows:
(1) The VCO computes and announces the
a,. Fuze quick is very effective when used in
angle of site for each high-angle mission. Since
high-angle fire against personnel in the open be-
there is no GST for high-angle fire, the VCO
cause the projectile is almost vertical at the in-
computes the angle of site by use of the C and
stant of detonation. Since the side spray of the
D scales of any graphical site table.
burst contains most of the fragmentation, the
effect is a spray in all directions out from the (2) Considering the size of the angle of
point of impact approximately parallel to, and site and the type of mission to be fired, the com-
very near, the ground. puter decides whether site will be included.
b. The maximum lethality against personnel (3) Regardless of whether site is included,
in the open is attained with high-explosive pro- the computer does not include the height-of-
jectile and fuze VT. This combination has the burst correction (20/R) when VT fuze is to be
advantages of a lateral spray effect obtained fired because the decending branch of the tra-
with fuze quick and the effectiveness of a very jectory in high-angle fire is almost vertical.
low airburst. b. When the tabular firing tables are used/in
c. Because the side spray is horizontal, high- computing site, the computer extracts from the
angle fire normally is less effective than low- supplementary data table for the charge the comn

25-2
 Cl, FM 6-40

, plementary angle of site factor corresponding

to the initial elevation to be fired. The sign of the
complementary angle of site factor for a plus
angle of site is minus; for a minus angle of site,
a. High-angle fire introduces large amounts of
drift into the trajectory. Additionally, the value
of drift changes with each small change in
range. This increased rate of change in drift in-
it is plus. Because the complementary angle of troduces a unique situation whereby deflections
site factor in high-angle fire always is greater fired at various elevations contain different
than 1 mil, the complementary angle of site al- amounts of drift. In order to minimize the error
ways will be greater than the angle of site. To caused by this condition the FDC must give spe-
determine the site, the computer algebraically cial consideration to the computation of the cor-
adds the complementary angle of site to the rect deflection.
angle of site, which produces a site with sign
opposite that of the angle of site. b. Site must be algebraically subtracted from U
the adjusted quadrant elevation to determine the
c. Use of a special site scale on the high-angle adjusted elevation. The correct site can be de-
graphical firing table simplifies the determina-
rived only by successive approximation, since
tion of site for high-angle fire. The site scale is comp site is a function of elevation and not of
located just below the elevation scale. This scale
chart range. Correct site is determined when the
is referred to as the 10-mil site scale. The read- site computed agrees with or is within 1 mil of
ing obtained from this scale gives the site for a the previously computed site. The last site com-
10-mils angle of site at the elevation and charge puted is the correct site.
that is being used. To determine the site for any
point, divide the angle of site to that point by Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 3
10 and multiply the quotient by the factor read (fig 25-1) (DA Form 4504 (Record of Fire)).
from the 10-mil site scale. The value obtained
will be slightly less accurate than the value Angle of site ................... +22 mils
computed from the tabular tables. The 10-mil Adjusted QE.................1,096 mils
site factor, considered negative, when multi- Site fired during registration ... -6 mils
plied by-the angle of the site and divided by 10, First apparent EL 1096- (-6) .... 1,102 mils
will produce the proper sign and amount of the 10-mil site factor correspond-
site. The sign of the site will be opposite that of ing to elevation 1102.......... -3.5 mils
the angle of site. First apparent site (22/10 x
(-3.5)=-7.7)........ ........... -8 m ils
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 5 Adjusted QE .................. 1,096 mils
(GFT). - First apparent site ............- (-8) mils
Chart range 8,500 meters Second apparent EL............1,104 mils
Elevation corresponding 10-mil site factor correspond-
to chart range_..... 1,062 mils ing to elevation 1104......... -3.5 mils
Altitude of battery.. 400 meters Second apparent site
Altitude of target 509 meters (22/10 x-3.5) --7.7)........... -8 mils
Vertical interval + 109 meters Adjusted QE -....... 1,096 mils
Angle of site (C and D - Site........................-(-8) mils
scales, GST) + 13 mils Adjusted EL............... .1,104 mils
10-mil site factor
(GFT) -4.1
c. GFT settings for high-angle fire are I
Site (13/10 x (-4.1) -5 mils established in the same manner as those for low-
Quadrant elevation angle fire. For the example in b above, the GFT
(1062 + (-5)) 1,057 mils setting is GFT B: Charge 3, lot ZT, range 5420,
d. If a change in charge is required during the elevation 1104.
conduct of the mission, site should be recomputed
for the new charge. d. Standard transfer limits are not applicable
to high-angle fire because of the short range
25-9. Precision Reg'istration span of each charge. Corrections are considered
High-angle precision registration procedures dif-
valid for the charge used in determining the cor-
fer from low-angle precision registration proced- rections and are considered valid for other
ures in several respects. charges as shown in table 25-1.

25-3
 Cl, FM 6-40

Table 25-1. Transfer Limits, High Angle 25-11. Data for Replot
Weapon

105-mm
how
Charge registered
with

1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Transfer limits

All ranges, charges 1 through

a. The purpose of replot in high-angle fire is
the same as that in low-angle fire (para 20-15).
b. Regardless of whether site is included dur-
0
5. ing the adjustment, the correct site must be
6 Charge 6 only, ± 1,500 algebraically subtracted from the adjusted (fire-
meters.*
7 Charge 7 only, ± 1,500 for-effect) quadrant elevation to obtain the ad-
meters.* justed (fire-for-effect) elevation. The range at
155-mm how 1, 2, 3, 4 All ranges, charges 1 through which the target is plotted is determined from
and 8-inch 5. the adjusted elevation. During the adjustment,
how. 5 Charge 5 only, ± 1,500 the 10-mil site factor may change considerably.
meters.*
6
Therefore, the effective site at the end of the ad-
Charge 6 only, ± 1,500
meters.* justment will be different from that used in the
7 Charge 7 only, ± 1,500 initial firing data. This error must be corrected
meters.* if the target is to be plotted at its correct range.
*-±.2,000 meters for registration point ranges greater than 10,000
meters.
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, GFT set-
ting (from prior registration is GFT B: Charge
e. The total deflection correction is determined
5, lot WY, range 7050, elevation 1145.
by subtracting the chart deflection from the
adjusted deflection. The correction for drift Angle of site----------+20 mils
corresponding to the adjusted elevation is Adjusted QE ---- 1,162 mils
algebraically subtracted from the total deflection 10-mil site factor corre-
correction. The result is called the GFT deflection sponding to elevation
correction and is considered to be a constant for all 1162 - - -2.0 mils
factors except drift. First apparent site
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 3, (+2.0) x (-2.0) =
high angle. -4.0---------------4 mils
Adjusted elevation.............1,104 mils First apparent adjusted
Adjusted deflection.......... 3,260 mils elevation (1162 -
Chart deflection .............. 3,207 mils (-4)) 1,166 mils
Total deflection correction ..... L53 mils 10-mil site factor corre-
Drift correction correspond- sponding to elevation
ing to adjusted elevation ..... L51 mils 1166 -1.9 mils
GFT deflection correction ...... L2 mils Second apparent site
f If no high-angle registration has been con- (+2.0) x (-1.9) =
ducted, a GFT deflection correction of zero will -3.8 - - 4 mils
be used. If a charge other than that with which Second apparent site
the registration was conducted is to be fired, the agrees with first ap-
GFT deflection correction for the charge nearest parent site
the charge to be fired is used. Adj usted elevation
(1162 - (-4)) ......... 1,166 mils
25-10. Preparation of Graphical Equipment Range corresponding to
a. Construct the GFT setting by placing the elevation 1166 (use
hairline over the adjusted elevation for the GFT setting) used in
charge and drawing a range gageline through replotting target 6,780 meters
the GFT setting range. This will facilitate using
the GFT setting for other charges when only c. After the adjusted elevation has been de-
one high-angle registration has been conducted. termined as described in b above, the GFT de-
b. The GFT deflection correction for each flection correction for the charge (or, if no GFT
charge is placed on the GFT adjacent to the data deflection correction has been determined for the
for that charge. It is used in a fire mission by charge fired, the GFT deflection correction from
algebraically adding it to the value of drift the nearest charge that does have a GFT deflec-
tion correction) and the drift correction are sub-
for each round to be fired to determine the total
tracted from the fire-for-effect piece deflection.
deflection correction.
If no GFT deflection correction has been deter-

25-4
 RECORDOFFIRE
A FS
Observer d y CALL FOR FIRE
AF/FFE/IS/S " Tgt
0 100/R
oo/R 2
Polar: DirDisU/D VA±_
Shift Dir- L/R 0/1)/l
U/D: L620/R
"_ _ _ _ _7_ 4 Si'10 lot,1l r1 Si 2., HOB Corr
FIRE ORDER PRE- AC 5- LbO'"T-r yDf Corr iS-S Si -'
.....
Rg 57/00 Cht Df 1)A67 El IiS

Tgt Location PriOrity Firipg SUBEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS AMMO

Dir,
DSr, F Dev Rg Corr
HOB Chg Fz
MF. Sh Corr
FS Ti.D.( ChrTforDf ) Fired Rg
CatHBSiECorr ) EE E EpTp
Exp T

tLoo
-nHO L... -4.......... M .........
o ...........

1.10 ff C oSrr _____ ___ 3pr

Df__)
........... F1L
r(e&M) __Corr

____ ____ ___ ,s p ks---------~..:-

~~~- -.-
350 fM /_ _ _ ___ __ o93:::1___

B y DTG ITgt fReplot Grid IReplot Alt

Replaces DA Form 3622, 1 Jan 74 For use of this form, See FM 6-40-5; The proponent agency is US Army
DAD1 MAY
FORM76 4504 and DA Form 4007, 1 Jan 73. Doctrine Command.
Training and '
K)
0)
(:1
§ Figure 25-1. Record of precision registration, high-angle fire. 0
Cl, FM 6-40

mined, only the drift correction is subtracted b. If several batteries are to mass on a target
from the fire-for-effect piece deflection. The re- when only one battery is to adjust, site should
sult is the deflection for replotting the target. be computed at the initial range for each battery.
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 5. Site should be recomputed for the nonadjusting
FFE piece deflection 3,245 mils batteries whenever it is necessary to recompute
Adjusted elevation 1,166 mils site for the adjusting battery (e.g., when the
Drift correction corre- adjusting battery changes charges) or should
sponding to adjusted be recomputed for an individual nonadjusting
elevation L62 mils battery when it changes charges.
GFT deflection correc-
c. During an adjustment, the 10-mil site fac-
tion for charge 5 L15 mils
tor may change considerably. As a result, the site
Total deflection correc-
at the end of the adjustment will differ from
tion (L62 + L15) L77 mils
that used in the initial commands. However, the
Replot deflection (3245
error in range due to false site will be essentially
- L77) . 3,168 mils
the same for all batteries.
d. If the terrain is rugged cr if a large range
change has been made since the angle of site
was first computed (the angle of site may be first 25-13. Duties of Fire Direction Personnel
The duties of fire direction personnel in high-
computed at the beginning of the mission or at
angle fire are the same as those in low-angle
the onset of determining replot data), the angle
of site is recomputed for the replotted location fire except for minor modifications as shown be-
low:
of the target. The new map altitude is used in
determining the new angle of site. If the new a. If the observer does not request high-angle
angle of site differs by more than I mil from the fire but the FDO decides that high-angle fire will
angle of site previously computed, a new adjust- be used, the command HIGH ANGLE will be
ed elevation and a corrected range for replotting given in lieu of the charge in the fire order.
the target must be obtained. This process is re-
peated until the correct angle of site (one that
agrees with or is within 1 mil of that previously
computed) and adjusted elevation have been de-
Example: USE GFT, LOT ZULU TANGO,
HIGH ANGLE, 2 ROUNDS, VT IN EFFECT.
b. When adjustment is required before mass-
I0
termined. The procedure for reporting data is the ing the battalion, the battery that is centrally
same as that used for low-angle fire except that located should normally be designated as the
the type of fire and charge used are included: adjusting battery to eliminate large differences
for example, GRID , ALTITUDE in range.
,_ FUZE , HIGH ANGLE,
CHARGE , TARGET c. For all mass missions, batteries should fire
center range, since large range dispersion can
be expected.
25-12. Massing and Transfers
a. Because of the high maximum ordinates d. The VCO determines and announces angle
and long times of flight encountered in high- of site for all missions.
angle fire, massing or transfer of fire is less reli-
able in high-angle fire than in low-angle fire. e. The computer-
However, under stable weather conditions, suc- (1) Selects the charge to be fired.
cessful transfers of fire within a single charge (2) Combines the drift correction, the
are practicable. The small area of range cov- GFT deflection correction, and the chart deflec-
ered by each charge prevents establishment of tion to determine the deflection to fire.
definite transfer limits. Consequently, every ef- (3) Determines site when the angle of site
fort should be made to obtain observation and is larger than a plus or minus 30 mils or when a
to adljust each hattery that is to fire on the registration, transfer mission, or mass fire mis-
target. sion is to be fired.

25-6
 Cl, FM 6-40

I PART FIVE.

MISCELLANEOUS

CHAPTER 27

TARGET ANALYSIS AND ATTACK

(Superseded by FM 6-141 -1, FIELD ARTILLERY TARGET ANALYSIS AND

WEAPONS EMPLOYMENT: NONNUCLEAR)

CHAPTER 28

SERVICE PRACTICE

(Superseded by FM 6-40-5, MODERN BATTLEFIELD CANNON GUNNERY)

(next numbered page is 29-1)

27-1
(27-2 blank).
 Cl, FM 6-40

APPENDIX A

REFERENCES

A-1. Publication Indexes

Department of the Army Pamphlets of the 310-series should be consulted frequently for latest changes
or revisions of references given in this appendix and for new publications relating to material cov-
ered in this manual.
A-2. Army Regulations
75-1 Malfunctions Involving Ammunition and Explosives, Reports Control
Symbol AMC-132 (MIN)
310-25 Dictionary of United States Army Terms
310-50 Authorized Abbreviations and Brevity Codes
385-63 Regulations for Firing Ammunition for Training, Target Practice, and
Combat

A-3. Department of Army Pamphlets (DA PAM)

108-1 Index of Army Motion Pictures and Related Audio-Visual Aids.
310-series Index of Military Publications
A-4. Field Manuals (FM)
6-2 Field Artillery Survey
6-20 Fire Support for Combined Arms Operations
6-40-5 Modern Battlefield Cannon Gunnery
6-50 The Field Artillery Cannon Battery
6-75 105-mm Howitzer M101 Series, Towed
6-77 105-mm Howitzer M52, Self-Propelled
6-79 105-mm Howitzer M108, Self-Propelled
6-81 155-mm Howitzer M114, Towed
6-88 155-mm Howitzer M109 and M109A1, Self-Propelled
6-90 8-inch Howitzer M2, Towed
6-92 155-mm Howitzer M44, Self-Propelled
6-94 175-mm Gun M107, Self-Propelled and 8-inch Howitzer M10 Self-Propelled
6-115 The Field Artillery Searchlight Battery
6-120 The Field Artillery Target Acquisition Battalion and Batteries
6-122 Artillery Sound Ranging and Flash Ranging
6-125 Qualification Tests for Specialists, Field Artillery
6-140 Field Artillery Organizations
6-141-1 Field Artillery Target Analysis and Weapons Employment: Nonnuclear
6-161 Radar Set AN/MPQ-4A
11-40 Tactical Audio-Visual Doctrine
17-12 Tank Gunnery
21-5 Military Training Management
21-6 Techniques of Military Instruction
21-26 Map Reading
21-30 Military Symbols
23-92 4.2-inch Mortar M30 0
(C)32-5 Signal Security (SIGSEC) (U)
(C)32-20 Electronic Warfare (U)
100-5 Operations of Army Forces in the Field

A-1
C1, FM 6-40
A-5. Technical Manuals (TM)
5-581A General Drafting
6-230 Logarithmic and Mathematical Tables
6-240 Slide Rule, Military, Field Artillery
9-325 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Howitzer, Light,
Towed, 105-mm M101 and M101Al.
9-1015-215-12 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Mortar 4.2-inch:
Cannon M30 on Mount M24 or M24A1; and Mortar, Sub-caliber, 60-mm:
M31
9-1015-234-12 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual: (Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools Lists) Howitzer, Light, Towed: 105-mm, M102
9-1025-200-12 Operator and Organizational Maintennce Manual: Howitzer, Medium,
Towed: 155-mm M114 and M114A1; and Howitzer, Medium, Towed,
Auxiliary Propelled, 155-mm, M123A1
9-1300-200 Ammunition, General
9-1300-203 Artillery Ammunition
9-2300-216-10 Operator's Manual, Gun, FA, SP, 175-mm, M107 (2350-436-6635)
and Howitzer, Heavy, SP, 8-Inch, Ml10 (2350-439-6243)
9-2300-216-20 Organizational Maintenance Manual, Gun, FA, SP, 175-mm, M107 (2350-
436-6635) and Howitzer, Heavy, SP, $-Inch, Ml10 (2350-439-6243)
9-2350-217-10 Operator's Manual, Howitzer, Light, SP, 105-mm, M108 (2350-440-8810)
and Howitzer, Medium, SP, 155-mm, M109 (2350-440-8811)
9-2350-217-20 Organizational Maintenance Manual, Howitzer, Light, SP, 105-mm, M108
(2350-440-8810) and Howitzer, Medium, SP, 155-mm, M109 (2350-440-
8811)
11-287 Radio Sets AN/VRQ-1, AN/VRQ-2, and AN/VRQ-3
30-245 Image Interpretation Handbook
38-750 The Army Maintenance Management System
A-6. Firing Tables (FT)
8-J-4 Cannon, 8-inch Howitzer; M2 and M2A1 on Howitzer, Heavy, Towed:
8-inch, M114 Cannon, 8-inch Howitzer; M47 on Howitzer, Heavy, Self-
Propelled, Full-Tracked: 8-inch, M55 Cannon, 8-inch Howitzer: M2A1E1
on Howitzer, Heavy, Self-Propelled: 8-inch, Ml10 Firing Projectile,
HE, M106, Projectile, Chemical, M426.
8-ADD-A-1 Firing Table Addendum to FT 8-J-4 for Projectile HE, M404
8-0-4 Cannon, 8-inch Howitzer: M2 and M2A1 on Howitzer, Heavy, Towed:
8-inch, Ml15, Cannon, 8-inch Howitzer: M2A1E1 on Howitzer, Heavy,
Self-Propelled: 8-inch, Ml10 Cannon, 8-inch, Howitzer: M47 on Howit-
zer, Heavy, Self-Propelled, Full-Tracked: 8-inch, M55; Firing Projec-
tile HES. M424. Projectile, Atomic, M422.
105-H-7 Cannon, 105-mm Howitzer, M2A2 and M2A1 on Howitzer, Light, Towed,
105-mm, M101AI and M101 and Cannon, 105-mm Howitzer, M49 on
Howitzer, Light, Self-Propelled, Full-Tracked, 105-mm, M52A1 and

I
M52, Firing Cartridge, HE, MI; Cartridge, Gas, Persistent H and HD,
M60, Cartridge, Gas, Nonpersistent, GB, M360, Cartridge, Smoke, WP,
M60, Cartridge, Smoke, BE, M84 and M84B1 (HC and Colored), Car-
tridge, Smoke, HC, BE, M84A1 (M84E1), Cartridge, Illuminating,
M314A2E1; Cartridge, HEP-T, M327 Cartridge, Antipersonnel, XM546
105-ADD-B-2 Firing Table Addendum to FT 105-H-6 for Cartridge, HE, M444
155-ADD-E-1 Projectile, HE, M449A1 (M449E2) ; Projectile HE, M449(T379), Projectile,
HE, M449E1
155-ADD-F-i Addendum to FT 155-Q-4 for Projectile, HE, M449A1 (M449E2), Pro-
jectile, HE, M449(T379) Projectile, HE, M449E1
155-AH-2 Cannon, 155-mm Howitzer, M126E1 and M126 on Howitzer, Medium, Self-
Propelled: 155-mm, M109, Firing Projectile, HE, M107; Projectile,

A-2
 Cl, FM 6-40
Smoke, WP, Ml10; Projectile, Smoke, BE, M116 and M116B1 (HC and
Colored); Projectile, Gas, Persistent, HD, Ml10; Projectile, Gas, Per-
sistent, H, Ml10; Projectile, Gas, Nonpersistent, GB, M121A1; Pro-
jectile, Gas Persistent, VX, M121A1; Projectile, Illuminating, M118,
M118A1, M118A1B1, M118A2 and M118A2B1; Projectile, Illuminating,
M485E2, M485E1 and M485
155-AJ-2 Firing Tables for Cannon, 155-mm, Howitzer, M126E1 and M126 on
Howitzer, Medium, Self-Propelled
155-AM-1 Firing Tables for Cannon, 155-mm Howitzer, M185 on Howitzer, Medium,
Self-Propelled, 155-mm, M109A1 and Howitzer, Medium, Self-Propelled,
155-mm M109A1B Firing Projectile, HE M107 Projectile, Smoke, WP,
Ml10 Projectile, Smoke BE, M116, M0i6Bl (HC and Colored/Projec-
tile) ; Projectile, Gas,Persistent, H and HD, Ml10 projectile, gas, nonper-
sistent, GB, M121A1 Projectile, Gas Persistent, VX, M121A1 Projectile
Illuminating, M485A2 and M485A1
105-AS-2 Cannon, 105-mm Howitzer, M102, on Howitzer, Light, Self-Propelled:
105-mm, M108, and Cannon, 105-mm, M137E1 and M137 on Howitzer,
Light, Towed, 105-mm, M102, Firing Cartridge, HE, M1; Cartridge, Per-
sistent, H, M60; Cartridge, Gas, Persistent, HD, M60; Cartridge, Gas,
Nonpersistent, GB, M360; Cartridge, Smoke, WP, M60; Cartridge, Smoke,
BE, M84 and M84B1, (HC and Colored); Cartridge, Illuminating,
M314A2E1; Cartridge, HEP-T, M327; Cartridge, Antipersonnel, XM546
105-ADD-F-1 Firing table Addendum to FT 105-AS-2 for Cartridge, lIE, M444
155-Q-4 Howitzer, Medium, Towed, 155-mm, M114A1 and M114; Howitzer, Medi-
um, Self-Propelled, Full-Tracked, 155-mm M44A1 and M44; Howitzer,
medium, Towed, Auxiliary Propelled, 155-mm, M123A1; Firing Pro-
jectile, HE, M107; Projectile, Smoke, WP, Mll0; Projectile, Smoke,
BE, M116 and M116B1 (HC and Colored); Projectile, Gas, Persistent,
HD, Ml10; Projectile, Gas, Persistent, H, Ml0, Projectile, Gas, Non-
Persistent, GB, M121A1; Projectiles, Gas Persistent, VX, M121A1;
Projectile, Illuminating, M485E2, M485E1 and M485.
175-A-1 Cannon, 175-mm gun: M113, M113E1 on gun, Field Artillery, Self-Pro-
pelled: 175-mm, M107 Firing Projectile, HE, M437A2, M437A1.
A-7. DA Forms (Available through normal AF publications supply channels.)
2408-4 Weapon Record Data
4176 Target Plotting Grid Field Artillery Graduated in Mils and Meters (1:25,000)
4200 Met Data Correction Sheet
4201 High Burst (Mean-Point-of-Impact) Registration
4207 8-inch Nuclear Computation - Met Plus VE
4208 8-inch Nuclear Computation - K Transfer
4504 Record of Fire
-4505 155-mm Nuclear Computation - Met Computation Technique
4506 FDC Template for Hasty Fire Plan, Field Artillery, Graduated in Mils and
Meters (1:25,000)
A-8. Miscellaneous Publications
164 Joint Radio and Telephone Procedure for Conduct of Artillery and Naval
Gunfire

A-3
 Cl, FM 6-40

* A-9. Army Training and Evaluation Program (ARTEP)

6-105 Field Artillery 105-mm Howitzer, Towed, Infantry, Airmobile, Airborne
Divisions and Separate Brigades
6-165 General Support Cannon Units
6-365 Field Artillery, 155-mm, SP, Direct Support Units
* A-10. Training Circulars (TC)
6-40-6 The Field Artillery Aerial Observer Team Operations

APPEN DIX B

CALL FOR FIRE FORMATS

(QSTAG 225)

APPENDIX C

RADIO TELEPHONE PROCEDURES FOR THE CONDUCT

OF ARTILLERY FIRE
(QSTAG 246)

(Superseded by FM 6-40-5, MODERN BATTLEFIELD CANNON GUNNERY)

A-4
C1 FM 6-40

NOTE: Publications superseding material in this manual are indicated as follows:

* FM 6-50
** FM 6-40-5
*** FM 6-141-1
Applicable ARTEP
INDEX

Paragraphs Page Paragraph Page

ABCA Precision fire ** U se of bracket ---------------------------------- 10-11 10-6

Absolute calibration -...... 22-1, 22-1 When to adjust ---------------------------------- 10-1 10-1
22-2 Aiming circle:
22-11 22-4 Com mon mistakes --------------------------
Absolute VE, computation ................ 22-22 22-9 Description and schematic dia-
Accidents, firing battery * gram
Accuracies, target location by obser- Determining instrument direction
v er ---------------------------------------------------------- 8-2 8-1 Distances from metallic objects ..
Accuracy requirements, firing * Reciprocal laying- -
battery Measuring azimuth to a point
A djust, defi nition ------------------------------- * O rien tatio n ----------------------------------------
A dj u s t f ire ..............................................- 9 -8 9-3 Aiming point and deflection-..........
Adjusted azimuth: (See correct A iming point, distant ....... ......-..........
azimuth) Aiming posts:
Adjusted deflection: Accuracy requirement
Determination with base piece Deflections by caliber weapon ....
displacement .............................. 20-12 20-6 Description
Registration with more than one Distances for placement
lo t ...............................................
.... .... 19-4 1 19-21 Airbursts:
Adjusted elevation: Appearance 10-3 10-1
Mean point of impact and high Effect with fuze delay
burst registrations ------------------------ 19-34 19-14 (ricohet) -..............
C omputation --------------------------------- - ** Effect with fuze time .---
A djusted time ....................... ** Effect with fuze VT.......
A djusting point ------------------------------------ 10-2 10-1 Air density .......... 2-24 2-17
Adjusting point, auxiliary ................ 13-22 13-10 Air observer:
Adjustment: A djustm ent of fire ............................ 12-11 12-2
Assault Fire-.. 13-10 13-7 Adjustment procedures-.................. 12-10 12-2
C om b ine d .........................................- 2 4-2 7 24-10 FFE-.................................. . 12-12 12-3
F F E a fte r -------------------------------------------- 11-6 11-1 In itial d a ta ---------------------------------------- 12-6 12-1
Gun-target line method 13-25 13-10 Missions, FDC procedure .............. 18-17 18-9
H eight of burst .---------------------............ 10-12 10-6 Preflight preparations .................. 12-4 12-1
High-angle fire-.......... 13-21 13-10 Air resistance, factors affecting ...... 2-25 2-17
Adjustment of: Air temperature. 2-10, 2-9,
A rtillery fire ...................................... 10-1 10-1 2-25 2-17
F ire, air ob server ............................- 12-1, 12-1, Aircraft, laying-.
12-10 12-2 A ltitu de -------------------------------------------- 2-4 2-1
F ire b y so u nd .. ................................- 13-26 13-11 Ammunition:
Illuminating shell ------- ................... 13-4 13-1 Care and handling
Long-range artillery ---------------------- 12-3 12-1 Components of complete round 1-10 1-5
Range, bracketing ------------------...... 10-9, 10-5, Field storage-..
10-11 10-6 For assault fire 13-7 13-6
Range, spottings ------------------------------ 10-10 10-5 For attack of armor targets ---------
Smoke base ejection, FDC 24-6 24-2 For illumination 13-4 13-1
Adjustment phase: Fu ze ... ............ .................................. 1-14 1-5
A r e a ----------------------------------------------- - 10-2 10-1 Prim er . ------------------------------------- 1-11 1-5
Precision registration ------------------ ** Projectile ............. 1-13 1-5
Adjustment procedure: Propelling charge ---------------------------- 1-12, 1-5,
A ir ob server -------------------------------------- 12-1, 12-1, 5-12 5-6
12-10, 12-2 Rate of consumption . .. .................
12-11 Replacing in containers ................

Index-1
Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

Types -------------------------------------------------- 1-10 1-5 Units, standards of proficiency ..
Ammunition lot and charge, fire Artillery fire, accuracy and speed
ord er elem en t ...................................... 18-5 18-2 standards-.....................
Ammunition lot: Assault fire:
Fire command 4-7 4-4 Adjustment .............. 13-10 13-7
Registration with more than one 19-41 19-20 A m m unition -------------------------------------- 13-7 13-6
Ammunition lots: C o nduct o f .......................................... 13-6 13-6
Manufacturing specifications .... 2-8 2-4 FDC procedures-..... 24-22 24-8
Record.................... F FE .....................................................13-11 13-7
Segregation................ Initial data-......... 13-9 13-7
Ammunition, separate loading: Mission exam ple ------------------------------ 14-7 14-9
Positioning of propellant in the Preparatory operations .................. 13-6 13-6
chamber-........................................ 2-9 2-4 Procedure ..........................................
Angle: Sample mission. 13-11.1 13-7
Fall....................... 2-15 2-10 Assurance and assurance graphs .. 2-45 2-29
Fall, effect on VT fuze .................... 10-4 10-2 Assurance, SSHP............ 2-45 2-29
Impact -............................................ 2-15 2-10 Atmosphere, standard.......... 2-19 2-14
Measurement by target grid . 16-19 16-8 At my command:
Site -.................................................. 2-14 2-10 Control element of call for fire ...... 9-8 9-3
Site, complementary ...................... 2-14 2-10 M ethod of-fire ............................... 4-4 4-3
Site, computation ............................ 17-6 17-1 Attack of target. (See target, attack)
Site to crest, measuring.............. Augmentation of map data 7-8 7-2
Y aw -.................................................. 2-25 2-17 Auxiliary adjusting point 13-22 13-10
Angles, measurement: Azimuth:
Byhand................... 8-4 8-2 B ack ... ............ ..... ..... ..... ..... ..... .... 1-9 1-3
With panoramic telescope-............ Correction for error in boresight-
Angle T: in g -................................................. 1

D efinition .-................ 1-9 1-3

Determination in precision regis-
tration -.......................................... 19-6 19-2 Indexes (Range-deflection pro-
Determination without firing tractor)-.......................................... 16-16 16-7
*
ch art ......................-. 24-67
---......................... 24-41 Measuring correct (by executive)
Effect when large-....................... 10-8 10-4 Reporting correct (by executive)
Effect when small-....................... 10-8 10-4 Shift -................................................
Measuring and announcing-.----- 18-11 18-5 Azimuth to a point, measuring-.-----
Announcement of numbers-.............. 4-1 4-1 Back-azim uth .................................... 1-9 1-3
Antitank shell (HEP) .......................... 1-13 1-5 Ballistic coefficient 2-25 2-17
Apex angle: Ballistics:
Determination from two deflec- Definition -...................................... 2-6, 2-3,
tions -.............................................. 2-10 2-9
Target area base............................... 13-17 13-9 E xterior -................ 2-10 2-9
Appearance of bursts........................... 10-3 10-1 Interior-............................................ 2-6 2-3
Application of special corrections, Measurable nonstandard condi-
example -............................................ 23-9 23-7 tions -.............................. 2-19 2-14
Area fire, FFE -................................. 11-6 11-1 Bands, rotating (velocity disper-
Area fire, mission, example-............ 14-4 14-4 sion) -.................................................. 2-9 2-6
Arm signals -...................................... Barrel curvature ---------------------------------- 2-25 2-17
Arming time, VT fuzes....................... Base ejection projectile ...................... 1-13 1-6
Armor: Base of trajectory............ 2-13 2-7
Ammunition for attacking-............ Base piece ---------------------------------......... 1-9.1 1-3
30-2 30-1 Base piece displacement, correc-
Employed in a field artillery mis- tio ns -................................................. 20-12 20-6
sion -................................................ 30-1 to 30-1 Battalion:
30-6 FDC, personnel ................ 15-7 to 15-2
Artillery: 15-14
Characteristics and capabilities 1-9 1-2 Fire order............................. 18-5 18-1
Emplacement ....................... 1-5 1-1 S3, duties... ...... 15-8 15-2
Employment, principles......... 1-7 1-2 Battalion observed firing chart. (See
Projectiles, lethality .............. observed firing chart, battalion).
Targets, methods of attack ...... Battery:
Types ....... .......................... 1-8 1-2 Center ................................ 1-9.1 1-3

Index-2
 Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

E xecutive, duties ------------------------------ C a rd , sa fety ------ ------------------------------------ 6-5 6-2
Executive, records and data Cartridge cases, care and hand-
c he ck ed --------------------------------------------
* lin g ........--------------------------------------
E xecutive, report ------------------------------ Center, b attery -------------------------------------- 1-9.1 1-3
Observed firing chart. (See ob- Center of sector, marking rounds 8-8 8-6
served firing chart, battery.) Change:
Reciprocal laying ---------------------------- Control ------------------------- 10-29
----------------------- 10-9
Battlefield illumination -------------------- 13-3 13-1 Danger close....----------- - 10-19 10-8
Bias targets (SSHP) ---------------------------- 2-43 2-28 D istribution -------------------------------------- 10-22 10-8
Book: Fu ze 10-24 10-8
----------------------------------------------------
G u n ------------------------------------------------------ Method of fire .................................... 10-21 10-8
W eapon record ---------------------------------- OT d irectio n --------------------------------------10-18 10-8
Boresighting: Repeating previously fired data 10-31 10-9
Correction for after registration .. Sp la sh ------------ 10-30
-------------------------------- 10-9
D e fin ition ------------------------------------------ Vo lum e -------------------------------------------10-25 10-8
Brack et, hasty .......... 10-11.1
--------------------------- 10-6 T rajectory ---------------------------------------- 10-20 10-8
Bra cket, use ------------------------------------------ 10-11 10-6 Type of projectile............................... 10-23 10-8
Bracketing ...............-------------------------- 10-11 10-6 Characteristics of field artillery
Burst, height of, adjustment ............ 10-12 10-6 w eapons ------------------------------------------------
1-9 1-2
Burst, point ........---------------------------------- 2-15 2-1 0 C ha rg e -----------------------------------------------
17-2 17-1
Bursts: Fire com m and ---------------------------------- 4-1 4-1
Air, effect-....................................... Pro pellin g ------------------------------------------
1-12 1-5
Appearance-................................. 10-3 10- Selection in attacking a target ----
Distribution-.................................. 2-5 2-1 Selection in high-angle fire-........ 25-5 25-2
Impact, effect-............................... Charges:
Ricochet, effect................................. Correlation between ------------------------ 2-9 2-4
By piece at my command.......... 4-5 4-3 Range overlap between .................. 2-8 2-4
C, change in elevation without fir- Chart:
in g c ha rt --------------------------------------------
24-67 24-41 Dead space -....................................... 24-37 24-15
C P f u ze .-----------------------------------------------....
10-4 10-1 Observed firing ------------------------------ 26-1 to 26-1
CVT fuzes. (See variable time fuzes.) 6-34
Caliber, field artillery weapons ------ 1-8 1-2 S-3.......................... 16-26 16-13
Calibration: Chart data:
Absolute fall of shot ------------------------ 22-20 22-9 Illuminating projectile -.---------------- 24-9 24-3
Adjustment of ranges for differ- Mean-point of impact and HB reg-
ences in altitude ---------------------------- 22-14 22-6 istratio n ------------------------------------------
19-33 19-14
Comparative calibration by bat- Re c ord in g ----------------------------------------..
18-10 18-6
tery ......... .........-------------------------------
22-19 22-8 Chart deflection, determination ...... 16-24 16-12
Comparative, fall of shot - 22-11 to 22-4 Chart range, determination-.............. 16-24 16-12
22-18 Charts, firing. (See firing charts.)
Frequency .......................................... 22-4 22-1 Check firing:
Grouping of pieces after............ 22-9 22-3 S ig na ls - -------------------------------------------
4-14 4-5
Heavy artillery-.......................... 22-6 22-2 Chemical projectiles -------------------------- 24-3, 24-1
New weapons-............................... 22-4, 22-1
Ordnance support-....................... 22-4 22-1 B u rster ty p e -------------------------------------
1-13 1-5
Selection of standard piece-.......... 22-15 22-7 Care and handling -----------------------
Tube conditioning .......................... 22-9 22-3 Chief fire direction computer, duties
Type s --------------------------------------------------
22-1 9_1 15-9 15-2
Calibration corrections: .J'.JL C hronographs ...------------------................. 22-8 22-2
A p p lica tion ------------------------------------- 22-4 22-1 Circle, aiming. (See aiming circle.)
For individual pieces of a bat- Classification, field artillery wea-
tery, ex amp le ---------------------------------- 22-10 22-3 1-8
. -.-------------
p on s ------------------------------------- 1-2
Calls for fire: Coefficient, ballistic ---------------------------- 2-25 2-17
Corrections........................ Coefficient change, ballistic (BCC) 2-25 2-17
10-6 10-3 C ollim ator, infinity ............................
From higher headquarters Colored smoke burst, appearance .. 10-3 10-1
Sequence of elements ............. Combined adjustment................... 13-12 13-8
Subsequent....................... 24-28 24-11
10-17 10-7 0 FDC procedure, OP's plotted
Cannot observe....................... Combined observation:
Capabilities of field artillery wea- Mean point impact and HB regi-
p o ns ........................... 13-16, 13-8,
1-9 1-2 stra tion ------------------------------------------
Index-3
Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

13-17 13-9 Control chart:
Conduct of fire-............................. 13-12 13-8 H orizon ta l .......................................... 16-20 16-11
Equipm ent -................................... 13 -13 13-8 V e r ti c al ... ........................................... 16-20 16-11
Other m issions ........................... 13-16 13-8 C on trol lot ---------------------------------------------- 2-8 2-4
Commands, fire: Control operator:
Common mistakes in execution .. * H o ri z on ta l .......................................... 15-11 15-3
C or re c tio n ......................................... 4-19 4-6 V ertical ---------------------------------------------- 15-12 15-3
E x a mples .......................................... C onve rged s h e a f . ....... ....................... 2-5 2-1
In itial fi re ------------------------------------------ 4-1 4-1 Opening by individual shifts ........
Re p etition ------------------------------------------ 4-16 4-5 Conversion: 17-7
Seq uen ce ....................................... 4-2 4-2 Yards to meters (GFT).................... 17-2
17-7
Common errors and malpractices, Yards to meters (GST) .................... 17-2
FDC -....................... 18-29 18-16 Conversion of data for direction,
Common mistakes and malprac- executive's procedure ------------------------
tices, FB -............................................ * Coordinate scale:
Communication: Measuring and plotting ................ 16-8 16-2
Fire d irectio n ------------------------------------ 18-26 , 18-12 U se o f .................................................. 16-8 16-2
18-27 Coordinates:
Intrabattery and voice-................ 4-16 4-5 Determination of (coordinate
Radio, fire direction......................... 18 -26 18-12 scale ) ........... ....................................... 8-5 8-2
Wire, fire direction .......................... 18-27 18-12 Target location-.............................. 8-5 8-2
Comparative calibration............. 22-1 22-1, Coppering ------------------------------------------ 2-9 2-7
22-19 22-8 Correct deflection, precision regi-
Comparative calibration, fall of
stration, FFE -............................. **
shot. (See calibration, compara-
Correct azimuth:
tive, fall of shot.)
Correction for error in boresight.. *
Comparative VE:
Measuring by executive............ *
Correction for propellant temper-
ature variation-.......................... Reporting by executive................ *
22-17 22-7 Corrections:
Determination-............................. 22-16 22-7 Application:
Determination of, example-........ 15-9 15-9 15-2
15-2 Calibration.......................
alication ------------------
Compass M2 laying for direction by 22-24 22-11
. M e t an d V E .................................... 21-15 21-11
grid azim uth -...................................
R egistration ---------------------------------- 20-2 20-1
Complementary angle of site (comp
B a llis tic s -------------------------------------------- 2-10 2-9
s ite ) ............................................ - ....... 2-14, 2-10 Base piece displacement ................ 20-3 20-1
17-6 17-1 By observer................
Complementary range ...................... 17-6 17-1 Calibration, computation, and 10-6 10-3
C omp site -............................................ application --------------------------------------
Computer: 23-1 23-1
D uties -.............................................. 15 05C
25-13 a l l f or fi r e , e r r o r s i n -. .............. .......
25-6 Change in weight of projectile-.---
Duties during high-angle fire ...... Data for computation -.................. 2-9 2-4
Computer, chief fire direction .......... 15-9 15-3 Deflection:
18-13 Determination for high-angle
Concrete piercing fuze.... ......
Conditioning of tube .......................... 2-9 2-4 . . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. . ............. 25-7
fi re -..................... 25-2
Conditions, nonstandard, deter- M et -.................................................. 21-14 21-10
m ination -.......................................... 2-24 , 2-17 , R e g i s tr a ti o n .................................. 20-12 20-6
20-1 20-1 Outside transfer limits 21-14 21-10
Conduct of fire: Determination with respect to GT
Absolute calibration ---------------------- 22-22 22-9 line -------------------------------------------------- 24-69 24-41
Assault fire -................................... 13-6 13-6 D ev ia tion -....................................... 10-8 10-4
Combined observation .................. 13-12 13-8 Errors--------------------.....................----- 10-29
Comparative calibration .------ L.-.....- 22-11 22-4 10-9
Gas projectile....................... Fire com m ands ... .......................... 4-19 4-6
Illuminating projectile .........
13-4 13-1 Fuze total after registration 20-5 20-3
Observer not oriented ...........
13-23 13-10 Height of burst.................................. 10-26 10-8
Searchlight illumination .......
13-5 13-4 Met ..................................................... 21-8 21-3
Smoke projectile ................... Met, experience .. ------------------------ 21-19 21-12
Continuous fire .................. 4-5 Nonstandard conditions ..............
4-13 2-9 2-4
Control, call for fire ................. Range, determination.................... 20-3 20-1
Control change.....................
10-27 10-8 R a nge to ta l -................................. 21-7 21-3

Index-4
 Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

Reg istration ---------------------------------- 20-1 20-1 M e an ---------------- --------------------------------- 2-29 2-21
Scale, deflection (construc- Outside transfer limits ............... 21-12 21-9
tion of) ------------------------------------------- 20-15 20-7 Probable error ------------------------------ 2-36 2-23
Site by observer, assault fire .... 13-9 13-7 Referred, for each caliber wea-
*
Special. (See special correc- ponrt -------------- ---..............................
tions.) Special corrections...................... 23-8 23-7
U nit -.- - - - - 2-21 2-15 D eflection board ---------------------------------- 2

Velocity error, application ........ 21-11 21-7 Deflection correction scale:

Velocity error, propellant Differences in drift .......................... 20-13 20-6
temperature variation .............. 22-17 22-7 G FT -...................................................... 20-14 20-7
Counterbattery radar ---------------------- 24-31 24-11 GFT fan -............................................ 20-15 20-7
Counterbattery radar, FDC proce- M e t ---------------------------------------------
21-14 21-10
d u re ----- . -------------------------------------------------
24-32 24-12 Deflection index:
Creeping (adjusting close to friendly C on struction --------------------------- 16-22
--------- 16-11
forces)-................................................ 10-11 10-6 Supplementary, construction ----- 16-22 16-11
Crest: Deflection shift card, assault fire .... 24-22 24-8
Determination of MQE.............. * Deflections for placement of aiming
Measuring angle of site-.................. p o s t s ------ -----------------------------------------------
Measuring range-......................... * Delay fuze:
Curvature, barrel -------------------------------- 2-25 2-7 Effect of an air burst (ricohet) ...... 10-3, 10-1
Curvature of earth, effect on pro-
jectile -- -------------------------------------------------- 2-25 2-17 M ine action ------------------- ---------------- 10-3, 10-1
Curve, normal probability............ 2-33 2-22
D a ta , fi rin g -.------------------------------------------2-1 2-1 Ricochet action ---------------------------- 10-3, 10-1,
Data for replot: 10-15 10-7
H igh-angle fire -------------------------------- 25-11 25-4 Density, air-.................................. 2-25 2-17
L ow -angle fi re ---------------------------------- 20-17 20-7 D eparture, line ---------------------------------- 2-14 2-10
D ata sheets, section ---------------------------- 24-41 24-17 Description of target ......................
Dead space: Destruction mission-FDC pro-
Ch a r t -.. ...............-...........................-- 24-40 24-16 ced ur e ---------------------------------------------
D eterm in ation ---------------------------------- 24-39 24-16 24-24 24-9
L imits ----- -------- 24-38
------------------------------------- 24-15 Detonation, premature ......................
Profile ....................--------------------------- 24-37 24-15 Deviation corrections ........................ 10-8 10-4
Declination constant ------------------------- 1-9 1-3 Deviation spottings:
Deflection-.......................................... 1-9.1 1-3 Air observer-................................. 12-11 12-2
A djusted -------------------------------------------- 20-12 20-6 Ground observer-......................... 10-7 10-4
Base piece displacement correc-. Diagram:
tion ---------------------------------------------------- 20-3 20-1 Sa fety --------------------------------------------
Chart, determination ...................... 16-24 16-14 Safety stake .......................................
Computer's determination ....-........ Visib ility ------------------------------------------ 7-8 7-3
C o rre c t ------------------------------------------------ D irec t fire ------------------------------------------
Correct, reporting ............................ Direct illumination, searchlight
Correction, announced in initial mis sion ------------------------------------------- 13-5 13-4
fi re com m and .................................. 4-5 4-3 Direct laying-....................................
Correction for error in boresight Direction:
Correction, high-angle fire ----------- 25-7 25-2 D efi nition - ----------------------------------------- 2-2 2-1
Corrections, registration, total .... 21-11 21-9 Fire com m and .------------------............... 4-10 4-4
Difference, computation ---------------- 23-6.1 23-7 Of fire, measuring the azimuth
Difference, use and computation Verifying laying ------------------------------
Difference (fire command) ---------- Dispersion:
Dispersion zones .............................. 2-32 2-20 and probability ................................ 2-28 2-20
Effects of exterior ballistics ..... 2-23
FFE phase of precision registra- 2-26 2-19 Deflection probable error 2-36
D eflection zones ------------------------------ 2-32 2-21
tion .. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Fire command ........... Fork --------------------------------------------- 2-35
4-2 4-2 Pattern -............................................ 2-31 2-21
Firing data .................... 2-22
High-angle fire ................ 17-4 17-1 Probability curve ............................ 2-33
25-7 25-2 Range probable error ...................... 2-34 2-23
Limits, safety diagram ...........
R ange zones --------------------------------- 2-32 2-21
Limits, high-angle fire safety dia-
Rectangle-...................................... 2-32 2-21
gra m .. . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . 2-21
Scale ...............-.-................................ 2-32

Index-5
Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

Sc ale, u se ------------------------------------------- 2-32 2-21 Elevation gagelines, construction 20-7 20-3
V e lo c ity ---------------------------------------------- 2-9 2-4 Employment of fire power .............. 1-7 1-2
Vertical probable error.............. 2-37 2-23 End of mission ----------------------------------- 4-15 4-5
Displacement, base piece, correc- Entry ra ng e ...... --------------------------------- 21-7 21-3
ti o ns ------------------------ . -------- . .................. 20-3 20-1 Equipment, plotting -------------------------- 16-8 16-2
Distance, determination by: Erosio n .....-.-.-.------------------------------------- 2-9 2-4
A ir ob serv er -------------------------------------- 12-9 12-2 Error, probable. (See probable
C omputation ------------------------------------ 8-3 8-1 error.)
Estima ti o n ........................................ 8-3 8-1 Errors, correction . 9-10, 9-5,
Distant aiming point, use .................. 10-29 10-11
Distribution (element of fire order) 18-5 18-1 Execution of fire commands, com-
Distribution, change -------------------------- 10-21 10-8 mon m istakes ---- --------------------------------- *
Distribution: Executive's command post
Bursts ....................--------------------------- 2-5 2-1 Executive's high burst (site by fir- *

Fire on a targ et --------------------------------- 11-7 11-1 in g ------------------------------.-

.----------------------
P ieces -------------------------------------------------- 4-4, 4-3, Executive's report --------------------------------
22-23 23-10 Executive:
Do not load (method of fire) ..----------- 4-5 4-3 Conversion of data for direction .
Drag -................................................... 2-25 2-17 Correcting fire commands ------------ 4-19 4-6
D rag coefficien t ------------------------------------ 2-25 2-17 Determination of MQE with
Drift: MQ E ca rd ----- -----------------------------------
Deflection correction scale.- 20-14 20-7 D u tie s --------------------------------------------------
Effect on deflection -.... 2-26 2-20 Measuring the azimuth -----------------
High-angle fire..........------------------- 25-7 25-2 Measuring the orienting angle ---
Droop , muzzle ...... 2-25
------------------------------- 2-17 Reporting corrected azimuth ........
Earth curvature, effect on pro- Reporting corrected deflection ---
je ctile --------------- ------------------------------------2-25 2-17 Reports m ade ------- -----------------------------
Earth, rotation: Training and operation of firing
Effect on deflection -------------------------- 2-26 2-2 0 b a ttery ----------------------------------------------
Effect on range ................................ 2-26 2-20 Verifying laying of guns ---------------
Effects: Experience corrections ........................ 21-17, 21-12,
Air density................. 2-25 2-17 21-21 21-13
Ballistic coefficient ........................ 2-25 2-17 Exterior ballistics ------------------------------- 2-10 2-9
Curvature of earth .......................... 2-25 2-17 FDC (See fire direction center.)
D eflection ..... ....------------------------------ 2-26 2-20 F a ctor, O T ----------------------------------------------- 10-8 10-4
D r if t ---------------------------------------------------- 2-26 2-20 F actor, sin e --------------------------------------------- 8-6 8-3
D roop -.............................................. 2-25 2-17 Fall:
Lateral jump-................................. 2-26 2 -2 0 A ngle --------------------------------------------------- 2-15 2-10
Lateral wind-................................. 2-26 2-2 0 L ine ---------------------------------------------------- 2-15 2-10
Muzzle velocity ................................ 2-25 2-17 F a n , o b serv ed fire-............................. 7-8 7-2
Nonstandard air temperature ...... 2-24 2-17 Field artillery:
R a nge -------------------------------------------------- 2-25 2 -1 7 Fi r e p o wer .- .. . .. .. . .. .. . .........
-............... 1-7 1-2
R ange w ind ---------------------------------------- 2-25 2-1 7 G u nne ry te am -................................ 1-6 1-1
Rotation of earth .............................. 2-25 2-17 Observation-........................................ 7-1 7-1
Time of flight-............................... 2-27 2-20 W eapons, caliber-.......................... 1-8 1-2
Weight of projectile................... 2-25 2-17 Weapons, characteristics and
Elements of calls for fire .................... capabilities-................................. 1-9 1-2
Elevating the tube .............................. Field storage of ammunition-------------
Elevation: Final protective fires ---------------------------- 24-25 24-10
Accuracy requirement............... Fire:
A d justed -------------------------------------------- 19-34 19 -1 4 A re a ----------------------------------------------------11-5 11-1
Adjusted, computation-.................. A s sau lt -------------------------------------------------
24-21 24-8
FFE phase of precision registra-
At my command-........................... 4-4 4-3
tion-------------........................
At w ill --------------------------------------------------
4-13 4-5
Firing data .................... 17-5
Illuminating projectile .......... 17-1 C o ntin uous -..................................... 4-13 4-5
24-14 2 4 -5 D estru c tion -..................................... 24-23 24-9
Lin e of ........................ 2-14
Maximum (low angle) ............. 2-1 0 1-5
D irec t --------------------------------------------------- 1-1
Do not loa d ..---------------------------------....... 4-5 4-3
Minimum quadrant...............
FPF. -......................................................
24-25 24-10
Quadrant ...................... 2-14, 2-1 0 , . .. . . .. . . .. . ..........
H a ra ssing -.................
4-11 4-4 H igh angle-...................................... 13-18, 13-10,
Index-6
 Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

25-1 25-1 Procedure in destruction
In dire ct ------------------------------------------------ 1-1 1-1 m is sio n -------------------------------------- 24-23 24-9
In ten sity---------------------------------------------- Procedure in time on target
mission ............................................ 18-20 18-10
In terd ictio n ----------------------------------------
1-7 1-2 Procedure using time fuze ............... 18-15 18-7
Ma s s e d -------------------------------------------------
Procedure using VT fuze ................. 18-16 18-9
M aximum rates-................................
M ethod, change-................................ 10-20 10-8 Procedures for propaganda
4-5 4 -3 p ro jectile -............................................ 24-19 24-8
M etho d s-..........................................
N eutralization-.................................. Procedures for targets located by
P recisio n-......................................... sound, flash or radar ---------------------- 24-29 24-11
R esults desired ................................... R ecords -........................................... 18-22 18-11
S ig na l-............................................. 4-14 4-5 Spottings, FFE phase of pre-
Transfer of, high angle ................... 25-12 2 25-6 cision registration ..........................
24-42 )4-17 Fire direction computer ....................... 15-10 15-3
Fire capabilities overlay.-...................
Fire for effect:
A ssau lt fire---------------------------------------- 13-6 13-6
Fire commands:
FDC procedure-............................. 18-12 18-5
Common mistakes in execution....
C orrection-....................................... 4-19 4 -6 G e n e r a l.... ..-.....................................
Observer adjusted mission-............. 11-6 11-1
Determining and announcing
from chart data-........................... 18-8 18-5 Precision registration ......................
Su rv eilla nce ....................................... 11-8 11-1
E x am p les ..------------------------------------------
Pre limina ry ........................................ 18-7 18-3 Fire missions:
4-1 1 4-1 Communication procedure-............ 18-28 18-13
Purpose of.--.....................................
18-22 8-11 M ultiple --............................................ 18-13 18-7
Recording by computer.--..................
4-16 4-5 Observer adjustment, phases-.------ 28-11 28-4
Rep etition-............................................
Sam ple m ission. ..................... 18-28 18-13
Sequence.--------------------------------------------- 4-2 1 4-2
Sequence of processing thru FDC 18-5 18-1
Fire direction:
B attery procedures --------------------------- 18-23, 8-11, Fire order:
to 18-25 A nn o u ncin g ....................................... 18-6 18-3
118-12
C om m an d ........................................... 15-3 15-1 E lem ents----------------------------------------- 18-5 18-1
C omm unication -................................ 18-26 .8-12 H igh-angle fire ---------------------------------- 25-3 25-1
Principles-......................................... 15-2, 15-1 Reco rd in g ............................................ 18-6 18-3
15-5 Firing, report to battalion S2 ............. 18-21 18-11
Tactical and technical .................... 15-1 15-1 Firing battery:
Fire direction center ----------------------------- 1-6, 1-1 , A c cid e nts -----------------------------------------
15-4 15-1 Accuracy requirements ...................
C h a rts -............................................. 16-26 L6-13 C om mon term s.................................. 1-9.1 1-3
Chief fire direction computer ......... 15-9 15-3 Equipment checks ---------------------------- *

Common errors and mal- O p e ratio n -----------------------------------------

practices-........ 18-29 18-16 O r g an iza tion ......................................
Communication-.... 18-26 18-12 P roc ed u res ..----------------------------------------
E q u ip m e n t------------------------------------------ 16-27 16-14 Purp o se ---------.--------------------------------- 1-6 1-1
*
F ire o rd e r------------------------------------------------- 18-5 18-1 Recorder's duties-...........................
Firing, report of battalion S2 ......... 18-21 18-11 Recorders and data maintained...
O rg a nizatio n-------------------------------------- 18-2 18-1 Training-...........................................
Personnel, battalion ........................ 15-7 15-2 Firing charts:
Personnel, duties in high-angle Firing without-................ . 24-65 24-41
fi r e -.
...................................................... 25-13 25-6 Initial ................................................. 24-67 24-41
Plotting target locatins................... 18-4 18-1 Maps ................................................... 16-2 16-1
Principles of operation ................... 15-5 15-1 Observed -----------------------------------....... 26-1 26-1
Procedure during adjustment of Purpose-.......................................--- .... 16-5 16-1
smoke base ejection ........................ 24-3, 24-1 P re p a ra tion . ....................................... 16-22 16-11
24-5 Ra d a r ..................................................... 16-17, 16-8,
Procedure for assault fire......... 24-21 24-8 26-34 26-12
Procedure for illuminating pro- Su rvey e d -.........................------------......... 16-6 16-1
je ctile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9 24-3 Ty pes -------------------------------------------- 16-6 16-1
Procedure for high-angle fire..... 25-1 25-1 6400-mil capability--......................... 16-23 16-12
Procedure for missions by air Firing data:
ob serv er.................... ... 18-17 18-9 Determination without a firing
Fire direction center: chart-................................................ 24-65 24-41

Index-7
Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

24-67 24-41 B allistic scale ------------------------------------- 17-10 17-3
G eneral-................................................ 17-1 17-1 C are o f .................................................. 20-11 20-6
Illuminating projectile ................... 24-12, 24-4, Deflection correction scale ............. 20-14 20-7
24-13 24-4 S ettin g------------------------------------------------- 20-7 20-3
High-burst registration ................... 19-31 19-13 Supplementary deflection
Mean point of impact ...................... 19-31 19-13 ind ex es ----------------------------------------------- 16-22 16-11
Firing tables: Graphical firing table (GFT) set-
Extracting data from ....................... 2-22 2-16 ting. (See settings, GFT)
Purpose. .. 2-20 2-14 Graphical firing tables ........................ 17-11 17-3.
Unit corrections-........................... 2-21 2-15 Graphical site table ------------------------------ 17-7 17-2
Flare, laying-....................................... Graphs, assurance----------................ 2-45 2-29
Flash ranging-................ 24-31 24-11 Grid azimuth:
FDC procedure-............... 24-33 24-12 Correction for error in bore-
Flash reducers, care and handling -- * s ig h tin g .............................................
F la sh to b an g -.......... ....................... 8-3 8-1 Laying for direction (aiming
Fork: c ir cle ) -------------------------------------------------
D efinition-........................................ 2-35 2-22 Laying for direction (M2
FFE phase of precision registra- compass)-.......................................
ti o n ..--------------------------------------------------Measuring with protractor ------------- 16-7 16-2
Forward observer. (See observer.) G rid declin ation ------------------------------------ 1-9 1-3
Friendly troops, firing close to by G rid lin e -------------------------------------------------- 1-9 1-3
observer-.......................................... 10-11 10-6 G rid n orth ----------------------------------------------- 1-9 1-3
Fuze action, calls for fire .................... Grid,(heet firing chart ......................... 16-4 16-1
Experience-...................................... 21-2 0 2 1-1 2 G ri d , t ar g e t ............................................. 16-19 16-8
Meteorological, computation of.... 21-18 21-12 G un b ook -------------------------------------------------
T ota l . .................................................... 20-15 20-7 Gun target line:
Fuze, fire command-.............................. 4-9 4-4 Air observation .-----------...................... 12-7 12-2
Fuze interchangeability chart .......... 1-10 1-5 Method of adjustment ...................... 13-25 13-10
Fuze setting: Gunnery:
Computer's determination ............. 17-3 17-1 Problem and solution ....................... 1-5 1-1
Fire com m and-............................... 4-9 4 -4 T e am --------------------------------------------------- 1-6 1-1
Illuminating projectile ................... 24-12 24-4 HE bursts, effects -------------------------------- 10-3 10-1
Minimum, safety officer's H E p rojectile ---------------------------------------- 1-13 1-5
determination.............. * For use with VT fuze ........................
Fuzes: Hand measurement of angles ..------8-4 8-2
Care and handling-....................... Harassing fire------------..........................
Change in, subsequent spottings. 10-23 10-8 H asty bracket -------------------------------------- 10-11.1 10-6
Concrete piercing-......................... H eavy artillery .................................... 1-8 1-2
D elay-................................................ 10-4, 10-2, C alibration ---------------------------------------- 22-6 22-2
10-15 10-7 Computation of data for safety
Employment according to type lim its ------------------------------------------------
target-.............................................. 10-3, 10-1 W ear tables ---------------------------------------- 22-5 22-1
Height of burst:
High-angle fire.............. 25-6 25-2 Adjustment-............ 10-12 10-6
Im pact-.............................................. 1-14 1-5 C orrections ---------------------------------------- 10-26 10-8
Interchangeability........... 1-14 1-5 Corrections for illuminating
Q u ic k ---------------------------------------------------- 10-4 10-2 p rojectile ------------------------------------------ 24-15 24-5
Quick, effect of impact........ De lay fu ze .......................................... 10-15 10-7
Quick, replotting of targets Probable error .................................. 2-28 2-20
attacked-......................................... 20-18 20-7 Spottings -------------------------------------------- 10-13 10-6
Ti me ...................................................... 1-14 , 1-5 , VT fuze .--------------------------------............... 10-16 10-7
10-4 10-2 High-angle fire:
Types-................................................ 1-14 1-5 Adj ustmen t......................
13-18 13-10
VT. (See Variable time fuze.) ..... 1-14, 1-5, Charge ................ ..........
25-5 25-2
10-4 10-2 Data for replot .................
25-11 25-4
Gagelines, elevation and time .... 20-7 20-3 Deflection .....................
25-7 25-2
Gas projectiles: Determination of safety limits ....
Care and handling.................. ** Employment .................. 13-18 13-10
Conduct of fire....................... 13-1 13-1 FDC equipment, preparation 25-10 25-4
Graphical firing table (GFT): FDC personnel duties .......... 25-13 25-6

Index-8
 Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

FDC procedure ---------------------------------- 25-1 to 25-1 to A ngle -. ................................................. 2-15 2-10
Fuz es ................................ ............ 1-14 1-5
25-12 25-6
25-1 L in e ..... ........................................... 2-15 2-10
Fire com m ands -------------------------------- 25-4
25-1 P o in t -------------------------------------------------- 2-15 2-10
F ire o r d e r -------------------------------------------- 25-3
F uze ---------------------------------------------------- 25-6 25-2 Impact burst, effect of ----------------------
Massing and transfer of fires 25-12 25-6 Impact registration verification
Increments, powder, disposal of 5-12 5-7
Maximum quadrant elevation
Record of precision Index:
registration -------------------------------------- 25-9 25-3 Deflection, construction ................ 16-22 16-11
Registration ...................................... 25-9 25-3 Supplemenatary deflection,
25-11 25-4 con struction ------------------------------------ 16-22 16-11
Replot data ----------------------------------------
Si te ------------------------------------------------------ 25-8 25-2 Indirect:
Transfers -------------------------------------------- 25-12 25-6 F i re ---------------------------------------------- 1-5 1-1
Illu m in ation -----------------------------....... 13-5 13-4
High burst:
Executive's (site by firing) ..--------- L a y ing -------------------------------------------
L a y ing ------------------------------------------------ Initial:
High-burst registration: Data phase, observer adjusted
m is sion ----------------------------------------- 28-11 28-4
Adjusted elevation, 2-14 2-10
determ ination -................................ 19-34 19-14 Elements of trajectory ..................
19-27 19-2 F irin g ch art -----------------------------.......... 26-2 26-1
A dvantages .................................
C h a rt d a ta ------------------------------------------ 19-33 19-14 Instructions, special (fire
19-35 19-15 4-13 4-5
E x am ple -------------------------------------------- command) ............................................

F iring d a ta ---------------------------------------- 19-30 19-13 Instrument direction, deter-

F iring procedure ------------------------------ 19-31 19-13 m in atio n ------------------------------------------
Orientation of observers ................ 19-29 19-2 Intensity of fire ...................................
1-10 1-5
Selection of point at which Interchangeability of fuzes ............
re g is ter ---------------------------------------------- 19-28 19-2 Interdiction fire ----------------------------------
10-3 10-1 Interior ballistics -------------------------------- 2-6 2-3
High-explosive bursts effects ..-........ 2-4 2-1
High-explosive projectile .................. 1-13 1-5 Interval, vertical............................
Intrinsic elements of trajectory .... 2-13 2-9
High-explosive projectile, for use
w ith V T fuse ---------------------------------------- I nva li d i m p a c t re g i s tra ti o n ............
Horizontal control chart .................... 16-20 16-12 Invalid registrations, causes ..........
Horizontal control operator Invalid registrations, abbreviated
(H CO ) ---------------------------------------------------- 15-11 15-3 pro cedure ------------------------------------------
2-18 2 -1 4 J ump --------------------------------------------- 2-25 2-17
Horizontal velocity component ...... 2-20
17-11 17-3 Jum p , lateral ---------------------------------------- 2-26
Hundred-over-R (100/R) ....................
Hundred percent (100 percent) Lateral limits, executive's report
re c ta ngle ---------------------------------------------- 2-31 2-21 Lateral shift, computation using
sine factors-..---................................. 8-6 8-3
Improved conventional 2-26 2-20
m u n itions -------------------------------------------- 24-35 24-12 Lateral wind, deflection effect ........
Latitudinal effects on projectile 2-25 2-17
Identification of observer, call for
fi r e ---------------------------------------------------------- Laying:
Ig niter ch arg e -------------------------------------- 1-11 1-5 By aircraft, high burst or flare ....
Igniter pads, disposal ---------------------- D irec t -------------------------------------------
Illuminating projectile: In direc t ..............................................
24-10
C harge, selection ............................ 24 -3 R e c ip roc al ---------- .-.............................
24-11
C h a rt d a ta ---------------------------------------- 24-3 V erification --------------------------------------
C onduct of fi re -------------------------------- 13-4 13-1 Without aiming circle ....................
2-13 2-9
Corrections -............. 24-16 24-5 Level point of trajectory ....................
1-8 1-2
Employment, factors affecting .- 13-3 13-1 L ig ht a rtille ry .-....................................
F iring d a ta ..................................... 24-12 24-4 Limits, lateral (executive's report)
20-6) 20-3,
G e n e ral .............................................. 24-9 24-3 Limits, transfer-...............................
20-16 20-7
Safety diagram ------------------------------ 1-9 1-3
lIlluminating mission, example ...... 24-18 24-6 L ine, grid ................................................. 1-3
Line, orienting ...................................... 1-9.1
Illumination: 21-4 21-2
B attlefi e ld ------------------------------------------ 13-3 13-1 Line number, met message ................
Direct and indirect ------------------------ 13-5 13-4 Line: 2-10
12-2 Departure .................... 2-14
Mission, air observer -------------------- 12-10 2-10
Elevation ..................... 2-14
S ea rch ligh t -------------------------------------- 13-5 13-4 2-10
Fall -.......................... 2-15
Impact:

Index-9
 Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

Imp a c t ------------------------------------------------ 2-15 2-10 Message to observer 18-5 18-1
Site ------------------------------------------------------ 2-14 2-10 Met and VE, application ................... 21-15 21-11
Location of target (call for fire) ........ 8-1, 8-1 8-direction met technique............. 21-16 21-11
Lot, ammunition: Met corrections, computation 21-8 21-3
Fire com m and ---------------------------------- Met corrections, experience-.............. 21-17 21-12
Registration with more than Met data correction sheet.............. 21-8 21-3
one -.................................................. Met deflection correction.............. 21-13 21-9
Lots, ammunition: Met deflection correction scale ........ 21-13 21-9
Manufacturing specifications .... 2-9 2-4 Met message, NATO:
Re co rd ------------------------------------------------ 4-7 4-4 C ontents .-....................................... 21-3 21-1
Segregation ...................................... Line number-................................. 21-4 21-2
M2 compass, laying for direction by Octant designation code............ 21-3 21-1
grid azimuth...................... , Solution of, example................ 21-15 21-11
M10 plotting board: Types ................................................. 21-2 21-1
Firing without a firing chart .... 24-65 24-41 Meteorological datum plane
Use for determining position (MD P ) ................................................... 21-3 21-1
corrections ...................................... Meters to yards conversion, GST .... 17-7 17-2
23- 2-3 Method of engagement ......................
Magnetic azimuth .................... 1-9 1-3 Method of fire and control............
Magnetic declination................. 1-9 1-3 4-4 4-3
Change -..........................................
Magnetic north-............................... 1-9 1-3 10-20 10-8
M il, definition -.................................
Map and azimuth terms ................... 1- 2-1 2-1
1-3 Mil relation, observer ..........................
Map pins-............................................ 8-8 8-3 8-1
8-6 Military slide rule:
Marking rounds (observer's)-............ 1-7 1-2 Arrangement-..............................
Massed fires-..................................... 1 1-2 Mine action, fuze delay ...................... 13-17 13-9
High-angle fire-........................... - 2 Mine action burst, appearance ........
Matchbox problem-......................... 10-3 10-1
Maximum elevation, high-angle Minimum quadrant elevation:
fire ..................................................... * Computation -----------..............-------
M aximum ordinate ---------------------------- Determ ination -............................
2-13 2 High-angle fire ................................
Maximum quadrant elevation:
H igh-angle fire -------------------------------- , Low-angle fire -----------..............-----
Low-angle fire-............................ * To clear visible crest ........................
Mean deflection-............................... Vertical clearances ..........................
2-29 2-21 Minimum quadrant elevation card
Mean point-of-impact ........................ 2-41 2-27 Misfires, procedure-........................
Most probable postion ................... Mission, destruction (See
Mean point-of-impact registration:
Adjusted elevation & time-.......... 19-34 19-14 destruction missions.)
A d v a nta ges -------------------------------------- 19-27 19-2 Multiple fire missions ........................ 18-13 18-7
19-27 19-24 Muzzle velocity:
Chart data-.................... . 19-33 19-14 Determination-.............................
Example problem ............................ 19-35 19-15 2-9 2-4
Factors affecting
Firin g d a ta ........................................ 19-30 19-13 2-25 2-17
New weapon tolerances ...............
Firing procedure .............................. 19-32 19-13 Nonstandard, factors causing .... 2-9 2-4
Location after firing ........................ 19-2 19-13Standard --...................................... 2-9 2-4
Orientation of observers............ 19-29 19-2 Variation (MVV) - - 2-8 2-4
Selection of point at which to 22-9 22-3
NATO met message ...-.......---..............
register-.......................................... 1-28 1-2 Naval gunfire support ..-..................... 21-3 21-1
Mean Range-..................................... 2-29 2-21 29-1 to 29-1
Measuring: 29-7
Correct azimuth .............................. Neutralization fire ..............................
Angle of site to crest ........................ New weapons tolerances.............. 2-9 2-4
Azimuth to a point. .......... Nonstandard conditions:
Orienting angle .................... Determination-............................. 2-22 2-15
Range to crest ...................... Effect -.............................................. 2-24 2-16
Measuring and plotting: Nonstandard muzzle velocity, fac-
Coordinate scale.................... tors causing-................................... 2-9 2-4
Plotting scale ....................... 16-12 16-6 Nonuniform ramming ........................ 2-9 2-4
Protractor (angle) .................. 16-14 16-6 Normal probability curve.............. 2-33 2-21
Range deflection protractor.... 16-13 16-6 North:
Medium artillery ..................... 16-15 16-6 Grid -..................................................
1-8 1-9 1-3
1-2 Magnetic-....................................... 1-9 1-3

Index-i10
 Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph P;age Paragraph Page

T r ue ........................................... 1-9 1-3 know n --------------------------------------- 26-8 26-3
Nuclear delivery techniques: Determination of range and
8-inch how itzer ..................... ...........- 24-44 to 24-20 altitude, time plot, site
24-56 u nkno wn ------------------------------------------ 26-7 26-2
155-mm howitzer ................... ...........- 24-57 to 24-33 Determination of site by firing
24-64 (executive's H B) ---------------------------- 26-9 26-3
Numbers, announcement ....... ...........- 4-1 4-1 G FT setting .................... 26-11 26-4
Observed firing chart for more than
OT direction: one battalion:
Change in -...................................... 10-18 10-8 Construction of (Plotting) ............ 26-23 26-8
Determination-............................. 8-6 8-3 Construction of (tracing paper
O T factor -............................................ 10-8 10-4 m eth o d ) -------------------------------.--......... 26-24 26-8
Observation: G e n e ral ------------------------------------------- 26-22 26-8
For calibration.................... 22-11 22-4 Observer:
From high performance Adjustment of precision
**
aircraft-.......................................... 12-3 12-1 registration --------------------------------------
G eneral -.......................................... 7-1 7-1 Auxiliary map data ........................ 7-8 7-2
Purpose of .......................................... 7-2 7-1 Axial (HB registration) ................. 19-29 19-2
Sound, flash and radar-.................. 24-31 24-11 C orrections ---------------------------------------- 10-6 10-3
Visual and electronic ---------------------- 1-7 1-2 Determination of distance ............ 8-3 8-1
Observation, combined: D uties -.............................................. 7-3 7-1
**
Con duct of fire .. -------------------------- 13-12 13-8 Identification, call for fire ............
E q u ip m ent ---------------------------------------- 13-13 13-8 Location of known points .............. 7-6 7-2
Other missions 13-12 13-8 Marking rounds............. 8-8 8-6
Mean point of impact and Measurement of angles.................. 8-4 8-2
HB registration 13-14, 13-8, Moving, FDC procedure.---------------- 18-18 18-10
19-27 19-2 Orientation, mean-point-of-
Observation post, procedures impact or HB registration .......... 19-29 19-2
during service practice ................... 28-5 28-2 Orienting for direction .................. 7-5 7-2
Observed fire fan ---------------------------------- 7-8 7-2 Preparatory operations .................. 7-4 7-1
Observed firing charts: P u rp os e .............................................. 1-6, 1-1,
B attalion ---------------------------------........... 26-12 to 26-4 7-2 7-1
26-15 S p o ttings ------------------------------------------ 10-5 10-3
B a ttery ------------------------------------------------ 26-3 to 26-1 Sequence of processing a
26-11 m is sion ------------------------------------------ 9-1 9-1
D escription -.................................... 26-1 26-1 Target location when
For more than one battalion ........ 26-22, 26-8 disoriented ...................................... 13-23 13-10
26-24 Observer, air:
Initial firing chart -------------------------- 26-2 26-1 Adjustment procedures .................. 12-10 12-2
Transfer to surveyed chart ........... 26-35 26-12 Fire for eff ect ------------------------------------ 12-12 12-3
With incomplete survey ................ 26-25, 26-9 In itial d ata ---------------------------------------- 12-6 12-1
26-26 Preflight preparations .................. 12-4 12-1
Observed firing chart, battalion: Range estim ation ---------------------------- 12-9 12-2
Determination of direction Sp o tting line ...................................... 12-7 12-2
for polar plotting ---------------------------- 26-13 26-4 Observer-target direction:
Determination of range and Ch an g e ------------------------------------------- 10-18 10-8
altitude: D eterm ination .............................. 8-6 8-3
P ercu ssio n p lot ............................... 26-14 26-4 Observer-target factor ........................ 10-8 10-4
Determination of range and Officer in charge of firing ..................
altitude, time plot --- ....................... 26-15 26 -6 Oily tube -------------------------------------------- 2-9 2-4
G e n e r al ...................... 26-12
........................ 26-6 One hundred over R(100/R) .............. 17-11 17-3
Observed firing chart, battery: One hundred percent (100 percent)
D eflection indexes -........................ 26-10 26-4 re ctang le ------------------------------------------- 2-31 2-20
Determination of direction for O pe n s h e a f ------------------------------------------ 2-5 2-1
polar plotting -............................. 26-5 26-2 Operator:
Determination of range and Horizontal control (HCO) .............. 15-11 15-3
altitude: Vertical control (VCO) .................. 15-12 15-3
P ercussion plot ---------------------------- 26-6 26-2 Radiotelephone, FDC .................... 15-13 15-3
Determination of range and Ordinate, maximum -------------------------- 2-13 2-9
altitude, time plot, site Orientation, observer ------------------------ 7-5 7-2

Index-i 1
 Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

Orienting angle: Indexes on chart (range deflec-
C om p utation ------------------------------------tion protractor) ------------------------------ 16-16 16-7
Correction for error in bore- Sequence of target locating ele-
s ig ht -------------------------------------------------- me nts ------------------------------------------------
D e scriptio n ---------------------------------------- 1-9.1 1-3 Polar plotting:
M e a su rin g ------------------------------------------ Determination of direction ............ 26-5 26-2
Orienting the aiming circle .......... Position area sketch ----------------------------
S hi ft ---------------------------------------------------- Position corrections ---------------------------- 23-4 23-3
O rien tin g line ---------------------------------------- 1-9.1 1-3 Computation and application ......
1-9.1 23-6 23-3
O rienting station -------------------------------- 1-3 Use of M 10 plotting board ------------ 23-4 23-3
O rigin of trajectory ------------------------------ 2-13 2-9 Powder:
Panoramic telescope, description Bag s, disposal ----------------------------------
an d u s e -------------------------------------------------- Bags, position in chamber 2-9 2-4
,
P a ra llel she af ---------------------------------------- 2-5 2-1 Care and handling ------------------------- 2-9
Pattern, dispersion ------------------------------ 2-31 2-21 Moisture content ------------------------------ 2-9 2-4
P attern , elliptical -.-.------------------------- 2-31 2-21 Residues ..................-.-.. ................... 2-4
Percussion plot, observed firing P recision fire --------------- -------------------------
c h a r t .................. -.--------------------------------26-6 26-2 Precision registration:
Percussion primers ------------------------------ 1-11 1-5 A BCA ----------------------------.-.------------------
P h o to m a p .....-. 16-3
-------------------------------------- 16-1 Adjustment phase --------------------------
Piec es to fire ------------------------------------------ 4-4 4-3 Angle T, determination ------------------
Pieces to follow ------------------------------------ 4-4 4-3 Correct deflection, conditions
Plotting: Correct deflection, FFE phase ......
By polar coordinates ---------------------- 16-18 16-8 E x amples ------------------------------------------ 2-9
Common errors and mal- Fire for effect phase ------------------------
p ra ctice s ------------------------------------------ 18-29 1 8-16 Fu ze q u ick -----------------------.------------------
E q uip m en t ---------------------------------------- 16-8 16-2 Fu ze tim e -------------------------------------------- 25-9
Observed firing chart for more H igh-an gle fire ------------------------------ 25-3
than one battalion ----------------------- 26-22 26-8 Initial fire commands, example
Target locations at FDC --------------- 18-4 18-1 Record of:
Tick m a rk s ---------------------------------------- 16-9 16-2 Im pact -.---------------
Using coordinate scale .................. 16-12 16-6 High-angle fire .... 25-3
Using plotting scale ........................ 16-11 16-6 T ime -----.------------------
----------------------
U sing protractor ------------ --------- 16-13
--------- 16-6 Verification-............ ----------------------
Using range deflection Pressure-travel curves ---------------------- 2-7 2-3
protra ctor ---------------------------------------- 16-15 16-6 Primer, ammunition 1-11
---------------------- 1-5
U sing target grid - ---------------------------- 16-19 16-8 Primers:
Plotting board M10:
Care and handling
Firing without firing chart ------------ 24-72 2 444 Percussion .............. ......------------ - - 1-1 1 1-5
Use for determining position
c orre ctio ns ------------------------------------- 23-5 23-3 Probability:
Plotting equipment ---------------------------- 16-8 16-2 and dispersion .......... ..................... 2-28- 2-20
Plo tting p ins ------------------------------------------ 16-8 16-2 2-46
Computation ..------ 2-28 2-20
Plotting scale: C urv e --------------- ----------- -----.... 2-33 2-22
Measuring and plotting distances 16-14 16-6 Single Shot ------ .........-.---------- 2-42 2-27
Measuring coordinates of a Tables ................ .....................- 2-40 2-25
po i nt -------------------------------------------------- 16-11 16-6 Tables, use ...... ...................- 2-39 2-25
Point: Probable errors:
A dju stin g ------------------------------------------ 10-2 10-1 Application ...... .....................- 2-39 2-25
A im i ng ................................................ Definition ........ .....................- 2-30 2-21
Measuring azimuth ............
O f b urst ....................... Deflection ........ --------------------- 2-36 2-23
2-15 2-10 Developed ........ --------------------- 2-46 2-29
O f im pact ......................
2-15 2-10 Height of burst --------------------- 2-38 2-23
R eference ......................
1-9.1 1-3 Range ----------------- -------------------- 2-34 2-23
Polar coordinates:
P lo tting ....................... V ertical ------------- --------------------- 2-37 2-23
16-18 16-8 VT fuzes ------------- --------------------- 2-38 2-23
Target location ................
8-7 8-6 Profile:
Polar plot:
E xam ple ...................... Dead space ....... --------------------- 24-37 24-15
8-7 8-6 U se --------------------- --------------------. 7-8 7-2

Index-12
 Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

Projectile: Special corrections applied .......... 4-5 4-3
Care and handling ....................... Quick fuzes. (See fuzes: quick.)
Change in type (call-for-fire) ...... 10-23 10-8
E ffecto fH E ................................... 10-3 10-1 Radar, counterbattery ------------------------ 24-31 24-11
Element of call for fire ................. Radar, countermortar ------------------------ 24-31 24-11
F ire com m and ............................... 4-6 4-4 Radar chart:
Horizontal velocity component 2-18 2-14 Con stru ction ------------------------------------ 26-30 26-10
In itial v elocity ............................... 2-16 2-10 E va lua tion ---------------------------------------- 26-33 26-12
Lay (due to rotation of earth) 2-25 2-17 O bserved firing -------------------------------- 26-31 26-11
Rotational effects during flight 2-25 2-17 Registering piece located .............. 26-34 26-12
Types ............................................... 1-13 1-5 R adar registrations ---------------------------- 19-37 19-18
Projectile, weight: Radar improved chart:
Computing corrections Ad v an ta g es -------------------------------------- 26-29 26-10
E xterior ballistics ......................... 2-10 2-9 C on stru ction ------------------------------------ 26-30 26-10
Interior ballistics -------------------------- 2-6 2-3 Radar improved time plot observed
Variation in muzzle velocity 2-25 2-17 firing ch a rt ----------------------------------------- 26-28 26-9
W eig h t zon e ------------------------------------ 2-9 2-4 Radar ranging, FDC procedure 24-28 24-11
Propaganda projectile ---------------------- 24-19 24-8 Radio communication, fire direction 18-26 18-12
FDC procedure 24-20 24-8 Radiotelephone operators, FDC 15-13 15-4
Propellant: Ramming-uniform and nonuniform 2-9, 2-4
Care and handling 2-9
M oisture content ---------------------------- 2-4 Range:
2-9 Adjustment, ground observer
Performance, charge-to-charge 2-4 10-9 10-5
2-9 Adjustment, air observer ..............
R esidues -. ......................................... 2-4 12-11 12-2
2-9 Bracket, successive ------------------------
Tem p erature ------------------------------------ 2-4 10-11 10-6
Temperature, correction of VE 22-17 22-7 Chart, determination ---------------------- 16-24 16-14
Propellants, nature ......................... 2-7 2-3 C om plimentary -------------------------------- 2-14 2-10
Propellants, separate loading: Correction, determination ............ 20-1 20-1
Positioning in chamber-................ 1-12, 1-5, Correction, targets outside trans-
2-9 2-4 fe r lim its . .......... ... .... ... .... .---... ... 21-12 21-9
Propelling charge: Corrections (call for fire) .............. 9-10, 9-5,
Care and handling ........ 10-6 10-3
Increm ents ...................... ................- 1-12 1-5 D ispersion zones ------------------------------ 2-31 2-21
Positioning in chamber ................- 1-12 , 1-5, Horizontal distance.................... 2-3 2-1
2-9 2-4 Ramming, nonuniform ...................... 2-9 2-4
V ariation in M V ------------------------------ 2-9 2-4 Range:
Protractor: D efin ition ----------------------------------------- 2-3 2-1
D e sc ription ---------------------------------------- 16-8 16-2 Effects -. ....................... 2-25 2-17
Measuring and plotting of an Estimation by air observer ............ 12-9 12-2
a ngle --------------------------------------------------16-13 16-6 M ean 2-29
.................................................... 2-21
Radar firing charts -------------------------- 26-27 26-9 P rob a b le erro r .................................. 2-34 2-23
Protractor, range deflection: S p ottin g s ------------------------------------------ 10-10 10-5
Common errors and malprac- Special corrections .......................... 23-7 23-7
tic e s ----------------------------------------------------
18-29 18-17 Standard (relation of air resist-
Measuring and plotting ................ 16-15 16-6 ance and projectile efficiency) .... 2-23 2-16
Numbering for measurement of To crest, measuring ------------------------
d e flection 16-21
..---------------------------------------- 16-11 W in d --------------------------------------------- 2-25 2-17
Proximity fuzes. (See Variable time
fuzes.) Range and deflection corrections for
targets outside transfer limits ........ 21-12, 21-9,
Quadrant change card, assault fire 24-22 24-8 21-14 21-10
Quadrant elevation: Range deflection protractor: (See
Determination by computer .......... Protractor, range deflection)
Fire com m and ---------------------------------- 4-11 4-4
F iring d a ta ---------------------------------------- 17-9 17-3 Range spread:
Maximum, high-angle fire C all for fire ....................
9-7 9-2
Maximum, low-angle fire Element of fire order ............ 18-5 18-1
Method of computation .................. 2-14 2-10
Minimum, high-angle fire ............ Ranging:
Minimum, low-angle fire .............. F la s h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-31 24-11

Index-13
 Cl, FfM 6-40

Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

R ad ar .---------------------------------------------- ... 24-31 24-11 Deflection range 2-25, 2-17,
So u nd -------------------------------------------------- 24-31 24-11 2-26 2-20
R anging rounds ---------------------------------- 12-9 12-2 Round, ammunition. (See ammuni-
Rates of fire, maximum ---------------------- tion.)
R eciprocal laying --------------------------------S 3 d u tie s ------------------------------------------------ 15-8 15-2
R ecord as targ et ------------------------------------ 11-8 11-1 Sa fety ca rd -------------------------------------------- *

R ecorder, d uties ------------------------------------ Safety diagram:

Recording call for fire ------------------------ 18-3 18-1 Construction from visible refer-
Recording laying for direction ........ en ce p oin t ----------------------------------------
Record of fire, illustrations Deflection limits after registra-
A djusting battery ---------------------------- 18-1 18-4 tio n . ...................................................
H ig h a ngle ---------------------------------------- 25-1 25-5 Receipt of safety card ----------------------
1CM .................... 24-5 24-14 Safety officer:
Illum ination ...................................... 24-1 24-7 Duties before firing-..........................
Nonadjusting battery ................... 18-2 18-6 Duties during firing ------------------------
Nuclear, K-transfer technique .... 24-16 24-40 Sample problem ..............................
Nuclear, observer adjustment G e nera l d u ties ....... . .......................
technique-...................................... 24-12, 24-32, Safety precautions, ammunition
24-15 24-38 Safety stake diagram ..........................
P lan n ed targets ................................ 24-7 24-18 Safety sta k es ----------------------------------------
VT mission 18-4 Sample m issions ---------------------------------- 18-28 18-13
18-6
Rectangle: Scale:
D ispe rsio n ------------------------------------------ 2-31 2-21 Ballistic, G FT ---------------------------------- 17-10 17-3
Hundred percent (100 %) ................ 2-31 2-21 Co o rd in a te ---------------------------------------- 16-8 16-2
Re fer -------------------------------------------------------- 1-9.1 1-3 Coordinate, use by observer .......... 8-5 8-2
Reference p oin t ------------------------------------ 1-9.1 1-3 Deflection correction ---------------------- 20-13 20-6
Referred deflection, by caliber wea- Deflection correction, GFT ............ 20-14 20-7
p o n -------------------------------------------------------- *
Deflection ocrrection, met 21-13 21-9
R eg istratio n ------------------------------------------ 18-4 18-7 P lo tting ---------------------------------------------- 16-8 16-2
Application of corrections ............ 20-2 20-1 Plotting, plotting critical
Mean point-of-impact -------------------- 24-34 24-12 po ints .............................................
... 16-10.1 16-4
C orre ctio ns ---------------------------------------- 20-1 20-1 Sc re e ni ng ......... ..................................... 13-2, 13-1,
H ig h-b u rst ---------------------------------------- 19-27 19-2 24-3 24-1
**
Point, characteristics .................... Searchlight illumination:
Point, marking rounds to orient Conduct of fire ---------------------------------- 13-3 13-1
o b s erv er -------------------------------------------- 8-8 8-6 Sample mission -------------------------------- 13-5 13-4
Precision. (See precision registra- Section data sheets .............................. 24-41 24-17
tion.) Self-propelled artillery ...................... 1-8 1-2
Purp o se ---------------------------------------------- 19-2 19-1 Service of the piece drill ......................
Time. (See time registration.) Service practice:
Type s -------------------------------------------------- ** Accuracy and speed standards for
V a lidity ---------------------------------------------- artillery fire ------------------------------------
With more than one lot .................. 19-40 19-20 Key personnel ---------------------------------- **
R ep lot d a ta -------------------------------------------- 20-17 20-7 O P procedures ---------------------------------- **
Replot data, high-angle fire .............. 25-11 25-4 Prep aration -------------------------------------- **
R eplotting targets -------------------------------- 20-17 20-7 Standards of proficiency ..............
Report, executive's ------------------------------ 4
T a b le of tim in g .-------------------............
R e p or ts ----------------------------------------------------4-18l 4-6 T rain ing, prior ---------------------------------- **
*
Reporting correct azimuth ................ Settings:
Reporting correct deflection ............ During firing, checking ..................
Request, fire. (See calls for fire.) Fu z e -------------------------------------------------- 4-9 4-4
Ricohet burst: Settings, GFT:
Appearance .................... 10-3 10-1 Corrections for base piece dis-
E ffe c t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factors which determine rico- plac em e nt ---------------------------------------- 20-3 20-1
G e ne ral ---------------------------------------------- 20-7 20-3
ch et .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 10-4 10-2 More than one lot ---------------------------- 20-9 20-5
Height of burst adjustment ..... 10-14 10-7 Nonregistering battery, exam-
Rotating bands-cause of velocity
dispersion ...................... pl e --------------------------------------------------- 23-2 23-1
2-9 2-4 Range and fuze corrections ..........
Rotating of earth: 20-4, 20-1,
20-5 20-3

Mnex-1 4
 Cl, FM 6-40

Paragraph cage
Pc Paragraph Page
Selection 20-8 20-5 Smoke base ejection, FDC pro-
Surveyed firing chart 16-6 16-1 cedure in adjustment ................. 13-2 13-1
Sheaf: Smoke burst, appearance 10-3 10-1
C o nv erge d ------------------------------------------ 2-5.1 2-1 Smoke screen ................................. 13-2, 13-1,
Converged, opening by individual 24-6 24-2
g u n s hifts ---------------------------------------- 2
Smoke projectiles 24-4 24-1
O p en ---------------------------------------------------- 2-5.1 2-1 Sou nd ran ging ............................... 24-31 24-11
P ar a lle l ---------------------------------------------- 2-5.1 2-1 Special corrections:
Spe cial ------------------------------------------------ 2-5.1 2-1 Announcement by computer 4-5 4-3
Shell: (See Projectile.) A p p lic a tion ................................. 23-9 2,3-7
Armor piercing-...... 1-13 1-5 Applied to fuze setting ............. 4-5 4-3
B ase ejectio n ------------------------------------ 1-13 1-5 Applied to Q E ............................. 4-5 4-3
Burster-type chemical -------------------- 1-13 1-5 D eterm in ation ........................... 23-8 23-7
Chemical-........ 13-1, 13-1 , Instr u ctio ns ............................... 4-5, 4-3,
24-3, 24-1 23-7 23-7
Obtaining pattern of bursts 2-5 2-1
H ig h ex p lo siv e .................................. 1-13 1-5 Special instructions fire command 4-5 4-3
High explosive, for use with VT Special she af ---------------------------------------- 2-5 2-1
*
fu ze ------------------------------------....... Spottings:
I C M ...................................................... 24-35 24-12 By ob serv er. .............. ........... ...-..... 10-5 10-3
Illum in a ting ...................................... 24-8 24-2 Determination by FDC 19-8
------------------ 19-2
Propaganda-................................. 24-19 28-8 D ev iation ----------------------------------------- 10-7 10-4
Sm oke -.............................................. 24-4 24-1 H eight of burst ---------------------------------- 10-13 10-6
Toxic chemical-............................. 13-1, 13-1 , Ra n g e - ................................................ 10-10 10-5
24-8 24-2 Spotting line determination by air
White phosphorous (WP) .............. 24-4 24-1 o b serv er. . -------------
.-. . .................... 12-7 12-2
*
Shift from a known point: Sta k e s , safe ty .....--.------------------..............
L oc atio n ......... . -................................. 8-6 8-3 Standardization of Terminology,
Plotting with target grid-.............. 16-19 16-8 call for fire .. ---------------------------------
**
Sequence in call for fire-................ S ta nda rd ra ng e ..................................... 2-23 2-16
Shift from a known point and a spot- Station, orienting -------------------------------- 1-9.1 1-3
ting line, air observation-.................. 12-8 12-2 Storage of ammunition in the field
Shift from an azimuth to an orient- Summit of trajectory -------------------------- 2-13 2-9
*
ing angle .. ----------------------------------- Superquick fuze. (See fuzes: quick.)
Shift from one azimuth to another Supplementary deflection indexes,
Shift from one orienting angle to co n str u ct ion ......... ............................... 16-22 16-11
ano ther ------------------------------------------------ Su rp rise fire ----------------------------------------- 1-7 1-2
Shifts by observer 8-6 8-3 Surveillance of fire for effect ------------ 11-8 11-1
S ho t ----------------------------------------------------------
4-18 4-6 Surveyed firing charts:
Signals, arm and hand ---------------------- 4-14 4-5 GFT settings and deflection index 26-36 26-12
Sin e fa cto rs -------------------------------------------- 8-6 8-3 Target replot, example 20-18 20-7
Single shot hit probability (SSHP): T ran s fer ------------------------------------------ 26-35 26-12
C om p u tatio n 2-42
------------------------------------ 2-27 Transfer, to, percussion fuze 26-37 26-12
For bias targets ------------------------........ 2-43 2-28 Transfer, to, time fuze .................... 26-38 26-13
Site: Typ es -------------------------------------------- 16-6 16-1
Angle of .---------------------------------------...... 2-14 2-10 Switchboard operator, FDC, duties 15-14 15-4
By firing (executive's HB) ............
Complementary angle of (comp Table, graphical firing ---------------------- 16-8 16-2,
sit e ) ----------------------------------------------------
2-14 2-10 17-10 17-3
Determination and announce- Table, graphical site .......................... 17-7 17-2
mentbyVCO 18-9 18-4 Table:
Firing data .....................
17-6 17-1 Effect on concrete (weapons)
High-angle fire ................
25-8 25-2 Fuze interchangeability . 1-14 1-5
Lin e of .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 2-14 2-10 Maximum rate of fire......................
Observer corrections during as- 2-5 2-1
O pen shea fs --------------------------------------
sau lt fire ...................... 13-10 13-7 Service practice timing ..................
To crest, measuring angle °of
Standards of proficiency (speed)
Sketch, terrain ...................
7-8 7-2 of artillery fi res ------------------------------
Skyscreen equipment ............ 2-1.1 2-3
22-8 22-2 Standard sheafs ------------------------------
Slide rule, military ...............
13-17 13-9 The call for fi re ----------------------------------

Index-15
Cl, FM 6-40

I Paragraph Page Paragraph Page

**
Tables, probability ------------------------------ 2-40 2-25 T im e, ad ju sted ...... -------------------------------
*
Tactical fire direction ------------------------ 15-1 15-1 Time, arming (VT fuzes) ...........---------
Target: Time, determination of fuze setting
Altitude, determination ................ 16-25 16-13 by com puter ...........-------------------------- 18-15 18-8
A re a b ase ..--------------------------------------- 13-17 13-9
Circular, conversion to equivalent Time correction, experience-........... 21-20 21-12
squa r e ------------------------------------------------ 2-44 2-29
**
D escrip tio n --------------------- ------------------ Time fuzes:
Designation, sound, flash and Adjusting height of burst -.---------- 10-12, 10-6,
,r a d a r ....-----------------------------------------
..... 24-30 24-11 10-14 10-7
Grid, common errors and mal- Adjusting with low height of
practic es ------------------------------------------ 18-29 18-16 burst -............ 10-13 10-6
Grid, misorientation, procedure to Calibration correction 23-3 23-2
co rre ct 16-19
..-------------------------------------------- 16-8 Effect of air burst ----------------------------
G rid , u se ------- --------------------------------------- 16-19 16-8 FDC procedure --------------- . -.--------------- 18-15 18-7
**
N a tur e .......... -..................................... F u nctio ning ------------------------------------- 1-14, 1-5,
Target analysis and attack: 10-4 10-2
**
D escrip tion ----.----------------------------------- In precision fire
Maximum rate of fire ---------------------- Replotting of targets attacked ...... 20-20 20-11
Registration and survey control .. Special corrections --------------- 23-8,
----------- 23-7
R esults desired ---------------------------------- 23-9
Ta rg et h its .-------------------------------........ 19-6 19-2 Targets employed against ----------- 10-4 10-2
Target location: Time of flight ................. --- 2-27 2-20
Acc u ra cies ---------------------------------------- 8-2 8-1 Time of opening fire - --------------------------- 13-36 13-12
By air observer--- - 12-8 12-2 Time on target missions, FDC pro-
Data, sequence of announcement ** ce d ur e ...............................- .. ---------------- 18-20 18-10
G rid coordinates ------------------------------ 8-5 8-2
M arking rounds ------------------------------ 8-8 8-6 Time plot observed firing chart:
M ethods -------------------------- ---------------- 8-2, 8-1 Determination of range and alt-
**
tude, site know n ------------- 26-8
----------------- 26-3
Observer disoriented 13-23 13-10 Determination of range and
Plo tting ---------------. -.------ -------------------- 16-10.1 16-4 altitude, site unknown .................. 26-7 26-2
to 16-15 Time registration:
Polar coordinates ---------------------------- 8-7 8-6 Abbreviated procedure-................ 4-
**
Shift from known point --- 8-6 8-3 Exa m p le ........................ -------------------
**
Targets: F u ze setting ------------------- ---------------
Armor, ammunition for attack- Procedures for determining ad-
**
i ng ...................................................... 30-2 30-1 justed time ---------------------- --------------
**
Bias (S SHP ) -- ----------------------------------- 2-43 2-28 Validity conditions ------------------------
Located by sound, flash, or radar, Verification -.................................... **
FDC procedures-............................ 24-31 24-11 T ime settin g ------------------------ -------------- 4-9 4-4
Rep lottin g ------------------------------------------ 20-17 20-9 Tolerances of new weapons --- 2-9 2-4
Total fuze correction -.---------------------- 20-5 20-3
Targets, attack: Tow ed artillery ------------------------------------ 1-8 1-2
Ammunition available .................. Toxic chemical projectile .................. 13-1, 13-1,
Area to be attacked ..-------------------- 24-8 24-2
*
Method of engagement ----------------- Training of firing battery ..................
Selection of units to fire -------------- Trajectory:
Techniques ......................................... Angle of fall -------------------------------------- 2 -15 , 2-10,
Technical fire direction ...................... 15-1 15-1 2-18 2-14
*
Telescope, panoramic ........................ Base ------------ ........................................ 2-1 3 2-9
Temperature, air .................
2-25 2-17 Change ----- .....................- 10-19 10-8
Definition .. ------------------------------------- 2-1 1 2-9
Temperature powder: Elements ..........................................- 2 -1 2 2-9
E ffects -........................
2-9 2-4 Form ---------- . --------------------------------------- 2-1 6 2-10
Executives report... *
In atmosphe re ---------------------------------- 2 -17 2-14
For computation of corrections .. In vacuum --........................................- 2-1 6 2-10
Terminal elements of trajectory ....
2-15 2-10 Initial eleme nts -------------------------------- 2-14 2-10
Terrain sketch ..... ..................
7-8 7-2 Intrinsic elerments ............................- 2-13 2-9
Tickmarks .......................
16-9 16-2 O rigin .......... ........................................ 2-1 3 2-9

'Index-16
 Paragraph Page Paragraph Page
Site and comp site ---------------------------- 2-14 2-10 General 21-5 21-2
S u m m it ----------------------------------------------
2-13, 2-9, Propellant temperature variation
2-18 2-14 correction ...................................... 22-17 22-7
Terminal elements -------------------------- 2-15 2-10 Ve lo ci t y t re nd s .................................. 2-9 2-4
T ran sfer lim its --------------------------------------
20-10, 20-6, Verification:
20-16, 20-7 Impact registration-.._
21-12 21-9 Time registration ..........................
T rends velocity ------------------------------------
2-9 2-4 Vertical:
True azim u th ----------------------------------------
1-9 1-3 Clearance, MQE -.........
True north -............... 1-9 1-3 C on trol cha rt ----------------------------------- 16-26 16-13
Tube conditioning ------------------------------ 2-9 2-4 Control operator (VCO) 15-12 15-3
T ub e w e a r ....
.....
....
..
......
............
... .... 2-9
...... 2-4 D ispe rsio n --------------------------------------- 2-37 2-22
In ter va l ............................................ 2-4, 2-1,
Unloading the piece ---------------------------- 16-25 16-13
Unobserved fire missions .................. 13-26 113-11 Interval, determination 16-25 16-13
Probable error ---------------------------------- 2-37 2-23
Valid time registration -------------.......... Shif t ------------------------------------------- 8-6 8-3
Validity of registrations-.................. Velocity components ..................... 2-18 2-14
Variable time fuzes: Visibility diagram ..----------------------- 7-8 7-2
Angle o f fall --------------------------------------
10-16 10-9 VT fuzes. (See variable time fuzes.)
A rm in g time .-----------------------------........
Care and handling -------------------------- Warning Order (call for fire) ------------ 9-4 9-1
Computation of MPQ (low-angle Weapon record book .............
fi re ) ---------------------------------------------------- W ear of tube --------------------------- ...............- 2-9 2-4
C rest clearan ces ------------------------------ W ear tab les ----------------------------- ...............- 22-2 3 22-10
E ffect of air burst ----------------------------- Weight of projectile ..............................- 2-9 , 2-4,
FDC procedure, when using .......... 18-16 18-9 2-25 2-17
1-14,
Fu nctionin g -------------------------------------- 1-5, White phosphorous (WP) projectile:
10-4 10-2 Action 24-4 24-1
Probable error, determination ....2-30 2-20 Adjustment of, FDC procedures .. 13-2, 13-1,
Replotting of targets attached ....20-19 20-9 24-5 24-1
Targets employed against ............ 10-4 Iu-2 A n d H E -----------------------------------------
Velocity, muzzle. (See muzzle velo- Appearance of burst ------------------------ 10-3 10-1
city.) Care and handling .....------...............
Velocity components -------------- 2-18
:-........... 2-13 Wind:
Velocity dispersion ---------------------.......
Velocity error:
Absolute, computation ..................
2-9

22-22
2-4

22-9
L a te ra l ------------------------------------------
R an g e -------------------------------------------
Wire communications, fire direction
2-26
2-25
2-20
2-17
S
18-27 18-12
A p p lic atio n ........................................
21-11 21-7
A v e rage ..............................................
21-19 21-12 Yaw, angle 2-25, 2-17, ai
Comparative, determination ........ 22-16 22-7 2-26 2-20
C om putation of -------------------------------- 21-9 21-6
Corrections, experience .................. 21-16 21-11 Zone and sweep fire 4-13 4-5
Determination of V -------------------------- 21-6 21-3 Zone dispersion ....... 2-32 2-21

Index-17
(Index-1 8 blank)
 *FM 6-40

FIELD MANUALS HEADQUARTERS

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 6-40 WASHINGTON, D.C., 28 June 1974

FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON GUNNERY

Paragraphs Page
PART ONE. GENERAL
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTIOIN........ ........
........ ... . 1- 1- 1-7
Section I. General -------- 1-1
II. Cannon artillery - --
-- 1-8,1-9 1-2
III. Ammunition------ --- - 1-10-1-14 1-5
CHAPTER 2. FUNDAMENTALS OF FIELD ARTILLERY
GUNNERY
Section I. Elem ents of firing data ................... 2-1-2-5 2-1
II. Interior ballistics ------------- -- ------------ 2-6-2-9 2-3
III. Exterior ballistics 2-9
2-10-2-27
IV. Dispersion and prcbability ..................... 2-28-2-47 2-19
PART Two. FIRING BATTERY
CHAPTER 3. FIRING BATTERY, GENERAL 3-1-3-5 3-1
4. FIRING BATTERY PROCEDURES
Section I. Laying the battery- - 4-1-4-8 4-1
II. Minimum quadrant elevation 4-9-4-15 4-10
III. Determining and reporting data 4-16-4-27 4-15
IV. Fire commands and their execution ........ 4-28-4-49 4-20
V. Assault and direct fire - 4-50-4-52 4-27
CHAPTER 5. FIRING BATTERY OPERATIONS AND
TRAINING
Section I. General-- 5-1-5-5 5-1
II. Field operations cf the firing battery 5-6-5-8 5-2
III. Care and handling of ammunition ................ 5-9-5-23 5-6
IV. Common mistakes and malpractices - 5-24-5-27 5-9
CHAPTER 6. DUTIES OF THE SAFETY OFFICER ---- -- 6-1-6-14 6-1
PART THREE. OPSERVED FIRE
CHAPTER 7. FIELD ARTILLERY OBSERVER
Section I. Introduction 7-1-7-3 7-1
II. Preparatory operations 7-4-7-8 7-1
CHAPTER 8. LOCATION OF TARGETS 8-1-8-8 8-1
CHAPTER 9. CALLS FOR FIRE 9-1-9-11 9-1
10. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE BY GROUND
OBSERVER
Section I. General . . . . . . . 10-1-10-6 10-1
II. Adjustm ent of deviation ............ 10-7,
-.---------- 10-8 10-3
III. Adjustment of range 10-9-10-11 10-5
IV. Adjustment of height of burst .............. 10-12-10-16 10-8
V. Subsequent corrections-....... 10-17- 10-10
10-30
CHAPTER 11. FIRE FOR EFFECT
Section I. Precision fire-- --- -- 11-1-11-4 11-1
II. Area fire 11-5-11-8 11-2
CHAPTER 12. ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE BY THE AIR
OBSERVER
Section I. Introduction-- - 12-1-12-3 12-1
II. Preflight preparations 12-4, 12-5 12-1
III. Determination of initial data 12-6-12-9 12-1
IV. Adjustment procedures 12-10-12-12 12-3
CHAPTER 13. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FOR SPECIAL
SITUATIONS
Section I. Conduct of fire with chemical projectiles 13-1, 13-2 13-1
II. Battlefield illumination 13-3-13-5 13-3
III. Conduct of assault fire- 13-6-13-11 13-7
IV. Conduct of fire by use of combined observation 13-12-13-17 13-8
*This manual supersedes FM 6-40, 5 October 1967, including all changes, and FM 6-135, 14 Feb-
ruary 1969.
FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page
V. Adjustment of high-angle fire and auxiliary
adjusting point ................. 13-18- 13-10
13-22
Conduct of fire when observer is not oriented 13-23- 13-11
VI.
13-25
VII. Adjustment of fire by sound 13-26, 13-27 13-11
VIII. Aerial field artillery ............. -----13-28 13-12
IX. ABCA precision fire ............. 13-29- 13-12
13-32
X. Moving target missions .....- 13-33- 13-15
13-35
CHAPTER 14. ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES 14-1-14-7 14-1
PART FOUR. FIRE DIRECTION
CHAPTER 15. FIRE DIRECTION, GENERAL
Section I. Introduction . --------------------- ------ 15-1-15-3 15-i
II. Fire direction center, general 15-4-15-6 15-1
III. FDC personnel in the battalion - 15-7-15-16 15-2
CHAPTER 16. CHART DATA
Section I. Firing charts ....-- - --- 16-1-16-6 16-1
II. P lo tting -------------------------- --- -- 16-7-16-19 16-2
III. Determination of chart data 16-20- 16-12
16-27
CHAPTER 17. FIRIN G DATA .................. --------- -17-1-17-12 17-1
18. FIRE DIRECTION PROCEDURES
Section I. Battalion FDC procedures ---- 18-1-18-22 18-1
II. Battery fire direction ------------ 18-23- 18-12
18-25
III. Communications 18-26,18-27 18-13
Sample m issions ... ........... ------------ 18-28,18-29 18-14
IV.
CHAPTER 19. CONDUCT OF REGISTRATIONS
Section I. Geneiral--- -19-1-19-3 19-1
II. Precision registration ............. ------------ 19-4-19-21 19-1
III. Validity of registrations --- 19-22-
--------- 19-9
19-26
IV. Mean-point-of-impact and high-burst re gistrations _ 19-27- 19-12
19-39
v. Registration with more than one ammiunition lot __ 19-40, 19-41 19-21
VI. Fire direction procedures for ABCA pr ecision fire -- 19-42- 19-21
19-44
CiH.P'TER 20. DE fERMINATION AND APPLICATION OF
REGISTRATION CORRECTIONS
Section I. Introduction ------------- 20-1, 20-2 20-1
II. Registration range corrections------------------20-3-20-11 20-1
III. Registration deflection corrections---------------20-12-20-16 20-6
IV. Replotting targets -- ------------ 20-17-20-22 20-9
CHAPTER 21. METEOROLOGICAL CORRECTIONS AND
VELOCITY ERROR
Section I. The meteorological message--------------------21-1-21-4 21-1
II. Position velocity error .-.- -- ---- 21-5-21-10 21-2
III. Application of meteorological and velocity error
corrections--------------------------------21-11-21-16 21-9
IV. Experience cerrections.-------------------------21-17- 21-12
21-21
CHAPTER 22. CALIBRATION
Section I. General------------------------------------22-1-22-7 22-1
II. Chronograph calibration----------------------22-8-22-10 22-2
III. Fall-of-shot comparative calibration-------------22-11-22-19 22-4
IV. Fall-of-shot absolute calibration-----------------22-20-22-23 22-9
V. Redistribution of weapons---------------------22-23, 22-24, 22-10
CHAPTER 23. CALIBRATION, POSITION, AND SPECIAL
CORRECTIONS
Section I. Calibration corrections------------------------23-1-23-3 23-1
II. Position corrections--------------------------23-4-23-6 23-3
III. Special corrections---------------------------23-7-23-9 23-7
 FM 6-40

Paragraphs Pare
CHAPTER 24. FDC PROCEDURES FOR SPECIAL
SITUATIONS
Section I. Introduction---------------------------------24-1, 24-2 10t-1
II. Chemical projectiles--------------------------24-3-24-8 24-1
III. Illuminating projectiles------------------------24-9-24-18 24-3
IV. Propaganda projectile-------------------------24-19, 24-20 24-8
V. Assault fire---------------------------------24-21,24-22 24-8
VI. Destruction missions 24-23, 24-24 24-9
VII. Final protective fires---------------24-25, 24-26 24-10
VIII. Combined adjustment-------------------------24-27, 24-28 24-10
IX. Sound, flash, and radar missions - --- 24-29- 24-11
24-34
X. Gunnery procedures for improved conventional
munitions - 24-35, 24-36 24-12
XI. Dead space - -24-37- 24-15
24-40
XII. Miscellaneous - -- 24-41- 24-17
24-43
XIII. 8-inch howitzer nuclear delivery 24-44- 24-20
24-56
XIV. 155-mm howitzer nuclear delivery -- 24-57- 24-33
24-64
XV. Firing without a firing chart 24-65- 24-41
24-72
CHAPTER 25. FDC PROCEDURES FOR HIGH-ANGLE FIRE 25-1-25-13 25-1
CHAPTER 26. OBSERVED FIRING CHARTS
Section I. Introduction--- 26-1, 26-2 26-1
II. Battery observed firing charts 26-3-26-11 26-1
III. Battalion observed firing chart 26-12-26-15 26-4
IV. Replotting targets on the observed firing chart 26-16-26-20 26-7
V. Observed firing chart for more than one battalion 26-22-26-24 26-8
VI. Observed firing chart with incomplete survey 26-25, 26-26 26-9
VII. Radar firing charts 26-27-26-34 26-9
VIII. Transfer from observed firing chart to survey firing
chart-- -- -26-35- 26-12
PART FIVE. MISCELLANEOUS 26-39
CHAPTER 27. TARGET ANALYSIS AND ATTACK 27-1-27-10 27-1
28. SERVICE PRACTICE
Section I. Service practice procedures 28-1-28-9 28-1
II. Standard times for artillery fire- - - 28-10-28-12 28-4
CHAPTER 29. NAVAL GUNFIRE SUPPORT
Section I. Introduction-- -- 29-1-29-3 29-1
II. Call for fire ............. 29-4, 29-5 29-1
III. A djustment procedure ......................... 29-6, 29-7 29-4
CHAPTER 30. ARMOR EMPLOYED IN A FIELD ARTILLERY
M IS SIO N . . . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... 30-1-30-6 30-1
APPENDIX A. R E F E R E N CE S ................................ ---- - A-1
B. QSTAG 225, CALL FOR FIRE FORMATS - - B-1
C. QSTAG 246, RADIO TELEPHONE
PROCEDURES FOR THE CONDUCT OF
ARTILLERY FIRE -.-.-.-. -----.............. ..........- C-i
INDEX .. .. Index-1

iii
 FM 6-40

PART ONE
GENERAL
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION

Section I. GENERAL

1-1. Purpose 1-4. References

This manual explains the field artillery cannon See appendix A for list of references.
gunnery problem and presents a practical ap- 1-5. The Field Artillery Gunnery Problem
plication of the science of ballistics and the pro- Field artillery cannons normally are emplaced in
cedures essential for the timely delivery of ef- defilade to conceal them from the enemy. For the
fective artillery fire. This manual is intended vast majority of targets, placing cannons in de-
to be used only as a guide; therefore, modifica- filade preclude sighting the weapon directly
tions may be made based on the knowledge of the at the target (direct fire). Consequently, indirect
gunnery supervisor and the state of training of fire must be employed to attack the targets. The
unit personnel. Any modifications which result in gunnery problem is primarily the problem of in-
the loss of either speed or accuracy should be direct fires. The solution of this problem requires
seriously questioned. weapon and ammunition settings which, when ap-
1-2. Scope plied to the weapon and the ammunition, will
a. This manual encompases all aspects of field cause the projectile to burst on, or at a proper
artillery gunnery for cannons. The material pre- height above, the target. The steps in the solu-
sented herein is applicable to both nuclear and tion of the gunnery problem are-
nonnuclear warfare. The scope includes- a. Location of the target and battery.
(1) Characteristics and capabilities of wea- b. Determination of chart data (direction,
pons and ammunitions. range, and vertical interval from weapon to tar-
(2) Fundamentals of ballistics. get).
(3) Firing battery gunnery. c. Conversion of chart data to firing data.
(4) Observer procedures. d. Application of firing data to the weapon
(5) Fire direction. and ammunition.
(6) Miscellaneous gunnery information.
b. The term "Field Artillery" as used within 1-6. The Field Artillery Gunnery Team
this manual applies to cannon artillery only, The coordinated efforts of the field artillery gun-
except when specified otherwise. nery team must be interconnected by an adequate
1-3. Changes or Corrections communications system. The elements of the gun-
Users of this manual are encouraged to submit nery team are-
a. Observers. The observers (to include all tar-
recommended changes or comments to improve
the manual. Comments should be keyed to the get acquisition devices) detect and report to
specific page, paragraph, and lines of the text in the fire direction center the location of suitable
which the change is recommended. Reasons targets, initiate calls for fire, and conduct an ad-
should be provided for each comment to insure justment if necessary.
understanding and complete evaluation. Com- b. Fire Direction Center. The fire direction
ments should be forwarded direct to US Army center (FDC) evaluates the information received
Field Artillery School, ATTN: ATSF-CTD-DL, from the observers, determines firing data, and
Fort Sill, Oklahoma 73503. furnished these data in the form of fire commands
For your convenience, a self-addressed DA Form to the firing battery.
2028-1 (Test), Recommended Changes to Pub- c. Firing Battery. The firing battery applies
lications, is available as a tear-out sheet in the the firing data to the weapons and fires the wea-
back of this publication. If this form has been pons. The firing battery is the fire unit for field
removed, use DA Form 2028. artillery.

1-1
FM 6-40

1-7. Basic Principles of Employment of Field cal situation permit. When possible, survey will
Artillery Firepower be used to locate the firing position and targets
a. Field artillery doctrine demands the timely accurately. Under some conditions, only a rapid
and accurate delivery of fire to meet the require- estimate of the relative location of weapons and
ments of supported units. All members of the artil- targets may be possible. However, survey of all
lery team must be continuously indoctrinated installations should be as complete as time permits
with a sense of urgency; they must strive to re- in order to achieve the most effective massed fires.
duce by all possible measures the time required to Inaccurate fire wastes ammunition and reduces
execute an effective fire mission. the confidence of supported troops in their art-
b. For artillery fire to be effective, it must be illery support.
of suitable density and must arrive at the target
e. The immediate objective is to deliver a mass
at the proper time and with the appropriate pro-
of accurate and timely fire so that the maximum
jectile and fuze.
number of casualties are inflicted. The number of
c. Good observation permits delivery of the
most effective fire. Limited observation results in
casualties inflicted in a specific target area can
a greater expenditure of ammunition and less ef-
be increased in most instances by surprise fire.
If surprise massed fires cannot be achieved, the
fective fire. Some type of observation is desirable
time required to bring effective fire on the tar-
for every target fired on in order to insure that
fire is placed on the target. Observation of close-
get should be reduced to the minimum.
in battle areas is usually visual. When targets f. The greatest demoralizing effect on the
are hidden by terrain features or when greater enemy can be achieved by delivering a maximum
distances or limited visibility is involved, observa- number of rounds from many pieces in the short-
tion may be either visual (air or flash) or elect- est possible time and without adjustment. Accur-
ronic (radar or sound). When observation is avail- ate massed fire with one round per weapon from
able corrections can be made to place artillery six batteries will be much more effective than six
fire on targets by adjustment procedures; how- rounds per weapon from one battery, provided
ever, lack of observation must not preclude firing that all rounds arrive on the target simultaneously.
on targets that can be located by other means. g. Field artillery units must be prepared to
d. Field artillery fires must be delivered by the handle multiple fire missions when the situation
most accurate means which time and the tacti- so dictates.

Section II. CANNON ARTILLERY

1-8. General (1) Towed-Cannons mounted on carriages

a. Cannon artillery is classified according to designed to be towed behind prime movers.
caliber and maximum range capability as light,
medium, heavy, and very heavy. (2) Self-propelled--Cannons permanently in-
(1) Light-120mm and less. stalled on full-track vehicles which provide motive
(2) Medium-Greater than 120mm but less power for the piece and from which the weapon
than or equal to 160mm. is fired.
(3) Heavy-Greater than 160mm but less
than or equal to 210mm. 1-9. Characteristics and Capabilities
(4) Very heavy-Greater than 210mm. Some of the characteristics and capabilities of
b. Cannon artillery is also classified according field artillery weapons used in an indirect fire
to the method of organic transportation. role are listed in table 1-1.

1-2
 FM 6-40

0 0

0 ca" "

eq
0
0 N0 Ce

~IA
W0f r~o V~bo
E4 0I OD IV I"

00 -0 00 0 0 -

- "E-4-16-

0 14nut0 o 0icwaoia
co4I"-4-44ca

(xoaoddu) (sarpu-jae) DNIIAVLL ',IILNTIH I I to t-~

0 0 0 - 4 0

00 ~0 0

'4 saqu)
(punod g) s'ILaafr~iaHAVU Ce Ce 00 0 -% 0
"4 eq

00o Ce C)

"0e
4 La I* co4 N

(spu~d
4a(la1)w) NLOaLLVjaH do LwnwIvw C*
-
"4 - "4 44 N

co1
(9111) ) NOLLVAarI lflWINIW 0 0 00 0
C cca

0 0 0a ca

OH)(IVa~alIV 6~oe)
Ot-o-o 0~: 2 & 02 co ! ~
I V qrajN n i i q e8P)
e 00C + qe

C~Cl

00

0 0 0 0 0 03

0-040 0 0 0. 0

,,4 C40 40

to t- 00

0 0
Ce
0
Ce
Ce
0
0 0 0

0
N

0 0 0

2 0 2 2
00
00 00 00
0 00 00 00 00
t;
40

1-3
 o

Table 1-2. Cartridge/ projectile-fuze combinations for field artillery cannons.*

FUZE * This chart is not authority to fire listed

PD 7 MT MTSQ BD /PRO X combinations as they are subject to change.
C., NOTE: VT fuze will not be fired with charge 7,
105-mm Howitzer.

-r .........- - ~ - - - -
CARTRIDGE/PROJECTILE WEAPON

i X_

X
x
X
APERS-TA
BE, H84, H84BI
CS, XM 629
XM 546 105 MILLIMETER

X
X - x x X X X X XI HE1 MI (NORMAL CAVITY) ,,

X XIX XIXIX X X X X ix HE, MI (DEEP CAVITY)

I
x
X HE M 413 (ICM)
HE, M 444. (CM) ......
IX HEAT, M 67
HEAT-T , M 67 .
t t Ii HEP, M 327
-T, M 327
x xx - i
-X •
?AJ9XM 548
1 :--+---4- 1 1 1 1 M 360
i i i i i i i" i i i i i i i
i i i i i i i -4- -
M, M314A2, M514A2BI
i i i i i i i i E i 0

V 2 M 314A2EI
I X
. .I . X
, ., I
XIXIX
, '
"I I, I r , 1,,%I"%..
Xxix. I..I I 7 WP OR
. . . -..(E.
..- ....
GAS.
- tIH.
.. '-- I
HD.
-.
M60
.. . .
x _ __ __BEY M116 155 MILLIMETER
X" X ICSIXM 631 ..
X GB,OR VX--M 121AI
- X xX Xx x X X X X HE, M107 (NORMALCAVITY)
X X X X X X X X X X XXX HE, M107 (DEEP CAVITY)
- - X X X X HE? R A.M549
xX X HE),M449(CM)
X X HE, M483 (ICM)
X _ILLUM M118 SERIES
_ . X ILLUM, M485 SERIES
X X X X X X X X X SMOKE, WP OR GSHD. M IO
X X X X X X . X X X SMOKE, WP, M 105
xIX X GB OR VX, M426 8-INCH
x X X
X XXX I X _ X X _HE? M106 (NORMAL CAVITY,,)
X X X X.XI X _X X X X X X HE, M106 (DEEP CAVITY)
X _X X ,HE, M404 (ICM)_
x _ _X XX HE, M437 "75MILLIMETER
 FM 6-40

Section I!. AMMUNITION

1-10. General improved conventional munitions. The contents

A complete round of artillery ammunition con- of the projectile are ejected from the base of
tains all the components necessary to propel the the projectile through the action of the time fuze
projectile from the weapon and cause it to burst and expelling charge before the projectile reaches
at the desired time. The components are the the point of impact.
primer, propelling charge, projectile, and fuze. c. Burster-Type Chemical Projectiles. Burster-
Depending on the manner in which the com- type chemical projectiles include gas projectiles
ponents are assembled, artillery ammunition is and smoke projectiles. The contents of the projec-
classified as fixed, semifixed, separate-loading, tiles are expelled upon action of a burster pro-
and separated. See TM 9-1300-203 for details jectile charge which runs through the long axis
on artillery ammunition. See table 1-2 for am- of the projectile.
munition available for each cannon. d. High-Explosive, Plastic Projectiles. The 105-
mm high-explosive, plastic (HEP) projectile is
1-11. Primers used primarily against armored targets. The
Primers are used to ignite the propelling charge.
cartridge has one bag of propellant M6 for its
Percussion primers are ignited by a sharp blow
propelling charge. The projectile body is a thin-
with a firing pin Electric primers are ignited
walled casing containing composition A3 and is
by sending a small electric current through a
internally threaded at the base to receive a base
resistor imbedded in an explosive. If the primer
detonating (BD) fuze. When the cartridge is
is not capable of igniting the propellant, an igni-
ter charge is added to the propellant and placed fuzed with the M91 or M91A1 BD fuze. it is
designated high-explosive plastic tracer (HEP-
between the primer and the propellant. T) (the BD 91 series fuzes contain a tracer).
1-12. Propelling Charge When the cartridge is fuzed with the BD M62A1
A propelling charge is a low-order explosive, fuze, which has no tracer, it is designated high-
which, when burned, generates pressure within explosive plastic.
the chamber and, thereby, furnishes the energy
to propel the.projectile. Propelling charges are 1-14. Fuzes
packed loose in shell cases (fixed ammunition), The proper fuze must be used to cause the pro-
in cloth bag increments (semifixed or separate- jectile to function at the time and place desired.
loading ammunition) or, in the case of the 4.2- Fuzes are classified according to the method of
inch mortar, in sheetlike bundles attached to a functioning as time, impact, or proximity (VT).
cartridge container. Greater flexibility in projec- a. Time fuzes contain a graduated time element
tile range and angle of fall is provided by varying similar to the works in a clock that may be set,
the number of increments to be fired, which varies prior to firing, to a predetermined setting. After
the muzzle velocity. the projectile has been fired, the time fuze func-
1-13. Projectiles tions as soon as the time corresponding to this
A projectile is an object that is propelled from a setting has elapsed.
weapon by an explosive propellant charge. All b. impact fuzes function when they strike a
projectiles are of the same general shape in that solid object. Impact fuzes are further classified
they have cylindrical bodies and an ogival head. according to the dealy of action after impact as
a. High-Explosive Projectiles. High-explosive superquick, nondelay, delay, and concrete piercing
(HE) burster type projectiles are hollow projec- (CP). Concrete piercing is a special purpose im-
tiles filled with either composition B or TNT and pact fuze characterized with a hard nose shield
are designed to inflict casualties through frag- and with delay action for penetration and nonde-
mentation or damage through impact with a hard lay action for clearing away rubble.
target. The terminal ballistics and effects of c. Proximity (VT) fuzes function when they
these projectiles are discussed in chapter 2. approach any object which will reflect with suf-
b. Base-Ejection Projectiles. Base-ejection pro- ficient strength the signal radiated from the fuze.
jectiles are smoke, propaganda, illuminating, or Note. See table 1-2 for fuze interchangeability.

1-5
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 2
FUNDAMENTALS OF FIELD ARTILLERY GUNNERY

Section I. ELEMENTS OF FIRING DATA

2-1. General a. In some cases, individual piece corrections for
a. The data required to lay (point) an artil- deflection, fuze setting, and/or quadrant elevation
lery cannon so that the projectile, when fired, will are computed and applied to obtain a specific pat-
burst at the desired location are called firing tern of bursts. These corrections are called
data. These data are based on the direction, hori- special corrections.
zontal range, vertical interval, and meteorological b. The term "sheaf" is used to denote the lat-
conditions from the weapons to the target and on eral distribution of the bursts of two or more
the desired pattern of bursts at the target. pieces fired together. The width of the sheaf is
b. The principal unit of angular measurment the lateral distance (perpendicular to the direc-
in field artillery is the mil. A mil is the angle tion of fire) between the centers of the flank
subtended by an arc which is 1/6400 of the cir- bursts. The front covered by any sheaf is the width
cumference of a circle. of the sheaf plus the effective width of one burst.
2-2. Direction A sheaf may be formed in any one of the follow-
Direction is expressed as a horizontal angle mea- ing patterns:
sured from a fixed reference. The field artillery
normally uses grid north (the direction of the (1) Parallel (normal) sheaf. A parallel
north-south grid lines on a military map) for the sheaf is one in which the trajectories of all pieces
fixed reference and measures the angle clockwise are parallel (fig 2-1).
from grid north. When pieces are emplaced, they
are laid for direction, and the direction in which
they are laid is used as a basis for angular shifts
to point the pieces at the target. The direction to
the target may be computed, determined graphi-
cally or estimated.
2-3. Range
Range is the horizontal distance from the gun to
the target and is expressed in meters. Range may
be computed, measured graphically, or estimated.
The range achieved by a projectile is a function of
the charge (muzzle velocity) and the vertical
angle (elevation) to which the tube is raised. (For
other factors affecting range, see paragraph 2-9).
2-4. Vertical Interval
Vertical interval is the difference in altitude be-
tween the battery or observation post and the
target or point of burst. The altitudes are deter-
mined from a map, by surveys, or by a shift

'4
from a known point.
2-5. Distribution of Bursts
Distribution of bursts is the pattern of bursts in
the target area. Normally, all pieces of a battery
fire with the same deflection, fuze setting, and
quadrant elevation. However, since targets may be
of various shapes and sizes, it is sometimes desir-
able to adjust the pattern of bursts to the shape
and size of the target. Figure 2-1. Parallel (nwrmal) sheaf.

2-1
 FM 6-40

(2) Converged sheaf. A converged sheaf is two adjacent bursts is equal to the maximum ef-
one in which the horizontal and vertical planes fective width of one burst (table 2-1 and fig 2-3).
of the trajectories intersect at the target (fig 2-
2). (4) Special sheaf. A special sheaf is any
(3) Open sheaf. An open sheaf is one in sheaf other than one of those described in (1)
which the lateral distance between the center of through (3) above.
Table 2-1. Open Sheafs

Width (in meters) of Front (in meters) covered

open sheaf by an open sheaf
Caliber
2-piece 4-piece 6-piece 2-piece 4-piece 6-piece
battery battery battery battery battery battery

105-m m -------------------- .... 30 90 150 60 120 *180

155-m m .. . ............ .......... 50 150 250 100 200 *300
175-m m ---------------..-...... ---..... 95 285 190 380
8-inch --------------------- 80 . 240 160 320
*For fire planning purposes, final protective fires by a 6-piece howitzer battery normally will be-
a. 200 meters for 105-ram.
b. 800 meters for 155-mm.

Figure 2-2. Converged 8heaf.

2-2
 FM 6-40

burst
Figure2-3. Open sheaf.
Section II. INTERIOR BALLISTICS
propellant develop pressure sufficient to overcome
2-6. General initial bore resistance, the projectile begins to
Interior ballistics is the science which deals with move.
the factors affecting the motion of projectiles be- b. The gas pressure builds up quickly to a peak
fore they leave the muzzle of the piece. The total and gradually subsides shortly after the pro-
effect of all interior ballistic factors determines jectile begins to move. The peak pressure, toget-
the velocity with which the projectile leaves the her with the travel of the projectile in the bore
muzzle. This velocity is called the muzzle velocity
and is expressed in meters per second. Actual mea-
surements of the muzzle velocity of a series of
rounds, corrected for nonstandard conditions, de-
pict the performance of a certain weapon-
ammunition combination. The variation from
standard can be obtained by comparison of the
results of these measurements with the standard a. Undesirable pressure- travel curve
(initial excessive pressure)
velocities listed in the firing table for the charge
fired. Application of corrections to compensate
for nonstandard muzzle velocity is one of the most
important elements in the preparation of accurate
firing data.

2-7. Nature of Propellants and Projectile b. Undesirable pressure- travel curve

Movement (delayed excessive pressure)
a. A propellant is a low-order explosive which
burns rather than detonates. In artillery cannons
using separate-loading ammunition, the propel-
lant is burned in a chamber consisting of the
powder chamber and the base of the projectile;
in cannons using fixed and semifixed ammuni-
tion, the propellant is burned in a chamber con- c. Desirable pressure- travel curve.
sisting of the shell case and the base of the pro-
Figure2-4. Pressure-travelcurves.
jectile. When the gases generated by the burning
2-3
FM 6-40

(pressure-travel curve), determines the speed at have an identical influence on the performance of
which the projectile leaves the tube (fig 2-4). both lots. This assumption, although accurate
c. Various factors which affect the velocity enough for firing tests, is not entirely correct and
performance of a weapon-ammunition combina- allows a certain amount of error in propellant
tion are given in (1) through (5) below. assessment procedures. (Assessment procedures
(1) An increase in the rate of burning of a include correcting charge weights for the tested
propellant increases gas pressure. lot to match the velocity developed by the con-
(2) An increase in the size of the powder trol lot during the test.) Therefore, a wide varia-
chamber without a corresponding increase in the tion in the performance of ammunition under
amount of propellant decreases gas pressure. field conditions can be expected even though
(3) Gas escaping around the projectile in quality control over manufacture is exercised.
the tube decreases pressure. For example, if a cannon develops a muzzle velo-
(4) An increase in bore resistance to pro- city 3.0 meters per second faster (or slower)
jectile movement before peak pressure further in- than another weapon with the same charge lot,
creases pressure. it will not necessarily do the same with any other
(5) An increase in bore resistance at any charge of any other lot. However, weapon-
time has a dragging effect on the projectile and ammunition performance is not so unstable that
decreases velocity. Temporary variations in bore the prediction of future performance based on past
resistance are caused by extraneous deposits in results should not be attempted.
the tube and on the projectile and by differences
in heat between the inner and outer surfaces of 2-9. Factors Causing Nonstandard Muzzle
the tube. Velocity
2-8. Standard Muzzle Velocity In gunnery techniques, nonstandard velocity is
a. Appropriate firing tables give the standard expressed as a variation (plus or minus so many
value of muzzle velocity for each charge. These meters per second) from an accepted standard.
standard values are based on an assumed standard Round-to-round corrections for dispersion can-
tube. The standard values are points of depar- not be made. In the discussion in a through p
ture, not absolute standards, since they cannot be below, each factor is treated as a single entity,
reproduced in a given instance; that is, a specific assuming no influence from related factors.
weapon-ammunition combination cannot be se-
a. Velocity Trends. Not all rounds of a series
lected with the knowldege that it will result in a
fired from the same weapon using the same am-
standard muzzle velocity when fired.
munition lot will develop the same muzzle velo-
b. Charge velocities are established indirectly city. The variations in muzzle velocity follow a
by the military characteristics of a weapon. Can- normal probability distribution about the average
nons capable of high-angle fire (howitzers) re- muzzle velocity. This phenomenon is called velo-
quire a greater choice in number of charges than city dispersion. Under most conditions, the first
do cannons primarily capable of low-angle fire few rounds follow a somewhat regular pattern
(guns). This greater choice is needed in order rather than the random pattern associated with
to achieve range overlap between charges in high- normal dispersion. This phenomenon is called
angle fire and to achieve the desired range-
velocity trend. The magnitude and extent (num-
trajectory combination in low-angle fire. Other
ber of rounds) of velocity trends vary with the
factors considered in establishing charge velo- cannon, the charge and tube condition at round 1
cities are the maximum range specified for the
of the series, and firings preceding the series.
weapon and the maximum elevation and charge
(with resulting maximum pressure) which the Velocity trends cannot be accurately predicted;
therefore, any attempt to correct for the effect of
weapon can accommodate. a velocity trend is impractical. Characteristic
c. Manufacturing specifications for ammuni- velocity trends for some weapons, however, can be
tion include the required velocity performance detected. Figure 2-5 shows a comparison of vel-
within certain tolerances. The ammunition lots ocity trends for a 105mm howitzer when a series
are subjected to firing tests which include mea- of rounds is fired starting with an oily tube, a
suring the performance of the lots tested against series is fired starting with a tube that has been
the concurrent performance of a control or refer- cleaned with rags only, and a series is fired start-
ence lot. Both the control lot and the lot being ing with a tube that has been cleaned with soap
tested are fired through the same tube, the as- and water. Generally, the magnitude and dura-
sumption being that the characteristics of the tube tion of velocity trends can be minimized when

2-4
 FM 6-40

firing is started with a tube which is clean and the projectile. These erosive actions are more
completely free of oil. pronounced when higher charges are being fired.
b. Ammunition Lots. Each lot of ammunition Increased tube wear tends to decrease muzzle
has its own mean performance level when related velocity by allowing the projectile to be seated
to a common tube. Although the round-to-round farther forward in the tube and thereby allow-
probable error (PE) within each lot is about the ing more room for expanding gases, by allowing
same, the mean velocity developed by one lot may the expanding gases to escape past the rotating
be much higher or lower than that of another band, and by decreasing resistance to initial pro-
lot. For separate-loading ammunition, both the jectile movement which lessens pressure buildup.
propellant and the projectile lots must be identi- Although normal wear cannot be prevented, it can
fied. Variations in the projectile, e.g., the diameter be minimized by careful selection of the charge
and hardness of the rotating band, affect muzzle and by proper cleaning of both weapon and am-
velocity. (Projectile variations have a much more munition. Calibration data must be kept current,
apparent effect on exterior ballistics.) since losses in velocity do not uniformly follow
c. Tolerances in New Weapons. All new cannons an increase in measured wear.
of a given caliber and model will not necessarily e. Nonuniform Ramming. Although a weak ram
develop the same muzzle velocity. In a new tube, would decrease the volume of the propellant cham-
the predominant factors affecting muzzle velocity ber and thereby theoretically increase the push
are variations in the powder chamber and the given the projectile (the pressure of a gas varies
interior dimensions of the bore. If a battalion inversely with the volume), this is only a partial
armed with new cannons fired all the cannons with effect. Improper seating (cocking) of the pro-
a common lot of ammunition, a velocity spread jectile, caused by improper ramming, allows some
of 3 or 4 meters per second between the cannon of the expanding gases to escape and results in
with the highest muzzle velocity and the cannon lower velocity. The combined effect of escaping
with the lowest muzzle velocity would not be gases and a smaller propellant chamber is hard
unusual. Therefore, cannons must be calibrated to predict. Weak, nonuniform ramming produces
even though they are new. an increase in the dispersion pattern. Hard, uni-
d. Wear of Tube. Continued firing of a cannon form ramming is required for all rounds. When
wears away portions of the bore by the action of fixed and semifixed ammunition are being fired,
hot gases, by chemical action, and by movement of the principles of varying the volume of the pro-

Velocity change from round I

Weapon 105-mm howitzer
Charge 5

Tube at rd I (cold and previously fired

with charge 5
Oily
Cleaned with rags only
Cleaned with soap and water.

+ 5 m/s

0 m/s

- 5 m/s

-10 m/s

Round No. I 2 3 4 5 6 7
Figure 2-5. Velocity trends.

2-5
 FM 6-40

pellant chamber and escape of gases still apply, pellants to approach atmospheric temperature at
especially in worn tubes. Since the obturation of a uniform rate.
the cartridge case serves as the gas check to the (2) A sufficient number of rounds should be
rear in fixed and semifixed ammunition, proper unpacked in advance so that it is not necessary
handling and seating of the case is important in during a mission to mix freshly unpacked am-
reducing escape of gases. munition with ammunition which has been opened
for some time.
f. Rotating Bands. Ideal rotating bands allow (3) Rounds should be fired in the order in
proper seating, provide obturation, create proper which they are unpacked.
resistance to initial projectile movement to allow (4) Propellant temperatures of ready am-
uniform pressure buildup, and also provide a mini- munition should be taken at random points in the
mum dragging effect on the projectile once motion ammunition stack and checked periodically at
has started. Dirt or burs on the rotating band intervals dependent on the changes in ambient
cause improper seating, which increases tube wear temperatures. The rounds so checked should not be
and contributes to velocity dispersion. If excessive- removed from the rest of the ammunition but
ly worn, the lands may not sufficiently engage the should be measured in place so that a true mean
rotating bands to impart the proper spin to the temperature can be obtained. The thermometer
projectile. Insufficient spin reduces projectile sta- should penetrate the propellant and must not
bility in flight and can result in dangerously short, touch any metal.
erratic rounds. When erratic rounds occur or ex- (5) Propellants should be exposed to a
cessive tube wear is noted, ordnance ballistic and heated powder chamber for the shortest possible
technical service teams should be requested to time.
determine the serviceability of each tube by wear h. Moisture Content of Propellant. Changes in
measurements and other checks. the moisture content of propellant are caused by
g. PropellantTemperature. Any combustible ma- improper handling and storage. These changes will
terial burns more rapidly when it is heated prior affect muzzle velocity. The moisture content of
to ignition. When a propellant burns more rapidly, the propellant cannot be measured or corrected
the resultant pressure on the projectile is greater for; therefore, ammunition must be provided
and muzzle velocity is increased. The firing tables maximum protection from the elements.
show the magnitude of this change. Appropri- i. Position of Propellant in Chamber. In fixed
ate corrections to firing data can be computed; and semifixed ammunition, the propellant has a
however, such corrections are valid only as they relatively fixed position with respect to the
reflect the true propellant temperature. The tem- chamber-the chamber being, in effect, the cart-
perature of propellants in sealed packing cases ridge case. In separate-loading ammunition, how-
remains fairly uniform, though not necessarily ever, the position of the propellant depends on
standard (700 F). Once the propellant has been how the cannoneer inserts the charge. In order
unpacked, its temperature tends to approach the to insure ignition of the propellant, he must insert
prevailing air temperature. Exposure of ammuni- the charge so that the base of the propellant bag
tion to weather results in variations in propellant is flush against the obturator spindle at the in-
temperature between rounds as well as variations stant of firing of the primer. Variations in the
in mean propellant temperature between firing diameters of the bags also affect propellant per-
sections. The extent of the variations depends on formance. An increase in the bag diameter for
the time and type of exposure. It is not practical the same amount of propellant tends to increase
to measure propellant temperature and apply cor- the rate of burning and the resultant velocity.
rections for each round fired by each cannon. Loose tie straps or wrappings have the effect of
Positive action must be taken to maintain uniform increasing the bag diameter from the original
propellant temperatures; failure to do so results diameter; therefore, the cannoneer should check
in erratic firing. The effect of a sudden change in the wrappings for tightness even when the full
propellant temperature can invalidate even the charge is being used. The straps should never be
most recent registration corrections. tied over the ignitor pad.
(1) Ready ammunition should be kept off j. Weight of Projectile. The weights of like
the ground; should be protected from dirt, mowT- projectiles vary within certain weight zones. For
ture, and the direct rays of the sun; and should most projectiles the appropriate weight zone is
have an airspace between the ammunition and stenciled on the projectile. For these projectiles
protective covering. This procedure allows pro- that are not grouped in weight zones, the
 FM 6-40

for charge 4 (MV 262). Also, if firing is performed

weight is marked in pounds. A heavier than stand-
immediately with the lower charge, a tendency
ard projectile is harder to push throughout the
toward higher' than normal velocities will be
length of the tube and therefore, its velocity is experienced on the first one or two rounds. Going
lower than normal. A lighter projectile than
from a lower to higher charge also introduces the
standard is easier to push throughout the length
possibility that the first one or two rounds will
of the tube and therefore, its velocity is higher have a lower than normal velocity. It is doubtful
than standard. (Weight of projectile is also a fac-
whether firing with the lowest charge only can
tor in exterior ballistics.)
truly condition a tube to normal operating vel-
k. Coppering. Coppering is the deposit of a
ocity levels, since the warming up process is so
thin film of copper on the bore. Coppering occurs
slow at low velocities. For example, the average
in the tube when the velocity is high enough
variation from standard velocity for the 105-mm
to develop sufficient friction to remove the outer
howitzer when firing is started with charge 3 may
surface of the rotating band. The amounts of be 3.0 to 4.6 meters less than that when firing with
copper deposited vary with velocity. Coppering
charge 3 is preceded by firing with charge 7. The
is more pronounced in high-velocity weapons than
tactical situation seldom allows the firing of con-
in low-velocity weapons, and firing with higher
ditioning rounds. However, the lack of tube con-
charges results in more coppering than does firing
ditioning is a factor that the S3 must consider in
with lower charges. Slight coppering, such as
attacking targets without adjustment or in firing
that resulting from firing a few rounds at the
close to friendly troops. Likewise, possible velo-
higher charges with a howitzer tends to increase
city trends should be considered in mean-point-of-
muzzle velocity; excessive coppering causes erratic
impact (MPI) and high-burst (HB) registrations
velocity performance by varying the resistance and calibration firing.
of the bore to projectile movement. The removal
of excessive copper is an ordance function. (3) In general tube conditioning involves
1. Propellant Residues. Residues from the two different effects. One effect is that of heating
burned propellant and certain chemical agents the tube until the temperature differential from
mixed with the expanding gases are deposited inner to outer surfaces is stabilized for the rate
on the bore surface. Unless the tube is properly of fire and charge to be used. The other effect is
cleaned and cared for, these residues aggravate that of bringing the bore resistance from copper-
subsequent tube wear by causing pitting and aug- ing and propellant residues to a stabilized condi-
menting the abrasive action of the projectile. tion at the rate of fire and charge to be used.
m. Tube Conditioning. The temperature of the The first few rounds show the greatest differ-
tube has a direct bearing on the developed velo- ence from the intended level. However, these are
city. For example, a cold tube offers a different the very rounds that determine the accuracy of
resistance to projectile movement than a warm fire-for-effect missions. It is not possible at the
tube. A cold tube is less susceptible to coppering present time to include corrections for these
even at high velocities. Additional factors are trends in firing data. It may never prove feasible
the weapon, the charge fired, oiliness of the tube, to include such corrections for most cannons
and the degree of coppering. because of the many variations between the con-
(1) Ammunition is tested in tubes which ditioned tube and the unconditioned tube.
have been thoroughly conditioned to a desired
velocity level by firing several warmup rounds. (4) When calibration involves more than one
Tubes which are not conditioned will not allow charge, the higher charge is fired first, since con-
propellants to perform as they did when tested. ditioning for the lower charge occurs with fewer
Also, the round-to-round variation is much greater rounds if the first rounds are fired at the highest
during the conditioning period. velocity. Two to four rounds should be sufficient
(2) If the velocity for a certain weapon- when the highest charge is fired; however, the
ammunition combination is at its true level only
observed results are the only valid criteria. When
after sustained fire at a specified rate of fire, calibrations are conducted with the lower charges
either increases in the rate of fire or lulls in of the 105-mm, 155-mm, and 8-inch howitzers and
firing can upset this true level. A change of charge the 175-mam gun without prior conditioning with
can have a noticeable effect on velocity level. higher charges, more rounds will be required for
For example, if a 105-mm howitzer is conditioned reaching a conditioned tube status. If conditioning
(brought to the true velocity level) with charge has been accomplished with one charge and a
7 (MV 465), it will be slightly overconditioned change to another charge is required, at least one

2-7
 FM 6-40

conditioning round should be fired with the new the data needed and velocity performance must
charge. be predicted on this basis. The velocity level of
(5) Guns are more sensitive to changes in each weapon must be determined at every op-
the rate of fire than howitzers. The accuracy of portunity. Methods used to determine compara-
preparation fire is adversely affected by rapid tive and absolute velocity performance of a group
firing followed by intermittent lulls of varying of weapons are discussed in chapter 22. Some of
length. the factors involved in calibration are discussed
(6) The previous conditioning of any weap- in detail in paragraphs 2-10 through 2-27.
on is affected by lulls in firing and the ambient
air temperature. If the lull is no longer than 1 o. Charge-to-Charge Propellant Performance.
hour, the firing of one round will normally bring One of the major problems in gunnery is how
the cannon to the previous velocity level. If the best to extend to all other charges the data de-
tube is cleaned during relatively short lulls, er- veloped from firing one charge. From the view-
ratic velocities may be experienced for the first point of muzzle velocities only, there is no basis
few rounds after cleaning. If the cleaning is in available data for stating that charge-to-
accomplished during long lulls, the normal velo- charge performance follows a convenient ratio.
city trends described in a above may be expect- Since propellants are manufactured to provide
ed. The conditioning of the tube is destroyed more standard performance within any given charge,
quickly during lulls in firing in extremely cold a variation from standard in one charge does not
temperature than in warm temperature. During fix a similar or proportional variation in another
cold weather, the firing of more rounds may be charge. The velocity level for a charge of a parti-
necessary to bring the cannon to the proper cular lot can be determined only by firing. Once
velocity levelo the velocity level has been determined, its relative
(7) Oil or moisture in the tube or on the level, with respect to other charges of that lot
rotating band tends to increase the velocity of a similarly determined, remains fairly stable. The
particular round by causing a better initial gas velocity level developed at a given time by a
seal and reducing projectile friction on the bore certain charge is influenced by the state of the
surface. The oily tube condition usually exists con- tube conditioning. This is particularly noticeable
currently with the cold tube condition. Hence, in the lower charges.
the high velocities induced by oil, combined with
p. Projectile Temperature. The effect of tem-
the erratic velocities characteristic of a cold
perature on the projectile casing and the filler
tube, complicate normal velocity trends. When
may cause a warping of the projectile casing,
these factors are coupled with the effects of
including the fuze cavity (specifically the threads
coppering and powder residues, it is hard to pre-
in the cavity). This effect may then result in
dict corrections for velocity trends. Moisture on
improper seating of the projectile in the tube.
the projectile normally affects only that particular
round. Generally, firing with a cold, dry tube is When this occurs, the sealing action of the
rotating band may not be complete and gases
preferable to firing with a cold, oily tube, and
projectiles should be dry regardless of tube con- may escape upon combustion of the propellant.
The result will be a loss in developed muzzle
ditions, Figure 2-5 illustrates velocity trends
measured under the conditions stated. The graph velocity and a subsequent decrease in range.
in figure 2-5 is not to be construed as the basis When the fuze well does not permit the proper
seating of the VT fuze, either fuze quick or fuze
for determining corrections to firing data° It is
merely an example of observed results which most time should be fired with that projectile or the
nearly portray the cannon and condition speci- projectile should be rejected. Improper seating
of the VT fuze may cause it to activate pre-
fied after repeated observations.
maturely. Since there is no method of detect-
n. Deferminction of Muzzle Velociliyo The ac-
ing the effect of temperature on the projectile
curacy of artillery fires could be improved if
casing with regard to proper seating, positive
actual muzzle velocities developed by each tube
action must be taken to prevent sudden changes
at the time of firing were known. Obtaining such
or varying changes in the temperature of the
data is not feasible at the present tim~e There-
projectile. Those procedures that apply to the
fore, knowledge of past performance of a weapon-
storage of propellants are also applicable to pro-
ammunition combination must be relied on for
jectiles.

2-8
 FM 6-40

Section III. EXTERIOR BALLISTICS

2-10. General 2-12. Elements of the Trajectory
a. Exterior ballistics is the science which dE The elements of the trajectory are classified into
with the factors affecting the motion of a p three groups-intrinsic elements, initial ele-
jectile after it leaves the muzzle of a weap ments, and terminal elements. Intrinsic elements
at that instant, the total effect of interior I are those which are characteristic of a trajectory
listics in terms of developed muzzle velocity f by its very nature. Initial elements are those that
spin has been imparted to the projectile. Wer( are characteristic at the origin of the trajectory.
not for gravity and atmosphere, the projec" Terminal elements are those which are character-
would continue indefinitely at a constant veloc istic at the point of impact or point of burst.
along a prolongation of the tube. 2-13. Intrinsic Elements
b. Gravity causes the projectile to return The intrinsic elements of the trajectory (fig 2-7)
the surface of the earth. If the projectile w are discussed in a through g below.
fixed in a vacuum, the path, or trajectory, wo a. Origin. The location of the center of gravity
be simple to trace. All projectiles, regardless of the projectile when it leaves the muzzle of the
size, shape, or weight, should follow paths of" piece is designated the origin of the trajectory.
same shape and would achieve the same rai However, the magnitude and the direction of
for a given muzzle velocity and tube elevati jump and therefore the line of departure (para
However, when the projectile is fired in 2-14b and c) cannot be predetermined. There-
atmosphere, the path becomes a complex cui fore, for the remaining definitions relating to the
There are two reasons for this. First, projecti elements of the trajectory, the term "origin" will
of different sizes or weights respond differer be used to designate the center of the muzzle
to identical atmospheric conditions. Second, when the piece has been laid.
though a standard atmosphere can be defined b. Ascending Branch. The ascending branch
standard atmosphere is seldom experienced. f is that portion of the trajectory traced while the
combinations and permutations of the varial projectile is rising from the origin.
affecting the atmosphere (and, thus, the path c. Descending Branch. The descending branch
a projectile) are numerous. A given elevation - is that portion of the trajectory traced while the
muzzle velocity can result in a wide variety projectile is falling.
trajectories, depending on the combined pr d. Summit. The summit is the highest point
erties of both the projectile and the atmosph( of the trajectory. It is the end of the ascending
2-11. The Trajectory branch.
The trajectory is the curve traced by the cen e. Maximum Ordinate. The maximum ordinate
of gravity of the projectile in its flight from is the difference in altitude between the origin and
muzzle of the weapon to the point of impact the summit.
point of burst (fig 2-6). f. Level Point. The level point is the point on

CO

Lb Mortar

Howitzer

Gun

Small arms

Figure 2-6. Typical trajectories.

2-9
 FM 6-40

the descending branch of the trajectory which is i. Angle of Elevation. The angle of elevation is
at the same altitude as the origin. the smaller angle at the origin in a vertical plane
g. Base of Trajectory. The base of the trajec- from the line of site to the line of elevation.
tory is the straight line from the origin to the j. Quadrant Elevation. The quadrant eleva-
level point. tion is the smaller angle at the origin in a verti-
2-14. Initial Elements cal plane from the base of the trajectory to the
The initial elements of the trajectory (fig 2-8) line of elevation. Quadrant elevation is the alge-
are discussed in a through j below. braic sum of site plus the angle of elevation.
a. Line of Elevation. When the piece is laid, Quadrant elevation can also be computed by alge-
the line of elevation is the axis of the tube ex- braically adding the angle of site to the angle of
tended. elevation corresponding to range plus comple-
b. Line of Departure. The line of departure is mentary range. The two methods of computing
a line tangent to the trajectory at the instant the quadrant elevation, one using the complementary
projectile leaves the tube. angle of site and the other using complementary
c. Jump. Jump is the displacement of the line range, both compensate for the nonrigidity of
of departure from the line of elevation that exists the trajectory. Either complementary angle of
at the instant the projectile leaves the tube. Jump site or complementary range may be used when
is caused by the shock of firing during the in- the firing data are being determined from the
terval from the ignition of the propelling charge firing table; complementary angle of site is used
to the departure of the projectile from the tube. when site is being determined with the graphical
d. Angle of Site. The angle of site is the smal- site table.
ler angle in the vertical plane from the base of 2-15. Terminal Elements
the trajectory to the straight line joining the The terminal elements of the trajectory (fig 2-
origin and the target. The angle of site is plus 9) are discussed in a through e below.
when the target is above the base of the trajec- a. Point of Impact. The point of impact is the
tory and minus when the target is below the base point at which the projectile first strikes in the
of the trajectory. The angle of site compensates target area. (The point of burst or point of ejec-
for the vertical interval (para 2-4). tion for base ejection projectile, is the point at
e. Complementary Angle of Site. The comple- which a projectile bursts or ejects in the air.)
mentary angle of site (comp site) is an angle b. Line of Fall. The line of fall is a line tangent
which is algebraically added to the angle of site to the trajectory at the level point.
to compensate for the nonrigidity of the trajec- c. Angle of Fall. The angle of fall is the verti-
tory. The trajectory may be rotated vertically cal angle, at the level point, between the line of
about the origin an amount equal to small angles fall and the base of the trajectory.
of site without significantly affecting its shape. d. Line of Impact. The line of impact is a line
When large angles of site or the longer ranges tangent to the trajectory at the point of impact.
for any one charge are involved, significant error e. Angle of Impact. The angle of impact is
is introduced because the shape of the trajectory the acute angle, at the point of impact, between
changes. The value and sign of the complemen- the line of impact and a plane tangent to the
tary angle of site depends on the angle of site, surface at the point of impact. This term should
the range, the shape of the trajectory (low- or not be confused with the term "angle of fall."
high-angle fire), and the muzzle velocity. The
complementary angle of site for ±1 mil angle 2-16. The Trajectory in a Vacuum
of site (comp site factor) is listed in the firing a. The factors
tables. ing in a vacuum on which a firing
is based are the table for fir-
angle of de-
f. Site. Site is the algebraic sum of the angle parture, the muzzle velocity, and the acceleration
of site plus the complementary angle of site. due to the force of gravity. The initial velocity
g. Complementary Range. Complementary imparted to a projectile consists of two compo-
range is the range correction equivalent to the nents--a horizontal velocity and a vertical velo-
complementary angle of site. Complementary city.
range can be determined from the firing tables. b. The relative magnitudes of horizontal and
h. Line of Site. The line of site is the straight vertical velocity components vary with the angle
line constructed from the origin at the angular of elevation. For example, if the elevation were
distance from the base of the trajectory equal to 0, the initial velocity imparted to the projectile
site. would be horizontal; there would be no vertical

2-10
 FM 6-40

Summit

iOrigin Level
point

Figure 2-7. Intrinsicelements of the trajectory.

Target at
Line of level point
elevation
Origin Angle of elevation Bose of the
trajectory
Og
%J"Wr, F

@ Trajectory with zero angle of site

Figure 2-8. Initial elements of the trajectory.

Target
Line of ertical interval
elevation
>< Bose of the

Origin
Range

. , Hypothetical (rigid) trajectory

Line of Target
elevation

-_Angle of elevation p
of site Bose of the
Origin An ile
Range

CO) Actual (nonrigid )trajectory

Figure 2-8-Continued.

2-11
FM 6-40

Line of ,Target
elevation
Line of
site
Origin

Range-

The solution for a plus angle of site (low angle) Range

I: Angle of site
2: Complementary angle of site
3: Site
4: Angle of elevation
5r Quadrant elevation

Line of
elevation
Orign "' 4'. -- "Complementary.
x . aseof t eRange

\\
sie 3" --- "trojectbry

The solution for a minus angle of site (low angle)

It Angle of site
2' Complementary angle of site
3' Site
4, Angle of elevation
5, Quadrant elevation

Figure 2-8-Continued.

2-12
 FM 6-40

POINT OF

LEVEL POINT

Figure 2-9. Terminal elements of the trajectory.

2-13
FM 6-40

component. If the elevation were 1,600 mils (dis- a. The velocity at the level point is less than
regarding the effect of rotation of the earth), the the velocity at the origin.
initial velocity imparted to the projectile would b. The mean horizontal velocity of the projec-
be vertical; there would be no horizontal compo- tile beyond the summit is less than the mean
nent. velocity before the summit; therefore, the pro-
c. Gravity causes a projectile in flight to fall jectile travels a shorter horizontal distance, the
to the earth. Because of gravity, the height of the descending branch is shorter than the ascending
projectile at any instant is less than it would be branch, and the angle of fall is greater than the
if no such force were acting on it. In a vacuum, angle of elevation. Also, Since the mean vertical
the vertical velocity would decrease from the ini- velocity beyond the summit is less than the mean
tial velocity to 0 on the ascending branch of the vertical velocity before the summit, the time of
trajectory and would increase from 0 to the ini- descent is greater than the time of ascent.
c. Because of air resistance, the response of
tial velocity on the descending branch. Zero
the projectile to the initially imparted spin is
vertical velocity would occur at the trajectory
summit. For every vertical velocity value upward different from that in a vacuum.
d. The trajectory in standard atmosphere, will
on the ascending branch there would be an equal
be shorter and lower than that in a vacuum after
vertical velocity value downward equidistant
any specific time of flight. The summit is nearer
from the summit on the descending branch. Since
to the level point than to the origin, and the
there would be no resistance to the forward mo-
angle of fall is greater than the angle of elevation.
tion of the projectile in a vacuum, the horizontal
The reasons for these differences are-.
velocity component would be a constant. The
(1) Horizontal velocity is no longer a con-
acceleration due to the force of gravity (9.8
stant but decreases with each succeeding time in-
meters per second 2) would affect only vertical
terval.
velocity.
(2) Vertical velocity is affected not only by
d. In a vacuum, the form of the trajectory gravity but also by the additional retardation ef-
would be determined entirely by the elevation of fect of the atmosphere.
the tube, the muzzle velocity, and gravity. The
form would be parabolic; that is, the angle of fall 2-19. Standard Conditions and Corrections
would be equal to the angle of elevation. The a. Certain atmospheric, position, and mate-
summit would be a point halfway between the riel conditions are accepted as standard. These
origin and the level point. The trajectory in a conditions are outlined generally in the introduc-
vacuum is shown in figure 2-10. tion to firing tables.
b. When variations from standard conditions
2-17. Standard Atmosphere are experienced, the trajectory will not conform
The resistance of the air to a projectile depends to the predicted trajectory. Some of these varia-
on the air movement, density, and temperature. tions can be measured, and corrections can be
An air structure, called the standard atmosphere, made to compensate for them. Among the condi-
is derived from assumed conditions of air density tions for which corrections may be determined
and air temperature and a condition of no wind. are-
This standard atmosphere is used as a point of (1) Vertical interval.
departure for computing firing tables. (2) Propellant temperature.
2-18. Characteristics of Trajectory in Standard (3) Drift.
Atmosphere (4) Ballistic wind.
The most apparent difference between the tra- (5) Muzzle velocity.
jectory in a vacuum and the trajectory in stand- (6) Air temperature.
ard atmosphere is the reduction of the range (7) Air density.
(fig 2-11). This reduction occurs mainly because, (8) Weight of projectile.
in the atmosphere, the horizontal velocity compo- (9) Rotation of the earth.
nent is not a constant but is continually de- 2-20. Firing Tables
creased by the retarding effect of the air. The a. Firing tables are based on actual firings
vertical velocity component is likewise affected of the piece and its ammunition under, or cor-
by air resistance. The characteristics of a trajec- related to, a set of conditions defined and accept-
tory in standard atmosphere differ from the char- ed as standard. These standards are points of
acteristics of a trajectory in a vacuum as fol- departure and corrections are used to compensate
lows: for variables in the weapon-weather-ammunition

2-14
 FM 6-40

Vertical velocity
= sin 300milsX 579.5
= 110.2 m/s.
At t seconds, vertical velocity
Were it not for gravity,
will be 110.2 m/s minus t X 9.8 m/s.
projectile would continue
to rise along this line at
a constant vertical velocit
of 110.2 m/s.

300 mils Drop

0 1,950 m
Horizontal velocity
= cos 300,mils X 379.5
= 363.2 m/s.
This is a constant.

300mils ;'° (-85.7 m110.2m/s)

m/s) "
(110.2 m/s).A
Seconds 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

Horizontal velocity is a constant from origin to level point; hence the projectile will travel 363.2 meters in the
horizontal plane during each second.
Vertical velocity decreases from 110.2 m/s to 0 m/s on ascending branch and increases from 0 m/s to
110.2 m/s on descending branch both at a rate of 9.8 rn/s 2 . Vertical velocities are shown in parenthesis.

Figure 2-10. Trajectory in a vacuum.

combination that are known to exist at a given known properties under conditions of standard
instant and location. The atmospheric standards muzzle velocity and weather and a motionless
accepted in US firing tables reflect the mean an- earth.
nual condition in the North Temperate Zone.
b. The principal elements measured in experi- 2-21. Unit Corrections
mental firings include angle of elevation, angle a. Firing tables list unit corrections as range
of departure, muzzle velocity, achieved range, correction for an increase (decrease) in each of
drift, and concurrent atmospheric conditions. the following factors: muzzle velocity, range
c. The main purpose of a firing table is to wind, air temperature, air density, and projectile
provide the data required to bring effective fire on weight. The appropriate unit correction for each
a target under any set of conditions. Data for listed range is given in meters.
firing tables are obtained from firings conduct- b. Each correction is computed on the assump-
ed with the weapon at various quadrant eleva- tion that all other conditions are standard. Ac-
tions. Computed trajectories, based on the equa- tually, any given correction will differ slightly
tions of motion, are compared with the data from that computed if one or more of the other
obtained in the firings. The computed trajectories conditions are nonstandard. The amount of dif-
are then adjusted to the measured results and ference depends on the effect of the other non-
data are tabulated. Data for elevations not fired standard conditions. The effect of one nonstand-
are determined by interpolation. Firing table ard condition on the effect of another nonstand-
data define the performance of a projectile of ard condition is known as an interaction effect.

2-15
FM 6-40

A trajectory in standard atmosphere, as opposed to one in a vacuum, will be at a

shorter range and at a lower height after any specific time of flight.
This is because - -

(I) Horizontal velocity is no longer a constant but decreases with each succeed-
ing time interval.
(2) Vertical velocity is affected not only by gravity but also by the additional
slowing down from the atmosphere.

Note:
(I) The summit in a vacuum is midway between the origin and the level point; in the
atmosphere, it is nearer the level point.
(2) The angle of fall in a vacuum is equal to the angle of elevation; in the
atmosphere, it is greater.
Figure 2-11. Trajectory in a standard atmosphere.

The error introduced by interaction can be re- tions at the chart-range plus complementary
duced by use of an electronic computer. range.
c. Effects and corrections, in meters or mils, b. When corrections are being computed,
are not of equal magnitude when computed at the slightly more accurate data can be obtained by
same range. The relationship between effects and making a second computation at the first ap-
corrections at a given range can be shown by the parent corrected entry range. (This procedure is
following example: An MPI registration is fired called successive approximation.) However, the
by a 155-mm howitzer (M109) firing charge 7, improvement is marginal and is not recommend-
elevation 322 (standard elevation for 10,000 me- ed.
ters). The measured range to the mean-point- c. The weather, as described in the meteorolo-
of-impact is 9500 meters. The total effect of all gical message, that affects a projectile is that at
nonstandard conditions is - 500 meters. The the maximum ordinate achieved. This maximum
graphic firing table (GFT) setting from the MPI ordinate is most nearly a function of the quadrant
registration is GFT A: Charge 7, lot ZT, range elevation fired.
9500, elevation 322. Based on the GFT setting, the 2-23. Standard Range
elevation to achieve range 10,000 meters is 351 a. The standard range is the range opposite a
(the elevation for 10,520 meters). The total range given elevation in the firing tables. It is assumed
correction is + 520 meters. to be measured along the surface of a sphere
2-22. Extracting Data From Firing Tables concentric with the earth and passing through
a. The effect of a nonstandard condition is a the muzzle of a weapon. For practical purposes,
function of the time the projectile is exposed to standard range is the horizontal distance from
that condition. In common firing tables, the re- the origin to the level point.
lationship of corrections to time of flight can be b. The achieved range is the range which is
resolved by entering the tables for unit correc- developed as a result of firing with a certain

2-16
 FM 6-40

elevation of the tube. If actual firing conditions c. Muzzle velocity is the speed of the projec-
duplicate the ballistic properties and meteoro- tile at the time it is projected from the muzzle;
logical conditions upon which the firing table is the greater the velocity of a given projectile the
based, the achieved range and standard range greater the achieved range. Velocity error often
will be equal. becomes a catch-all for many nonvelocity ele-
c. The corrected range is the range which cor- ments. When this occurs, accuracy is adversely
responds to the elevation that must be fired to affected in subsequent applications of the velocity
reach the target. error.
d. The weight of the projectile affects muzzle
2-24. Effect of Nonstandard Conditions velocity. Two opposing factors affect the flight of
a. Deviations from standard conditions, if not a projectile of nonstandard weight. A heavier
corrected in computing firing data, will cause projectile is more efficient in overcoming air re-
the projectile to impact or burst at a point other sistance; however, because it is more difficult to
than the desired point. push through the tube, its muzzle velocity is
b. Corrections for nonstandard conditions are normally lower. An increase in projectile effi-
made to improve accuracy. The accuracy of artil- ciency increases range, but a decrease in muzzle
lery fires depends on the accuracy and complete- velocity decreases range. In firing tables, correc-
ness of the data available, computational proce- tions for these two opposing factors are com-
dures used, and care in laying the pieces. Ac- bined into a single correction. The change in
curacy should not be confused with precision. muzzle velocity predominates at shorter times of
Precision is related to tightness of the dispersion flight; the change in projectile efficiency predo-
pattern without regard to its proximity to a de- minates at longer times of flight. Hence, for a
sired point. Accuracy is related to the location of heavier than standard projectile, the correction
the mean point of impact with respect to a de- is plus at the shorter times of flight. The re-
sired point. verse is true for a lighter than standard pro-
jectile.
2-25. Range Effects
a. Vertical jump is the angle formed by the e. Air resistance affects the flight of the pro-
line of elevation and the line of departure. The jectile both in range and direction. The compo-
shock of firing causes a momentary vertical and nent of air resistance in the direction opposite to
rotational movement of the tube prior to the that of the forward motion of the projectile is
ejection of the projectile. Vertical jump has the called drag. Because of drag, both the horizontal
effect of a small change in elevation. The effect and vertical components of velocity are less at
of vertical jump depends mainly on the eccen- any given time of flight than they would be if
tricity of the center of gravity of the recoiling drag were zero, as in a vacuum. This decrease in
parts with respect to the axis of the bore. In velocity varies directly in magnitude with drag
modern weapons, vertical jump cannot be pre- and inversely with the mass of the projectile.
dicted and is usually small. For these reasons This means, in terms of achieved range, the
vertcal jump is not considered separately in the greater the drag, the shorter the range and the
gunnery problem; it is a minor contributing fac- heavier the projectile, the longer the range-all
tor to range dispersion. other factors being equal. Several factors con-
b. Droop is the algebraic sum of barrel curva- s'dered in the computation of drag are-
ture, untrueness of the breech quadrant seats, (1) Air density. The drag of a given pro-
and untrueness in assembling the tube to the jectile is proportional to the density of the air
breech. Its magnitude is defined as the difference through which it passes. For example, an increase
between the elevation measured at the muzzle in air density by a given percentage increases
and the elevati~on measured on the breech quad- the drag by the same percentage. Although air
rant seats. Firing tables are constructed on the densities may vary widely with changes in loca-
basis of measurements at the muzzle. For example, tion and time, the effect of altitude changes on
if droop for a certain weapon is -3 and an eleva- air density can be determined by special com-
tion of 360 is set in the normal manner the tube putations considering temperature and moisture
elevation is only 357 mils; if it is desired to fire conditions, for this reason, the standard trajec-
a true 360-mil elevation, a setting of 363 will be tories reflected in the firing tables are computed
necessary. For most weapons, droop is absorbed with a fixed relation between density and altitude.
into the computed velocity error, although in (2) Velocity. The faster a projectile moves,
reality it is an elevation error. the more the air resists its motion. Examination

2-17
FM 6-40

of a set of firing tables shows that for a constant

elevation, the resistance of 1 percent air density
(hence, 1 percent drag) increases with an in-
crease of charge; that is, an increase in muzzle
velocity. The drag is approximately proportional
to the square of the velocity until the projectile
approaches the velocity of sound. When the velo-
city approaches the velocity of sound, drag in-
creases more rapidly because of the increase in
pressure behind the sound wave.
(3) Diameter. Two projectiles of identical
shape but different size will not experience the (Air resistance is least when center of pressure
same drag. For example, a large projectile will
is on the trajectpry; that is, zero yaw)
offer a large area for the air to act upon; hence,
its drag will be increased by this factor. For pro- Figure2-12. Yaw of projectile in flight.
jectiles of the same shape, drag is proportional to
the square of the diameter of the projectile.
(4) Drag coefficient. The drag coefficient
combines several ballistic properties of typical
projectiles. These properties include yaw (the
angle between the direction of motion of the pro-
jectile and the axis of the projectile (fig 2-12))
and the mach number (the ratio of the velocity
of the projectile to the speed of sound (fig 2-13) ).
f. The shell surface finish affects muzzle velo-
city. A rough surface on the projectile or fuze
0 .4 .8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 2.8 3.2 3.6 4.0 4.4
will increase air resistance and thereby decrease
Mach number
range.
velocity of projectile
g. The ballistic coefficient of a projectile re- I. Mach number = speed of sound
lates its efficiency in overcoming air resistance 2. The speed of sound is faster in warmer air; hence an
increase (decrease) in air temperature decreases (increases)
to that of an assumed standard projectile. For the mach number.
ease in computations, all projectile types are 3. A change in the mach number can change the value of the
classified into certain standard groups. Each pro- drag coefficient either upward or downward, depending on
the mach number at which the change occurs.
jectile, however, has its own efficiency level. Each
projectile lot has its own average efficiency level; 4. An increase (decrease) in the value of the drag coefficient
decreases (increases) the developed range.
that is, ballistic coefficient. In order to establish
firing tables, it is necessary to select and fire one Figure2-13. Effect of velocity (mach number) on drag
coefiient of projectile type 1.
specific projectile lot. Based on the performance
of this lot, standard ranges are determined. The lated to the mach number and the relationship
ballistic coefficient of this particular projectile changes abruptly in the vicinity of mach 1.
lot becomes the firing table standard. However, i. The effects of air density on drag, and thus
other projectile lots of the same type may not on range, are discussed in e (1) above.
have the same ballistic coefficient as the one re- j. Range wind is that component of the bal-
flected in the firing tables. A more efficient lot listic wind blowing parallel to the direction of
(that is, a lot with a higher ballistic coefficient fire and the plane of fire. The plane of fire is
than the firing table standard) will achieve a a vertical plane that contains the line of eleva-
greater range when fired. The reverse is true for tion. Range wind changes the relationship be-
a less efficient projectile lot. In present gunnery tween the velocity of the projectile and the velo-
procedures, variations in ballistic coefficient are city of the air near the projectile. If the air is
considered an element of muzzle velocity. moving with the projectile (tailwind), it offers
less resistance to the projectile and results in a
h. As the air temperature increases, the drag longer range. A headwind has the opposite effect.
decreases, and range increases. This does not k. Although the earth rotates at a constant
hold true as the velocity of the projectile ap- rate, corrections for rotation vary with a number
proaches the speed of sound. Here drag is re- of factors and, therefore, rotation is more readily

2-18
 FM 6-40

considered a nonstandard condition. Factors in- is disregarded when firing tables are used, since
fluencing the effect of rotation of the earth on the firing table ranges include curvature effect.
travel of a projectile are the direction of fire, (3) A final rotational effect is described as
the angle of departure, the velocity of the pro- the latitudinal effect. When the gun and target
jectile, the range to the target, and the latitude are at different latitudes, the eastward rotational
of the gun. Corrections for these factors are velocity of the projectile is different to the rota-
combined in convenient tabular form in firing tional velocity of the target. For example, if the
tables. The correction tables provide all the data gun is nearer the Equator ((0, fig 2-15), the
needed to compensate for rotation in the gun- projectile will travel faster and therefore farther
nery problem. However some background theory to the east than the target (the effect left or
of rotational effects may assist in an understand- right depends on the hemisphere). When the gun
ing of ballistics. and target are at the same latitude (0, fig 2-15),
(1) Because of rotation of the earth, a the projectile will also be deflected away from
point on the Equator has an eastward linear
velocity of approximately 457 meters per second.
This linear velocity decreases to 0 meters at either
pole. Consider a gun on the Equator firing due
east at a target. (T, fig 2-14). During the time
of flight of the projectile, the gun and target will
travel from G to G' and from T to T', respec-
tively, along the circumference of the earth.
The projectile, however, will travel in a vertical
plane, the base of which is parallel to the origi-
nal plane of departure established at the time of
firing; that is, it is pivotal to the circumference
of the earth at the gun but not at the target.
At the end of a given time of flight the pro-
j ectile will be at P' when the target is at T'. Hence
the projectile will continue along an extended
trajectory and land east of, or in this instance,
beyond, the target. The normal trajectory of the
projectile is interrupted. Consider the same gun
firing westward (0, fig 2-14). Again, the pro-
jectile will fall to the east of the target, but in
this instance, the round is short of the target.
Q Rotational effects on range firing eastward
The effect in each example is as if the quadrant
elevation fired where in error by the amount of
angle a, which is the angle formed by the base
line G'P' and a tangent to the earth at G'. When
the gun is firing eastward, angle a is plus (range
over); when the gun is firing westward, angle
a is minus (range short).
(2) A second consideration is the curvature
effect. Curvature effect exists because the range
used in computing firing data is measured on a
map, on which the surface of the earth is as-
sumed to be flat, whereas the actual range is
measured on a sphere. The gun-target (GT)
range is computed for a plane tangent to the
surface of the earth at the gun. When the pro-
jectile reaches this range, it is still above the
curved surface of the earth and will continue to
drop. Therefore the true range will be slightly n2 Rotational effects on range firing westward
longer than the desired range. This effect is of
little significance except at very long ranges. It Figure2-14. Rotational effects.

2-19
FM 6-40

the target. This is because the projectile tends b. Drift is defined as the departure of the pro-
to travel in the plane of the great circle con- jectile from standard direction because of the
taining the gun and target at the time of firing. combined action of air resistance, projectile spin,
Because of the rotation of the earth, this great and gravity. In order to fully understand the
circle plane is continuously changing with re- forces that cause drift, it is necessary to under-
spect to its original position. As viewed from stand the angle of yaw, which is that angle be-
above, the great circle containing the gun and tween the direction of motion of the projectile
target would appear to be turning with respect and the axis of the projectile. The direction of
to the great circle followed by the projectile. An this angle is constantly changing in a spinning
additional latitudinal effect is pictured in T, projectile-right, down, left, and up. This initial
figure 2-15. When the latitude is other than the yaw is at a maximum near the muzzle and
Equator, the projectile is pulled out of its origi- gradually subsides as the projectile stabilizes.
nal vertical plane by the force of gravity, which The atmosphere offers greater resistance to a
operates from the center of the earth but is not yawing projectile; therefore, it is fundamental
perpendicular to the axis of the earth. in the design of projectiles that yaw be kept to
a minimum and be quickly damped out in flight.
2-26. Deflection Effects
a. Lateral jump is caused by a slight lateral At the summit, where the descending branch of
and rotational movement of the tube at the in- the trajectory begins, summital yaw is intro-
duced and the effect on the projectile is to keep
stant of firing. It has the effect of a small error in
deflection. The effect is ignored, since it is small the nose pointed slightly toward the direction of
and varies from round to round. the spin. Therefore, since artillery projectiles
have a clockwise spin, they drift to the right
in the descending branch of the trajectory. The
magnitude of drift (expressed at lateral distance
on the ground) depends on the time of flight
and rotational speed of the projectile and the
T
curvature of the trajectory.
c. Crosswind is that component of the ballistic
G wind blowing across the direction of fire. Cross-
wind tends to carry the projectile with it and
causes a deviation from the direction of fire.
However, the lateral deviation of the projectile
is not as great as the movement of the air caus-
ing it. Wind component tables simplify the reduc-
© © tion of a ballistic wind into its two components
with respect to the direction of fire.
d. The effects on deflection from the rotation
of the earth are described in paragraph 2-25k
(3) and illustrated in figure 2-15.
Earth center
2-27. Time of Flight
Those nonstandard conditions which affect range
also affect time of flight. The fuze settings for
current time fuzes, although approximating time
of flight, are not interchangeable with the time
Figure 2-15. Latitudinal effect. of flight.

Section IV. DISPERSION AND PROBABILITY

2-28. General the natural phenomenon of chance is called dis-

a. If a number of rounds of the same caliber persion. The array of the bursts on the ground is
and same lot of ammunition are fired from the the dispersion pattern.
same weapon with the same settings in quadrant b. The points of impact of the projectiles will
elevation and deflection, the rounds will not fall be scattered both laterally (deflection) and in
at a single point but will be scattered in a pat- depth (range). Dispersion is the result of minor
tern of bursts. In discussions of artillery fires, variations of many elements from round to round

2-20
 FM 6-40

and must not be confused with variations in point over. Some of these rounds are more in error
O of impact caused by mistakes or constant errors.
Mistakes can be eliminated and constant errors
than others. If the distance from the mean point
of impact to line AA is a measure of error, it is
compensated for. Those inherent errors which clear that half of the rounds over manifest a
are caused in part by- greater error and half of the rounds over mani-
(1) Conditions in the bore. Muzzle velocity fest a lesser error. The distance from the mean
is affected by minor variations in weight, mois- point of impact to line AA thus becomes a con-
ture content, and temperature of the propelling venient unit of measure. This distance is called
charge; by variations in the arrangement of the one probable error (PE). The most concise de-
powder grains; by differences in the ignition of finition of a probable error is that it is the error
the charge; by differences in the weight of the which is exceeded as often as it is not exceeded.
projectile and in the form of the rotating bands; Probable error is also manifested by the rounds
by variations in ramming; and by variations in which fell short of the mean point of impact.
the temperature of the bore from round to round.
Variations in the bourrelet and rotating band 2-31. Dispersion Pattern
may cause inaccurate centering of the projectile In a normal burst pattern the number of rounds
and, hence, inaccurate flight. short of the mean point of impact will be the
(2) Conditions in the carriage. Direction same as the number of rounds over the mean
and elevation are affected by play (looseness) in point of impact. The probable error will be the
the mechanisms of the carriage, by physical limi- same in both cases.
tations on precision in setting scales, and by a. It is a coincidence of nature that for any
nonuniform reaction to firing stresses. normal distribution (such as the artillery dis-
(3) Conditions during flight. Air resistance persion pattern) a distance of 4 probable errors
is affected by differences in weight, velocity, on either side of the mean point of impact will
and form of projectile and by changes in wind, include virtually all the rounds in the pattern.
air density, and air temperature from round to This is not precisely true, since a very small
round. fraction of the rounds (approximately 7 out of
2-29. Mean Point of Impact 1,000) will fall outside 4 probable errors on either
For any large number of rounds fired, it is pos- side of the mean point of impact, but it is true
sible to draw a diagram showing a line perpendi- for all practical purposes.
cular to the line of fire that will divide the points
of impact into two equal groups. Half of the b. The total pattern of a large number of
rounds considered will be beyond the line, or bursts is roughly elliptical (fig 2-17). However,
over, when considered from the weapon; half since 4 probable errors on either side of the mean
will be inside the line, or short, when considered point of impact (in range and deflection) will
from the weapon. For this same group of rounds, encompass virtually all rounds, a rectangle nor-
the diagram will also show a line parallel to the mally is drawn to include the full distribution
line of fire that will divide the round into two of the rounds. This rectangle is the 100-percent
equal groups. Half of the rounds will fall to rectangle (fig 2-18).
the right of the line; half will fall to the left 2-32. Dispersion Scale
of the line. The first line, perpendicular to the If 1 probable error is used as the unit of measure-
line of fire, represents the mean range; the ment to divide the dispersion rectangle evenly
second line, parallel to the line of fire, represents into eight zones in range, the percentage of
the mean deflection. The intersection of the two rounds falling in each zone will be as indicated
lines is the mean point of impact (MPJ) (fig in figure 2-18. By definition of probable error,
2-16). the 50 percent of rounds nearest the mean range
2-30. Probable Error line (line through the mean point of impact)
Consider for a moment only the rounds that have fall within 1 probable error. The other percent-
fallen over the mean point of impact. At some ages have been found to be true by experiment.
point along the line of fire beyond the mean Again, what is true in range will be true also

,the
point of impact, a second line perpendicular to
line of fire can be drawn that will divide
the overs into two equal parts (line AA, fig 2-
in deflection. If range dispersion zones and de-
flection dispersion zones are both considered, a
set of small rectangles is created. The percent-
17). All the rounds beyond the mean point of ages of the rounds falling in each rectangle are
impact manifest an error in range-they are all shown in figure 2-19.

2-21
FM 6-40
Mean Point of impact

Left
Short Over
00
00 0
1/.2 0 00 0 0
0 0
o
** * 0
• ••0 00 O/ 00 ••
/ o~
Oo o * 0 O @0
* 0 0• * •e * 0 00
Line of fire
:1:
~. 0. 0 0
0 • o00 00. 0
0 * 0
0 0 * 00 0
O
0 0 •
142 ° 0
0 0
0

Right
-< 1/2 1/2

Figure 2-16. Dispersion.

Mean point of impact

A

0
* 0
•0 0
.O 0 0
0 Line of fire
0O 0 .0 O
0
•'O O 0
O0 0 0
00

A
One probable error

Figure 2-17. Range probable error.

2-33. Normal Probability Curve curve enclosed by vertical lines cutting the base
a. The dispersion of artillery projectiles fol- line and the curve represents the probability of
lows the laws of probability and normal distribu- the occurrence of an error within the magnitudes
tion. The pattern of bursts on the ground can represented by the ends of the base line segment
be graphed with a normal probability curve, a considered. In figure 2-20 the shaded area re-
common method of representing the probability presents the number of rounds falling over and
of the occurrence of an error of any given mag- within 1 probable error of the mean point of
nitude in a series of samples. impact, which is 25 percent.
b. Distances of points on the horizontal (base) c. The curve (fig 2-20) expresses the following
line (fig 2-20) measured to the right and left facts:
of the center represent errors in excess (over) (1) In a large number of samples, errors in
or in deficiency (short). The area under the excess and errors in deficiency are equally fre-

2-22
 FM 6-40

Mean point of impact

Line of fire

Figure 2-18. The 100-percent rectangle.

charge 5 green bag at a range of 6,000 meters,

the fork is 3 mils.
.02 .07 .16 .25 .25 .16 .07 .02 2-36. Deflection Probable Error
.02 .0004 .00 14 .0032 00501 0050 0032 .0014 0004 The value of the probable error in deflection
.07 .0014 ..0049 .0112 .01751 0175 .0112 .0049 .0014 (PED) is given in the firing tables. For cannons,
.16 .0032 .0112 .0256 .04001.0400 .0256 .0112 .0032 the deflection probable error is considerably
.25 0050 0175 .0400 .06251.0625 .0400 .0175 .0050 smaller than the range probable error.
.25 0050 .0175 .0400 .062510625 .0400 .0175 .0050 2-37. Vertical Probable Error
.16 0032 .0112 .0256 .04001.0400 0256 .0112 .0032 The range probable error given in the firing
.07 0014 .0049 .0112 .0175 .0175 0112 .0049 .0014 tables is based on firing on a horizontal plane. If
.02 .0004 .0014 .0032 .0050 .0050 .0032 .0014 .0004 the target is a vertical surface (or even a steep
incline), the probable error for range will be
different. If the target is truly vertical, the prob-
able error against the target surface is equal to
Figure 2-19. Dispersionrectangle. the range probable error divided by the cotan-
gent-of the angle of fall (fig 2-21). Precise
quent (probable), as shown by the symmetry
computation of the size of the probable error
of the curve.
against a vertical or steep surface is seldom
(2) The errors are not uniformly distri-
made. It suffices to recognize that the vertical
buted. The smaller errors occur more frequently
dispersion is a function of the range dispersion,
than the larger errors, as shown by the greater
height of the curve in the middle. the angle of fall, and the angle of the target
surface with respect to the horizontal. Except in
2-34. Range Probable Error high-angle fire, the vertical probable error
The approximate value of the probable error in (PE.) will normally be smaller than the range
range (PER) is shown in the firing tables and probable error.
can be taken as an index of the precision of the
piece. Firing table values for probable errors are 2-38. Airburst Probable Error
based on the firing of specific ammunition under a. Time to Burst Probable Error.The value of
controlled conditions. The actual round-to-round probable error in time to burst (PETB) is shown
probable error experienced in the field will nor- in the firing tables and can be taken as the
mally be larger. weighted average (root mean square) of the pre-
cision of the timing mechanism of the fuze and
2-35. Fork the actual time of flight of the projectile.
Fork is the term used to express the change in b. Height of Burst Probable Error. When the
elevation in mils necessary to move the mean projectile is fuzed to burst in the air, the prob-
point of impact 4 range probable errors. The able error in height of burst (PE.B) is the
value of the fork is given in the firing tables. For vertical component of 1 time to burst probable
example, for a 155-mm howitzer (M109) firing error times velocity. Values of the height of

2-23
FM 6-40

nge probability
Curve

j6I
25%
l6% I
16%

(1 probable error in range)

Figure 2-20. Areas under the normal probability curve.

COTANGENT 1 PER ASSUME THAT TERMINAL END OF
1 PEH TRAJECTORY IS A STRAIGHT LINE

THEREFORE'

1 EE
1 PEH=COTANGENT
[ANGLE OF FALL
1 VERTICAL PROBABLE
ERROR (PEH)

1 RANGE PROBABLE ERROR (PER}

Figure 2-21. Vertical dispersion.

burst probable error for a particular time fuze can be estimated by observing and analyzing re-
are given in the firing tables. Height of burst sults obtained from firing over a given terrain.
probable error for VT fuze cannot be predicted
because the height of burst varies with the type c. Range to Burst Probable Error. When the
of terrain over which the projectile is passing. projectile is fuzed to burst in the air, the total
The height of burst probable error for fuze VT probable error in range to burst (PERB) is 1

2-24
 FM 6-40

time to burst probable error times the horizontal 2-40. Probability Tables
component of velocity. The computation of probability is simplified by
2-39. Application of Probable Errors the use of a probability table (table 2-2).
a. Normal distribution is expressed in terms a. The entire area under the normal prob-
of probable errors because the distribution of ability curve is unity, or 100 percent. The ratio
bursts about the mean is the same, regardless of any particular portion of the area to the
of the magnitude of the probable error. Firing total area represents the probability that the
tables list probable errors for range, deflection, burst in question will occur within the interval
height of burst, and time to burst at each listed over which the particular area stands. For ex-
range. It is possible to express a given distance ample, consider that portion of the total area
in terms of probable errors and solve problems which stands over the interval from the mean to
by using the dispersion scale or probability ta- a distance of 1 probable error on one side of the
bles. mean. This is 25 percent of the total area under
the curve. Numbers in the body of the table are
b. To compute the probability of a round land- areas under the normal probability curve. The
ing within an error of a certain magnitude, re- arguments are distances, expressed in probable
duce the specified error to equivalent probable errors. In the first vertical column are distances,
errors in one direction along the dispersion expressed in probable errors to the nearest tenth;
scale and multiply the sum by 2. For example, a horizontally across the top of the table is the
155-mm howitzer (M109) has fired a number breakdown in hundredths of probable errors. En-
of rounds with charge 7 and the mean point of try into the table is similar to entry into a table
impact has been determined to be at 11,500 me- of logarithms. The total area under the prob-
ters. What is the probability that the next round ability curve is taken as one. Note that the maxi-
fired will fall within 60 meters of the mean point mum area defined in the body of the table is
of impact? 0.5000, or 50 percent, or /2. Therefore, the num-
Solution: bers in the body of the table actually represent
PER at 11,500 meters (charge 7) = 30 the probability that the event in question will
meters occur within various probable errors from the
Equivalent PER for 60 meters (60/30) = 2 mean and on one side only of the mean. Inter-
Percentage of rounds falling within 2 polation in the tables is an unnecessary refine-
PER = 2 (25% + 16%) = 82% (fig ment. A complete set of probabilities for one side
2-18) of the mean is shown in table 2-2.

Table 2-2. Normal ProbabilityTable, Areas of the Normal ProbabilityCurve

(t is expressed in probable errors.)

0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
0.0 0.0000 0.0027 0.0054 0.0081 0.0108 0.0135 0.0162 0.0189 0.0216 0.0243
0.1 .0269 .0296 .0323 .0350 .0377 .0404 .0431 .0457 .0484 .0511
0.2 .0538 .0565 .0591 .0618 .0645 .0672 .0699 .0725 .0752 .0778
0.3 .0804 .0830 .0856 .0882 .0908 .0934 .0960 .0986 .1012 .1038
0.4 .1064 .1089 .1115 .1140 .1166 .1191 .1217 .1242 .1268 .1293
0.5 .1319 .1344 .1370 .1395 .1421 .1446 .1472 .1497 .1522 .1547
0.6 .1572 .1597 .1622 .1647 .1671 .1695 .1719 .1743 .1767 .1791
0.7 .1815 .1839 .1863 .1887 .1911 .1935 .1959 .1983 .2007 .2031
0.8 .2054 .2077 .2100 .2123 .2146 .2169 .2192 .2214 .2236 .2258
0.9 .2280 .2302 .2324 .2346 .2368 .2390 .2412 .2434 .2456 .2478
1.0 .2500 .2521 .2542 .2563 .2584 .2605 .2626 .2647 .2668 .2689
1.1 .2709 .2730 .2750 .2770 .2790 .2810 .2830 .2850 .2869 .2889
1.2 .2908 .2927 .2946 .2965 .2984 .3003 .3022 .3041 .3060 .3078
1.3 .3097 .3115 .3133 .3151 .3169 .3187 .3205 .3223 .3240 .3258
1.4 .3275 .3292 .3309 .3326 .3343 .3360 .3377 .3393 .3410 .3426
1.5 .3442 .3458 .3474 .3490 .3506 .3521 .3537 .3552 .3567 .3582
1.6 .3597 .3612 .3627 .3642 .3657 .3671 .3686 .3700 .3714 .3728
1.7 .3742 .3756 .3770 .3784 .3798 .3811 .3825 .3838 .3851 .3864
1.8 .3877 .3890 .3903 .3915 .3928 .3940 .3952 .3964 .3976 .3988
1.9 .4000 .4012 .4024 .4035 .4047 .4058 .4069 .4080 .4091 .4102
2.0 .4113 .4124 .4135 .4146 .4156 .4167 .4177 .4187 .4197 .4207
2.1 .4217 .4227 .4237 .4246 .4256 .4265 .4274 .4283 .4292 .4301

2-25
FM 6-40

7 ~ -r T 7 7 r 7
0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
.4 . 4. 4. .4 4- + 4- i
--- T-
.4310 .4319 .4328 .4336 .4345 .4353 .4361 .4369 .4377 .4385
2.2
2.3 .4393 .4401 .4409 .4417 .4425 .4433 .4441 .4448 .4456 .4463
2.4 .4470 .4477 .4484 .4491 .4498 .4505 .4512 .4519 .4526 .4533
2.5 .4540 .4547 .4553 .4560 .4566 .4572 .4578 .4584 .4590 .4596
2.6 .4602 .4608 .4614 .4620 .4625 .4630 .4636 .4641 .4646 .4651
2.7 .4657 .4662 .4667 .4672 .4677 .4682 .4687 .4692 .4697 .4701
2.8 .4705 .4710 .4714 .4718 .4722 .4727 .4731 .4735 .4739 .4743
2.9 .4748 .4752 .4756 .4760 .4764 .4768 .4772 .4776 .4780 .4783
3.0 .4787 .4790 .4793 .4796 .4800 .4803 .4806 .4809 .4812 .4815
3.1 .4818 .4821 .4824 .4827 .4830 .4833 .4826 .4839 .4842 .4845
3.2 .4848 .4851 .4853 .4855 .4857 .4859 .4862 .4864 .4866 .4868
3.3 .4870 .4873 .4875 .4877 .4879 .4881 .4883 .4885 .4886 .4888
3.4 .4890 .4892 .4893 .4895 .4897 .4899 .4901 .4902 .4904 .4906
3.5 .4908 .4909 .4911 .4913 .4915 .4916 .4917 .4919 .4921 .4922
3.6 .4923 .4924 .4926 .4927 .4928 .4929 .4931 .4933 .4934 .4935
3.7 .4936 .4938 .4939 .4940 .4941 .4942 .4944 .4945 .4946 .4947
3.8 .4948 .4949 .4950 .4951 .4952 .4953 .4953 .4954 .4955 .4956
3.9 .4957 .4958 .4959 .4960 .4960 .4961 .4962 .4963 .4964 .4965
4.0 .4965 .4966 .4967 .4967 .4968 .4969 .4969 .4970 .4971 .4972
4.1 .4972 .4973 .4973 .4974 .4974 .4975 .4975 .4976 .4976 .4977
4.2 .4978 .4978 .4979 .4979 .4980 .4980 .4980 .4981 .4981 .4981
4.3 .4982 .4982 .4982 .4983 .4983 .4983 .4983 .4984 .4984 .4985
4.4 .4985 .4985 .4986 .4986 .4986 .4987 .4987 .4987 .4988 .4988
4.5 .4988 .4989 .4989 .4989 .4989 .4990 .4990 .4990 .4990 .4991
4.6 .4991 .4991 .4991 .4991 .4992 .4992 .4992 .4992 .4992 .4992
4.7 .4993 .4993 .4993 .4993 .4993 .4993 .4994 .4994 .4994 .4994
4.8 .4994 .4994 .4994 .4995 .4995 .4995 .4995 .4995 .4995 .4995
4.9 .4995 .4996 .4996 .4996 .4996 .4996 .4996 .4996 .4996 .4996
5.0 .4996 .4996 .4997 .4997 .4997 .4997 .4997 .4997 .4997 .4997
5.1 .4997 .4997 .4997 .4997 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998
5.2 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998
5.3 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4998 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999
5.4 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999
5.5 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999
5.6 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999
5.7 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999 .4999
5.8 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000
5.9 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000 .5000
__
_ _ __-- . _ __ _ _.. _I_ _ _

b. The example in paragraph 2-39b can be that a burst will be closer to the ground than
solved by the use of the probability table as 100 meters?
follows: Solution:
Specified error (meters) = 350 - 100 =
Equivalent PER's for 60 meters --- 2.0 250; 250 meters below the mean is
Value from table 2-2-----------0.4113 100 meters above ground.
Probability (0.4113 x 2) 82.26 percent Error in PEHB = 250/75 = 3.33
The answer differs slightly from that obtained From table 2-2, 3.33 corresponds to
by use of the dispersion scale because probability 0.4877, which is the probability that
tables are to an accuracy of four decimal places the burst will be between the mean
and are entered with probable error expressed and 100 meters above the ground.
to the hundredth, whereas the dispersion scale Since the total probability for a burst
is to an accuracy of only two decimal places and being below the mean is 0.5000, then
is entered with whole probable errors. Probabil- the probability of a burst being less
ity tables provide the more accurate answer. than 100 meters above the ground,
c. In some problems, the probability is re- (that is, more than 250 meters below
quired for only one side of the mean, in which the mean) is 0.5000 - 0.4877 = 1.23
case the multiplication by 2 is omitted. For ex- percent.
ample, the mean height of burst is 350 meters By extension, the probability that the burst will
above the ground and the height of burst prob- occur at either less than 100 meters above the
able error is 75 meters. What is the probability ground (250 below the mean) or more than 600
2-26
 FM 6-40

meters above the ground (250 above the mean) PE, or 1.52 PE beyond the mean point of impact).
is 1.23 percent + 1.23 percent = 2.46 percent. Any By definition, 50 percent of the rounds fell short
combination of height limitations above the of the mean point of impact; therefore, 33.33
ground can be similarly solved. The maximum (83.33 - 50.00) percent of the rounds fell be-
and minimum limits specified need not reduce tween the mean point of impact and the target.
the same error from the mean as in the fore- In the probability tables, 0.3333 represents 1.43
going example. Each is solved independently, and probable errors, to the nearest hundredth, which
the probabilities are added. is a more accurate estimate of the distance of the
d. It is emphasized that the probability tables target from the mean point of impact. Use of the
give the probability of not exceeding a certain preponderance formula described in chapter 19
error or, by subtraction, the probability of mak- indicates the target to be 1.33 probable errors
ing an error equal to or less than a specified error. beyond the mean point of impact.
The probability tables cannot give the probability
of making a particular error. Though there is 5 shorts - 1 over x fork = % fork = 1.33 PE.
little application for the computation in artillery, 2x6
a computation could be made to give the proba- Probability tables provide the most accurate
bility of making an error falling within a pre- answer; however, the preponderance formula is
scribed range. By combining some of the com- used because of its simplicity and because the
putations already discussed, it would be relatively small number of rounds considered (six) does
simple to determine the probability of making an not warrant striving for the extra theoretical
error greater than 100 meters or less than 100 precision of the probability table.
meters.
2-42. Single Shot Hit Probability and Assur-
e. The major reason for the difference in fig-
ures derived from the dispersion scale and those ance
Single shot hit probability (SSHP) is the pro-
from the probability table is that linear inter-
bability of hitting a target or an area of finite
polation is used with the dispersion scale when
dimensions with any one round.
the conversion of a distance to probable errors
a. The probability of a round hitting in any
results in a fractional value. The assumption that
one of the areas bounded by 1 range probable
the distribution of bursts is uniform within the
error and 1 deflection probable error is the prod-
limits of 1 probable error is false.
uct of the probability of not exceeding that
2-41. Most Probable Position of the Mean range error and the probability of not exceeding
Point of Impact that deflection error. This basic principle is ap-
Thus far, only the probability of an outcome of a plied in computing the single shot hit pro-
future event has been considered. This is not al- bability. Before the probability tables can be
ways the problem. For example, the observer's used, the specified error must be reduced to equi-
spottings in the fire-for-effect phase of a reg- valent probable error.
istration are the outcome of the rounds fired, but b. Computation of single shot hit probability
they do not in themselves define the relative is based on the assumption that the mean point
location of the mean point of impact and of impact is adjusted to the exact center of the
target which yielded the spottings. The problem target or area. This means, for example, that
is to find the most probable relative locations. the limit of error is 20 meters if the target is
a. There are simple methods of determining 40 meters deep (fig 2-22). The same principle
the most probable location of the target with is true for deflection. Therefore, in order to re-
respect to the mean point of impact. These meth- duce target dimensions to equivalent probable
ods are based on, first, the fact that the definite errors, it is first necessary to determine the limit
range spottings used are of two outcomes only-- of error for range (i.e., 1/2 that target dimen-
either over or short--and, second, the assumption sion parallel to the GT line) and for deflection
that the small number or rounds observed fol- (i.e., 1/2 that target dimension perpendicular to
lows normal distribution exactly. the GT line). Then, the limits of error are di-
b. For example, if five shorts and one over are vided by the respective firing table probable er-
obtained, % or 83.33 percent, of the rounds fell rors for the weapon, charge, and range being used.
short of the target. According to the dispersion The quotient (t) is the limit of the error expres-
scale, the target must be 1.52 probable errors sed in probable errors and is the argument for
beyond the mean point of impact (1 PE +- 8.33- entering the probability tables to determine the
range probability and the deflection probability.

2-27
 FM 6=40

Since the range probability determined is for

only half the dimension (fig 2-22), it must be
multiplied by 2 to determine the SSHP for range
(SSHPR). The same is true for deflection (SS-
HPD). The SSHP for the entire target is the
product of SSHPR times SSHPD.

I0
meten

4 40 meters

Figure 2-22. Single shot hit probability.

c. For example, the target is a bridge 10 me-

ters by 40 meters with the long axis parallel tp
the direction of fire. Range to target is 9,870
meters. The mean point of impact is adjusted on e is the angle of bias
the center of the target by use of precision fire
techniques. After the mean point of impact has Figure 2-23. Bias target.
been correctly adjusted on the center of the tar-
get, the single shot hit-probability, for an M109 b. The tabulation below can be used to approx-
howitzer, firing charge 7, is determined as fol- imate the effective dimensions. Greater accuracy
lows: is not warranted in view of the approximate di-
mensions of the target itself and the approxima-
PER = 27 meters tion of the angle of bias. The angle of bias is
PEp = 4 meters the smaller angle measured between the long axis
Range t (40) 0.74 -
of the target and the direction of fire.
27
Range probability = (0.1911) x 2 = 0.3822 c. For example, the target is a bridge 8 meters
Deflection t 1/(10) = 1.25 by 40 meters with the long axis at an 800-mil
4 angle to the direction of fire. The range is 11,040
Deflection probability = (0.3003) X 2 = 0.6006 meters. After the mean point of impact has been
SSHP = (0.3822) (0.6006) = 22.95 percent adjusted to the center of the target, the single
shot hit probability for a 155-mm howitzer M109
2-43. Single Shot Hit Probability for Bias Tar-
firing charge 7 is determined as follows:
gets
a. A target is said to be biased when its spe- Effective depth = 1.41 (from b above) x
cified dimensions are neither parallel to nor at 8 meters = 11.28 (use 11)
right angles to the direction of fire. The only PER = 29 meters
change in procedure required is that the specified Range t 1/2 (11) = 11 = 0.19
dimensions of the target must first be converted 29 58
to an effective depth and width to fit the disper- Range probability = (0.0511) X 2 = 0.1022
sion pattern with respect to the GT line. Once the Effective width = 0.71 (from b above) x
effective depth and width are known, the single 40 meters = 28.40 (use 28)
shot hit probability is computed as discussed in PED = 4 meters
paragraph 2-42. Figure 2-23 illustrates a bias
target. Deflection t 1/(28)
4 = 3.50
Angle of bias between Effective depth Effective width
0 and 400 mils ---------------------------- Actual length----------------------------Actual width
401 and 650 mils--------------------------2 x actual width-------------------------0.5 X actual length
651 and 950 mils--------------------------1.41 X actual width----------------------0.71 X actual length
951 and 1,200 mils------------------------1.15 X actual width-----------------------0.87 X actual length
1,201 and 1,600 mils----------------------Actual width-----------------------------Actual length

2-28
 FM 6-40

Deflection probability = (0.4908) X 2 = bility and assurance levels are usually less than
0.9816 those derived from the method in a through c
SSHP = (0.1022) (0.9816) = 10.03 percent above, because the mean point of impact usually
is not at the center of the target as assumed.
2-44. Conversion of a Circular Target to an For example, an apparent mean point of impact
Equivalent Square located by the mean of 12 rounds is more accurate
a. Many targets are described as circular. In
than one located by the mean of only 6 rounds.
order to compute single shot hit probability for a
An estimate of the probable error of the mean
circular target, it is necessary to convert the
target to a square of the same area. This conver- point of impact as a function of the number of
sion is necessary because the dispersion pattern rounds from which it was determined can be
found by multiplying the firing table probable
of cannons is elliptical and can be reasonably de-
fined by a rectangle. error by the appropriate factor shown below.
Number
b. A circular shape is converted to a square of rounds Factor
shape by multiplying the radius of the circle by 2 ---------------------------------------- 0.7
1.7725 (1.7725 is the square root of -r). The prod- 4 ---------------------------------------- 0.5
uct is the length of a side of a square which has 6 ---------------------------------------- 0.4
8 ---------------------------------------- 0.4
an area equal to the area of the original circle. 0.3
10 ------------------------------------
12 -------------------------- -0.3
2-45. Assurance and Assurance Graphs 14 0.3
Assurance is a broad term associated with the 16 -. 3
probability of hitting a target with any given 18 ---------- 0.2
number of rounds, assuming a constant single 20 ---------------------------------------- 0.2
shot hit probability. e. In the example shown in paragraph 2-42c
a. The assurance formulas for a specified num- for the 155-mm howitzer, if the adjusted data of
ber of hits may be graphed as shown in figures the mean point of impact were based on six
2-24 through 2-26. The only computation neces- rounds, then the range probable error of the mean
sary is that for the single shot hit probability. point of impact at that time would be 11 meters
Once that is known, the graph can be used for (0.40 x 27 = 10.80). This has the effect in
rapidly determining either the assurance ob- SSHP computations of an apparent increase in
tainable from firing a specified number of rounds the weapon probable error. The magnitude of the
(N) or the number of rounds required for a apparent weapon probable error is approximate-
desired assurance. ly equal to the square root of the sum of the
b. The number of rounds is indicated along squares of the weapon probable error and the
the bottom of the graph, the single shot hit pro- mean point of impact probable error or, in this
bability is indicated on either side of the graph, case, V (27)2 + (11)2 equals 29 meters to the
and the assurance is indicated by the curves nearest meter. Hence, 29 meters would be used
drawn within the graph. When the assurance in the place of 27 meters in the computation of
graph is used, the intersection of the two known
single shot hit probability. If the target is to be
elements is found and then the desired element is
attacked without adjustment, the apparent weap-
read opposite this intersection. Interpolation be- on probable error is assumed to be twice the
tween numbered graduations is permissible.
weapon probable error. The deflection probable
c. For example, what is the assurance of get-
error can be found in a similar manner although
ting at least one hit when 20 rounds are fired the change normally will not be significant. The
and the single shot hit probability is 0.045? method outlined above is valid for only one round
(Answer: 0.60, fig 2-24). What is the number of in fire for effect. Thus, it is not to be used with
rounds required for at least two hits when the the assurance graphs.
single shot hit probability is 0.08 and the desired
assurance is 0.70. (Answer: 30 rounds, fig 2-25.) 2-46. Developed Probable Error
d. Although it is impossible to be certain of Firing tables indicate the probable errors of a
the number of rounds needed to hit or destroy a cannon in various dimensions (range, deflection,
target, use of the graphs will provide an approxi- height of burst, and time to burst). The use of
mation. Probability (assurance) is a substitute round-to-round data from mean-point-of-impact
for fact, and, until the fact is actually known, registrations and fall-of-shot calibrations will
probability provides the best guide as to what to provide a positive check on the performance of
expect. Unfortunately, the single shot hit proba- cannons and crews. The developed probable error

2-29
FM 6-40

.7 .7

.6 .6

.5 .5

.4
.4

.3
.3

.1)
Ur)

.2 .2

.15 .15

.I

.05
.05 E
I
Tl-i-4-4-Ll I I .04
.04 ii i i
l-fi
lkl ifNil
.03 1N, 1 1 1
.03
.02 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 11 1 11
.02
.01 .01
nOn IFT-
"ROUNDS 10 20 30 40 50 60
Figue x-24. Assurance of at least one hit for "N" rounds
when single shot hit probabilityis known.
w Factor
can be approximated by multiplying the maxi-
9 ----------------------------------------- 0.23
mum dispersion observed (longest range minus
10 -0.22
shortest range) in a group of rounds by the ap- 11 0.21
propriate factor from the following tabulations 12 - ------------- 0.21
(n is the number of rounds in the group).
For example: the maximum observed range dis-
n Factor
persion in a group of eight rounds is 150 meters.
2 -0.60
3 - -0.39
The approximate developed range probable error
4 _-0.33 is 36 meters to the nearest meter (0.24 X 150
5 -------------------------------------- 0.29 = 36.0).
6 - - --- -- -- 0.27
7 -- - - 0.25 2-47. Circular Error Probable (CEP)
8 -- 0.24 a. In this manual, one CEP represents the

2-30
 FM 6-40

'A
.4

.v

0-
U)_
U)

.L- I
.2

.1

.0 5 ... ......-..
....".. .05

0
ROUNDSI0 20 30 40 50 60 70
Figure 2-25. Assurance of at least two hits for "N"
rounds when single shot hit probabilityis known.

radius of a circle which will contain 50 percent b. For example, assume that in order to
of all battery volley mean points of impact, achieve 40 percent coverage of a circular target
where the mean of the distribution pattern re- area, the center of the effects pattern must fall
presents target center. Figure 2-27 is a graphical within 100 meters of the center of the target.
representation of normal circular distribution Further, assume that a weapon system has a 1-
about the intended center of impact for a large CEP system error of 50 meters due to K-transfer
number of battery volleys. A 2-CEP circle, which fire direction procedures. Under the stated condi-
is twice the radius of a 1-CEP circle, includes tions, the probability of the next effects pattern
approximately 94 percent of the volleys fired. A covering at least 40 percent of the target is 0.937.
4-CEP circle contains essentially all battery vol- 1 CEP = 50 meters
leys fired. Some volleys, though very few, may 2 CEP = 100 meters.
fall outside the 4-CEP circle. 2 CEP = 0.937 (probability).

2-31
FM 6-40

.7 7

.6 .6

.5 ,5

.4 ,1

.3 .3
a-
r
U)
U)
.2
.2

.1

.05 05

ROUNDS I0 20 30 40 50 60 70
Figure 2-26. Assurance of at least three hits for "N"
rounds when single shot probability is known.

c. Computation of circular error probabilities d. If a circle is drawn about a distribution

can be facilitated by using table 2-3. For ex- mean, using any radius selected at random, the
ample, it is assumed that in order for a certain number of battery volley mean points of impact
weapon system to achieve a required coverage enclosed by the circle divided by the total volleys
the center of the volley effects pattern must fall fired is the probability that the next battery
within 1.6-CEP of the center of the target. From volley mean point of impact will land within the
the table it can be determined that there is a circle.
0.83 probability that the next volley mean point
of impact will fall within 1.6-CEP of target cen-
ter.

2-32
 FM 6-40

CIRCULAR PATTERN-NORMAL DISTRIBUTION

4 CEP
99.99+%

Figure 2-27. Circulardistribution pattern.

Table 2-3. Volumes Under the Normal CircularProbabilitySurface

-A 1 . 1, . In
... ... ..
r-1[ -- .VV
i
0.U1 0.02 0.08 1 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
i -1 1. .4. .4. _ 1
i 0.08 0.09
0.0 T, I I --- T I
0.0000 0.0001 0.0003 0.0006 0.0011 0.0017 0.0025 0.0034 0.0044 0.0055
0.1 .0068 .0083 .0099 .0116 .0134 .0154 .0175 .0198 .0222 .0247
0.2 .0273 .0301 .0330 .0360 .0391 .0424 .0458 .0493 .0529 .0566
0.3 .0604 .0644 .0685 .0727 .0770 .0814 .0859 .0905 .0952 .1000
0.4 .1050 .1100 .1151 .1203 .1256 .1310 .1365 .1420 .1476 .1533
0.5 .1591 .1650 .1709 .1769 .1830 .1892 .1954 .2017 .2080 .2144
0.6 .2208 .2273 .2339 .2405 .2472 .2539 .2606 .2674 .2742 .2810
0.7 .2879 .2949 .3019 .3089 .3159 .3229 .3299 .3370 .3441 .3512
0.8 .3583 .3654 .3726 .3797 .3869 .3940 .4011 .4082 .4154 .4225
0.9 .4296 .4367 .4438 .4509 .4580 .4651 .4721 .4791 .4861 .4931
1.0 .5000 .5069 .5138 .5207 .5275 .5343 .5411 .5478 .5545 .5611
1.1 .5677 .5743 .5808 .5873 .5938 .6002 .6065 .6128 .6191 .6253
1.2 .6314 .6375 .6436 .6496 .6555 .6614 .6673 .6731 .6788 .6845
1.3 .6901 .6956 .7011 .7066 .7120 .7173 .7225 .7277 .7329 .7380
1.4 .7430 .7479 .7528 .7576 .7624 .7671 .7718 .7764 .7809 .7854
1.5 .7898 .7941 .7984 .8026 .8068 .8109 .8149 .8189 .8228 .8266
1.6 .8304 .8341 .8378 .8414 .8449 .8484 .8519 .8553 .8586 .8619
1.7 .8651 .8682 .8713 .8744 .8774 .8803 .8832 .8860 .8888 .8915
1.8 .8942 .8968 .8993 .9018 .9043 .9067 .9091 .9114 .9137 .9159
1.9 .9181 .9202 .9223 .9244 .9264 .9284 .9303 .9322 .9340 .9358
2.0 .9375 .9392 .9409 .9425 .9441 .9457 .9472 .9487 .9502 .9516
2.1 .9530 .9543 .9556 .9569 .9582 .9594 .9606 .9618 .9629 .9640
2.2 .9651 .9662 .9672 .9682 .9692 .9701 .9710 .9719 .9728 .9737
2.3 .9745 .9753 .9761 .9769 .9776 .9783 ,9790 .9797 .9804 .9810
.9849
2.4 .9816 .9822 .9828 .9834 .9839 .9844 .9859 .9864
.9854
2.5 .9869 .9874 .9878 .9882 .9886 .9890 .9894 .9898 .9902 .9905
2.6 .9908 .9911 .9914 .9917 .9920 .9923 .9926 .9932 .9935
.9929
2.7 .9937 .9939 .9941 .9943 .9945 .9947 .9949 .9951 .9953 .9954
2.8 .9956 .9958 .9960 .9961 .9963 .9964 .9966 .9967 .9968 .9969
2.9 .9971 .9972 .9973 .9974 .9975 .9976 .9977 .9978 .9979 .9980
3.0 .9981 .9981 .9982 .9982 .9983 .9984 .9984 .9985 .9985 .9986

2-33
FM 6-40

r* 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09

3.1 ------. 9987 .9988 .9988 .9989 .9989 .9990 .9990 .9991 .9991 .9992
3.2 ------. 9992 .9992 .9992 .9993 .9993 .9993 .9993 .9994 .9994 .9994
3.3 ------. 9995 .9995 .9995 .9995 .9995 .9996 .9996 .9996 .9996 .9997
3.4 ------. 9997 .9997 .9997 .9997 .9997 .9997 .9998 .9998 .9998 .9998
3.5 ------. 9998 .9998 .9998 .9998 .9998 .9998 .9998 .9999 .9999 .9999
3.6 -------. 9999 .9999 .9999 .9999 .9999 .9999 .9999 .9999 .9999 .9999
3.7 ------. 9999 .9999 .9999 .9999 .9999 .9.9 999 .9999 1.0000 1.0000

*Expressed in circular errors probable.

2-34
 FM 6-40

PART TWO

FIRING BATTERY
CHAPTER 3
FIRING BATTERY, GENERAL

3-1. Introduction synonyms of grid azimuth. The command to the

The firing battery is that component of the gun- executive officer to indicate the grid azimuth of
nery team that executes the fire commands gen- the target is AZIMUTH (so much). The for-
erated at the fire direction center. The firing bat- ward observer announces the grid azimuth to his
tery consists of the firing battery headquarters, adjusting point as DIRECTION (so much).
the howitzer (gun) sections, and, in some units, f. Back-Azimuth. A back-azimuth is the re-
an ammunition section. Battery fire direction verse direction of an azimuth. The back-azimuth
personnel are assigned to the firing battery head- is equal to the azimuth plus or minus 3,200 mils,
quarters and maintain the charts necessary for whichever gives a result between 0 and 6,400
the processing of fire missions. Fire direction pro- mils.
cedures are discussed in part four.
g. Grid-Magnetic Angle. The grid-magnetic
angle is the smaller angle between grid
3-2. Map and Azimuth Terms north and magnetic north. It is measured east
The map and azimuth terms used in the firing or west from grid north and is the grid azimuth
battery are defined in a through i below. of magnetic north. This angle is shown in the
a. Grid Line. A grid line is a line extending marginal data of military maps.
north and south or east and west on a map, h. Magnetic Variation. Magnetic variation is
photomap, or grid sheet. A grid is composed of the smaller angle between true north and mag-
two intersecting sets of lines. The east-west lines netic north. This angle is measured as east or
are parallel to the central meridian and the north-
west of true north and is indicated in the mar-
south lines are perpendicular to the central meri- ginal data of maps. Since the magnetic varia-
dian of the grid zone in question. The parallel tion changes slightly from year to year, a cor-
lines are normally 1,000 meters apart and are rection factor (the annual magnetic change) al-
used to measure grid coordinates. so is shown in the marginal data of military
b. Magnetic North. Magnetic north (fig 3-1)
maps.
is the direction to the magnetic North Pole.
c. True North. True north (fig 3-1) is the di- i. Grid Convergence. Grid convergence is the
rection to the geographic North Pole. smaller angle between true north and grid north.
d. Grid North. Grid north (fig 3-1) is the Grid convergence is indicated in the marginal
north direction of the vertical grid lines on a mili- data of maps as east or west of the north.
tary map, photomap, or grid sheet. j. Declination constant. Declination constant
e. Azimuth. Azimuth is a direction expressed (fig 3-1) is a constant correction applied to the
as a horizontal clockwise angle measured from readings of a compass instrument which repre-
north. This angle may be a- sents the horizontal clockwise angle between
(1) Magnetic azimuth (fig 3-1), measured grid north and magnetic north as indicated by
from magnetic north. that instrument. The declination constant for
(2) True azimuth (fig 3-1), measured from each instrument is recorded and is applied to
true north. determine the azimuth of grid north from the
(3) Grid azimuth (fig 3-1), measured from measured azimuth of magnetic north. The con-
grid north. Grid azimuth is the azimuth normally stant for any instrument may vary in different
employed in the field artillery. The artilleryman localities and the constants of different instru-
also uses the terms "azimuth" and "direction" as ments in the same locality may vary.

3-1
FM 6-40

(b) Aiming posts. Two aiming posts may

be used instead of the collimator as the primary
Grid
north aiming point for each piece. The aiming posts
are placed so that the two aiming posts and the
panoramic telescope form a straight line and
so that the near aiming post is halfway between
the panoramic telescope and the far aiming post.
b. Alternate Aiming Point. An alternate aim-
Grid declination
ing point is one that is used when the primary
Decli notion
constant aiming point is rendered useless. It can be either
a distant aiming point or a close-in aiming point.
When a 6,400-mil capability is required, at least
Magnetic two aiming points must be used because at cer-
declI notion
tain angles of elevation the primary aiming point
will be masked by the tube or, in the case of
certain self-propelled weapons, by the command-
er's cupola. For towed weapons, two close-in aim-
ing points 3,200 mils apart are normally used.
Figure 3-1. Map and azimuth terms. c. Battery Center. The battery center is a point
materialized on the ground at the geometric cen-
3-3. Artillery Firing Battery Terms ter of the howitzer (gun) sections. It is the
a. Aiming Point. An aiming point is a
point which is plotted on the firing charts to
sharply defined point that is used as a reference
represent the location of the battery.
in laying an artillery piece for direction. There
d. Base Piece. The base piece normally is the
are two general types of aiming points-distant
piece with the shooting strength closest to the
aiming points and close-in aiming points.
average shooting strength of the battery. It is
(1) Distant aiming point. A distant aiming
placed on or near the battery center and nor-
point may be used as a reference in laying for
mally is used for registrations.
direction or as a means of boresighting artillery
weapons. When a distant aiming point is used, it e. Gun-Target Line. The gun-target line is
should be at least 1,500 meters from the posi- an imaginary straight line from the gun to the
tion area so that normal displacement of the target. Line of fire and direction of fire are fam-
panoramic telescope due to firing or traverse will iliar expressions in the artillery vocabulary
not cause an error of more than 1/2 mil in di- which are sometimes used as synonyms for the
rection. If greater accuracy is desired, a greater gun-target line. However, direction of fire is most
distance must be used. Advantages of using a often used when the battery is laid with the
distant aiming point are that it may be used im- tubes pointed toward the center of the zone of
mediately upon occupation of a position or it may fire.
be used as an alternate aiming point in the event f. Orienting Line. An orienting line is a line
the close-in aiming point is rendered useless. Dis- of known direction established on the ground
advantages of using a distant aiming point are near the firing battery to serve as a basis for
that it may be obscured by darkness, dust, fog, laying for direction. The azimuth of the orient-
or smoke; illumination is not practicable; and ing line is stated as the direction from the
the pieces are not parallel when laid with a com- orienting station to a designated end of the
mon deflection to the distant aiming point (para orienting line. The end of the orienting line may
be marked by any sharply defined point, such as
4-7a(2)). a steeple, flagpole, or stake.
(2) Close-in aiming point. There are two g. Orienting Station. An orienting station is
types of close-in aiming points. a point on the orienting line near the gun posi-
(a) Infinity collimator. The infinity col- tion over which the aiming circle is emplaced
limator is normally used as the primary aiming when orienting the battery.
point for each piece. The collimator is an optical h. Orienting Angle. An orienting angle is the
instrument which simulates an aiming point at horizontal clockwise angle from the line of fire
infinity. The collimator is emplaced 4 to 15 meters to the orienting line.
from the panoramic telescope on the weapon.
i. Reference Point. A reference point is a
Use of the collimator permits application of cor- prominent and easily located point on the ter-
rections for weapon displacement.

3-2
 FM 6-40

rain and is used for orientation. This may be

used as a distant aiming point or as an alternate
aiming point.
j. Deflection. Deflection is the horizontal,
clockwise angle measured from the line of fire,
or the rearward extension of the line of fire, to
the line of sight to a designated aiming point,
.with the vertex at the instrument.
k. Refer. To refer is to measure the deflection
to a given point without moving the tube of the
weapon or the orientation (0 to 3200) line of the
instrument. The command REFER means to
measure and to report the deflection. If the de-
flection is to be recorded, the command,
RECORD REFERRED DEFLECTION, is
given.
1. Indirect Laying. Indirect laying is the aim-
ing of a piece by sighting on an aiming point.
The piece is laid for direction by setting a given
deflection on the sight and traversing the tube Figure 3-2. Schematic drawing of aiming circle.
until the line of sight of the panoramic telescope
is on the aiming point and by leveling the ap- respect to the lower motion, the horizontal clock-
propriate bubbles. The piece is laid for elevation wise angle from the 0 to 3200 line of the lower
by setting the quadrant elevation on the eleva- motion to the line of sight of the telescope can
tion quadrant or gunner's quadrant and elevat- be determined by combining the values read op-
ing or depressing the tube until the appropriate posite the appropriate indexes on the azimuth
bubble is level. scale and the azimuth micrometer.
m. Direct Laying. Direct laying is the aiming b. When the magnetic compass of the aiming
of a piece by sighting directly on the target. circle is being used, all objects (helmets, small
arms, etc.) which may attract the needle must
3-4. Aiming Circle be kept away from the instrument. The aiming
a. The aiming circle is an instrument for circle should be set up no closer to the objects
measuring horizontal and vertical angles. It is listed below than the distances indicated.
the instrument usually used for laying the bat- Meters
tery. The head of the instrument has two High-tension powerlines-------------------------150
motions, called the lower (nonrecording) motion Railroad tracks--------------------------------75
and the upper (recording) motion. On the lower Medium and heavy towed artillery pieces and all
motion, which may be locked in any desired posi- self-propelled artillery pieces - -- 60
Light towed artillery pieces, telegraph wire, and
tion, is an azimuth scale (fig 3-2), graduated ---- 40,
vehicles
every 100 mils and numbered every 200 mils. Barbed wire and small metal objects---------------10
The scale is numbered from 0 to 62 (6200); the
upper half of the scale, (the half numbered 32 3-5. Panoramic Telescope
to 62 (3200 to 6200) ), has a second set of num- The panoramic telescope (sometimes called the
bers (in red) from 0 to 30 (0 to 3000). The
upper motion has an index (for the azimuth sight or pantel) is mounted on the piece and
scale on the lower motion), an azimuth measures horizontal clockwise angles in mils.
micrometer (graduated in mils from 0 to 100), Panoramic telescopes used on current field artil-
a magnetic needle, a reticle used in centering lery weapons are as follows:
Weapon Series Max Df
the magnetic needle, and a telescope. The reticle
MOlAl M12 3200
for centering the needle is located directly below M102 M100 6400
the axis of the telescope. When the needle is M107 M100 6400
centered in the reticle, the line of sight of the M108 M100 6400
telescope is in the direction in which the needle is M109 M100 6400
Milo M100 6400
pointing. When the upper motion is moved with
M114A1 M12 3200

3-3
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 4

FIRING BATTERY PROCEDURES

Section I. LAYING THE BATTERY

4-1. General strument (adding 6400 to the declination con-
a. When a battery occupies a position, the stant, if necessary).
tubes of the pieces must be pointed in a known Example: The executive officer receives the
direction. The known direction should be the di- command LAY ON AZIMUTH 5250. The decli-
rection toward the center of the assigned zone nation constant of the aiming circle is 200 mils.
of fire. The direction in which the battery is to Solution:
Declination constant 200
be laid may be furnished to the battery executive +6,400
officer, or it may be estimated by the executive
officer on the basis of his knowledge of the situa- 6,600
tion. Minus the grid azimuth 5,250
b. Normally, the battery is laid in two steps: Deflection to be set on the
(1) The 0 to 3200 line of the aiming circle aiming circle - 1,350
is established parallel to the direction of fire. After the aiming circle has been set up where
(2) The howitzer (gun) tubes are laid it is away from all magnetic attractions and
parallel to the 0 to 3200 line of the aiming circle where it is visible to all pieces (if possible), 1350
(reciprocal laying (para 4-3) ). is set on the aiming circle with the upper motion.
c. In rare cases, the battery may be laid with- The magnetic needle is centered with the lower
out an aiming circle (para 4-7). motion without disturbing the setting of 1350.
The 0 to 3200 line of the aiming circle is now
4-2. Orienting the Aiming Circle oriented on azimuth 5250 (fig 4-1).
There are several methods that can be used to b. Orienting by Orienting Angle. An orient-
orient the 0 to 3200 line of the aiming circle in ing line must be established when the battery
the direction of fire, but the three methods de- is to be laid by the orienting angle. The orient-
scribed in a through c below (azimuth, orient- ing line is established on the ground between a
ing angle, and aiming point and deflection) are stake over which the aiming circle is to be set
the ones used most often. The three methods are up (orienting station) and a distant point, which
similar in that a deflection (the horizontal clock- may be a stake or a terrain feature (end of ori-
wise angle from the axis of the tube to an aiming enting line). The orienting angle is the horizon-
point) is determined and set on the aiming cir-
tal clockwise angle from the direction of fire
cle and the lower motion of the aiming circle (axis at the tubes) to the orienting line. The
is then used to sight on the aiming point. executive officer normally is given the orienting
a. Orienting by Grid Azimuth. Magnetic angle; however, if he knows the azimuth of the
north is used as the aiming point in orienting by orienting line and the azimuth of the direction
grd azimuth. To orient the 0 to 3200 line of of fire, he can compute the orienting angle by
the aiming circle on a grid azimuth, the execu- subtracting the azimuth of the direction of fire
tive officer must determine the horizontal clock- from the azimuth of the orienting line (6400
wise angle from that azimuth to magnetic north, mils is added to the azimuth of the orienting line,
set that reading on the aiming circle with the if necessary). He uses the upper motion to set
upper motion, and sight on magnetic north by the orienting angle on the aiming circle and uses
centering (with the lower motion) the magnetic the lower motion to sight the aiming circle on
needle. He computes the deflection to be set on the end of the orienting line. The 0 to 3200 line
the aiming circle by subtracting the grid is now established parallel to the direction of
azimuth from the declination constant of the in- fire.

4-1
FM 6-40

principle of reciprocal laying is based on the

geometric theorem which states that if two
parallel lines are cut by a transversal, the alter-
nate interior angles are equal. The parallel lines
north
are the 0 to 3200 lines of the instruments; the
transversal is the line of sight between the two
instruments. The alternate interior angles are
the equal deflections placed on the instruments
(fig 4-3).
Direction of fire b. Procedure. After the 0 to 3200 line of the
Angle s350onnDeclination
circle set aiming constant aiming circle has been established parallel to the
200 mils direction of fire (para 4-2), the executive officer,
using the upper motion, sights on the objective
lens of the panoramic telescope, reads the deflec-
tion on the azimuth scale and azimuth micro-
meter, and announces the deflection to the gunner
on the piece. The gunner sets off the announced
Aiming circle deflection on the panoramic telescope and causes
the piece to be moved until the telescope is sighted
on the objective lens of the aiming circle. Because
Grid azimuth of fire the panoramic telescope is offset laterally from the
axis about which the carriage is moved, the tele-
5,250 mils
scope is displaced horizontally. When the tele-
Figure4-1. Orienting by grid azimuth. scope has been sighted on the aiming circle, the
gunner reports READY FOR RECHECK and the
Example: The azimuth of the orienting line executive officer again sights on the objective lens
is 1300 mils. The azimuth on which the execu- of the telescope and reads and announces the de-
tive officer wishes to lay is 2500 mils. The orient- flection. This procedure is repeated until the
ing angle is 5200 mils (1300 + 6400 = 7700 - gunner reports a difference of 0 mils between suc-
2500 = 5200). The aiming circle is set up over cessive deflections. The piece has then been laid.
the orienting station. The executive officer uses
the upper motion to set 5200 mils on the aiming Example: The following commands and pro-
circle. He then uses the lower motion to sight cedures are used in reciprocal laying:
(1) Executive officer-BATTERY AD-
on the end of the orienting line. The 0 to 3200
line of the aiming circle is now oriented (fig JUST, AIMING POINT THIS INSTRUMENT.
4-2). (2) Gunner of number 3-NUMBER 3,
c. Orienting by Aiming Point and Deflection. AIMING POINT IDENTIFIED. (All gunners
In some cases, when a battery is occupying a report in this manner. For brevity, only the com-
position, the executive officer is given an aiming mands of number 3 will be shown here. Other
point and a deflection on which to lay. To orient pieces are laid in the same manner.)
the aiming circle, the executive officer sets off (3) Executive offlicer-NUMBER 3, DE-
the deflection, using the upper motion, and FLECTION 3091. (The executive had referred
sights on the aiming point, using the lower mo- the aiming circle to the objective lens of the
tion. The 0 to 3200 line of the aiming circle is telescope.)
(4) Gunner of number 3--NUMBER 3,
then parallel to the direction of fire. DEFLECTION 3091. (The gunner sets 3091 on
his telescope and causes the carriage to be
4-3. Reciprocal Laying shifted until the line of sight is within 10 mils
a. General. Reciprocal laying- is a procedure of the aiming circle. Then, he uses the travers-
by which the 0 to 3200 line of one instrument ing mechanism to place the line of sight exactly
(aiming circle) and the 0 to 3200 line of another on the aiming circle. In the meantime, the execu-
instrument (panoramic telescope) are laid paral- tive officer is laying other pieces.) When the gun-
lel. When the 0 to 3200 lines of an aiming circle ner of number 3 piece has completed his laying
and a panoramic telescope are parallel and the with deflection 3091, he announces NUMBER 3
piece has been properly boresighted, the tube of
the piece is parallel to both 0 to 3200 lines. The READY FOR RECHECK.

4-2
 FM 6-40

End of orienting
line

Orienting angle
5,200 mils ,-

ing station

0
0"Pr

Figure 4-2. One,nting by ,orientingangle.

Direction sighted on the aiming circle, the gunner an-

of fire nounces NUMBER 3 READY FOR RECHECK.
The executive officer continues to lay the same
piece once it is within 3 mils of the announced
deflection.
C (7) Executive officer-NUMBER 3, DE-
FLECTION 3093.
(8) Gunner of number 3-NUMBER 3,
DEFLECTION 3093. ZERO MILS.
(9) Executive offlcer-NUMBER 3 IS
LAID. (Unit standing operating procedure will
0) specify the deflection at which the aiming posts
C or collimator will be placed upon completion of
c'J laying.)
0

ning circle 4-4. Recording Laying for Direction

a. Under normal circumstances, after the bat-
tery has been laid parallel, the executive officer
will direct the crew of each piece to refer to a
common deflection and to set the collimator or
Figure 4-3. Principle of reciprocal laying. aiming posts along the resulting line of sight
(the tube is not moved). If this procedure is
followed, each piece will have an aiming point
(5) Executive officer-NUMBER 3, DE-
and a deflection which, when used, will cause
FLECTION 3093.
the tube to be pointed in the direction in which
(6) Gunner of number 3-NUMBER 3,
DEFLECTION 3093, 2 MILS. (This indicates a it was initially laid without again going through
the process of reciprocal laying. Furthermore, the
2-mil difference between this deflection and the
direction in which the battery is initially laid and
previous deflection.) After setting off 3093 and
the corresponding deflection are used as references
traversing the piece until the telescope is again

4-3
FM 6-40

from which the fire direction center (FDC) can f. As soon as the battery has been laid parallel
derive firing deflections for future targets. and referred to the close-in aiming point, the
b. The collimator is placed 4 to 15 meters from executive officer will have the gunners of all
the sight of the weapon. (Best results are ob- pieces refer to a distance aiming point, if one is
tained from 6 to 12 meters). If aiming posts available. For example, he may command AIM-
are used, the far aiming post should be placed ING POINT, STEEPLE, RIGHT FRONT, RE-
at least 100 meters from the piece and the near FER, RECORD REFERRED DEFLECTION.
aiming post must be placed halfway between the Each gunner refers to the steeple and reads and
piece and the far aiming post. reports the deflection; e.g., NUMBER 3, STEE-
c. The referred deflections at which to place PLE, DEFLECTION (so much). The chief of
the collimator or aiming posts that have been section and the battery recorder record the de-
found to be most convenient are shown below: flection for future use. Should the close-in aim-
Weapon Deflection ing point of any section be rendered useless, the
105-m m (M 1OlA l) ..............----------------- 2800 executive officer can maintain parallelism and
105-mm (M102) 2800 control of direction by using this deflection and
105-mm (M108) - - 2600 the distant aiming point. This information is
155-m m (M 1 4A1) ............... 2400
---------------.
155-mm (M44) -600
used for reemplacing the close-in aiming point
155-mm (M109) 2600 at the earliest possible time.
8-inch (M l10, M l15) --------------------------- 2400
175-m m (M 107) ---------------------------------- 2400 4-5. Verifying Laying for Direction
d. If the close-in aiming point of an individual a. After the battery has been laid, the execu-
piece cannot be placed at the announced common tive officer should direct checks to insure that
deflection because of ground contour, foliage, the pieces have been laid parallel and in the
trees, or other conditions, the gunner turns the proper direction.
azimuth micrometer knob until the azimuth scale b. The executive officer can check parallelism
is on another even 100-mil graduation. The col- by having the gunners lay the pieces on the com-
limator or aiming posts are alined at this new mon deflection and then, by pairs, refer to each
deflection. The chief of section reports the other's panoramic telescopes. If the deflections
altered deflection to the executive officer: NUM- read by two gunners agree, the pieces are laid
BER (so-and-so), COLLIMATOR (AIMING parallel. Each piece should check with at least
POSTS) AT (so many hundred), DE- two other pieces. Extreme caution must be used
FLECTION (common deflection) IN LAKE (or in checking parallelism with the M100 series
other reason). The executive officer will then sights, since the reading from one sight to
command NUMBER (so-and-so), DEFLEC- another will differ by 3200 mils. Further, the
TION (as appropriate to the weapon) REFER. executive officer should walk the line of the metal
If the piece is equipped with the M12 series and make a visual check of the parallelism of
panoramic sight, the gunner, at this command, the tubes.
loosens the slipping azimuth scale locking screw c. As soon as time permits, the executive offi-
and moves the slipping azimuth scale to the com- cer should make the following check:
mon deflection. He then tightens the locking (1) With the aiming circle (or instrument
screw and verifies the adjustment. used initially to lay the battery) still set up, the
e. If the sight is equipped with a reset executive officer commands NUMBER (so-and-
counter, the gunner alines the collimator or aim- so), or BASE PIECE, AIMING POINT THIS
ing posts at the referred deflection as indicated INSTRUMENT, REFER.
in c above by using the azimuth counter. He then (2) The gunner of the piece indicated an-
resets the reset counter by pushing and turning nounces AIMING POINT IDENTIFIED, turns
the reset knob. The counter will automatically the sight of the piece until the line of sight is
reset to 3200. If it is not possible to place the on the designated instrument, and announces the
collimator or aiming posts on the referred de- reading on the sight scale as NUMBER (so-and-
flection indicated in c above, the gunner may so), DEFLECTION (so much).
aline the collimator or aiming posts at any con- (3) The executive officer refers the aiming
venient deflection by using the azimuth counter. circle to the panoramic telescope of the desig-
He then resets the reset counter to 3200. nated (base) piece.
In either case, 3200 then becomes the referred (4) If the deflection read by a gunner does
deflection for the weapon. not agree with that read by the executive officer,

4-4
 FM 6-40

the executive officer can correct the lay of that tion necessary to lay the battery on the new grid
piece for direction by giving the gunner the azimuth.
proper deflection. c. Shift From One Orienting Angle to
d. The executive officer verifies the azimuth or Another. If the battery is laid on an orienting
orienting angle by one of the following proce- angle and a command for another orienting
dures: angle is received, the executive officer computes
(1) If the battery was laid with the mag- the difference between the two orienting angles.
netic compass (by azimuth), the executive officer He next applies this difference to the original
centers the needle with the upper motion and deflection in the proper direction; an increase
reads the azimuth scale and azimuth micrometer. in orienting angle increases the deflection, and a
He subtracts this reading from the declination decrease in orienting angle decreases the deflection
constant, adding 6400 mils if necessary. The re- (fig 4-5). The result is the deflection necessary to
sult is the azimuth on which the battery is laid. lay the battery on the new orienting angle.
If the azimuth determined is within 2 mils of the d. Shift From an Azimuth to an Orienting
initial azimuth, the lay may be considered veri- Angle. After the battery has been laid parallel
fied for direction. on an azimuth, an orienting line may be estab-
(2) If the battery was laid on an orienting lished and an orienting angle announced. This
angle, the executive officer sights on the end of will necessitate a shift from grid azimuth to the
the orienting line with the upper motion. If the announced orienting angle. The executive officer
resulting reading on the azimuth scale and azi- sets the aiming circle over the orienting station
muth micrometer agrees with the initial orient- and measures the orienting angle on which the
ing angle, the lay is considered verified for battery is laid. He compares this angle with the
direction. announced orienting angle, commands an appro-
4-6. Conversion of Data for Direction priate deflection, and has the close-in aiming
a. Preparation for Converting Data. If no point realined.
azimuth of fire has been given the executive offi- e. Relaying Single Pieces on a New Azimuth.
cer upon occupation of position, he lays the bat- If, after a large deflection shift has been made,
tery parallel in the direction which appears to the gunner is unable to sight on the aiming point
be more appropriate, considering his knowledge because the line of sight is obstructed or he is
of the situation, and records a referred deflec- unable to take up the correct sight picture be-
tion. When a fire command prescribing a differ- cause of excessive displacement of the weapon,
ent azimuth of fire and/or a different method of the weapon should be relaid with an aiming cir-
laying is received, he can accomplish the change cle. The procedure is as follows:
by announcing a new deflection with reference (1) The executive officer converts the an-
to the aiming point. In order to be prepared for nounced deflection into an azimuth.
any eventuality, the executive officer (2) The executive officer orients the aiming
(1) Determines the azimuth on which the circle on the computed azimuth.
battery is laid. (3) The crew shifts the weapon to the ap-
(2) Determines the orienting angle on propriate direction of fire and the gunner lays
which the battery is la'd (if an orienting line it reciprocally on the desired azimuth.
has been established). (4) The gunner has the aiming posts or col-
(3) Has the base piece gunner measure the limator realined on the announced deflection.
deflections (refer) to visible aiming points. (He Note. If the weapon is equipped with the M100
also has the gunner of another piece measure se;ries sight, the weapon is relaid with the azimuth 6400-
these defiections to serve as a check against large mul counter dial (upper window). The gunner alines the
errors.) collimator (or aiming posts) by using the azimuth 3200-
ml counter dial (lower window). THE RESET COUN-
b. Shift From One Grid Azimuth to Another. is
TER IS NOT RESET TO 3200. When this procedure
If the battery is laid on an azimuth and a com- u~ed, the original deflection index on the firing chart is
mand for another azimuth is received, the ex- still valid and does not have to be displaced.
ecutive officer computes the difference between
the two azimuths. He next applies this difference 4-7. Laying the Battery Without an Aiming
to the original deflection in the proper direction; Circle
an increase in grid azimuth decreases the deflec- At times, it may be necessary to lay the battery
tion, and a decrease in grid azimuth increases without an aiming circle. Among the situations
the deflection (fig 4-4). The result is the deflec- that would indicate use of the methods described

4-5
FM 6-40

sights on the aiming point by moving the tube.

Battery is laid Battery is laid This action causes the tube to be laid in the de-
on azimuth 5400, on azimuth 1200, sired direction. The executive officer then com-
deflection 3200 deflection 3200
mands BATTERY ADJUST, ON NUMBER
+ (so-and-so) LAY PARALLEL. The gunner then
lays the other pieces rec'procally with the pano-
400 mils 1300mIs ramic telescope in the same manner as that used
for laying with the aiming circle (para 4-3).
(2) In the second method the executive
commands BATTERY ADJUST AIMING
Azimutlh Azimuth POINT (so-and-so), DEFLECTION (so much).
5000 i 1500 is
com ma rnded I/ commanded Each gunner sets off the announced deflection
and sights on the aiming point by moving the
tube. If the aiming point is at the flank of the
battery and a common deflection is given to all
Exec commands Exec commands pieces, the battery can be considered as laid
DEFLECTION 3600 DEFLECTION 2900
parallel. If the aiming point is to the front, the
sheaf is converged at aiming point range in the
Figure 4-4. Shifts to compensate for difference
in grid azimuth.
target area as shown by the exaggerated dia-
gram in (Q figure 4-6. The convergency is cor-
rected and the sheaf is formed parallel by means
of individual shifts as shown in © figure 4-6.
Example: It is desired to form the sheaf
parallel on the number 3 piece (fig 4-6). The
shifts are determined for each piece by use of
the mil relation (para 8-3b), R being the range
to the aiming point and W being the perpendicu-
lar distance from the piece concerned to a line
through the aiming point and number 3 piece.
If the aiming point is to the rear, the sheaf will
* * L 0V + * L diverge. Individual shifts are computed as above
0 -V
Executive commands Executive commands to form the sheaf parallel.
DEFLECTION 3600 DEFLECTION 2900
b. M2 Compass. The command to the execu-
Figure 4-5. Shifts to compensate for difference tive officer to lay the battery by azimuth is LAY
in orienting angles.
ON AZIMUTH (so much). This command is not
repeated to the sections. The executive officer
below are the lack of an aiming circle or the places the compass on a steady object, away from
lack of time to lay by normal procedures. objects which might affect the magnetic needle
a. Aiming Point and Deflection. The executive and in a place where it can be used as an aiming
officer can use either of two methods ( (1) and point for base piece. He then-
(2) below) to lay by aiming point and deflection. (1) Measures the azimuth to the telescope
He can determine the deflection on which to of the base piece.
sight on the selected aiming point by comparing (2) Subtracts the announced azimuth from
the desired direction of fire with the azimuth to the azimuth which he measured (adding 6400 if
the aiming point. For example, if the direction necessary).
of fire is 600 mils right of the azimuth to the (3) Uses the remainder (minus 3200, if
aiming point, the deflection would be 2600 necessary; as the deflection and uses the compass
(3200 - 600). If the direction of fire is 600 mils as an aiming point to lay the base piece (fig 4-7).
left of the azimuth to the aiming point, the de- (4) Orders the gunner of the base piece to
flection would be 3800 (3200 + 600). lay the other pieces reciprocally.
(1) In the first method, the executive officer
commands (to the first piece prepared for ac- 4-8. Laying By Aircraft, High Airburst, or Flare
tion) NUMBER (so-and-so) ADJUST, AIMING a. No specific command is prescribed for lay-
POINT (so-and-so), DEFLECTION (so much). ing the battery by sighting on an aircraft, an
The gunner sets the announced deflection and airburst, or a flare. The executive may lay the

4-6
 FM 6-40

Aiming
point

Ra nge to
aiming point
8,000 meters \

6 5 4 3 2

-30 m-4--40 m
- +30 m -4-40o-- + - - 50 m--
Shift for Nol= 90/8 right II
Shift for No2= 40/8= right 5
Distance between No 3- base piece
Shift for No4 = 30/8 = left 4
individual pieces
Shift for No5= 70/8 =left 9
in meters. Shift for No6 = 100/8 =left 12

Sheaf converged

( Sheaf converged
Figure 4-6. Opening a converged sheaf by individual
shifts to obtain a parallel sheaf.

battery initially for direction by sighting with an The flare may be fired by an air observer or a
instrument on the aircraft, high airburst, or flare. ground observer.
When no visible point is suitable for use as an c. The executive sets up an instrument (us-
aiming point, an aircraft may be employed to ually in rear of the battery center) where it can
fly over the battery position toward, or away from, be used as an aiming point by all pieces. He
zeroes the azimuth scale and azimuth micrometer

.
a point in the target area. The line of flight is
used to establish a line of direction. and, by using the lower motion, places the vertical
b. The high airburst or flare should be over the hairline on the aircraft, burst, or flare at the
target area. The high airburst is fired by another proper instant. Using the upper motion, the execu-
unit, which has been laid perviously for direction. tive officer lays the pieces reciprocally.

4-7
FM 6-40

Aiming
\ point

A A A A *
6 5 4 3 2

*k3Om +- 40 + 30 + - 4om - -5m -- -

Distance between individual pieces in meters.

O Parallel sheaf

( Parallel sheaf
Figure 4-6-Continued.

4-8
 Desired grid Desired grid
azimuth 5000 azimuth 5000

2,000 mils
Compass " Grid Gziruth6
Compa
mils
Deflection 1"
2,000 mils I

0 Compass to left front. Deflection to lay tube D Compass'to riqht front. Deflection to lay tube
4 4 00
parallel,, , mils
parallel, 2,000 mils

Desired grid Desired grid

azimuth 5000 azimuth 5000

. 5,200 mils
1,200 mils -

1,200 mils]
Compass c.-
Grid az im" 80 . .

I 5, mils

() Compass to left rear. Deflection to lay tube @A Compass to right rear. Deflection to lay tube
parallel, 1,200 mils parallel, 5,200 mils
Figure 4-7. Use of M2 compass to lay by grid azimuth.
FM 6-40

Section II. MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION

4-9. Introduction tion. This is a particularly good method whenS
a. Within the firing battery safety is the re- the tactical situation does not permit actualW
sponsibility of the battery executive officer. Dur- measurement by one of the methods in a or b
ing training with live ammunition, a safety of- above. The mil relation method may be accom-
ficer is appointed and is responsible for insuring plished by the use of the panoramic telescopes of
that persons and property are not endangered by the flank pieces, by one aiming circle and one
fire. In combat, the S3 (or the executive officer panoramic telescope, or by two aiming circles.
of a separate battery) is responsible for deter- Usually, the most practical means is the use of
mining a quadrant elevation (QE) which will in- the panoramic telescopes of the flank pieces as
sure that rounds clear friendly troops and no-fire illustrated in figure 4-8. In this example the bat-
lines. tery has been laid parallel and the paced dis-
b. This section sets forth procedures required tance between flank pieces is 150 meters.
to clear the crest affecting trajectories from the (1) The gunners of the flank pieces refer
firing battery area. The executive officer will deter- to exactly the same point on the crest.
mine and report to the FDC the minimum quad- (2) Each of the flank gunners announces
rant elevation required to clear the crest visible the deflection to the point on the crest from his
from the battery position. (For VT fuzes, the piece.
minimum quadrant elevation (MQE) is computed (3) The apex angle is determined from
at crest range or VT arming time range, which- these two deflections as indicated in figure 4-8.
ever is greater.) The minimum quadrant eleva- (4) The battery front in meters is divided
tion must be computed for each charge to be fired. by the apex angle in mils (the mil relation).
c. The minimum quadrant elevation required The quotient is the range to the crest in thous-
to clear the visible crest must be compared with ands of meters.
the minimum quadrant elevation (determined by d. Estimation. If none of the methods of de-
the S3 or safety officer) required to clear mini- termining the range to the crest in a through
mum range lines, intermediate crests, or no-fire c above is possible, the range is estimated.
lines. The larger minimum quadrant elevation is
used. 4-12. Computation of Minimum Quadrant
Elevation for Firing With Fuzes Other
4-10. Measuring Angle of Site to Crest Than VT
As soon as a piece has been laid for direction, a. Army regulations require that a projectile
the chief of section determines the angle of site, fired with a fuze other than VT clear friendly
as prescribed in the field manual appropriate for troops by 5 meters vertically and that the quad-
the weapon, to the highest crest for his piece rant elevation computed for the point 5 meters
and reports it to the executive officer. above the friendly troops be modified by adding
2 forks.
4-11. Measuring Range to Crest
Range to the crest is determined to the nearest b. Elements involved in the computation of
hundred meters by one of the following methods: minimum quadrant elevation (Q fig 4-9) are as
a. Obtaining Distance From a Map. The dis- follows:
Note. The numbers and letters used to identify the
tance to a crest may be determined from a map. elements in 0, figure 4-9, correspond to the numbers
The location of the position area is plotted and (letters) preceding the subparagraphs in which the ele-
the highest point of the crest is determined. The ments are discussed.
distance is then measured with an appropriate (1) Site to crest. The site to crest is the
scale. This method is fast and accurate and is sum of the elements (a), (b), and (c) below.
not affected by adverse terrain features, as are This value is rounded to the nearest mil.
the methods discussed in b and c below. (a) Greatest angle of site measured by
b. Pacing the Distance. The distance may be the chiefs of sections.
paced. Pacing the distance to a crest requires no (b) Vertical angle corresponding to a 5-
equipment. The time required to measure the meter vertical clearance. This angle may be de-
range will depend on the distance involved and termined either byuse ofthe Cand Dscales and
the accessibility of the route to the crest. M-gagepoint of the graphical site table (GST)W
c. Use of the Mil Relation. The range to a or by use of the mail relation (5 meters divided
crest may be determined by use of the mil rela- by crest range in thousands to nearest hundred

4-10
 FM 6-40

218mils

I4
a5N 3,055
mils

150 meters
1 w.

mils No.1 Deflection

3,055 mils

apex angle = 218 + 145 = 363 mils

width of battery = 150 meters

metersQ413 or 400 meters
Range to crest . -.3 6 3 tnils
apex angle
Figure 4-8. Determining range to crest.

meters). Example problems in this chapter have meters above the crest. The sum of the elements
been solved by use of the GST. Unless otherwise in b(1) (a), (b), and (c) above is the site to
informed, the executive officer will assume that the point 5 meters above the crest. The sum of
the crest is occupied by friendly elements. the elements in b (1), (2), and (3) above is re-
(c) Complementary angle of site for ele- ported as the minimum quadrant elevation in the
ments in (a) and (b) above. The comp site fac- executive officer's report. The elements in b (1)
tor for the crest range to the nearest 100 meters (a), (b), and (c) above are determined to the
will be used. nearest 0.1 mil; the elements in b(1), (2), and
(2) Elevation corresponding to range to (3) above is reported as the minimum quadrant
crest. elevation to the nearest 1 mil.
(3) Two forks at range to crest.
c. The sum of the elements in b(1) (a) and Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 5
(;b) above is the angle of site to the point 5 white bag, range to crest 1,100 meters; angles

4-11
FM 6-40

of site reported by chiefs of sections + 35, + 36, table below. The clearances indicated should be
+ 35, + 34, + 36, + 35. increased by 50 percent when firing is conducted
Solution: over wet or marshy ground and by 100 percent
(1) Site to crest (40.6 expressed as when firing is conducted over water.
41)-------------------------41 Weapon Vertical clearance

(a) Greatest angle of site - +36.0 105-mm howitzer 80 meters

(b) Vertical angle correspond- 155-mm howitzer 100 meters
ing to 5 meter vertical 8-inch howitzer-------------------------150 meters
175-mm gun------------------------ 150 meters
clearance (5/1.1)-+4.6
(c) Complementary angle of c. The range used in all computations is the
site (+0.001 X 40.6) __ 0.0 crest range (to nearest 100 meters) or the range
corresponding to a 2-second time of flight,
Total-------------------+40.6 whichever is greater. The range corresponding
(2) Elevation for crest range---------41 to a 2-second time of flight is determined from
(3) Two forks at crest range4----------4 the firing tables; if 2.0 seconds is not listed, the
Total - ------------- 86 range corresponding to the next higher time of
Minimum quadrant elevation reported is 86 mils. flight is used.
d. If the crest has sectors with significantly d. The elements used in computing the mini-
different altitudes, it will be necessary to com- mum QE and the minimum QE reported are as
pute more than one minimum quadrant elevation follows:
for the sector of fire. In this case, the executive (1) Site to crest. The site to crest is the
officer reports, for example, AZIMUTH 4850 TO sum of the elements in (a), (b), and (c) below.
5200, MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION This value is rounded to the nearest mil.
CHARGE 5 WHITE BAG, 79; AZIMUTH 5200 (a) Greatest angle of site as reported by
TO 5600, MINIMUM QUADRANT ELE- the chiefs of sections.
VATION CHARGE 5 WHITE BAG, 86. (b) Vertical angle corresponding to ver-
e. A single narrow obstruction, such as a tree, tical clearance. This angle is equal to the vertical
which will affect only one piece is not considered clearance (shown in the table in :b above)
in computing minimum quadrant elevation. If a divided by the range in thousands of meters ex-
piece cannot fire safely, it is called out of action. pressed to the nearest 100 meters (c above).
(c) Complementary angle of site for the
4-13. VT Fuzes elements in (a) and (b) above. The complemen-
Fuzes of the M513 and M514 series are proxim- tary angle of site factor corresponds to the range
ity (VT) fuzes that may be set with time set- determined in c above. (Interpolate for ranges
tings from 5 to 100 seconds in 1-second incre- not listed.)
ments. Although the VT fuze is designed to arm (2) Elevation corresponding to range deter-
3.0 seconds before the set time, some fuzes may mined in c above,
arm as much as 5.5 seconds before the set time, (3) Two forks corresponding to range de-
but not less than 2.0 seconds after firing, which termined in c above.
is the minimum arming time. (4) The minimum QE reported is the sum
of the elements in (1), (2), and (3) above.
4-14. Computation of Minimum Quadrant
e. If the time set on a VT fuze is equal to,
Elevation for Firing With VT Fuzes
or greater than, the time of flight to the crest
(Low-Angle Fire) in Combat
a. Some fuzes have armed as early as 5.5 sec- plus 5.5 seconds, the minimum quadrant eleva-
onds prior to the time set on the fuze. Thus, the tion computed for other fuzes is used (®, fig 4-
probability of premature arming requires that a 9).
safety factor of 5.5 seconds be added to the time Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 5
flight to the point where arming is permitted. white bag, fuze M514A1, range to crest 1,700
Since time is set on the setting ring to the whole meters, fuze setting 10.0 seconds; angles of site
second, the time determined is rounded up to the reported by chiefs of sections + 40, + 39, + 40,
whole second and this becomes the minimum safe + 38, + 39, + 40; ground is dry. Time of flight to
time. the crest at range 1,700 meters is 4.9 seconds (4.9
b. Army regulations require that a projectile seconds plus 5.5 seconds is 10.4 seconds). Range
armed with a VT fuze clear friendly troops by corresponding to 2.0 seconds is 800 meters. Use
at least the number of meters indicated in the 1,700 meters.

4-12
 FM 6-40

ORIGIN MINIMUM QE BASE OF TRAJECTORY

0
Minimum quadrant elevation, other than
fuse VT.

MINIMUM QE BASE OF TRAJECTORY

RANGE

Minimum quadrant elevation, Fuze VT, arming

time range equal to or greater than piece to
crest range.

ORIGIN MINIMUM QE BASE OF TRAJECTORY ARMING

RANGE

Minimum quadrant elevation, Fuze VT, arming

time range less than piece to crest range.

Figure 4-9. Minimum quadrant elevation.

4-13
FM 6-40

Note. The numbers and letters used to identify the 4-15. Minimum Quadrant Elevation Card
elements in @, figure 4-9, correspond to the numbers a. The minimum quadrant elevation card con-
(letters) preceding the subparagraphs in which the ele- tains data to facilitate the computation of mini-
ments were discussed. mum quadrant elevation by the executive officer.
(1) Site to crest (100.2 expressed as Examples of minimum quadrant elevation cards
100) 100 with instructions for their use are shown in
(a) Greatest angle of site --- +40.0 tables 4-1 and 4-2. The table on the card lists,
(b) Vertical angle correspond- for all charges and selected ranges, the sum of
ing to a 100-meter ver- elevation, 2 forks, the vertical angle correspond-
tical clearance (100/ ing to the appropriate vertical clearance, and the
1.7) 59.8 complementary angle of site for + 300 mils angle
(c) Complementary angle of of site. On one side of the card are the data to
site (99.8 x + 0.004 +0.4 be used with all fuzes other than VT (table 4-1).
On the other side of the card are the data to be
Total -100.2
used with fuze VT (table 4-2). The side of the
(2) Elevation for crest range 67
card to be used with fuze VT also lists the time
(3) Two forks at crest range 4
of flight plus 5.5 seconds expressed to the next
Total------------------------ - 171 higher whole second for each listed range. When
Minimum quadrant elevation reported is 171 the time set on the VT fuze is equal to or greater
mils. than the time listed on the card, the minimum
f. If the time set on the fuze is less than the quadrant elevation for fuzes other than VT is
minimum safe time (time of flight to the crest used.
or minimum arming time, whichever is greater,
plus 5.5 seconds), the minimum quadrant eleva- b. The procedure for determining the quad-
tion is determined as shown in the following rant elevation is as follows:
example: (1) Enter the table at the crest range and
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge determine the quadrant elevation, less site to the
5 white bag, fuze M514A1, range to crest 500 crest, for the appropriate charge(s). If the crest
meters. Fuze setting 0; angles of site reported range is not listed, enter at the next higher or
by chiefs of sections + 41, + 45, + 43, + 45, + 44, lower listed range, whichever has the greater
+44; ground is dry. Range corresponding to 2.0 value of elevation.
seconds is 800 meters. Use 800 meters. (2) Select the greatest angle of site re-
Note. The numbers and letters used to identify the ported by the chiefs of sections.
elements in ®, figure 4-9, correspond to the numbers (3) Add the values determined in (1) and
(letters) preceding the subparagraphs in which the ele- (2) above. The sum is the minimum quadrant
ments are discussed. elevation.
(1) Site to crest (172.4 expressed as
172)1----------------------- 72 Example: 155-mm howitzer, M109; range
(a) Greatest angle of site ....... + 45.0 to the crest, 900 meters. Angles of site reported
(b) Vertical angle correspond- by the chiefs of sections, +80, +78, +79, +80,
ing to 100-meter vertical + 79. Determine the minimum quadrant elevation
clearance (100/0.8) 127.2 for charge 5 white bag, fuze M564.
(c) Complementary angle of
site (172.2 x 0.001) 0.2 Solution: Enter table 4-1 at range 1,000
meters (900 meters not listed).
Total--------------. 172.4 Value from the table for
(2) Elevation for 800 meters 30 charge 5---------46
(3) Two forks at 800 meters ....... 4 Greatest angle of site
Total-206 reported--------+ 80
Minimum quadrant elevation reported is 206 Minimum quadrant
mils. elevation---------126 mils

4-14
 FM 6-40

Table 4-1. Minimum Quadrant Elevation (Less Angle of Site), 155-mm Howitzer M109,
Shell HE M107, Fuzes M557, M500, M520, and M564, FT 155-AH-2.

Crest range Charge (white bag) Crest range Charge (white bag)
3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 7
200 42 39 36 34 32 1400 -106 82 63 45 32
400 -------- 43 37 31 27 23 1600 120 91 70 49 35
600 52 42 34 26 22 1800 ........ 134 107 79 55 39
800 --------- 63 50 40 30 23 2000 ........ 152 116 89 61 43
1000 --------- 76 60 46 34 26 2500 193 145 113 77 53
1200 89 70 55 38 28
Instructions:
1. Enter the table at the crest range and at the appropriate charge(s). If the crest range is not listed, enter at the next higher or lower listed
range, whichever has the greater value of elevation in the body of the table.
2. To obtain the minimum quadrant elevation, add the greatest angle of site reported by the chiefs of sections to the value taken from the body
of table.

Table 4-2. Minimum Quadrant Elevation and Time (Less Angle of Site), 155-mm
Howitzer M109, Shell HE, M107, Fuse M514A1, FT 155-AH-2.
Charge (white bag)
Crest range 3 4 5 6 7
El Ti El Ti El Ti El Ti El Ti
200 216 8.0 185 8.0 161 8.0 139 8.0 115 8.0
400 216 8.0 185 8.0 161 8.0 139 8.0 115 8.0
600 216 8.0 185 8.0 161 8.0 139 8.0 115 8.0
800 -184 9.0 172 9.0 161 8.0 139 8.0 115 8.0
1000 173 10.0 157 9.0 143 9.0 131 8.0 115 8.0
1200 170 10.0 151 10.0 135 9.0 119 9.0 109 8.0
1400 ---------- 175 11.0 151 10.0 132 10.0 114 9.0 101 9.0
1600 ---------- 181 12.0 152 11.0 131 11.0 110 10.0 96 9.0
1800 -188 13.0 157 12.0 133 11.0 109 10.0 93 9.0
2000 200 13.0 164 12.0 137 12.0 109 11.0 91 10.0
2500 ---------- 232 15.0 184 14.0 152 13.0 116 12.0 92 11.0
Instructions:
1. Enter the table at the range to crest and at the appropriate charge (s). If the range to crest is not listed, enter at the next higher or lower
listed range, whichever has the greater value listed in the column headed "El."
2. To obtain the minimum quadrant elevation, add the greatest angle of site reported by the chiefs of sections to the value listed in the column
headed "El."
3. Use the minimum quadrant elevation determined from this table whenever the fuze setting is less than the value in the column headed "Ti."
If the fuze setting is equal to or greater than the value under the column headed "Ti," use the minimum quadrant elevation determined for fuze
M564.

Section III. DETERMINING AND REPORTING DATA

4-16. Introduction azimuth and deflection on which the battery is
The battalion fire direction center requires data laid, the minimum quadrant elevation(s), and
from the firing battery for various purposes, the distribution of pieces. The distance of each
such as construction of firing charts and checks piece from battery center is reported to the near-
on laying. The battery executive officer requires est 5 meters. The direction in which the battery
the same data for the charts at the battery fire was laid is used as the reference direction. When
direction center. The battery executive officer is time permits, the executive officer submits a posi-
responsible for reporting the necessary data to tion area sketch showing the distribution of
the fire direction center. This section describes pieces (fig 4-10). A typical executive officer's re-
the executive officer's duties in determining and port is shown in the following example:
reporting data.

,4-17. Executive Officer's Report

a. As soon as possible after occupying position
Example:
BATTERY IS LAID
AZIMUTH (ORIENTING ANGLE) (so
and laying the battery, but without interfering much), DEFLECTION (so much)
with firing, the executive officer reports the MINIMUM QUADRANT EL]EVA-
4-1-5
FM 6-40

TION(S), CHARGE (so-and-so), (so

much)
DISTRIBUTION OF PIECES, NUMBER 1 Initial direction
of laying
(so many) METERS RIGHT (LEFT),
(so many) METERS BEHIND (IN
FRONT OF) BATTERY CENTER;
NUMBER 2, etc.
50 m
b. As soon as possible, the executive Officer
also determines and reports the- -5-1"

(1) Amount, type, and lot numbers of am- Battery Center

munition. 140 m

(2) Weights of projectiles by lot. No3

(3) Propellant temperature.
(4) Lateral limits (azimuths or de-
flections). These limits indicate the azimuths or Figure 4-10. Position area sketch.
deflections between which the pieces can be laid
without shifting trails. 4-20. Measuring the Azimuth of the
(5) Maximum elevation, when high-angle Direction of Fire
fire is being used. Upon completion of a registration and prior to
announcing END OF MISSION, the executive
officer should measure the azimuth and report
4-18. Reporting Correct Deflection the measured azimuth to the FDC when re-
After a registration has been completed, the ex-
quired. The procedure for measuring and report-
ecutive officer should determine the correct de-
ing the azimuth is as follows:
flection and report it to the fire direction center.
a. Set up the aiming circle so that it is away
The executive officer must determine the correct
from magnetic attractions and so that it can be
deflection before announcing END OF MISSION
seen from the base piece. Aline the 0-3200 line
to the base piece. He goes to the base piece, veri-
approximately parallel to the tube of the base
fies the sight picture, and reads the deflection on piece.
the sight. If the sight picture is not correct, he
b. The executive officer commands BASE
corrects it by referring the sight to the correct
picture before reading the deflection on the sight. PIECE, AIMING POINT THIS INSTRU-
MENT, REFER.
(The tube must not be moved.) He reports the
c. The gunner of the base piece announces
deflection read as CORRECT DEFLECTION
(so much). AIMING POINT IDENTIFIED, turns the sight
of the piece until the line of sight is on the desig-
nated instrument, and announces the reading of
4-19. Reporting Correct Azimuth the sight scale as DEFLECTION (so much).
In order to report the correct azimuth, the ex-
d. The executive officer sets this reading on
ecutive officer must first determine the correct the azimuth and azimuth micrometer scale of the
deflection (para 4-18) and then compute the cor- instrument with the upper motion, and, with the
rect azimuth by comparing the correct deflection lower motion, sights on the panoramic telescope
with the deflection corresponding to the azimuth of the piece.
on which the battery was initially laid and ap- e. Release the magnetic needle and center it,
plying the difference to the azimuth on which
the battery was laid. using the upper motion.
f. Determine the reading on the aiming circle
Example: The battery is laid on azimuth 5000, and subtract that reading from the declination
deflection 3200. After adjustment on the regis- constant (adding 6400 to the declination con-
tration point, the FDC commands REPORT stant if necessary). The result is the measured
CORRECT AZIMUTH. The executive officer de- azimuth.
termines the correct deflection to be 3315 mils.
Deflection 3315 is 115 mils to the left of deflec- 4-21. Measuring The. Orienting Angle
tion 3200. The executive officer applies left 115 When an orienting line has been established, the
to azimuth 5000 and reports CORRECT' AZI- executive officer should measure the orienting
MUTH 4885. angle (fig 4-11) upon the completion of a regis-

4-16
 FM 6-40

tration and report the measured orienting angle

to the FDC when required. The procedure for
measuring the orienting angle is as follows: Registration
point
a. Set the aiming circle over the orienting sta-
tion.
b. Have the gunner of the base piece lay the
aiming circle parallel to the tube of the base
piece.
c. With the upper motion, refer to the end of
Measured
the orienting line. Read the orienting angle on 0
the aiming circle.

4-22. Determining Instrument Direction

When the 0 to 3200 line of an aiming circle is / N /
pointing in an unknown direction, the following Orienting Orienting
angle End of
procedure is used for determining the grid azi- anglen O

muth of that direction:

/ /- N
a. Release the needle and center it, using the /
0
upper motion. I~/1

b. Subtract the reading on the scales from the

declination constant (adding 6400 to the declina- Figure 4-11. Measuring the orienting angle with the
tion constant if necessary). The remainder is the aiming circle.
grid azimuth of the 0 to 3200 line. when an azimuth is measured, the deflection or
azimuth determined is that of the 0 to 3200 line
4-23. Measuring Azimuth to a Point of the sight as read from the azimuth counter.
The following procedure is used for measuring
Only if the weapon is properly boresighted is
the azimuth to a point (fig 4-12):
the deflection or azimuth that of the tube. When
a. Place the aiming circle so that the 0 to 3200
the FDC commands MEASURE THE
line is in an approximate north-south direction
AZIMUTH (ORIENTING ANGLE), the
and the large 0 of the scale is toward the south.
azimuth (orienting angle) of the tube is desired.
b. With the upper motion, set off the declina- Therefore, if the weapon is not properly bore-
tion constant (Q, fig 4-12). sighted, the azimuth (orienting angle) measured
c. Release the needle and, with the lower mo- is false by the amount of the error in boresight-
tion, center the needle to direct the line of sight ing.
to magnetic north and the 0 to 3200 line of the
instrument to grid north (@, fig 4-12). c. At the first opportunity after a registra-
d. Lock the needle and, with the upper mo- tion, the base piece is boresighted. The azimuth
tion, refer the line of sight to the desired point. counter (not the reset counter) is used during
Read the grid azimuth to the designated point boresighting. The tube is pointed at the aiming
from the azimuth scale and azimuth microme- point (either a distant aiming point or the ap-
propriate "butterfly" on the test target), and the
ter; (®, fig 4-12).
e. For greater accuracy, repeat this operation sight is zeroed. If the sight is pointed to the
right of the appropriate aiming point, the tube
three times and take the average of the readings.
is pointed to the left of the 0 to 3200 line of
4-24. Correction for Boresighting Error After sight. It follows that any azimuth measured
Registration prior to this time was greater than the azimuth
a. Tactical considerations may require regis- of the tube and that any orienting angle mea-
tration before sight tests and adjustments are sured was smaller than the true orienting angle.
made. In such cases, the pieces must be bore- If the sight is pointed to the left of the appro-
sighted at the earliest practicable time, usually priate aiming point, measured azimuths are less
during a lull in firing. If boresighting discloses than the azimuth of the tube and measured ori-
that the 0 to 3200 line of the sight (panoramic enting angles are too large. The amount of the
telescope) was not parallel to the tube, the ex- error is determined by referring the sight, with
ecutive officer must take corrective measures and the tube still sighted on its aiming point, to the
report them to the fire direction center. aiming point and reading the deflection. He com-
b. When a deflection is read from a sight or pares the referred deflection with 3200, and the

4-17
FM 6-40

Aiming

0~

4j~

4woo

Place line of sight on aiming point

with upper motion and read grid
azimuth on scale opposite index.

Figure 4-12. Measuring azimuth to a point.

difference is the amount of the error in bore- propriate aiming point and the azimuth counter
reading 3200, the sight is pointed to the right
sight. He corrects the previously determined
azimuths or orienting angles, completes the bore- of the aiming point. The executive officer then
sighting, and reports the actions taken. refers the sight to the aiming point and reads
Example 1: A battery has occupied a posi- a deflection of 3,192 mils. The tube is pointed
tion. Before the base piece can be boresighted, 8 mils to the left of the 0 to 3200 line of the
a registration is conducted. At the conclusion of sight (Q, fig 4-13). Therefore, the azimuth of
the registration, the executive officer determines the tube after registration is 1792 (1800 - 8).
2595 to be correct on the azimuth counter When the weapon is boresighted, a deflection of
(3195 on the reset counter) and measures an 2595 (3195 on the reset counter) will not point
the tube on azimuth 1792. To correct this error,
azimuth of 1800. A short time later, the piece
the executive officer adds 8 mils to the deflection
is boresighted. With the tube pointed at the ap-

4-18
 FM 6-40

and it becomes 2603 as read on the azimuth ter. This command indicates that the FDC de-
counter (3203 on the reset counter) (0, fig 4- sires the executive officer to fire three rounds and
13). The executive officer then directs the gunner to measure and report the observed angle of site
to return the base piece to the initial lay by set- to the mean burst center of the three rounds.
ting the azimuth counter deflection at 2600 and The executive officer-
the reset counter at 3200. After correcting the (1) Sets up the aiming circle or BC scope
boresighting, the executive officer reports ER- (battery commander's telescope) near the base
ROR OF 8 MILS IN BORESIGHTING ON piece.
BASE PIECE, CORRECT AZIMUTH WHEN (2) Has the gunner lay the instrument re-
LAID ON REGISTRATION POINT IS 1792, ciprocally.
CORRECT ADJUSTED DEFLECTION 3203, (3) Determines the angle of site necessary
BORESIGHTING HAS BEEN CORRECTED. to make the bursts visible from the gun position.
Example 2: Assume that in example 1 an (4) Determines the quadrant elevation to
orienting angle of 853 mils had been measured.
After the 8-mil error in boresighting is deter-
mined, the corrected orienting angle is 861 mils
(fig 4-14). The executive officer reports ERROR
OF 8 MILS IN BORESIGHTING OF NUMBER
3, CORRECT ORIENTING ANGLE IS 861,
CORRECT ADJUSTED DEFLECTION 3202,
BORESIGHTING HAS BEEN CORRECTED.
4-25. Site by Firing (Executive Officer's
High Burst)
a. Upon completion of an observed firing
chart registration with time fuze, the command
OBSERVE HIGH BURST, MEASURE ANGLE
OF SITE, 3 ROUNDS, followed by the adjusted
data, may be received from the fire direction cen-

To aiming point Toaiming point

8 mils 0-3200 line prior
to boresighting
iS 0-3200 line prior 8 mils
-Axis of bore to boresighting
, - ,, Sight
"AI 0-3200 line ofterI
boresighting
I
Axis of tube
/
I 0 SSight
/

/
/
posts line prior
To reg pt
oz 1792

Axis of bore
of

Sight

OS

/0I
Figure 4-14. Example of error in orienting angle due to
Figure 4-13. Example of error revealed by boresighting. ,errorin boresighting.

4-19
FM 6-40

be fired by adding the angle of site determined battery front and closed when the width of the
in (3) above to the adjusted quadrant elevation. desired sheaf is less than the width of the bat-
(5) Fires three rounds, using the an- tery front.
nounced adjusted deflection and time and the c. No corrections are applied to equalize the
quadrant elevation determined in (4) above. lateral intervals between adjacent bursts.
(6) Measures, with , the instrument, the Example: A 155-mm howitzer battery is. in
angle of site to each burst and computes the position with a battery front 250 meters wide.
mean angle of site. The executive officer receives fire commands
(7) Reports to the fire direction center the which include BATTERY ADJUST, SHEAF
mean angle of site and the quadrant elevation 100 METERS AT 5000. He determines that, the
fired. difference between the width of the desired sheaf
b. See paragraph 26-9 for associated FDC (100 meters) and the width of the battery front
procedures. (250 meters) is 150 meters. He divides 150 me-
4-26. Computation of Deflection Difference ters by 5 (six pieces in the battery). He divides
a. When the width of the desired sheaf is dif- the result (30) by the range in thousands of
ferent from the width of the battery front, a meters (5.0). The amount by which the sheaf
deflection difference is used. The sheaf is opened is to be closed is 6 mils. The fire commands to
or closed on any desired piece (normally the base the howitzers will include DEFLECTION 3239,
piece) a computed number of mils. The amount ON NUMBER 3, CLOSE 6.
by which the sheaf is opened or closed is deter- d. For an explanation of the application of de-
mined in the following manner: flection difference by the gunner, see paragraph
(1) Determine the difference between the 4-38c.
width of the desired sheaf and the width of the
battery front (with respect to the direction of 4-27. Axial Observer in High-Burst
fire). Registration
(2) Divide the value determined in (1) The executive officer may act as an axial observer
above by one less than the number of pieces in for a high-burst registration. His instrument
the battery. must be placed over a surveyed location (battery
(3) Divide the value determined in (2) center or orienting station) and oriented on a
above by the range in thousands of meters. surveyed direction. The precise procedures for an
b. The sheaf is opened when the width of the observer in a high-burst registration are set
desired sheaf is greater than the width of the forth in paragraph 13-17.

Section IV. FIRE COMMANDS AND THEIR EXECUTION

4-28. Introduction on complete understanding of commands by all
a. Fire commands convey all the information personnel. Since numbers make up a large portion
necessary for the opening, conduct, and cessa- of all commands received or given in the firing
tion of fire. Initial fire commands include all ele- battery, they must be announced in a clear, pre-
ments necessary for laying, loading, and firing cise manner, in a tempo consistent with the exe-
the pieces. Subsequent fire commands include cution of the command, and in a voice sufficiently
only those elements that are changed, except that loud to be properly understood. Numbers are pro-
the quadrant elevation is always announced. nounced as follows:
b. The basis for fire commands, except in di- Pronounced as--
Number
rect fire, is the data processed in the fire direc- Zero
0----------------------
tion center. These data are received in fire re- 1---------------------- Wun
quests from an observer, from a supported unit, 2---------------------- Too
or from the FDC of another headquarters. The 3---------------------- Thuh-ree
fire commands are sent to the battery executive 4---------------------- Fo-wer
5---------------------- Fi-yiv
officer by the best available means of communi- Six
6----------------------
cation. The executive officer insures that the 7 Seven
howitzer (gun) sections receive and execute the 8---------------------- Ate
fire commands as prescribed in this manual and 9---------------------- Niner
in unit standing operating procedures. 44--------------------- Fo-wer fo-wer
80--------------------- Ate zero
c. Accuracy in the firing battery is dependent

4-20
 FM 6-40

100.7 --------------------- Wun zero zero point seven a separate deflection, fuze setting, and quadrant
136 ----------------------- Wun thuh-ree six elevation will be announced for each piece
500 ----------------------- Fi-yiv hun-dred
1478 ---------------------- Wun fo-wer seven ate
throughout the mission.
7000 ------------------ Seven thow-zand b. The application of a deflection difference is
16000---------------------Wun six thow-zand
a rapid method of obtaining a width of sheaf
different from the width of a parallel sheaf. When
4-29. Sequence of Commands the S3 directs that a deflection difference be ap-
a. Fire commands are announced to the firing plied, the fire commands from the FDC will con-
battery in the sequence shown in table 4-3. tain, as the second element, the data necessary
b. The elements of the fire commands are ex- for the executive officer to compute the deflection
plained in paragraphs 4-30 through 4-40. Some difference; namely, the desired width of sheaf and
of the elements are used only under special cir- the range to the target. An example of such a
cumstances and are not announced when they command is BATTERY ADJUST, SHEAF 100
have no practical application. METERS AT 5000, SHELL HE, etc. The desired
width of sheaf and the range to the target are
4-30. Pieces to Follow Commands not announced to the pieces. The command to
The element designating pieces to follow the com- the pieces to apply a deflection difference is part
mands indicates and alerts those pieces that are of the element of direction (para 4-38c).
to follow the commands; this element is always
announced in the initial fire commands and is not c. In units in which the pieces are equipped
repeated thereafter. A change of the element (all with on-carriage elevation fire control instru-
pieces to follow the commands) during a mission ments, the command USE GUNNER'S QUAD-
constitutes a new mission and requires that a new RANT is announced as the second element of the
series of commands be given. The command con- fire commands in all missions in which the use
sists of two parts: first, the designation of of the gunner's quadrant is desired.
pieces to follow the commands and, second, the d. When a large deflection shift is indicated,
command ADJUST. Examples of the commands loss of time, caused by shifting trails, can be
to alert the pieces are as follows: minimized by announcing a rough azimuth as
special instructions immediately following BAT-
a. To alert all pieces, the command is BATTERY TERY ADJUST. Example: BATTERY AD-
ADJUST. JUST, AZIMUTH 1000.
b. To alert the base piece, the command is BASE
4-32. Projectile
PIECE ADJUST (NUMBER 3 ADJUST). The element projectile indicates the type of pro-
c. To alert the left (right) (center) pair of jectile that will be used in attacking the target.
pieces, the command is LEFT (RIGHT) (CEN- This element is always announced in the initial
TER) ADJUST. fire commands and is not announced thereafter,
d. To alert any other combination of unless a change is desired.
pieces,
the pieces are designated by number. For ex-
4-33. Ammunition Lot
ample, a command might be NUMBERS 2, 3, 4, The element ammunition lot indicates the lot
and 5 ADJUST. number of the ammunition to be fired. The lot
number, when applicable, is announced in the
4-31. Special Instructions initial fire commands and is not announced there-
The element special instructions is used in the after unless a change is desired. For fixed and
cases discussed in a through d below.
semifixed ammunition, the lot number pertains
a. In those cases in which a particular pattern to an assembled, projectile-propellant comb~na-
of bursts is desired, the S3 may direct that special tion and, for simplicity, may be coded as lot X,
corrections be applied. Special corrections are the lot Y, etc. For separate-loading ammunit'on, the
sum of position corrections and calibration cor- lot number pertains to a specific projectile-
rections and usually are computed at the fire di- propellant combination and may be coded XY, in
rection center. When special corrections are to be which X is the projectile lot and Y is the pro-
used in a mission, the command SPECIAL COR- pellant lot. Large-quantity lots are reserved for
RECTIONS is given as the second element of the registrations and subsequent transfers of fire. The
initial fire commands to alert all personnel that lot number will be announced by the FDC or pre-

4-21
 a"

Table 4-3. Sequence of Fire Commands

When announced
Sequence

Element of fire command Example Initial fire command Subsequent fire command
Number
BATTERY ADJUST - --- Always Never
1 Pieces to follow commands -
2 Special instructions SPECIAL CORRECTIONS USE GUN-
NER'S QUADRANT -When applicable When applicable
3 Projectile - SHELL HE Always When changed
4 Ammunition lot LOT XY - -When applicable . When changed
5 Charge -- CHARGE 5 Always (except for fixed ammunition) When changed
6 Fuze - FUZE QUICK - -Always . When changed
7 Pieces to fire --- CENTER Always ------ When either is changed
8 Method of fire ----- 1 ROUND, BATTERY 3 ROUNDS TIME
IN EFFECT -.......................... Always ------- When either is changed
9 Direction -- DEFLECTION 3239 Always ...................... When changed
10 Fuze setting TIME 18.0 When applicable -- When changed
11 Quadrant elevation QUADRANT 293 Always-------------------------lways
 FM 6-40

arranged between the FDC and the firing battery. plicable to fire for effect (c below). If any re-
Small-quantity lots should be used on battery striction is imposed on the time of opening fire
observer-adjusted missions. The chiefs of sections (e(1), (2), and (3) below), the restrictive com-
must segregate ammunition by lot number and mand is announced as part of the method of fire.
must keep an accurate record of lots available. a. (So many) ROUNDS. The command for
firing one round from one piece or from each of
4-34. Charge several pieces is 1 ROUND. In precision fire or
The element charge indicates the amount of pro- assault fire, the pieces to fire and the method of
pellant to be used. This element is always an- fire in the adjustment usually are BASE PIECE
nounced in the initial fire commands for weapons
1 ROUND OR NUMBER (so-and-so) 1 ROUND.
that use other than fixed ammunition. If more In area fire, the pieces to fire and the method of
than one type of propellant is available, the type
fire in the adjustment usually are CENTEiR 1
(white bag or green bag) to be used is designated ROUND. The command for firing two or more
by the lot of propellant announced in the initial rounds from one piece is (so many) ROUNDS.
fire commands. If ammunition has numbered
The first round is fired on the executive officer's
charges, the command specifies the number of the
command FIRE. The subsequent rounds are fired
charge to be fired. on the command of the chief of section as rapidly
as possible consistent with accuracy. The com-
4-35. Fuze mand for firing two or more rounds from each
The element fuze indicates the type of fuze to be of several pieces also is (so many) ROUNDS.
employed. This element is always announced in The first rounds from the pieces are fired simul-
the initial fire commands. It is announced in taneously on the executive officer's command
subsequent fire commands only when a change of FIRE. Each piece fires the designated number of
fuze is desired.
subsequent rounds on the command of the chief
of section as rapidly as possible consistent with
4-36. Pieces to Fire accuracy and without regard to the readiness of
The element pieces to fire designates the pieces
that are to be fired. This element is always an- the other pieces.
nounced in the initial fire commands. It is not b. Right (Left). The command for firing the
announced in the subsequent fire commands un- pieces in succession at 5-second intervals is RIGHT
less it is changed or the method of fire is changed. (LEFT). On the executive officer's command
a. Any or all of the pieced alerted by the first FIRE, the right (left) piece is fired, followed at
element of the fire commands may be designated 5-second intervals by each successive piece to the
to fire. If an adjustment is to be made in area left (right). If an interval other than 5 seconds
fire, the two center pieces normally will be fired is desired, the desired interval is announced as
during the adjustment. part of the method of fire; for example, RIGHT
b. When all pieces in the battery are to be (LEFT) AT 2 SECONDS. If more than one round
fired, the command is BATTERY. When the pieces per piece is to be fired, the command is RIGHT
in a platoon are to be fired, the command is LEFT (LEFT) (so many) ROUNDS. On the execu-
(CENTER) (RIGHT). Any other combination tive officer's command FIRE, the first round is
of pieces within the battery or an individual fired from the right (left) piece, followed at 5-
piece is designated by number; e.g., NUMBERS second intervals by the first round from each suc-
1 AND 6 or BASE PIECE (NUMBER 1) (NUM- cessive piece to the left (right). The subsequent
BER 2). rounds from each piece are fired in a similar man-
ner.
c. Rounds In Effect. The initial fire commands
4-37. Method of Fire
The element method of fire indicates the number for an adjusting battery in an area mission will
of rounds that are to be fired by the pieces des- include, immediately following the pieces to fire
ignated to fire and the way in which those rounds and method of fire to be used in the adjustment,
are to be fired. This element is always an- the pieces to fire for effect, the method of fire to
nounced in the initial fire commands. It is not be used in fire for effect, and the fuze and/or
announced in the subsequent fire commands un- shell to be used in fire for effect when other than
less it is changed or the pieces to fire is changed. that to be used in the adjustment; for example,
If an adjustment is to be conducted on an area CENTER 1 ROUND, BATTERY 4 ROUNDS VT
target, the method of fire for the adjusting bat- IN EFFECT or CENTER 1 ROUND, BATTERY
tery may be followed by certain commands ap- 5 ROUNDS IN EFFECT.

4-23
FM 6-40

d. Continuous Fire. Continuous fire is a method crews to lay the pieces and to make the neces-
of fire in which all pieces fire as rapidly as pos- sary preparations for firing the mission. When
sible consistent with the prescribed rate of fire the pieces to fire are laid in accordance with the
for the weapon. At the command CONTINUOUS fire commands, the executive officer reports the
FIRE, the crews will load and begin firing. Firing fact to the FDC; for example BATTERY IS
will continue until it is terminated by the com- LAID. To cancel DO NOT LOAD, the FDC must
mand END OR MISSION or is temporarily sus- announce in subsequent fire commands a method
pended by the command CEASE LOADING or of fire not coupled with DO NOT LOAD.
CHECK FIRING. CANCEL CEASE LOADING f. Zone Fire.
AND CANCEL CHECK FIRING, respectively, (1) Zone fire is a method of fire in which
negate CEASE LOADING and CHECK FIRING. the designated pieces fire in a constant direction
at several quadrant elevations. The normal com-
e. Restrictions on Opening Fire. Unless the
mand for zone fire consists of two parts-the
FDC imposes a restriction on the opening of fire number of rounds to be fired at each quadrant
by including a supplemental command with the elevation and the zone (in mils). The quadrant
method of fire, the executive officer commands
elevation, announced as the last element of the fire
FIRE when the pieces to fire are ready to fire. commands, establishes the center of the zone.
The supplemental commands that are used by the
The normal command is (so many) ROUNDS,
FDC to control the opening of fire are discussed
ZONE (so many) MILS. The executive officer
in (1) through (3) below.
has the designated pieces fire the announced num-
(1) At my command. To control the exact
ber of rounds at the announced quadrant eleva-
time of opening fire by the pieces to fire, the FDC tion and then the same number of rounds at
announces AT MY COMMAND immediately after
plus and minus the announced number of mils
the method of fire, for example, 1 ROUND, AT from the center quadrant elevation. If, for exam-
MY COMMAND. When the pieces to fire are ready ple, the commands include BATTERY 3 ROUNDS
to fire, the executive officer reports the fact to the ZONE 5 MILS, QUADRANT 240, the executive
FDC; for example, BATTERY IS READY. The officer has each piece in the battery fire three
executive officer gives the command FIRE when rounds at quadrant elevation 240, three rounds
he receives it from the fire direction center. The at 245, and three rounds at 235.
command AT MY COMMAND remains in effect (2) In some cases, the executive officer may
during a mission until it is superseded by a me- receive the command (so many) ROUNDS,
thod of fire not coupled with AT MY COMMAND. ZONE (so many) MILS, 5 QUADRANTS. The
(2) By piece at my command. To control the executive officer has the designated pieces fire
time of firing of each piece to fire, the FDC the designated number of rounds at the an-
announces BY PIECE AT MY COMMAND im- nounced quadrant elevation and then, in any se-
mediately following the method of fire; for ex- quence, has the pieces fire the designated number
ample, 1 ROUND, BY PIECE AT MY COM- of rounds at four other quadrant elevations the
MAND. When the pieces to fire are ready to fire,
announced number of mils apart, If, for example,
the executive officer reports the fact to the FDC; the commands include BATTERY 2 ROUNDS,
for example, BATTERY IS READY. The execu- ZONE 5 MILS, 5 QUADRANTS, QUADRANT
tive officer repeats the commands to fire when he 190, the executive officer has each piece in the bat-
receives them from the FDC; for example, NUM- tery fire two rounds at quadrant elevation 190,
BER 1, FIRE; NUMBER 2, FIRE; and so on. BY two at 200, two at 180, two at 185, and two at
PIECE AT MY COMMAND remains in effect 195.
during a mission until it is superseded by a me- (3) The zone command is not transmitted
thod of fire not coupled with BY PIECE AT MY
to the weapons. The executive officer controls
COMMAND.
(3) Do not load. When exact firing data or the battery by announcing each quadrant eleva-
time of firing has not been determined, it may be tion in turn. Because of the large expenditure of
desirable for the pieces to be laid but not loaded. ammunition during zone fire, the executive officer,
In such a case, the FDC announces initial fire as soon as possible, must notify each piece of the
commands and includes the command DO NOT number of rounds to prepare.
LOAD with the method of fire; for example, 3 g° Fire At Will. Fire at will is a method of fire
ROUNDS, DO NOT LOAD. The fire commands used for direct fire. The command for pieces to fire
alert the executive officer of the fire mi~ssion. By at will is TARGET (so-and-so), FIRE AT WILL.
announcing the fire commands, he can cause the If a method of close defense has been prearranged,

4-24
 FM 6-40

the command is simply FIRE AT WILL. At this d. The unit standing operating procedure may
command, the designated piece or pieces will fire specify that the deflection correction be applied
under the control of the chiefs of sections as the to the gunner's aid for each piece. In such a
situation and target necessitate. case, the direction element will include a com-
h. Shifting Fire. mand indicating the direction and magnitude of
(1) When the width of the target is so the deflection correction; i.e., CORRECTION,
great that the target cannot be covered effectively LEFT (RIGHT) (so much), DEFLECTION (so
with an open sheaf, the target may be attacked much). The deflection correction is announced in
by successive shifts. the initial fire commands only. The deflection cor-
(2) In shifting fire, the battery is laid first rection must be applied to the gunner's aid be-
on one portion of the target and then successively fore the chart deflection is set off. When special
laid on the other portions to be covered. Fire corrections are to be used, the FDC combines
by the battery is delivered alternately on each por- the deflection correction (from the deflection cor-
tion of the target. rection scale) and the special correction for de-
flection and announces the total deflection cor-
4-33. Direction rection for each piece (e.g., CORRECTION,
The element direction indicates the deflection on NUMBER 1 LEFT (RIGHT) (so much) ) prior
which the piece(s) is to be laid. to the announcement of the common (chart) de-
a. The command to lay the piece for direction flection.
is DEFLECTION (so much). This element is
always given in the initial fire commands but is 4-39. Fuze Setting
The element fuze setting indicates the proper set-
given in subsequent fire commands only when it
ting for time fuze or VT fuze and is given only
is changed. The gunner sets off the deflection on
when applicable to the mission.
his panoramic telescope and then traverses until
he is sighted on the proper aiming point. The a. When time fuze in effect has been specified,
a fuze setting will be required in the fire com-
announced deflection is the sum of the chart de-
mands after the adjustment with fuze quick. The
flection and the deflection correction, if any.
element is announced thereafter only when a
b. If special corrections are to be used, the com- change in fuze setting is desired. The same pro-
puter at the FDC combines the special correc- cedure applies when a fuze setting with VT fuze
tions for deflection, the deflection correction, and is used. Fuze setting for time fuze is computed
the chart deflection and announces the total de- and announced to the nearest tenth (e.g., TIME
flection for each piece (e.g., DEFLECTION 17.4), but fuze setting for VT fuze is announced
NUMBER 1, 3263; NUMBER 2, 3261; etc). as a whole number expressed to the tenth (e.g.,
TIME 17.0 or 21.0).
c. If a deflection difference is to be applied, b. When special corrections are to be used, the
the deflection difference is announced as part of FDC combines the special correction for fuze
the direction element, following the common setting and the common fuze setting and an-
deflection (e.g., DEFLECTION 3222, ON NUM- nounces the total fuze setting for each piece (e.g.,
BER 3, CLOSE 2). Each gunner determines the TIME, NUMBER 1, 28.4; NUMBER 2,28.6; etc.).
deflection difference for his piece by multiplying
the announced number of mils by the number of 4-40. Quadrant Elevation
piece intervals between his piece and the piece on The element quadrant elevation indicates the
which the sheaf is being opened or closed. The quadrant elevation at which the piece (s) is to be
gunner applies the computed deflection difference fired. This element is always announced in the
in the proper direction. For example, if the direc- initial fire commands and in subsequent fire com-
tion element includes the command ON NUM- mands.
BER 3, CLOSE 3, the gunners will apply correc- a. Quadrant elevation is the sum of elevation
tions as follows: number 1, left 6; number 2, left plus site. The command to lay for quadrant ele-
3; number 3, 0; number 4, right 3; number 5, vation is QUADRANT (so much).
right 6; number 6, right 9. The command for a b. When special corrections are to be used,
deflection difference remains in effect until the end the FDC combines the special correction for ele-
of the mission unless a command for another vation and the common quadrant elevation and
deflection difference is given or the command announces the total quadrant elevation for each
PARALLEL, which cancels the deflection dif- piece (e.g., QUADRANT, NUMBER 1, 293;
ference, is given. NUMBER 2, 296; etc.).

4-25
 FM 6-40

c. The command for quadrant elevation is the is resumed at the announcement of CANCEL
command to load the piece, except when DO NOT CHECK FIRING followed by the quadrant.
LOAD is a part of the method of fire or when a
salute is being fired. 4-43. End of Mission
d. Unless the method of fire includes BY The command END OF MISSION means that
PIECE AT MY COMMAND, AT MY COMMAND the fire mission has been completed.
or DO NOT LOAD, the command for quadrant
elevation received from the FDC gives the exe- 4-44. Repetition of Commands
cutive officer the authority to fire when ready. a. By Chief of Section.
When all pieces to fire are ready, the executive (1) Voice communication. When the exe-
officer commands FIRE. The chiefs of section will cutive officer controls the battery by means of
repeat the command FIRE as it is given. The voice communication, the chief of section repeats
command FIRE should be delayed only when a the commands FIRE and CHECK FIRING. He
substantial reason for a delay exists; for ex- repeats any other commands given by the execu-
ample, a safety or accuracy check. tive officer only when he is requested to do so
or when the commands obviously have not been
4-41. Examples of Fire Commands heard or understood by the crew. The request for
All commands received from the FDC are repeated repetition is stated as a question (e.g., DEFLEC-
by the executive officer or designated personnel TION NUMBER (so-and-so)?; QUADRANT
of the firing battery unless otherwise noted. NUMBER (so-and-so) ?).
a. An example of the initial fire commands for
a precision registration is shown below. (2) Intrabattery communication. When wire
BASE PIECE ADJUST communication is used between the executive
SHELL HE officer's command post and the individual sections,
LOT XY the read-back of elements of the fire commands
CHARGE 4 will be governed by unit standing operating proce-
FUZE QUICK dure. The cannoneer operating the telephone must
BASE PIECE 1 ROUND announce each element of the fire commands to
DEFLECTION 3450 his section.
QUADRANT 315 b. By Executive Officer. The repetition of com-
b. An example of the initial fire commands mands by the executive officer or the person
for zone fire is shown below. transmitting commands to the pieces after he has
BATTERY ADJUST announced them is always preceded by THE
SHELL HE COMMAND WAS (e.g., THE COMMAND WAS,
LOT XY DEFLECTION 2768). When special corrections
CHARGE 5 have been announced as a special instruction, the
FUZE QUICK person transmitting the commands should after
BATTERY 1 ROUND a request for repetition, repeat the special correc-
ZONE 4 MILS tions for the requesting piece as it relates to that
DEFLECTION 3480 element of the fire commands (e.g., THE COM-
QUADRANT 268. (QUADRANT elevations MAND WAS NUMBER 3, TIME 21.8).
268, 272, and 264 will be fired.)
4-45. Signals
4-42. Check Firing Arm and hand signals are used in conjunction
The command CHECK FIRING normally is with oral commands to achieve greater clarity.
given by the executive officer but, in an emer- The chief of section extends his right arm verti-
gency, may be given by anyone. This command cally, with the palm of his hand toward the
is immediately repeated to the battery by the first executive officer (the ready position), to indicate
individual receiving it. At the command, regard- that his piece is ready to fire. When he cannot
less of its source, firing will cease immediately. be seen by the executive officer, he reports NUM-
If this command originates from the observer or BER (so-and-so) READY. The commands Fire
FDC and the piece is loaded, the executive of- and CHECK FIRING usually are given by arm
ficer reports NUMBER 2 (or other piece) signals as well as by voice. The signal for FIRE
LOADED. If firing is stopped by someone at the is either to drop the right arm sharply from
position, the executive officer reports that fact the ready position to the side or to point with the
and the reason to the fire direction center. Firing right hand at the piece to be fired, extend the

4-26
 FM 6-40

arm to the ready position, and drop it sharply c. MISFIRE NUMBER (so-and-so)--when a
to the side. The signal for CHECK FIRING is to misfire has occurred. The executive officer reports
raise the hand in front of the forehead, palm to NUMBER (so-and-so) IS READY when the
the front, and swing the hand and forearm up piece is again ready to fire and the fire mission
and down in front of the face. has not been completed.
d. number (so-and-so) IS OUT (reason)-
4-46. Final Protective Fires when a piece has been called out.
a. The battery final protective fire (FPF) is e. Number of rounds expended, by type (and
a prearranged barrier of fire designed to be fired lot number when required)-when the fire mis-
quickly on a critical line or area. It is a high sion has been completed.
priority fire mission that takes precedence over f. Errors-when any round has been fired with
all other fire missions. When the battery is not incorrect data. The chief of section must report
firing other missions, it is laid on its final pro- immediately to the executive officer all errors
tective fire and appropriately prepared rounds that have caused a round to be fired with incor-
are kept at the pieces. rect data. The executive officer has these errors
b. The final protective fire may be initiated corrected and reports to the FDC; e.g., NUM-
by the command FIRE THE FINAL PROTEC- BER 2 FIRED 20 MILS RIGHT: ERROR HAS
TIVE FIRE or by a prearranged signal. If the BEEN CORRECTED.
command or signal is received when the crews
are resting, the piece sentinels begin firing im- 4-48. Checking Setting During Firing
The executive officer usually checks settings and
mediately on the command FIRE THE FINAL
laying during lulls in firing. When the execu-
PROTECTIVE FIRE or on receipt of the prear-
tive officer questions the accuracy of the lay of any
ranged signal.
piece, he calls that piece out, reports that fact
to the FDC, and has the necessary checks made.
4-47. Reports
The executive officer reports to the FDC all ac- When the battery is firing close to friendly troops,
tions that affect the firing of the battery. In ad- frequent checks must be made to insure their
dition to those reports previously mentioned safety.
(BATTERY IS READY, BATTERY IS LAID, 4-49. Correcting Fire Commands by
CHECK FIRING), the following specific reports Executive Officer
are made: a. If an incorrect command has been announced
a. SHOT (NUMBER (so-and-so) SHOT)- but the command FIRE has not been given, the
when the first round of a series has been fired. executive officer announces CORRECTION and
The number of the piece that is firing is included then announces the correct command and all sub-
in the report (e.g. NUMBER 1 SHOT) only if sequent elements.
BY PIECE AT MY COMMAND was included in b. If the command FIRE has been given, the
the method of fire. executive officer announces CHECK FIRING. He
b. ROUNDS COMPLETE-when the number then announces CANCEL CHECK FIRING and
of rounds specified in fire for effect have been announces the correct command and all subse-
fired (other than NUMBER (so-and-so) 1 quent elements. Firing continues with the an-
ROUND). nouncement of QUADRANT.

Section V. ASSAULT AND DIRECT FIRE

4-50. Assault Fire coordination must be completed before the gun

a. Assault fire is a special technique of in- (howitzer) position is occupied.
direct fire. Fire is conducted at a relatively short b. Any artillery cannon can be used for as-
range to attain pinpoint accuracy against a sta- sault fire; however, any caliber smaller than 155-
tionary target. The gun-target range is suffi- mm is considered uneconomical. The most efficient
ciently short to make possible successive hits on the weapons, in order of preference, are the 8-inch
same portions of the target. Only one piece is howitzer, the 155-mm howitzer, and the 175-mm
used on a mission, and the FDC for the mission gun. Self-propelled versions of these weapons are
normally is located at the gun (howitzer) posi- best suited in many instances for this task be-
tion. Thorough planning, reconnaissance, and cause of their maneuverability and ease of em-

4-27
FM 6-40

placement and displacement. When the maximum b. Changes in elevation are made to the near-
charge is used, maximum effective assault fire est 0.1 mil; the gunner's quadrant is used.
ranges are 3,000 meters for the 8-inch howitzer
and 2,500 meters for the 155-mm howitzer and 4-52. Direct Fire
the 175-mm gun. Firing by direct laying is a special technique that
demands a high standard of training. The sec-
tion must operate as an independent unit. Enemy
4-51. Assault Fire Procedure targets taken under fire by direct laying proce-
a. In order to make the small deflection
dures are usually those capable of returning fire
changes which are necessary in assault fire, a
at pointblank range; therefore, speed and ac-
special technique of laying is employed at the
curacy in direct fire are of the utmost import-
piece. Deflection changes are made to the nearest
ance.
mil until a 1-mil deflection bracket has been ob-
tained; further changes are made to the nearest a. Methods of Sighting.
1/t mil. One-fourth mil can be set on weapons (1) Two-man, two-sight. In the two-man,
equipped with the M100 sights. For weapons with two-sight system, the gunner establishes lead with
other sights, a deflection board attached to an aim- the panoramic telescope and the assistant gunner
ing post is used for this purpose. The deflection establishes elevation with the direct fire tele-
board (fig 4-15) enables the gunner to make de- scope. This system is the fastest and most ac-
flection changes to 1/1 mil. The black and white curate method of sighting and permits the as-
bands (lines) are 1/4 mil in width when viewed sistant gunner to check the direction of lead. A
through the sight of the piece at a distance canted reticle in the direct fire telescope will
of exactly 50 meters. The gunner lays on the de- prevent satisfactory direct fire on moving tar-
sired portion of the board by centering the verti- gets because an unacceptable range error is in-
cal crosshair of the sight on a black (white) troduced when lead is changed.
band on the board. To move 1/t mil, he moves (2) Two-man, one-sight. In the two-man,
the line of sight by traversing the piece in the one-sight system, the gunner establishes lead
proper direction so that the adjacent white with the panoramic telescope and the assistant
(black) band is covered; to move 1/2 mil he gunner sets elevation on the elevation quadrant
moves the vertical crosshair two bands; etc. at the command of the chief of section. This sys-
tem is most effective when the target is moving
on flat terrain.
(3) One-man, one-sight. In the one-man, one-
12.25 millimeters sight system, the gunner lays for lead and eleva-
.48 inch tion with the reticle of the panoramic telescope.
i 3/4I This system should not be used if the target
I I I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
is moving on a steep slope.
b. Methods of Laying.
(1) Reticle laying with deflection zero. The
gunner maintains lead by placing the verticle
hairline the proper number of mils ahead of the
center of the target.
(a) Continuous tracking. Lead and eleva-
L.LLL tion are laid and maintained in tracking the tar-
get.
(b) Laying ahead. The gunner does not
track the target but lays ahead of it for lead
and adjusts the elevation as the target approaches
the correct lead.
1/2 ri
--1/4 ni (2) Central laying. The gunner sets the lead
_0 in mils on the azimuth micrometer scale of the
panoramic telescope and maintains the verticle
hairline of the reticle on the center of the tar-
get. A modification on the knob of the M100
series panoramic telescope, called click sights,
Figure 4-15. Deflection board. permits the gunner to set off lead in 5-mil in-

4-28
 FM 6-40

crements, by sound or feel, without removing his weapons vary widely. For a discussion of a par-
eye from the sight. ticular weapon, see the field manual for the
c. Direct Fire Characteristics. The direct fire weapon involved.
characteristics of current standard field artillery

4-29
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 5
FIRING BATTERY OPERATIONS AND TRAINING

Section I. GENERAL
5-1. Introduction they have gained full proficiency in their own
Field artillery doctrine demands the delivery of jobs. The executive officer frequently should time
timely and accurate fires. The firing battery, as the sections with a stopwatch to emphasize speed
part of the gunnery team, bears a large share of as well as accuracy. Specific individuals should
the responsibility for the delivery of effective be assigned to observe and check specific items.
fire. The battery executive officer is in direct The use of command cards will speed and improve
charge of the training and operation of the firing the conduct of the drill. Occasionally, the chiefs of
battery. During training he must institute prac- sections should be drilled separately in setting
tices and procedures which will assure the ac- the gunner's quadrant, to include making changes
curate and timely execution of fire commands. in elevation to the nearest 0.1 mil.
c. The battery must be trained to execute
5-2. Principles of Training
a. Proper training of the firing battery starts all possible fire commands. Large changes in de-
with the training of each individual in the speci- flection and elevation (greater than 100 mils)
fic duties in service of the piece prescribed in the should be included in some commands to facilitate
appropriate manual. Next is the training of the checking for 100-mil errors. Changes in deflec-
section as a team. Finally, the sections are tion that require shifting of trails should be
brought together and trained as the firing bat- avoided except when training is being conducted
tery. Standing operating procedures must be in trail shifting. The method of fire should be
developed as training progresses. changed frequently to teach the various methods
b. Accuracy must be emphasized in the initial of fire, to increase alertness, and to insure famili-
stages of each phase of training. As training arity with all commands so that no command
progresses, speed is gradually gained but loss of. during firing will surprise any member of the
accuracy is not tolerated. firing battery. As training progresses, more diffi-
c. The firing battery must be trained to oc- cult commands should be included and more dif-
cupy position and execute fire commands during ficult situations presented.
darkness and inclement weather.
5-4. Accuracy Requirements
5-3. Conduct of Service-of-the-Piece Drill Some of the standards which must be met during
a. Successful operation of the firing battery all service-of-the-piece training (firing or drill)
depends primarily on instilling pride into the are listed in a through h below.
firing battery personnel in the rapid and precise a. Leveling Vial. After the breech is closed and
execution of all commands. The success of before the weapon is fired, the bubbles of the
service-of-the-piece drill depends on the ability leveling vials must be centered exactly.
of the chiefs of sections and the executive officer b. Indexes. The proper graduation must be
and his assistants to recognize unsafe, incorrect, alined exactly with the index.
or careless performance of duties by individuals. c. Micrometer Knobs. When the scales are be-
Service-of-the-piece drills provide practice and ing set, the last motion of the micrometer knobs
test the whole team as well as the individual must be from the lower to the higher reading.
members. Pieces should be placed close together d. Traverse. The last motion of the traversing
to facilitate observation and supervision. Tele- handwheel should cause the vertical hairline of
phone communications may be installed to train the panoramic telescope to approach the aiming
section personnel in the use of telephones for point from left to right; if the collimator is being
receipt of commands. used, the appropriate lead line in the reticle pat-
b. Drills should be kept interesting, short, and tern of the panoramic telescope should approach
snappy, with frequent rest periods. The gunner the aiming point from left to right. If the ver-
and all cannoneers may exchange positions after tical hairline or appropriate lead line passes the

5-1
FM 6-40

aiming point, the handwheel should be turned projectile, and variation in the effective size of
back one complete turn and a new approach the powder chamber. These factors will, in turn,
made. The gunner must be trained to habitually cause range inaccuracies. Hard ramming is es-
lay with the right edge of the vertical hairline sential to safety. If the projectile is not seated
on exactly the same portion of the aiming point firmly, particularly at high quadrant elevations,
(left edge of the aiming posts when exactly ver- it may slip back into the powder chamber and
tical) or with the appropriate lead line lined up rest on the charge. Firing the weapon with the
with the number displayed in the collimator. projectiles in this position may cause a prema-
e. Fuze Setters and Fuzes. When settings on ture detonation, which could result in a serious
the fuze setter are being made, the last motion accident.
should be in the direction of increasing readings.
f.Elevation. When the tube of any field ar- 5-5. Equipment Checks
tillery piece is elevated or depressed, the last mo- a. All fire control equipment must be in cor-
tion of the handwheel should be in the direction rect adjustment. All section equipment, espe-
which offers the greatest resistance. If the de- cially sighting and laying equipment, should be
sired elevation is passed, the handwheel should checked frequently for serviceability and com-
be turned back one complete turn before the bub- pleteness. Sighting and laying equipment should
ble is centered. be checked immediately after the battery goes
g. Aiming Posts. The far aiming post should into firing position. Some tests and adjustments
be approximately 100 meters from the sight of are made periodically or when the need is evi-
the piece. The near aiming post must be half- dent. Refer to the appropriate technical manual
way between the piece and the far aiming post. for those adjustments which may be made by
The chief of section and the gunner must check battery personnel.
to insure that the aiming posts are placed at the b. Boresighting is the process by which the
proper distances and that they are exactly ver- optical axes of the panoramic and elbow tele-
tical and alined. scopes are made parallel, to the axis of the bore,
h. Uniformity in Ramming. Uniform ramming when the scales of the mounts and telescopes are
helps prevent unusual variations in muzzle velo- set at 0 or 3200 as appropriate. (Refer to the
city. Nonuniform ramming may cause variation specific weapon field manual for the methods
in seating, escape of propellant gases around the of boresighting.)

Section II. FIELD OPERATIONS OF THE FIRING BATTERY

5-6. Duties of the Battery Executive Officer (8) Directs and supervises the firing bat-
The duties of the battery executive officer in field tery in the delivery of fire.
operation of the firing battery are as follows: (9) Insures compliance with safety rules.
a. Before the battery leaves the motor park (10) Insures uniform and adequate storage
or assembly area, he- of ammunition.
(1) Insures that equipment and ammunition (11) Supervises accounting of ammunition
are complete, serviceable, and properly stored. to include lot segregation and control.
(2) Makes a reconnaissance of the new posi- (12) Supervises fire direction when the mis-
tion, if feasible, and determines the zone of fire sion is being conducted by the battery.
or safety limits.
c. Prior to entering combat (actual or simu-
b. At the firing position, he-
lated), he insures that the firing battery is cap-
(1) Supervises the occupation of position.
able of-
(2) Lays the battery or verifies the laying
of the battery. (1) Twenty-four-hour operation.
(3) Checks communications. (2) Efficient occupation and organization
(4) Has personnel recheck recoil mechanisms of the position.
and adjustment of instruments. (3) Passive defense of the position through
(5) Determines minimum quadrant eleva- proper camouflage, light discipline, and other
tions. measures.
(6) Gives the executive officer's report to (4) Active defense of the position by direct
the FDC. laying of the pieces, by use of other organic
(7) Has the pieces boresighted when time weapons (machineguns, rocket launchers, and
permits. small arms), and by use of mirns and trip flares.

5-2
 FM 6-40

(5) Operating efficiently within safety (para 5-7), the following records are also kept
rules. in the firing battery and must be checked by the
executive officer for completeness and accuracy:
5-7. Duties of the Recorder a. A Firing Battery Section Data Sheet (DA
a. The recorder is an assistant to the battery Form 4007) (fig 5-2) for each section is usually
executive officer. As his title implies, he main- prepared by the FDC for prearranged and close-
tains certain records for the executive officer. in defensive fires. The section data sheet con-
In addition, he installs and operates the neces- tains the information necessary to permit the
sary telephones. Among those records that he chief of section to fire the listed targets. The
maintains are- chief of section is responsible for announcing
(1) DA Form 3623 (Firing Battery Record- the fire commands directed on the section data
er's Sheet), (fig 5-1), on which he records lay- sheet. (DA Form 4007 is available through nor-
ing data, fire commands, and a running total, by mal AG publication supply channels.)
type and lot, of ammunition on hand in each sec- b. Each section maintains a US Army equip-
tion. (DA Form 3623 is available through nor- ment log book for recording the history of the
mal AG Publication supply channels.) carriage or mount and the tube data. DA Form
(2) A file of data on prearranged fires to 2408-4, (Weapon Record Data) which is filed
include the final protective fire data. in the equipment log book, serves as a perman-
(3) A record of the minimum quadrant ele- ent life history of a weapon and must accurately
vations and a record of the referred deflections reflect the ammunition fired and the dates of fir-
for each weapon. ing. Entries must be checked periodically, espe-
b. When directed to do so, the recorder an- cially calibration data and ordnance service en-
nounces fire commands to the pieces. tries. The artillery mechanic keeps an up-to-
date record of all maintenance performed on the
5-8. Records and Data Maintained inthe weapon to supplement data in the weapon record
Firing Battery book.
In addition to the records kept by the recorder

5-3
 FIRING BATTERY RECORDER'S SHEET A DATE PAGE NUMBER
*1I
For use of this form, see FM 6-40; proponent agency is US Army Training
and Doctrine Command. /a' ,
BATTERY LAID ON
AMMUNITION AND FUZES ON HAND
AZIMUTH AZIMUTH OF OL ORIENTING ANGLE DEFLECTION

FI RE COMMAN DS

PIECES
FOLLOWTO SP
INSTR SH LOT CHG FZ FIRE/MF
PIECES TO DF TI QE 64F" 3, /00 . J0, / /? /
. .. . . AMMUNITION EXPENE

19 777 , c-_-__--
o2)z>-U -

@____"T - =3' Ol 2 zo o ,/*o __ ._

__ , o __
. __

&AM
070

DA ~
o... '19" 27 -
ELCSDA. FoRMo6,,., 1 AUG,6. w.uic, o.. t....
... 9.. vt~
w r0 VU96W
Figure 5-1. Firing Battery Recorder's Sheet
(DA Form 3623).
 e
FIRING BATTERY SECTION DATA SHEET
For use of this form, see FM 6-40; proponent agency is
US Army Training and Doctrine Command.
SECTION BATTERY
I
DATE
A
NO.

TGT TIME AMMUNITION METHOD CORR DF TIME QE. REM

NO. FROM TO SH. LOT CHG FZ. OF FIRE

7,,0o3 H- xy 5" 77 e3 13342. .7'6 20

'of O5-22. 05'2V )E Ky S. @ ___3261 .3

5027 HEXI)(/
oS2 & VT G3Q0__rZJI-l1 *#V7

-110-Pz 00j y ___ _ _

4Z ONY ~ ~ d ~~~~~~( OAJ $r

,,,

4y3 3/3

- -- _ _ I_ __ __ _ __ _ __ _ __ _

3333/7

D JAN 74007
REPLACES DA FORM 6-13, 1 DEC 63, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.

U Figure 5-2. FiringBattery Section Data Sheet

(DA Form 4007).
 FM 6-40

Section III. CARE AND HANDLING OF AMMUNITION

5-9. Ammunition References should be kept tight in the shell nose until the
The technical manual issued with each weapon projectile is ready for use. This will prevent
contains a list of authorized ammunition, in- moisture from affecting the explosive and prevent
structions for marking and packing ammuni- the lifting plug from rusting in place. The rotat-
tion, and other technical information. For a gen- ing band grommet must be secure and tight to
eral discussion of ammunition, see TM 9-1300- prevent nicking and scarring the comparatively
200; for characteristics of all types of artillery soft rotating band.
ammunition, see TM 9-1300-203. b. High-explosive projectiles issued for use
with VT fuzes are standard projectiles with the
5-10. General Safety Precautions fuze and booster cavities deepened to accommo-
a. Careful handling of ammunition is neces- date the longer VT fuze. Each of these projec-
sary to insure proper functioning and to avoid tiles is issued with a removable supplementary
accidents. Since accuracy of fire is affected by charge so that the projectile may be used with
damaged ammunition, the care and handling of either an impact fuze, a mechanical time fuze
artillery ammunition must be carefully super- or a VT fuze. The supplementary charge is re-
vised. Firing battery personnel must have de- moved only when the projectile is used with a
tailed knowledge of the marking, purpose, and VT fuze and must be in place when the projec-
functioning of each component. tile is used with a mechanical time fuze or an
b. Basic principles of ammunition handling for impact fuze.
firing battery personnel are as follows:
(1) Know in detail how to assemble and Warning: Do not attempt to remove the
prepare the ammunition. supplementary charge by any means other than
(2) Do not tumble, drag, throw, or drop the lifting loop. If the charge cannot be re-
boxes of ammunition or ammunition components. moved by the lifting loop, the round may be
(3) Do not allow smoking, open flames, or disposed of or fired with a PD fuze or an MT
other fire hazards around ammunition. or MTSQ fuze. The deep cavity may be lined
(4) Inspect each round prior to use to in- with a paper tube and bottom cup which help
sure that it is clean, properly assembled, and support the high-explosive filler. This lining will
otherwise suitable for use. not be removed at any time.
(5) Protect all ammunition components from 5-12. Propelling Charges
moisture, extremes of temperature, and corrosive a. Care must be exercised to insure that all
chemicals. increments of a propelling charge are present
(6) Never make unauthorized alterations on and of the same lot number and that only the
ammunition or mix components of one lot or proper increments are removed from the com-
round of ammunition with those of another. plete charge before firing. The cannoneer pre-
(7) Do not reuse cartridges or projectiles paring a propelling charge for firing must count
which have been extracted from weapons by and identify by number not only the increments
ramming. Extraction difficulty may have been removed from a charge but also the increments
caused by some nonstandard condition in the not removed. This precaution will help eliminate
ammunition, or the fuze may have been dam- mistakes in the preparation of the charge and
aged during extraction. will also enable the cannoneer to detect missing
5-11. Projectiles or duplicate increments. Propellant bags should
a. Each projectile must be inspected to insure not be torn or ripped, and there should be no
that there is no leakage of the contents, that it leakage of contents. Before the charge for a round
is correctly assembled, and that the bourrelet of separate-loading ammunition is loaded, the
and rotating band are smooth and free of burs data tag and igniter pad cover must be removed.
and large dents. If the rotating band is burred Ammunition which has been prepared for a cer-
or nicked, it should be smoothed with a fiat, fine- tain charge should be carefully segregated from
grained file or with crocus cloth backed with a other ammunition. Charges for which firing
small block of wood. Projectiles, especially those is not immediately planned should be resealed.
that are issued unfuzed, are relatively safe from Increments removed from a prepared charge are
detonation by small-arms fire or shell fragments. left with the charge until the charge is. fired
On separate-loading ammunition, the lifting plug so that, if necessary, a higher charge than oni-
 FM 6-40

ginally planned may be fired or the ammunition 5-14. Fuzes

may be repacked conveniently. Increments left a. Fuzes are sensitive to shock. Moisture or
over from charges already fired are immediately
high temperature may impair the functioning of
removed to a point 30 to 40 feet from the near- a fuze. Each fuze should be inspected carefully
est weapon or ammunition until the battery per- to ascertain that it is properly assembled and set.
sonnel can dispose of them.
A separate fuze should be tightened as much as
possible by hand and then should be firmly seated
b. It is not practical to salvage unused incre- with a sharp snap of the M18 fuze wrench. Care
ments. Unused increments may be burned in the must be taken to start the mesh of the threads
open in small quantities. If large quantities of properly. When a fuze is not tightly seated,
unused increments are burned, they may ex- premature detonation may occur through sud-
plode. When it is necessary to destroy the base den seating from rotation in the bore. With fixed
charge of a round of separate-loading ammuni- and semifixed ammunition, the packing stop
tion, the igniter pad should be separated from must be removed before firing.
the base charge and handled in accordance with b. In an adjust fire mission, initial fuze set-
the provisions of TM 9-1300-206. The person dis- tings for the nonadjusting batteries will not be
posing of the igniter pad should not cut it open set on the fuzes. In a mission in which the meth-
with a metallic object, such as a knife, since od of fire includes DO NOT LOAD, fuze settings
it may cause premature ignition. will not be set on the fuzes until a method of
fire that permits loading the weapons is received.
c. Propelling charges absorb moisture and
should be kept in the containers until just before
(When the mechanical time fuze setter is used,
the time is set on the fuze setter when the time
use. This precaution reduces the danger of fire
is announced.) This will preclude setting the
from sparks, blowbacks, small-arms fire, and hot
fuze more than once if a different fuze setting
shell fragments. Propellants must also be pro-
is required when the final time is announced.
tected from excessive and rapid changes in tem-
When time fuze has been set but not fired, the
perature and from the direct rays of the sun.
fuze is reset to SAFE and the safety pin is in-
High temperatures greatly accelerate the nor-
serted before the fuze is replaced in the contain-
mal rate of deterioration and cause excessive and
er.
irregular chamber pressures in firing, which re-
c. A fuze setter graduated to suit the fuze is
sult in erratic ranges (para 2-9g). Sudden
required for accurate and rapid setting of a time
changes in temperature may also cause moisture
fuze. A number of models of fuze setters have
to condense on the charges. At the battery posi-
been standardized. The details of the use of fuze
tion, the propellant temperature of ready am-
setters are contained in the appropriate field
munition (propellant charges) that is represen-
manual for the weapon.
tative of ammunition designated for early use
should be checked periodically. The rounds or
d. Proximity VT fuzes belong to a class of
special fuzes for use with deep cavity high-
propellant charges so checked should not be re-
explosive projectiles (para 5-11b). The length
moved from the rest of the ammunition. The
of the fuze booster assembly of a VT fuse is
temperature should be measured in place so that
longer than that of a standard impact fuze. The
a true mean can be obtained. The thermometer
should penetrate the charge that is being used,
VT fuze is completely boresafe. The arming me-
and it must not touch any metal.
chanisms or the M513- and M514-series fuzes
provide an additional safe period during the first
5-13. Cartridge Cases 2 seconds time of flight. A fuze setting is made
Cartridge cases should be inspected carefully for manually with a mechanical fuze setter. It is
cracks or dents which might affect their func- important that the time scale of the fuze setter
tioning. Care is necessary in handling cartridge correspond to the time ring of the fuze (0-100
cases, for they are easily dented. Striking the with either the M513 or M514 series). The indi-
base of a cartridge case may cause accidental vidual setting the fuze should look down on the
firing of the primer. A badly corroded cartridge nose of the fuze and rotate the cap in a clockwise
case is difficult to extract from the chamber and direction, which is the direction of increasing
may rupture. With semifixed ammunition, it is readings. In the event the fuze setter M14 or M27
important that the mouth of the case not be de- is used and the desired setting is passed, the
formed. A deformed case is difficult to load and clockwise rotation of the cap is continued un-
may result in a serious blowback if fired. til the desired setting is again reached. The cap

5-7
FM 6-40

should not be "backed up" to the setting, because and fire direction center. The lot number for
this introduces backlash and reduces timing ac- each stack of ammunition (or a unit code desig-
curacy. The 0 setting line (2.0 seconds) is the nation for that number) should be prominently
lowest point at which VT action can be expected displayed. As a general rule, the firing of the lot
from the fuze. The ammunition caliber is sten- used for a registration is restricted to transfers
ciled on the fuze body. For details on the care and missions in which two or more batteries are
and use of fuzes, refer to appropriate ordnance to mass. In units which fire separate-loading am-
technical publications. munition, both propellants and projectiles must be
Note. The M513 (T226), M513B1 (226B1), M514 segregated by lot and the desired propellant-
(T227), and M514B1 (T227B1) fuzes do not have a PD projectile combination must be designated in the
setting and should not be used when PD action is desired. initial fire commands. In units which fire fixed or
The PD element is armed by the VT element and is for semifixed ammunition, the lot for the complete
self-destruction only. round is announced (para 5-10b(6) ).
5-15. Primers 5-19. Replacing Ammunition in Containers
Primers are sensitive to shock and moisture. Pri- Great care must be exercised to insure that all
mers will be kept away from propellant bags ammunition returned to containers is completely
and will be left in their sealed containers until serviceable. Before a round is replaced in a con-
ready for use. Before a primer is used, it should tainer, a certificate, prepared by an officer of the
be carefully cleaned and inspected. If it shows battery, will be inserted under the tape used to
signs of corrosion or if the seal is not firmly in seal the container so that the certificate will be
place, the primer should be rejected. visible when the container is sealed. The cer-
tificate will certify that-
5-16. Flash Reducers a. All increments are present.
Flash reducers are used with white bag (multi-
perforated) propelling charges for separate- b. All increments are serviceable and undam-
loading ammunition and are assembled to a par- aged.
ticular charge as prescribed in TM 9-1300-203. c. All increments are in proper numerical or-
Because of their hygroscopic qualities, flash re- der.
ducers must not be removed from the containers d. All increments have the same lot number.
until just before they are to be used. Flash re- e. The lot number of the ammunition is the
ducers must not be allowed to contact damp same as that on the container.
ground. Discarded increments should be disposed 5-20. Data for Computation of Corrections
of in the same manner as discarded igniter pads The executive officer supplies the fire direction
(para 5-12b). center with the following ammunition data for
computing corrections:
5-17. Chemical Projectiles (Cartridges) a. Weight of Projectile. The weight of the pro-
a. When toxic chemicals are being fired, all jectile is reported as it is marked on the projec-
personnel should wear protective masks and per- tile; e.g., 1 square, 2 squares, etc., or (so many)
sonnel handling the ammunition should wear pounds.
gloves. Decontaminating agents should be held b. Propellant Temperature. The propellant
in readiness. temperature reported should be a representative
b. White phosphorus (WP) projectiles will be figure for the charges to be fired by the battery,
stacked vertically and protected from high considering variations within stacks and differ-
temperature. If WP projectiles are stacked hori- ences between sections. The method of using the
zontally in the hot sun, the WP filler (melting propellant thermometer will vary with the type
point 1100 F.) in a projectile may shift to one of ammunition. Propellant temperatures are
side of the projectile cavity and cause the pro- taken as follows:
jectile to become unbalanced. (1) Separate-loading. Insert the thermome-
5-18. Segregation of Ammunition Lots ter in the end of the charge and replace the
Different ammunition lots have different ballis- charge in the container.
tic qualities. Registration corrections derived (0) Semitixed. Insert the thermometer in
from firing one lot of ammunition are not neces- the charge and replace the charge in the cart-
sarily valid for another lot; therefore, the am- ridge case.
munition must be segregated in the position area (3) Fixed. With fixed ammunition, there is
by lot. Proper segregation requires control and a temperature lag between the inside and out-
accounting by the chiefs of sections, re'order, side of the cartridge case. To approximate the

5-8
 FM 6-40

propellant temperature, place the cased ther- They should be assured that unloading can be
mometer inside an empty ammunition container. accomplished safely if the pieces are not over-
heated and the proper procedures are followed.
5-21. Field Storage of Ammunition Details on unloading are contained in the appro-
Ammunition at the battery position must be pro- priate field manual for the weapon.
tected from enemy fire and the weather. Only
enough ammunition to meet current needs is 5-23. Accidents
placed at the pieces. Other ammunition is stored AR 75-1 prescribes the method for reporting
on the prime movers, on the ammunition ve- premature explosions or other ammunition acci-
hicles, or, when authorized, at a battery dump. dents. The officer in charge at the battery posi-
Establishment of a battery ammunition dump is tion must-
a matter for command decision, since use of a a. See that first aid is rendered to injured
dump impairs the mobility of the battery. Prop- personnel.
er cover reduces the risk of damage by enemy b. Notify his immediate superior.
fire and also serves to protect the ammunition c. Obtain statements from eyewitnesses while
from moisture and extremes of temperature. details are clearly in mind.
5-22. Unloading the Piece d. Preserve all evidence in the original state,
When practicable, a loaded piece should be fired as nearly as possible, until it can be inspected
rather than unloaded. However, troops should by the ordnance officer.
be instructed in the proper method of unloading. e. Record all data required by AR 75-1.

Section IV. COMMON MISTAKES AND MALPRACTICES

5-24. General the hand around the fuze, thereby disturbing the
Inaccuracies and waste in artillery fire too often fuze setting.
occur from mistakes and malpractices of a recur- (4) Making a 100-mil error in deflection or
ring nature. A mistake is an unintentional error quadrant elevation.
in action or perception committed while follow- (5) Referring to the higher (lower) num-
ing correct procedure. A mistake usually indi- bered graduation instead of the lower (higher)
cates carelessness or lack of concentration and numbered graduation on a micrometer when
can be detected only by a positive, independent setting a reading between numbered gradua-
check or by very close supervision. A malpractice tions.
is a procedural error and usually indicates in- (6) Reading the wrong colored figures on
complete or incorrect training. The best preven- the 1-mil micrometer of the gunner's quadrant.
tive for mistakes and malpractices is the for- (7) Leveling the gunner's quadrant at the
mation of proper habits in training by insisting wrong angle of elevation or using the wrong
on exactness and allowing no deviation from guner's quadrant shoes, especially in high-angle
correct procedures. A further preventive for er- fire.
rors is to establish in training proper supervis- (8) Laying on the aiming posts of another
ory procedures for the executive officer, chief of section, especially at night or when there is
firing battery, and chiefs of sections so that all little lateral interval between pieces.
errors are detected and corrected prior to fir- (9) Failing to take up lost motion cor-
ing. This section tabulates some of the more rectly.
common firing battery errors. (10) Failing to center all bubbles.
(11) Failing to zero the gunner's aid.
5-25. Preparation for Firing and Execution of (12) Transposing numbers in deflection or
Fire Commands quadrant.
a. Common Mistakes. Some of the common b. Malpractices. Malpractices which may re-
mistakes made by personnel of the firing battery sult in serious accidents are-
in executing fire commands are- (1) Attaching the lanyard on the 105-mm
(1) Firing a wrong charge. howitzer directly to the trigger shaft rather than
(2) Referring to the higher (lower) num- to the firing shaft bracket assembly. This prac-
bered graduation instead of the lower (higher) tice permits firing the weapon before it has re-
numbered graduation on a fuze when setting a turned to battery, and results in damage to the
time between numbered graduations. recoil mechanism and carriage and possible in-
(3) Lifting a timed fuze projectile with jury to the loader from the recoil.

5-9
 (2) nserting the trigger shaft to test the b. Failing to clamp the instrument fixing
functioning of the M13 firing lock of the 105- screw securely.
mm howitzer. The practice breaks the lugs form- c. Turning the telescope with the upper (low-
ig the T on the end of the firing pin holder. er) motion instead of the lower (upper) motion
(3) Attempting to gain greater ranges by when sighting through the eyepiece.
firing propellant charges other than those author- d. Failing to level the longitudinal bubble be-
ized by firing tables. This practice results in fore reading angles of site (Ml only).
excessive heat and chamber pressures, which e. Failing to determine and apply the vertical
cause metal fatigue. angle correction to measured angles of site.
(4) Loading the 155-mm howitzer without f. Having objects containing magnetic metals
using the tray. This practice may result in burred on the person, especially eyeglasses (para 3-4b).
breech threads, damaged rotating bands, and im- g. Making a 100-mil error in reading or setting
proper seating and, thus, erratic fires. as a result of reading the azimuth scale in a
(5) Removing the safety latch firing me- counterclockwise direction instead of a clockwise
chanism plunger on the M114A1 or the follower direction; for example, setting or reading 3697
assembly on the M109 so that the firing mechan- instead of 3597 because the azimuth index is
Rsm and primer can be inserted before the near 36.
breech is closed. This practice may result in h. Failing to take up lost motion correctly.
blown breechblocks and housings. i. Failing to set up the tripod so that one leg
(6) Exceeding the maximum rate of fire points in the approximate direction of sighting.
and thus causing the gun tube to become ex- j. Failing to set up the instrument the pre-
tremely hot. When a cool projectile is placed in scribed distance from the nearest piece.
a hot gun tube, the projectile may crack. The k. Failing to orient the 0 to 3200 line in the
filler may then melt and run out of the cracks appropriate direction of fire.
into the powder chamber, where it may explode. 1. Failing to set up the aiming circle where
If fired, a broken projectile endangers friendly it can be seen from all pieces.
troops. When the maximum rate of fire is ex- m. Reading the red figures instead of the
ceeded, the recoil mechanism also becomes ex- black figures on the azimuth scale.
tremely hot, This causes a marked increase in
pressure within the recoil system, which in 5-27. Miscellaneous Errors
turn, may damage the system. Some of the miscellaneous errors made by the
(7 Digging the gun pit in such a manner firing battery personnel are-
that the bottom of the pit slopes upward toward a. Failing to check boresighting in the firing
the rear, A weapon emplaced in such a pit will position.
be tilted forward; this will reduce the maximum b. Failing to place the thermometer in the
elevation attainable by the weapon and may re- propellant in the proper manner.
strRict the firing of high-angle fire. c. Setting aside one specific case of propellant
(8) Using the rammer-extractor upside for propellant temperature control for too long a
do n when ramming. period of time.
(9) Failure to tighten fuzes with approved d. Firing rounds from oily tubes.
fuze wrencho e. Failing to set the near aiming post half-
way between the piece and the far aiming post.
3-26.Use of the Aiming Circle f. Lining up the lead line on the wrong side
Some of the errors made by the firing battery of the vertical hairline with the number dis-
personnel in using the aiming circle are--. played in the collimator.
g. Placing the collimator too far from or too
ao Faiing to clamp the vertical shaft securely close to the weapon.
h. Failing to make prefire checks.
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 6
DUTIES OF THE SAFETY OFFICER

6-1. General j. Verify that range clearance has been ob-

Safety is a command responsibility. Under tained.
peacetime conditions, a safety officer is required k. Ascertain that the visible portion of the
to assist the commander in accomplishing this range is clear of personnel.
responsibility. The safety officer normally should 1. Insure that Department of the Army regu-
be a regularly assigned officer of the battery so lations, post regulations, and local special in-
that there will be no divided responsibility be- structions pertaining to safety'are complied with.
tween battery and battalion levels. Proficiency
in the functioning of the safety officer should be 6-3. Duties of Safety Officer During Firing
treated in the same light as proficiency in the After his preliminary checks are made, the
functioning of the battery executive. In either safety officer should indicate that from the point
case, low standards dissipate the required sense of view of safety the battery is ready to fire.
of urgency and result in slow firing. The safety During firing, the safety officer will-
officer has two principal duties. First, he must a. Verify the serviceability of ammunition.
insure that the pieces are laid and loaded so b. Insure that the charge, projectile, and fuze
that the rounds, when fired, will land in the being fired are limited to those prescribed on the
prescribed impact area. Second, he must insure safety card.
that all safety precautions are observed at the c. Insure that rounds are not fired below the
firing point. While serving as safety officer, he minimum 'quadrant elevation or above the maxi-
will not be assigned other duties. Particularly, mum quadrant elevation for the charge being
he will not be required to check the accuracy fired.
of the gun crews except to insure that bursts im- d. Insure that rounds are not fired outside the
pact in the designated impact area. lateral safety limits.
e. Insure that time-fuzed rounds are not fired
6-2. Duties of Safety Officer Before Firing with fuze settings below the minimum fuze set-
Before firing is begun, the safety officer must- tings prescribed on the safety diagram.
a. Verify that the safety card applies to the f. Instruct the executive officer not to fire
unit, exercise, date, and time. until the safety officer has given a positive indi-
b. Verify that the battery is in the position cation that it is safe to fire.
specified on the safety card. g. Command UNSAFE TO FIRE on all com-
c. Prepare a safety diagram. mands that are unsafe to fire and give the rea-
d. Check the pieces for boresighting. sons therefor. Two examples are-
e. Verify the laying of the battery. (1) UNSAFE TO FIRE, 3 MILS OUT-
f. Verify the minimum quadrant elevations SIDE RIGHT SAFETY LIMIT AND 20 MILS
determined by the executive officer. The safety ABOVE MAXIMUM QUADRANT ELEVA-
officer must compare the executive's minimum TION.
quadrant elevation with the quadrant elevation (2) UNSAFE TO FIRE, 5 MILS BELOW
(low-angle fire) for minimum range on the MINIMUM QUADRANT ELEVATION.
safety diagram and use the larger of the two as h. Apply registration corrections to the safety
the minimum quadrant elevation. limits immediately after registration.
g. Supervise the placing of safety stakes. i. Report accidents and malfunctions of am-
h. Verify that ammunition to be fired is of the munition to the officer in charge of firing, re-
type specified on the safety card. quest an ambulance(s) if needed, and be prepar-

, i. Insure that the chiefs of sections are in-

formed of the maximum and minimum quadrant
elevations, right and left limits, and minimum
ed to make a report as indicated in AR 75-1.
J. Bring to the attention of the executive of-
ficer any unsafe conditions observed and check
firing until the conditions have been corrected.
fuze settings.

6-1
FM 6-40

Examples of unsafe conditions are- the safety limits. The diagram shows the right
(1) Safety features of piece not operable. and left limits, expressed in deflections corres-
(2) Propellant increments exposed to flames. ponding to those limits; the maximum and min-
(3) Personnel smoking near pieces. imum quadrant elevations; and the minimum
(4) Improper handling of ammunition. fuze settings (when applicable) for each charge
(5) Fuzes and projectiles stored together. to be fired. The diagram should not be cluttered
(6) Time fuzes previously set and not reset with unnecessary information. Maximum fuze
to safe. settings are not necessary, since a projectile fired
(7) Primer inserted before the breech is with too great a fuze setting but with the proper
closed (separate-loading ammunition). maximum elevation would result in an impact
(8) Failure of cannoneer to inspect the pro- burst within safety limits for range.
pellant chamber and bore after each round fired. b. The basic safety diagram is a graphical
(9) Failure of cannoneer to swab the pro- portrayal of the data on the safety card. On the
pellant chamber after each round of separate- basic safety diagram are shown the minimum,
loading ammunition fired, maximum, and intermediate (if any) range lines;
6-4. Misfire the left, right, and intermediate (if any) azi-
A misfire is sometimes the result of a mechanical muth limits; the deflections corresponding to the
failure and sometimes the result of a human fail- azimuth limits; and the direction in which the
ure. Whatever the cause, when a misfire has oc- battery is laid. The safety officer determines the
curred, the action required in TM 9-1300-203 deflection limits by comparing the azimuth on
must be observed. which the battery is laid with the azimuth limits
6-5. Safety Card and applying the difference to the referred de-
a. A safety card prescribing the hours of fir- flection (3200 for M100 series sights).
ing, the area in which the firing will take place, Example: A 155-mm howitzer M109 bat-
the location of the gun position, the limits of tery is laid on azimuth 5100. The counter reset
the impact area (in accordance with AR 385- deflection is 3,200 mils. The safety card for the
63), and other pertinent data is approved by the position occupied is that shown in paragraph 6-
range officer and sent to the officer in charge of 5b. The basic safety diagram for this situation
firing. The officer in charge of firing gives a copy is shown in figure 6-1.
of the card to the safety officer, who constructs c. Unless a registration has been fired and cor-
a safety diagram based on the prescribed limits. rections have been applied, all rounds must be
b. There is no prescribed format for the safety fired in the central portion of the impact area.
card; however, the format shown below generally
is used. 6-7. Minimum Quadrant Elevation (Low-
Safety limits for: 155-mm how M109, sh HE Angle Fire)
The minimum QE is computed for each author-
fz M564, M514, M557,
ized charge. The minimum QE consists of the fol-
Type of fire: low angle.
lowing elements:
Firing point: 8632196586.
Reference point: GN; grid az-approx: a. Site to the Highest Point on Minimum
0. Range Line. The safety officer determines the
Left limit: Az 4730. highest point on the minimum range line by plot-
Right limit: Az 5450. ting the minimum range line on a map and in-
Minimum range: 4,300 meters. specting for the altitude of the highest point.
Maximum range: 8,000 meters. Note. If an isolated peak causes an unnecessary
Special instructions: Use only chg 5 GB limitation along the minimum range line, a separate site
is computed and only the firing in the immediate area of
with this card. From az 4730 to az the peak is limited by the minimum quadrant elevation
5030, maximum range is 7 000 meters. determined for the peak.
b. Elevation for Minimum Range. If correc-
6-6. Safety Diagram
a. The safety officer, on receipt of the safety tions are known, the corrections must be applied
card, constructs a safety diagram. The diagram when the elevation is computed°
need not be drawn to scale but must accurately 6-8. Minimum Fuze Setting (Low-Angle Fire)
list the piece settings which delineate the impact The minimum fuze setting for time fuzes is the
area; the diagram serves as a convenient means fuze setting corresponding to the elevation for
of checking the commands announed to the gun minimum range plus the fuze correction (if
crews against those commands which represent known). The minimum fuze setting for VT fuzes

6-2
 FM 6-40

Az 5450

Az 4730 Df 2850
Df 3570

Figure 6-1. Basic safety diagram.

is the time of flight corresponding to the eleva- Find:

, tion for minimum range plus 5.5 seconds. If the

sum is not a whole number, the minimum safe
time for VT fuzes is the next higher whole num-
Minimum QE, minimum fuze setting
(time), and maximum QE.
Solution:
ber. Minimum QE:
6-9. Maximum Quadrant Elevation (Low- Altitude of highest
Angle Fire) point at minimum
The maximum QE for each authorized charge is range 411 mete,rs
the sum of the following elements: Altitude of battery 390 mete3rs
a. Site to the Lowest Point on the Maximum Vertical interval + 21 mete rs
Range Line. Site ( + 21/4300, GST) + 5 mils
b. Elevation for the Maximum Range. If cor- Elevation (charge 5
rections are known, the corrections must be ap- green bag, GFT) 196 mils
plied when the elevation is computed. Minimum QE 201 mils
6-10. Deflection Limits Minimum fuze setting for fuze M564:
After a registration has been fired, the safety Fuze setting corre-
officer must correct the deflection limits of the sponding to mini-
basic safety diagram by adding the total deflec- mum elevation 13.4
tion correction to each deflection limit. Minimum fuze setting for fuze M514:
6-11. Sample Problem Time of flight corre-
a. Prior to Registration. sponding to mini-
Given: mum elevation 13.5
Safety card (para 6-5b). +5.5
Basic safety diagram (fig 6-1).
Altitude of battery-390 meters. 19.0
Altitude of highest point at minimum Minimum fuze setting for fuze M514 is
range-411 meters. 19.0.
Altitude of lowest point at maximum Maximum QE (right segment):
range (right)-405 meters. Lowest altitude at
Altitude of lowest point at maximum maximum range 405 meters
range (left)--410 meters. Altitude of battery 390 meters

6-3
FM 6-40
Deflection Limits:
Vertical interval ....... + 15 meters Inter-
Site ( + 15/8000, GST) + 2 mils Left mediate Right
Elevation (charge 5 Basic deflection
green bag, GFT) -- 447 mils limits 3570 3270 2850
Maximum QE 449 mils Total deflection
Maximum QE (left segment): limits-- R8 R8 R8
Lowest altitude at New deflection
maximum range 410 meters limits-- 3562 3262 2842
Altitude of battery 390 meters Note. Graphical equipment is used for determining
elevations, sites, and fuze settings for the fuze M564 when
Vertical interval + 20 meters
ranges permit its use; otherwise, tabular equipment is
Site (+ 20/7000, GST) +3 mils used. Data are determined to the same accuracy as that
Elevation (charge 5 for firing.
green bag, GFT) -_ 365 mils
6-12. Construction of Safety Diagram From
Maximum QE ------- 368 mils
Visible Reference Point
Occasionally, a safety card will specify a refer-
b. After Registration
ence point instead of an azimuth and will specify
Given: the lateral limits by angular measurements right
GFT setting GFT A, charge 5, lot XY, and left of that reference point. The procedure
range 6,000, elevation 315, time, 20.4. for preparing the safety diagram is as follows:
Total deflection correction-right 8
a. Use the following information from the
mils.
safety card:
Find: Reference point: Blockhouse Signal Moun-
Minimum QE, minimum fuze setting, tain.
maximum QE, and new deflection Left limit: 350 mils left.
limits. Right limit: 200 mils right.
b. After the pieces have been laid and the
Solution: collimators have been emplaced, determine the
Minimum QE: smallest angle between the line of fire and the
Site to highest point at
reference point by using the azimuth counter on
minimum range... +5 mils the panoramic telescope of the base piece as an
Elevation (GFT).. 208 mils
angle-measuring instrument. (Assume that the
Minimum QE 213 mils
battery has been laid, the collimator has been
Minimum fuze setting for fuze M564: emplaced at deflection 2600, and an angle of 100
Fuze setting at mini- mils has been measured from the line of fire to
mum range (GFT) 13.9 the reference point (fig 6-2).)
Minimum fuze setting for fuze M514: Note. Since the panoramic telescope measures only
Time of flight corre- clockwise angles, determine those angles measured to the
sponding to eleva- left of the line of fire by subtracting the reading on the
tion 208 ----------- 14.3 azimuth counter of the sight from 3200 and determine
+5.5 angles measured to the right of the line of fire by sub-
tracting 3200 from the reading on the azimuth counter of
19.8 the sight. In this example, measuring to the reference
point would produce a reading of 3100 (3200 minus 3100
Minimum fuze setting for fuze M514 is equals 100 mils).
20.0. c. Using the LARS rule (left, add; right, sub-
Maximum QE (right segment):-
tract), determine the proper deflection to lay the
Site to lowest point at
pieces on the reference point (deflection 3200,
maximum range +2 mils
+..
left 100, equals deflection 3300).
Elevation (GFT) .... 482 mils
d. Again using the LARS rule, apply the right
Maximum QE - 484 mils and left angular measurements from the refer-
Maximum QE (left segment) : ence point specified on the safety card to the
Site to lowest point at deflection required to lay on the reference point
maximum range + 3 mils (fig 6-2).
Elevation (GFT) 391 mils
(1) Left limit: From deflection 3300, left
394 mils 350 equals deflection 3650.
Maximum QE

6-4
 FM 6-40

Direction range and the site (to the nearest mil) to the
lowest point on the maximum range line.
(3) Deflection limits. When high-angle fire
is employed, the deflection limits on the basic
safety diagram are always modified to consider
the drift. The right deflection limit is moved to
the left by the amount of the maximum drift
for the cannon for the charges within the range
Df 3650 Df 3100
limits to be fired. The left deflection limit is
moved to the left by the amount of the minimum
drift for the cannon for the charges within the
range limits to be fired. After a high-angle reg-
istration, the deflection limits are determined in
Figure 6-2. Safety diagram from visible reference point. the same manner and are further modified by the
amount of the GFT deflection correction.
Direction b. Illuminating Projectile. When illuminating
of projectiles are employed, the safety diagram is
fire computed using the illuminating tabular firing
sight reading 3200
tables. The procedures are the same as those used
for shell HE in low angle fire except as follows:
(1) The range fuze function column is used
to determine the minimum quadrant elevation
and the minimum fuze setting.
(a) The minimum quadrant elevation is
determined by lowering the height of burst, in
50 meter increments, to the highest point on the
minimum range line.
(b) The minimum fuze setting is deter-
mined in the same manner as is minimum fuze
setting determined for shell HE, fuze M564.
(2) The range to impact column is used to
determine the maximum quadrant elevation to
Figure 6-3. Safety stake diagram based on basic the lowest point on the maximum range line.
safety diagram.
Note. Tests are presently being conducted to
(2) Right limit: From deflection 3300, right determine the debris area for the illuminating projectile.
When this data is available it will be published in ap-
200 equals deflection 3100. propriate firing tables.
e. If the reference point is not visible because c. Improved Conventional Munitions. When
of weather conditions and the azimuth to the improved conventional munitions (ICM) are em-
reference point is not given on the safety card, ployed, the safety diagram is determined as for
the safety officer must compute the azimuth by shell HE in low angle fire except as follows:
using the grid coordinates of the reference (1) The minimum quadrant elevation is de-
point. The pieces may then be laid on that azi- termined by adding the ICM correction for QE
muth or on any other convenient azimuth. to the minimum QE for HE.
6-13. Special Situations (2) The maximum elevation is determined
a. High-Angle Fire. When high-angle fire is using the range to impact column and site for
employed, the safety limits are computed in the shell HE.
following manner: (3) The minimum fuze setting is determin-
(1) Maximum quadrant elevation. The max- ed by adding the ICM correction for fuze setting
imum QE for minimum range is the sum of the to the minimum fuze setting for fuze M564.
elevation (to the nearest mil) for minimum range 6-14. Safety Stakes
and the site (to the nearest mil) to the highest a. Safety stakes are visual aids that mark the
point on the minimum range line. lateral safety limits for each piece. The stakes
(2) Minimum quadrant elevation. The mini- are placed approximately 10 meters forward of
mum QE for maximum range is the sum of the each piece along the lateral limits specified on
elevation (to the nearest mil) for maximum the safety card. By standing to the rear of a

6-5
FM 6-40

piece and glancing along the tube, the safety tion in which the battery was initially laid. From
officer can easily see whether the tube is pointed the safety card, determine the angles (right
close to the lateral safety limits. When the tube and left) from the direction of fire to the right
approaches the limits, the safety officer makes a and left limits. Using the reset counter on the
careful check on the deflection set on the pece panoramic telescope, set off the angles from the
and on the actual lay of the tube. direction of fire to the deflection limits and aline
the safety stakes with the vertical hairline.
b. The best method for placing safety stakes d. For inclosed, self-propelled weapons, various
is to traverse the tube to the lateral limits and aids to safety are used, since safety stakes cannot
sight through the tube as the crewmembers in- be seen from the piece. One method is to mark
stall the safety stakes. with chalk the deflection limits on the turret
c. Another method for placing safety stakes azimuth scale. The unit SOP should indicate the
(fig 6-3) is as follows: Lay the tube in the direc- approved method for the piece.

6-6
 FM 6-40

PART THREE
OBSERVED FIRE
CHAPTER 7
FIELD ARTILLERY OBSERVER

Section I. INTRODUCTION
7-1. General edge with his own judgment to effectively perform
a. Field artillery employment normally re- his duties as a member of the gunnery team.
quires some type of observation. It may be visual 7-2. Purpose
observation, it may be electronic observation, or Observation is employed by artillery for four
it may be indirect observation through study of purposes: target acquisition, adjustment of fires
aerial photographs. when necessary, surveillance of fire for effect,
and battlefield surveillance.
b. Electronic devices generally fall into two
classes-radar equipment and sound ranging a. Target acquisition involves detecting suita-
equipment. Employment of these devices is de- ble targets and determining their ground loca-
scribed in FM 6-120, FM 6-121, FM 6-122, and tions. Target information is reported to the FDC,
FM 6-161. where it may be used in the production of firing
data.
c. Observer procedures discussed in this man-
b. Adjustment of fires is necessary to obtain
ual pertain solely to visual observation and in-
effective fire on the target when the accuracy of
clude both air and ground observer techniques.
battery or target location data is questionable
Whenever appropriate, these techniques are ex-
and when current meteorological or registration
plained in the light of their relationship to other
corrections are not available.
phases of gunnery, primarily the fire direction
phase. c. Surveillance of fire for effect is a follow-
through of target acquisition. Since the observer
d. Target grid procedures, on which fire direc- can see the target, he can direct fire and report
tion and observation are based, relieve the ob- its effect to the fire direction center. This report
server of many functions normally required of should include an accurate account of damage
him by other gunnery systems. However, the im- and any appropriate shifts necessary to make
portance of the observer as a vital member in the the fire more effective.
gunnery team must be emphasized. The observer
d. Battlefield surveillance (intelligence) is a
is the only member of the gunnery team who can
very important by-product of artillery observa-
actually see the enemy forces, the friendly forces,
tion. Observers must report everything they ob-
and the fires placed on the enemy by all combat
serve. Information not necessary for the conduct
arms. His ability to observe and his knowledge
of fire must be reported promptly, but such ac-
of the battle situation must be exploited so that
tion must not delay fire missions.
his unit is adequately informed at all times.
Moreover, the observer must know and under- 7-3. Duties of the Observer
stand the problems and procedures of the fire di- For a discussion of field artillery observer duties
rection center. He can then combine this knowl- and tactics, see FM 6-20 and FM 6-140.

Section II. PREPARATORY OPERATIONS

7-4. General or joining the infantry or tank company that he
The observer's preparatory operations contribute is to support, the observer should-
to his speed and accuracy in locating targets and (1) Check his equipment.
reporting information to the fire direction center. (2) Report to the proper artillery and in-
a. Before occupying an observation post (OP) fantry (tank) personnel for briefings.

7-1
FM 6-40

(3) Brief his section.

(4) Make a map reconnaissance.
(5) Check communications.
b. Upon occupying an observation post or join-
ing the infantry (tank) company that he is to
support, the observer should-
(1) Check communications.
(2) Orient his map and plot those points the
locations of which can be determined.
(3) Report his location and field of observa-
tion to the fire direction center.
(4) Prepare an observed fire (OF) fan.
(5) Prepare a terrain sketch to supplement
the map.
(6) Prepare target location data for points
at which targets may appear.
c. The observer should never delay a call for
fire merely to complete preparatory operations.
7-5. Orienting for Direction
a. Observer procedures are based on a line of
direction that is known to the observer and to
the FDC, usually the grid azimuth from the ob- The vertical scale on right of the lens
is not used by the FO in determining
server to the target. The observer should orient
data for his call for fire. It is used
himself for direction (dir) by determining and
primarily by the Infantry for sighting
recording the grid azimuth to a number of
automatic weapons.
sharply defined terrain features tht he has chosen
as reference points. Figure 7-1. Use of reference point direction and binocular
scales to determine direction to target.
b. Grid azimuths normally are measured with
a declinated magnetic instrument. Azimuth may
also be measured from a map when the observer's 7-7. Location of the Firing Battery
position is known and has been plotted. Although target grid procedures do not require
c. After a number of reference point azimuths that the observer know the location of the bat-
have been recorded, the observer can determine tery that is firing his mission, knowledge of the
the direction to any other point in the target area location will give the observer a greater apprecia-
by measuring, with the horizontal mil scale in tion of the effects he observes.
his binoculars, the angle from a reference point
to the desired point. In figure 7-1, the target is 7-8. Auxiliary Map Data
a. When the observer has completed his ini-
40 mils left of the reference point. Direction to
tial orientation, he begins a systematic augmen-
the target is 2,060 mils (2100-40).
d. The tank-mounted observer is faced with a
tation of map data. This augmentation consists
special problem in determining direction because
principally of recording information on his map
and preparing a terrain sketch. As time permits,
magnetic instruments will not function properly
he also prepares a visibility diagram.
in a tank. If the tank is stationary and the ob-
server knows his location, he can determine direc- b. The observer augments the map with lines
of direction radiating from the observer's posi-
tion from a map. If the tank is moving, the prob-
lem can be solved by using the gun-target line, a tion at convenient angular intervals. Using the
observer's position as the center, he intersects
prominent linear terrain feature, or a cardinal
direction, upon which corrections can be applied.
those lines with arcs of distance (fig 7-2). The
observer then marks points of importance that
7-6. Location of Known Points were not printed on the map. He also marks any
To facilitate the location of targets, the observer points that he might frequently need, such as ref-
and FDC select points in the target area which erence points, registration points, targets, and
can be identified by the observer and which are likely points of enemy activity.
plotted on the firing chart. The location of the c. The observer may use an observed fire (OF)
known points may be determined from maps, by fan instead of marking the map as indicated in
survey, or by firing.

7-2
 FM 6-40

b above. The observed fire fan (fig 7-3), a fan- terrain sketch may be required for reference at
shaped protractor constructed of transparent ma- the fire direction center.
terial, covers a 1,600-mil sector. This fan is di-
vided by radial lines 100 mils apart. Arcs re-
presenting distances from the OP are printed on
the fan in increments of 500 meters from 1,000
to 6,000 meters. To use the OF fan, the observer
orients the fan on his map with the vertex on
his OP location, the fan centered approximately
on the zone of observation, and one of the radial
lines parallel to a grid line or another line of
known direction. He then tapes or tacks the fan
to the map. He labels the line of known direction
with its correct direction, and then labels the
other radial lines with their directions. If he
perfers, he may label only every other line.

o 0I 0o 0 0
ai

Figure 7-8. The observed fire fan.

f. The visibility diagram (fig 7-5), a sketch of

the area of observation drawn to map scale, shows
those portions of the area that cannot be observed
from a given observation post. This diagram may
be prepared by observer personnel, or it may be
prepared by FDC personnel if the position of the
observation post is plotted on FDC maps. When
the observer prepares the visibility diagram, he
sends a copy on overlay paper to the fire direction
center.
(1) The diagram is prepared by construct-
ing profiles of the terrain along radial lines ema-
nating from the observation post (FM 21-26).
Each adjacent pair of rays should form an angle
Figure 7-2. Map augmented to show lines of direction and
distance from the observer position.
no greater than 100 mils. Straight lines are
then drawn from the observer's position to each
d. Another device that the observer uses to
assist in the location of targets is the terrain point of high ground in the field of observation.
These rays represent lines of vision; all ground
sketch (fig 7-4). The terrain sketch is a pano-
areas between a peak point of tangency and the
ramic representation of the terrain, sketched by
intersection of a ray with the ground are blind-
the observer, showing reference points, registra-
spots (fig 7-6). These blindspots are projected
tion points, targets, and points of probable ac-
to the base of the diagram and transferred to
tivity. The terrain sketch is also a rapid means
the appropriate line of direction on the observer's
of orienting relief personnel.
map or on a piece of overlay paper. Related points
e. When photographs of the area of observa- are connected and blind areas are shaded (fig
tion are available, the observer should mark the 7-5).
photographs to show pertinent points and lines of (2) Use of visibility diagrams will reduce
direction and use them in conjunction with the the chance of observer error in reporting target
terrain sketch. Copies of the photographs and the locations. If the target is plotted in an area that

7-3
FM 6-40

is not visible, the location data are obviously in target area coverage and in determining the best
error. The diagram aids the S2 in evaluating locations for additional observation posts.

Figure 7-4. Terrainsketch.

7-4
 FM 6-40

.):o

4,00

500

600

700
C-C

800

900

/000

Figure 7-5. Constructionof visibility diagram by use of

direction rays.

7-5
FM 6-40

OP

Direction of ray 700 mIls

Figure 7-6. Use of profile to show blindspots

(shaded areas).

7-6
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 8
LOCATION OF TARGETS
8-1. General 8-3. Determination of Distance
The most accurate means available are employed The observer must be able to determine quickly
in locating targets and determining initial data and accurately the distance between objects, tar-
in order to insure the safety of friendly troops, gets, or bursts in order to determine basic data
to save ammunition, to save time in adjustment, and to adjust artillery fire effectively. Distances
and to increase the effectiveness of fire. Full use can be determined by estimation or by computa-
is made of data from all previous firing in the tion.
area and of maps, photographs, diagrams, or pan- a. Estimation of Distance. The observer can
oramic sketches of the area. The preparatory facilitate estimation of distance by establishing
operations discussed in chapter 7 are desirable a yardstick on the ground in the target area.
and necessary; however, failure to complete them This yardstick can be established by ranging
on occupation of an observation post will not pre- rounds that are 400 meters apart in range. The
clude the observer from calling for fire as soon as rang.ng rounds may be fired by a single piece or
he locates a target. Firing often begins before by a platoon. The observer can also establish a
the preparatory phase is completed, whether known distance in the target area by determining
the firing be precision fire in which fire is from his map or photograph the distance be-
placed on a specific point, or area fire in which tween two points that he can identify positively
a given area is covered with fire. In either pre- both on the map and on the ground. The observer
cision or area fire, the observer conducts the fire can estimate the approximate distance from his
mission by using a standard sequence and pro- position to a sound source (e.g., bursting shell,
cedure as follows: weapon firing, etc.) by timing sound. The speed
a. He locates the target. of sound in still air at 590 F. is approximately
b. He makes the call for fire to the FDC. 340 meters per second. Wind and variations in
c. He adjusts fire, if necessary. temperature alter this speed somewhat. For pra-
d. He conducts surveillance of fire for effect. ctical use, the observer may assume the speed of
8-2. Target Location sound to be 350 meters per second under all con-
ditions. He can time the sound with a watch or
a. Methods. There are three methods by which by counting from the time a burst or flash ap-
the observer can designate the locations of tar-
pears until he hears the sound. For example, the
gets so that FDC personnel may plot them on observer counts "one-thousand one, one-thousand
their charts: two" (and so on), to determine the approximate
(1) By grid coordinates (para 8-5). time in seconds. He then multiplies the time in
(2) By shift from a known point (para 8-
seconds by 350 to obtain the approximate dis-
6). tance in meters.
(3) By polar coordinates (para 8-7). Example: The observer desires to determine
b. Accuracies and Announcement of Data. All the approximate distance from his position to
data for target locations in calls for fire and sub- a burst. He begins counting when the burst ap-
sequent corrections are determined to an accu- pears and stops counting when he hears the sound.
racy consistent with the equipment used for de- He counts 4 seconds; therefore, the distance from
termination. The observer will normally round the burst to his position is approximately 1,400
off and announce his data as follows: meters (350 x 4).
(1) Direction to the nearest 10 mils. b. Computation of Distance. Using the angle
(2) Deviation to the nearest 10 meters. measured from one point to another and the
(3) Vertical change to the nearest 5 meters. known lateral distance between the two points,
(4) Range to the nearest 100 meters. the observer may compute the distance by ap-
(5) Grid coordinates to the nearest 10 me- plying the mil relation. The mil relation is based
ters. on the assumption that an angle of 1 mil will

8-1
FM 6-40

subtend a width of 1 meter at a distance of ground features or by estimating the distance

1,000 meters. The relation is expressed as h = from his position to the target. In figure 8-3, the
W9 where h is the angular measurement in mils observer has measured an azimuth of 680 mils
R to a target that is located on a small hill an
between the two points, R is the distance in estimated distance of 3,000 meters from the ob-
thousands of meters (expressed to the nearest server's location. He has pinpointed the target
100) to the known point, and W is the width in on the map by plotting a distance equivalent to
meters between the points from which angle ,h approximately 3,000 meters along a ray corres-
was measured (fig 8-1). ponding to an azimuth of 680 mils on the ob-
Example: An observer measures an angle of 5 served fire fan. A study of the contour lines aids
mils between the ends of a flat car that is 16 the observer in locating the target more accur-
meters long. He determines the distance from ately.
his position to the flat car by substituting in the c. After the observer has located the target
on the map, he marks the location and deter-
relation R = (R ==16 3.2). The distance is
30 e5 mines the grid coordinates by use of a coordin-
3,200 meters. ate scale or by estimation. When properly used,
the coordinate scale enables the observer to meas-
ure both easting (E) and northing (N) coor-
dinates with one placement of the scale. To
measure the coordinate of a target, the observer
first determines the grid coordinates of the
lower left corner of the grid square containing
the target. Starting at this grid intersection, he
slides the coordinate scale to the right, keeping
(R) the horizontal scale in coincidence with the E-W
grid line, until the target is reached by the ver-
tical scale. He then reads the distance east and
the distance north from the scale (fig 8-4) and
Figure 8-1. The mil relation.
adds these readings to the coordinates of the
8-4. Measurement of Angles grid square to obtain the coordinates of the tar-
An observer usually uses some angle-measuring get. For example, the grid coordinates of the
device, such as field glasses, an aiming circle, or target shown in figure 8-4 are 53152475.
a battery commander's periscope (BC scope), to d. He may determine grid coordinates by re-
measure angles. When instruments are not avail- lating the target location to one of several
able, he can measure angles by using the hand ground features marked on the map. This system
and finger held at a fixed distance from the eye. should be used with extreme care, especially in
Before he goes to the field, he must determine deceptive terrain, unless the location is such as to
the specific angles subtended by the hand in vari- preclude error (e.g., road junction, building,
ous attitudes and must record and memorize bridge, etc.). He can-make a rapid check of the
them for rapid use (fig 8-2). accuracy of the coordinates by use of the con-
tour lines on the map. If the altitude determined
8-5. Target Location by Grid Coordinates
a. Auxiliary map data greatly simplifies the from the target plot shows marked disagreement
determination of accurate grid coordinates of a with the actual ground conformation, the plot
target. When the observer sees a target that is should be verified.
located where it cannot be plotted by rapid in- 8-6. Target Location by Shift from a
spect'on, he must first determine the grid azimuth Known Point
to the target. He determines the azimuth by In order to locate a target by a shift from a
using any of the methods described in paragraph known point, FDC personnel must have the lo-
7-5. cation of the known point plotted on their charts.
b. After the observer has determined his loca- Either the observer or the $3 may select points
tion and the azimuth to the target, he refers to for use as known points, but both the observer
the corresponding line of direction on the map (or and FDC personnel must know their locations
observed fire fan). He selects the point on this line and designations. Registration points, promin-
that best describes the target location. He may ent terrain features, and previously fired targets
locate this point by comparing map features with are commonly used as known points. To locate a

8-2
 FM 6-40

F'gure8-2. Examples of measuring angles w "th the hand.

target by a shift from a known point, the ob- shift depends on the size of the angular devia-
server must determine the observer-target (OT) tion measured from the known point to the tar-
direction, a horizontal shift, and a vertical shift. get.
a. Observer-Target Direction. Normally, the (1) Deviation of less than 600 mils. When
observer determines the observer-target direc- the angular deviation from a known point to the
tion by measuring the angular deviation from a target is less than 600 mils, the observer uses
reference point to the target and applying the the mil relation (para 8-3b) in computing the
measured deviation to the direction from his po- lateral shift. He determines the shift in range by
sition to the reference point. The measured devi- comparing the distance from his position to the
ation is added if the target is to the right of the known point with the distance from his position
reference point and substracted if the target is to the target.
to the left of the reference point. Observer- Example: An observer measures the angu-
target direction may also be measured with a lar deviation from registration point 1 to the
properly declinated magnetic instrument. target as right 250 mils. He knows the distance
b. Horizontal Shift. The horizontal shift (fig to registration point 1 to be 3,200 meters and
8-5) from a known point to the target consists estimates the distance to the target to be 3,700
of a lateral shift in meters and a range shift meters (fig 8-5). He determines the lateral shift
in meters. The lateral shift is the distance from by substituting in the relation W = R~h (W
the known point to the OT line along a perpen- = 3.2 x 250, or right 800 meters). The range
dicular dropped from the known point. The range shift is add 500 (3700 - 3200 = 500 meters).
shift is the distance from the intersection of the The observer announces the shift as RIGHT 800,
perpendicular with the OT line to the target. ADD 500.
The shifts are plotted in the FDC on a target (2) Deviation of 600 mils or greater. When
grid oriented on the OT direction. The method the angular deviation from a known point to the
used by the observer to compute the horizontal target is 600 mils or greater, the mil relation is
FM 6-40

Figure 8-3. Use of observed fire fan to assist in

reading coordinates.

not suitable for computing the lateral shift and of meters when sine factors are used. The sine
a trigonometric function must be used for de- factors are as follows:
termining the horizontal shift. A trigonometric Angle Sine
in mile factor
function is the ratio between two sides of a right
100 0.1
triangle. One of these trigonometric functions is
200 0.2
the sine (sin). In figure 8-6, the sine of angle A 300 0.3
is the length of the side opposite angle A divided 400 -0.4
by the length of the hypotenuse. The formula for 500 0.5
600 0.6
use of the sine factor is F = W, where F is the 700 0.6
D
sine factor for the angular deviation ft (value 800 0.7
900 0.8
taken to the nearest 100 mils), D is the distance 1000 0.8
to the known point (hypotenuse), and W is the 1100 0.9
width of the side opposite the angle #i. Note that 1200 -0.9
D, or distance, is not reduced to units of thousands 1300

8-4
 FM 6-40

Figure 8-4. Use of coordinatescale.

factor for 900 mils) x 2500 = 2,000 meters. The

14 0 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 range shift is ADD 1100 (meters).
1500 ------------------------------------------ 1.0
1600 --- --------------------------------------1.0
---
c. Vertical Shift. When the shift from
The observer computes the lateral shift by sub- a known point method is used, a vertical shift
stituting in the relation W = F x D, where F must be announced if there is an obvious differ-
is the sine factor of the angular deviation from ence in the altitude of the known point and
a known point to the target and D is the dis- the altitude of the target. The vertical shift is
tance (to the nearest 100 meters) to the known normally estimated; however, it may be com-
point. To determine the range shift, the observer puted if an angle-measuring instrument (M2
must first determine the distance from his posi- compass, aiming circle, or BC scope) is avail-
tion to the point at which a perpendicular from able. The following procedure is used for com-
the known point to the OT line strikes the OT puting a vertical shift: The observer measures
line (T'). He accomplishes this by substituting the vertical angle to the known point. Knowing
again in the relation W = F x D, where, this the distance from his observation post to the
time, F is the sine factor of the angle comple- known point and using the mil relation, the ob-
mentary to the angular deviation and D is, server determines the vertical interval, or the
again, the distance from the observer to the amount in meters by which the known point is
known point. He determines the range shift by above or below his observation post. He then
comparing the OT' distance with the OT dis- computes the vertical interval between his OP
tance. and the target. By comparing the known point
Example: An observer measures the angu- vertical interval with the target vertical inter-
lar deviation from registration point 1 to the val, he determines the vertical shift (up or down)
target as left 700 mils. The distance from the from his known point to the target.
observer to registration point 1 is 2,500 meters, Example: An observer measures a vertical
and the estimated distance from the observer to angle of minus 10 mils from the OP to a target
the target is 3,100 meters (fig 8-7). The lateral (fig 8-8). The distance to the target is 2,500
shift, or W, = 0.6 (sine factor for 700 mils) meters. The distance and the vertical angle from
x2500, or left 1500. OT', or W, = 0.8 (sine the OP to the known point are 1,500 meters and
FM 6-40

between the OP and the known point. A compar-

ison of results shows the target to be 5 meters
above the known point. Thus, the vertical shift
would be announced as UP 5.

-Add 500
Reg ptI Right 800

OT=3,700 meters
,Add 1100 Reg pt I
Note: OT' distance is assum-
ed to equal observer- reg pt
I distance.

Figure 8-5. Computation of lateral and range shifts.

Figure 8-7. Computation of lateral and range shifts by

Side Hypotenuse
use of sine factor.
opposite

8-7. Target Location by Polar Coordinates

(Polar Plot)
Polar coordinates consist of the direction and
distance from the observer to the target, and, if
there is an obvious difference in altitude be-
Right Angle A tween the observer's location and the target, a
angle Side
(1,600 mils) adjacent vertical shift. The observer's location must be
side opposite plotted on the charts at the FDC if the polar
hypote
Sine of angle A= hypotenuse coordinate method is to be used. The principal
Figure8-6. Sine function.
advantage of the polar coordinates method is the
rapidity with which the observer can determine
minus 20 mils, respectively. In the relation W the target location. If the direction is correct
= Rh, W represents the vertical interval to the and accurate corrections are applied to firing
target (known point), 0 represents the meas- data, the first round(s) fired should fall on or
ured angle in mils to the target (known point), close to the line that passes through the observa-
and R represents the distance to the target tion post and the target (OT line). Subsequent
(known point) in thousands of meters. There- corrections are then easier to determine. As in
fore, W = -10 x 2.5 = -25 meters vertical the grid coordinate method, the observer mea-
interval between the OP and the target and W sures or computes the direction and estimates
- -20 x 1.5 = -30 meters vertical interval the distance to the target. In figure 8-9,

8-6
 FM 6-40

02,500 meters

0P 1,500 meters -- Horizontal

1TI0-mils
~20Omils
- I
-""--,

T
REG PT
(Sketch is not to scale)
Vertical interval, OP-REG PT=-20 x l.5:-30 meters
Vertical interval, OP-target =-l0 x 2.5= - 25 meters
Vertical shift = UP 5

Figure 8-8. Determinationof difference in heights of

known point and target.

the direction and distance to the target would

be reported to the FDC as DIRECTION 1000,
DISTANCE 1400. A vertical shift must be made Lone tree
if there is an obvious difference in altitude be- Dir 1270
tween the observer's location and the target. The
observer, using a BC scope, an aiming circle, or
an M2 compass, measures the vertical angle to
the target. This vertical angle is measured from IN
the horizontal plane through the observer's lo-
cation to the target. Substituting this measured
vertical angle for h and the estimated distance
to the target for R in the mil relation, the ob-
server computes the vertical shift. / Z
Example: The observer measures the vertical
angle to the target as +20 mils. The estimated
distance to the target from the observation post
is 2,000 meters. According to the mil relation,
20 = W, W = 40 meters. The observer would
2.0
report the polar coordinates of the target as fol-
lows: DIRECTION 1000, DISTANCE 2000, UP
Figure8-9. Polarcoordinates (polar plot).
40.
TOR). The observer usually calls for a type of
8-8. Marking Rounds projectile that is easily identifiable, such as white
Poor visibility, unreliable maps, deceptive ter- phosphorus, or for a high airburst. The FDC
rain, or rapid movement through unfamiliar ter- prepares data that will place the round(s) at the
rain sometimes makes it difficult, if not im- point of impact or point of burst requested by the
possible, for the observer to orient himself. The observer. If the observer fails to see the round(s),
observer may call for a marking round(s) to the FDC prepares new data that will move the
be fired on a registration point, a previously next round(s) to a different point of impact or
fired target, or a prominent terrain feature (e.g., that will raise the burst higher in the air. This
MARK REGISTRATION POINT OR MARK procedure is continued until the observer posi-
HILL 437). As a last resort, the observer may call tively identifies the round(s). He then orders a
for a round(s) to be fired into the center of the shift from the point of impact (burst) of the
target area (e.g., MARK CENTER OF SEC- identified round(s) to a target or an object that

8-7
FM 6-40

is permanent or semipermanent in nature, such FDC, the observer may use it as a known point
as a tree, a road junction, a barn, or the ruins from which shifts may be made to subsequent
of a building. Once this point has been located by targets.
adjustment of fire and has been plotted at the

8-8
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 9
CALLS FOR FIRE

9-1. Elements and Sequence of Calls for Fire fire unit desired in fire for effect following the
a. When an observer has determined the lo- warning order; for example, FIRE MISSION,
cation of a target to attack with artillery fire, BATTALION. The foregoing warning order in-
he transmits a call for fire. A call for fire is a dicates that the observer desires the battalion to
concise message, prepared by the observer, con- fire for effect.
taining all the information needed by the FDC
for the determination of the data and volume of 9-5. Location of Target
fire required to achieve the desired result. The a. The element LOCATION OF TARGET con-
call for fire contains six elements arranged in a tains two or more subelements. The number of
prescribed sequence. subelements depends on the manner in which the
b. A list of the elements in the sequence in location is reported by the observer. One subele-
which they are transmitted is shown in (1) ment that is always required in the call for fire
through (6) below. These elements are discussed by the ground observer is the spotting line. The
in paragraphs 9-3 through 9-8. following are examples of reporting the direc-
(1) Observer identification. tion of the spotting line:
(2) Warning order. (1) Grid azimuth from observer to target-
(3) Location of target. DIRECTION 4310.
(4) Description of target. (2) Magnetic azimuth from observer to tar-
(5) Method of engagement. get-MAGNETIC DIRECTION 2450.
(6) Method of fire and control. (3) Gun-target line-DIRECTION GUN
TARGET.
9-2. Standardization of Terminology Note. If no direction is ordered by an air observer,
Many military operations involve forces of Al- the GT line will be used as the spotting line.
lied nations. Therefore, the sequence of the ele- b. When a target is located by grid coordi-
ments and the terminology used in calls for fire nates, the element consists of the following
have been standardized among Allied nations so subelements transmitted in the target location
that an observer may call for and adjust the sequence indicated below:
fires of the artillery of another nation. For ex- (1) Grid coordinates; e.g., GRID 67551344.
ample, azimuth is stated as direction and coor- (2) Grid azimuth from observer to target;
dinates are stated as grid. Other examples are e.g., DIRECTION 4310.
evident in the succeeding paragraphs. c. When a target is located by a shift from a
9-3. Observer Identification known point, the target location element con-
The element OBSERVER IDENTIFICATION sists of the following subelements transmitted in
the sequence indicated below:
consists of appropriate call signs or codes neces-
sary to establish contact between the observer (1) Known point; e.g., FROM TAR-
and the unit FDC to which he is transmitting GET AF7011.
the call for fire. For example, the observer trans- (2) Observer-target azimuth; e.g., DIREC-
TION 1670.
mits BIG STALLION 18 (call sign of FDC),
THIS IS BIG STALLION 26 (call sign of ob- (3) Lateral shift (if any); e.g., RIGHT
server). (LEFT) 200.
(4) Range shift (if any); e.g., ADD
9-4. Warning Order (DROP) 400.
The element WARNING ORDER is the notice (5) Vertical shift (if any); e.g., UP
sent by the observer to achieve communication (DOWN) 20.
priority and to alert the fire direction center. Note. If there is no shift in a particular dimension,
The warning order is announced as FIRE MIS- that element is omitted; e.g., FROM REGISTRATION
SION. The observer may indicate the size of the POINT 1, DIRECTION 860. RIGHT 400, UP 40 (no

9-1
 FM 6-40

range shift) or FROM TARGET AF7012, DIRECTION (3) The term DANGER CLOSE will be in-
1060, ADD 400, UP 20 (no lateral shift). cluded in the type of adjustment when the tar-
d. If a known point (e.g., a previously identi- get is within 600 meters of friendly troops.
nied target or another location known by the
b. Type of Trajectory. A choice of two tra-
fire direction center and the observer) is to be jectories normally is available: low-angle or
fired on, the target location is reported as shown high-angle. When low-angle fire is desired, this
in the following examples: element is omitted. If the observer desires high-
(1) REGISTRATION POINT 2, DIREC- angle fire, he requests HIGH ANGLE. When the
TION 4320. observer omits a reference to trajectory but com-
putations in the FDC indicate that high-angle
(2) TARGET AF7031, DIRECTION 120. fire is necessary, the FDC will notify the ob-
e. When the location of the target is reported server that high-angle fire will be used.
by polar coordinates, the elements of target loca-
tion are transmitted in the order of direction c. Ammunition. If the observer does not re-
(10 mils), distance (100 meters), and vertical quest a specific projectile or. fuze, shell HE, fuze
shift (5 meters); e.g., DIRECTION 1620, DIS- quick will be used.
TANCE 2500, UP 25.
(1) The observer may initially request one
9-6. Description of Target type of projectile or fuze and subsequently re-
The element DESCRIPTION OF TARGET is a quest another type of projectile or fuze to com-
brief but sufficiently informative statement to plete the fire mission.
enable the S-3 to determine the relative impor- (2) When the observer requests smoke, the
tance of the target and the best manner of at- S3 normally will direct the use of HE initially
tack. The observer should include the number in the adjustment and the use of smoke for the
(15,30,50), the type (infantry, vehicles, POL, completion of the adjustment and fire for effect.
or tanks), the activity (digging in, moving, sta- (3) When the observer wants a combina-
tionary) of the target. When the target is some tion of projectiles and/or fuzes in effect, he must
type of installation, include the degree of pro- so state in this element of the call for fire; e.g.,
tection provided (e.g., 50 INFANTRY, 2 HE AND WP IN EFFECT or VT AND QUICK
TANKS 1 TRUCK IN OPEN). The observer IN EFFECT.
should give a clear description of the target size (4) The observer may also request the vol-
and shape if these are significant. When the tar- ume of fire he deems necessary in fire for effect;
get is rectangular, the observer gives the length e.g., 3 ROUNDS.
and width in meters and the azimuth of the long d. Distribution of Fire.
axis to the nearest 50 mils (e.g., 400 BY 200, (1) A parallel sheaf usually is fired on an
ALTITUDE 2850). When the target is circular, area target in fire for effect. When another type
the observer gives the radius (e.g., RADIUS of sheaf is desired, the observer must so an-
200). nounce; e.g., CONVERGE or SHEAF 100 ME-
9-7. Method of Engagement
TERS.
(2) The observer may request that the fires
The element METHOD OF ENGAGEMENT in-
of the battalion be spread in direction or in
dicates the desired type of adjustment, type of
range. The standard spread is 100 meters. One
trajectory, type of ammunition, and distribution
battery fires at the adjusting point and the other
of fire.
batteries fire the spread. One of the batteries
a. Type of Adjustment. In adjustment, two firing the spread fires 100 meters beyond or right
types of fire may be employed, area or precision. of the adjusting point and the other battery fires
(1) If no specific type of adjustment is des- 100 meters short or left of the adjusting point.
ignated, area fire will be used. In area fire, the (3) If the observer desires to spread the
adjustment normally is conducted with the two fires of the battalion, he will request either
center pieces of the battery. RANGE SPREAD or LATERAL SPREAD. The
fires of the battalion can also be fired as a half-
(2) When precision fire is desired, the ob- range or a half-lateral spread. In order to deter-
server announces either REGISTRATION or DE- mine which spread will be most effective, the ob-
STRUCTION, depending on the reason for firing. server must keep in mind that all spreads are
Only one piece is used during a precision mis- fired in relation to the gun-target line, not the
sion. observer-target line.

9-2
 FM 6-40

(3) Fire for effect. When the location of a

9-8. Method of Fire and Control
The element method of fire and control indicates target is sufficiently accurate to eliminate the
the desired manner of attacking the target,
indi- requirement for an adjustment, the observer an-
cates whether or-not the observer desires
to con- nounces FIRE FOR EFFECT. Accurate, imme-
trol the time of delivery of fire, and
indicates diate fire for effect has appreciable surprise
whether or not an adjustment is to be made. value and is preferred whenever possible. Fire for
effect without an adjustment is warranted where
a. Method of Fire. In area fire, the adjustment the target is at a surveyed location, where the
normally is conducted with the two center pieces target has been fired previously, or where the
of the adjusting battery firing simultaneously. target has been accurately located by an observ-
If for any reason the observer determines that er. FIRE FOR EFFECT indicates that the ob-
PLATOON RIGHT (LEFT) will be more ade- server can see the fires and, unless the observer
quate, he may request it. The normal interval has requested that the mission be conducted AT
of time between rounds fired by a platoon or MY COMMAND, that the firing unit may begin
battery right or left is 5 seconds. If the observer firing when ready.
wants some other interval, he may so specify. (4) Cannot observe. CANNOT OBSERVE
indicates that the observer is unable to adjust
b. Method of Control. Method of control is
fire; however, he has reason to believe that a
announced by the observer by use of the terms
target exists at the given location and that it is
below.
of sufficient importance to justify firing on it
(1) At my command. If the observer wish- without adjustment.
es to control the time of delivery of fire, he in-
cludes AT MY COMMAND in the method of 9-9. Short Phrase Read-Back
control immediately preceding ADJUST FIRE The read-back method of radiotelephone trans-
((2) below) or FIRE FOR EFFECT ((3) be- mission is used in the conduct of fire without
low). When the pieces are ready to fire, the the transmission instruction to read back. The
FDC announces BATTERY (BATTALION) IS observer divides the elements of the call for fire
READY; the observer announces FIRE when he into short phrases, each of which he transmits
is ready for the pieces to fire. AT MY COM- to the FDC in a separate transmission. As each
MAND remains in effect until the observer an- phrase is received, the FDC operator reads it
nounces CANCEL AT MY COMMAND. back to the observer. The number of elements in
(2) Adjust fire. If the observer considers each phrase depends on the established proced-
ures and on the capabilities of the personnel in.
that an adjustment is necessary and if he can see
and adjust the fire, he announces ADJUST volved in the conduct of fire. Examples of thi
FIRE. Unless the observer has announced AT elements and subelements of a call for fire ar
MY COMMAND, ADJUST FIRE indicates that shown in table 9-1. Basic radiotelephone pr(
the firing unit may begin firing when ready. cedure is prescribed by ACP-125.

9-3
ro
Table 9-1. The Call for Fire

Examples

3. Destruction mission
Element When omitted 1. Registration using 2. Area mission using using shift from a 4. Ares mission using 5. Area mission firing
surveyed chart polar plot known point prearranged data high-angle fire

a. Identification of Never BIG BOY 18, THIS RED BACK 18, WHITE HORSE 18, LONG ROPE 18, DARK NITE 18,
observer IS BIG BOY 25 THIS IS RED THIS IS WHITE THIS IS LONG THIS IS DARK
BACK 26 HORSE 26 ROPE 25 NITE 26
b. Warning - Never FIRE MISSION FIRE MISSION FIRE MISSION FIRE MISSION, FIRE MISSION
BATTALION
e. Location of Never REGISTRATION DIRECTION 2720, FROM REGISTRA- TARGET AF 7302 GRID 712684,
target POINT 2, DISTANCE 3500, TION POINT 1, DIRECTION 4600 DIRECTION 4060
Direction 4670 UP 30 DIRECTION 2120,
LEFT 400, ADD
600 DOWN 30
d. Description of In a registration Omitted 60 INFANTRY IN CONCRETE 5 TANKS AND MORTAR FIRING
target OPEN, 150 BY BUNKER COMPANY OF
300, ATTITUDE INFANTRY
800
e. Method of
engagement:
(1) Type of Area fire REGISTRATION Omitted DESTRUCTION Omitted DANGER CLOSE
adjustment
(2) Trajectory Low-angle fire Omitted Omitted Omitted Omitted HIGH ANGLE
(3) Ammunition _
(a) Type of When shell HE is Omitted Omitted Omitted HE AND WP, 3 Omitted
projectile desired. ROUNDS
(b) Fuze action- When fuze quick is Omitted TIME IN EFFECT Omitted Omitted VT IN EFFECT
desired or when
HC smoke or illu-
minating shell is
requested.
(4) Distribution When a parallel Omitted Omitted Omitted RANGE SPREAD CONVERGE
of fire sheaf at center
range is desired.
f. Method of fire and Never ADJUST FIRE PLATOON RIGHT, ADJUST FIRE FIRE FOR ADJUST FIRE
control. ADJUST FIRE EFFECT
 FM 6-40

c. If the observer has transmitted his entire

9-10. Correction of Errors
a. Errors are sometimes made by the observer call for fire and then discovers that he has trans-
in transmitting data or by the FDC personnel mitted an incorrect element or subelement or
in reading back the data. If an observer realizes has omitted an element or a subelement, he must
that he has made an error in his transmission or transmit the correct version of that element or
that the FDC has made an error in the read- subelement together with all affected data.
back, he announces CORRECTION and trans- Example: The observer has sent BIG
mits the correct data. If two or more elements or STALLION 18, THIS IS BIG STALLION 25,
subelements of the call for fire were contained FIRE MISSION OVER-FROM REGISTRA-
in an erroneous transmission, but only one ele- TION POINT 2, DIRECTION 5680, OVER-
ment or subelement was in error, the observer LEFT 200, ADD 400, UP 40, OVER-INFANT-
will correct only the erroneous element or sub- RY IN OPEN, TIME IN EFFECT, ADJUST
element provided the remainder of the transmit- FIRE, OVER. He then realizes that fuze VT
ted data will not be affected by the correction. would be more effective than fuze time on this
Example: The observer has transmitted target. To correct this error, he must send COR-
FROM REGISTRATION POINT 2, DIREC- RECTION, VT IN EFFECT, OVER.
TION 4680, OVER. He immediately realizes that
he should have sent DIRECTION 5680. He then 9-11. Calls for Fire From Higher
announces CORRECTION, DIRECTION 5680, Headquarters
OVER. After receiving the correct read-back, he Calls for fire from higher headquarters and calls
continues to send the remainder of the call for for fire from the observer are similar in format.
fire. The call for fire from higher headquarters will
b. When an error has been made in a subele- specify in the warning order the fire unit to fire
ment and the correction of that subelement will for effect, whereas the observer's call for fire
affect other transmitted data, the observer will can only request the fire unit. An example of a
announce CORRECTION and then transmit the call for fire from higher headquarters is as fol-
correct subelement and all affected data in the lows:
proper sequence. Warning order FIRE MISSION, BATTALION
Example: The observer has transmitted Target location TARGET AF 1201
Description of
LEFT 200, ADD 400, UP 40, OVER. He then target INFANTRY BATTALION
realizes that he should have sent DROP 400. To ASSEMBLY AREA
correct this element, he will send CORRECTION, Method of en-
LEFT 200, DROP 400, UP 40, because the LEFT gagement VT, 3 ROUNDS
200 and UP 40 will be canceled if they are not Control TIME ON TARGET IS 10
MINUTES FROM ..... NOW
included in the corrected transmission.

9-5
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 10
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE BY GROUND OBSERVER

Section I. GENERAL

10-1. When to Adjust and the attitude of the projectile as it bursts.

When the observer cannot locate the target with The characteristic flash, black smoke, and sharp
sufficient accuracy to warrant firing for effect, explosion of an airburst are indications of an
he will conduct an adjustment. Lack of accuracy effective ricochet burst.
in the location may be the result of poor visibil- c. Shell HE, Fuze Quick. A burst resulting
ity, deceptive terrain, poor maps, or difficulty on from a fuze quick detonation is characterized by
the part of the observer in pinpointing the tar- black smoke, discolored by dirt, which spreads
get. If, in his opinion, fire for effect can be de- both upward and outward. If the impact occurs
livered on the basis of the target location and on a hard surface, such as a rock, a flash may
surprise is desired, he will request FIRE FOR also appear. Fuze quick fired into a wooded area
EFFECT (FFE) in his call for fire. If registra- will sometimes result in an airburst caused by
tion has not been accomplished recently, the fire the projectile striking the trees and detonating
direction officer may direct that an adjustment before it reaches the ground.
be conducted, regardless of the accuracy of the d. Shell HE, Fuze Delay, Mine Action. A mine
target location. action burst is characterized by the eruption of
a vertical column of earth, often with clods of
10-2. Adjusting Point earth. There is very little smoke, and the explo-
The observer must select a point upon which to sion is muffled.
adjust (adjusting point). In precision fire, the e. HC and Colored Smoke, Fuze Time. Func-
adjusting point is the target. In area fire, the tioning of an HC or a colored smoke shell with
adjusting point should be a well-defined point fuze time is characterized by a small burst in
near the center of the area occupied by the tar- the air, produced by the expelling charge, which
get (fig 10-1). ejects the smoke canisters from the base of the
shell. As the canisters fall to the ground, they
10-3. Appearance of Bursts emit smoke in thin streams. The smoke streams
The observer must be able to identify the type travel an appreciable distance and then billow
of shell and fuze used from the appearance of the out.
burst(s). Descriptions of the types of shells and f. Shell WP, Fuze Quick. A fuze quick WP shell
fuzes with which an observer normally will be burst is characterized by a fountain of brilliant
concerned are given in a through f below, how- white smoke and burning phosphorus. Small par-
ever, the sizes of the bursts will vary in accord- ticles of phosphorus are spread upward and out-
ance with the caliber of the weapon. ward as a pillar of smoke forms and rises.
a. Shell HE, Airburst, Fuze Time or Fuze VT.
A fuze time or fuze VT airburst is characterized 10-4. Fuze Selection for High-Explosive
by a flash, a sharp explosion, and a puff of black Projectiles
smoke that becomes elongated along the tra- The effect obtained with an HE projectile de-
jectory. The effect of fragments on the terrain pends on the fuze action (fig 10-2). (For a de-
may be seen below the burst if the burst is not too tailed discussion of the effects of HE projectiles,
high and soil conditions are favorable. see chapter 27.)
b. Shell, HE, Fuze Delay, Ricochet. A ricochet a. Fuze VT. A VT fuze is a radio-activated
burst is a low airburst characterized by a flash, fuze that detonates the projectile automatically
a sharp explosion, and a ball of smoke (usually at a predetermined height above the earth's sur-
black). Dirt is kicked up by the shell fragments face. Therefore, a height-of-burst adjustment is
from the side and base spray. Burst appearance not required. There is a point detonating back-
depends on the nature and condition of the soil up mechanism in case of failure of the radio

10-1
FM 6-40

Figure 10-1. Adjusting point in area fire.

activation. During the adjustment, fuze quick before detonation either to penetrate and pro-
normally is employed to obtain greater speed duce mine action or to ricochet and produce a
and to facilitate observer spottings. Fuze VT is low airburst. Fuze delay is used with shell HE
suitable for use against- for destruction missions that require penetra-
(1) Personnel in the open. tion and for ricochet fire.
(2) Personnel in entrenchments (low-angle (1) Factors which determine whether a
fire only). shell will ricochet are the angle of impact; shape,
(3) Area targets when neutralization is de- weight, and terminal velocity of projectile; the
sired. use of fuze delay; and the condition of the sur-
b. Fuze Time. A time fuze detonates the pro- face of the ground, including the composition of
jectile on operation of a preset time mechanism the soil.
or on impact. The height of burst is controlled (2) When the angle of impact is small, the
by the observer. Since the observer must adjust projectile tends to ricochet rather than to pene-
the height of burst, use of this fuze is more trate the ground. As the angle of impact in-
time consuming than use of fuze VT. However, creases the tendency to penetrate increases.
with fuze time the observer may obtain any When the projectile penetrates the ground, the
height of burst desired. Fuze time is ineffective burst will produce either a crater or a camou-
in high-angle fire, because of the large height- flet, depending on the depth of the burst, type of
of-burst probable error involved in the long time soil, and force of detonation. If the penetration
of flight. Fuze time is suitable for use against the is very great, the burst may produce a camou-
same types of targets as those against which flet: that is, a hole will be formed underground,
fuze VT is used, within the limits imposed by but the surface of the ground will remain un-
the vertical probable error of the fuze. cratered.
c. Fuze Delay. When delay action of the fuze (3) When penetration occurs and the shell
is used, the projectile has time after impact and is in the earth at the instant of detonation, frag-
10-2
 FM 6-40

mentation effect above the ground is very small. (4) Armored vehicles when the concussion
Penetration into a bunker or dugout will produce effect of heavy artillery is sufficient for produc-
casualties by blast effect and fragmentation. ing damage.
Penetration into a structure built of logs, sand- e. Combined Fuze Action in Fire for Effect.
bags, or similar materials results in the blowing When the target is such that more than one type
apart of constituent units. The effectiveness de- of fuze action will add to the effectiveness of fire
pends on the amount of high-explosive filler in for effect, the observer will include the fuzes de-
the penetrating projectile. Use of concrete- sired in the call for fire or in subsequent correc-
piercing (CP)*fuze increases the depth of pene- tions.
tration and the angle at which penetration may
be obtained against reinforced concrete or heavy 10-5. Spottings
masonry targets. Determination by the observer of the location of
(4) Ricochet fire should be used only against a burst or group of bursts with respect to the
personnel in shallow foxholes or shallow trench- adjusting point as observed along the OT line is
es. The effect obtained with ricochet fire against called a spotting. Spottings are made for range,
these targets is somewhat better than the effect deviation, and height of burst. Spottings must
obtained with VT or time fuze because of the be by the observer at the instant the burst oc-
lower height of burst and the nose-up attitude of curs except when it is necessary to delay a spot-
the projectile. The lowered height of burst re- ting to take advantage of drifting smoke or dust.
duces the effect obtained against deeply en- a. The observer should be required to announce
trenched targets. In order for a given number of his spottings during his early training. As an
rounds fired with fuze delay to be as effective as observer gains experience, spottings need not be
the same number of rounds fired with fuze quick announced.
against troops prone in the open, 80 percent of b. Under certain conditions the observer may
the rounds fired with fuze delay must produce be able to make a spotting even though he is un-
able to see the burst. For example, if the observer
ricochet action. Therefore, ricochet fire is not
hears but does not see a burst and the only pos-
used against troops in the open. Factors which de-
sible place where the burst could occur and not
termine whether a projectile will ricochet cannot
be visible to the observer is in a ravine beyond
be evaluated for a particular point of impact until
the adjusting point, then he should assume that
the bursts are spotted. Ricochet fire must be ob-
the burst is beyond the adjusting point.
served. Another type of fuze must be used if rico-
chet action cannot be expected from at least 50 c. If visibility is temporarily impaired or if
the observer is unable to obtain a spotting for a
percent of the rounds fired in fire for effect.
particular round, he reports UNOBSERVED,
d. Fuze Quick. Quick (superquick) fuze action
bursts the projectile immediately on impact. REPEAT.
Ease of spotting a fuze quick burst, together 10-6. Corrections
with the fact that no height-of-burst adjustment The observer causes the mean point of impact or
is necessary, makes possible a rapid adjustment. burst to be placed on, or sufficiently close to, the
Fuze quick is suitable for use against- target by making appropriate corrections during
(1) Personnel standing in the open (very the adjustment. From his spottings, the observer
effective in high-angle fire). determines deviation and range corrections in
(2) Personnel in sparsely wooded terrain meters; he announces these corrections in that
where tree bursts give the effect of low airbursts. sequence as commands to bring the bursts onto
(3) Materiel when penetration of the ma- the OT line and to establish the appropriate
terial is not required for producing damage. bracket of the adjusting point along the OT line.

Section II. ADJUSTMENT OF DEVIATION

10-7. Deviation Spottings b. A burst, or the center of a group of bursts,
a. Deviation is the lateral distance from the may be on the OT line, or it may be right or
burst center to the OT line. A deviation spotting left of the OT line. A deviation spotting is an-
is the angular amount and direction of the devia- nounced as LINE or (so much) RIGHT (LEFT).
tion. During the conduct of fires, the observer For example, the observer sees a burst and meas-
measures, in mils, the angular deviation from the ures the angular deviation as 20 mils to the
OT line to the center of each burst or group of right of the OT line. His deviation spotting in
bursts (fig 10-3). this instance is 20 RIGHT.
10-3
FM 6-40

O Fuze time or VT Fuze delay (ricochet)

- -

O Fuze quick Fuzes quick and delay

against armored vehicles

p1

I.

0 Fuzes quick and CP against

fortified positions

Figure 10-2. Effects of high-explosive bursts.

10-4
 FM 6-40

lay action after ricochet

Figure 1O-2-Continued.

10-
FM 6-40

10-8. Deviation Corrections the correction is always opposite the direction

a. A deviation correction is the distance in of the spotting.
meters perpendicular to the OT line required to d. When the angle between the OT line and
move a subsequent group of bursts to the OT the gun target (GT) line (angle T) is 500 mils or
line. In the adjustment phase on an area mis- greater, the fire direction center will notify the
sion, minor deviations (10 to 20 meters) should observer of this fact after the first SHOT is given
be ignored unless such action would preclude (fig 10-4). When the angle T is large, the ob-
obtaining range spottings. In the adjustment server should consider the range dispersion of
phase of a precision mission, all deviations, how- the weapon when determining corrections. What
ever minor, must be corrected to the OT line. the observer sees as deviation may be due, wholly
b. The observer computes a deviation correc- or partly, to range dispersion, which cannot be
tion by multiplying the deviation spotting by corrected by deviation corrections. In figure 10-
the OT factor. The OT factor is the OT distance 5 the two groups of rounds shown were fired at the
in thousands of meters. If the OT distance is 1,000 same deflection and quadrant elevation. The dif-
meters or greater, the OT factor is expressed to ference in locations of the bursts is due to range
the nearest thousand. If the OT distance is less dispersion along the GT line. As viewed by ob-
than 1,000 meters, the OT factor is expressed to server 1, from whose location the angle T is
the nearest hundred. The following are examples relatively small, there appears to be little differ-
of computations of deviation corrections: ence in the amount of deviation correction
OT
distance
OT
factor Spotting
Deviation
correction needed to bring the bursts to the OT line. How-
3600-----------4 40 RIGHT ----. LEFT 160. ever, as viewed by observer 2, group 2 bursts
3400-----------3 50 LEFT ----. RIGHT 150. appear to be twice as far from the OT line as
800 ----------- 0.8 40 LEFT-------RIGHT 30. group 1 bursts.
c. The deviation correction is expressed to the e. The observer must exercise caution in mak-
nearest 10 meters and is announced to the FDC ing deviation corrections in the direction of
as LEFT (RIGHT) (so much). The direction of friendly troops who are close to the target.

Section Ill. ADJUSTMENT OF RANGE

10-9. General on the locations of the burst fragmentation pat-
The normal procedure for the adjustment of range
terns on the ground.
is to establish a bracket along the OT line (fig
10-6). A bracket is established when one group b. Possible range spottings are as follows:
of rounds falls over the adjusting point and one (1) Over. A burst(s) that appears beyond
group of rounds falls short of the adjusting the adjusting point is spotted OVER.
point. The observer must establish the bracket (2) Short. A burst (s) that appears between
early in the adjustment and then successively the observer and the adjusting point is spotted
decrease the size of the bracket until it is approp- SHORT.
riate to enter fire for effect. (3) Target. An impact burst that hits the
target is spotted TARGET. This spotting is used
10-10. Range Spottings only in precision fire.
a. Definite range spottings are required for
making a proper range adjustment. Any range (4) Range correct. A burst or center of a
spotting other than DOUBTFUL or LOST (UN- group of bursts that is at the proper range is
OBSERVED) is definite. spotted RANGE CORRECT. (This spotting is
(1) A burst or group of bursts on the OT not used in the fire-for-effect phase of a precision
line normally gives a definite range spotting. mission.)
Figure 10-7 is a guide showing approximate areas (5) Doubtful. A burst that can be observed
for the various spottings. but cannot be determined as over, short, target,
(2) The observer may make a definite range or range correct is spotted DOUBTFUL. A burst
spotting when the burst(s) is not on the OT that appears range correct in the fire-for-effect
line by using his knowledge of the terrain, drift- phase of a precision mission is spotted DOUBT-
ing smoke, shadows, and wind. However, even FUL.
experienced observers must exercise caution and (6) Lost. A burst that is not observed and
good judgment when making such spottings. is not known to be definitely beyond or short of
(3) Spottings of airbursts for range are based the adjusting point is reported as LOST. When
10-6
 FM 6-40

b. Once a bracket has been established, it is

successively decreased, normally by splitting, un-
til it is appropriate to enter fire for effect. Fire
Target for effect is normally asked for in area fire when a
100-meter bracket is split or when fire on the tar-
Deviat T line get is observed.
c. The procedures in a and b above are not to
be considered inflexible. The observer must use
his knowledge of the terrain, knowledge gained
Observer from previous firing and general experience, and
good judgment in determining the size of the
Adjusting initial and subsequent range changes. For exam-
Pieces ple, if the observer adds 800 after in initial range
spotting of SHORT, and the second range spot-
Figure 10-3. Deviation. ting is OVER, but the bursts are much closer
to the adjusting point then the initial rounds, a
Target range change of DROP 200 would be appropri-
ate.
d. When the observer requests an adjustment
on a target close to friendly troops, he makes
range corrections toward friendly elements in in-
crements that he considers safe. He does not
necessarily attempt to bracket the target with
Ane any successive corrections. As his corrections
bring the bursts closer to the target, definite
range spottings can be made easily. Making small,
safe shifts rather than establishing the normal
bracket may result in a greater expenditure of
ammunition and time but may be necessary to
insure safety (fig 10-8). An adjustment made in
this manner is referred to as creeping and should
-be used exclusively during DANGER CLOSE mis-
Gun
position
sions.
Observer

Figure10-4. Angle T.

rounds are reported LOST, a bold shift in devia-

tion or range should be made.
(7) Lost over (short). A burst that is not
observed but is known to be definitely beyond Target
or short of the adjusting point is reported as
LOST OVER or LOST SHORT.
10-11. Bracketing 20
a. When the first definite range spotting is ob-4 V.4,7X
tained, the observer should make a range correc- se

tion that can be expected to result in a range 0

spotting in the opposite direction; e.g., if the first
definite range spotting is SHORT, the observer
should add enough to obtain an OVER on the next
round or group of rounds. As a guide, after the
AV
first definite range spotting, a range change of Observerl Observer 2
400 meters is suggested if the initial target loca-
tion is estimated, and a range change of 200 Adjusting pieces
meters is suggested if the initial target location Figure10-5. The effect of angle T when viewing
is surveyed, range dispersion.

10-7
FM 6-40

Fi rst I

I
Bracket

Second

Observer
Figure10-6. Establishing a bracket for range.

10-8
 FM 6-40

Direction of
OT line

Range Correct T Range Correct DUtU

Figure 10-7. Range spotting.

Trdajectory
of first round

Trajectory as a
result of drop 40

Target

Figure10-8. Need for creeping when close to

friendly troops.

Section IV. ADJUSTMENT OF HEIGHT OF BURST

10-12. General He announces the correction as UP (DOWN) (so
In firing fuze time in area fire, the observer much). He computes height-of-burst shifts by
must adjust the height of burst. The observer using the mil relation in the same manner as for
conducts the adjustment of deviation and range deviation shifts. The proper height of burst for
with fuze quick and then, upon splitting the ap- fire for effect is normally 20 meters above the
propriate range bracket, normally 100 meters, or target. Any time two bursts are widely separ-
obtaining a range correct spotting, begins the ated in height, the observer must report this fact
adjustment of height of burst. Normally, further to the FDC. When fuze delay is being used for
corrections to deviation and range are not re- ricochet fire, no correction for height of burst can
quired. The observer spots height of burst and be made. When VT fuze is used, only malfunc-
determines the correction ot the nearest 5 meters tions and graze bursts are reported.
to raise or lower the bursts to the desired height.

10-9
FM 6-40

10-13. Height-of-Burst Spottings AIR or MIXED are obtained and then the rule in
Height-of-burst spottings for fuze time are as fol- (1) above or (3) below applies.
lows: (3) When the initial rounds are MIXED, the
a. Air. A round or group of rounds bursting observer applies UP 20 and enters fire for effect.
in the air is spotted AIR. (4) The observer must report widely separ-
b. Graze. A round or group of rounds burst- ated bursts to the FDC and, in most cases, give
ing on impact is spotted GRAZE. a repeat command; e.g., REPEAT, 100-METER
c. Mixed. A group of rounds resulting in an HEIGHT-OF-BURST SPREAD; 60-METER
equal number of air-bursts and graze bursts is
MEAN HEIGHT OF BURST.
spotted MIXED. c. The observer determines the height of burst
d. Mixed Air. A group of rounds resulting in by measuring the vertical deviation in mils be-
both airbursts and graze bursts is spotted MIXED tween the target and the burst or the center of
AIR when the majority of the bursts are air- the group of bursts and then multiplying the
bursts. vertical deviation by the OT factor. He com-
e. Mixed Graze. A group of rounds resulting putes the correction by comparing the height of
in both airbursts and graze bursts is spotted burst thus determined with the desired height of
MIXED GRAZE when the majority of the bursts
burst.
are graze bursts.
Example: The OT factor is 3. The observer
measures the vertical deviation from the target
10-14. Height of Burst Adjustment to the burst as plus 20 mils. Therefore, the height
a. The adjustment of time fuze is begun at the
of burst is 60 meters above the target (W = R
split of the appropriate range bracket with the
objective of obtaining a 20-meter height of x 0h = 3 x 20). The correction is DOWN 40,
FFE (the desired height of burst is 20 meters
burst. Fire for effect is entered only when a
and the 60 meters is 40 meters above the desired
correct height of burst (20 meters) is assured.
height of burst).
b. During the adjustment of time fuze with
two pieces, there are three possible height-of- 10-15. Fuze Delay
When fuze delay is employed for ricochet action,
burst spottings-AIR, GRAZE, or MIXED. Rules no adjustment of height of burst is possible. The
for height-of-burst adjustment are as follows: observer notes the number of airbursts and graze
(1) When the initial rounds are AIR, the bursts in each group. If in two groups of rounds
observer adjusts to a 20-meter height of burst that establish the appropriate range bracket (or a
and enters fire for effect. However, if very high single group of rounds that bracket the adjust-
airbursts are obtained and the observer is not ing point) 50 percent or more of the rounds re-
sure that the next correction will produce a 20- sult in airbursts, the observer enters fire for ef-
meter height of burst, a correction to height of fect with fuze delay. If more than 50 percent of
burst without entering fire for effect is appropri- the rounds result in graze bursts, the observer
ate (judgment and experience are the governing requests VT or QUICK, whichever is more ap-
factors). propriate, in fire for effect.
(2) When the initial rounds are GRAZE, 1,0-16. Fuze VT
the observer applies UP 40 and continues the No adjustment of height of burst is possible with
asjustment. A 40-meter height-of-burst correc- fuze VT. Burst height is controlled by the
tion will be applied until spottings of mechanism within the fuze.

10-10
 FM 6-40

Section V. SUBSEQUENT CORRECTIONS,

W10-17.
a. AfterGeneral
the initial burst(s)
server transmits
appears, the ob-
quest CANCEL HIGH ANGLE to expedite the
firing.
subsequent corrections until the
mission is completed. These corrections include 10-20. Change inMethod of Fire
appropriate changes in elements previously trans- The observer must announce any change he de-
mitted and the necessary corrections for devia- sires in the method of fire. For example, in
tion, range, and height of burst. Elements that order to change from pieces firing simultaneously
may require correcting and the order in which to pieces firing in order from left to right, the
corrections are announced are as follows: observer requests PLATOON LEFT. He may re-
(1) Observer-target direction. quest this change to take advantage of the wind
(2) Trajectory. when smoke shells are bing fired or to clarify
(3) Method of fire. spottings when one burst is obscuring another. He
(4) Distribution. cancels PLATOON LEFT by announcing CAN-
(5) Projectile. CEL PLATOON LEFT.
(6) Fuze. 10-21. Change in Distribution
(7) Deviation. If the observer desires a sheaf other than parallel,
(8) Range. he must specify the type desired; e.g., CON-
(9) Height of burst. VERGE (OPEN), SHEAF 100 METERS. If the
(10) Control. observer wishes to change to a parallel sheaf
b. Any element for which a change or correc- during adjustment or fire for effect, he requests
tion is not desired is omitted. CANCEL CONVERGE (OPEN), SHEAF 100
METERS.
10-18. Change in Observer-Target Direction
A change in observer-target direction is given

O when it deviates from the announced direction by

more than 100 mils. For example, an observer be-
gins an adjustment on several self-propelled guns,
10-22. Change in Projectile
When the observer desires to change the type of
projectile, he announces the desired change; e.g.,
using a tree at direction 5620 as the adjusting WP or SMOKE.
point. During the adjustment the self-propelled
guns move to a new position an appreciable dis- 10-23. Change in Fuze
tance from the adjusting point. The observer se- When the observer desires to change the type of
lects a new adjusting point in the vicinity of the fuze or fuze action, he announces the desired
target and measures direction 5840 to that point. change; e.g., VT or DELAY.
The first element of his next correction is DI-
RECTION 5840. 10-24. Correction for Deviation
10-19. Change in Trajectory The observer transmits deviation corrections to
The observer requests a change in the trajectory the nearest 10 meters as RIGHT (LEFT) (so
during a low-angle adjustment when it becomes much).
apparent that high-angle fire will be necessary or
during a high-angle adjustment when it becomes 10-25. Correction for Range
apparent that high-angle fire is no longer re- The observer transmits range corrections as
quired. For example, an observer is making an ADD (DROP) (so much).
adjustment on some moving armored personnel a. ADD. ADD is used by the observer to move
carriers. During the adjustment the carriers move subsequent burst (s) away from the observer along
into a deep gully for cover. Knowing from pre- or parallel to the OT line. If the burst(s) falls
vious firing in the area that high-angle fire will short of the target, the observer commands ADD
be necessary to bring effective fire into the gully, (so much).
the observer requests HIGH ANGLE. Conver- b. DROP. DROP is used by the observer to
sely, an observer is making a high-angle adjust- move subsequent/ burst(s) toward the observer

, ment on a column of vehicles halted in a town

along a street with tall buildings. During the
adjustment the vehicles move out toward the edge
along or parallel to the OT line. If the burst (s)
appears beyond the target, the observer com-
mands DROP (so much).
of town. As soon as he notices the vehicles em- 10-26. Correction for Height of Burst
erging from the town, the observer should re- The observer transmits height-of-burst correc-

10-11
FM 6-40

tions to the nearest 5 meters as UP (DOWN) b. REPEAT is also used by the observer to in-
(so much). dicate that he wants fire for effect repeated with
or without changes or corrections to any of the
10-27. Change in Control elements; e.g., ADD 50, REPEAT.
When the observer-desires to change the me-
thod of control (other than AT MY COM- 10-29. Correction of Errors
MAND, para 9-8b (1)), he announces the new If the observer discovers an error in the trans-
method of control; e.g., FIRE FOR EFFECT. mission or read-back of a subsequent correction,
he corrects the error as outlined in paragraph 9-
10-28. Repeating Previously Fired Data 10.
a. REPEAT is used by the observer to indicate
that he desires a subsequent round or group of 10-30. Additional Information
rounds fired with no corrections to deviation, If the observer desires to transmit information
range, or height of burst. For example, if sev- necessary to the conduct of a mission and there
eral rounds burst in the area of observation simu- is no specific format prescribed, he should trans-
ltaneously and the observer could not determine mit the information in clear, concise language
which rounds to observe, he would request RE- and in the sequence least likely to cause con-
PEAT or WP REPEAT. fusion and most likely to expedite the mission.

10-12
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 11
FIRE FOR EFFECT

Section I. PRECISION FIRE

11-1. General deviation spottings of each burst. He announces

The adjustment in precision fire is conducted spottings for range as OVER, SHORT, or
with a single piece. (See chapter 19 for FDC DOUBTFUL and for deviations as RIGHT,
procedures.) LEFT, or LINE. He does not announce the magni-
a. The observer requests fire for effect upon tude of the deviation unless a round appears to
splitting the appropriate range bracket or upon be in error. A target hit is spotted as TARGET.
spotting a range correct or target hit. The ap- These spottings are announced in the order of
propriate range bracket to be split upon entering range and then deviation.
fire for effect is usually 100 meters. However,
b. Fire for effect is continued until the FDC
when the range probable error of the weapon at
notifies the observer that the registration is com-
registration point range is 38 meters or larger,
plete.
the FDC will instruct the observer to enter fire
for effect when a 200-meter bracket is split. If
c. For an example of a precision registration
with fuze quick, see paragraph 14-2.
the observer spots a round as target hit during
the adjustment phase, he will enter fire for ef- 11-3. Registration With Time Fuze
fect by annocncing TARGET, FIRE FOR EF-
OFECT.
b. Fire for effect consists of a number of
a. After a registration has been conducted with
fuze quick, a time registration may be initiated
from the fire direction center. The FDC notifies
rounds fired singly or in groups of two or three the observer to OBSERVE TIME REGISTRA-
by the adjusting piece. The FDC informs the TION.
observer of the number of rounds that are to be b. The observer does not send corrections in a
fired in the initial group and in subsequent groups time registration but only announces his spot-
if a change is to be made in the number of rounds ting of each burst as AIR or GRAZE. He records
to be fired. The observer normally does not send the height of burst of each round but does not re-
corrections during fire for effect in a precision port the height of burst unless he is requested to
mission but only announces spottings of bursts do so by the fire direction center or unless the
as they occur. height of burst of a round is in excess of 50 me-
c. If the deviation or range spotting for a parti- ters. For example, if the height of burst of a
cular burst indicates to the observer the probabil- round is 75 meters, he reports AIR, 75 METERS.
ity that the round was fired in error, the observer If a round is obviously in error for range of de-
should report the magnitude of the deviation or flection, he must determine and report the amount
range error to the fire direction center. For of error. For example, the observer spots a round
example, the observer spots a round in fire for in fire for effect as GRAZE, LINE but estimates
effect as DOUBTFUL and estimates that it is that it is 100 meters short of the target. The ob-
100 meters left of the registration point. The server transmits GRAZE, 100 METERS SHORT,
observer transmits a spotting of DOUBTFUL, LINE. Rounds are fired singly until both an air-
100 METERS LEFT. Since spottings normally burst and a graze burst have been obtained. The
are made in miles, the word "meters" is used to time registration is continued until it is termin-
prevent any misunderstanding. The error is re- ated by the fire direction center.
ported in meters because the OT distance may not c. For an example of a time registration, see

.11-2.
be known at the fire direction center.

Registration With Fuze Quick

a. During fire for effect in a registration with
fuze quick, the observer announces the range and
paragraph 14-3.

11-4. Destruction Mission

a. In a destruction mission, the FDC will
direct the use of fuze quick in the initial rounds

11-1
FM 6-40

of fire for effect as well as in the adjustment. effective, the observer must request a type of fuze
This procedure facilitates valid spottings by the that, in his opinion, will be more effective.
observer and expedites determination of an ad- b. During fire for effect, the observer an-
justed deflection and quadrant elevation at the nounces spottings just as he does in a registra-
fire direction center. Subsequently, the S3 directs tion with fuze quick.
the use of the fuze that will be most effec- c. Fire for effect is continued until the ob-
tive against the target; e.g., fuze delay or fuze server notifies the FDC that the target has been
concrete-piercing. If this subsequent fuze is not destroyed.

Section II. AREA FIRE

11-5. General delay only if 50 percent or more of the bursts

a. In area fire, the observer normally requests that established the final range bracket were air-
fire for effect at the conclusion of an adjustment. bursts.
However, he may fire for effect when his target
11-7. Distribution
location is accurate enough to preclude the need a. Normally, the S3 determines the proper dis-
for adjustment. tribution of fire for a target. His decision is based
b. The type and volume of fire delivered in fire on the observer's call for fire and other available
for effect are determined by the S3. His deci- information. Unless the S3 directs, because of the
sion is based on the observer's request, the de- nature and the size of the target, the use of a
scription of the target, the effect sought, and sheaf other than that normally fired, artillery fires
the status of ammunition supply and on other are delivered at center range in a parallel sheaf.
considerations (chap. 27). If fire for effect is in- The S3 may also direct the battery or batteries
effective or insufficient, the necessary corrections to fire through different elevations for greater
are made and additional fire for effect is re- range coverage.
quested.
c. Upon completion of fire for effect, the ob- b. When appropriate, the observer may call for
server sends refinement data and END OF MIS- a special sheaf. This should be announced in the
SION. He reports the effect observed. call for fire when possible. It may be announced
in subsequent corrections if the sheaf being fired
11-6. Fire for Effect After Adjustment does not provide satisfactory distribution. In
a. Deviation. Deviation errors of 30 meters or making such a request, the observer announces
more are corrected during the adjustment by the the type of sheaf desired; e.g., OPEN or SHEAF,
observer. Therefore, it should not be necessary 50 METERS.
to make a large shift upon entering fire for effect. c. When the number of pieces allocated to the
b. Range. The adjustment of range is complete mission is not adequate to cover the target with
when the observer has obtained bursts at the same an open sheaf, the observer may make succes-
range as the adjusting point (range correct or sive shifts in fire for effect to insure coverage of
target hit) or when he has split the appropriate the target.
range bracket. When the target is fixed, of little
depth, and clearly visible or when the fires of 11-8. Surveillance of Fire for Effect
more than one battery are massed on the target, it The observer carefully observes te results of the
is appropriate to split a 100-meter range bracket. fire for effect and then takes whatever action is
When the target is moving, is of substantial depth, necessary to complete the mission.
or is poorly defined, it may be appropriate to enter a. If the fire has been effective and sufficient, the
fire for effect on splitting a 200-meter range observer announces END OF MISSION and re-
bracket. When the range probable error is 38 ports the effect observed; for example, 20 CAS-
meters or larger, the FDC will notify the ob- UALTIES, INFANTRY DISPERSED. If the
server to enter fire for effect on splitting a 200- mean point of impact (mean point of burst) is not
meter range bracket. directly on (20 meters above) the adjusting point,
c. Height of Burst. When time fuze is being the observer will make a correction to improve
used, fire for effect is not called for until the height the accuracy of the replot of the target and end
of burst is correct or until a correction can be the mission; e.g., LEFT 20, DOWN 5, immedi-
expected to result in the correct height of burst ately followed by END OF MISSION.
(para 10-14). When fuze delay is being used for b. If the fire has been insufficient but accurate,
ricochet fire, fire for effect is entered with fuze including an effective height of burst, the ob-

11-2
 FM 6-40
server may request REPEAT to obtain additional cent of the rounds fired in fire for effect, and ad-
fire. ditional fire is needed, the observer must request
c. If any element of the fire for effect (devia- a change to fuze VT or time and repeat fire for
tion, range, or height of burst) was sufficiently effect.
in error that the effect sought was not obtained, e. If the observer desires that the target be
the observer should correct the element (s) in error replotted for future use, he announces the ap-
and continue fire for effect; for example, ADD propriate corrections (e.g., RIGHT 10, RECORD
50, DOWN 10, REPEAT. AS TARGET, END OF MISSION) and reports
the effect observed.
d. If ricochet action with fuze delay was de- f. For an example of an area mission, see para-
sired, but was not obtained from at least 50 per- graph 14-4.

11-3
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 12
ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE BY THE AIR OBSERVER

Section I. INTRODUCTION
12-1. General 12-3. Observation From High-Performance
Observation and adjustment of artillery fires Aircraft
may be accomplished from the air by use of or- Use of high-performance aircraft provides obser-
ganic Army aircraft or Air Force high-perform- vation deep into enemy territory beyond the limits
ance aircraft. An air observer normally is em- of organic Army aircraft. The pilot and observer
ployed, since it is difficult for a pilot to navigate can fly over enemy territory to sufficient depth
and observe at the same time. However, the to observe and adjust long-range artillery fire.
pilot should be well trained in the adjustment of Usually two aircraft are used on a mission-one
fire, since such knowledge is invaluable in training to adjust the fire and the other to observe for
a new air observer and enables the pilot to adjust hostile aircraft. Danger from both hostile air
fire in the event an observer is not available. defense artillery and hostile planes usually in-
12-2. Observation From Army Aircraft creases as the duration of the flight and the
Observation from organic Army aircraft normally depth into hostile territory increase. For this
is limited to altitudes and locations that allow reason the air observer must minimize the time
the aircraft to avoid enemy ground fire and enemy required for an adjustment.
fighter aircraft.

Section II. PREFLIGHT PREPARATIONS

12-4. General (3) The surveillance required, the time of
The air observer and pilot should be given a pre- the mission, the type of adjustment to be made,
flight briefing by the intelligence officer (S2) and the maps and photographs to be used, known
operations officer (S3). enemy air defense, flight instructions, and secu-
12-5. Preflight Briefing rity restrictions.
a. All pilots and observers flying a mission
should be briefed on all points pertinent to the (4) The communication details, to include
the locations of ground radios and panel stations,
mission, including-
(1) The locations of battery position areas, the channels to be used, the call signs to be used,
registration points, confirmed targets, known the check-in time(s), and prearranged signals.
points, suspected targets, and areas to be search-
ed and the spotting lines to be used in making b. All important enemy locations, lines and
corrections (if the GT line is not used). areas discussed in the briefing are recorded on
(2) The tactical situation, to include the lo- appropriate maps. Photographs, oblique or verti-
cations of friendly troops, no-fire and fire sup- cal, are gridded when possible and the direction
port coordination lines and the zones of action of and locations of critical points, lines, and areas
supported troops. are marked on the photographs.

Section III. DETERMINATION OF INITIAL DATA

12-6. Call for Fire rections from an air observer, the elements of
The procedures used by the air observer are simi- which are identical with those of the ground ob-
lar to those used by the ground observer. (The server, are transmitted in the same sequence as
air observer cannot locate a target by polar co- those from the ground observer.
ordinates.) The call for fire and subsequent cor-

12-1
 FM 6-40
make known to the FDC personnel the identifi-
12-7. Determination of the Spotting Line
Usually, the ground observer uses the observer- cation of the feature(s) so that they can deter-
target line as a basis for locating a target by a mine the direction established thereby. If the air
shift from a known point and for making his observer can accurately visualize a cardinal com-
spottings and corrections. Since the aircraft is pass direction on the ground, he may use the
constantly moving, the air observer must use as cardinal direction as a spotting line.
his basis for locating a target, a shift from a 12-8. Location of Targets
known point, and for making his spottings and When a target is observed, its location can be
corrections a spotting line other than the obser- determined and indicated by grid coordinates, by
ver-target line. Fire direction procedures are a shift from a known point (marking round) or
based on the target grid method; therefore, the by a prearranged code.
air observer's spotting line and its direction a. Grid Coordinates. The observer locates the
must be known by the FDC personnel of the unit target on his map and transmits the grid co-
for which the air observer is adjusting fire. Pre- ordinates of the location.
ferably, the air observer selects his spotting line b. Shift from a Known Point (Marking
and makes it known to the FDC personnel prior Round) and a Spotting Line. The observer may
to flight. The air observer may select as his indicate the location of a target by announcing a
spotting line the gun-target line or some other shift from a known point and a spotting line. The
line of known direction. point must be plotted on the firing chart and must
a. Gun-Target Line. The air observer may se- be identifiable on the ground by the observer.
lect as his spotting line the gun-target line. If This point may be a registration point or any
he knows the location of the adjusting battery point previously located by survey or by firing.
and can identify that location while in flight, he The observer announces the shift from the known
can easily visualize the gun-target line. If he point to the target in meters; e.g., FROM REG-
does not know the location of the adjusting bat- ISTRATION POINT 1, RIGHT 400, ADD 800.
tery, he can request RANGING ROUNDS in his If any spotting line other than the GT line is used,
*call for fire (distribution of fire). In such a case, the observer must identify the spotting line; e.g.,
the FDC personnel will cause the adjusting bat- FROM TARGET AF7406, SPOTTING LINE
tery to fire two rounds at the same deflection NORTH-SOUTH HIGHWAY, RIGHT 400, ADD
but 400 meters apart in range so that the air 800. Subsequent corrections, based on the an-
observer can visualize the gun-target line. If fire nounced spotting line are made in the normal
direction personnel of the adjusting battery are manner. When no maps are available and there
conducting the mission and the air observer's has been no previous firing in an area, the air
aircraft is equipped with a homing device, the observer may request MARK CENTER OF SEC-
air observer can easily determine the gun-target TOR and then shift from the marking rounds
line. The pilot maneuvers the aircraft over the using an announced spotting line as the basis for
target area and, at the observer's request, the corrections. Cardinal points of the compass may
adjusting battery radiotelephone operator keys be used for locating targets from a reference
his radio for 20 to 30 seconds. The pilot maneu- point; for example, FROM REGISTRATION
vers the aircraft so that the on-course signal is POINT 1, EAST 400, NORTH 800. Another ex-
indicated in the homing device, thus establishing ample is FROM REGISTRATION POINT 1,
the flight of the aircraft on the gun-target line. CARDINAL NORTH, RIGHT 400, ADD 800.
After the air observer has determined the gun-
target line, he should select a terrain feature, c. PrearrangedCode. When the location of a
such as a road, stream, or ridgeline, that will target has been established by the FDC personnel
assist him in remembering the direction of the and the observer prior to a flight, a code name
gun-target line. If the spotting line has not been or target number may be given to the target. In
prearranged with the FDC and the air observer this case, the observer need only transmit the
does not indicate a spotting line in his call for preassigned code name or target number to ob-
fire, the gun-target line will be usedo tain fire on the target.

b. Other Line of Known Directin. The air

observer may select as his spotting line a terrain 12-9. Determination of Distance
The observer can determine distance on the
feature, such as a road, railroad, stream, or
ground by requesting RANGING ROUNDS. The
ridgeline, or a series of terrain features. The air
400-meter range spread obtained from ranging
observer, either prior to or during flight, must

12-2
 FM 6-40

rounds not only will allow accurate visualization tablish a yardstick for estimating subsequent
, of the GT line (para 12-7a) but also will es-
range and deviation corrections.

Section IV. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURES

12-10. General the observer to facilitate aircraft orientation. A

Adjustment procedures for the air observer are new time of flight will be announced when it
the same as those for the ground observer except changes more than 5 seconds from that originally
as noted in paragraph 12-11. announced. A 5-second splash warning is trans-
a. Considerations for the selection of an ad- mitted from the FDC to the observer for each
justing point are the same for both air and group of rounds.
ground observers.
b. The air observer can adjust artillery fire 12-11. Adjustments
at night by using standard procedures. However, a. Adjustment of Deviation. The air observer
artificial illumination may be necessary to make determines deviation in meters, with respect to
the target area discernible. The illumination may the spotting line, and announces corrections in
be accomplished by searchlight, illuminating meters. In some instances, it may be faster and
shells, or parachute flares. When parachute flares more accurate to bracket the spotting line for
are used, the flares should be released from an deviation than to attempt precise deviation cor-
aircraft other than the observer's aircraft so that rections to the spotting line.
the observer will not be looking into the target b. Adjustment of Range. The air observer
area directly past a burning flare. Night adjust- spots bursts for range with respect to the chosen
ment missions should be planned during daylight spotting line and the target. Using the bracket
hours. Plans should include a daylight flight over method of adjustment, he announces range cor-
the proposed area of operation for the selection rections in meters.

, of checkpoints and for general terrain orienta-

tion. The air observer must consider the differ-
ent shapes and shadows that will be formed in
c. Adjustment of Height of Burst. The air ob-
server cannot readily determine differences in
height of burst, consequently, he seldom will be
the target area as a result of the illumination. requested to adjust height of burst. He may be
Orientation may also be a problem, especially on required to observe time registrations in which
very dark nights. However, effective fire can be only spottings of AIR or GRAZE are transmit-
placed on the target by a well-trained observer. ted.
c. The air observer may use AT MY COM- 12-12. Fire for Effect
MAND during the adjustment so that the aircraft The air observer calls for fire for effect and an-
can be positioned for proper observation of each nounces spottings during fire for effect in the
group of rounds. The time of flight is sent to the manner described for a ground observer (para
observer immediately following the message to 11-6).

12-3
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 13
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE FOR SPECIAL SITUATIONS

Section I. CONDUCT OF FIRE WITH CHEMICAL PROJECTILES

13-1. Chemical Projectiles phorous adhering to the clothing and skin, caus-
Chemical projectiles for cannon artillery con- ing painful burns.
sist of HC smoke projectiles, colored smoke pro- d. Gas. The gas projectile is a burster-type
jectiles, white phosphorus (WP) projectiles, and projectile that is fired with an impact fuze or
gas projectiles. a time fuze, depending on the type of filler. Gases
a. HC Smoke. HC (white) smoke is a base- available are irritant agents and lethal agents.
ejection projectile that is fired with a time fuze.
HC smoke is used primarily for screening against 13-2. Smokescreening Missions
enemy observation; it produces no casualty ef- A smokescreen is employed to reduce the effec-
fect. HC smoke may be used for signaling, for tiveness of enemy visual observation. Visual ob-
marking a target for an airstrike, and for aid- servation is reduced by employing smoke on
ing an observer in locating his rounds under dif- enemy observation posts, on friendly units or in-
ficult observing conditions. stallations, or between enemy observation posts
b. Colored Smoke. Colored smoke also is a base- and friendly units or installations. A smoke mis-
, ejection projectile that is fired with a time fuze.
The colors available are red, yellow, green, and
violet. Colored smoke is used for signaling, for
sion must be coordinated with higher headquar-
ters to insure that the mission does not interfere
with other operations.
marking a target for an airstrike, and for aiding a. Effects of Weather on Smoke. The effects of
an observer in locating his rounds under difficult weather conditions on the performance of both
observing conditions. Normally, the observer does HC and WP smoke are similar in nature, though
not adjust colored smoke. If adjustment onto a different in magnitude. The principal difference
precise location is required, the observer adjusts between HC and WP smoke is in the rate of fire
deviation, range, and height of burst as appro- needed to insure continuous screening. The rate
priate. of fire required for WP smoke is greater than
c. White Phosphorus. White phosphorus is a that for HC smoke.
burster-type projectile that usually is fired with (1) Wind strength. A strong wind disper-
an impact fuze. In some cases wherein white phos- ses the smoke quickly; however, if there is little
phorus is used for aiding an observer in locating or no wind, the smoke may thin out by natural
his rounds under difficult observing conditions, it dispersion before it has been effectively carried
is fired with a time fuze. White phosphorus is downwind. The best wind is a steady wind of
very effective in the initial buildup of a smoke- about 4 to 10 knots.
screen, but it is not as effective as HC smoke in (2) Humidity of the atmosphere. Smoke
maintaining a smokescreen because the white disperses more rapidly in a dry atmosphere than
phosphorus smoke rises rapidly. Since white in a moist atmosphere.
phosphorus possesses incendiary and casualty- (3) Turbulence of the atmosphere. Turbul-
producing effects as well as smoke effect, the ence is caused by hot air rising from the ground
proximity of friendly troops must be carefully and disturbing the atmosphere. Turbulence may
considered when it is used for screening. When cause the smoke to drift irregularly, may cause
white phosphorous is used against frame houses windows to develop, and, when severe, may cause

, or other objects of flammable material, some fuz-

es should be set at delay to effect penetration
before bursting and thus increase the incendiary
pillaring.

ny days.
(a) High turbulence occurs on calm, sun-

effect of the burning phosphorous particles. Cas- (b) Moderate turbulence occurs when the
ualties are caused by the small particles of phos- sky is overcast (cloudy). When the wind exceeds

13-1
FM 6-40

10 knots, turbulence is always moderate regard-

less of existing weather conditions.
D Y E
(c) Low turbulence occurs on clear nights
and when the sky is clear and the wind is light,
I/
for about 1 hour before and after sunset.
b. Selection of Adjusting Point(s). TO-R
AREA.............. .ETO
(1) Careful selection of the adjusting BE BL IN DE D 'B I E SCREENED

point(s) is necessary if full advantage is to be (ENEMY)I (FRIENDLY)

taken of the smokescreen. The factors that de-

termine the selection of the adjusting point(s)
are- G XF
(a) The area to be blinded; i.e., the area Figure 13-1. Selection of adjusting point(s).
in which the enemy is located.
(b) The area to be screened; i.e., the area considered a tailwind. The adjusting point(s)
over which our own troops must pass. must be upwind of line XY (YX) but does not
(c) The direction of the wind. (The need to be outside the area XYEF.
strength of the wind affects only the rate of fire.) 4. Headwind. A wind from a direction
(2) The areas to be blinded and screened between 1,300 and 1,600 mils of the direction of
(fig 13-1) will be pointed out on the ground or the line XY (YX) and blowing from the area to
map by the supported unit commander or the be blinded toward the area to be screened is con-
artillery commander ordering the smokescreen. sidered a headwind. Since the wind is blowing
The direction of the wind "- determined by the from the enemy toward our troops, the smoke
observer. mission is likely to be unsuccessful because of
(a) In figure 13-1, it is clear that the the inconvenience caused our own troops by the
smoke must be across the area DEFG and be ef- smoke drifting toward them. If the smoke mis-
fective between X and Y. Normally, line XY sion is undertaken, the adjusting point(s) must
should be placed close to the area to be blinded be upwind of the line XY (YX) and often must
so that the smoke causes the most inconvenience be inside the area to be blinded.
to the enemy and very little inconvenience to c. Conduct of a Quick Smoke Mission. The
our own troops. However, there are occasions quick smoke mission usually is satisfactory when
when the smokescreen should be close to the area the area to be blinded is small, the observer is in
to be screened; e.g., when the area to be screened the area to be screened, and the wind is from
is much smaller than the area to be blinded or the flank or nearly so. In such circumstances,
when the altitude of the area to be blinded is the smoke delivered from one gun normally will
much lower than that of the area to be screened. be sufficient. However, if the observer, after see-
(b) The number and locations of adjust- ing the smoke pattern on the ground, determines
ing points, in order to produce an effective that additional points are needed, he will locate
smokescreen along the line XY (YX) in figure these points by grid or by a shift from the last
13-1, depends on the direction of the wind. Wind round fired. Smoke will be delivered on these
is classified, according to its direction in relation points, and, if necessary, the observer will correct
to the direction of line XY (YX), as a flank the placement of the smoke.
wind, an oblique wind, a tailwind, or a headwind. (1) Call for fire. When the observer desires
1. Flank wind. A wind from a direction to smoke an area quickly, he must select the
within 500 mils of the direction of line XY (YX) adjusting point upwind from the area to be
is considered a flank wind. The adjusting point(s) smoked. The call for fire includes the location of
must be upwind of Y (X). the adjusting point, the direction, the type of
2. Oblique wind. A wind from a direc- smoke mission, the length of the target (area to
tion between 500 and 1,300 mils of the direction be smoked), the attitude of the target, the esti-
of line XY (YX) is considered an oblique wind. mated number of points needed to adequately
The adjusting point(s) must be upwind of line cover the target, and the time length of the
XY (YX). smokescreen.
3. Tailwind. A wind from a direction Example: FIRE MISSION, GRID 321546,
between 1,300 and 1,600 mils of the direction of DIRECTION 300, SMOKE, 200-METER
the line XY (YX) and blowing from the area to FRONT, ATTITUDE 4800, ESTIMATE 2
be screened toward the area to be blinded is POINTS FOR 30 MINUTES, ADJUST FIRE.

13-2
 FM 6-40

(2) Adjustment. The adjustment is begun serve the screen and make any corrections in
on the adjusting point with one gun firing HE sheaf, range spread, lateral spread, or rate of
with fuze quick. When shell HE has been ad- fire necessary to provide an adequate smoke-
justed to within 100 meters of the adjusting screen.
point, the observer will call for smoke to complete (1) Call for fire. If the observer initiates
the adjustment. The adjustment with smoke is the deliberate smoke mission, the call for fire
continued until the observer has the proper height will include the same elements as the call for fire
of burst (approximately 100 meters) and place- for the quick smoke mission. A formal procedure
ment of the smoke on the ground. may be impossible because of the number of ad-
(3) Fire for effect. Once fire for effect is be- justing points and the large area to be smoked.
gun, the observer must observe the effect of the In this case, many exchanges of information will
smoke on the ground to determine whether ade- be informal.
quate coverage is provided by one adjusting point. (2) Adjustment. The adjustment is conduct-
If the observer sees that he is not getting the ed as outlined in c (2) above. The observer eva-
needed coverage, he must select an additional luates the effect of the smoke on the ground and
adjusting point(s) with relation to the effect estimates any corrections necessary to produce
provided from the smoke already on the ground. an adequate smokescreen. The situation may arise
To determine the number of points needed, the in which the observer estimates that the entire
observer divides the width of the area to be battery is not required; in this case, he should
blinded by the effective width of the smoke. The notify the FDC that the right (left) platoon is
observer may request that the additional point(s) not required in fire for effect. Whenever possible,
be located accurately by the use of HE and then, adjustment with HE and fuze quick should be
a 100-meter bracket is obtained, switch'to smoke. made just prior to the firing of the smokescreen.
However, if the observer is positive that his loca- (3) Fire for effect. Once fire for effect is
tion of the additional adjusting point(s) is with- begun, the observer must observe the effect of the
in 100 meters, he may request that smoke be fired smokescreen to determine whether an adequate
immediately and, if necessary, adjust the smoke. screen is provided. If the entire area is not screen-
Once the observer sees that he is getting ade- ed or if gaps are present in the screen, the ob-
quate coverage, he must notify the FDC as to server should request any necessary sheaf, range
the length of time he desires the area to be spread, or lateral spread corrections to produce
smoked. the necessary screen.
d. Conduct of a Deliberate Smoke Mission.
The deliberate smoke mission is used when the Note. The observer must bear in mind that the
adjustment of a smoke mission is conducted with HE and
area to be blinded or screened has a longer front- fuze quick until rounds are within 100 meters of the
age than can be covered by the fire from a desired adjusting point. This is particularly important
quick smoke mission. The smoke mission may be when it is desired to smoke friendly positions. Great care
initiated by the observer, or it may be planned must be taken to select an adjusting point so that friendly
at the FDC and the observer instructed to ob- troops are not endangered during the HE adjustment.

Section II. BATTLEFIELD ILLUMINATION

13-3. General 13-4. Conduct of Fire With Illuminating
The purpose of battlefield illumination is to pro- Projectile
vide friendly forces with light to assist them in a. Uses. Illuminating projectiles are used
night ground operations, offensive or defensive. for-
The artillery observer is concerned primarily (1) Illuminating areas of suspected enemy
with two means of illumination-illuminating movements.
projectiles and searchlights. When properly used,
(2) Providing illumination for night adjust-
night illumination increases the morale of friend-
ment or surveillance of artillery fire by an air
ly forces, facilitates operations, and harasses and
observer or a ground observer.
blinds the enemy. The artillery is responsible
for providing illumination with illuminating pro- (3) Harassing enemy positions or installa-
jectiles and searchlights. Any artillery observer tions.
may be called upon to conduct an illumination (4) Furnishing direction to friendly troops
mission. for attacks or patrol activities. (Illumination

13-3
FM 6-40

flares must be placed well in advance of friendly except that the adjustment is considered com-
troops to avoid illuminating the troops.) plete when the illumination is within 200 meters
(5) Guiding low-level tactical aircraft on of the desired location. Normally, deviation,
important targets within artillery range. range, and height of burst are adjusted concur-
b. Ammunition. Table 13-1 gives some of the rently. If the height of burst is drastically in
factors to be considered in the employment of error, it may be necessary for the observer to
artillery illuminating projectiles. Data are ap- adjust the height of burst before adjusting the
proximate and vary with nonstandard conditions. other elements in order to have enough light to
c. Call for Fire. When the observer desires to see the target.
illuminate the battlefield using illuminating pro- (2) The correct position of the flare relative
jectiles, he calls for fire, using the procedures to the adjusting point depends on the terrain
described in chapters 8 and 9. The method of and the wind. Generally, the flare should be to
engagement element in the call for fire will re- one flank of the adjusting point and at about the
quire special consideration when determining same range. In a strong wind, the point of burst
the-- must be some distance from the adjusting point
(1) Type of projectile. Illuminating must be because of the drift of the flare. If the target is
specified. on a forward slope, the flare should be on the
(2) Type of fuze. Fuze time is used with flank and at a slightly shorter range. If the ad-
illuminating projectile. Therefore, this element justing point is a prominent target, better visi-
is omitted from the call for fire.
(3) Distribution of fire. The size and shape bility may be obtained by placing the flare be-
of the area to be illuminated, the OT distance, yond the target so that the target is silhouetted.
conditions of visibility, and the candlepower of (3) The proper height of burst is that which
the projectile influence the selection of the distri- will allow the flare to strike the ground just as
bution of fire. Distribution of fire is indicated as it stops burning. Changes in height of burst are
follows: made in multiples of 50 meters. Variations in
(a) One gun. One round from one gun. the time of burning of flares cause any finer ad-
(b) Two guns. One round from each of justment of the height of burst to be useless.
two guns firing simultaneously with the same (4) When the point of burst is too high, the
data and at approximately the same point in the height-of-burst change is estimated from the
air. height of the flare at the time it burned out.
(c) Two guns, lateral spread. One round When the point of burst is too low, the change
from each of two guns firing simultaneously at required is estimated from the length of time
the same range but at different deflections. (For (T) in seconds that the flare burned on the
distances between bursts, see table 13-1.) All ground. By multiplying T by the approximate
spreads are made with respect to the GT line. rate of fall of the projectile flare, the observer
(d) Two guns, range spread. One round can determine the approximate correction re-
from each of two guns firing simultaneously but quired.
at different ranges along the GT line. (For dis-
tances between bursts, see table 13-1.) Example: An M314A2 projectile flare burned
(e) Four guns. One round from each of 13 seconds on the ground; 13 x 10 = 130; the
four guns firing simultaneously in a diamond pat- correction is UP 150 (answer rounded off to
tern (fig 13-2). nearest 50 meters). (Refer to table 13-1 for rate
d. Adjustment. of fall for different types of ammunition.)
(1) Range and deviation adjustments are (5) After the observer has adjusted the
made by using standard observed fire procedures, flare to the desired location, he should control the

Table 13-1. Illuminating Projectile Characteristics

Initial Burning Rate of Rate of faU
Cannon Projectile Distance continuous (meters per
height of between time
second)
illumination burst (seconds) illumina-
(meters) (spread) tion
(meters) (rounds per
minute)

105-mm- --- M314A2 750 800 60 2 10

105-mm -- - M314A2E1 750 800 70 to 75 2 10
155-mm -- M118 750 800 60 2 10
155-mm_ -- M485 600 1000 120 1 5

13-4
 FM 6-40

bridge, the observer may be able to conserve

rate of fire and number of pieces firing to reduce
ammunition expenditure to the minimum neces- illuminating ammunition by coordinating illum-
ination with the adjustment of HE. The observer
sary for the required observation.
requests COORDINATED ILLUMINATION in-
e. Illumination for HE Adjustment. stead of CONTINUOUS ILLUMINATION and
(1) If the adjustment of illuminating pro- includes BY SHELL, AT MY COMMAND in
jectile discloses a suitable artillery target, the ob- the method of control. This indicates that both
server should request CONTINUOUS ILLUMI- HE and illuminating rounds will be fired only at
NATION while he adjusts HE fire on the tar- the observer's command. As soon as the FDC
get. reports that illuminating and HE fires are ready,
(2) As soon as the observer has located a the observer gives the command to fire the il-
suitable target for HE fire, he should initiate a luminating round and then gives the command to
normal call for fire. If no better means of de- fire the HE rounds so that the HE rounds will
signating the location of the target is possible, arrive during the period of maximum illumina-
the burst center of the illumination can be used tion of the target. As an alternate method, the
as a reference point. observer may control only the firing of illuminat-
(3) If the observer decides to adjust the ing rounds and allow the FDC to command the
illuminating fire and the HE fire concurrently, firing of HE. When the illumination has been
he prefaces the corrections pertaining to illumi- adjusted to yield the best light, the observer an-
nation with the word ILLUMINATING and nounces ILLUMINATION MARK to the FDC to
those pertaining to HE with the letters HE; for notify the FDC of the exact time when the tar-
example, ILLUMINATING, ADD 200, HE, get is best illuminated. The FDC times the in-
RIGHT 60, ADD 200. When this method is used, terval between the actual firing of the illuminat-
the observer usually includes AT MY COMMAND ing round and receipt of the observer's ILLUMI-
in the method of control. NATION MARK. By comparison of this time
(4) If the HE adjustment is made on an interval with the time of flight of the HE, the
immobile target, such as a disabled tank or a FDC can control the firing of the rounds so that

Z-Predicted Impact
location for empty
projectile (carrier)
' - . (See TFT)
'-1

I,1 -",2\

Figure13-2. Field Artillery Illumination-FourGuns.

13-5
FM 6-40

they arrive at the target during the period of e. On occasion, the searchlight may be used in
maximum illumination. a continuous sweep or in a sweep in one direction
f. Example Mission. See paragraph 14-5 for of the searchlight beam. The searchlight may
an example mission. be used in this manner in either the visible or
infrared mode; however, infrared is the normal
13-5. Conduct of Fire With Searchlight mode in which the sweep is made. If the observer
Illumination wishes to exercise a greater degree of control,
a. The primary use of searchlights by the ob- he may command SWEEP RIGHT (LEFT)
server is for illumination of areas of suspected AND HOLD AT MY COMMAND. Visible light
enemy movement for night adjustment or sur- is rarely used in this manner because potential
veillance of artillery fire from air or ground ob- targets can normally hide or conceal their loca-
servation posts. Searchlights are also used to tions as the light approaches. Infrared illumina-
guide friendly elements, mark coordinating lines, tion may be employed in this manner unless the
mark targets for close air support missions, and enemy is equipped with infrared viewers. When
illuminate objectives in an attack (FM 6-115). the searchlight is employed in a continuous
b. The number of lights used in any mission sweep, the searchlight crew must observe the
will depend on the number available and the sweep so that they can keep the light on the
situation at that particular time. Normally, terrain in the manner which best uses the infra-
when direct illumination is used, a single light red illumination.
will suffice.
c. The observer procedure for the adjustment f. Elements of the illumination request are as
of the searchlight beam is similar to that em- follows:
ployed in a fire mission. However, the observer (1) Identification of observer. Identification
makes the adjustment on the searchlight-target of the observer in an illumination request is the
line in deviation and elevation. Corrections are same as that in a call for fire.
made in one of two ways. The observer can move (2) Warning order. The warning for a
the beam right or left and up or down in in- searchlight mission is ILLUMINATION MIS-
crements of 1/4, 1/2 or 1 beam width or he may SION. Since this term is used only for a search-
make these shifts in mils. In most cases, the light mission, it alerts all personnel involved to
beam-width is simpler and faster for the ob- pass the mission to the searchlight light direc-
server, since his yardstick is the width of the tion center (LDC). The LDC normally is
beam itself. For the 30-inch searchlight, the collocated with the division (corps) artillery fire
width of the focus beam is 30 mils wide, and the direction center. Operators in the communication
spread beam is 180 mils wide. The spread beam network must be familiar with this warning sig-
cannot be used when the infrared lenses are on nal and the action to be taken.
the searchlight. For the 23-inch searchlight, the (3) Target location. The target may be lo-
width of the focus beam is 9 to 13 mils, and the cated by any of the methods described in chapter
width of the spread beam is 120 mils. Examples 8.
of observer corrections are as follows: (4) Description of target. The description
(1) RIGHT 60 MILS or RIGHT 2 BEAMS. of the target is preceded by the word
(2) UP 15 MILS or UP 1/2 BEAM. SUSPECTED if the target cannot be positively
d. The smallest correction in mils that can be identified. If the target is identified, the proce-
made by the observer is 5 mils. In the beam- dure is the same as that for a call for fire. This
width method, the smallest correction is a 1/4 element will enable the LDC to determine the
beam width shift. It is not necessary to give a priority of the mission.
change in both deviation and elevation each time (5) Method of engagement.
an adjustment is desired; it is necessary to give (a) Type of adjustment. If the type of
only the element to be corrected. Omission of adjustment is omitted in the illumination request,
the other element indicates it is to remain the the observer will receive one light in adjust-
same. If it is desired to change the degree of ment. The observer may request two or more
beam spread from focused beam to defocused lights if he desires.
beam, the command is DEFOCUS AND HOLD (b) Type of illumination. The observer
AT MY COMMAND. If spread beam is desired, has a choice of direct or indirect illumination.
the command is SPREAD BEAM. This correc- A clear line of sight between the searchlight and
tion precedes the deviation and elevation correc- the target is required for direct illumination.
tions. Visibility into the illuminated area is nearly

13-6
 FM 6-40

equivalent to daylight observation if the light requests the beam spread necessary to illuminate
source is behind the observer. With a single beam the area under observation. The degree of beam
shining at a low angle of elevation, deep shadows spread is designated in the illumination request
are cast by brush and other small objects. Inter- as FOCUS, DEFOCUS, or SPREAD BEAM. If
secting beams may be used to eliminate shadows the observer omits this element, focus beam will
in the immediate target area. Direct illumination be used.
is easier to control but is more vulnerable to (6) Control. ADJUST LIGHT is the only
enemy fire than indirect illumination. With di- method of control used with searchlights. If the
rect illumination, there is a possibility of impair- observer desires to control the time of turning
ing the night vision of friendly forces and of the light on, he includes AT MY COMMAND
silhouetting friendly troops and installations. immediately preceding ADJUST LIGHT. To pre-
The observer must avoid both of these situations. vent personnel from misinterpreting fire com-
If the observer does not specify INDIRECT IL- mands, the observer uses the command FLICK
LUMINATION, it is assumed that he desires to order the lights turned on.
direct illumination. Indirect illumination utilizes g. Some of the terms used in an illumination
the scattered or reflected light rays from the mission that are not common to field artillery
main searchlight beams. The diffused light of are defined in (1) through (4) below.
indirect illumination reaches into hollows, draws, (1) FLICK-Put light in action (corres-
and tree-lined roads. With the naked eye, an ponds to the command FIRE).
observer in an area illuminated by diffused light (2) ACTION COMPLETE-Pointing data
can detect a man standing at ranges up to 150 have been set on light (corresponds to the com-
meters; with the aid of binoculars, he can detect mand SHOT).
a man moving at considerably greater ranges. (3) CUT-Put light out of action (corres-
Indirect illumination can be employed for longer ponds to the command CHECK FIRING).
periods of time than direct lighting, because the (4) HOLD-Keep the light on the same
light source is less vulnerable to enemy inter- azimuth, elevation, and beam spread (corres-
ference. ponds to the command REPEAT).
h. See paragraph 14-6 for an example mis-
(c) Degree of beam spread. The observer sion.

Section Ill. CONDUCT OF ASSAULT FIRE

13-6. General ate for destroying fortifications. Fuze quick is
a. Assault fire is a special technique of indi- used for adjusting and for cutting through a
rect fire in which the maximum charge that parapet or an earth covering. Then conrcete-
will clear intervening crests is used to effect piercing delay fuze is used in fire for effect to
maximum muzzle velocity and penetration. Fir- effect penetration and destruction. If excessive
ing is conducted as short range from a defiladed ricochets result from the use of concrete-piercing
weapon position to attain pinpoint accuracy delay fuze, concrete-piercing nondelay fuze should
against a stationary target. The short range and be used until enough cratering has been effected
flat trajectory make possible successive hits on to prevent ricochet of the delay fuze. Also, con-
the same portion of the target. Only one gun is crete-piercing nondelay fuze may be used to clear
used on a mission, and the FDC for the mission away rubble during the fire for effect.
normally is located at or near the weapon posi-
tion. 13-8. Preparatory Operations
b. Assault fire is used for the destruction of The observer and all personnel concerned with
caves, pillboxes, or other fixed fortifications by an assault fire mission should prepare detailed
firing on the vertical portion of the target. plans for the mission. Thorough planning, recon-
c. See paragraph 14-7 for an example mis- naissance, and coordination must be completed
sion. before the weapon position is occupied. The ob-
server must occupy an observation post as near
as possible to the target and on or near the gun-
13-7. Ammunition Used for Assault Fire target line.
a. Projectile. A high-explosive projectile is
used for assault fire. 13-9. Initial Data
b. Fuzes. Concrete-piercing fuze is appropri- Normally, personnel prepare initial data in ad-

13-7
FM 6-40

vance by use of the best means available (usu- nouncement of fire for effect is made. At this
ally survey) to locate the target with respect time the observer normally is able to estimate
to the assault weapon position. Therefore, in vertical error more accurately than he can esti-
most cases, a complete call for fire from the ob- mate range error. Therefore, the observer makes
server is not necessary. corrections for altitude rather than range. After
a 50-meter range bracket has been split, the
smallest appropriate correction in direction or
13-10. Adjustment altitude is one-half meter. The observer con-
The observer uses a modified adjustment pro-
cedure in which he exercises complete control of tinues to send a correction to the FDC for each
fire throughout the mission. He gives corrections round fired. All rounds are fired singly or as
in meters for each successive round until the requested by the observer to permit the desired
point of impact is on the desired portion of the corrections or changes in ammunition to be
target. The observer corrects an off-line burst to made between rounds. The observer is responsible
bring subsequent bursts to the line through norm- for controlling and ending the mission.
al adjustment procedure except that he gives b. The observer usually will be able to see
deviation corrections to the nearest meter. He each round in flight as it travels to the target.
brackets the target for range, and successively By noting the position of each round at the in-
splits the bracket. stant before the burst rather than by judging
from the burst itself, the observer can make
13-1 1. Fire for Effect more accurate spottings and thus can make the
a. When the observer splits a 50-meter range small corrections necessary for pinpoint accur-
bracket, he is in fire for effect although no an- acy.

Section IV. CONDUCT OF FIRE BY USE OF COMBINED OBSERVATION

13-12. General 13-13. Equipment
a. Combined observation is that type of ob- a. To obtain optimum accuracy, each observ-
servation in which two or more observers at dif- er should be equipped with a BC scope or an aim-
ferent locations are employed to obtain spottings ing circle.
on the same target. For effective conduct of fire b. If a line of known direction is not available,
by use of combined observation, the angle of in- initial direction to the target can be obtained
tersection of the OT lines should not be less than by the use of a compass. Subsequent deviations
150 mils. An angle of 300 to 500 mils is pre- from the OT line can be measured with binocu-
ferred. lars if a BC scope or an aiming circle is not
b. Combined observation is used for the fol- available. However, the use of a compass and
binoculars for combined observation is inaccur-
lowing types of missions: ate. Lack of a BC scope or an aiming circle
(1) High-burst registration. may preclude the use of combined observation
(2) Mean-point-of-impact registration.
(3) Fire to obtain surprise through use of during darkness.
fire-for-effect transfers.
(4) Surveillance of planned fires. 13-14. High-Burst Registration
a. General. At night, visual adjustment of fire
c. Observation posts should be established dur- on a ground registration point is impossible
ing daylight so that instruments may be oriented without illumination. In desert, jungle, or arctic
and a line materialized on the ground for orien- operations, clearly defined registration points in
tation after dark. The OT directions of targets the target areas often are not available. Special
discovered during daylight are recorded by all procedures have been developed to permit regis-
observers. An observer may locate a target at tration under these conditions. One such pro-
night by placing the illuminated crosshairs of cedure is the high-burst registration in which
an observing instrument on the flash of an time fuze is used. (For FDC procedures, see
enemy weapon. The vertical angle and direction paragraphs 19-27 through 19-36.)
are recorded if adjustment is not started at once. b. Orientation of Observer. In a high-burst
As an expedient, the direction to a flash may be registration, two observers (01 and 02) usually
materialized on the ground by a piece of white are employed. The location of each observer and
tape or two stakes. the desired point of burst must be known at the
13-8
 FM 6-40

fire diretcion center. The fire direction center ing the procedures described in paragraph 13-
will determine and furnish to each observer the 17b, orients the observation posts.
direction and vertical angle to the excepted (b) When one observer locates the tar-
point of burst. A typical message to the observers get accurately, the FDC, using the target loca-
from the FDC is as follows: OBSERVE HIGH- tion, orients the other observer.
BURST REGISTRATION. 01 DIRECTION (c) When one observer locates a target,
1164, VERTICAL ANGLE PLUS 12, MEAS- he may orient the other observer on the location
URE THE VERTICAL ANGLE. 02 DIREC- of the target. Both observers may then report
TION 718, VERTICAL ANGLE MINUS 3. directions to the target, and the FDC can lo-
REPORT WHEN READY TO OBSERVE. cate the target by intersection.
c. Conduct of Registration. Each observer ori- (2) Procedure during adjustment. When
ents his instrument on the direction and vertical both observers report READY TO OBSERVE,
angle given and reports when ready to observe. firing is begun. After each round is fired, each
(As soon as practicable after orientation of his observer reports the direction, and the designat-
instrument, the observer will set out, on a known ed observer reports the vertical angle to each
direction, a stake that can be equipped with a burst. If so directed, the observers report devia-
light for night orientation.) The S3 directs the tions (number of mils right or left of the OT
firing of one orienting round. The observer will line) rather than directions.
orient the center of the reticle of his instrument
13-17. Target Area Base
on the point of burst. After the orienting round, A target area (short) base (fig 13-3) may be
the observer will not change the orientation of established to locate targets rapidly and accurate-
his instrument. Instead, he combines the ob- ly. A target area base consists of two observa-
served deviation on the reticle with the reading tion posts from which points in the target area
set on the azimuth scale and azimuth microm- can be located by a combination of intersection
eter to derive the measured direction. The same and polar plotting. Distances are computed, but
general procedure is used to measure the verti- the targets are placed on the firing chart by
cal angle. Both observers report direction read- polar plotting. The base must be long enough so
ings, but only the designated observer will re- that the apex angle (the angle at the target
port the vertical reading (e.g., on the message formed by the intersection of the lines of sight
to the observers in ib above, only 01 would re- from the two observation posts) is at least 150
port vertical angles.) mils. The base should be as nearly perpendicular
13-15. Mean-Point-of-Impact Registration to the direction to the target area as possible.
A mean-point-of-impact registration is conducted Both 01 and 02 must be plotted on the firing
in the same manner as a high-burst registra- chart and the distance and direction between
tion (para 13-17) except that impact fuze is them determined.
used instead of time fuze.
a. When the ends of the base are intervisible,
13-16. Combined Observation for Missions the observers measure the interior angles at 01
Other Than High-Burst or Mean and 02. If the ends of the base are not inter-
Point of Impact Registration visible, the target area base personnel compute
a. General. At long OT distances (more than the interior angles by comparing the direction
4,000 meters), the use of combined observation of the base with the direction from each observa-
may conserve ammunition. Combined observa- tion post to the point being located (FM 6-2).
tion is especially important for heavy artil- b. The observers determine the apex angle by
lery, since observing distances are normally so subtracting the sum of the interior angles at 01
great that adjustment by normal procedure is and 02 from 3200.
very difficult. (For FDC procedures, see para- c. The 01 observer solves the distance from
graphs 24-27 and 24-28.) 01 to the target by using the law of sines, as
b. Procedures. After the observation posts follows:
are plotted on the FDC charts, the following Distance 01 to target _length of base
procedures apply: Sin angle at 02 sin apex angle
(1) Target location and orientation of ob- When the law of sines is applied, the supplemen-
servation posts. tary angle may be substituted for the interior
(a) When an accurate target location is angle at 02, since the sines of supplementary
furnished by higher headquarters, the FDC, us- angles are equal.

13-9
FM 6-40

ENDS OF BASE INTERVISIBLE

ENDS OF BASE NOT INTERVISIBLE

Figure 13-3. Target area (short base).

d. The military slide rule is arranged to pro- (3) Move the cursor until the hairline is
vide a rapid and simple solution to the short over the length of the base on the C (base)
base problem. The steps in the solution are as scale.
follows: (4) Read the distance from 01 to the target
(1) Place the hairline of the cursor over on the D (range) scale.
the value of the angle at 02 on the scale marked
"opposite angle." e. The observer reports the target location to
(2) Move the slide until the value of the the FDC by polar coordinates from 01 as DI-
apex angle of the scale marked "apex angle" is RECTION (so much), DISTANCE (so much),
under the hairline. UP (DOWN) (so much).

Section V. ADJUSTMENT OF HIGH-ANGLE FIRE AND AUXILIARY

ADJUSTING POINT
13-18. General mum elevation substantially in excess of 800 mils
a. Fire delivered at elevations greater than have the capability of firing high-angle fire.
the elevation for maximum range is called high-
angle fire. High-angle fire is often required when 13-19. Determining Requirements for High-
the weapons fire out of deep defilade, from with- Angle Fire
in cities, or over high terrain features near
friendly troops. High-angle fire may also be re- Usually, an observer can determine whether
quired when the targets are located directly be- high-angle fire is required for any given target;
hind hill crests, in jungles, or in deep gullies or if he cannot determine this, he notifies the FDC
ravines and cannot be reached by low-angle fire. that high-angle fire may be necessary. In that
b. Most artillery weapons are capable of high- case, the S3 decides whether high-angle fire is
angle fire. Generally, those cannon with a maxi- to be used and notifies the observer.

13-10
 FM 6-40

13-20. Call for Fire increased dispersion experienced during high-

a. When high-angle fire is desired, the observ- angle fire.
er so indicates in his call for fire. c. Since the time of flight is long in both ad-
b. The excessive height-of-burst probable er- justment and fire for effect, the FDC will an-
ror associated with a long time of flight makes nounce SHOT when the round(s) is fired and
fire with mechanical time fuze undesirable for will announce SPLASH 5 seconds before the
use in high-angle fire. Because of the steep angle burst (s) occurs.
of fall, ricochet fire is seldom possible.
c. Quick and VT fuzes give excellent effect 13-22. Auxiliary Adjusting Point
In order to achieve surprise, the observer may
from side spray because of the steep angle of
fall. VT fuzes produce a lower height of burst decide not to adjust on the target but to adjust
than that normally obtained with low-angle fire. on a nearby point. This nearby point, the auxili-
ary adjusting point, must be far enough away
13-21. Adjustment from the target that the real purpose of the ad-
a. The observer procedure for the adjustment justment is obscured. At the same time, the
of high-angle fire is the same as that for the ad- auxiliary adjusting point must be so selected
justment of low-angle fire. that an accurate (preferably lateral) shift to
b. The observer must realize that small devia- the target can be determined. When the adjust-
tion corrections during adjustment may be un- ment on the auxiliary adjusting point is com-
necessary and time consuming because of the plete, the shift to the target is made.

Section VI. CONDUCT OF FIRE WHEN OBSERVER IS NOT ORIENTED

13-23. General 13-25. Gun-Target Line Method of

In a fast-moving situation, an observer may be- Adjustment
come confused and disoriented. An observer in a When the observer cannot determine the OT di-
moving vehicle has a problem in orientation be- rection or when the OT direction is changing
cause his OT direction is constantly changing. frequently (for example, when the observer is
To bring fire upon a target when the direction with an armored or mechanized infantry unit),
is changing rapidly or is unknown, both the ob- the observer may decide to adjust with respect
server and the FDC must exercise judgment and to the gun-target line. To determine the direc-
initiative. tion of the GT line, it may be necessary for the
13-24. Target Location observer to request ranging rounds (two rounds
If possible, the target location is determined by fired at the same deflection but 400 meters
use of the procedures prescribed in chapter 8. apart in range; corrections are made from the
If target location by normal means is not pos- NEAR or FAR round). When the observer is
sible, the observer must request that a round adjusting with respect to the GT line, the S3
be fired at a point where he can identify it and should select a unit to fire whose location will
use that round as his known point. result in the smallest angle T.

Section VII. ADJUSTMENT OF FIRE BY SOUND

13-26. General troop movement), he can estimate a direction

During operations when observer visibility is and distance from his position.
restricted, fire may be adjusted by the use of b. The Call for Fire. When adjustment by
sound alone.
sound is to be used, the observer so indicates
in the call for fire.
13-27. Adjustment of Fire by Sound c. Adjustment.
a. Target Location. Target locations may be (1) Only one gun is used in the adjustment.
reported to the observer by the supported unit, Upon hearing the burst of the adjusting
or they may be determined by the observer. If round, the observer estimates the direction to
the observer can hear noises at the enemy posi- the burst and compares it with the direction
tion (for example, weapons firing, vehicles, or to the target. He converts the deviation to a

13-11
 FM 6-40

lateral shift in meters by using the estimated direction to the burst. If this occurs, it may be
distance from his position to the target. necessary to fire a high airburst(s) initially.
(2) Distance to the adjusting burst is dif- d. Adjustment With More Than One Observ-
ficult to judge; therefore, it may be necessary er.
for the observer to use creeping techniques to (1) A more accurate target location can be
adjust onto the target. He can determine dis- derived if two or more observers can hear the
tance by measuring the time that it takes for noises produced at the enemy location. Each ob-
the sound of the burst to reach him and multi- server reports an estimated direction to the
plying the time interval by the speed of sound, enemy location. The FDC can plot the data and
which is 350 meters per second. (In this case, determine the ground location by intersection.
the time of impact must be announced by the (2) During the adjustment, each observer
fire direction center.) reports the direction to the burst, and the FDC
(3) The observer must exercise caution in plots the data. The FDC determines the impact
very broken terrain. In hills or mountains the point of the round by intersection and applies
sound may travel around a hill mass before it the appropriate corrections to the subsequent
reaches the observer and thus produce a false round to bring it to the target.

Section VIII. AERIAL FIELD ARTILLERY

13-28. Adjustment procedures may be found in FM 1-40, and FM
The adjustment of aerial field artillery is a re-
6-102.
sponsibility of the forward observer. Adjustment

Section IX. ABCA PRECISION FIRE

13-29. General (2) Spotting Conditions. The ABCA preci-
a. This section describes the precision fire sion fire procedures may be used under the same
procedures that an observer from the army of conditions as the US procedures. Where condi-
one ABCA nation (United States, Great Britain, tions of difficult terrain, limited visibility, or a
Canada, Australia) may use when observing for large angle T increase the probability of mis-
an FDC of the army of another ABCA nation. spottings, however, the risk of an invalid regis-
These procedures are used in joint operations. tration or an unsatisfactory destruction mission
They may also be used, at the discretion of the is greater with the ABCA procedures.
US field artillery commander, as an alternate to (3) Air observers. Since the air observer
the US procedures. spots from a vantage point well above the ter-
b. The ABCA precision fire procedures should rain, the use of ABCA precision (impact) pro-
provide results comparable to those obtained cedures by an air observer should consistently
with the US procedures and may require less provide satisfactory results particularly in diffi-
time and ammunition. Before using these pro- cult terrain.
cedures as an alternate to the US procedures, c. The adjustment in ABCA precision fire is
the US field artillery commander should consider conducted with a single piece. The adjustment
the following: procedures are the same as the US procedures.
(1) Forward observer ability and judg- d. Fire for effect in ABCA precision fire is
ment. ABCA precision fire is controlled by the begun when the observer splits the appropriate
observer. Therefore, observer errors due to poor range bracket, obtains a range correct spotting,
judgment or inexperience are more likely to or obtains a target hit. The range bracket to be
cause an invalid registration or an ammunition- split is normally 100 meters. When the range
consuming destruction mission. The US com- probable error is 25 meters or greater, the FDC
mander, therefore, should be confident in the will notify the observer, and he will enter fire
ability and judgment of forward observers who for effect when he splits a 200 meter range
will use these procedures. bracket.
Note. Forward observers of the other ABCA e. In a time registration, the observer must
nations also perform many of the functions normally adjust the mean height of burst of four rounds
performed by the US S3/fire direction officer. They are fired with the same data to a point 20 meters
normally experienced field artillerymen of proven ability. above the registration point.

13-12
 FM 6-40

13-30. Impact Registration as OVER or SHORT, he follows the procedures

a. In the ABCA impact registration, the ob- in (1) below. If he spots the next round as
server continues the fire for effect until he ob- RANGE CORRECT or TARGET, he follows the
tains a bracket; that is, two OVERS and two procedures in (2) below.
SHORTS fired at the same data or at data 25
meters apart. (When the range probable error is (1) OVER or SHORT. The observer or-
25 meters or greater, the verified bracket is 50 ders that a pair of rounds be fired opposite this
meters.) In satisfying this criterion, a spotting spotting by transmitting 2 ROUNDS, ADD
of TARGET or RANGE CORRECT is consid- (DROP) 25, as appropriate. This splits the 50-
ered an OVER and a SHORT. For firing pur- meter fire-effect bracket. If necessary, he orders
poses, range corrections are never less than 25 one or more additional rounds until two definite
or 50 meters, depenqing on the range probable range spottings have been obtained. The follow-
error. For refinement of the final bracket, the ob- ing spotting combinations may occur:
server may order a 10-meter range correction, (a) Both rounds opposite the initial spot-
which is used to determine the adjusted data but ting (OVER or SHORT). This pair of rounds
is not fired. establishes a preponderance of OVER or SHORT.
b. During fire for effect, deviation corrections The observer orders that a round be fired oppo-
are made only when necessary to obtain definite site the preponderance by transmitting 1
range spottings. A deviation correction for two ROUND, ADD (DROP) 25, as appropriate.
or more rounds fired at the same data is based 1. If the round is opposite the prepon-
on the average deviation of the rounds from the derance, the observer ends the registration, since
registration point. Deviation corrections are nev- two pairs of rounds, fired at data 25 meters apart,
er less than 10 meters. A final deviation refine- bracketing the registration point have been ob-
ment may be made if necessary. It is based on tained.
the average deviation of the FFE rounds. Like 2. If the round is the same as the pre-
a final range refinement, it is used in determining ponderance, the observer orders an additional
the adjusted data but is not fired. round at the same data. If this round is spotted
c. After the observer obtains a verified brack- opposite the preponderance, the observer ends
et, he orders a final refinement, if necessary, and the registration as in 1 above. If it is spotted
transmits RECORD AS REGISTRATION the same as the preponderance, the observer or-
POINT (so and so), END OF MISSION. When ders one or more 25-meter range corrections un-
the observer estimates that the registration point til a spotting of RANGE CORRECT or TAR-
lies equidistant between the MPI of the two GET or a round opposite the preponderance is
pairs of bracketing rounds, the observer orders obtained. He then orders corrections as neces-
a refinement of ADD (DROP) 10 so that the sary to obtain a verified bracket. If two or
final adjusted data are determined near the mid- three 25-meter range corrections result in the
point of the bracket. When the observer esti- same spotting as the preponderance, the observer
mates that the registration point lies nearer the may assume that a false range bracket was ob-
last round(s) fired, no final refinement is re- tained prior to fire for effect. The observer
quired, and the last data fired are the adjusted should continue the adjustment with appropriate
data. When he estimates that the registration range corrections until the proper range brack-
point lies nearer the mean of the pair of rounds et is obtained and should then reenter fire for
at the opposite end of the bracket from the last effect.
round(s) fired, the observer orders ADD 3. If the round is RANGE CORRECT
(DROP) 25 so that the adjusted data are de- or TARGET, the observer ends the registration,
termined at that point. When the range prob- since the equivalent of two pairs of rounds fired
able error is 25 meters or greater than 25 me- at data 25 meters apart, bracketing the regis-
ters, final refinements of 25 and 50 meters are tration point have been obtained.
made in the same manner. (b) Both rounds the same as the initial
d. The sequential examples below list most of spotting (OVER or SHORT). The observer or-
the combinations of spottings that may occur ders one or more 25-meter range corrections un-
during fire for effect and the appropriate cor- til a spotting of RANGE CORRECT or TAR-
rections required to obtain a verified bracket. The GET or a round opposite the preponderance is
observer has split a 100-meter bracket by order- obtained. He then orders corrections as neces-
ing ADD (DROP) 50. If he spots the next round sary to obtain a verified bracket. If two or three

13-13
FM 6-40

25-meter range corrections result in the same (a) RANGE CORRECT or TAR-
spotting as the preponderance, the observer may GET. The observer ends the registration, since
assume that a false range bracket was obtained the equivalent of two pairs of rounds, fired at
prior to fire for effect. The observer should ad- data 25 meters apart, bracketing the registra-
just fire until the proper range bracket has been tion point has been obtained.
obtained and should then reenter fire for effect. (b) Opposite the preponderance. The
(c) The two rounds bracket the registra- observer ends the registration, since two pairs of
tion point (one OVER and one SHORT). The rounds, fired at data 25 meters apart, bracket-
observer orders an additional round fired at the ing the registration point have been obtained.
same data. (c) Same as the preponderance. The
1. If the round is OVER or SHORT, observer orders one or more 25-meter range cor-
the observer orders another round to be fired rections until a spotting of RANGE CORRECT
opposite the preponderance of the last three or TARGET or a round opposite the preponder-
spottings. The observer ends the registration if ance is obtained. He then orders correction as
this round is spotted opposite the preponder- necessary to obtain a verified bracket. If two
ance. If the spotting is the same as the prepon- or three 25-meter range corrections result in the
derance, the observer orders one or more 25- same preponderance, the observer may assume
meter range corrections until a spotting of that a false range bracket was obtained prior
RANGE CORRECT or TARGET or a spotting to fire for effect. The observer should continue
opposite the preponderance is obtained. He then the adjustment until the proper range bracket
orders corrections as necessary to obtain a veri- has been obtained and should then reenter fire
fied bracket. If two or three 25-meter range cor- for effect.
rections result in spottings the same as the pre- 2. If the round is the same as the pre-
ponderance, the observer may assume that a false ponderance, the observer follows the procedure
range bracket was obtained prior to fire for ef- outlined in 1 (c) above.
fect. The observer should continue the adjust- 3. If the round is RANGE CORRECT
ment with appropriate range corrections until or TARGET, the observer ends the registration,
the proper range bracket is obtained and should since the equivalent of two pairs of rounds, at
then reenter fire for effect. data 25 meters apart, bracketing the registra-
2. If the round is RANGE CORRECT tion point has been obtained. (The OVER or
or TARGET, the observer ends the registration, SHORT obtained in (b) above with the previous
since the equivalent of two pairs of rounds, fired
data is disregarded.)
at the same data, bracketing the registration
point has been obtained. e. When DOUBTFUL range spottings are ob-
(2) RANGE CORRECT or TARGET. The tained, the observer may order another round(s)
observer orders that a round be fired at the back on the line. Once a deviation correction has
same data by transmitting REPEAT. This will been made during fire for effect, however, an
result in one of the following spottings: additional round(s) must be fired to insure that
(a) The same as the initial spotting both rounds of a pair constituting one end of the
RANGE CORRECT or TARGET. The observer final bracket are fired at the same data. For
ends the registration, since the equivalent of two example, an observer splits a 100-meter bracket
pairs of rounds, fired at the Same data, bracket- by ordering DROP 50, and obtains a SHORT.
ing the registration point has been obtained. His next correction is 2 ROUNDS, ADD 25. He
(b) Opposite the initial spotting (OVER spots both of these rounds as DOUBTFUL for
or SHORT). An OVER or a SHORT in combina- range. He determined their average deviation to
tion with the initial spotting (RANGE COR- be 30 meters left of the registration point. The
RECT or TARGET) established a preponder- observer orders RIGHT 30 and obtains two
ance of OVER or SHORT. The observer orders OVERS. If he had not made the deviation cor-
one round fired opposite the preponderance by rection, his next correction would have been 1
transmitting ADD (DROP) 25, as appropriate. ROUND, DROP 2 to verify the short end of the
This splits the 50-meter fire for effect bracket. bracket established by the first round of fire for
1. If the round is opposite the pre- effect. Since the deviation correction was made,
ponderance, the observer orders one or more the first round in fire for effect is disregarded,
rounds fired at the same data until one of the the method of fire remains 2 ROUNDS, and the
definite range spottings shown in (a), (b), or correction is DROP 25. If these two rounds are
(c) below is obtained. SHORT the impact registration is ended.

13-14
 FM 6-40

13-31. Time Registration (4) The possible spottings and observer

If a time registration is desired after the impact corrections for the four rounds are as follows:
registration has been completed, the observer (a) Four AIR. The height of burst is
transmits any final refinements and orders REC corrected to 20 meters.
ORD AS REGISTRATION POINT 1, TIME, (b) Three AIR and one GRAZE. The
REPEAT. height of burst is assumed to be correct.
a. The time registration is continued with a (c) Two AIR and two GRAZE. The
single piece. The observer adjusts the mean height of burst corrected by UP 10.
height of burst of four rounds fired with the (d) One AIR and three GRAZE. The
same deflection and quadrant elevation to 20 height of burst is corrected by UP 20.
meters above the registration point. The rules
for the conduct of the time registration are as b. Corrections to height of burst are made in
follows: 10-meter increments. Check rounds may be fired
(1) If the first round is a graze burst, the from other weapons of the battery to verify the
height of burst is raised in 40-meter increments validity of the time registration.
until an airburst is obtained.
(2) When an airburst is obtained, the ob- 13-32. ABCA Destruction Missions
server will announce 3 ROUNDS, FIRE FOT'
EFFECT. The destruction mission is a continuation of an
(3) When four rounds have been fired witl - impact registration. At the final adjusted data
the same data, the observer will end the time determined from the impact registration, the ob-
registration with the appropriate correction to server continues the mission by firing single
height of burst, if required, to achieve a 20 meter rounds, in three-round groups, until the target
mean height of burst; for example, RECOPT has been destroyed. Corrections to range and de-
AS TIME REGISTRATION POINT AT DOWN viation, to the nearest 10 meters, are made af-
10, END OF MISSION. ter each three-round group.
0

Section X. MOVING TARGET MISSIONS

13-33. General 13-35. Conduct of Fire
To bring fire on a moving target requires that a. Target Acquisition Identification. Since time
both the observer and the FDC use procedures is extremely critical in a moving target mission
and techniques slightly different than those used and weapons may have to be shifted, the follow-
when firing on stationary targets. ing information must be sent to the FDC as soon
as a moving target is detected:
13-34. Advance Planning (1) Identification of observer.
Advance planning is necessary to be prepared (2) Warning order.
for firing on moving targets. As time permits, (3) General location of the target (grid
the observer should make the following prepara- square, proximity to some known point, etc.).
tions: (4) Nature of target. Notification that the
a. Select intercept points (IP) along likely target is moving will alert the FDC that a delay
avenues of approach and determine the distance can be expected and that data for an "AT MY
between each successive IP. Record the distances COMMAND, FIRE FOR EFFECT" mission will
as they will be used in determining the target's probably follow.
rate of speed. Example: ALWAYS CIVIL 18, THIS IS
ALWAYS CIVIL 24, FIRE MISSION, VICIN-
b. Notify the FDC of the location of each IP. ITY TARGET AF7002, THREE TANKS MOV-
The FDC will assign a target number to each ING SOUTHEAST, OVER.
IP and will determine and maintain updated fir- b. Target Location. Select an IP on which
ing data for each IP. to fire that is along the moving target's route of
c. Check rounds should be fired on as many of march and through which it can be expected to
the IP's as possible so that the probability of first pass. The IP selected must, given the target rate
round accuracy will be increased. Check rounds of speed, allow the firing unit sufficient time to
should be fired periodically to insure that firing be ready to fire.
data is current. c. Call for Fire. Send the complete call for fire

13-15
FM 6-40

to the FDC with "AT MY COMMAND, FIRE (b) Determine the distance the target
FOR EFFECT" as the method of fire and con- will travel during TF + 2 seconds as follows:
trol. DISTANCE = RATE x TIME
d. Determining the Time to Fire. The elements
of information required to determine the time (c) Back off the distance determined in
to command firing are the projectile time of flight (b) above from the IP and along the target's
and the rate of speed of the target. These are route of march and visually select a point on the
determined as follows: ground. The command to fire is announced when
.(1) Measure the distance between two the target reaches this point.
points through which the target will pass.
(2) Record the time required for the target e. Adjustment. If the fire is not effective the
to pass between the two points and compute the fire-for-effect must be adjusted. Two distinct ac-
rate of speed as follows: tions are required. First, determine the correc-
RATE = DISTANCE tions required to place the MPI at the original
TIME IP and, second, determine a new IP as the tar-
(3) Once the rate of speed of the target has get takes evasive action. For example, if the MPI
been determined the rate is used to determine of the fire-for-effect rounds was approximately
the distance the target must be from the IP 100 meters left and 200 meters short of the IP
when the command to fire is given. This distance with respect to the OP line the observer would
may be determined as follows: announce to the FDC "R100, + 200, new IP,
(a) Determine the TF, from the FDC, GRID DIR _." A new time to fire
and add two seconds (transmission time). must be determined and the mission continued.

13-16
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 14
ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLES

14-1. General indicates a spotting of LINE, L indicates a spot-

The examples of missions contained in this chap- ting of LEFT, R indicates a spotting of RIGHT,
ter are typical of those that an observer may and RG CORR indicates a spotting of RANGE
be called upon to fire. In the examples in para- CORRECT.
graphs 14-2 through 14-4, the symbols used are
as follows: + indicates a spotting of OVER, 14-2. Precision Registration
- indicates a spotting of SHORT, ? indicates a The sample mission shown in figure 14-1 is an
spotting of DOUBTFUL, A indicates a spotting impact registration fired by a 155-mm howitzer
of AIR, G indicates a spotting of GRAZE, LN (M109) on a surveyed registration point.

I esults

Messages, corrections, Observer spottings

and commands Rg Det,
Observer to FDC (call for fire):
FIRE MISSION, REGIS-
TRATION POINT 1, DI-
RECTION 4710, REGIS-
TRATION, ADJUST
FIRE. (The FDC will
transmit to the observer
those elements of the fire
order that are of interest to
him.)
FDC to observer: SHOT. ? 15L
1 2 3 4 5

Remarks: The estimated OT distance is

3,000 meters. With binoculars, the observer mea-
sured the burst 15 mils left of the OT line. The
observed deviation is 45 meters (15 x 3). No
range spotting is obtained. The observer deter-
mined a shift of right 40 meters (45 rounded
to the nearest 10 meters) to bring the next burst
to the OT line.

Figure 14-1. Spotting the burst in impact registration.

14-1
FM 6-40

Messages, correction., Observer spotting#

and commands Results Rg Dev

Observer to FDC:
RIGHT 40.
FDC to observer: SHOT. + LN

Remarks: The burst has been brought to

the OT line. From this range spotting of OVER,
the observer decides to make a range change of
200 meters.

Messages, corrections, Observer spottings

Results Rg Dev
and commands
Observer to FDC:
DROP 200.
FDC to observer: SHOT. -- 1OR

Figure 14-1-Continued.

14-2
 FM 6-40

Messages, corrections, Observer Spottings

and commands Results Rg Dev
Observer to FDC:
LEFT 30 ADD 100.
FDC to observer: SHOT. + IOR

Remarks: A 100-meter range bracket has

now been established along the OT line. The ob-
server will request a range change of 50 meters
for the next round, which will be the first round
in fire for effect.

Messages, corrections, Observer spotting@

and commands Rg
Results Dev
Observer to FDC:
L30 DROP 50, FIRE
FOR EFFECT
FDC to observer: SHOT. I
LN
Observer to FDC:
SHORT, LINE.

Remarks: No further corrections are given

by the observer. The FDC assumes control of the
FFE phase and continues the mission until suf-
ficient spottings from which to compute an ad-
justed elevation have been obtained. The obser-
ver reports only his spottings.

Figure 14-1-Continued

14-3
FM 6-40

Messages, corrections, Observer pottlings

Results Rg Dev
and commands

FDC to observer: SHOT. + R

Observer to FDC:
OVER, RIGHT.

11
Messages. corrections, Observer Spottings
and commands Results Rg Dev

FDC to observer: SHOT.

Observer to FDC :
OVER, LINE.

j7

Figure 14-1-Continued

14-4
 FM 6-40

Messages, corrections, Observer Spottings

and conmnands Results Rg Dev
FDC to observer: SHOT. 4? L
Observer to FDC:
DOUBTFUL, LEFT.

Remarks: This round is not on the OT line.

The observer spots the round as DOUBTFUL,
LEFT.

Mesages, corrections, Observer spottinfs

and commands Results Rg Dev
FDC to observer: SHOT. LN
+
Observer to FDC:
OVER, LINE.

-19
Figure 14-1--Continued

14-5
FM 6-40

Messages, corrections, Ohsrrver spottinqs

Rg Dev
and commands
FDC to observer: SHOT. - LN
Observer to FDC:
SHORT, LINE.

Messages, corrections, Observer Spottings

and commands Results Rg Dev

FDC to observer: SHOT. -- R

Observer to FDC:
SHORT, RIGHT.

Remarks: The FDC has now obtained six

u57able spottings and term'nates the m'sson. If
a t'me registration is desired the mission will
not be terminated but will be continued with
time fuze. The tme registration will be based on
the adjusted data from the impact registration.

Figure 14-1-Continued

Messa,es corrections,
and commands

FDC to observer:
END OF MISSION.
Note. See chapter 19 for FDC impact registration
procedures.

14-6
 FM 6-40

14-3. Time Registration illustrates the procedures used for a time regis-
When a time registration is desired, it will be tration. During a time registration the observer
fired immediately following the impact registra- reports only spottings of AIR or GRAZE.
tion. The sample mission shown in figure 14-2,

Messaaes, corrections, Results

and commands Observer spottings

FDC to observer:
OBSERVE TIME
REGISTRATION.
SHOT. G
Observer to FDC: GRAZE.

Messages, corrections, Results

and commands Observer Spottings
FDC to observer: SHOT. A
Observer to FDC: AIR.

12 3 45

Figure14-2. Spotting the burst in time registration.

14-7
FM 6-40

Meageg, corrections, Observer Spottings

and commanids Results

FDC to observer:
OBSERVE 3 ROUNDS,
SHOT.

1
Results
Messages, corrections, Observer Spottings
and commands

11
Figure 14-2. Continued

14-
 FM 6-40

Messages, corrections, Results Observer Spottings

and commands

FDC to observer:
ROUNDS COMPLETE.
Observer to FDC:
AIR, GRAZE, AIR.

Remarks: Two more rounds will be fired at

the graze end of the time bracket to obtain six
time spottings.

Messages, corrections, Results Observer spottings

and commands

FDC to observer:
OBSERVE 2 ROUNDS. A
SHOT.

Figure 14-2. Continued

14-9
FM 6-40 I
Messages, corrections,
Observer spottinfs
and commands Results

FDC to observer:
ROUNDS COMPLETE.
Observer to FDC:
AIR, GRAZE.

11
Messages, corrections,
and commands

FDC to observer:
END OF MISSION.
Note. See chapter 19 for FDC time registration
procedures.

Figure 14-2. Continued

14-10
 FM 6-40

14-4. Area Fuze Time Mission procedures outlined are the same as those for a
The sample mission shown in figure 14-3, illus- fuze quick area mission except for the height-
trates the observer procedures used during an of-burst adjustment phase required with fuze
area mission with fuze time fired in effect. The time.

Messages, corrections, Observer saottings

and commands Results Rg Dev

Observer to FDC:
FIRE MISSION, FROM
REGISTRATION POINT
1, DIRECTION 1880,
LEFT 660, DROP 1000,
MACHINEGUNS, TIME
IN EFFECT, ADJUST
FIRE. (The FDC will
transmit to the observer
those elements of the fire-
order of interest to him.)
FDC to observer: SHOT. ? 25L

ii
Remarks: The estimated OT distance is
2,200 meters. With binoculars, the observer mea-
sures the center of the burst as 25 mils left of
the OT line. The observed deviation is 50 meters
(25 x 2). No range spotting is obtained.

Figure 14-3. Area mission using fuze time.

14-11
FM 6-40

Messages. corrections, Observer spottings

and commands Results Rg Dev

Observer to FDC:
RIGHT 50.
FDC to observer: SHOT. + 1OR

Remarks: Deviation of 10 mils converts to

20 meters. This is a minor deviation and the ob-
server elects to ignore it inasmuch as he is able
to obtain a range spotting. If a range spotting
were not obtainable, this deviation would be cor-
rected.

Messaaes, corrections, Observer spottings

and commands Results Rg Dev

Ob7erver to FDC:
DROP 200.
FDC to observer: SHOT. - 1OR

3
Figure 14-3. Continued

14-12
 FM 6-40

Messages, corrections. Observer Spotting#

and commands Results Rg Dev

Observer to FDC:
ADD 100. -- IOR
FDC to observer: SHOT.

i41
Messages, corrections, Observer Spotting
and commands Results HOB

Observer to FDC:
TIME, LEFT 20, ADD 50. A (15 mils)
FDC to observer: SHOT.

Remarks: The observer spotting of AIR 5

mils permits the observer to adjust the HOB to
20 meters and request fire for effect. The HOB
correction is DOWN 10.

Figure 14-3. Continued

14-13
FM 6-40

Messaaes, corrections, ObserverRg

spottings
Dev
Results HOB
and com~mands

Observer to FDC:
DOWN 10, FIRE FOR Mixed RG LN
EFFECT A CORR
FDC to observer: SHOT.

Remarks: Observer spottings of MIXED

AIR, RANGE CORRECT, and LINE are consi-
dered adequate for the fire for effect and the ob-
server ends the mission with END OF MISSION,
MACHINEGUNS NEUTRALIZED.

Figure 14-3. Continued

14-14
 FM 6-40

14-5. Coordinated Illumination Mission against the target. He sends the following cor-
a. An observer hears a number of heavy vehi- rections:
cles at a direction estimated at 5,800 mils. He ILLUMINATING, ADD 400; HE, LEFT 50
cannot detect any lights and the entire area is REPEAT.
in complete darkness. Judging from the sound h. The tanks and infantrymen have moved out
and the map study, the observer estimates the of the area of observation. The observer ends the
source of the noises to be grid 725365, which is mission as follows:
about 2,000 meters from his position. He sends RECORD AS TARGET, END OF MIS-
the following call for fire: BOLD RANGE 18, SION, TANKS AND INFANTRY DIS-
THIS IS BOLD RANGE 24, FIRE MISSION, PERSED TO NORTHWEST.
GRID 725365, DIRECTION 5800, VEHICLE
NOISES, SUSPECTED TANKS, ILLUMINAT- 14-6. Searchlight Mission
ING, 2 GUNS LATERAL SPREAD, ADJUST a. An observer hears movement and suspects
FIRE. that an attempt is being made to repair a dis-
b. The first rounds burst about 100 mils left abled tank that is blocking a road in his sector.
of the suspected target area and 150 meters too Searchlights are available, and a study of the
high. The observer sends the following correc- terrain indicates that it is possible to illuminate
tions: the tank by direct illumination. He sends the
RIGHT 200, DOWN 150. following illumination request:
'. The second group of rounds bursts short EVER READY 18, THIS IS EVER
near the OT line but too low-the rounds burn READY 24, ILLUMINATION MISSION,
10 seconds on the ground. The observer sends GRID 67184437, DIRECTION 0780, SUS-
the following corrections: PECTED ACTIVITY AROUND DIS-
ADD 400, UP 50. ABLED TANK, TWO LIGHTS DIRECT
Note. The time of burning (T) on the ground (10 FOCUS BEAM, ADJUST LIGHTS.
seconds) times the rate of descent (5 meters per second) b. The left beam appears below the target and

, eounlst he HOB correction (UP 50).

d. The third group of rounds bursts over the
target area at the correct height and the ob-
the right beam is 2 beam widths to the left.
The observer sends the following corrections:
NUMBER 1, RIGHT 2 BEAMS; NUMBER
server notices two tanks and a number of infan- 2, UP 1/2 BEAM.
trymen moving to the right at the extreme right Note. Searchlights are numbered from right to left
edge of the illuminated area. He determines a in their position.
shift from the center of the illumination and c. Both beams having been centered on the
transmits the following: target, the observer orders HOLD. The com-
RIGHT 400, COORDINATED ILLUMINA- mand HOLD indicates that the lights are to be
TION, GRID 73113690, DIRECTION 6100. held on the target. The observer then calls for
2 TANKS AND PLATOON OF IN- a destruction mission on the tank. The observer
FANTRY, VT IN EFFECT, BY SHELL, may command the searchlights to CUT HOLD
AT MY COMMAND, ADJUST FIRE. and request SPLASH from the FDC. When the
e. The observer is notified when the HE is FDC sends SPLASH, the observer should com-
ready and when illuminating is ready. He will mand FLICK to the searchlights to obtain illu-
control the firing so that the HE will arrive dur- mination on the target. After he sends correc-
ing the period of maximum illumination of the tions to the FDC, he should send CUT HOLD
target. The corrections for the first rounds in to the searchlights. After the tank has been de-
the adjustment of HE are as follows: stroyed, the observer will terminate the mission
ILLUMINATING, REPEAT; HE, LEFT as follows:
70, ADD 100. END OF MISSION, STALLED TANK DE-
STROYED.
f. The observer's request to fire for effect is d. Using these commands at AT MY COM-
ILLUMINATING, REPEAT: HE, RIGHT 10, MAND for the artillery fire, the observer is able
DROP 50, FIRE FOR EFFECT. He retains con- to light the target for adjustment and surveil-

, trol of the time of firing to observe the effect.

g. The tanks and remaining infantrymen are
moving out to the northwest away from the ob-
lance and hold to a minimum the exposure of
friendly searchlight positions.

server. It is necessary to shift illumination, and 14-7. Assault Fire Mission

the observer desires to repeat fire for effect The target is a cave in hard rock on a hillside.

14-15
FM 6-40

An 8-inch howitzer section has been given the d. The fourth round bursts just above the up-
mission of sealing the cave entrance. The gun- per right corner of the entrance to the cave.
target range is 1,500 meters and the observer- Height changes are now appropriate instead of
target distance is 1,000 meters. The mission has range changes. The observer sends the correction
been prearranged in detail, and a complete call LEFT 1, DOWN 1.
for fire is unnecessary. The observer reports e. The fifth round burst just below the left
when he is ready to observe, and the FDC, hav- edge of the entrance to the cave. The observer
ing prepared all data in advance, sends com- sends the correction RIGHT 1/2, UP 1/2.
mands to the howitzer to fire the first round. f. The sixth round bursts in the cave entrance.
Since the first round is fired at such short range Fuze CP delay is now appropriate to penetrate
with precise initial data, it should be close to the hard rock. No further changes in height or
the target. deflection are required. The observer sends the
correction CONCRETE-PIERCING DELAY,
a. The first round bursts 10 mils right of the REPEAT.
OT line. The observer spots this round DOUBT- g. The seventh round also bursts in the cave
FUL for range. He sends a correction of LEFT entrance. The observer sees that the cave is al-
10. most completely sealed. He sends the correction
b. The second round bursts between the ob- REPEAT.
server and the target. The observer sends a cor- h. The eighth round strikes the cave entrance
rection of ADD 50. and completely seals the entrance with rubble.
The observer terminates the mission by an-
c. The third round bursts beyond the target. nouncing END OF MISSION, CAVE EN-
The observer sends the correction DROP 25. TRANCE SEALED.

14-16
 FM 6-40

PART FOUR
FIRE DIRECTION

CHAPTER 15
FIRE DIRECTION, GENERAL

Section I. INTRODUCTION

15-1. Definitions port under all conditions of weather, visibility,

a. Fire Direction. Fire direction is the tacti- and terrain.
cal employment to fire power and includes the b. Flexibility sufficient to engage all types of
exercise of tactical command of one or more targets over a wide area.
units in the selection of targets, the concentra- c. Prompt massing of fires of all available
tion or distribution of fire, and the allocation of units in any area within range of the units.
ammunition for each mission. Fire direction in- d. Prompt distribution of fires simultaneously
corporates the method and techniques used in on numerous targets within range.
fire direction centers to convert calls for fire into
appropriate fire commands. 15-3. Command and Scope
(1) Tactical Fire Direction. Tactical fire a. Artillery headquarters control the fires of
direction is the exercise of tactical command of subordinate units. The headquarters may allocate
one or more units in the selection of targets, the reinforcing artillery fires in order to further the
designation of units to fire, and the allocation plan of the force commander. Division, group,
of ammunition for each mission. and corps, and artillery headquarters are con-
(2) Technical Fire Direction. Technical fire cerned primarily with tactical fire direction.
direction is the conversion of calls for fire to ap- b. Fire direction, as exercised by a cannon ar-
propriate firing data and fire commands. tillery battalion, consists of technical fire direc-
b. Fire Direction Center. The fire direction tion as well as tactical fire direction. It is at tlhe
center (FDC) is the element to the artillery battalion that most technical fire direction oc-
headquarters that consists of the operations, in- curs. However, when a battery is operating in-
telligence, and communications personnel and dependently, fire direction is exercised by the
equipment with which the commander directs battery commander through his executive officer
artillery fire. and the fire direction personal at the battery fire
direction center.
15-2. Objectives of Fire Direction c. This manual is concerned primarily with
The methods employed in fire direction must in- technical fire direction for field artillery cannon
sure that the following objectives are met: battalions and batteries. For a discussion of tac-
a. Continuous, accurate, and timely fire sup- tical fire direction, see FM 6-20.

Section II. FIRE DIRECTION CENTER, GENERAL

15-4. Role of the Fire Direction Center firing table values in order to achieve the ac-
The fire direction center is the element of the curacy in firing that is characteristic of field ar-
gunnery team that receives the call for fire from tillery.
the observer or higher headquarters, determines 15-5. Principles of Operation
the firing data, and announces the fire commands a. Processing Fire Missions. Accuracy, flexi-
to the firing battery. The fire direction center also bility, and speed in the execution of fire missions
determines and applies corrections to standard depend on:

15-1
FM 6-40

(1) Accurate and rapid preparation of fir- (1) The battery is operating independently.
ing data and transmission of fire commands to (2) The battery FDC is directed to process
the firing batteries. a mission. For example, if the battalion FDC is
(2) Accurate and rapid verification of processing two missions simultaneously, the bat-
firing data. tery FDC may be directed to produce data for
(3) Efficient division of duties among FDC a mission.
personnel.
(4) Adherence to standard techniques and
15-6. BattalionS2
procedures.
(5) Efficient use of FDC plotting equip- The battalion S2 is the intelligence officer. FM
ment and data-determining devices. 6-20 contains a detailed discussion of his duties.
(6) Teamwork among FDC personnel. Duties of the S2 that pertain to fire direction are
(7) Efficient use of communication equip- to-
ment, including radios and the battalion fire di- a. Locate likely targets and report them to the
rection center switchboard. FDC with recommendations for their attack.
b. Production of Firing Data. Observer fire
missions are normally received and converted to b. Advise the FDC on methods of attacking
firing data and fire commands in the battalion targets.
fire direction center. However, this process may c. Obtain and distribute maps, photomaps, and
be accomplished in a battery fire direction center aerial photographs and assist in target restitu-
under the following conditions: tion.

Section II1.FDC PERSONNEL IN THE BATTALION

15-7. Organization c. Inspect the plot of each reported target, de-
The battalion FDC team is composed of the S3, cide how to attack the target, and issue the fire
the assistant S3, one chief fire direction compu- order.
ter, one assistant chief fire direction computer, d. Direct and supervise the computation and
one computer for each firing battery organic or transmission of corrections such as registration,
attached to the battalion, one horizontal control meteorological and velocity error (VE) correc-
operator (HCO), one vertical control operator tions.
(VCO), and the number of radiotelephone oper- e. Insure that appropriate fire direction rec-
ators necessary to monitor and operate the radio ords are maintained.
and wire communication nets of the FDC. In ad- f. Supervise the preparation and execution of
dition to these personnel, a switchboard operator prearranged fires.
is assigned from the battalion communications Note. In order to maintain continuous (24-hour)
platoon to install and operate the battalion FDC operation in the FDC, it is necessary to use officers other
switchboard. than the S3, the assistant S3, and the assistant executive
officer in the battalion and battery fire direction centers.
The term fire direction officer (FDO), as used in this
15-8. Battalion S3 (Assistant S3) manual, refers to the officer in charge of the FDC at that
The S3 is the operations and training officer of particular time.
the battalion. FM 6-20 contains a detailed dis-
cussion of his duties. The S3 is also the battalion 15-9. Chief Fire Direction Computer
gunnery officer. He plans, coordinates, and super- (Assistant Chief Fire Direction
vises the activities of the battalion and battery Computer)
fire direction centers and is responsible for the The chief fire direction computer is the senior
training of the fire direction personnel. The as- enlisted member of the battalion fire direction
sistant S3 assists the S3 in the performance of center. He must be thoroughly proficient in both
his duties and must be able to perform the duties gunnery and communication procedures. He
of the S3. The duties of the S3 when engaged in must be capable of operating and supervising the
fire direction are to- operation of the communication facilities within
a. Actively supervise the battalion fire direc- the fire direction center. His specific duties are
ion center. to-
b. Supervise the functioning of the battalion a. Supervise all enlisted members of the fire
fire direction wire and radio nets. direction center.

15-2
 FM 6-40

b. Supervise the computation of registration, chart, normally a grid sheet supplemented by a

met, and velocity error corrections. 1:50,000 map.
c. Inform the battalion S2 of the status of b. Maintain overlays to include situation, fire
fire missions and render a report of firing to the capabilities, and dead space overlays.
S2 on the termination of each fire mission. c. Inform fire direction officer when calls for
d. Insure proper maintenance of the necessary fire plot close to friendly locations or patrols or
FDC records. within no-fire lines.
d. Plot targets, record their altitudes, and an-
15-10. Computer nounce the altitudes when required.
There is one fire direction computer for each bat- e. Compute the site for each battery, when
tery in the battalion fire direction center. The necessary, and announce that site to the appro-
duties of the computer are to- priate computer when requested.
a. Record calls for fire, fire orders, firing data, f. Assist the computer and the horizontal con-
corrections, and all other data as directed by the trol operator in determining replot data.
fire direction officer. g. Act as the horizontal control operator in
b. Maintain the necessary FDC records. the event of multiple missions.
c. Compute firing data, convert firing data to h. Provide a check for the horizontal control
fire commands, and transmit the fire commands operator as time permits.
to the battery in the proper sequence. i. Assist the chief fire direction computer as
d. Announce total height-of-burst correction to directed.
the nonadjusting battery computers when he is
acting as the computer of the adjusting battery
15-13. Radio Telephone Operator(s)
in a battalion mass mission. The radiotelephone operator (s) must be trained
e. Assist in the conduct of registrations and in FDC communications procedures. His specific
the determination and application of registration duties are to-
corrections. a. Operate a radio or telephone in the fire di-
f. Compute met, VE, and special corrections rection center.
when so directed. b. Install remote control or radio-wire inte-
g. Determine data for replot, with the assist- gration circuits from the radio vehicle to the
ance of the vertical control operator and the fire direction center as necessary.
horizontal control operator. c. Repeat calls for fire received by telephone
h. Transmit current chart data and correc- or radio and send the message to observer.
tions to the battery fire direction center. d. Make communications checks as directed.
i. Record the battery executive officer's report.
j. Prepare data sheets and maintain the record 15-14. Switchboard Operator
of data sheets for prearranged fires sent to the The switchboard operator must be trained in
firing battery. FDC communications procedures. His specific
duties are to-
15-1 1. Horizontal Control Operator a. Install and operate the FDC switchboard.
The duties of the horizontal control operator are b. Assist in the installation of radio-wire in-
to- tegration and local FDC circuits.
a. Prepare and maintain the horizontal con- c. Prepare and maintain a traffic diagram.
trol chart. d. Perform the necessary communications
b. Plot target locations. checks to insure that the FDC circuits operate
c. Determine and announce chart data. properly.
d. Determine the size of angle T and announce
it when necessary. 15-15. Continuous FDC Operation
e. Assist the computer and vertical control op- The fire direction center in any unit must be
erator in determining replot data. organized for 24-hour operation. This means that
f. Operate the gun direction computer M18 additional personnel must be trained in FDC
(FADAC). procedures so that they may perform the duties
of assigned FDC personnel when necessary. Al-
15-12. Vertikal Control Operator lowing fatigued personnel to work in the FDC
The specific duties of the vertical control opera- promotes the possibility of error. Personnel cross-
tor are to- trained in FDC procedures ordinarily are ob-
a. Prepare and maintain the vertical control tained from sections that perform similarly ex-

15-3
FM 6-40

acting work, such as the battalion target ac- on a smaller scale. The battery executive officer
quisition platoon. or, when directed, the assistant executive officer
15-16. Battery Fire Direction serves as the battery fire direction officer. There
The battery fire direction center is manned by is only one fire direction computer, and in some
personnel assigned to the firing battery head- cases one chart operator may serve as both
quarters. Its composition is similar to that of the horizontal control operator and vertical con-
the battalion FDC except that it is organized trol operator.

15-4
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 16

CHART DATA

Section I. FIRING CHARTS

16-1. General 16-4. Grid Sheet
The firing chart is a photomap, a grid sheet, or a A grid sheet is a sheet of plain paper on which
sheet of plain paper on which are shown the rela- are printed equally spaced horizontal and verti-
tive locations of batteries, registration points, cal lines called grid lines. Since the grid sheet
and targets and other details needed in pre- bears no relation to the ground and basic infor-
paring firing data. mation must come from other sources, any scale
desired may be used. Grid sheets used by the
16-2. Map field artillery are normally printed to a scale of
A map is a graphic representation, drawn to 1:25,000, with the distance between grid lines
scale, of a portion of the earth's surface as seen representing 1,000 meters. The locations of all
from above. Maps (normally 1:50,000) are used points placed on the grid sheet must be deter-
as supplements to firing charts. A map is only mined either by survey or by firing. Horizontal
as accurate as the ground survey from which it and vertical control charts usually are grid
is made. Maps based on accurate ground survey sheets.
, require the least amount of additional survey for
field artillery use. These maps provide direc-
tion and horizontal and vertical control and can
16-5. Purpose of Firing Chart
The firing chart is used for determining the
be used as the basis for field artillery survey. range, direction, and vertical interval from the
If the map is not based on accurate and adequ- gun(s) to the target. The effectiveness of artil-
ate ground control, it should be used only for lery fires depends, to a large degree, on the ac-
obtaining approximate locations and vertical con- curacy and completeness of the firing chart.
trol to supplement a grid sheet firing chart.
16-6. Type of Firing Charts
16-3. Photomap There are two types of firing charts used in an
a. A photomap is a reproduction of an aerial
photograph or a mosaic on which are added FDC-the surveyed firing chart and the ob-
grid lines, marginal information, and place served firing chart. The procedures described in
names. A photomap must not be considered exact this chapter for determining data are applic-
until its accuracy has been verified. Errors caus- able to both the surveyed firing chart and the
ed by tilt, distortion due to relief, and errors due observed firing chart.
to poor assembly may be present in photomaps. a. The surveyed firing chart is a chart on
Points which cannot be located on the photomap which the locations of all critical points (bat-
by inspection may be located by survey. It will tery positions, registration points, OP's) are
be necessary to determine the scale of the map based either on survey (FM 6-2) or on map in-
before points can be located by survey. Normally spection. All plotted points are in correct rela-
vertical control can be established only by esti- tion to one another and are tied together by
mation. Some photomaps have spot elevations, actual map coordinates. When determination of
but interpolation is difficult and inaccurate. actual map coordinates has not been completed,
b. Even though the photomap may be used ini- assumed coordinates may be used initially to
tially, survey is started at once. This survey tie together the points to be plotted.
provides a check on the accuracy of the photo-
map. If the photomap proves to be inaccurate, b. The observed firing chart is a chart on
a grid sheet firing chart based on survey is con- which all chart locations must be established by
structed. firing. Relative locations of the batteries and

16-1
FM 6-40

targets can be established only by the adjustment Details pertaining to construction of an ob-
of fire, hence the name "observed firing chart." served firing chart are contained in chapter 26.

Section II. PLOTTING

16-7. General f. Coordinate Scale (Plastic). The plastic co-

Fire direction center personnel must make every ordinate scale (5, fig 16-1) is a right-angled
effort to insure the accuracy of data shown on scale used for plotting and determining the co-
the firing chart. All firing charts in the battal- ordinates of targets other than registration
ion should be identical so that any chart can be points and locations determined by survey com-
used to mass the fires of the battalion. putations. This scale is graduated Jn meters and
yards at scales 1:25,000 and 1:50,000.
16-8. FDC Equipment g. Protractor. The protractor (6, fig 16-1) is
The use of special equipment is required in the a plastic angle-measuring instrument made in
construction and use of a firing chart. The ac- the shape of a half circle. The arc of the half
curacy obtained with this special equipment de- circle is graduated in 10-mil increments w*th
pends as much on plotting habits and care of each 100-mil graduation numbered in a clock-
equipment as on the accuracy of the equipment. wise sequence and a counter-clockwise sequence.
a. The 6H Pencil. The 6H (hard lead) pencil The hairline connecting the 0 and 3200 mil grad-
(1, fig 16-1), sharpened to a wedge point, is used uations is used as a baseline for measuring angles.
for drawing all lines from which measurements The straightedge of the protractor is graduated
will be made. This procedure is required if the in meters at scales of 1:25,000 (black) and
necessary accuracy is to be achieved. 1:50,000 (red).
b. The 4H Pencil. The 4H pencil (1, fig 16-1)
h. Range-Deflection Protractor. The range-
is used for lettering and for accentuating tick
deflection protractor (RDP) (7, fig 16-1) is
marks. It should be sharpened to a conical point.
used for measuring angles and distances. It is
c. Map Pins. Map pins (2, fig 16-1), com-
used for measuring range and deflection from the
monly referred to as plotting pins, are used for
battery to the target and for polar plotting. The
marking battery, radar, and OP positions and
left edge of the arm is graduated in 50 meter
for plotting all points on the firing chart.
increments (1:25,000 scale) and is read to an
d. Plotting Scale. The plotting scale (3, fig 16-
accuracy of 10 meters, visually interpolating,
1) is used for measuring distances and for plot-
if necessary. The arc of the range-deflecting pro-
ting and determining the coordinates of criti-
tractor covers 1,000 mils and is graduated in 5-
cal points such as batteries, radar, OP's and
registration points, which must be located ac- mil increments with each 50-mil increment indi-
cated by a long line. It is read to an accuracy
curately. The scale should always be used in
of one mil, visually interpolating, if necessary.
plotting coordinates determined by survey com-
i. Military Slide Rule. The military slide rule
putations when the grid lines on the firing chart
(MSR) (8, fig 16-1) is discussed in paragraph
are not exactly 1,000 meters apart. The scale is
graduated in meters, yards, and inches. The me- 13-17.
j. GraphicalFiring Table. The graphical firing
ter and yard graduations are at scales of 1:
table (GFT) (9, fig 16-1) is discussed in para-
25,000, 1:50,000, and 1:62,500. The plotting scale
should never be used as a straightedge for draw- graph 17-10.
ing lines. k. Graphical Site Table. The graphical site
e. Coordinate Scale (Aluminum). The alumi- table (GST) (10, fig 16-1) is discussed in para-
num coordinate scale (4, fig 16-1) is a square- graph 17-7.
shaped scale used for plotting and determinng
the grid coordinates of targets and critical points 16-9. Tick Marks
located by other than survey computations. It a. The tick mark is the symbol used for mark-
may also be used for plotting the coordinates of ing the location of an installation or a target
critical points determined by survey computa- plotted on a firing chart. The tick mark (fig
tions if the grid lines are exactly 1,009 meters 16-2) is constructed in the form of a cross start-
apart. This is graduated in meters and yards ing approximately 40 meters from the pinhole
at scales of 1:25,000 and 1:50,00'0. The scale has on the chart and extending approximately 150
a projecting knob for ease of handling. meters in length (1:25,000 scale). Normally, the

16-2
 FM 6-40

Figure 16-1. FDC ,equipment.

lines of the tick mark are drawn parallel to the symbol and the call number of the observer are
grid lines; however, if the plotted point falls on shown in black. (If the observer is from another
or very close to a grid line, the tick mark is unit, both the call sign and the call number
drawn at a 450 angle to the grid lines. The tick will be used.)
mark for a point located by firing (recorded (4) Battalion observation post. The as-
targets) is drawn in red. signed number of the observation post is shown
b. The identification of the point is placed in in black; e.g., 02.
the upper right quadrant of the tick mark. The (5) Registration points. The registration
installation or activity is indicated in the follow- point and the number assigned are shown in
ing manner (fig 16-2): black; e.g., reg pt 3.
(1) Battery. The letter designation is (6) Targets. The assigned target number
shown in the appropriate color; i.e., A-red, B- is shown in black; e.g., AF7415.
black, C-blue, D-orange. If more than four c. The altitude, in meters, of the plotted point
lettered batteries are assigned to one battalion, is placed in the lower left quadrant in black.
the color coding starts again with red and con- d. If the plotted point has been fired on, the
tinues in the same sequence. The pieces of an ar- fuze used in fire for effect may be placed in the
tillery battery are sometimes widely dispersed, lower right quadrant.
and it may be necessary to plot the location of e. If the target has been fired on with high-
each piece or each platoon center. angle fire, the letters HA may be placed in the
(2) Radar. The military symbol is shown upper left quadrant.
in green. f. The charge fired may also be placed in the
(3) Forward observation post. The military upper left quadrant.

16-3
FM 6-40

proportional part of this difference to each mea-

surement. For example, if the distance between
I Red tick marks indicate
observed fire locations* grid lines is measured as 1,020 meters, the dif-
Use of Target 0
ference from normal is 20 meters. The propor-
high angle number tional part of this distance for a 400-meter mea-
Charge **
surement is (400/1000)x 20, or 8 meters. The 400-
Altitude Fuse used meter measurement then is scaled as 408 meters
in effect
HA AF7725 (1, fig 16-5).
___C_-H __ _ (3) You can obtain similar results by dia-
AF.7415 4211 VT gonally inclining the plotting scale so that one
AFT201
381 TI 1,000-meter graduation is on one grid line and the
541 D
other 1,000 meter graduation is on the adjacent
grid line. Multiply the distance to be plotted by 2,
(Surveyed) and scale the result. For example, when the east-
(Observed) ing coordinate is plotted (2, fig 16-5) the 400-
* Broken lines indicate red
meter measurement will be scaled as 800 on the
*. Optional inclined plotting scale.
Figure 16-2. Marking plotted points. 16-11. Measuring Grid Coordinates of a
Point With a Plotting Scale
16-10. Plotting a Point From Grid Grid coordinates are measured in the same man-
Coordinates With a Plotting ner as that in which they are plotted, and the dis-
Scale tance is read directly between the point and the
a. A normal grid is defined as a grid that is grid line. The first digit(s) of the easting grid
printed to the exact scale of the plotting scale coordinate is the number appearing at the top or
(fig 16-3). To plot a point on a normal grid, bottom of the north-south line west of the point.
use the following procedure: Assume that the co- The balance of the easting grid coordinate is the
ordinates of the point are 6241937749. First lo- distance of the point east of this north-south
cate grid square above 6237, place the 0 gradua- line as measured with the scale. The first digit(s)
tion of the plotting scale on the north-south line of the northing coordinate is obtained from the
62 and the 1,000-meter graduation on the north- right or left of the east-west line south of the
south line 63. Mark off 419 meters with a plotting point. The balance of the northing grid coordin-
pin (1, fig 16-3). Move the scale one grid square ate is the distance of the point north of this line
below grid square 6237 and repeat the operation as measured with the scale. If the grid lines are
(2, fig 16-3). Remove the pins and, using a 6H closer together or farther apart than normal, mea-
pencil, connect the two pinholes with a fine, surements are made in the same manner as that
light line (3, fig 16-3). This will be the north- in which points are plotted.
south line passing through the point. In a similar
manner, determine the east-west line passing 16-12. Use of Coordinate Scale
through the point (4, 5, 6, fig 16-3). The inter- When rapid massing on targets of opportunity or
section of these lines (7, fig 16-3) is the desired rapid plotting of targets for an adjustment is
point, which is indicated by a tick mark made necessary, plotting may be done with the coordin-
with a 4H pencil. ate scale (4 and 5, fig 16-1). To use a coordin-
ate scale for determination of coordinates, place
b. Grid lines are sometimes closer together or
the 0 of the scale at the lower left corner of the
farther apart than normal because of poor man- grid square. Keeping the scale on the lower hor-
ufacturing processes or because of shrinking or izontal grid line, slide it to the right until the
stretching of the grid paper. point for which coordinates are desired toucher
(1) When grid lines are closer than normal, the edge of the scale. When reading coordinates,
plot the point in the same manner as described examine the two (four) sides of the coordin-
in a above. By inclining the scale so that the 0 ate scale to insure that the horizontal scale is
of the scale is on one grid line and the 1,000-meter alined with the east-west grid line and the verti-
graduation is on the other grid line, the point cal scale is parallel with the north-south grid line.
will be plotted in its true relation to the grid.
(2) If the grid lines are farther apart than 16-i13. Measuring and Plotting an Angle With
normal, measure the distance between the grid a Protractor
lines and find the difference from normal. Add Angles may be measured or plotted with the plastic

16-4
 FM 6-40

Figure 16-3. Plotting a point from coordinates on a

normal grid.

protractor (6, fig 16-1). FM 21-26 describes the lished on a chart, the length of the line may be
use of a plastic protractor graduated in degrees. plotted with the plotting scale.

16-14. Measuring and Plotting Distance With 16-15. Measuring and Plotting With a Range
a Plotting Scale Deflection Protractor
a. When several angles and distances are to be
The most accurate device for determining the dis- plotted or measured from one point and one re-
tance between two points plotted on a firing chart ference direction (e.g., polar plotting from
is the plotting scale. The chart operator must radar), the procedure is facilitated by the use of
take care to use the correct scale on the plotting the range-deflection protractor.
scale. After the direction of a line has been estab- b. The range-deflection protractor must be pre-

16-5
FM 6-40

Figure 16-4. Plotting a point from coordinates when grid

lines are closer than normal.

pared for polar plotting. The 100-mil graduations e. The procedure for plotting an angle is as
on the arc are numbered in black as follows: follows:
(1) Number the rightmost graduation "0." (1) Place the vertex of the RDP at the
(2) Number the succeeding 100-mil gradua- point from which the angle is to be plotted.
tions 1 through 9; the leftmost graduation is (2) Place the left edge of the arm so that
marked with the letters "AZ" to differentiate it coincides with the line from which the angle is
from the deflection scale (para 16-21). to be plotted.
c. Angles up to 1,000 mils can be measured (3) Place the pin opposite the leftmost
conveniently with the range-deflection protrac- graduation on the arc if the angle is to the lef'
tor. The procedure for measuring an angle is as or opposite the rightmost graduation if the angle
is to the right.
follows:
(1) Place vertex of the RDP at the point (4) Use the pin as an index and rotate the
from which the measurement is to be made. RDP through the desired angle.
(2) Place the left edge of the arm of the RDP (5) Place a pin against the left edge of the
so that it coincides with the line that represents arm.
the left limit of the angle to be measured and then (6) Draw a line from the vertex of the
place a pin at the right most graduation on the angle through the pin location.
arc of the range-deflection protractor.
(3) Rotate the RDP until the left edge cf
16-16. Preparing Chart With Polar Indexes
the arm coincides with the line that represents for a Range-Deflection Protractor
a. The point from which polar plotting is to
the right limit of the angle and read the value of be performed must be plotted on the firing charl
the angle from the azimuth scale opposite the If a large number of angles are to be measured or
pin placed along the arc. plotted from a point, the chart should be indexed
d. To measure the distance in meters between b. Azimuth indexes are constructed on the fir-
two points, place the vertex of the RDP at one ing chart at 1,000-mil intervals throughout the
of the points and the left edge of the arm against target area (fig 16-6). These indexes are con-
the pin in the second point and read the distance structed so that the left edge of the arm of the
opposite the pin in the second point. range-deflection protractor is alined on an azi-

16-6
 FM 6-40

NOTE" NOT TO SCALE

Figure 16-5. Plottinga point from coordinates when grid

line8 are farther apart than normal (two techniques).

16-7
 FM 6-40

muth that is a multiple of 1000 when the appro- a. Place the vertex of the range-deflection pro-
priate index is opposite the rightmost gradua- tractor against the pin in the radar location and
tion on the arc. The procedure for establishing the the left edge of the arm against the pin in the
appropriate azimuth indexes is as follows: known point.
(1) Place the vertex of the RDP against a b. With the arc numbered as prescribed in
pin in the OP or radar position and aline the arm paragraph 16-15b, place a pin opposite the grad-
parallel to a convenient grid line. This estab- uation on the arc that is equal to the reported
lishes a reference line (not drawn) at an azi- azimuth minus the next lower 1,000 mils; e.g.,
muth of 1,600, 3,200, 4,800, or 0 mils. if the reported azimuth is 4350, place the pin
(2) Place a pin opposite the number on the opposite 350. The pin marks the location of the
arc of the RDP corresponding to the last three azimuth index for the next lower 1,000 mils;
digits of the azimuth in which the arm of the RDP in this case, azimuth 4000.
is oriented. This value will be 600, 200, 800, 400,
or 0, depending on the initial orientation of the
range-deflection protractor. The location of the 16-18. Plotting a Point Located by Polar
pin represents an azimuth index of 1,000, 3,000, Coordinates
4,000, 6,000, or 0 mils, respectively. To locate an The procedure for plotting a point located by po-
azimuth index for 2,000 mils, place a pin 1,000 lar coordinates from an OP (or a radar) is as
mils right of the index for 1000, for 5,000 mils follows:
place a pin 1,000 mils right of the index for a. Place the vertex of the range-deflection pro-
tractor against the pin in the OP location with
4000. the arc over the proper OP azimuth index. There
(3) Move the RDP so that the left edge of
the arm is against the pin, remove the pin, and will be only one OP azimuth index that can be
used for polar plotting a given point. The index
draw the azimuth index with a wedge-pointed
6H pencil. The index is a fine line approxima- to be used is the one numbered with the multiple
tely 2 inches long, extending 1 inch above and 1 of 1000 that is next lower than the azimuth re-
inch below the pinhole. Beginning approximately ported by the observer.
1/8 inch beyond the pin hole, label the index with b. Orient the range-deflection protractor so
the appropriate identification (01, 24, radar sym- that the azimuth on the index used added to the
bol, etc.) and aximuth value along the left side of value read from the arc opposite the index is equal
to the azimuth reported. The left edge of the arm
the line. For radar, the lettering on the indexes is
green; for observation posts, the lettering is black. will then be on the azimuth reported from the
observation post.
(4) To establish an aximuth index 1,000 mils
right (left) of a previously established index, c. Place a pin along the left edge of the arm
place the leftmost (rightmost) graduation on the at the reported distance (in meters) from the ob-
arc over the previously established index and then servation post.
place a pin opposite the rightmost (leftmost) Example: A target at an azimuth of 1,960
graduation. Then construct the index at the pin mils and a distance of 10,700 meters from 01 is
to be plotted. Place the vertex of the range-
location as described in (3) above.
deflection protractor against the pin in 01. Rotate
c. When the firing chart is indexed as described
in b above and the arc of the range-deflection the RDP until 960 on the arc is directly over
protractor is marked as described in paragraph the index marked 01AZ1000. Without moving the
16-15b, the value of the azimuth measured or RDP, place a pin along the left edge of the arm
plotted is the sum of the azimuth marked on the at 10,700 meters from 01. The pin marks the lo-
azimuth index and the value read on the arc op- cation of the target.
posite that azimuth index.
16-19. Target Grid
a. General. The target grid is a device used for
16-17. Preparing Chart When Azimuth to a converting, by plotting, the observer's target lo-
Known Paint Has Been Reported From cations and corrections with respect to the OT
a Radar Measurement (observer-target) line (or some other line of
There will be occasions when the azimuth to a known direction) to target locations and correc-
point plotted on the firing chart can be measured tions with respect to the GT (gun-target) line. A
by radar. In such cases the procedure described target grid is operated in conjunction with each
in a and b below will be used for constructing the of the charts in the battalion to plot the obser-
azimuth index. ver's shift from a known point and his subsequent
 FM 6-48

Figure 16-6. Range-deflection protractor and chart

prepared for Polar-plotting.

corrections, and to measure rough angles. An ar- b. Positioning the Target Grid. The chart op-
row extends across the target grid, with the point erator places the center of the target grid over P
of the arrow at the 0 mark of the azimuth point in the target area. This point may be the
circle. This arrow indicates the direction of the initial plotted location of the target to be ad-
OT line. The azimuth scale is printed around the justed on, a registration point, a meteorological
edge of the grid. The scale is graduated in a checkpoint, a previously fired target, or an arbi-
counterclockwise direction at 10-mil intervals trarily selected point, such as a grid intersec-
from 0 to 6,400 mils; each 100 mil graduation is tion. If the chart operator selects a point other
numbered. The azimuth scale is numbered in a than the target to be plotted, he must insure that
counterclockwise direction because the grid is ro- both the selected point and the target fall be-
tated and the index is stationary. The scale of the neath the target grid. If subsequent corrections
target grid must be the same as that of the firing cause the target to plot off the target grid, the
chart. When the target grid is used with a firing chart operator moves the target grid to a suit.
chart with a scale of 1:25,000, the smallest able new position and reorients it on the same
graduation of the target grid represents a dis- azimuth given in the call for fire.
tance of 100 meters (fig 16-7). c. Orienting the Target Grid. To use the target

16-
FM 6-40

Figure 16-7. Plotting a target with the target grid by

shift from a known point.

16-10
 FM 6-40
coecectod
grid for plotting a shift from a known point or \ 0i
for plotting the observer's subsequent corrections,
the chart operator constructs a north index on the
chart at the edge of the target grid. He places
the center of the target grid over the known
point or target location and rotates it until the
arrow (or a line on the target grid parallel to the
arrow) is parallel to a north-south grid line and
the arrowhead is pointing north. The chart oper-
ator constructs a permanent north index if the
chart is being prepared to plot a shift from a
known point. He draws the index at 0 azimuth on
the chart 1 inch above and 1 inch below the edge
of the target grid and marks the index "N" to
prevent its being confused with other indexes
on the chart. If subsequent corrections are to be
plotted, the chart operator will not construct a
permanent north index. A pin set out at 0 azi-
muth in the same manner as described above is
sufficient since the initial target location is usually
only transitory. The chart operator orients the
target grid for both a shift from a known point
and for subsequent corrections by rotating it un-
til the figure opposite the north index is the same
as the OT direction announced by the observer.
This operation places the arrow and all lines
parallel to it on the same direction as the OT Figure 16-8. Correcting a misorientationof the
line (fig 16-7). target grid.
d. Procedure to Correct a Misoriented Target
Grid. If the observer sends a direction that is in e. Plotting a Target by Shift From a Known
error, the resulting error in orientation of the Point.
target grid should be corrected when it is large
(1) To use the target grid for plotting a
enough to cause the observer difficulty in ad-
target by the shift from a known point method,
justing. This procedure should be used only if the
a north index must have been constructed for
FDC is sure the observer is using the observer
the known point. To construct the north index,
target line and not an arbitrary direction for
the chart operator places the center of the target
adjusting. grid over the known point and rotates the target
(1) In figure 16-8, the observer's first cor-
rection is ADD 400. The chart operator moves the grid so that the arrow and all lines parallel to
the arrow are parallel to the north-south grid
target pin to a point equivalent to 400 meters
lines on the firing chart. He draws the index on
up the OT line, and a round is fired with the
the chart, at 0 azimuth, extending 1 inch above
data obtained.
(2) The observer's next correction of and 1 inch below the edge of the target grid
-and labels it "N" to prevent its being con-
RIGHT 200 indicates that the reported direction
is in error. The chart operator moves the target fused with other indexes on the chart. The chart
pin to a point equivalent to 200 meters right of operator orients the target grid by rotating it un-
its last location and notes the position of the con- til the azimuth reading opposite the north index is
structed line shot. the same as the OT direction announced by the ob-
(3) While a round is being fired with these server. This operation places the arrow and all
data, the chart operator rotates the target grid lines parallel to it on the same direction as the
until the arrow is parallel to the line formed by OT line (fig 16-7).
the previous line shot and the constructed line (2) To use the target grid when targets are
shot. When the next observer correction is re- located by any means other than a shift from a
ceived, the chart operator moves the target pin known point, a north index need not be con-
from the chart location of the last round fired. structed. A pin set out at 0 azimuth in the same

16-11
FM 6-40

manner as described above is sufficient since the target grid over the apex of the angle to be mea-
target location will not normally be known. sured and the 0 of the azimuth circle over the
f. Plotting Subsequent Corrections. Once the right side of the angle. He then reads the size of
HCO has announced to the computer the initial the angle at the point on the azimuth circle that
range and deflection to the target, he will orient is intersected by the left side of the angle. See
the target grid for subsequent corrections. This paragraph 18-11 for a discussion on determina-
is accomplished as described in c above. The tar- tion of angle T.
get grid should be oriented only once for subse-
quent corrections unless the observer's corrections h. Marking the Target Grid. For convenience
are so large that the plot does not fall under in plotting the chart the operator may mark the
the target grid. target with a plus sign in the first and fourth
g. Measuring an Angle. The target grid may be quadrants, a minus sign in the second and third
used for measuring angles when a high degree quadrants, an R to the right of the arrow near
of accuracy is not required. The chart operator 4800, and an L to the left of the arrow near
measures an angle by placing the center of the 1600 (fig 16-7).

Section Ill. DETERMINATION OF CHART DATA

16-20. General is plotted on the firing chart, tick marks and de-
The purpose of a firing chart is to provide a gra- flection indexes are identified by using the stand-
phic means for determining chart data. Chart ard battery color code together with the number
data consists of the range (in meters), directioYi of the piece or platoon.
(deflection in mils), and vertical interval from a. Deflection Index. The deflection index is used
the battery center to the target. in conjunction with the range-deflection protrac-
a. A horizontal control chart (usually a gr'd tor for determining chart deflection (fig 16-10).
sheet) is used for determining range and direc- This index is constructed as follows:
tion (deflection from the battery to the target). (1) With the vertex of the range-deflection
The range-deflection protractor is the device used protractor against the pin in the battery posi-
for measuring range and deflection. tion, orient the left edge of the arm in the direc-
b. A vertical control chart (usually a grid sheet tion in which the battery is laid. If the battery
supplemented by a 1:50,000 map) is used for is laid on a grid azimuth, plot the azimuth from
determining the vertical interval between the bat- the battery position. Using the procedure de-
tery and the target. It may also be used for deter- scribed in paragraph 16-16b (1) and (2), place
mining range and direction. a pin in the chart to represent the azimuth cor-
responding to the largest multiple of 1000 con-
16-21. Numbering the Range-Deflection tained in the azimuth of fire. (Do not draw an
Protractor for Deflection index, since indexes are drawn only for OP's
Direction normally is measured and announced and radar positions.) Move the RDP until the
in terms of deflection. To facilitate the determina- last three digits of the azimuth of fire, as read
tion of deflection, number the mil scale on the from the azimuth scale of the RDP, are opposite
arc of the range-deflection protractor as follows: the pin. The left edge of the RDP is now oriented
Number the left graduation of the mil scale 0. on the direction in which the battery is laid. If
Number the graduations in black to the right in the battery is laid on the registration point, place
100-mil increments but omit the zeros represent- the left edge of the RDP against the pin in the
ing hundreds; for example, write the numbers registration point.
100, 200, and 300 as 1, 2, and 3, (fig 16-9). The (2) Now place the pin in the chart at the
last graduation on the right end of the arc is 200-mil graduation. Move the RDP so that the
marked "DF" to differentiate from the azimuth left edge of the arm is against this pin, remove
scale. the pin, and draw a fine line (with a 6H pencil)
on the chart along the range scale. Extend the line
16-22. Preparing the Firing Chart 1 inch above and 1 inch below the pinhole. Label
Before the firing chart can be used for deter- this index with the appropriate battery designa-
mining chart data, the battery center must be tion and the number 3. The 3 represents 3,000
plotted, and the deflection indexes must be con- mils. (For referred deflections of 2400 and 2800
structed. When each piece or each platoon center the pin would be placed at the 4 and 8, respective-
16-12
 FM 6-40

AINCH " I" "l-PINHOLE

c

Figure 16-10. Deflection indexes.

weapons with referred deflection of 3200, label

the left supplementary index with the battery
designation and the number 4 and the right sup-
plementary index with the battery designation
and the number 2.

16-23. Preparing the Firing Chart for

6,400-Mil Capability
When firing in a 6,400-mil sector is required and
the batteries are plotted in the center of the firing
chart, the indexes are constructed and numbered
as shown in figures 16-11 and 16-12.
a. Speed of adjustment is slowed somewhat by
the large deflection shifts sometimes required in
providing 6,400-mil coverage. The fire direction
officer can minimize this loss of time caused by
shifting trails by announcing a rough azimuth or
a rough deflection immediately after the command
BATTERY ADJUST. One method of determin-
ing and directing this rough orientation is as fol-
Figure 16-9. Range-deflection protractornumbered for
measuring deflection and azimuth.
lows: The howitzer crew places azimuth stakes
out in the firing battery for the cardinal direc-
ly, and the index would be labeled 2 for 2,000 tions. The HCO initially determines a rough
mils). azimuth by visual estimation or from a target
(3) Draw an arrowhead on the index point- grid placed face down over the battery position
ing toward the battery at a point 1/8 inch beyond and oriented on grid north. The computer an-
the pinhole. Use the appropriate battery color to nounces this azimuth in the special instructions.
mark the arrowhead, battery designation, and The howitzer crew, using the azimuth stakes, im-
number. mediately begins pointing the weapon in the ap-
propriate direction.
b. Supplementary Deflection Indexes. Locate
the right (left) supplementary index by placing b. When indexing the firing chart for 6,400-
the leftmost (rightmost) graduation on the arc mil capability, the chart operator may find that
of the range-deflection protractor over the de- the RDP will measure a few mils more or less
flection index and placing a pin opposite the than 6,400 mils. When this is the case, he should
rightmost (leftmost) graduation. Draw the in- apply a proportionate part of the error to each
of the 1,000-mil deflection indexes. This will place
dex as described in a(2) and (3) above. For

16-13
FM 6-40

Figure 16-11. Firing chart for 6400 mil capability using

the 0 to 6400 panoramic telescope.

a small error in each deflection index rather or a higher headquarters, the altitude normally
than place all the error at one point. is given in the Call for fire.
(2) If the observer locates the target with re-
16-24, Determination of Chart Range and ference to a known point, the vertical control
Deflection operator determines the altitude of the target by
Chart range and deflection are measured as fol- applying the vertical shift to the altitude of the
lows0 known point. If no vertical shift is specified, the
a. Place the vertex of the range-deflection altitude of the target is assumed to be the same
protractor against the pin in the battery posi- as the altitude of the known point. (The map
tion and the left edge of the arm against the pin altitude is disregarded.) The observation post is
in the target location. the known point in a polar plot mission.
b. Read the range, in meters, on the scale of (3) If the observer locates the target by grid
the arm opposite site the pin in the target loca- coordinates, the vertical control operator deter-
tion. Measure and announce the range to the mines the altitude from a map.
nearest 10 meters. b. The vertical control operator determines the
c. Read the chart deflection on the arc opposite vertical interval by subtracting the altitude of the
the appropriate deflection index. Determine the battery from the altitude of the target. If the
value of this deflection by combining the read- altitude of the target is greater than that of the
ing on the arc at the deflection index with the battery, the sign of the vertical interval is plus.
1,000omil designation of that index. If the altitude of the target is less than that of
the battery, the sign of the vertical interval is
16-25. Target Altitude and Vertical Interval minus.
a. The altitude of the target may have been
determined by survey, it may be given in the 16-26. Charts
call for fire, or it may be determined by FDC per- a. S3 Chart. If the S3 desires, a separate chart
sonnel. is constructed to show the fire capabilities and
(1) If the call for fire is from another unit the locations of the firing batteries, foward

16-14
 FM 6-40

Figure 16-12. Firing chart for 6400 mil capability using

the 0 to 3200 panoramic telescope.

troops, the no-fire line, registration points, and the no-fire line, friendly locations, routes of cur-
met checkpoints. This chart should be a map. rent and planned patrols, registration points, and
b. Horizontal Control Chart. The horizontal recorded targets.
control chart is usually a grid sheet on which are
d. Report of Surveyed Data. For convenience,
plotted the locations of the firing batteries, sur-
a sheet of paper on which are tabulated the grid
veyed observation posts, field artillery radars, re-
coordinated and altitude of each firing battery
gistration points, met checkpoints, final protective
fires, and targets as ordered by the S3 or re- and all critical points plotted on the chart should
quested by the observers. The horizontal control be attached to each chart. In addition, the azi-
muths on which the batteries are laid, the azi-
operator (HCO) maintains the horizontal con-
muth of the orienting lines, the orienting angles,
trol chart.
c. Vertical Control Chart. The vertical control and the reference direction for the surveyed ob-
servation posts should be recorded.
chart is normally a grid sheet supplemented by
a 1:50,000 map on which are plotted the locations
of the firing batteries, surveyed observation posts, 16-27. Equipment
field artillery radars registration points, met a. Vertical Control Operator and Horizontal
checkpoints, final protective fires, and targets Control Operator. In addition to the more com-
as ordered by the S3 or requested by the ob- mon equipment, such as plotting pin and colored
servers. The vertical control chart may be used pencils, each chart operator will have a coordin-
during multiple missions to produce horizontal ate scale and a range deflection protractor. The
data. The vertical control operator (VCO) main- vertical control operator will also have a graphi-
tains the vertical control chart and the 1 :50,000 cal site table for each caliber of weapon for
map. He maintains the following overlays for use which he must compute site.
with the map: b. Computer. Each computer will have a gra-
(1) A fire capabilities overlay. phical firing table and a tabular firing table for
(2) A dead space overlay. the caliber and type of weapon for which he is
(3) A situation overlay on which are posted computing.

16-15
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 17

FIRING DATA

17-1. General 17-5. Elevation

The data determined from the firing chart must a. In order that an artillery piece, firing a
be converted to settings to be placed on the can- given charge, may cause a projectile to achieve
non and ammunition so that the projectile may a prescribed range, the tube must be elevated
hit the point to which the chart data have been from the horizontal to a vertical angle known as
measured. These data, called firing data, normal- elevation. The elevation can be determined from
ly are computed in the fire direction center. Fir- the tabular or graphical firing tables.
ing data consists of the charge, deflection, fuze b. In the tabular firing tables, range is listed
setting (when applicable), and quadrant eleva- every 100 meters and an elevation, valid under
tion. certain assumed standard conditions, is given for
each listed range. Elevations corresponding to
17-2. Charge ranges between listed ranges are determined by
For cannons that fire semifixed or separate-load- interpolation.
ing ammunition, the amount of propellant may c. On the graphical firing tables, elevation,
be varied. The propellant is packaged in incre- valid under assumed standard conditions, is de-
ments, and the amount to be used is expressed in termined from the elevation scale. The hairline
increments as, for example, CHARGE 5. Charge of the cursor is placed over the range in question
5 contains increments 1 through 5. The selection and the elevation is read under the hairline on
of the charge is discussed in paragraph 18-5c the elevation scale.
(7).
17-6. Site
17-3. Deflection a. If the target is at an altitude other than
The deflection to be fired is termed the piece de- that of the artillery piece(s) to be fired, the
flection. The computer determines the piece de- trajectory may not pass through the target. This
flection by applying, according to the LARS rule, difference in altitude is a value known as the
the total deflection correction determined from vertical interval (VI). The sign of the vertical
the deflection correction scale to the chart deflec- interval depends on whether the target is above
tion announced by the horizontal control opera- or below the weapon(s) (e, below).
tor. The piece deflection is announced in the fire b. The elevation from the firing tables com-
commands as DEFLECTION (so much). pensates for the horizontal range (para 17-5a).
The vertical interval must also be compensated
17-4. Fuze Setting for; otherwise, in the case of a positive VI, a
a. When time fuze is to be fired, the computer round fired at the firing table elevation will fall
will determine a fuze setting to be placed on the short. The opposite is true of a negative vertical
fuze to cause it to function at the desired point interval. The VI is compensated for by the com-
along the trajectory. The fuze setting is a func- putation of a vertical angle known as angle of
tion of elevation plus complementary angle of site. The angle of site takes the algebraic sign-of
site. When the complementary angle of site is the vertical interval.
small, the fuze setting may be considered a
c. Another characteristic of the trajectory in
function of elevation alone. the atmosphere is that of nonrigidity. Unless this
b. The fuze setting corresponding to the eleva-
is compensated for, a round fired from a tube
tion (or elevation plus comp site) for fuze M564
raised to an angle the sum of elevation plus angle
may be determined from either the tabular or
of site will not strike the target. The value of the
graphical firing tables. angle which compensates for nonrigidity of the
c. The fuze setting is announced as TIME trajectory is the complementary angle of site or
(so much). comp site. The comp site will also compensate for

17-1
FM 6-40

the slant range. The comp site is a signed value. and the range (distance) are known. The GST
In low angle fire it has the same sign as the angle consists of a base, a slide, and a cursor (a piece
of site. In high angle fire it always has the op- of clear plastic with a vertical hairline through
posite sign. the center).
d. The algebraic sum of the angle of site and a. The base contains the D scale, which is iden-
the comp site is that value known as site. Site tical with that of any slide rule. The D scale is
is defined as the angle formed by the base of the the base scale of the GST and is used in all
trajectory and the line of site. computations made with the GST. A complete
e. The vertical control operator determines site. FDC spotting table, except for the observer
He may determine site by use of the tabular spotting column (b below), is printed on the base
firing tables (f below) or by use of the graphical beneath the slide.
site table (GST) (para 17-8). Normally, the b. The slide contains the C scale (range), yard
preferred method, because of its speed and ac- (YD) and meter (M) gagepoints, and the site-
curacy, is by use of the graphical site table. Re- range scales. The observer spotting column of
gardless of the method used, he must first de- the FDC spotting table is printed at each end
termine the vertical interval. He determines the on both sides of the slide.
vertical interval by subtracting the altitude of (1) The C scale, which is identical with
the battery from the altitude of the target. If the that on any slide rule, can be read in meters and
altitude of the target is greater than that of the yards.
battery, the sign of the vertical interval is plus. (2) The M and YD gagepoints may be used
If the altitude of the target is less than that of for converting yards to meters or for converting
the battery, the sign of the vertical interval is meters to yards. To convert yards to meters
minus. (meters to yards), place the M gagepoint (YD
f. Once the vertical control operator has deter- gagepoint) opposite the range in yards (meters)
mined the vertical interval, he may determine on the D scale. Opposite the YD gagepoint (M
site by individually determining its component gagepoint), read the range in meters (yards).
parts, angle of site and comp site, and then (3) Two site-range scales are provided for
algebraically adding them together. each charge-one in black, marked "TAG" (tar-
(1) Angle of site is determined to the near- get above gun), and one in red, marked "TBG"
est 1/10 mil. For angles of site of 100 mils or less, (target below gun). The site-range scales are
the VCO uses the mil relation / = W/R, in which used, along with the D scale in computing site
t, = angle of site, W = vertical interval, and or vertical interval. The site-range scales include
R = chart range in thousands to the nearest 100 the effect of comp site. This is reflected in the
(e.g., range 4060 is expressed as 4.1). For angles spacing of the 100-meter graduations on each
of site greater than 100 mils, he uses the formula site-range scale. The TAG and TBG scales differ
tangent of the angle of site equals the vertical by small amounts because the comp site factor
interval divided by the chart range. The angle of for a minus angle of site differs from that for a
site takes the sign of the vertical interval. plus angle of site.
(2) Comp site is determined to the nearest c. The GST possesses certain limitations,
one-tenth mil. The VCO extracts the appropriate which are printed in red on the back of the GST.
comp site factor from table G of the firing tables. These limitations must not be exceeded, or an
He multiplies the angle of site ((1) above) by error greater than 1 mil may be introduced into
the comp site factor. The comp site takes the the computations. A short explanation of its use
same sign as the comp site factor. and illustrative examples are also printed on the
(3) Site is the sum of the angle of site and back of the GST.
comp site. Site is expressed to the nearest mail. 17-8. Computations With the GST
The GST may be used for computing angles of
17-7. Graphical Site Table (GST) site of 100 mils or less, for computing site, or for
The determination of site by use of angle of site computing vertical interval when the angle of
and the comp site factor from the tabular firing site (vertical angle) or site and the range (dis-
tables is time consuming. Use of the graphical tance) are known.
site table facilitates the computation of angle of a. Angles of site of 100 mils or less are deter-
site (vertical angle) or site. The GST can also mined by use of the mil relation and the C and
be used for determining the vertical interval D scales. The procedure is as follows: Move the
when the site or angle of site (vertical angle) hairline to the vertical interval in meters on the

17-2
 FM 6-40

D scale, set the range in thousands of meters cipally for determining elevations for ranges de-
under the hairline on the C scale, and read the termined from the firing chart. Each table con-
angle of site on the D scale opposite the M gage- sists of one or more rules, and each rule consists
point. The angle of site is determined to the of a base and a cursor. The construction of the
nearest whole mil. Reading the value of the rules depends on whether the GFT is for low-
angle of site under the meter gagepoint refines angle or high-angle fire. The high-angle GFT is
the error in the mil relation (1.0186) that would described in paragraph 25-2. The low-angle
be incurred by straight division and, therefore, GFT is described in paragraph 17-11.
produces a more accurate solution. Angles of site
greater than 100 mils must be computed by use of
the military slide rule and tangent function. 17-11. Low-Angle Graphical Firing Table
The base of the GFT is 18 inches long and 3 1/2
b. The procedure for determining site is as
inches wide. On each side of the base are a set
follows: Move the hairline to the vertical inter-
of ballistic scales for a single charge (discussed
val in meters on the D scale, set the range in
in order from top to bottom in a through g be-
meters under the hairline on the appropriate site-
low), gagepoints (h, i, and j below), and a fuze
range scale for the selected charge, and read the
k line (1 below).
site on the D scale opposite the M gagepoint. a. Deflection Correction/Drift Scale. The de-
(Use the TAG scale if the vertical interval is
flection correction/drift (DEFL CORR/DRIFT)
positive; use the TBG scale if the vertical inter-
scale shows projectile drift in mils, printed in
val is negative.) Since the site-range scales are
black. Drift is always to the right. Elevations at
graduated every 100 meters, visual interpolation
which drift changes are printed in red above the
is usually necessary for setting off the range. If
scale.
the range for the charge being fired is not in-
b. 100/IR Scale. The 100/R scale gives the num-
included on the GST, site must be determined from
ber of mils necessary to shift the point of burst
the firing tables as explained in paragraph 17-6f.
laterally or vertically 100 meters for a given
c. The procedure for determining vertical in-
range. The numbers on the scale are printed in
terval when the angle of site and the range are
red.
known is as follows: Set the M gagepoint over
c. Range Scale. The range scale is the basic
the angle of site on the D scale, set the range
scale and all other scales are plotted with refer-
under the hairline on the C scale and read the
ence to it. Range is expressed logarithmically in
vertical interval under the hairline on the D
meters and varies for each charge. The range
scale. The procedure for determining vertical in-
scale is developed to give as large a range spread
terval when the site and the range are known is
as possible and still permit graduations large
as follows: Set the M gagepoint over the site on
enough for accurate readings. Range is read to
the D scale, set the range under the hairline on
the nearest 10 meters.
the appropriate site-range scale, and read the
d. Elevation Scale. The elevation (ELEV)
vertical interval under the hairline on the D scale.
scale is graduated in mils to show elevation; ele-
The vertical interval takes the sign of the angle
vation increases from left to right and is read to
of site. the nearest 1 mil. The numbers on this scale are
17-9. Quadrant Elevation printed in black and red. The red numbers denote
Quadrant elevation is the sum of elevation and the elevations that are within range transfer
site or the sum of the angle of site and the eleva- limits for the one-plot GFT setting. For the one-
tion corresponding to range plus complementary plot GFT setting, the range to the registration
range. Quadrant elevation is announced as point or met checkpoint must be between the
QUADRANT (so much). leftmost and rightmost red elevation numbers.
e. Fuze Setting Scale. The fuze setting (FS)
17-10. Firing Tables scale gives the fuze setting for the M564 fuze
The current tabular firing tables for each cannon and is read to the nearest 0.1 increment.
constitute the basic source of ballistic data for f. Fork Scale. The fork scale shows the change
that cannon and, in most cases, the required data in elevation necessary to move the mean point of
can be extracted from the tables. However, deter- impact 4 range probable errors. The numbers on
mination of data from the tabular firing tables this scale are printed in red.
is time consuming. Graphical firing tables (GFT) g. Change to Fuze Setting for a 10O-Meter
provide a simple means of quickly determining Change in Height of Burst Scale. The change to
firing data. Graphical firing tables are used prin- fuze setting for a 10-meter change in height of

17-3
PM 6-40

burst (.A FS/_A 10 MHOB) scale is graduated in probable error gagepoint shown, the range proba-
0.1 increments and is read to the nearest 0.01 ble error does not reach 25 meters for that charge.
increment. This scale indicates the amount of k. Range K Line. The range K line is a broken
correction that must be applied to the M564 fuze black line near the right edge of the rule. The
setting to raise or lower the height of burst 10 angle made by the range K line with the scales
meters at a given range. geometrically portrays the predicted rate at
h. Met Check Gagepoints. Above the fuze set- which the range K varies with range. An eleva-
ting line are red triangular gagepoints. The apex tion gageline drawn on the cursor parallel to the
of each triangle points to the quadrant eleva- range K line will indicate elevations that vary
tion that, under standard conditions, results in at the same rate as does range K.
the maximum ordinate of the trajectory passing 1. Fuze K Line. The fuze K line is a broken
through a whole line number of a met message. black line near the left edge of the rule. The angle
The ranges and quadrant elevations at the met made by the fuze K line with the scales geome-
check gagepoints are preferred for met plus VE trically portrays the predicted rate at which the
computations. fuze K varies with range. A time gageline drawn
i. Height of-Burst Probable Error Gagepoints. on the cursor parallel to the fuze K line will indi-
Above the fork scale on all GFT's (except that cate fuze settings that vary at the same predicted
for charge 1) are two red triangular gagepoints. rate as does fuze K.
The gagepoint on the right indicates the range
and fuze setting at which the probable error in 17-12. Determining Data With the GFT
height of burst is 15 meters. Large height-of- a. The procedure for determining the eleva-
burst dispersion must be expected when time fuze tion and fuze setting with the graphical firing
is used with a particular charge at ranges ex- table when no corrections are known is as fol-
ceeding that indicated by the right gagepoint. lows:
The gagepoint on the left indicates the range (1) Place the hairline over the measured
at which the probable errror in height of burst for chart range.
the next lower charge is 15 meters. (2) Read the elevation under the hairline
j. Range Probable Error Gagepoint. Above the from the elevation scale.
change in fuze setting for a 10-meter change in (3) Read the fuze setting under the hairline
height of burst scale is a black triangular gage- from the fuze setting scale.
point. This gagepoint indicates the range and ele- b. Corrections determined from registration
vation at which the range probable error is 25 are applied to the GFT as described in chapter
meters. If the rule for a charge has no range 20.

17-4
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 18
FIRE DIRECTION PROCEDURES

Section I. BATTALION FDC PROCEDURES

18-1. General 3622 (FDC Computer's Record). (DA Form

The fire direction procedures presented in this 3622 is available through normal AG publication
section are for battalion fire direction. For bat- supply channels.)
tery fire direction, they must be slightly altered
to conform to battery FDC organization. How- 18-4. Plotting the Target Location
ever, the basic principles remain the same. When a call for fire is received, each chart opera-
tor not engaged in another fire mission immedi-
18-2. FDC Organization ately plots the location of the new target.
The personnel of the fire direction center are
assigned specific duties. To provide efficient fire 18-5. Fire Order
control, FDC personnel perform their duties in a a. When a target is plotted, the S3 examines
prescribed sequence and manner. The organiza- the target plot. He analyzes the target on the
tion of the FDC and duties of FDC personnel basis of its location relative to friendly forces,
are covered in chapter 15. the no-fire line, the zones of fire, registration
points and the factors listed in chapter 27. From
18-3. Recording the Call for Fire his analysis, he decides whether the mission
a. Most calls for fire will reach the FDC from should be fired, and if so, how the target should
an observer. Missions coming to the battalion be attacked.
FDC by wire or radio are recorded and read b. If the mission is to be fired, the S3 issues
back by a radio telephone operator (RTO). The the fire order, which informs the FDC of the
radio-telephone operator insures that all members manner in which the mission will be fired. The
of the FDC are alerted to the mission by announc- fire order consists of some or all of the elements
ing FIRE MISSION. in (1) through (12) in the sequence in which
b. All computers not actively engaged in an- they are transmitted. Inapplicable elements are
other mission record the call for fire on DA Form omitted.
Element When announced
(1) Battery (ies) to fire Always BATTALION.
(2) Adjusting battery When applicable BRAVO.
(3) Method of fire of adjusting battery-------When different from CENTER LEFT.
that in the
observer's request.
(4) Basis for corrections -- When applicable USE GFT.
(5) Distribution-------------------------When applicable---------SHEAF, 50
METERS.
(6) Projectile---------------------------When different from ........ SHELL WP.
that in observer's
request.
(7) Ammunition lot and charge-------------When applicable---------LOT TZ,
CHARGE 5.
(8) Fuze-------------------------------When different from-------.FUZE TIME
that in the IN EFFECT.
observer's request.
(9) Number of rounds---------------------Always in area fire;------ 5ROUNDS.
never in precision
fire.

18-1
FM 6-40

Eloment When announced Exa," , T e

When different from RANGE SPREAD.

(10) Range spread, lateral spread, or zone ----- ------
that in the
observer's request.
(11) Time of opening fire-------------------When different from-------.AT MY COMMAND.
that in the
observer's request.
(12) Target number ------------ Always----------------TARGET ALFA
. o v
FOXTROT 7413.

c. The considerations affecting the elements followed by a description of the sheaf desired;
of the fire order are explained in (1) through e.g., SPECIAL CORRECTIONS, COVERGED
(12) below. SHEAF. When the S3 wishes to adjust only the
(1) Batteries to fire. The selection of the width of the sheaf by the rapid computation and
battery or batteries to fire for effect in a mission application of a deflection difference, he indi-
depends on- cates that wish by announcing the desired width
(a) The number of batteries available. of sheaf; e.g., SHEAF 100 METERS.
(b) The size of the area to be covered (6) Projectile. The projectile or combina-
and the accuracy of the location. tion of projectiles selected depends on the mis-
(c) The caliber and type of weapons and sion and the nature of the target. If neither the
the number of weapons per battery. observer's call for fire nor the fire order specifies
(d) Whether or not surprise fire is possi- the projectiles to be fired, shell HE is used.
ble. (7) Ammunition lot and charge.
(e) The importance of the target. (a) There can be an appreciable differ-
(f) The locations of batteries relative to ence in the ballistic characteristics of different
each other and to the target. propellant lots of ammunition. Disregard of pro-
(g) The type of fire desired (destruction, pellant lot numbers can seriously impair the ac-
curacy of fire. Mixing propellant lots in a single
neutralization, harassing or interdiction).
(h) The battery with the most recent or observed fire mission can materially increase the
the best corrections in the zone to be covered. dispersion pattern and can even invalidate an
(i) The status of ammunition. adjustment. Large propellant lots normally are
() The policies of the commander. reserved for registrations and subsequent trans-
(2) Adjusting battery. For registration and fers (observed and unobserved). Small propel-
lant lots are expended on battery missions when
for missions requiring fires of the battalion, it
is usually better to use the midrange battery as adjustment is necessary. Accurate ammunition
records, to include a record of lot numbers, must
the adjusting battery. If a battalion consists of
different caliber weapons, the battery with the be maintained at section, battery, and battalion
levels.
smallest caliber weapons is normally chosen as
(b) For fixed and semifixed ammunition,
the adjusting battery in an area mission.
(3) Method of fire of adjusting battery. the ammunition lot number pertains to an as-
Unless the observer requests a different method sembled projectile-propellant combination. For
of fire, simultaneous fire by the center platoon simplicity, the lot number may be coded; e.g.,
lot X. Letters at the beginning of the alphabet
is used during the adjustment.
(4) Basic for corrections. FADAC is the are used as prefixes of target numbers and should
not be used to designate lots. This will prevent
primary means of determining firing data. If
firing data are to be determined graphically, the confusion in the fire order. For separate-loading
S3 will announce USE GFT as the basis for cor- ammunition, the lot number pertains to a specific
projectile-propellant combination. The lot may
rections. Omission of this element of the fire
order indicates that FADAC is to be used. be coded, for example, as lot XY, with X de-
(5) Distribution. When the S3 desires or signating the projectile lot and Y designating
the observer has requested a pattern of bursts the propellant lot. Segregation and coding of
other than that obtained from a parallel sheaf, fuzes by lot number is necessary for time fuzes
only.
the fire order must include a command for dis-
are desired, (c) The mission nature of the target and
tribution. When special corrections
SPECIAL CORRECTIONS terrain, ammunition available, type of fuze to be
the S3 commands

18-2
 FM 6-40

used, range, and effects sought govern the selec- to be fired, only the zone need be stated; e.g.,
tion of the charge to be used. ZONE 5 MILS.
(d) If high angle fire is to be used, the (11) Time of opening fire. The mission, the
S3 will replace the charge selection with the description of the target, and the effect desired
phrase HIGH ANGLE. The adjusting battery govern the selection of time of opening fire. The
computer will then select the charge. time of opening fire may be stated as TIME ON
TARGET (TOT), AT MY COMMAND, or any
(e) Each computer will have readily
specific time according to a prearranged schedule.
available a list of GFT settings showing the lot
Unless the observer has requested a time of open-
numbers and charges used. If FADAC is to be
ing fire, the omission of this element indicates
used to determine the firing data, only the lot
that the batteries should fire when ready.
number need be designated in the fire order un-
(12) Target number. Unless a number has
less the S3 specifically desires that a certain
been specified by higher headquarters, a number
charge be fired. If the GFT is to be used, the S3
for each target is selected from the block of num-
will specify the lot number and charge to insure
bers assigned to the battalion. The battalion, di-
that the computer selects the most current cor-
vision artillery, artillery group, or corps artillery,
rections.
may assign a number to a target. This number
(f) When a mission requiring adjustment is combined with a two-letter prefix to indicate
is to be fired by only one battery, the lot number the unit that assigned the target number.
specified should be one that implements the bat- The FDC will keep readily available the list of
tery commander's plans and policies with respect target numbers used, in order to avoid duplication
to expenditure of lots on hand; e.g., consume the (FM 6-20).
smallest of the odd lots first. d. By omitting an element of the call for
(g) If the battalion is composed of dif- fire, the observer is, in effect, requesting the stan-
ferent caliber batteries, the lot number and the dard for that item. For example, by omitting a
charge, when announced, are announced for request for fuze, the observer is requesting fuze
each battery; for example, BATTALION, ALFA, quick in effect. When the S3 cannot fulfill the
USE GFT: ALFA, LOT XRAY, CHARGE 5; requirements of the call for fire because of am-
BRAVO, LOT XRAY, CHARGE 5; CHARLIE, munition shortages or policies of the commander
LOT XRAY, CHARGE 5, DELTA, LOT XRAY or for other reasons, he so specifies in the fire
YANKEE, CHARGE 4. order. For example, the following call for fire
(8) Fuze. The mission, description of target is received in the FDC: GRID 41423617, DIREC-
and terrain fuzes available, range, and effects TION 1460, INFANTRY PLATOON IN OPEN,
sought govern the selection of the fuze to be used. PLATOON LEFT, VT IN EFFECT, ADJUST
The omission of fuze in the fire order indicates FIRE. The S3 decides that fuze time must be
agreement with the observer's selection of fuze. used in this mission. He issues the following fire
(9) Number of Rounds. The mission, the order: BATTALION, ALFA, USE GFT, LOT
description of target, the batteries and ammuni- XRAY YANKEE, CHARGE 5, FUZE TIME IN
tion available, and pertinent orders from higher EFFECT, 4 ROUNDS, TARGET ALFA FOX-
headquarters govern the number of rounds to TROT 7401. On the basis of the call for fire and
be fired in fire for effect. Each cannon within the fire orderi each of the batteries will fire battery
element battery(ies) to fire ((1) above) will 4 rounds at center range in fire for effect; Bat-
fire the number of rounds specified. tery A will conduct the adjustment and will fire
(10) Range spread, lateral spread, or zone. the center two pieces sequentially from left to
The area to be covered, the accuracy of the right using shell HE and fuze quick. Corrections
target location, and the probable error of the known for lot xray yankee, charge 5, will be
weapon should be considered in determining the used and each round will be fired by the battery
range spread, lateral spread, or zone to be used. when ready.
Normally, a battalion should not fire with a range e. The standards for those elements of the fire
spread greater than 1 C (100 meters) between order that have standards are as follows:
batteries, because a greater spread will not give Element Standard
uniform coverage of the target area. When a zone Method of fire of adjusting
is to be fired, the fire order should specify the battery---------CENTER 1 ROUND.
Distribution--------PARALLEL.
zone in terms of mils and quadrants; e.g., ZONE
Projectile---------SHELL HE.
5 MILS 5 QUADRANTS. If three quadrants are Fuze-----------FUZE QUICK.

18-3
FM 6-40

Element Standard (3) Lot XY. The fire order indicates the
Range spread or zone-------CENTER RANGE. use of lot XY.
Lateral spread CENTER DEFLECTION. (4) Charge 5. The fire order indicates the
Time of opening fire-------WHEN READY. use of charge 5.
(5) Fuze quick. Omission of fuze from both
18-6. Announcing and Recording the Fire the call for fire and the fire order implies the
Order use of fuze quick.
a. The fire order is announced to all personnel (6) Center 1 round. Omission of the method
in the fire direction center. Each computer not of fire from both the call for fire and the fire
actively engaged in another mission records the order implies the use of simultaneous fire by the
fire order on DA Form 3622, as shown in figure center platoon of the adjusting battery. Battery
18-1. B was designated in the fire order to conduct
b. In area fire, the batteries to fire in effect the adjustment. The computer designates the
(para 18-5b (1)), the adjusting battery (para center two pieces to fire one round during the
18-5b(2)), the number of rounds (para 18-5b adjustment.
(9)), and the target number (para 18-5b(12)) (7) Battery 4 rounds in effect. The fire or-
and any element(s) of the fire order that differs der specifies four rounds in effect.
from the corresponding element(s) of the call for b. The procedure for the nonadjusting bat-
fire are transmitted to the observer. In the ex- teries is the same as that for the adjusting bat-
ample in paragraph 18-5d BATTALION, ALFA, tery (a above) except that the fire commands
TIME IN EFFECT, 4 ROUNDS, TARGET ALFA must include DO NOT LOAD: e.g., BATTERY 4
FOXTROT 7401, would be sent to the observer. ROUNDS, DO NOT LOAD. The transmission of
In precision fire, only the unit firing and the commands to nonadjusting batteries together
target number are sent to the observer, e.g., with DO NOT LOAD permits preparation of the
BRAVO, REGISTRATION POINT 1. ammunition and laying the pieces in the approx-
c. When DANGER CLOSE is included in the imate direction to the target to minimize the
call for fire, the range probable error, in meters, time required for preparing to fire when the
will be included as the last element of the mes- command to fire for effect is received.
sage to observer.
c. The computer transmits all fire commands
to the firing battery in the proper sequence as
18-7. Determining, Recording, and they are determined.
Transmitting Preliminary Fire
Commands 18-8. Determining and Recording Chart Data
Immediately upon receiving a call for fire and a. Initial chart data for all batteries to fire
the fire order, each computer determines, trans- are determined by the horizontal control opera-
mits to the battery, and records all fire commands tor. The HCO announces range and deflection
except those determined from the chart and to each computer concerned by saying, for ex-
graphical equipment. For example, the call for ample, BRAVO, RANGE 6600, DEFLECTION
fire GRID 41231234, DIRECTION 1430, VE- 3213.
HICLE PARK, ADJUST FIRE is received and b. The data for the adjusting battery are an-
the fire order BATTALION, BRAVO, USE GFT, nounced first. The SOP should designate the se-
LOT XRAY YANKEE, CHARGE 5, 4 ROUNDS, quence to be followed in announcing data for the
TARGET ALFA FOXTROT 7432 is given. nonadjusting batteries.
a. The adjusting battery computer records the c. During the adjustment, data are determin-
DA Form 3622.
call for fire and the fire orderfireon order he deter- ed and announced for the adjusting battery only.
From the call for fire and When fire for effect is called for, corrected chart
mines the initial fire commands and records them data are announced for all batteries.
on the form (fig 18-1).
(1) Battery adjust. The fire order indicates 18-9. Determining and Announcing Site
that the battalion will fire and Battery B will a. Using the graphical site table, the vertical
adjust° control operator computes the site for each bat-
(2) Shell HE. Omission of the type of pro- tery to fire and records the computed site.
jectile from both the call for fire and the fire order b. When each computer desires site, he re-
implies the use of shell HE. quests it by saying, for example, SITE BRAVO.
(3) Lot XY. The fire order indicates the use The VCO announces the site to each computer as
of shell HE. requested by saying, for example, SITE BRAVO,

18-4
 FM 6-40

FDC COMPUTER'S RECORD

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATE TIMERECEIVED ,TIMECOM PyED ITT

CALL FOR FIREI/i/,./4, TOT DF
6.CORR 3 INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS
,j/.3 DF ./210 8TADJUST SP INSTR

AF RG 6 (0/ EL336 SH 15 LOT XY

FIREIT(S)
UN ORDER: - M F SI
-- -. - CHG , FZ .
BASIS FOR CORR "MFIN EFF

DISTR SH -

LOT DL CHG FZ100R20TI

.2= RDS; SPREAD, FSII0rSI 3Fq1, AMMT
A1MM0/ORISA
TIME TGT A X7 '"I QE 39/ EXPO
OBSERVER CORRECTIONS SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS
SH SH,CHG CHART CHART DF FS HB AMMO
SHFZ DEV RG HOB FZMF RG DFC0 FIRED CORR TIRH EL QE EXP

30 __ 270 32 1 1.321So

-- - L 7 o 3ie¥ z. r J/ -€ -J - I

SDATA FOR REPLOT

GRID ALT I Fz TGT
AMMUNITION
TYPE
LOT Y'
JALT JF ____
,Tb
ON HAND, WIC v7 -2
____pl
RECEIVED IQ
O0 /' /±b
> / 0> / IO0 S" ___

TOTAL 7*l £ '.S 7'2 jj 99 . j 70? 27L.

EXPENDED I 0 I ,P j, 0 __

REMAINING ' . €'.9i' ' ?0 70fl 9'79/

- m - -I
DA FORM 3622, 1 Jan 74 REPLACES DA FORM 3622, 1 AUG 70, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.

Figure 18-1. Recording chart data and fire commands

(adjusting battery).

18-5
FM 6-40

PLUS 5. The computer repeats SITE BRAVO, tion to height of burst was made, the adjusting
PLUS 5 to insure he has received the correct battery computer would announce CORREC-
site. TIONS, NONE.
c. All computers convert the chart data to fir-
18-10. Determining and Recording Fire ing data. Fire commands, including the method
Commands Based on Chart Data of fire specified in the fire order and the firing
a. After receiving the chart data, the computer data are announced to the firing battery.
determines and announces the following data: d. When a range spread or 1/2 range spread
(1) Deflection. The computer applies the has been directed in the fire order, the batter-
total deflection correction (if any) determined ies will fire at different ranges. All chart data
from the deflection correction scale to the chart will be determined at center range. Normally,
deflection and announces the total as DEFLEC- the adjusting battery computer will determine
TION (so much). The total deflection correction firing data based on the chart data announced
remains constant throughout a low-angle mis- by the horizontal control operator. One nonad-
sion. j usting battery will fire beyond center range,
(2) Quadrant elevation. The computer de- and the other will fire short of center range.
termines the elevation by placing the hairline One nonadjusting battery computer will add 50
of the GFT over the chart range and reading meters or 100 meters, whichever is appropriate,
the elevation under the elevation gageline. If to the chart range announced by the horizontal
no elevation gageline has been constructed, he control operator. The other nonadjusting bat-
reads the elevation under the hairline. He then tery computer will subtract 50 meters or 100
adds the site, determined by the VCO, to the meters, whichever is appropriate, from the
elevation and announces the sum as QUADRANT chart range announced by the horizontal control
(so much). operator. The nonadjusting battery computers
b. The computer records on the FDC Com- determine firing data based on the modified
puter's Record (DA Form 3622) (fig 18-1 and chart range and the announced chart deflection.
18-2) the chart data announced by the HCO, A procedure for a two battery mission should be
the site announced by the VCO, and the fire com- established so that all personnel, including ob-
mands determined by the computer. servers, will know whether the non-adjusting
18-11. Measuring and Announcing the battery is to fire beyond or short of the adjusting
Angle T battery.
a. If an adjustment is to be made, the HCO e. Each battery fires for effect as soon as it is
determines to the nearest 10 mils the size of the ready, except when delayed fire for effect has
angle T based on the direction given in the call been requested by the observer. Delayed fire for
for fire. This operation is performed after the effect may be used advantageously when the
initial data have been read from the chart. The personnel or vehicles constituting the target are
HCO may determine the size of the angle T by not at the adjusting point but their arrival there
measuring or computing it. at is anticipated; for example, at a construction
b. The size of the angle T, to the nearest 100 site, bridge, or crossroad. Time-on-target proce-
mils, is always announced to the observer when dures (para 18-20) can be used in such a situa-
it is 500 mils or greater. The size of the angle T tion.
may be requested by the observer at any time. f. When the first rounds are fired, the firing
battery reports SHOT to the fire direction cen-
18-12. Procedure During Fire for Effect ter. The fire direction center transmits shot to the
a. When fire for effect is requested, the HCO observer, who reads back SHOT. When the last
determines and announces chart data for all bat-
battery to fire has reported ROUNDS COM-
teries that are to fire. PLETE, the fire direction center transmits
b. The adjusting battery computer announces
ROUNDS COMPLETE to the observer and he
to the nonadjusting battery computers any
acknowledges with ROUNDS COMPLETE.
change in fuze and the total correction to height
of burst made during adjustment. For example, g. When the observer sends END OF MIS-
if in a fuze time mission the observer's total SION (EM) and the results of the mission, the
height-of-burst correction during adjustment fire direction center reads back and records the
was down 10 meters, the adjusting battery com- message.
puter would announce TOTAL HOB CORREC- h. Each battery computer records the observ-
TION, DOWN 10. If no change in fuze or correc- er's report and, on completion of the mission,

18-6
 FM 6-40

FDC COMPUTER'S RECORD

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.
BATTERYA IDATEZP. JTIME RECEIVED jTIME COMPLETED ITGT4F7y 3 ,
CALL FOR FIRE 4.qpMjTr TOT DF INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS
IhV , 137, / 1
It3 0., CORR
DF 0_
3004' _ _
/?>ADJUST SP INSTR _ _ _ _ _ _ _

V C / Rk/j/ AP RG ,-EL SH // LOT

FIRE ORD MF
MF
_ _ SI #47CHG jFZ
UNIT(S)
BASIS
DISTR FOR
1
CORR AIt SH
AAA" 300 MF 3 /8n) C T
DF30 // •
IN EFF
ILRD
.. CHGELX FZD 100/R 20ZRI A FS1OI 00 I
RD;ZSPREAD IO0/RP20/RASi__FSOE_0_AMMO.
TIME TGTAF___ /7 1QE EXP
OBSERVER CORRECTIONS SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS
SH DEV RG HOB SH,CHG CHART CHART DF FS HOB AMMO
FZ FZ,MF RG DF COR FIRED CORR TI CORS/ EL OE EXP
JITITy 6100 3013 03O3 +730, 309 La-IQ

DATA FOR REPLOT

GRID ALT IFZ ITGT
AMMUNITION
TYPE LL., gj s
Ms"7 ss

ON HAND14 & '.a I.

RECEIVED 100Cc /G .L/A. .%. __O

TOTAL z'L
y'6 211. 2 .A ..ZLL7// Y3
EXPENDED 7., * Q * 3 j 0 .L 0 0 __

REMAINING GDEO 6 33 70 6 o777/

DA FORM 3622, 1 Jan 74 REPLACES DA FORM 3622, 1 AUG 70, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.

Figure 18-2. Recording Chart Data and Fire Commands

(Nonadjusting Battery).

18-7
FM 6-40

announces to the battery END OF MISSION, 18-14. Registration

TARGET (so-and-so). The recorder enters END Normally, the S3 supervises registrations. When
OF MISSION, TARGET (so-and-so) on the Fir- directed to do so by the battalion FDC, a bat-
ing Battery Recorders Sheet (DA Form 3623) tery may conduct a registration. To insure uni-
for future reference. At the completion of a mis- form application of corrections, the officer who
sion, the battery computers, using DA Form 3622, conducts the registration will immediately trans-
and the recorder, using DA Form 3623, complete mit the corrections to all batteries and to the
the ammunition record. battalion fire direction center. The corrections
are not applied until the S3 so directs. Each
computer maintains a record of current GFT set-
18-13. Multiple Fire Missions
tings and total deflection corrections.
a. Two fire missions can be processed in the
battalion FDC simultaneously. All calls for fire 18-15. Procedure for Time Fuze Fire
received at the FDC are acknowledged and re- A 20-meter height of burst is a mean height suit-
corded. When a battalion fire mission is in prog- able for all cannon artillery and will produce
ress and another mission is received, the mis- effective results without an excessive number of
sion is recorded by a second radiotelephone op- graze bursts or high airbursts because of the
erator and is plotted by the vertical control op- vertical probable error. When time fuze is being
erator so that the S3 can examine the target plot used and a fire command including DO NOT
and reach a decision to fire. If the target is suit- LOAD is received at the firing battery, the fuze
able for attack by a battery, the S3 should as- is not cut until a method of fire that permits
sign the mission to a battery FDC to be proc- loading the weapon has been received. This pro-
essed. Since only two fire missions (one per cedure will preclude the setting of the fuze more
chart) can be conveniently processed concur- than once if a different fuze setting is required
rently in the battalion FDC, the S3 must make when the final time is announced.
a decision when two or more requests (requiring a. When time fuze is to be used in fire for
more than one battery) are received in the fire effect, the adjustment is conducted with fuze
direction center. The S3 may stop firing a mis- quick. When the appropriate range bracket (nor-
sion in order to attack a more important target, mally 100 meters) is split or when a range cor-
he may take the mission and notify the observer rect spotting is obtained, the observer will re-
that there will be a delay, he may call on an quest time fuze and conduct the adjustment of
attached or reinforcing battery, he may request height of burst.
the fire through higher headquarters, or he may b. The computer determines the fuze setting
decide that the target is not sufficiently import- for time fuze by placing the hairline of the GFT
ant to be attacked and treat the call for fire only over the chart range and reading the fuze setting
as intelligence information and so inform the ob- under the time gageline. If no time gageline has
server. been constructed, he reads the fuze setting cor-
responding to the elevation to be fired. He an-
b. If a battalion adjust fire mission is in prog- nounces the fuze setting as TIME (so much).
ress and the FDC receives a call for fire that re- c. For the initial rounds of time fuze, the com-
quires the use of only one battery, the S3 may puter must compute an angle of site, based on a
assign the new mission to one of the nonadjust- vertical interval of 20 meters and the initial GT
ing batteries at once. The S3 would order the se- (chart) range and add the angle of site to the
lected battery to SUSPEND ON TARGET site determined for the ground location. (Com-
ALFA FOXTROT 7205, FIRE MISSION. The plementary angle of site for the increased verti-
call for fire, which has already been recorded, cal interval is insignificant and is ignored.) De-
would be repeated to the selected battery com- termination of this angle of site is simplified
puter. A fire order for the mission would be an- by use of the 100/R scale on the GFT. The value
nounced. END OF MISSION followed by the of 100/R is a function of range and indicates
new call for fire would be announced by the the number of mils required to move the burst
computer to the firing battery. If the battery 100 meters vertically or laterally. The value of
should complete this mission before the mission 100/R is determined at the initial chart range.
of target ALFA FOXTROT 7205 is in fire-for- Since, only a 20-meter height of burst is desired
effect status, the S3 might order this battery to in time fire, only 0.2, or 1/5, of 100/R (20/R) is
RESUME ON TARGET ALFA FOXTROT required. For example, when the range to the
7205. target is 6,000 meters, the 100/R factor is 17

18-8
 FM 6-40

mils. One-fifth, or 0.2, of 17 is 3.4 mils; thus, (1) Range and/or deviation. If the observer
3 mils must be added to the site to achieve a 20- sends a correction for range or deviation or if he
meter height of burst. The computer combines sends corrections for both range and deviation,
the angle of site for the height of burst with the the HCO will plot the correction(s) and deter-
site announced by the VCO and the elevation to mine new chart data. The computer will deter-
determine the quadrant elevation. He announces mine new firing data and will apply to the new
quadrant elevation as QUADRANT (so much). fuze setting the total fuze setting correction de-
d. When a height-of-burst correction is given termined during the adjustment.
by the observer, the computer converts the cor- (2) Height of burst. If the observer sends
rection to a correction to fuze setting by deter- a correction for height of burst only, the correc-
mining, from the GFT, the change to fuze set- tion is applied to the total site by use of the
ting for a 10-meter change in height of burst 100/R factor, because a change in fuze setting
and multiplying it by the number of 10-meter will cause both a range change and a deviation
increments in the observer correction. For ex- change. (The amounts of the changes depend on
ample, for charge 5 and a fuze setting of 17.5, the size of the angle T.)
the change to fuze setting for a 10-meter change (3) Range and/or deviation and height of
in height of burst is 0.12. Assuming a height-of- burst. If the observer sends a correction for
burst correction of UP 40, the correction to fuze range or deviation and a correction for height of
setting is 4 x 0.2 = 0.48, or -0.5. Applying burst or if he sends corrections for range, devia-
-0.5 to 17.5, the computer determines a fuze tion, and height of burst, the procedures out-
setting to fire of 17.0. Assuming the observer's lined in (1) and (2) above apply.
next correction to be DOWN 20, FIRE FOR
EFFECT, the correction to fuze setting is 2 x 18-16. Procedure using VT fuze
0.12 = 0.24 or +0.2. Applying this correction to a. When VT fuze is used, as when time fuze
the last fuze setting fired, 17.0, the computer de- is used, an additional angle of site must be added
termines the new time to be fired to be 17.2 to the site determined for the ground location.
(17.0 + 0.2). Height of burst corrections by the The additional angle of site for VT fuze is de-
observer are announced to the nearest 5 meters. termined in the same manner as that for time
The change to fuze setting for a 10-meter fuze (para 18-15c). Application of this addition-
change in height of burst is determined at the al angle of site compensates for the shortened
initial fuze setting. In the case of a battalion range that would result if the fuze functioned
mass mission, the nonadjusting batteries deter- on a trajectory determined for a ground impact
mine FS at the final pin location. This procedure location (fig 18-3). The heights of burst (and,
is the same as that used by the adjusting bat- thus, the ranges) obtained with VT fuzes vary
tery. When the adjusting battery computer an- in different types of terrain. If an unsatisfactory
nounces total height of burst corrections (para range results, the observer must make a range
18-12b), the nonadjusting battery computers de- correction to bring the effect to the desired loca-
termine the fire for effect time by applying the tion. For future missions in the same area, a
proper number of FS increments to the fuze similar correction may be applied for fire for ef-
setting to the final pin location. fect with VT fuze. There is no need to compen-
e. Because fuze quick is used during the ad- sate for the shortened range in high-angle fire,
justment, the initial fire commands to the ad- since the descending branch of the trajectory is
justing battery will state, as part of the method nearly vertical.
of fire, the number of time-fuzed rounds to be b. When VT fuze is to be used in fire for ef-
used in fire for effect. Typical fire commands fect, adjustment is made with fuze quick in or-
for an adjusting battery would be BATTERY der to facilitate spotting. The fire commands to
ADJUST, SHELL HE, LOT XRAY YANKEE, the adjusting battery include, as a part of the
CHARGE 5, FUZE QUICK, CENTER 1 method of fire, the number of VT-fuzed rounds
ROUND, BATTERY 3 ROUNDS TIME IN to be used in fire for effect in order to expedite
EFFECT, DEFLECTION 3132, QUADRANT the delivery of fire for effect. Typical fire com-
345. mands for an adjusting battery would be BAT-
f. For purposes of refinement data or repeat- TERY ADJUST, SHELL HE, LOT XRAY
ing fire for effect, the observer may desire to ZULU, CHARGE 5, FUZE QUICK, CENTER 1
change the mean burst location. When this is the ROUND, BATTERY 3 ROUNDS VT IN EF-
case the following procedures will apply: FECT, DEFLECTION 3359, QUADRANT 352.

18-9
FA 6-40

Trajectory with HOB

correction added

Burst level of VT

Ground

\ Amount effect would be short

if HOB correction were not
added
Figure 18-3. Result of height of burst correction to VT
fuze effect.

c. The adjusting battery computer computes If the observer reports that VT fuzes are burst-
the height-of-burst correctnn (using 100/R at ing on impact, the fuze setting for the VT fuze
initial chart range) and applies it as part of is decreased by 1.0.
site on entering fire for effect. The nonadjusting g. New types of VT fuzes are being developed
battery computers determine the height-of-burst that will produce a height of burst of approxi-
correction and apply it in the initial commands, mately 5 meters. When firing these fuzes, it is
which are sent together with DO NOT LOAD not necessary to apply a correction to site to
as a part of the method of fire. compensate for the shortened range as the
d. When VT fuzes are used and the source of amount of the shortened range is insignificant.
data is tabular firing tables or graphical equip-
ment that includes time-of-flight data, a fuze 18-17. Procedure for Mission by Air
Observer
setting corresponding to the time of flight to the a. The air observer, with no fixed location,
target is determined. The time of flight to the normally omits direction in his call for fire. He
target is that corresponding to the elevation to usually adjusts with respect to the gun-target
be fired. If the time of flight to the target is not line. If grid coordinates are used initially to
a whole number, the next lower whole number locate the target, the chart operator centers the
is used. For example, if the time of flight corres- target grid on this plot and orients the grid so
ponding to the elevation to be fired is 24.2 that the 0 to 3200 line is parallel to the arm of
seconds; the fuze setting for the VT fuze is 24 the range-deflection protractor. The vertex of the
seconds. This is announced as TIME 24.0. range-deflection protractor is at the adjusting
e. When VT fuzes are used and the sources battery pin and the edge is against the pin at the
of data is graphical equipment that does not initial target location. The chart operator plots
include time-of-flight data, the fuze setting for the observer's first correction with the target
the VT fuze is the fuze setting for MTSQ that grid oriented as described above, and determines
corresponds to the elevation to be used. If this the chart data. The target grid need not be
fuze setting is not a whole number, the next reoriented after subsequent corrections unless
lower whole number is used. there has been a change of 200 mils or more in
f. Since fuze quick is used in adjustment, the direction of fire during the mission. If neces-
fire commands for "FUZE VT" and "TIME" (so sary, the chart operator may reorient the target
much)" are announced with fire for effect data grid (using the target pin location as a pivot
for the adjusting battery. The command "FUZE point) by rotating the grid until the 0 to 3200
VT" and "TIME (so much)" are included in the line is again parallel to the arm of the
initial commands for nonadjusting batteries. range-deflection protractor.
However, the time they fire is that time corres- b. To plot a target location as a shift from a
ponding to the elvation at the final pin location. registration (known) point, the chart operator

18-10
 FM 6-40

must center the target grid over the registration (chap 21), etc. Check rounds should be fired on
point and orient the 0 to 3200 line parallel to as many IP's as possible. These points should
the center battery-registration point line. The be replotted (chap 20) if they are not surveyed
chart operator plots the observer's shift and de- locations. Check rounds should be fired for the
termines the chart data. He then reorients the observer to insure that firing data is correct.
target grid parallel to the adjusting battery- b. The moving target mission will normally
target line. Thereafter, the target grid need not be fired as an "AT MY COMMAND, FIRE FOR
be reoriented during the mission unless the direc- EFFECT" mission. As standard procedure for
tion of fire changes more than 200 mils. moving target missions the FDC will include
c. The chart operator may also orient the tar- TF in the message to observer.
get grid with respect to a spotting line, such as a c. If the fire is not effective, the fire-for-effect
railroad, or the direction announced by the ob- must be adjusted. If the fires were accurate, the
server. In this case, the chart operator centers mission would continue on as before on a new
the target grid over a predesignated point and IP. If the fires were inaccurate, a reasonably
orients the 0 to 3200 line parallel to the spotting valid assumption (if the IP location was correct)
line. The observer's corrections are with respect may be made that conditions which caused the
to the spotting line; so the target grid needs fire to miss the original IP will apply equally
no reorientation. to the new IP, both in direction and amount.
d. When the observer's call for fire includes The procedure for repeating fire-for-effect would
MARK CENTER OF SECTOR, the chart opera- then essentially be a repetition of the initial
tor centers the target grid over the point selected fire-for-effect except that the correction to bring
as the center of sector and orients the grid so the fire to the first IP is applied to the grid of
that the 0 to 3200 line is parallel to the adjusting the new IP. The new IP is first plotted on the
battery-target line. After he has plotted the ob- firing chart and then the observer corrections
server's shift from this point, he follows the must be applied to this new pbint using the old
procedures outlined in b above. OT direction. Once these corrections are applied,
new firing data for each unit will be computed.
18-18. Procedure When Ground Observer Once the firing data has been computed, the new
isMoving Rapidly OT' direction will be used.
a. Occasionally, a ground observer, especially
one mounted in a tank, finds it necessary to ad- 18-20. Procedure for Time-on-Target Missions
just with respect to the gun-target line. The a. The time-on-target (TOT) technique is a
fire direction procedures involved are the same special technique of firing the pieces of several
as those prescribed for the air observer (para units so that the projectiles of all the units firing
18-17a and b). arrive at the target at the same time. This tech-
b. When an observer is moving rapidly while nique gains the full value of the element of
adjusting on the OT line, his OT direction may surprise. The fire direction officer may set the
change considerably during a mission. If the ob- time on target by giving the time of day that
server does not change the direction in a fire is to be delivered. For example, the order
subsequent correction, the FDC will change it, if may state TIME ON TARGET is 0915 HOURS
necessary, by use of the procedure described in (TIME IS 0905 NOW). Time on target
paragraph 16-19d. may also be ordered as TIME ON TARGET IS
(so many) MINUTES FROM - NOW.
18-19. Procedures When Engaging Moving Generally, 10 minutes advance notice will give
Targets all units sufficient time to prepare and execute a
a. Time is extremely important in the engage- TOT mission.
ment of moving targets. The FDC should, as b. In time-on-target missions, the target is
much as possible, prepare in advance for the plotted and firing data and fire commands are
attack of moving targets. For each likely inter- determined as usual except for the method of fire.
cept point (IP) received from the (firing officer) The fire order includes AT MY COMMAND and
FO, a target number will be assigned. For TIME ON TARGET. The fire commands initially
each of its firing units the FDC (battalion and transmitted to the firing battery include DO
battery) should compute firing data to each IP. NOT LOAD. At the appropriate time, the method
This data should be recorded to save time and of fire is changed to include AT MY COMMAND,
should be updated immediately upon re-registra- TIME ON TARGET (so many) MINUTES
tion (chap 20), receipt of a new met message FROM NOW. Each battery executive of-

18-11
FM 6-40

ficer coordinates the time of loading so that the for this target would command fire at the an-
rounds are in the chambers for the shortest pos- nounced count of 15.
sible time prior to firing and reports when the
battery is ready. The appropriate time for the 18-21. Report on Firing to Battalion S2
The chief computer will report all missions fired
battery to load can be determined by subtracting
to the battalion S2 as soon after the end of the
the time of flight plus 30 seconds from the time
mission as possible. For example:
on target. The time of flight should be sent to
BATTALION FIRED 48 ROUNDS ON 100
the executive officer if the fire commands do not
INFANTRY DIGGING IN AT 60053687,
include a fuze setting.
ESTIMATE 20 CASUALTIES, REMAIND-
c. To coordinate the firing of all batteries, the ER WITHDRAWING.
battalion S3 initiates a count down approximate-
ly 10 seconds before the battery with the long- 18-22. Records
est time of flight must fire. The count down is a. The battery computers will maintain a
continued until all batteries have fired. Each bat- temporary file of FDC Computer's Record (DA
tery is given the command FIRE when the bat- Form 3622) for possible future reference.
talion S3 announces the time in his counting b. A blackboard or sheet of acetate may be
which corresponds to the time of flight for the used for posting current GFT settings, registra-
battery plus 2 seconds. This 2 seconds is added tion and met data, and any other information
to the time of flight to allow for the interval be- of immediate use to the fire direction personnel.
tween the announced count and the actual firing A record of registration and met data as well
of the pieces. as velocity errors developed with specific ammu-
nition lots should be kept for reference.
d. For example, the following message has c. The battalion chief computer and the bat-
been received from a division artillery fire direc- tery computers should maintain a temporary file
tion center: of records of precision fire.
THIS IS (call sign), FIRE MISSION, BAT- d. The computer maintains a temporary file
TALION, TARGET ALFA YANKEE 2101, of data sheets for all prearranged fire sent to the
INFANTRY BATTALION ASSEMBLY battery.
AREA, VT, 2 ROUNDS, TIME ON TAR- e. The battery computers maintain a current
GET IS 10 MINUTES FROM NOW. record of all ammunition present in the battery.
The battalion S3 starts his stopwatch at the If necessary, the computer's record may be sup-
command NOW and begins his count by an- plemented in order to make the record complete.
nouncing, at the appropriate time, "TIME ON f. The battalion chief computer keeps a cur-
TARGET IS 60 SECONDS FROM NOW 50 rent master ammunition record that will be a
40 30, 29, 28, 27, 26," etc., until consolidation of the ammunition records of the
all batteries have fired. The computer of a bat- battery computers plus the amount of ammuni-
tery which has a time of flight of 13 seconds tion in the battalion train.

Section II. BATTERY FIRE DIRECTION

18-23. General tion center is manned by personnel assigned to
a. The battery executive officer is responsible the firing battery headquarters.
for the control of the firing battery. This re- c. A battery in a battalion that normally ex-
sponsibility extends to the production of firing ercises technical fire direction will determine fire
data and fire commands when the battery fire commands only when-
direction personnel are responsible for processing (1) Operating independently.
a mission. The executive officer exercises control (2) Directed to do so by the S3.
of the firing battery area that he chooses to oc- d. Firing charts-one or two, the number be-
cupy. ing left to the discretion of the commander-
b. The battery fire direction center is the are maintained at the battery. If only one chart
installation within the firing battery where fir- is maintained, it should be a grid sheet supple-
ing data is determined. The battery fire direc- mented by a 1:50,000 map.

18-12
 FM 6-40

18-24. Procedure at the Battery When the chiefs of sections can check their sections. The
Battalion isDetermining Fire executive officer (or assistant executive officer or
Command chief of firing battery) must supervise the opera-
a. When fire commands are being produced at tions of the computer and the recorder. The exe-
the battalion FDC, the commands are transmit- cutive officer himself may transmit the fire com-
ted to the battery fire direction center by the mands to the pieces and may do so from any po-
computer at the battalion fire direction center. sition in the firing battery area that affords him
The executive officer is responsible for insuring the best control of firing battery operations.
that the fire commands are received, recorded,
read back, and relayed to the pieces. Consider- b. During lulls in firing, the battery chart
ing the state of training of his unit, the execu- operator(s) and computer receive, from the bat-
tive officer must organize his personnel so that talion FDC, data for the construction of the fir-
the fire commands are relayed to the pieces rap- ing chart and current registration and met data.
idly and accurately. A wire bridge may connect The GFT settings and deflection correction scales
the radiotelephone operator's telephone and the are kept current so that the battery can deter-
computer's telephone in the battery FDC, enab- mine fire commands when required.
ling the computer in the battalion FDC to send
commands directly to the guns. If a wire bridge 18-25. Procedures When the Battery is
has not been established, or the radiotelephone Producing Fire Commands
operator is receiving commands over the radio, When the battery is required to produce fire
the radiotelephone operator reads back the commands, appropriate personnel of the firing
commands to the battalion fire direction center. battery headquarters constitute the FDC and
The computer in the battery FDC records the assume the functions of their battalion counter-
commands and relays them to the pieces. In any parts; i.e., the executive officer (or whoever is in
case, the recorder at the gun position records the charge of the firing battery at the time) as-
commands and reads them back to the FDC so sumes the duties of the S3, the battery computer
that the executive officer (XO) can hear the assumes the duties of the computer in the bat-
commands and thereby control the fire and the talion FDC, and so forth.

Section III. COMMUNICATIONS

18-26. General terminal to and throughout the fire direction
a. Separate radio and wire systems are in- center. Radio operators will remote the radios.
stalled to provide the communications necessary The switchboard operator will conduct the nor-
for fire direction. These systems should parallel mal wire checks for those lines terminating in
each other so far as possible to provide an al- the switchboard.
ternate means of communication if either sys-
tem should fail. The radio and wire systems can
readily be adapted to units regardless of caliber 18-27. Wire
The extent of the wire system installed depends
or mission. All FDC personnel should be trained
on the length of time a position is occupied.
in both communication and gunnery techniques.
Neither wire nor radio can be considered the pri- a. If a battalion position is occupied for a
mary means of communication, since the presence short period, lack of time may preclude develop-
of both types of communication permits a selec- ing the wire system beyond installing the fire
tion of the best means to meet any situation. direction lines to the batteries. In this case, radio
Highest priority must be given to installing the will carry traffic to fire support officers and for-
wire lines between the battalion FDC and the ward observers.
fire direction centers in the firing batteries. For
detailed instructions pertaining to wire and ra- b. If a battalion position is occupied for a
dio communications, see FM 6-10. sufficient length of time, a complete wire system
b. Maximum use will be made of fire direction is installed. The installation of wire is started on
personnel to set up the communications within completion of reconnaissance. The system is ex-
the fire direction center. For example, wire per- panded and improved until the unit displaces
sonnel normally will lay wire to a terminal near from the position. Wire circuits parallel the radio
the fire direction center. The FDC personnel circuits. As the wire system is improved, radio
are responsible for the communications from the traffic is reduced.

18-13
FM 6-40

Section IV. SAMPLE MISSIONS

18-28. One Battery, Fuze Time XY, range 6900, elevation 380, time 24.4. The
a. General. A 155-mm howitzer (M109) bat- installation of wire lines to the OP's has not
talion has established OP's and a registration been completed.
has been conducted. The GFT setting derived b. Procedures During Mission. (As Prescrib-
from the registration is GFT B: Charge 5, Lot ed by ACP 125). See figure 18-4.

FO radiotelephone operator: ALWAYS CIVIL 18, THIS IS ALWAYS

CIVIL 46, FIRE MISSION, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator FIRE MISSION.
[to alert FDC personnel] :
FDC radiotelephone operator: ALWAYS CIVIL 46, THIS IS ALWAYS
CIVIL 18, FIRE MISSION, OUT.
FO radiotelephone operator: GRID 98336422, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: GRID 98336422, OUT.
FO radiotelephone operator: DIRECTION 2140, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: DIRECTION 2140, OUT.
FO radiotelephone operator: INFANTRY WEAPONS COMPANY
DIGGING IN, TIME IN EFFECT, AD-
JUST FIRE, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: INFANTRY WEAPONS COMPANY
DIGGING IN, TIME IN EFFECT, AD-
JUST FIRE, OUT.
The chart operators plot the target. The location of the target is checked
against no-fire lines and the location of friendly troops. The S3 decides
how to attack the target and issues the fire order.
S3: BRAVO, USE GFT, LOT XRAY YAN-
KEE, CHARGE 5, 5 ROUNDS, TAR-
GET ALFA FOXTROT 7501.
FDC radiotelephone operator: BRAVO, 5 ROUNDS, TARGET ALFA
FOXTROT 7501, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: BRAVO, 5 ROUNDS, TARGET ALFA
FOXTROT 7501, OUT.
Battery B computer BATTERY ADJUST, SHELL HE, LOT
(to battery) : XRAY YANKEE, CHARGE 5, FUZE
QUICK, CENTER ONE ROUND, BAT-
TERY 5 ROUNDS TIME IN EFFECT.
Battery B telephone operator: BATTERY ADJUST, SHELL HE, LOT
XRAY YANKEE, CHARGE 5, FUZE
QUICK, CENTER ONE ROUND, BAT-
TERY 5 ROUNDS TIME IN EFFECT.
HCO: BRAVO RANGE 7240.
Battery B computer: BRAVO RANGE 7240.
HCO: DEFLECTION 3229.
Battery B computer: DEFLECTION 3229.
Battery B computer determines and applies a deflection correction of Li.
Battery B computer (to DEFLECTION 3230.
battery) :
Battery B telephone operator: DEFLECTION 3230.
Battery B computer (to SITE BRAVO?
VCO):
VCO: SITE BRAVO, PLUS 3.
Battery B computer: SITE BRAVO, PLUS 3.

18-14
 FM 6-40

FDC COMPUTER'S RECORD

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY p . ~~~~LF
DATET 2 ' 10,5o
/o "
ITMERECEIVED 1 TIME o
COMPLETED TGT

CALL FOR FIRE qYF,, s TOT DF

CORR L / INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS
? DFF 3 jf7 /ADJUST SP INSTR
CO £ )/ s/N / t/ rMF/vj~f$
-RG 7oo EL SH LOT
FIRE ORDER- SI -3 CHG 6 FZ (
UNIT(S).& MF _ _-

BASIS FOR CORR U &MT W/ MF Ca) T'y 7.t IN EFF

DISTR SH DF 3 TI
AMM
L T SPREAD
RDS; CHG .5" FZ 100/R 20/RJI
100 R30 AIFSI1OVS1 AMMO [
TIME SRE TGTAD 3 004p QE ,/// EXP
OBSERVER CORRECTIONS
MFJ 1i SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS
F- ._11
SH DEV RG HOB SH,CHG CHART CHART 11 DDR DF FS I HOB SI EL EAMMO
FZMF RG DF CO FIREDCORR 1 ICORR L QEEXP
FZ -Zoo70."0 ,7.19 L 32I+3 3 92 3 5
i '72flItumn 71 A6 l 22?f0 L 421 143 WOO 1WO31I (6)
'.La- LL ______ L. w. .3 W-IMF,---
f 0 -SOo
50 F T/ 7090e 3jAI I j ZS3 +3+6 _i

- D - _ - 2-;

- - -- - -I
DATA FOR REPLOT ------

GRID ALT IFZ jTGT

AMMUNITION
TYPE j ~~ m rcs~ __ __

ON HAND 23;?7 ILC0

Wro7,-P7 3,50 2j
Z ! ___

-__ _ _ _ _
RECEIVED _ __"Noma__ _ __

TOTAL -.7 .5 o !1C e 7Z31SQ. Z. .i ____

EXPENDED 30 38? 0 6 .. 2~..

2.. 0 _ _ _ _

REMAINING 2.9 ~o Y,/ z I26f?73 'j 3 0S 9t

DA FORM 3622,1 Jan 74 REPLACES DA FORM 3622, 1 AUG 70, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.

Figure 18-4. Completed computer's record fuze

time mission.

18-15
FM 6-40

Battery B computer adds the site, + 3, to elevation 408 and announces

the sum to the firing battery as quadrant.
Battery B computer (to QUADRANT 411.
battery) :
Battery B telephone operator: QUADRANT 411.
As time permits, Battery B computer will determine 100/R and 20/R
and enter them on the computer's record for use during the adjustment
of height of burst with time fuze.
Battery B telephone operator: SHOT.
Battery B computer: SHOT.
FDC radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OUT... DROP 200, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: DROP 200, OUT.
HCO: RANGE 7050.
Battery B computer: RANGE 7050.
HCO: DEFLECTION 3219.
Battery B computer: DEFLECTION 3219.
Battery B computer (to DEFLECTION 3220.
battery) :
Battery B telephone operator: DEFLECTION 3220.
Battery B computer (to QUADRANT 395.
battery):
Battery B telephone operator: QUADRANT 395 ... SHOI P.

Battery B computer: SHOT.

FDC radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OUT... RIGHT 3C), ADD 100,
OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: RIGHT 30, ADD 100, OUT.
HCO: RANGE 7140.
Battery B computer: RANGE 7140.
HCO: DEFLECTION 3220.
Battery B computer: DEFLECTION 3220.
Battery B computer (to DEFLECTION 3221.
battery) :
Battery B telephone operator: DEFLECTION 3221.
Battery B computer (to QUADRANT 403.
battery):
Battery B telephone operator: QUADRANT 403... SHOT.
Battery B computer: SHOT.
FDC radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: SHOT, OUT... TIME, LEFT 10, DROP
50, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: TIME, LEFT 10, DROP 50, OUT.
Battery B computer (to FUZE TIME.
battery):
Battery B telephone operator: FUZE TIME.
HCO: RANGE 7090.
Battery B computer: RANGE 7090.
HCO: DEFLECTION 3219.
Battery B computer: DEFLECTION 3219.
Battery B computer adds 20/R, site, and elevation together to deter-
mine the quadrant to fire (395 + (+3) + (+3) = 401). As soon as
quadrant has been sent to the battery he will note and record in the appro-
priate block on the computer's record, the change to fuze setting for a
10-meter change in height of burst (0.08).

18-16
 FM 6-40

Battery B computer (to DE ]FLECTION 3220, TIME 25.8, QUAD-

battery) RANT 401.
I:t
Battery B telephone operator: DE ]FLECTION 3220, TIME 25.8 QUAD-
IRANT 401.... SHOT.
Battery B computer: SH OT.
FDC radiotelephone operator: SH OT, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: SH OT, OUT... DOWN 10, FIRE FOR
E;FFECT, OVER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: DO WN 10, FIRE FOR EFFECT, OUT.
Battery B computer (to BA TTERY 5 ROUNDS.
battery) :
Battery B telephone operator: BA TTERY 5 ROUNDS.
Battery B computer applies a corirection of + 0.1 to the last time fired.
Battery B computer: TI VIE 25.9, QUADRANT 401.
Battery B telephone operator: TII VIE 25.9, QUADRANT 401 ... SHOT.
FDC radiotelephone operator: SH OT, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: SH OT, OUT.
Battery B telephone operator: RO UNDS COMPLETE.
Battery B computer: RO UNDS COMPLETE.
FDC radiotelephone operator: RO UNDS COMPLETE, OVER.
FO radiotelephone operator: RO UNDS COMPLETE, OUT... END OF
IISSION, ESTIMATE 25 CASUAL-
[IES, REMAINDER DISPERSED,
C)VER.
FDC radiotelephone operator: EN TD OF MISSION, ESTIMATE 25
( JASUALTIES, REMAINDER DIS-
IPERSED, OUT.
Battery B computer (to EN TD OF MISSION, TARGET ALFA
battery) : IFOXTROT 7501.
Battery B telephone operator: EN TD OF MISSION, TARGET ALFA
FFOXTROT 7501

18-29. Common Errors and Malpractices in (1) Readisg the wrong elevat.on or time
the Fire Direction Center gageline when more than one line is placed on a
a. The formation of proper habits in training cursor.
and the use of independent checks are the means (2) Failing to seat the vertex of the range-
of eliminating the common errors and malprac- deflection protractor against the pin in the bat-
tices that occur in the fire direction center. tery position when data are being determined
or against the pin in an OP or radar position for
b. Common errors and malpractices in plot- polar plotting.
ting are- (3) Reading the data on the GFT from a
(1) Using an improper scale of the coordin- position other than directly above the index and
ate scale. scale, thus introducing parallax errors.
(2) Using the yard scale instead of the (4) Reading deflections from the deflection
meter scale. index of the wrong battery.
(3) Plotting the grid from the wrong grid (5) Misreading tho deflect on.
line in the wrong direction, when the firing (6) Using the ballstic scale for the wrong
chart is so placed that north is toward the plot-
charge.
ter. (7) Reading drift instead of fork (F) or
(4) Reading azimuths 1,600 or 3,200 m'ls vice versa.
in error.
d. Common errors and malpractices with the
c. Common errors and malpractices pertain- target grid are-
ing to the range-deflection protractor, and the (1) Miscounting in increments of 100 me-
GFT are- ters in plotting shifts on the grid.

18-17
FM 6-40

(2) Failing to orient the target grid prop- (4) Reversing the observer's target location;
erly by using the azimuth scale, which is gradu- for example, plotting FROM REGISTRATION
ated in a counterclockwise direction. POINT, RIGHT 500 as 500 METERS LEFT (or
(3) Failing to label or construct the north over, or short) of the registration point.
index correctly. This error is especially common
when direction of fire is other than north.

18-18
 FM 640

CHAPTER 19
CONDUCT OF REGISTRATIONS

Section I. GENERAL

19-1. Introduction firing data (called adjusted data) that will

If all conditions of materiel and weather were place the mean burst location of rounds fired
standard, firing a cannon at a particular eleva- with that data at a point of known location.
tion would cause the projectile to travel the dis- Registration data are used for determining cor-
tance shown in the firing table corresponding to rection which, when applied, will compensate
that elevation. Similarly, if the proper deflection for the cumulative errors caused by the factors
were set on the weapon (including the drift cor- listed in paragraph 19-1. Chapter 20 discusses
rection from the firing table), the projectile the determination and application or registra-
would burst on the gun-target line. However, tion corrections.
standard conditions of materiel and weather sel-
dom exist simultaneously; thus, the projectile 19-3. Types of Registrations
will rarely hit the target when fired with stand- The types of registration are-
ard data for the chart range and deflection. In- a. Precision Registration. Precision registra-
accuracies in survey and the firing chart and tion is a technique for determining, by adjust-
nonstandard conditions of material and the at- ment, the firing data that will cause the mean
mosphere may all contribute errors. The number point of impact of a group of rounds to occur
of meters by which the projectile bursts over or at a point of known location, called a registra-
short and right or left of the target is the com- tion point.
bined effect of these errors. The magnitude of
the cumulative errors and the corrections for b. High-Burst and Mean-Point-of-Impact Reg-
istrations. High-burst and mean-point-of-impact
those errors can be determined by registration.
registrations are techniques for determining the
19-2. Purpose of Registrations mean burst location of a group of rounds fired
The purpose of a registration is to determine the with a single set of firing data.

Section II. PRECISION REGISTRATION

19-4. General d. A precision registration is conducted in two
a. The precision registration is conducted on phases the adjustment phase and the fire-for-
a clearly defined, accurately located registration effect phase.
point. The registration point must be a readily 19-5. Adjustment Phase
identifiable, permanent or semipermanent ob- a. The observer is normally directed to con-
ject or feature located close to the center of the duct a registration on a designated registration
target area or zone of action. If the target area point. Occasionally, the observer may be re-
is large, more than one registration point may quired to select a registration point.
be used. The location(s) of the registration b. On receipt of the observer's call for fire, the
point(s) must be plotted on the firing chart. horizontal control operator (HCO) determines
and announces the chart range and deflection to
b. The registration is conducted with only one
the registration point. The vertical control oper-
piece, normally the base piece.
ator (VCO) computes and announces site. The
c. During the registration, fire direction per- computer determining initial fire commands
sonnel compute and record data on DA Form sends them to the battery. Fuze quick is used
4198 (Record of Precision Fire). (DA Form throughout the adjustment.
4198 is available through normal publication c. The HCO plots the observer's corrections,
supply channels.) using the target grid and announces the chart

19-1
 FM 6-40

data. The computer determines and announces the gun-target direction is 940. Since the observer-
the subsequent fire commands. target direction is 680, the angle T is 260 guns
d. When the observer's correction is for range on the left (940 - 680 = 260).
but not deviation, an observer deviation spotting
of LINE is presumed at FDC. From this spotting 19-7. Fire-For-Effect Phase
an FDC deviation is determined and recorded. a. Fire for effect is begun upon completion of
The FDC deflection spottings determined during the adjustment phase. During fire for effect, the
the adjustment may be used during fire for ef- firing chart is not used. Firing data are com-
fect to establish one limit of a deflection bracket. puted from the spottings reported by the ob-
e. The adjustment phase is ended and the fire- server.
for-effect phase begun when any one of the fol- b. Fire for effect is conducted with fuze quick
lowing conditions exists: until the correct deflection and adjusted elevation
(1) The observer splits the proper range have been obtained. When desired, a time regis-
bracket. tration is conducted with fuze time to determine
(2) A target hit occurs. the adjusted time (para 19-18 through 19-20).
(3) A spotting of RANGE CORRECT is
made by the observer. 19-8. Determination of FDC Spottings
The adjusted elevation and the correct deflec-
19-6. Determination of Angle T tion are determined with respect to the GT line.
a. The angle T is the smaller angle formed at Observer spottings, which are made with respect
the target by the intersection of the gun-target to the OT line, must be converted to FDC spot-
line and the observer-target line. tings with respect to the GT line. The FDC
b. At the beginning of a precision registration spottings corresponding to a given observer spot-
on a surveyed registration point, the HCO meas- ting depend on the location of the observer with
ures and announces the angle T to the nearest respect to the GT line (right or left) and the size
10 mils. Normally, the announcement of the of the angle T. Use of the FDC spotting table
value of the angle T is made after the computer (fig 19-1) facilitates the determination of the
has sent the initial fire commands to the firing FDC spottings.
battery.
c. If the registration point is not accurately 19-9. Factor S
located (i.e., when an observed firing chart is a. The factor S is the deflection change in mils
used), the HCO determines the value of the angle between two rounds that are 100 meters apart
T upon entering fire for effect. on the OT line (fig 19-2). The value of the
d. If the target grid is centered over the re- factor S depends on the range and the size of the
gistration point and oriented on the observer's angle T. A decrease in range will increase the
direction, the HCO measures the angle T by plac- factor S. An increase in the size of angle T will
ing the vertex of the range-deflection protrac- also increase the value of the factor S.
tor against the battery pin and the left edge of b. When the observer obtains a 100-meter
the arm against the pin in the registration point. bracket on the OT line, it is assumed that a 1 S
He determines the value of the angle T from the deflection bracket exists. When the 100-meter
azimuth scale of the target grid between the point bracket is split, the deflection read by the HCO
where the arm of the range-deflection protrac- should be within 1/2 S of the correct deflection.
tor intersects the scale and 0 or 3200, whichever c. The values of 1/2 S for all likely combina-
is appropriate. tions of range and angle T have been computed
e. The HCO may compute the angle T by com- and placed in the 1/2 S table (fig 19-3). The
paring the azimuth from the observer to the re- values of 1/2 S in the table are the computed val-
gistration point with the azimuth from the bat- ues rounded to 2 or the nearest power of 2. The
tery to the registration point. formula for the computation of 1/2 5 is
Example: A call for fire has included an
observer-target direction of 680 mils. The chart 5 50 x sin<T
deflection to the target is 3463, the azimuth of 2 =rgin1000's

lay is 1200, and the referred deflection is 3200. d. The 1/2 S is determined as soon as the angle
Deflection has increased from 3200 to 3463, or T for the mission has been determined.
263 mils, and, therefore, azimuth has decreased 19-10. Correct Deflection
by the same amount (1200 - 263 = 937, or 940). a. Deflection is correct when one of the follow-
The azimuth on which the weapon is pointing, or ing conditions has been satisfied:

19-2
 FM 6-40

FDC SPOTTING
OBSERVER to00 500 800 1400 1601 1800 2400 2700 3100
SPOTTING -499m -799m -1399m -1600m -1799m -2399m -2699m -3099m -3200m

?R ?R +R +? +? +? +? +? +? +L ?L

?L ?L -L -? -? -? -? -? -? -R ?R

+LN +L +L +L +L +L -L -L -L -L -L

+R +? +? +? +L +L ?L -L -L -L

+L +L +L +L ?L -L -L -? -? -? -R

0 -LN -R -R -R -R -R +R + R +R +R +R
G
-R -R -R -R ?R +R +R +? +? +? +L
GUN ON LEFT
OF OBSERVER -L -L -? -? -? -R -R ?R +R +R +R

FDC SPOTTING
OBSERVER 100 500 800 1400 1601 1800 2400 2700 3100
SPOTTING 1-99M -499m -799m -1399m -1600m -1799m -2399m -2699m -3099m -3200m

_R ?R -R -? -? -? -? -? -? -L ?L
_L ?L +L +? +? +? +? +? +??' R ? R

+LN +R +R +R +R +R -R -R -R -R -R

+R +R +R -R ?R -R -R -? -? -? -L
+L +L +? +? +? +R +R ?R -R -R -R

-LN -L -L -L -L -L +L. +L +L +L +L

-R -R -? -? -? -L -L ?L +L +L +L G
GUN ON RIGHT
-L -L -L -L ?L +L 4-L +? +? +? +R OF OBSERVER

Figure 19-1. FDC spotting table.

(1) A target hit is obtained. rect deflection once fire for effect has been en-
(2) A 2-mil deflection bracket is split. tered.
(3) Deflection spottings of left and right are (1) Do not change deflection on a doubtful
obtained from the same deflection setting. FDC-deflection spotting. There may be times
(4) Deflection spottings of left and right are when an excessive number of doubtful spottings,
obtained from deflection settings 1 mil apart. caused by such factors as a large angle T or exces-
(The last deflection is considered correct). sive dispersion, may render determination of cor-
(5) A line shot is obtained when the obser- rect deflection difficult by use of the standard
ver is adjusting on the GT line. rules. Such situations are covered in e below.
b. The correct deflection is not necessarily the (2) If not deflection bracket exists, move
adjusted deflection (para 20-12) 1/2 S in the direction opposite the last definite de-
flection spotting.
19-11. Determination of the Correct (3) If a deflection bracket exists either
Deflection split the bracket or move 1/2 S toward the center
a. The correct deflection exists when one of the of the bracket, whichever is smaller.
five conditions described in paragraph 19-10
exists. Following the rules in (1) through (5) (4) Always move from the last deflection
below facilitates the determination of the cor- fired.

19-3
FM 6-40

and deviation spottings in meters. After two

successive FDC spottings of doubtful and based
in information from the observer-
(1) The deflection may be considered cor-
rect.
T (2) An arbitrary shift may be made. Fre-
quently, an arbitrary shift will yield a definite
FDC deflection spotting.
100 mete rs c. After an adjusted elevation, but not a cor-
rect deflection, has been obtained the center of a
4-mil deflection bracket may be accepted as cor-
/ rect when speed, not refined accuracy, is es-
sential.
d. If a time registration is to be fired follow-
ing completion of the impact phase, and the cor-
/ rect deflection has not yet been determined, the
observer is instructed to spot graze bursts for
/
/ range and deviation, since they may be used in
determining the correct deflection. Time registra-
tion procedures are discussed in paragraph 19-19.
G e. Frequently, the terrain and other factors,
such as a large angle T, a small registration point,
and wide dispersion, will present difficulties in
Figure 19-2. The FactorS the adjustment of deflection. In this instance, as
in any other observed fire situation, the observer
I S TABLE is usually the best qualified to take action. The
GT range Angle T in mils observer may see more than he can convey in the
in meters 0-99 100-499 500- 799 800-1399 1400-1600
3100-3200 2700-3099 2400-2699 1800 -2399 1601 - 1799
normal spotting. The S3 must be prepared to ask
2000 2 4 8 16 16 for and rely on the observer's report and judg-
3000 2 4 8 8 16 ment.
4000 2 2 4 8 8
5000 2 2 4 8 8 19-12. Use of Fork
6000 2 2 4 4 8 The fork is the change in elevation required to
7000 2 2 4 4 4
8000 2 2 2 4 4
move the mean point of impact of a group of
9000 2 2 2 4 4
rounds a distance equal to 4 range probable errors.
10000 2 2 2 4 4 In a precision mission, the fork used is that cor-
11000 2 2 2 4 4 responding to the first elevation fired in the fire-
12000 2 2 2 2 4 for-effect phase. If the value of the fork is an odd
13000 2 2 2 2 4
14000 2 2 2
number, it is increased to the next higher even
2 2
15000 2 2 2 2 2
value to facilitate splitting. (The correct value of
the fork must be used in computation of the ad-
Figure 19-3. 1/2 S Table. j usted elevation.)
(5) Any FDC spotting from a line shot in 19-13. Elevation in Fire for Effect
the adjustment phase may be used to establish one a. The observer may enter fire for effect in a
end of the deflection bracket. The deflection spot- precision registration when one of the three
ting of the line shot thus obtained is determined situations listed in paragraph 19-5e exists. Target
by whether the guns are on the left or on the hit contingencies with respect to elevation are
right of the observer. covered in paragraph 19-16.
b. Normally, the correct deflection can be det-
b. If the observer entered fire for effect in the
ermined prior to the determination of the adjusted registration by splitting the appropriate bracket
elevation. However, if the correct deflection
or from a RANGE CORRECT spotting, the pro-
has not been determined prior to the deter-
mination of the adjusted elevation, fire for ef- cedures for determining the adjusted elevation
fect is continued at the adjusted quadrant ele- are:
vation, and the observer is required to give range (1) Obtain a definite FDC range spotting
19-4
 FM 6-40

in fire for effect. A definite FDC range spotting The adjusted quadrant is 316 (314.5 + 1.0 =
is either an OVER or a SHORT. 315.5 or 316). Site is +3 mils. The adjustable ele-
(2) Move in increments of a full even fork vation is 313.
until a spotting in the opposite sense is obtained.
(3) Split the bracket and obtain three 19-15. Example of a Registration
definite FDC range spottings. Figure 19-4 is an example of the record of a
(4) Determine the preponderance, move 1/2 registration with fuze quick. The registration was
fork away from the preponderance, and obtain conducted with a 155-mm howitzer (M109),
two more definite FDC spottings at that quadrant. firing charge 4. There is no base piece displace-
These two spottings will be obtained at the same ment for range.
quadrant as one of those which established the a. Comment 1. After the initial round has been
fork bracket. fired, the HCO measures and announces the angle
(5) Consider the following six rounds in T as ANGLE T 430, GUNS ON THE LEFT.
the computation of the adjusted quadrant eleva- The computer then enters the 1/2 S table at the
tion; the three rounds that yielded definite spott- appropriate chart range (to the nearest listed
ings at the center of the fork bracket, the last value, 5000) and the appropriate angle T (100-
two rounds that yielded definite spottings, and 499) and determines the 1/2 S to be 2 mils.
the round that established the even fork bracket b. Comment 2. Firing data for rounds 2 through
and was fired at the same quadrant elevation as 4 are based on the HCO's plotting of the obser-
the last two rounds. ver's corrections.
c. Comment 3. The observer's correction of
19-14. Computation of Adjusted Elevation ADD 100 from round 2 indicates that his spotting
a. The computation of the adjusted elevation must have been SHORT LINE. From this ob-
is based on the assumption that the six rounds server spotting, the computer determines and
considered fell in a normal dispersion pattern. records an FDC deflection spotting of RIGHT for
The location of the mean point of impact of the round 2.
six rounds with respect to the registration point d. Comment 4. The computer determines the
may be computed on the basis of the laws of pro- value of the fork at the first elevation in fire
bability and the size of the range probable error. for effect-308 mils (QE 314-site + 6 = el 308).
A change in elevation that will place the mean Fork is 4, and 1/2 fork is 2.
point of impact at the registration point is com- e. Comment 5. The fourth round (first round in
puted. fire for effect) yields a definite FDC range spot-
b. The following formula is used for determin- ting of OVER; therefore, the fifth round is fired
ing the elevation change to move the mean point at a quadrant elevation 4 mils lower (1 even
of impact to the registration point: fork). This round yields a SHORT, which estab-
Elevation change = lished the even fork bracket on the gun-target
difference in number of overs and shorts x fork.
line. The bracket is split and rounds 6, 7, and 8
2 x number or rounds considered
Example: The six FDC range spottings con- yield a preponderance of SHORT (-, +, -). The
sidered during fire for effect are four SHORT quadrant elevation is changed 1/2 fork opposite
and two OVER. The fork is 6. The elevation the preponderance toward the OVER, at quad-
2 rant elevation 314. Rounds 9 and 10 each yield a
change = (2 6) _ x 6 = 1.0 mil. The sign of spotting of OVER. The computer determines the
the change is plus if the preponderance is SHORT adjusted quadrant elevation from the three rounds
and minus if the preponderance is OVER. fired at quadrant elevation 312 and the three
c. The elevation change is algebraically added rounds fired at quadrant elevation 314.
to the mean of the quadrant elevations used f. Comment 6. During fire for effect, the deflec-
during fire for effect, and the result is expressed tion 3216 is not changed until a definite FDC de-
to the nearest mil. Site is then algebraically sub- fiection spotting is obtained. The computer com-
tracted from the adjusted quadrant elevation. The pares the FDC deflection spotting of RIGHT from
result is the adjusted elevation. round 6 with that obtained from round 2. Since
Example: During fire for effect, three spot- no deflection bracket exists, the computer changes
tings were .determined at quadrant 316 and three the deflection by 1/2 5 in the direction opposite
at 313. The elevation change is algebraically the last spotting obtained, and determines a
added to the mean quadrant 314.5 (316 + 313). deflection of 3218. Round 7 results in an FDC de-
2 fiection spotting of LEFT. At this point, the re-

19-5
FM 6"40

RECORD OF PRECISION FIRE

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATE/TIME OBSERVER G /TGT

8 /0 vAUN 0800 /
GFT SETTING TOTAL DF. CORR
GFT-8 CHG ' LOT RS RG5O o EL 306 TI --
CHART DATA INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS T
DF 132/5 TOT DF
CORR C BP DISP 0 8P ADJUST
RG 509o EL 3/3 ACH RG SH /- LOT RS L ."
ADJUSTED DATA SI KN FZ CORR CHG Z/. FZ Q
DF 3s,7'/2S- 4S MF BPDR
EL 3o0 F: 4 IOmSI FAC DF 32/57 G
TIME _- / 2 F= , ANGLE T 9,350 QE 3/9_0

RD OBSR SPOTTING FDC

S LOTFZ, MF CHART CHART CORR DF TIME EL QE OR SPOTTING
NO RG F FIRED FIRED ) CORRECTION RG DF
(D_5070o 32/5 0 32/5" 313 31 /9 L10 - 2o _ _

1??/3 00 31/7 2'78. 3o/ -qoa R

909'O 3Z08 0 3208 305 3/ 2o+5oFFE
503a3_1, _3zi& 3o8 31, +R + ?
-3Z/6) 310
__ __ 2I, 3/2 - R
____K 1t"LN 4. L

(I DO319 .?R +

12 _ _ _ __-___

13 A,.OE _ CORRCT" _LF_32

14 +E-O. ROR

16 SITE
17 ADJLE& , 3 ID _

18
19 __ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _

21 _ _ _ _,,__ _ ,_

22 •_ __ _

23__ _

24___
REPLACES DA FORM 6-12. I OCT 64, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.
DA FORM 4198, 1'Jan 74
Figure 19-4. Record of impact registration.

19-6
 FM 6-40

gistration has resulted in FDC deflection spot- exists, obtain three more definite range spottings
tings of RIGHT at deflection 3216 and LEFT at the same quadrant. Compute the mean quad-
at deflection 3218. The correct deflection is 3217 rant and elevation change with the six spottings
(a 2-mil deflection bracket has been split). 1/2 fork apart or with the six spottings at the
same quadrant.
19-16. Target Hits (2) If a target hit occurs at the end of the
a. Occasionally, an observer may observe a tar- fork bracket in fire for effect, follow the rules
get hit when spotting rounds in a registration. in (1) above.
The target 'hit may occur during the adjust- (3) If a target hit occurs at the center of
ment, at the center of the fork bracket in fire for the fork bracket in fire for effect, obtain a total
effect, or at the end of the fork bracket in fire of three definite FDC range spottings at the cen-
for effect. ter of the bracket. If a preponderance exists, move
b. A spotting of TARGET by the observer 1/2 fork away and obtain two more definite FDC
warrants consideration of special contingencies range spotting at that quadrant. Compute the
by the FDC in computing firing data for sub- mean quadrant and elevation change in the usual
sequent rounds. These contingencies may be sum- manner. If no preponderance exists, obtain three
marized by the following set of rules: more definite FDC spottings at the same quad-
(1) If a target hit occurs during the ad- rant and compute the mean quadrant and eleva-
justment, obtain two more definite FDC range tion change with the six rounds at the same
spottings at the same quadrant. If a preponder- quadrant.
ance exists, move 1/2 fork away and obtain three c. Two examples of target hit contingencies are
definite FDC range spottings. If no preponderance shown below.
Example 1:
Observer spottings FDC spottings
Round No. Deflection fired Chart range QE fired or corrections Range Deflection
3215 5090 319 R50-200
3189 4930 306 TGT, FFE CORR
306 -L -+
306 -R
5 308 +R
7 ---- - ?R
±
308 +
308 +R

Fork is 4.
Preponderance is one OVER.
Mean QE is 307.0.
Elevation change is -0.3.
Adjusted QE is 307 (307.0 + (- 0.3) = 306.7).
Example 2:
Round No. Deflection fired Chart range QE fired Observer spottings FDC spottings
or corrections Range Deflection
1 3215 5090 319 R50-200
2 3189 4930 306 TGT, FFE CORR
306 -L +
306 +R +
306 ?R
306 -LN
306 -R
Fork is 4.
Preponderance is one SHORT.
Mean QE is 306.0.
Elevation change is + 0.3.
Adjusted QE is 306 (306.0 + (+0.3) = 306.3).

19-17. PE R Equal to or Greater than value of the PER is equal to or greater than 38
38 Meters meters, rounds fired as a result of ADD (DROP)
In general, the same procedures apply to all artil- 50, FIRE FOR EFFECT, may be wasted be-
lery regardless of caliber; however, when the cause of the large range probable error. In such

19-7
FM 6-40

cases, the observer should be notified at the start c. After the observer's first spotting, the fuze
of the mission to request for fire for effect when setting is changed 0.4 in an attempt to obtain a
a 200ometer range bracket is split. spotting in the opposite sense. If the spotting is
AIR, the fuze setting is too short and 0.4 is added
9= 8. Purpose of a Time Registration to the fuze setting. If the spotting is GRAZE,
A zero height of burst is obtained when a number the fuze setting is too great and 0.4 must be sub-
of rounds fired with the same fuze setting and tracted from the fuze setting. This procedure of
quadrant elevation results in a mean height of changing the fuze setting 0.4 is continued until
burst at ground level. If nonstandard conditions a spotting in the opposite sense has been obtained.
affected time of flight and range at the same A 0.4 time bracket is thus established.
rate and if there were no variation in the func- d. If the observer reports a height of burst in
tioning of time fuzes (no manufacturer's toler- excess of 50 meters prior to the establishment of
ance and no effects from storage), the fuze set- a 0.4 time bracket, a change in fuze setting larger
ting listed in the firing table corresponding to than 0.4 may be appropriate.
the adjusted elevation would be the adjusted time. e. After a 0.4 time bracket has been obtained,
A number of rounds fired with that fuze setting the bracket is split and three rounds are fired at
and with the adjusted quadrant elevation and cor- the center of the bracket. Because the spotting
rect deflection to the registration point would procedure in a time registration is relatively
result in a zero height of burst. Because of the simple, the S3 should expedite the registration
variation in functioning of time fuzes and because by changing the method of fire to "BASE
of the difference in rate at which nonstandard con- PIECE 3 ROUNDS" and ordering the observer to
ditions affect time of flight and range, a time reg- "OBSERVE 3 ROUNDS". It should be noted that
istration must be conducted to determine a fuze the method of fire is not changed in an impact
setting that will produce a zero height of burst registration at the center of the fork bracket. The
for rounds fired with the adjusted elevation. The method of fire remains "BASE PIECE
fuze setting determined from the time registra- 1 ROUND". This is because if three rounds are
tion isthe adjusted time. fired at once, the possibility of the observer's mak-
ing a misspotting or of not observing one of
S919. Time Registration Procedures the rounds are greatly increased. Such is not the
a. If the S3 has so designated in the fire order, case in a time registration, in which difficulty in
a time registration is fired at the completion of the spotting is not great.
impact registration. During the time registration, f. After the observer has spotted the three
all rounds are fired at the adjusted quadrant ele- rounds fired at the center of the time bracket the
vation determined from the impact registration. preponderance of the spottings is determined.
All rounds are also fired at the correct deflection, The fuze setting is changed 0.2 in the direction
if it has been determined. If it has not been opposite the preponderance and two rounds are
determined, the observer is directed to spot all fired. The method of fire should be changed to
graze bursts for range and deviation. To initiate BASE PIECE 2 ROUNDS and the observer in-
the time registration, FDC orders observer to structed to OBSERVE 2 ROUNDS. This proce-
DESERVE TIME REGISTRATION. All rounds dure of adding 0.2 to or subtracting 0.2 from the
fired will be spotted by the observer as either center of the time bracket will always result in
"AIE " or "GRAZE." If the observer is to spot firing at the fuze setting which established the
graze bursts for range and deviation, he is sent limit of the 0.4 time bracket in the direction op-
the message "OBSERVE TIME REGISTRA- posite the preponderance at the trial time.
flON SPOT GRAZE BURSTS". The observer g. After the observer has spotted two rounds
wil com~ply by spotting in the standard manner; fired at the fuze setting 0.2 away from the center
eo.o 9 G AZE OVER, LEFT. of the time bracket the adjusted time may be com-
5o The registering piece is ordered to fire fuze puted. The adjusted time is not a true time but
time. The fuze setting for the initial round is nor- is a term applied to a fuze setting. Henceforth,
mally the fuze setting listed in the firing table all fuze settings will be referred to as time;
corresponding to the adjusted elevation. How- i.e., adjusted time or mean time° The six rounds
ever 9 if an experience fuze correction is known, considered in the computation of the adjusted
the initial round should be fired with a fuze set- time are the three rounds fired at the center of
ting corresponding to the adjusted elevation plus the time bracket, the last two rounds fired, and
the experience fuze correction. the round fired with the same time as the last

19-8
 FM 6-40

two rounds that established one end of the 0.4 munition takes precedence over accuracy, when
time bracket. The formula for the computation only missions requiring adjustment are to be fired,
of the adjusted time is or when subsequent registrations are to be
Adjusted time = mean time fired ± fired in the same position with the same fuze-
difference in number of airs and grazes x 0.4 ammunition lot combinations. The abbreviated
2 x number or rounds considered procedure is appropriate when experienced per-
The value of the time change expressed to the sonnel are firing under comparatively stable con-
nearest 0.1 will always be 0.1 if there is a pre- ditions and are able to judge the reliability of
ponderance. If the preponderance is AIR, the results.
adjusted time is the mean time plus 0.1. If the a. The time bracket is established as prescribed
preponderance is GRAZE, the adjusted time is in paragraph 19-19a through e.
mean time minus 0.1. If there is no preponder- b. Two rounds are fired at the center of the
ance (equal number of AIR and GRAZE), the ad- time bracket.
justed time is the mean time. c. If the two rounds fired at the center of the
time bracket result in mixed spottings, the time
19-20. Example of a Time Registration fired at the center of the time bracket is the ad-
The following is an example of a time registra- justed time.
tion with a 155-mm howitzer (M109), charge 5, d. If the two rounds fired at the center of the
correct deflection 3211, site +4, adjusted quad- bracket result in the same spotting, the time is
rant elevation 324. The fuze setting correspond-
changed 0.2 in the appropriate direction to the
ing to elevation 320 is 21.3. end of the 0.4 time bracket that resulted in a
Round No. Deflection fired
Time QE Observer spotting opposite of the two rounds fired at the
fired fired spotting
12 FZ TIME 3211 21.3 324 A center of the bracket and one round is fired.
13 21.7 324 A e. If the spotting of the round fired at the
14 22.1 324 G appropriate end of the time bracket is opposite
15 BP 21.9 324 A that of the rounds fired at the center of
16 G
17 A the bracket the adjusted time is the mean time.
18BP® 22.1 324 G f. If the spotting of the round fired at the ap-
19 G propriate end of the time bracket is in the same
Comments: The initial round is AIR; 0.4 is sense as the rounds fired at the center of the
added to the time until a time bracket has been bracket the registration may be invalid. (Pro-
established (AIR at 21.7; GRAZE at 22.1). The cedures for determining the validity of an ab-
bracket is split and three rounds are fired at 21.9. breviated time registration are discussed in para-
The three rounds result in two AIR and one graph 19-26.)
GRAZE-a preponderance of AIR. The time is g. Examples of the abbreviated time registra-
increased 0.2, and two more rounds are fired tion are given in (1) and (2) below.
at 22.1 (the time that established the graze end (1) Example 1.
of the time bracket). The six rounds in fire for Round No. Time Spotting Comment
effect are the three rounds fired at 21.9 and the 1 19.6 A Add 0.4.
three rounds fired at 22.1. The preponderance of 2 20.0 G Split the 0.4 time bracket.
the six rounds is GRAZE; 0.1 is subtracted from 3, 4 19.8 A, G Time at center of bracket
the mean time, 22.0, to arrive at the adjusted (19.8) is the adjusted
time.
time of 21.9.
(2) Example 2.
Round No. Time Spotting Comment
19-21. Abbreviated Procedure for a Time 1 19.6 G Subtract 0.4.
Registration 2 -- 19.2 A Split the 0.4 time bracket.
A technique known as the abbreviated proce- 3,4 19.4 G, G Subtract 0.2.
dure may be used when speed or economy of am- 5 -- 19.2 A Adjusted time is 19.3.

Section III. VALIDITY OF REGISTRATIONS

19-22. General istration (impact or time) must be verified. Cur-
a. The fork bracket method of determining ad- rent registration procedure is based on the as-
justed data precludes the possibility of a 6 and sumption that the six usable rounds considered
0 registration. However, it is possible that a 5 follow the normal dispersion pattern and that an
and 1 registration may occur. Any 5 and 1 reg- elevation change of 1 fork will move the mean

19-9
FM 6-40

point of impact to the registration point. How- (1) Example 1.

FDC range
ever, if the single round in the minority sense in Round number QE spotting Comment
a 5 and 1 registration falls outside the normal 1 339 + Fork is 7. Move 8 (even
fork.
dispersion pattern, the mean point of impact is an Split bracket. Fire ®.
indeterminate distance from the registration 2 331 -
3,4,5 335 +,+,+ All +. Drop 1 fork;
point and the registration is invalid. Verification fire Q.
procedures are those procedures for determining 6, 7 031 +,+ 5 and 1. S3 decides to
the validity of the registration. verify.
327 - Registration is valid. Ad-
b. An invalid registration may result from- justed QE is 331.
(1) An erroneous spotting by the observer, (2) Example 2.
which may cause a false bracket in range, de- FDC range
Comment
Round number QE spotting
flection, or fuze setting. 1 . . 339 + Fork is 7. Move 8 (even
(2) Errors at the fire direction center. fork).
(3) Errors at the piece. 2 331 - Split bracket. Fire ®.
(4) Excessive dispersion. 3, 4, 5 335 ±,+,+ All +. Drop 1/2 fork;
fire @.
c. Whenever a registration does not meet the 6, 7 331 +,+ 5 and 1. S3 decides to
requirements for validity, it must be continued verify.
8 -- 327 + Fire Q.
until it is valid. 327 Compute adjusted QE,
9,10 -
from rounds fired at
19-23. Verification of an Impact QE 327 and 331. Ad-
Registration justed QE is 328.
a. An impact registration that results in only (3) Example 3.
one spotting opposite that of the preponderance FDC range
Round number
(that is five OVER and one SHORT, five SHORTS 1
QE 8potting Comment
Fork is 7. Drop 8 (even
339 +
and one OVER, one TARGET and five OVER, one fork).
TARGET and five SHORT) should be verified. 331 - Split bracket. Fire ®.
The rules for verifying an impact registration 3, 4, 5 335 + +,+ All +. Drop 1/2 fork;
are as follows: fire ®.
6, 7 331 ++ + 5 and 1. S3 decides to
(1) Move 1/2 fork in the appropriate direc- verify.
327 + fire ®.
tion (add if the preponderance is SHORT; drop 9,10 327 +, + Registration is invalid.
if the preponderance is OVER) from the last Drop even fork.
quadrant elevation fired and fire one verifying 11 319 - Split bracket. Fire ®.
round. 12, 13, 14 323 -,+ Drop 1/2 fork; fire ®.
15, 16 319 -- Compute adjusted QE,
(2) If the spotting of the verifying round from rounds fired at
is opposite that of the preponderance, consider QE 323 and 319. Ad-
the registration valid. The verifying round is not justed QE is 322.
considered in computing the adjusted quadrant
elevation. 19-24. Valid Time Registrations
a. A time registration is considered valid if any
(3) If the spotting of the verifying round is of the following combinations of spottings are
the same as that of the preponderance, fire two obtained in fire for effect:
more rounds at the same quadrant elevation usea
to fire the verifying round. If the spotting of (1) Three AIR and three GRAZE.
either of these two rounds is opposite that of the (2) Four AIR and two GRAZE.
preponderance, compute the adjusted elevation (3) Two AIR and four GRAZE.
from the last three rounds fired and the three b. If the spottings in the fire-for-effect phase
rounds fired at the quadrant previous to the veri-
of a time registration are five AIR and one
fying round. If the spotting of both of these
GRAZE, the S3 must request the observer to
rounds are the same as that of the preponderance,
report the mean height of burst. If the observer
the registration is invalid. Establish a new fork
reports a mean height of burst of 15 meters or
bracket, followed by fire for effect.
less, the registration is valid. If he reports a height
b. Examples of verifying an impact registra- of burst greater than 15 meters, the registration
tion are given in (1), (2), and (3) below. must be verified.

19-10
 FM 6-40

19-25. Verification of a Time Registration Round Time Spotting Comment

a. A time registration that results in either 2 ------- 14.5 G
of the following combinations of spottings must 3, 4, 5 14.3 G, G, G
be verified: 6, 7 14.1 G, G Five G and one A. Must
(1) Five GRAZE and one AIR. be verified.
(2) One GRAZE and five AIR (mean height 8 13.9 G Spotting of verifying
of burst is greater than 15 meters). round same as that of
preponderance. Fire two
b. The procedure for verification of a time reg- more rounds at 13.9.
istration is as follows: 9, 10 13.9 G, G Registration is invalid.
(1) Change the time by 0.2 from the last Re-establish 0.4 time
time fired; and if the preponderance is AIR and bracket.
11 13.5 A 0.4 time bracket is estab-
subtract if the preponderance is GRAZE. Fire
lished. Enter fire for
one verifying round. effect.
(2) If the spotting of the verifying round 12, 13, 14 13.7 A, G, G Preponderance is G.
is opposite that of the preponderance, consider 15, 16 13.5 A, A Four A and two. G. Ad-
the registration valid. justed time is 13.7.
(3) If the spotting of the verifying round is
the same as that of the preponderance, fire two 19-26. Verification of an Abbreviated Time
more rounds with the same time as the verifying Registration
round. If the spotting of either of these rounds a. If the two rounds fired at the center of the
is opposite that of the preponderance, compute time bracket and the subsequent round fired at
the end of the bracket are all AIR and the mean
the adjusted time, from the last three rounds
fired and the three rounds fired with a time 0.2 height of burst is 15 meters or less, the regis-
tration is valid.
away from the time of the last three rounds. If
the spotting of both of the rounds fired with the b. If the two rounds fired at the trial time and
same time as the verifying round are the same as the subsequent round fired at the end of the
that of the preponderance, the registration is in- bracket are all GRAZE or if they are all AIR
valid. Establish a new 0.4 time bracket, followed and the mean height of burst is greater than
by fire for effect. 15 meters, the registration may be invalid. In
c. Examples of verifying time registrations this situation, the apparent adjusted time is the
are given in (1), (2), and (3) below. time that established the end of the 0.4 time
(1) Example 1. bracket at which the last round was fired.
Round Time Spotting
14.1
Comment
c. The FDC verifies the apparent adjusted time
A
14.5 G 0.4 time bracket is estab- by changing the time 0.2 in the appropriate direc-
lished. tion (adding if the last round is AIR and sub-
3, 4, 5 14.3 G,G,G tracting if the last round is GRAZE) and firing
6, 7 14.1 G,G Five G and one A. Must one verifying round.
be verified; subtract 0.2.
8 13.9 A Registration is valid. Ad- d. If the spotting of the verifying round is
justed time is 14.1. opposite that of the last three rounds fired, the
(2) Example 2. apparent adjusted time is considered verified.
Round Time Spotting Comment
1 14.1 A
e. If the spotting of the verifying round is the
2 14.5 G same as that of the last *three rounds fired, one
3, 4, 5 --- 14.3 G,G,G more round is fired with the same time as that of
6, 7 14.1 G, G Five G and one A. Must the verifying round. If the spotting of this round
be verified. is opposite that of the preceding round, the ad-
8 13.9 G Spotting of verifying
round same as that of
justed time is the mean of the apparent adjusted
preponderance. Fire two time and the time at which the last two rounds
more rounds at 13.9. were fired. If the spotting of this last round fired
9, 10 13.9 G, A Compute adjusted time is the same as that of the four preceding rounds,
based on rounds 1, 6, 7, a new 0.4 time bracket must be established, fol-
8, 9, and 10. Adjusted lowed by fire for effect.
time is 13.9.
(3) Example 3. f. Examples of the procedure for verifying an
Round Time Spotting Comment abbreviation time registration are given in (1)
14.1 A and (2) below.

19-11
FM 6-40
Round Time Spotting Comment
(1) Example 1. Split the 0.4 time bracket.
Round Time Spotting Comment 2 21.4 A
Add 0.4. 3, 4 21.6 A, A Add 0.2.
1 22.4 A
5 21.8 A Mean height of burst re-
2 22.8 G Split the 0.4 time bracket.
Subtract 0.2. ported is 25 meters. Ap-
3, 4 22.6 G, G
G Apparent adjusted time is parent adjusted time is
5 -------- 22.4
22.4. Must be verified. 21.8. Must be verified.
Fire another round.
6 22.2 A Apparent adjusted time is 6 22.0 A
considered verified. Ad- 7 22.0 G Adjusted time is 21.9. (A
and G at 21.8 and A and
justed time is 22.4.
G at 22.0). If round 7
has been AIR, a new
(2) Example 2. registration woud have
Round Time Spotting Comment
been required.
1 21.8 G Subtract 0.4.

Section IV. MEAN-POINT-OF-IMPACT

REGISTRATIONS AND HIGH-BURST

19-27. General 50 METERS, USE GFT, LOT XRAY YANKEE,

a. The opportunities to conduct registrations CHARGE 4, AT MY COMMAND, HIGH-
on clearly defined, accurately located registration BURST REGISTRATION. The S3 will usually
points in the target area may be limited. At include AT MY COMMAND in the fire order
night, the adjustment of fire on a registration because he must choose, from among the rounds
point without some type of illumination is im- fired, six usable rounds and, once they have been
possible. In desert, jungle, or arctic operations, chosen, terminate the registration.
clearly defined registration points normally are b. The point at which a mean-point-of impact
not available. Either of two alternate registra- registration is to be fired should be-
tion procedures may be used to overcome these (1) Close to the center of the zone into
limitations. These procedures are known as the which the unit is expected to fire.
mean-point-of-impact (MPI) registration, and (2) In a relatively level area, free of ra-
the high-burst (HB) registration. In an MPI or vines and objects that might obscure bursts.
HB registration, the mean burst location of a (3) In an area visible to the observers.
group of rounds (normally six) fired with a (4) Located so that the apex angle is at
single set of data is determined. The HB and least 300 mils in order to provide the required
MPI registrations are very similar in that the survey accuracy.
six rounds considered must be visible to two c. The point at which a high-burst registra-
surveyed observers, usually designated 01 and tion is to be fired should be-
02. This requirement for survey is the major (1) Over the center of the zone into which
limitation of the HB and MPI registrations. the unit is expected to fire.
b. An HB registration offers distinct advan- (2) High enough to be visible to the obser-
tages over an MPI registration because time fuze vers.
is employed. Since airbursts are used, deflection, (3) High enough that airbursts are assured
range, and fuze corrections may be determined but not so high that the quadrant elevation and
simultaneously. A HB registration is easier to the vertical interval to the predicted burst point
observe than a MPI registration, especially at computed from the battery exceed the limitations
night, and corrections may be obtained for areas stated on the reverse side of the appropriate
concealed from ground observation. GST. Exceeding these limitations introduces un-
acceptable errors. Fifty meters above the ground
1,9-28. Selection of Point at Which to Register is usually a good height of burst, but in no case
a. The S3 selects the point toward which the should the predicted burst height be less than
HB/MPI registration will be fired. This point is 2 height-of-burst probable errors.
known as the orienting point. For convenience, (4) Located so that the apex angle is at
the S3 normally selects a grid intersection as least 300 mils in order to provide the required
the orienting point. Once he has selected the survey accuracy.
orienting point, the S3 initiates the registration
by issuing the fire order; e.g., BRAVO, HIGH 19-29. Orientation of the Observers
a. Once the orienting point has been selected
BURST AT GRID 6138, HEIGHT OF BURST

19-12
 FM 6-40

the two observers, 01 and 02, must be oriented must be recomputed. However, if firing data are
on it. Lines of known direction must be estab- changed during the firing of the registration, the
lished on the ground. The observers must be fur- registration must be continued until six usable
nished azimuth and vertical angles to the ex- rounds fired at the same data have been obtained.
pected point of burst. The azimuths are usually
determined graphically from the firing chart. 19-31. Procedure During Firing of a High-Burst
The vertical angles normally are computed by or Mean-Point-of-Impact Registration
use of the C and D scales of the GST. a. When the battery has reported READY and
b. A message to the observers prior to an MPI the observers have reported READY TO OB-
or HB registration contains a warning order, SERVE, the S3 commands FIRE. The first round
orientation data for each OP, a directive to ob- is used to orient the observers and normally is
server 01 to measure and report vertical angles, not considered as one of the usable rounds.
and a directive to both observers to report when b. If either of the observers cannot observe
ready to observe. Since 01 is the control OP, the initial round, firing data may be changed to
vertical angles should be measured at 01. move the burst until both observers can see the
Example: OBSERVE HIGH-BURST REG- bursts.
ISTRATION 01, DIRECTION 1065, VERTICAL c. After the observers have located the burst,
ANGLE PLUS 10, MEASURE THE VERTI- the registration is continued. One round at a
CAL ANGLE. 02, DIRECTION 485, VERTI- time is fired until six usable rounds have been
CAL ANGLE PLUS 8. REPORT WHEN READY obtained. Each observer reports the direction to
TO OBSERVE. each burst, and the designated observer reports
c. Observer procedures are discussed in para- the vertical angle to each burst.
graphs 13-17 and 13-18. d. Any round that appears to be erratic is
disregarded. In judging whether a round is er-
19-30. Determination of Firing Data ratic, the S3 must consider the locations of the
a. The point at which the registration is to be observers with respect to the gun-target line
fired is plotted on the firing charts. The horizon- and the size of the probable error. Any round
tal control operator determines and announces not disregarded as erratic or erroneously spotted
the chart range and deflection to the selected by an observer is considered usable.
point. 19-32. Determination of the Location of the
b. The vertical control operator determines the
Mean Point of Impact or High Burst
site to the selected point. He determines the a. When six usable rounds have been obtained,
vertical interval used in the determination of the average azimuth from each OP and the aver-
site for a high-burst registration by subtracting age vertical angle measured at 01 are determined.
the altitude of the gun from the sum of the These are the averages for the six rounds con-
altitude of the ground under the selected point sidered.
and the desired height of burst above the ground. b. Once these averages have been determined,
c. The computer determines the fire commands they are used to determine the location of the
based on the announced chart data. The method mean point of impact or high burst. The three
of fire is BASE PIECE or NUMBER (so-and- methods by which this may be done, are listed
so) 1 ROUND, AT MY COMMAND. In well- below in order of increasing accuracy but de-
trained units, the method of fire may be changed creasing speed of computation.
BASE PIECE (so may) ROUNDS AT (so (1) Graphic intersection. In the graphic in-
many) SECONDS after the observers have or- tersection method the HCO uses the chart and
iented on the initial round. When the method of his RDP to determine the mean location. He sets
fire is BASE PIECE (so many) ROUNDS AT off the mean direction from each OP and with a
(so many) SECONDS each observer must care- 6H pencil draws a line along the left edge of the
fully identify the round to which each reading RDP. The point of intersection of the two lines
pertains. is the burst location. The HCO uses the mean
d. Firing data are not changed during the vertical angle from 01 in determining the burst
registration unless a change is necessary to move altitude.
the bursts to a point visible to the observers or (2) Polar plot. In the polar plot method the
to raise the height of burst if graze bursts occur HCO computes the distance from 01 to the mean
during a high-burst registration. If the height burst location by use of the law of sines. The
of burst of the rounds is to be changed, the site following data are required for use of this me-

19-13
FM 6-40

thod: The mean azimuth from each OP to the b. The VCO computes site by determining the
mean location, the direction from 01 to 02, and vertical interval and dividing the vertical inter-
the distance between 01 and 02. The HCO plots val by the chart range (GST) for the appro-
the mean burst location on the chart with his priate charge. The vertical interval is determined
RDP by polar plotting from 01. He uses the mean by subtracting the altitude of the battery from
direction of 01 and the distance determined by the altitude of the mean point of impact or high
the law of sines. The VCO determines the altitude burst. Site is always determined at chart range.
of the burst by using the mean vertical angle
and the computed distance. 19-34. Determination of Adjusted Elevation
(3) Computation of coordinates. The com- and Adjusted Time
a. The quadrant elevation used to fire the six
putation of coordinates method is actually an ex- usable rounds in a mean-point-of-impact or high-
tension of polar plotting, since a determination burst registration is the adjusted quadrant eleva-
of the distance from 01 to the mean burst must tion. The computer subtracts the site (para 19-
be made. If the coordinates of 01 are known and
33b) from the adjusted (fired) quadrant eleva-
the direction and distance from 01 to the mean tion to determine the adjusted elevation.
burst are known, then the actual grid coordinates
of the burst location may be determined by use b. The fuze setting used to fire the six usable
of trigonometric functions. When the HCO has rounds in a high-burst registration is the ad-
determined the coordinates he plots them on the justed time. When the vertical interval to the
chart. The VCO determines the altitude of the high-burst (para 19-33b) is small (100 meters
burst by using the tangent of the vertical angle or less), the fuze setting corresponding to the
and the computed distance from 01 to the mean adjusted elevation is used in determining the total
burst location. fuze correction. However, when the vertical in-
c. Computations for the polar plot and com- terval is large (greater than 100 meters), the
putation of coordinates methods are facilitated by complementary angle of site should be added to
use of DA Form 4201 (High-Burst (Mean Point the adjusted elevation in determining the total
of Impact) Registration) (fig 19-5). (DA Form fuze correction. The procedure for determining
4201 is available through normal AG publication the total fuze correction when the vertical in-
supply channels.) terval is greater than 100 meters is explained in
(1) through (5) below. (This procedure is il-
d. The mean burst location is not tickmarked.
lustrated in paragraph 19-38f.)
The point is used only for determining correc-
(1) Determine the angle of site and site to
tions from the registration.
the reported mean location of the high burst
e. The plotted burst location is the actual (GST).
"did hit" location of the six usable rounds and (2) Determine the complementary angle
should not be confused with the orienting point of site (site minus angle of site).
(para 19-28). The orienting point is the "should (3) Determine the fuze setting for the ad-
hit" location of the six rounds and will not coin- justed elevation plus the complementary angle of
cide with the plotted mean burst location unless site (GFT).
the total effects of nonstandard conditions exist- (4) Determine the total fuze correction by
ing at the time of registration do not differ from subtracting the fuze setting for the adjusted ele-
those used to compute the firing data. The orient- vation plus complementary angle of site from
ing point serves to provide the observers with the fuze setting used to fire the high-burst regis-
orienting data and it serves as a basis for de- tration.
termining the firing data for the rounds in the (5) Add the total fuze correction to the
registration. fuze setting corresponding to the adjusted eleva-
19-33. Determination of Chart Data to the tion. At this value (adjusted fuze setting at the
Mean Point of Impact or High Burst level point), construct the time gageline on the
a. After the location of the mean point of cursor of the GFT. The GFT setting now permits
impact or high burst, has been determined and accurate transfer of time fires within small verti-
plotted on the chart, the HCD measures the range cal intervals (100 meters or less). When fuze
and deflection to the plotted point from the bat- time is being used and first-round accuracy is
tery that fired the mission. The range and de- required for targets with large vertical inter-
flection measured are the chart range and chart vals (greater than 100 meters) determine the
deflection. fuze settings by applying the total fuze correc-

19-14
 FM 6-40

tion to the fuze setting corresponding to the (1) Vertical interval = +86 (467 -381).
elevation plus complementary angle of site to (2) Site = +15 mils (+86/6240, GST,
the target. This is done by placing the elevation charge 5).
gageline over the elevation plus comp site and h. The computer determines and sends to the
reading the fuze setting under the time gageline battery the following fire commands: BASE
(para 19-36, example problem 2). PIECE ADJUST, SHELL HE, LOT ZULU
TANGO, CHARGE 5, FUZE TIME, BASE
19-35. Example High-Burst Registration PIECE 1 ROUND, AT MY COMMAND, DE-
a. A 155-mm howitzer M109 battalion has just
made a night occupation of position. Survey has FLECTION 3177, TIME 20.8, QUADRANT 327.
been completed. In order to accurately fire a pre- i. The base piece and both observers report
READY, and firing is begun. (As each round is
dawn preparation, the S3 decides to fire a high-
burst registration (charge 5). After studying the observed, the observers report in numerical or-
map, the S3 decides to fire the high burst at der; e.g., 01, DIRECTION (So much), VERTI-
grid intersection 6242 with a desired height of CAL ANGLE (so much); 02, DIRECTION (so
burst above the ground of 60 meters. The altitude much). FDC Personnel record the directions and
vertical angles, and the next round is fired.
at the grid intersection is 407 meters.
b. The survey officer has furnished the follow- When six usable rounds have been observed, the
mission is ended.)
ing data:
j. The coordinates of the mean burst location
Coordinates of Battery B- 5708538148 are computed as shown in figure 19-5.
Altitude of Battery B 381 meters The grid coordinates of the high burst are
Coordinates of 01 ---- 6159939123 6190341930; the altitude is 455.
Altitude of 01 --- 436 meters k. The chart operators plot the high-burst lo-
Coordinates of 02 - 6039639620 cation and determine the following chart data:
Altitude of 02 431 meters (1) HCO: range 6130; deflection 3178.
Distance 01 to 02 1,302 meters (2) VCO: vertical interval +74 (455 -
Azimuth 01 to 02 5,199 mils
c. The HCO constructs a firing chart and plots 381); site 13 mils (+74/6130, charge 5).
the location of 01, 02, and all batteries on the The following is a tabulation of the essential
chart. He measures the aximuths and distances information derived from this registration:
Chart data Adjusted (fired) data
from 01 and 02 to the 6242 grid intersection. Deflection 3,178 mils ............. Deflection 3,177 mils
(1) 01 to 6242-aximuth 141 mils, distance Range 6,130 meters QE 327 mils
2,900 meters. Site +13 mils ................... Elevation 314 mils
(2) 02 to 6242-azimuth 604 mils, distance (327 - (+13))
2,870 meters. Time 20.8
d. The VCO computes the vertical angles from
19-36. Radar Registrations
01 to 02 to the desired location of the high burst. a. General. The AN/MPQ-4A radar system is
(1) Desired altitude of the high burst is designed for employment in the countermortar
467 meters (407 + 60). and counterbattery role. However, the capabili-
(2) 01 vertical interval = +31 (467 -436). ties of this radar are such that it can be pro-
Vertical angle = 11 mils (31/2900, GST). fitably employed in observing high-burst and
(3) 02 vertical interval = +36 (467 -431). mean-point-of-impact registrations. When prop-
Vertical angle = +13 mils (36/2870, GST). er techniques and procedures are employed, the
e. The FDC sends the following message to accuracy of registration corrections obtained by
the observers: OBSERVE HIGH-BURST REG- the radar observed method is comparable to that
ISTRATION; 01, DIRECTION 141, VERTI- of corrections obtained by other methods.
CAL ANGLE PLUS 11, MEASURE THE VER- b. Employment. Employment and position re-
TICAL ANGLE; 02, DIRECTION 604, VERTI- quirements for the radar set depend on the tacti-
CAL ANGLE PLUS 13, REPORT WHEN cal mission assigned the radar section and on
READY TO OBSERVE. certain technical and tactical factors that in-
f. The HCO measures and announces the fol- fluence the operation of the equipment. The com-
lowing chart data for Battery B: BRAVO, plete suitability of a radar site can be determined
RANGE 6240, DEFLECTION 3177. only by the accomplishment of the assigned mis-
g. The VCO computes and announces site sion from that site. The radar position should be
BRAVO, PLUS 15. located adjacent to one of the firing batteries.

19-15
FM 6-40

HIGH BURST (MEAN POINT OF IMPACT) REGISTRATION

agency is US Army Traininq nd Doctrine Command.
For use of this form, see FM 6.40; the proponent
COMPUTATION OF HB (MPI) LOCATION
Message to Observoers

Die Az 01 " 02
19nREcT7OM /411) VrRT/CAL AA ff H)// 01 -- 02
3200

DIR~ea7YoAI 6041,VRrdzA/eL 93 130Zr'1

J?5POv~r WIl A/ ie r 8Ak Az 02 -,"
Oi

i Intrior Angles
ob ri g ReA ding

-°.,.
di LL
Lo i t - 50 02Of ......ossary
ne OonMLeft11 _ . ' Io on Right a ....
-IMP)00 I MP)
-SeaingNO A s or02
iNgBMP')
D -0
01& _

necessaryif A"1 +6400

necessary -f
Z 0 1I '' 5qO
126400

0 IMP! - 02 -v-BoIMP, )
02 0 -A01 - ,MP) tIo

DLogFinred S1E 029 o

Ic+ 6400 If
IFSo + 6400 If

Sum5 j30 107 ' 7

10 at, 02 °of
02 10
E ea ring A me
( (1I + M)rgTotalBearing
dE - E +t: Bearing
0

.... i. .1
(MP,) .
Distalnce O1 HO

ogd
APEXWT
I WdI / (oi3ll
LogdEX

RPLogACoES DAoFOM2- I

Sum 117 oll

11w
All IM!)7Ec~ QEIvpi 0 -w 3A
~red
O M1 )fecbAi~r 2-01 .. Q
dilf eLog diet 01 HO (MPI)
-Altecssr 39 t'f 4
Bne~-Sie~T 9 - dE - * c esar dE-+
Bearing •Bearing• O
Dial 01Ol-- (MP1) 31 fO, As -3200 3200 - A &,It

Log of tie, dN, and dH

I I L l i ll I
L o g d ietI L o g diet

0 1"-mw"He

Bearing,
(MP[) q
91031 1699 Beariong
A 00-q-H 3 1
z.
0

Ver,,4 He(PI 1 g'g

Log dE q- "3 sum a'o(4 3,;'4 a o0, JI . q

(91 "44t 90A q td

+ ..... I W I

COMPUTATION OF OFT SETTING

l-s l ,; ,.,
-.,,I.,8 MP R + !3_ Range"Elevaion " L, ,-| r

REPLACEs r-)A FORM 6-55, 1 NOV 'a/, VVtll%-ri lz t-,Pm-JL-r- I r-.

DA 1FORM JAN 201
Figure 19-5. Computation of high burst registration.

19-16
 FM 6-40

Such a location simplifies communications, sur- must be at least 10 mils above the elevation to
vey, and logistics and enables the section to take the radar screening crest. The radar operator
advantage of an existing defensive perimeter. measures the elevation to the screening crest
When selecting the optimum radar site, the ra- from the radar along the azimuth to the selected
dar officer should consider the range capabilities burst point by sighting through the optical tele-
of the radar in order that as many batteries as scope. The pointing elevation of the radar should
possible may take advantage of the registration not exceed 50 mils.
capabilities of the radar. This should be done (2) For a radar MPI registration, only ele-
without degradation of the countermortar or ctrical line of sight is necessary. However, the
counterbattery role. The radar should be placed pointing elevation to the selected point is deter-
in defilade to afford personnel and equipment mined in the same manner as for the high-
protection from hostile fire and to reduce the burst registration to insure electrical beam clear-
effects of electronic countermeasures. ance. A characteristic of the radar MPI regis-
c. Advantages and Disadvantages. A radar re- tration is that the rounds normally cannot be
gistration, when compared with other methods of observed at impact because the radar is usually
conducting a registration, has certain advant- sited behind a mask. Therefore, it is necessary
ages and disadvantages. The primary advantage that the radar observe the artillery rounds at
is the reduction in the time required to prepare some place in space where they all pass through
for observing the registration. Less survey is re- the radar beam. This place in Space is called the
quired for radar than is required for sound, flash, selected datum plane-the theoretical horizontal
or target area bases, since only the radar and the plane of the radar beam from which the radar
registering piece must be on a common grid. personnel compute the "did hit," or chart, loca-
Fewer communications facilities are, required tion of the six usable rounds (fig 19-6).
since only the radar, the FDC, and the registering e. Message to Observer. If radar registrations
battery need communicate. A radar-observed are to be conducted efficiently and rapidly, cer-
mean-point-of-impact (MPI) registration can be tain data must be furnished to the radar section
conducted by the radar, since accuracies are main- by the FDC. To provide these data, the FDC
tained within acceptable limits. High-angle regis- prepares a message to observer. The message to
trations may be conducted by use of radar MPI observer consists of five elements which are dis-
techniques. Radar registrations can provide polar cussed below in the sequence in which they are
plot data from the radar to the mean location of transmitted.
six usable rounds to the high burst (MPI), which (1) Warning Order. The element warning
is the preferred technique, polar plot data for each order must always be included. It consists of the
round may be reported, or grid and altitude may order OBSERVE HIGH BURST (MPI) REG-
be determined and reported by the radar sec- ISTRATION. This element informs the radar
tion. Distances reported by the radar are slant section of the type of registration to be fired and
distances, however, for plotting and computa- that preparations are to begin immediately.
tional purposes, the horizontal error introduced (2) Unit to fire. The element unit to fire
is insignificant and the radar distance is con- may be eliminated by standing operating proce-
sidered to be horizontal distance. dure when it is unnecessary for the radar section
d. Selection of Orientation Point. Some coordi- to contact the battery to fire or to know the bat-
nation and mutual understanding must exist be- tery location. It consists of the word FOR, and
tween the FDC and radar personnel in the choice the call sign or code name of the unit to fire.
of a high-burst (MPI) orientation point. The (3) Orienting Data. The element orienting
quadrant elevation and the vertical interval to data must always be included. It specifies the
the predicted burst point computed from the bat- direction and distance of the orienting point from
tery center must not exceed the limitations stated the radar location.
on the reverse of the appropriate GST. Exceed- (4) Vertical Angle Report. The element
ing these limitations introduces unacceptable er- vertical angle report must always be included
rors. and consists of the command REPORT VERTI-
(1) For a high-burst registration, the se- CAL ANGLE. The radar section will determine
lected point must be optically visible from the the vertical angle based on the radar elevation
radar. In order for the radar to optically observe to a point 10 mils above the crest and on the
elevation deviations below as well as above the direction announced in the message to observer.
selected point, the pointing elevation of the radar Using the vertical angle and the distance from

19-17
FM 6-40

Selected Datum Plane for Radar

MPI Registration where all
rounds are located.

Altitude above
Sea Level

Where rounds actually impact

is of no consequence to the
solution of the Radar MPI
Registration.

Figure 19-6. TheoreticalMPI selected datum plane.

the radar to the orienting point, the FDC will a. A 155-mm howitzer M109 battalion has just
determine the altitude of the orienting point. made a night occupation of position. Position
For a high burst registration the orienting point area survey has been completed. There are no
must be 2 PEHB above the ground. If the altitude surveyed observation posts. An AN/MPQ-4A ra-
determined is not 2 PEHB above the ground the dar section is located in a nearby direct support
FDC will raise the orienting point to that alti- artillery battalion perimeter. In order to accur-
tude required and determine and announce the ately deliver unobserved fires from this new posi-
new vertical angle to the radar. For an MPI tion, the S3 decides to have Battery B fire a
registration the vertical angle reported by radar radar-observed high-burst registration (charge
is the vertical angle determined for the selected 5 green bag). Upon inspection of the map, the S3
datum plane. decides to fire the high burst at grid intersection
(5) Report order. The element report order 6237. The altitude of the battery is 352 meters
consists of the order REPORT WHEN READY and the altitude of the radar is 358 meters.
TO OBSERVE. This element instructs the radar b. The HCO measures and announces the fol-
section to inform the FDC when the section is lowing data measured from Battery B to grid
ready to observe the registration. intersection 6237.
f. Conduct of Radar Registrations. (1) RANGE 6420.
(1) Radar-observed MPI and high burst (2) DEFLECTION 3287.
registration procedures are identical to standard c. The HCO measures and announces the di-
MPI and high-burst registration procedures ex- rection and distance from the radar to grid in-
cept as noted in a through e above and in the tersection 6237 and the FDC sends the following
example in paragraphs 19-37, 19-38, and 19-39. message to observer: OBSERVE HIGH BURST
(2) In the conduct of radar high-burst reg- REGISTRATION FOR LOUD THUNDER 18,
istrations, large vertical intervals (greater than DIRECTION 6275, DISTANCE 5890, REPORT
100 meters) are frequently encountered because VERTICAL ANGLE, REPORT WHEN READY
of the positioning requirements of the radar. TO OBSERVE.
Large vertical intervals necessitate the considera-
d. Report from radar: VERTICAL ANGLE
tion of the complementary angle of site in the
PLUS 17, AMC, REQUEST SPLASH, READY
determination of the total fuze correction as de-
TO OBSERVE.
scribed in paragraph 19-34b and illustrated in
e. The VCO computes the altitude of the or-
paragraph 19-38f. ienting point to be 456 meters and determines
19-37. Example 1-Radar Registration and announces, SITE BRAVO, PLUS 18 (VI
Example Problem 1. + 104/6.42, GST).

19-18
 FM 6-40

f. The computer determines and sends the fol- (2) VCO: SITE PLUS 15 (VI + 86/6.31,
lowing fire commands to the battery: BASE GST).
PIECE ADJUST, SHELL HE, LOT XRAY ZU- Note. Since the vertical interval does not exceed
LU, CHARGE 5 FUZE TIME, BASE PIECE 1 100 meters, standard procedures are followed.
ROUND, AT MY COMMAND, DEFLECTION k. The following data are derived from this
3287, TIME 21.6, QUADRANT 342. registration:
Chart data Adjusted data
g. When the radar reports READY TO OB- Deflection---------3282 Deflection --------- 3287
SERVE and the base piece reports READY, fir- Range --- 6310 QE --------------- 347
ing is begun. If the first round is not visible Site ------------- +15 Elevation 332
(347 - (+--15))
in the telescope reticle and on the B-scope, the Time-------------21.6
antenna will be reoriented to the center of the GFT B: Chg 5, lot XZ, rg 6310, el 332, ti 21.6.
burst and the round will not be used. If the first Total deflection correction L5.
round bursts more than 5 mils below the center
of the reticle, the altitude must be increased and 19-38. Example 2-Radar Registration
the round is not used. As each round is fired, the The following problem illustrates the conduct of
radar operator reports OBSERVED or UNOB- a high-burst registration and the determination
SERVED. If the report OBSERVED is followed of registration corrections when the vertical in-
by REQUEST SITE INCREASE (DECREASE) terval from the battery to the reported altitude
early in the registration, the burst is occurring to of the radar high burst exceeds 100 meters.
low (HIGH). The quadrant elevation must be in- a. The S3 decides to have Battery A fire a
creased (decreased) by the number of mils neces- radar-observed high-burst registration at grid in-
sary to raise (lower) the burst approximately tersection 6337. The altitude of the battery is
2 PEHB. 355 meters and the altitude of the radar is 358
(1) The computer determines the PEH from meters.
the firing tables, interpolating with range to the b. The HCO measures and announces the fol-
nearest 100 meters: PEHB = 17, 2 PEHB = 30 lowing data measured from Battery A to grid
S(17 x 2 = 34). 100/R - 16. and Site increase intersection 6337.
(1) RANGE 6530.
= +5 mils (30_x 16).
(2) DISTANCE 3198.
100
(2) The quadrant previously fired is in- c. The HCO measures and announces the di-
creased by 5 mils and the computer announces rection and distance from the radar to grid in-
QUADRANT 347 (342+5). tersection 6337 and the FDC sends the following
(3) If the bursts continue to be either to message to observer: OBSERVE HIGH BURST
low or to high, a further increase or decrease of REGISTRATION FOR LOUD THUNDER 18,
the quadrant in smaller increments may be deem- DIRECTION 6335, DISTANCE 6040, REPORT
ed necessary. This precludes further orientation VERTICAL ANGLE, REPORT WHEN READY
of the radar and permits the radar section to TO OBSERVE.
provide optimum data to the mean location of the d. Report from radar: VERTICAL ANGLE
six usable rounds. PLUS 30, AMC, REQUEST SPLASH, READY
h. The radar observes six usable rounds, and TO OBSERVE.
the radar section ends the mission with the re- e. The VCO computes the altitude of the orient-
port END OF MISSION. ing point to be 536 meters and determines and
announces, SITE ALFA, PLUS 32 (VI +181/
i. The radar section computes the mean burst 6.53, GST).
location and sends the following message to the
FDC: HIGH BURST REGISTRATION OB- f. The computer determines and sends the fol-
SERVED, AVERAGE DIRECTION 6225, lowing fire commands to the battery: BASE
AVERAGE DISTANCE 5840, AVERAGE VER- PIECE ADJUST, SHELL HE, LOT QUEBEC
TICAL ANGLE PLUS 14. NOVEMBER, CHARGE 5, FUZE TIME, BASE
I. The chart operators polar plot the announc- PIECE 1 ROUND, AT MY COMMAND, DE-

, ed high-burst location from the radar location

and determine and announce the following chart
data:
FLECTION 3198, TIME 22.0, QUADRANT 363.
Note. The computed data cannot exceed the previously
stated limitations.
(1) HCO" RANGE g. The radar observes six usable rounds and
6310, DEFLECTION
the radar
report ENDsection ends the
3282. OF MISSION. missions
The radar
with the
section

19-19
FM 6-40

computes the mean burst location and sends the battery is 348 meters and the altitude of the
following report to the FDC. radar is 358 meters.
h. Message from radar: HIGH BURST RE- b. The HCO measures and announces the fol-
GISTRATION OBSERVED, AVERAGE DI- lowing data measured from Battery C to grid
RECTION 6310, AVERAGE DISTANCE 5850, intersection 6336.
AVERAGE VERTICAL ANGLE PLUS 28. (1) RANGE 5180.
i. The chart operators polar plot the announced (2) DEFLECTION 3047.
high-burst location from the radar location and c. The HCO measures and announces the di-
announce the following chart data: rection and distance from the radar to grid in-
(1) HCO: RANGE 6340, DEFLECTION tersection 6336 and the FDC sends the following
3191. message to observer: OBSERVE MPI REGIS-
(2) VCO: SITE PLUS 30 (VI +167/6.34, TRATION FOR LOUD THUNDER 18, DI-
GST). RECTION 5990, DISTANCE 4670, REPORT
ANGLE OF SITE +27 (167/ VERTICAL ANGLE, REPORT WHEN READY
6.34, C and D scales, GST). TO OBSERVE.
Note. Since the vertical interval exceeds 100 meters,
the complementary angle of site must be considered in d. Report from radar: VERTICAL ANGLE
the determination of the total fuze correction. PLUS 14, AMC, REQUEST SPLASH, READY
j. The computer determines the total fuze cor- TO OBSERVE.
rection and the adjusted fuze setting at the level e. The VCO computes the altitude of the se-
point. lected datum plane to be 422 meters and deter-
(1) Complementary angle of site is +3 (+ mines and announces, SITE CHARLIE, PLUS
30 - (+27)). 17 (VI +74/5.18, GST).
(2) Adjusted elevation is 333 (363 -(+ f. The computer determines the following fire
30)). commands and sends them to the firing battery:
(3) Adjusted elevation plus complementary BASE PIECE ADJUST, SHELL HE, LOT
angle of site is 336 (333 + ( +3) ). LIMA SIERRA, CHARGE 4, FUZE QUICK,
(4) Fuze setting for adjusted elevation plus BASE PIECE 1 ROUND, AT MY COMMAND,
complementary angle of site is 22.3. DEFLECTION 3047, QUADRANT 337.
(5) Total fuze correction is -0.3 (22.0 g. The radar observes six usable rounds and
-22.3). the radar section ends the mission with the re-
(6) Fuze setting for adjusted elevation is port END OF MISSION.
22.1. h. The radar section computes the location of
(7) Adjusted fuze setting at the level point the mean point of impact in the selected datum
is 21.8 (22.1 + (-0.3)). plane and sends the following message to the
fire direction center: MPI REGISTRATION
k. The following data are derived from this
OBSERVED, AVERAGE DIRECTION 6115,
registration:
Chart data Adjusted data AVERAGE DISTANCE 4380, AVERAGE VER-
Deflection 3,191 mils Deflection 3,198 mils TICAL ANGLE PLUS 18.
Range 6,340 meters QE - 363 mils i. The chart operators plot the announced
Site ---- +30 mils Elevation 333 mils
Time - 21.8
MPI location and determine the following data:
(at level point) (1) Horizontal control operator: Range
GFT A: Chg 5, lot QN, rg 6340, el 333, ti 21.8. 4830, deflection 3053.
Total deflection correction L7. (2) Vertical control operator: Vertical in-
terval + 86 (434 - 348). Site + 20 ( +86/4.83,
19-39. Example 3-Radar Registration GST).
a. Battery C (155-mm howitzer) has just oc- j'. The following data are derived from this
cupied a position during an intense fog. Survey registration:
is complete but, because of the fog, the estab- Chart data Adjueted data
Deflection -3,053 mils Deflection 3,047 mils
lished OP's have very limited visibility. An Range----4,830 meters QE------337rnils
AN/MPQ-4A radar section is located in an ad- Site - - 20 mils Elevation - 3 17 mils
jacent battery perimeter. The battery fire di- (337 - ( +20) )
rection officer decides to fire a radar-observed GFT C: CHARGE 4, LOT LS, RANGE 4830,
mean-point-of-impact registration at grid inter- ELEVATION 317.
section 6336 (charge 4). The altitude of the Total deflection correction R6.

19-20
 FM 6-40

Section V. REGISTRATION WITH MORE THAN ONE

AMMUNITION LOT

W19-40. General termined initially for the first lot. This procedure
Although the ballistic characteristics of propel- is continued until an even fork bracket has been
lants vary from one lot to another, the ballistic established. The fork bracket is then split. Pro-
differences between projectile lots are negligible. cedures in paragraphs 19-13 and 19-14 are fol-
The corrections for difference in weight of pro- lowed as in the registration with the first lot of
jectile can be computed. Because of this, registra- ammunition.
tion with the same propellant lot and different c. The correct deflection established for one
projectile lots provides no appreciable gain in ac- lot is used for all lots because deflection is not
curacy and is not necessary. Only when a large affected appreciably by the ballistic differences
quantity of propellant from a partcular lot is on between lots. Therefore, if the correct deflection
hand should a registration be made with the lot. has not been established for the first lot by the
The procedure described in this section applies tVme the adjusted elevation is determined, the
when more than one large quantity propellant lot registration with the second lot is begun and
is on hand. the deflection adjustment is continued during the
second registration until the correct deflection
19-41. Procedure for Registration With More has been established.
Than One Lot d. If a sufficient number of impact fuzes of
a. As soon as the adjusted quadrant eleva- one lot are available, fuzes of that lot should be
tion has been determined for the first lot, regis- used throughout the impact registrations with
tration is begun with the second lot. The ob- the first propellant lot and other propellant lots
server is sent the message OBSERVE SECOND of multiple-lot registrations. However, the use of
LOT REGISTRATION, which notifies him that impact fuzes of different lots will not affect the
he should continue to spot for range and devia- impact registration.

, tion as he did with the first lot.

b. The first round of the second lot is fired
with the adjusted quadrant elevation of the first
e. Time fuzes of one lot must be used through-
out a given time registration. However, if time
fuzes of one lot are to be used with two or more
lot. As soon as a definite FDC range spotting propellant lots, the total fuze correction deter-
has been obtained, the quadrant elevation is mined for that fuze lot with one of the propel-
changed 1 even fork in the appropriate direc- lant lots normally is valid for use with the other
tion. The value of fork is the same as that de- propellant lots.

Section VI. FIRE DIRECTION PROCEDURES FOR ABCA

PRECISION FIRE

19-42. General lined in paragraphs 24-68 and 24-69. For an

In order to obtain the desired results when us- air observer mission, or any mission adjusted
ing the ABCA registration procedures, the FDC along the gun-target line, data may be deter-
must be as familiar with observer procedures mined by use of 100/R and the C factor as out-
as is the observer. These procedures are covered lined in paragraph 24-70.
in paragraphs 13-29 through 13-32.
1,9-44. Time Registration
The initial round in the ABCA time registra-
19-43. Impact Registration tion is fired at the fuze setting corresponding
In an ABCA impact registration the final pin to the adjusted elevation and the correct deflec-
location on the firing chart, as directed by the tion and at the adjusted QE increased by 20/R.
observer, is the location from which the adjusted The FDC converts all observer HOB corrections
data are determined. When a 1:50,000 chart is to fuze setting corrections by use of the FS
being used, refinement at the split of the 100- factor. The final HOB correction is converted to
,M17 meter bracket may be accomplished with the
plotting board by use of the technique out-
an adjusted time that results in a height of burst
20 meters above the registration point.

19-21
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 20
DETERMINATION AND APPLICATION
OF REGISTRATION CORRECTIONS

Section I. INTRODUCTION
20-1. Determination of Registration 20-2. Application of Registration Corrections
Corrections When properly applied, registration corrections
Registration corrections consist of total range, permit transfer of fires (i.e., firing for effect
fuze, and deflection corrections. Fire direction upon an accurately located target) without an
center personnel compute these corrections by adjustment. Registration corrections also facili-
comparing the chart, or "should hit," data de- tate accurate plotting of targets located by the
termined from the firing tables with the ad- adjustment of fire.
justed, or "did hit," data determined from the
registration.

Section II. REGISTRATION RANGE CORRECTIONS

20-3. Computation of Total Range Correction achieved range and the elevation correction
a. If standard conditions exist, the elevation necessary to compensate for the cumulative effect
to be fired to achieve the chart range is the ele- of all nonstandard conditions. The total range
vation listed in the firing table for that range. correction is the difference in meters between
When nonstandard conditions exist, the range the achieved range and firing table range cor-
achieved by firing a particular elevation differs responding to the adjusted elevation. The total
from the range indicated in the firing tables by range correction is determined in the following
an amount equal to the cumulative effect of all manner:
nonstandard conditions. (1) Determine, from the firing tables, the
b. The chart range for a registration is meas- range corresponding to the adjusted elevation.
ured from the battery center to the registration (2) Subtract the achieved range from the
point, mean point of impact, or high burst. If range corresponding to the adjusted elevation.
the registering piece is in front of or behind the The result is the total range correction.
battery center, the measured chart range is not d. The accuracy to which the total range
the achieved range. The adjusted elevation correction is determined depends on whether the
from a registration is the elevation that achieved graphical firing table (GFT) or the tabular firing
the range from the registering piece to the regis- tables (TFT) are used in determining the range
tration point. This achieved range is also the corresponding to the adjusted elevation. With
GFT setting range. The achieved range is equal the GFT, the range and the total range correc-
to the chart range modified by the distance the tion are determined to the nearest 10 meters.
base piece is in front of or behind the battery With the TFT the range and the total range
center, when the weapon is pointing on the ini- correction are determined to the nearest meter.
tial azimuth of lay. The total range correction is a signed value.
Example: A 155-mm howitzer M109 bat-
tery has registered with charge 5GB (M3 pro- Example: Continuing the example in b
pellant). Chart range is 5,000 meters. The ad- above, the range corresponding to elevation 245
justed elevation is 245. The base piece is 30 me- (GFT) is 5170 and the total range correction
ters behind the battery center (fig 20-1). The is +140 (5170-5030 = + 140).
achieved range (GFT setting range) is 5,030
meters (5000 + 30). 20-4. Determination and Application of Range
c. The adjusted elevation is the sum of the Ke
elevation listed in the firing tables for the a. The range K is an expression of the total

20-1
FM 6-40

Registration
point

Range used for determining

corrections is 5030 meters

E
0
o0
GFT
0 Range
0
0
ICP
to

Battery
center
I '
-,I
30 meters

Bosec

Figure20-1. Base piece displacementcorrection-range.

range correction as a ratio of meters correction b. Within transfer limits, the total range cor-
per thousands of meters in range. The range rection is assumed to vary directly with chart
K is equal to the total range correction divided range. The total range correction to be applied for
by the achieved range in thousands of meters (to a target within transfer limits is determined by
the nearest 100 meters). multiplying the range K by the chart range to
the target in thousands (to the nearest 100 me-
Example: Continuing the example in para-
ters).
graph 20-3b, the range K is determined as fol-
lows: c. The elevation to be fired is the elevation
corresponding to the sum of the total range cor-
Range K = + 140 = + 28.0, or + 28 meters per rection (b above) and the chart range, expressed
5.0
1,000 meters. to the nearest 10 meters.

20-2
 FM 6-40

Example: Continuing the example, the bat- 20-7. GFT Settings

tery is to fire on a target at a chart range of a. Corrections determined by registration (or
6,120 meters with charge 5 green bag with the met plus VE computation) usually are portrayed
range K computed in a above, the elevation to graphically on the graphical firing table in the
be fired is determined as follows: form of a GFT setting. GFT settings are of
Range correction = three types: one-plot, two-plot, and multiple-plot.
+28 x 6.1 =171 +170 meters The GFT setting contains the following elements
Chart range -- 6,120 meters (in the sequence indicated): The unit that reg-
istered, the charge fired, the ammunition lot, the
6,290 meters achieved range (chart range modified by base
Elevation corresponding to range 6290 = 314.9,
piece displacement) to the nearest 10 meters, the
or 315 mils. adjusted elevation, and, if determined, the ad-
d. Normally, a range K is computed and ap-
justed time.
plied only when graphical equipment is not avail-
able. In the computation of the range K from the Examples:
tabular firing tables interpolation for elevation (1) One-plot GFT setting:
and range is required. The table is entered with GFT B: Charge 5, lot XY,
range to the nearest 10 meters. The discussion range 5920, elevation 305, time 19.9
of the application of range K in b and c above (2) Two-plot GFT setting:
assumes that range K is a constant. Range K is GFT B: Charge 5, lot XY,
not a constant and the fact that it is a variable range 4510, elevation 207, time 13.7
is taken into account in the construction of the range 7490, elevation 398, time 24.4
slant scale GFT. (3) Multiple-plot GFT setting:
20-5. Total Fuze Correction GFT B: Charge 5, lot XY,
a. A time registration or a high-burst regis- range 3500, elevation 151, time 10.0
tration will yield an adjusted, or "did hit" time. range 5600, elevation 261, time 16.6
If all conditions were standard and if there were range 8390, elevation 434, time 26.1
no variation in the function of time fuzes (no
manufacture's tolerance and no effects from b. One-Plot GFT Setting. Known corrections
handling and storage), the time corresponding from one registration (or one met plus VE com-
to the adjusted elevation (or elevation plus comp putation) are portrayed graphically on the GFT
site if the vertical interval exceeds 100 meters) in the form of a one-plot GFT setting. For the
one-plot GFT setting, the registration point (met
would be the adjusted time. But this is not the
case and registration is necessary. The time cor- checkpoint) must be selected so that the range
responding to the adjusted elevation is also to the registration point (met checkpoint) falls
known as the chart time. The correction neces- between the red numbered elevations on the ele-
sary to correct for the combined effects of non- vation scale. Transfers may be made to all ele-
standard conditions on fuze setting is called the vations within the red numbered elevations as
total fuze correction. described in paragraph 20-10.
b. The total fuze correction is equal to the (1) The one-plot GFT setting is placed on
adjusted time minus the fuze setting listed in the the GFT in the following manner:
firing tables corresponding to the adjusted ele- (a) Place the hairline over the GFT set-
vation (or elevation plus complementary angle ting range.
of site). The total fuze correction is determined (b) Place a black dot on the cursor over
to the nearest 0.1 and is a signed value. the adjusted elevation.
Example: Continuing the example in para- (c) Place a red dot on the cursor over
graph 20-3b, the adjusted time obtained was the adjusted time.
16.3. The fuze setting corresponding to the ad- (d) Slide the cursor so that the black dot
justed elevation of 245 is 16.6. The total fuze
is over the black dashed line (RG K line) at
correction is -0.3 (16.3 - 16.6). the right end of the scale.
(e) Construct the elevation gageline by
20-6. Application of Total Range and Total drawing on the cursor a fine black line over the
Fuze Corrections dot at the same angle as the dashed line. Extend
Use of total range and total fuze corrections as the elevation gageline from the top to the bottom
determined in paragraphs 20-3 and 20-5 is cov- of the cursor and label the gageline "EL."
ered in chapter 21. (f) Slide the cursor so that the red dot is

20-3
FM 6-40

over the black dashed line (FZ K line) at the (b) Place the hairline over the GFT set-
left end of the rule. ting range to one of the registration points or
(g) Construct the time gageline by draw- met checkpoints.
ing on the cursor a fine red line over the red dot (c) Place a black dot on the cursor over
at the same angle as the dashed line. Extend the the adjusted elevation and a red dot over the
time gageline from the top to the bottom of the adjusted time.
cursor and label the gageline "TI." (d) Repeat the steps in (b) and (c) above
(2) Data are read from a one-plot GFT set- for the other registration point or met check-
ting in the following manner: point.
(a) Place the hairline over the chart (e) Construct the elevation gageline by
range. drawing on the cursor a fine black line connect-
(b) Read the elevation under the eleva- ing the two black elevation dots. Extend the
tion gageline. elevation gageline from the top to the bottom of
(c) Read 100/R under the hairline. the cursor and label the gageline "EL."
(d) Read fork or drift under a visually (f) Construct the time gageline by draw-
simulated line parallel to the hairline and ing on the cursor a fine red line connecting the
through the intersection of the elevation gage- two red dots. Extend the time gageline from the
line and the elevation scale. top to the bottom of the cursor and label the
(e) For the M564 fuze, read the fuze gageline "TI."
setting under the time gageline. For VT fuze, (2) Data from the two-plot GFT setting
read the fuze setting under the simulated line gagelines are read in the same manner as those
((d) above) at the point where the line crosses from the one-plot GFT setting gageline (0,
the fuze setting scale. If the fuze setting for the fig 20-2).
VT fuze is not a whole number, use the next d. Multiple-Plot GFT Setting. If the situation
lower whole number. For example, if the num- permits determining corrections to three or more
ber is 25.8, use 25.0. points, a multiple-plot GFT setting can be con-
(f) Read the change in fuze setting for a structed. The multiple-plot GFT setting is even
10-meter change in height of burst under a visu- more accurate than the two-plot GFT setting
ally simulated line parallel to the hairline and and, like the two-plot GFT setting, can be used
through the intersection of the time gageline and for the full range of the GFT without regards
the fuze setting scale. to range transfer limits. The multiple-plot GFT
Example: Assume that the chart range to setting is constructed as follows: Assume that
the target is 7,120 meters. Use the one-plot GFT the gun direction computer M18 (FADAC) is
setting shown in the example in a (1) above. available and the GFT is available, and the GFT
Place the hairline over 7120 on the range scale is being used as a backup system. The FADAC
(O, fig 20-2) and read the following data: operator has obtained the following chart ranges
Elevation 393 mils and corresponding adjusted elevations and ad-
100/R -------------- 14mils
Fork -------------- 5Mils justed times:
Drift-------------------------------------7mils Range Elevation Time
Fuze setting ---- 25.0 2900 120 8.6
Change to fuze setting of a 10-meter change in 4300 185 13.1
height of burst---------------------------0.08 5700 255 17.8
c. Two-Plot GFT Setting. When corrections 7100 330 22.6
from two registrations, two met plus VE compu- 8500 414 27.8
tations, or a combination thereof are known, a (1) For each plot move the hairline over
two-plot GFT setting can be constructed. The the chart range and place a black dot on the
two-plot GFT setting is more accurate than the cursor over the corresponding elevation and a
one-plot GFT setting and can be used for the red dot over the corresponding time.
full range of the GFT without regard to range (2) Construct the elevation gageline by
transfer limits. drawing a series of fine black lines connecting
(1) The two-plot GFT setting is placed on the black dots. Construct the time gageline by
the GFT in the following manner: drawing a series of fine red lines connecting the
(a) Determine corrections in the lower red dots. The resulting elevation and time gage-
third and in the upper third of the ranges of lines are more accurate than those of either
the GFT for the charge. the one- or two-plot GFT setting.

20-4
 FM 6-40

Figure20-2. One-plot GFT 8etting.

(. Two-plot GFT Setting.

Figure20-2--Continued.

(. Multiple-Plot GFT Setting.

Figure20-2-Continued.

(3) Data from the multiple-plot GFT set- accurately reflect corrections for the nonregis-
ting gagelines are read in the same manner as tering batteries. However, in the absence of
those from the one- and two-plot GFT setting other registration data, it will provide the best
gagelines ((®), fig 20-2). firing data available. The FDC can improve the
accuracy of the corrections for the nonregister-
20-8. Selection of GFT Settings ing batteries by applying, to the common GFT
a. When only one battery of a battalion has setting the differences in shooting strength be-
registered, the GFT setting of that battery will tween base pieces.
be used by nonregistering batteries of the same b. If all batteries have registered with the
caliber. It is desirable, therefore, that the center same charge and this charge is to be used in a
battery conduct the registration unless it is mission, each computer uses the GFT setting es-
greatly echeloned in range from the flank batter- tablished by the registration of his battery.
ies, in which case the battery nearest the mean
range to the registration point should conduct 20-9. GFT Settings for More Than One Lot
the registration. If the batteries are widely sep- If the same charge has been used for registra-
arated in range or direction of fire to the regis- tion with more than one lot of ammunition, two
tration point, the common GFT setting will not GFT settings may be placed on the cursor. The

20-5
FM 6-40

gagelines may be marked with the lot designa- two or more plot points, the corrections may be
tion or color coded according to lot. Additional used for the full range limits of the GFT.
GFT settings are recorded and are placed on the 20-11. Care of the GFT
cursor only when needed. To prevent permanent scarring of the cursor and
to promote accuracy, FDC personnel must take
20-10. Transfer Limits-Range care when placing a GFT setting on the GFT.
Range and fuze corrections are valid within spe- Pencils with soft lead must be used for drawing
cified range transfer limits. gagelines. Further, gagelines drawn with colored
a. When the GFT setting is constructed from lead pencils must not be left on the cursor for
one plot point, the corrections may be used be- long periods of time, because colored lead tends
tween the red numbered elevations for the to penetrate the plastic and becomes extremely
charge. difficult to remove. It is to be emphasized that,
for accuracy, pencils sharpened to a fine point
b. When the GFT setting is constructed from must be used for drawing gagelines.

Section III. REGISTRATION DEFL ECTION CORRECTIONS

20-12. Adjusted Deflection
The correct deflection derived from a precision -4
registration or the deflection fired in a mean-
point-of-impact or high-burst registration is the
adjusted deflection only if the base piece is over
battery center. If the base piece is displaced
laterally from battery center, the correct deflec-
tion must be modified to compensate for the dis- o0 :1
placement so that the battery sheaf will be cen-
tered on the registration point. Using the lateral
displacement in meters and the GFT setting
(achieved) range, FDC personnel determine the
0 0-
amount of the correction to be applied to the
correct deflection by use of the mil relation or
the C and D scale of the GST. If the base piece 021
0 C
is to the right (left) of the battery center, the
displacement correction is to the right (left).
Example: Battery B has registered and has
determined a correct deflection of 3,252 mils. BTRY
RCENTER
The GFT setting range is 5,030 meters. The
base piece is 20-meters to the right of the bat- 30 METERS
tery center (fig 20-3). The correction for base
-__
- PIECE
piece displacement is right 4 mils (20/5.03, -----

GST). The adjusted deflection is 3,248 mils

20 METERS RIGHT
(3,252 -4).

20-13. Total Deflection Correction Displacement correction 20 METERS RIGHT Right 4 mils
The total deflection correction is the correction for deflection 5.030
that must be applied to the chart deflection to a Figure 20-3. Base piece displacement correction-deflection.
target in order to determine a deflection that
will hit the target. The adjusted deflection de- flection. If the adjusted deflection is greater
termined from a registration is the deflection (less) than the chart deflection, the correction is
that placed the mean burst center of the rounds plus (left) minus (right).
from all pieces in the battery at the registration Example: A registration has been completed
point or the mean-point-of-impact or high-burst on registration point 1. The adjusted deflection
location. The numerical value of the total deflec- is 3248. The chart deflection to registration point
tion correction for the registration point (mean- 1 is measured as 3,256 mils. The total deflection
point-of-impact or high-burst location) is equal correction for registration point 1 is minus
to the adjusted deflection minus the chart de- (right) 8 (3248-3256 = -(R)8).

20-6
 FM 6-40

20-14. Deflection Correction Scale constructed by the computer. The procedure used
a. The total deflection correction determined will depend on whether it is based on one-plot,
to a point is applicable only for the adjusted two-plot, or multiple-plot GFT settings.
elevation to that point. As the elevation is
changed, the resultant drift of the projectile (1) One-Plot GFT Setting.
will change correspondingly and a correction for (a) Deflection transfer limits for the
drift must be applied. one-plot GFT setting are applicable throughout
b. Drift is the departure of the projectile the elevations printed in red on the elevation
from a standard direction because of the com- scale of the GFT.
bined action of air resistance, projectile spin,
and gravity. Since all US cannons impart a right- (b) To construct the deflection correction
hand spin to the projectile, the drift is always scale, draw a line 4 to 5 inches long on a card
to the right. Drift is a function of time of flight, or sheet of paper, then draw short lines perpen-
and time of flight is a function of elevation plus dicular to the first line to represent the drift
complementary angle of site. For practical pur- changes throughout the transfer limits. These
poses, drift is considered a function of elevation. drift change lines are obtained from the GFT
c. As the elevation is increased, the projectile and are identified by the elevation printed in
will drift farther to the right; therefore, a left red, at which drift changes.
correction (the difference between the drift that I (c) Mark each drift change line with its
will occur at the adjusted elevation and the corresponding elevation and enter the adjusted
drift that will occur at the elevation to be fired) elevation in the drift change block that brackets
must be applied. As the elevation is decreased be- the adjusted elevation.
low the adjusted elevation, drift will be less;
therefore, the correction for its effect will be less. (d) Enter the total deflection correction
from the registration below the adjusted ele-
d. For convenience, a deflection correction vation.
scale is normally constructed in card form or on
a sheet of paper; however, it may also be con- (e) Since drift increases as elevation in-
structed on the GFT. Construction on the GFT creases, the total deflection correction will
is the least desirable method because constant change in increments of left 1 mil at each great-
erasures on the GFT cause undue wear on the er elevation where drift changes. Conversely, as
ballistic scales. the elevation decreases the total deflection cor-
rection will change in increments of right 1 mil.
e. A separate deflection correction scale is
constructed for each battery that has registered. The total deflection corrections are recorded on
the scale in each drift block.
When only one battery has registered, the de-
flection correction scale based on the GFT set-
ting of the registering battery is used by all Example: Assume that a registration was
batteries of the same caliber. conducted with charge 5, M3 propellant, that
the adjusted elevation was 330, and that the
20-15. Construction of the Deflection Correc- total deflection correction was L8. The deflection
tion Scale. correction scale is constructed in card form as
a. Normally, the deflection correction scale is follows:

200 212 263 310 (330) 354 395 433 470 500
1
I ii i i
L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 Lll L12 I

(f) The deflection correction scale is con- same general direction (within 200 mils), a de-
structed on the GFT by recording the total de- flection correction graph that is valid for the
flection correction in each drift block (fig 20-4). full range of the charge is constructed. Each
(2) Two-plot GFT setting. total deflection correction is plotted on the
(a) When two total deflection corrections graph opposite the appropriate adjusted eleva-
are determined from two registrations, or two tion and a straight line is drawn through the
met plus VE computations, or from one registra- two points and extended to the limits of the ele-
tion and one met plus VE computation for the vation scale. Figure 20-5 illustrates a deflection

20-7
FM 6-40

Figure20-4. Deflection correction scale on the GFT.

correction graph constructed from the following tion correction (R4). The result is the position
adjusted data for charge 5, M3 propellant. deflection correction.
Elevation 190-total deflection correc- Position deflection
tion ------ R4 correction --------- R2 (R4 - R2).
Elevation 438-total deflection correc- 3. Assume that a met plus VE solution
tion ------ L6 to a target in the same direction as the regis-
(b) When corrections are based on one tration point but at a greater range resulted in
registration and one met plus VE solution, the the following data:
possibility exists that a position deflection cor- Adjusted elevation 358
rection is included in the total deflection correc- Met deflection
tion to the registration point. This position de- correction L8
flection correction is isolated and then applied 4. To obtain the total deflection cor-
to the met deflection correction. rection at elevation 358, add the position deflec-
1. Assume that a registration and a tion correction, which is considered a constant,
concurrent met resulted in the following data: to the met deflection correction to the target
Adjusted elevation 190 (L8 + R2 = L6).
Total deflection 5. Using the two total deflection correc-
correction -.. ...... R4 tions (R4 and L6), follow the steps outlined for
Met deflection the two-plot deflection correction graph.
correction R2 (3) Multiple-plot GFT setting. When three
2. To isolate the position deflection cor- or more total deflection corrections are deter-
rection, subtract the met deflection correction to mined, each total deflection correction will be
the registration point (R2) from the total deflec- plotted on a deflection correction graph (as de-
scribed in (2) above) at the corresponding ad-
justed elevation. A series of straight lines is used
to connect all the total deflection corrections.
The lines at the lowest and highest elevations
are extended to the limits of the elevation scale.
b. After the deflection correction scale or
graph has been constructed, the total deflec-
tion correction for any point within transfer
limits can be determined by entering the scale
or graph with the elevation to a point and ex-
tracting that total deflection correction corres-
ponding to that elevation. This correction is ap-
plied to the chart deflection and the sum is the
piece deflection.
100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700
c. An alternate method of determining the
E L E VAT I ON
total deflection correction to be used for a
Figure 20-5. Two-plot deflection correction graph. given mission is by use of the GFT deflection

20-8
 FM 6-40

correction. (Use the data from the example fol- elevation to be fired is R9. Drift correction L9
lowing a (1) (e) above). plus the GFT deflection correction L2 equals a
(1) Determine the drift block in which the total deflection correction of Lii
adjusted elevation is located (el 330, drift block
6). The number 6 represents the number of mils 20-16. Transfer Limits-Deflection
the projectile will drift to the right between ele- a. Deflection corrections determined by regis-
vations 310 through 354. It is also the number tration or met plus VE computation are valid
of mils necessary to correct for drift. within specified deflection transfer limits.
(2) Subtract the drift correction (L6) (1) When the GFT setting range is 10,000
from the total deflection correction (L8). The dif- meters or less, deflection corrections are valid
ference is the GFT deflection correction (L2). between 400 mils left and 400 mils right of the
The GFT deflection correction can then be re- battery-registration point line.
corded with the GFT setting and placed on the (2) When the GFT range is greater than
cursor as a ready reference. 10,000 meters, deflection corrections are valid
(3) To use the GFT deflection correction, between 4000 meters left and 4000 meters right
determine the drift for the elevation to be fired of the battery-registration point line.
and add the drift correction to the GFT deflec- b. Deflection corrections may be used through-
tion correction. The sum is the total deflection out 6,400 mils if valid meteorological data have
correction to be used. been determined and applied in the form of an
Example: Using the data above, assume 8-directional met. The 8-directional met tech-
that a mission is to be fired and the drift for the nique is described in paragraph 21-16.

Section IV. REPLOTTING TARGETS

20-17. General in altitude; therefore, the site fired is often not
a. Fire-for-effect chart data, particularly alti- the true site to the target. Any error in site will
tude (site), sometimes are not precise. Within be reflected as a range error on the firing chart.
the battalion, fire-for-effect data, if used again If the true site to the target is determined and
without changing the ammunition lot, usually then subtracted from the quadrant elevation
will cause effective fire to fall on the target. How- used in fire-for-effect, the resulting elevation can
ever, if the target location is to be sent outside be used to determine the true chart range to
the battalion, the coordinates and altitude sent the target. FDC personnel, using a map, deter-
must reflect the actual ground location as ac- mine true site by successive approximation.
curately as possible. These may be determined
by a process known as replot. A valid GFT set- b. Since the total deflection correction may
ting for the time at which the target was fired not have been applied during the mission, or. if
is required for accurately replotting a target. used, may not have been the most valid, a replot
The degree to which the target data determined deflection must be determined that will reflect
by replot correspond to the actual ground loca- the actual chart deflection to the target. The re-
tion of the target depends on the accuracy of plot deflection will be the fire-for-effect deflection
the corrections applied-the more accurate the to the final pin location minus the total deflec-
corrections, the more accurate the target data. tion correction from the deflection correction
b. FDC personnel replot a target only when scale that corresponds to the fire-for-effect ele-
the observer has requested or the S3 has directed vation to the final pin location (g below).
that the target be recorded. Replot data consist c. The adjusting battery computer announces
of the grid and altitude of the target, the type the replot deflection and range to the HCO. The
of fuze fired in effect, and the target number. replot deflection is determined as in b above
The procedure used for determining replot data and the replot range is the range read under
differs for each type of fuze used in fire for ef- the hairline when the elevation gageline is placed
fect. over the elevation corresponding to the final pin
location. The HCO polar plots the target from
20-18. Point Detonating Fuze (Quick the battery center of the adjusting battery at
and Delay) the range and deflection announced by the com-
a. During the adjustment of point-detonating puter, and determines and announces the grid
fuze, the observer seldom corrects for difference to the VCO. The VCO plots the grid and deter-

20-9
FM 6-40

mines the map altitude at the replotted location. f. When the site announced by the VCO agrees
Using this altitude and the replot range last with, or within 1 mil of, the previous site com-
announced by the computer, the VCO computes puted, the computer uses the final site to com-
the first apparent site and announces this site pute the final replot elevation.
to the computer. g. The computer announces the final replot
d. If the site announced by the VCO does not range based on the final elevation. The HCO
agree within 1 mil of the site fired, the computer polar plots the target at the deflection and range
subtracts the new site from the quadrant eleva- announced by the computer. He then announces
tion and uses the resulting elevation to deter- to the computer the grid to be recorded. The
mine a new replot range. The replot deflection VCO announces the altitude used to determine
remains the same. the final site. The computer records on the com-
e. The HCO polar plots the new data and an- puter's record the grid, altitude, fuze used in
nounces the grid to the vertical control operator. fire for effect, and target number.
The VCO plots these grid coordinates and deter-
mines the map altitude of the replotted location. Example: The GFT setting of Battery A
This procedure, referred to as successive approxi- (155-mm howitzer M109) is GFT A: Charge 4,
mation, is repeated until the site announced lot ZT, range 5270, elevation 350. The total de-
by the VCO agrees within 1 mil of the site pre- flection correction from registration is left 8.
viously computed. The altitude of the battery is 405 meters.

Fire-for-effect data: Target AF7601 (charge 4, fuze quick).

D efl e ctio n fi red ------ ----------------------------
------------------- 3,214 mils
3,206 mils
C h a r t d e fl e ction ---
------ ------------
------------------ -----
-------------
Quadrant fired . . . . . . . . . . . 373 mils
Site initially computed -11 mils
Elevation corresponding to final pin location (373 - (-11)) 384 mils
Computer to HCO:
Replot deflection (fire-for-effect deflection minus total deflection correc-
tion L9) 3,205 mils
Replot range (range corresponding to elevation 384) 5,630 meters
The HCO polar plots deflection 3205 and range 5630. He reads and
announces the grid 43713421 to the VCO. The VCO plots the grid
and determines the altitude of the point to be 366 meters
The VCO computes the first apparent site and announces it to the
computer (vertical interval -39 meters, range 5630) -8 mils
The computer determines the second apparent elevation (373 - (-8)) 381 mils
Computer to HCO:
Replot deflection 3,205 mils
Replot range (range corresponding to elevation 381) 5,600 meters
The HCO polar plots, these data and announces grid 43743417 to the
VCO. The VCO plots the grid and determines the altitude of this
point to be 363 meters
The VCO computes the second apparent site and announces it to the
computer (vertical interval -42 meters, range 5600) -9 mils
Site agrees within 1 mil of last site computed. The computer determines
the final replot elevation (373 - (-9)) 382 mils
Computer to HCO:
Replot deflection 3,205 mils
Replot range (range corresponding to elevation 382) 5,610 meters
The HCO polar plots these data and announces replot grid 43733416
to the computer. The VCO announces the altitude used to determine
final site (-9 mils)" 363 meters
Replot data are:
Grid 43733416, altitude 363, fuze quick, target AF7601.

20-19. Fuze VT tion are the quadrant elevation and site used in
The procedure for replotting a target attacked fire for effect minus the height-of-burst correc-
with VT fuze is the same as that for replotting tion that was fired.
a target attacked with point-detonating fuze 20-20. Fuze Time
(para 20-18) except that the quadrant eleva- a. The procedure for replotting a target at-
tion and -site used in the successive approxima- tacked with fuze time is based on the assumption

20-10
 FM 6-40

that the observer adjusted the height of burst to grid 43863427. The computer records the coor-
20 meters and, thus, that the final fuze setting dinates and determines the ground site as fol-
is accurate. Consequently, when the time gage- lows:
line is over the fire-for-effect time, the range Quadrant elevation 307
read under the hairline is assumed to be the Minus correct elevation ..... 292
correct range and the elevation read under the Total site +15
elevation gageline is assumed to be the correct 100/R at replot range is 22 mils. Therefore
elevation. Therefore, no successive approxima- 20/R is 4 mils.
tion is required. To obtain replot data, the com- Total site +15
puter places the time gageline over the fire-for- Minus 20/R -(+4)
effect time, reads 100/R and the range under
the hairline, and reads the elevation under the Ground site - +11
elevation gageline. Computer to VCO: Site +11.
b. The computer announces to the HCO the The VCO, using the GST, ground site, replot
replot deflection (FFE deflection minus total de- range, and altitude of the battery, determines
flection correction) and the range just deter- the target altitude and announces it to the com-
mined (replot range). To determine total site, puter:
the computer subtracts the correct elevation just Vertical
determined from the fire-for-effect quadrant ele- interval + 46 meters (+11 x 4.59)
vation. This total site is the algebraic sum of Plus battery
ground site and 20/R. The computer determines altitude - - 405 meters
ground site by subtracting the 20/R correspond- Target altitude - 451 meters
ing to the replot range from total site. He then Replot data are: grid 43863427, altitude 451, fuze
announces ground site to the VCO. time, target AF7602.
c. The HCO announces to the computer the
replot grid of the plotted pin location. Using the 20-21. Replotting Targets with Refinement
GST, the ground site announced by the com- Data
puter, and the replot range, the VCO determines a. Point-Detonating Fuze. When a mission
the vertical interval. He then algebraically adds fired with point-detonating fuze is ended with
the VI to the battery altitude and announces the refinement data, the corrections are plotted on
sum to the computer as the target altitude. the firing chart and new chart data are deter-
Example: The GFT setting of Battery A mined. A new FFE deflection and QE are deter-
(155-mm howitzer battalion (M109)) is: mined and replot is performed as outlined in
GFT A: Charge 4, lot ZT, range 5270, ele- paragraph 20-18.
vation 350, time 19.9 deflection correction L7. b. Proximity Fuze. The procedure for re-
The altitude of the battery is 405 meters. plotting a target fired with proximity fuze
Fire-for-effect data: Target AF7602 (Charge when refinement data are announced is the same
4, fuze time) as that described for a target fired with point-
Deflection fired-3,218 mils detonating fuze except that the quadrant eleva-
Chart deflection-------------3,211 mils tion used in the successive approximation is the
Quadrant fired ------------- 307 mils quadrant elevation determined to the final pin
Fire-for-effect time ---------- 16.8 location minus the height-of-burst correction
The computer places the time gageline over the (20/R) that was fired.
fire-for-effect time and reads the followingdata c. Mechanical Time fuze. The procedure for
under the hairline: range = 4,590 meters, 100/R
replotting a target fired with mechanical time
= 22 mils. Under the elevation gageline the
computer determines the elevation to be 292 mils fuze when refinement data are announced de-
pends on the type(s) of correction(s) included
and the total deflection correction corresponding
in the refinement data.
to elevation 292 to be L7:•
(1) Range and/or deviation. If the refine-
Computer to HCO:
ment data include a correction for range or de-
Replot
viation or corrections for both range and devia-
deflection-- 3,211 mils (3218 - L7)
tion, but no correction for height of burst, it
Replot range __ 4,590 meters
must be assumed that the observer adjusted the
The HCO polar plots these data and announces height of burst to 20 meters. The horizontal con-
the grid of the pin location to the computer: trol operator plots the corrections on the firing

20-11
FM 6-40

chart and determines new firing data. The new (3) Height of burst. If the refinement data
deflection is the replot deflection. The computer include a correction for height of burst only, it
determines a new fuze setting and a new quad- must be assumed that range and deviation are
rant elevation based on the new range. He ap- correct but that the height of burst is other than
plies the total fuze setting correction (deter- 20 meters. For example, the observer sends UP
mined during the adjustment) to the new fuze 10, RECORD AS TARGET, END OF MISSION.
setting to determine the fuze setting that would The computer applie the height-of-burst cor-
be used if the data were to be fired. With the rection (up 10) to the last site fired, using the
fuze setting, deflection and quadrant elevation 100/R factor, to determine the quadrant to fire.
to fire, the target is replotted as outlined in para- The target is then replotted in the normal man-
graph 20-20. ner.
(2) Range and/or deviation and height of
burst. If the refinement data include a correction 20-22. Use of Corrections
a. Valid corrections for nonstandard condi-
for range or deviation (or corrections for both
range and deviation) and a correction for height- tions must be available if replot is to be con-
of-burst, FDC personnel initially ignore the ducted. These corrections must be valid for the
height-of-burst correction. If the height-of-burst time at which the target to be replotted was
correction were considered in determining a new fired upon. These corrections are not necessarily
fuze setting, an error would be introduced into those that were used to fire on the target, since
the replot location by the , FS used. For example, an outdated GFT setting or no GFT setting at
the observer sends LEFT 20, ADD 30, DOWN all may have been used at that time. However, if
10, RECORD AS TARGET, END OF MISSION. valid corrections for the time of firing are deter-
FDC personnel plot the range and deviation cor- mined after firing, they are used in replotting
rections (ignoring the height-of-burst correc- the target.
tion) and determine the deflection, quadrant ele- b. Similarly, if replot is to be conducted and
vation, and fuze setting as described in (1) the mission was fired with an outdated total de-
above. It is assumed that these data will produce flection correction or with no total deflection cor-
a mean burst location of range correct, line, and rection, then the valid total deflection correction
a height of burst of 30 meters. The computer for the time of firing must be available. It is the
now applies the height-of-burst correction (down total deflection correction corresponding to the
10) to the last site fired, using the 100/R factor, fire-for-effect elevation from the mission and is
and applies the new total site to the refinement determined from the deflection correction scale.
data elevation to determine the QE to fire. With The total deflection correction is subtracted from
the fuze setting, quadrant elevation, and deflec- the fire-for-effect piece deflection. The result is
tion to fire, the target is replotted as outlined in the chart deflection and is used as the replot de-
paragraph 20-20. flection.

20-12
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 21
METEOROLOGICAL CORRECTIONS AND VELOCITY ERROR

Section I. THE METEOROLOGICAL MESSAGE

21-1. General this case, the met station is located in the Northern
Among the conditions that affect a projectile Hemisphere between 0' and 900 west longitude.
after it leaves the tube is the state of the at- The key to the octant designation code is as fol-
mosphere through which the projectile passes. lows:
The three properties of the atmosphere that the
Code
United States field artillery units consider in number Octant
gunnery computations are wind (direction and 0 North latitude, 00 to 900 west longitude
°
speed), air temperature, and air density. The 1 North latitude, 90 to 1800 west longitude
meteorological (Met) message contains current 2 North latitude, 1800 to 900 east longitude
information about atmospheric conditions. 3 North latitude, 90' to 00 east longitude
4 Not used
5 South latitude, 00 to 900 west longitude
21-2. Types of Meteorological Messages 6 South latitude, 900 to 1800 west longitude
a. Met messages provided for the field artil- 7 South latitude, 1800 to 900 east longitude
lery are the Ballistic Met message, used for the 8 South latitude, 900 to 00 east longitude
manual computation of met corrections, and the 9 Used for coded identification
computer met message, used with FADAC. This (b) Group 2. Group 2 (512018) desig-
chapter will deal only with the ballistic met mes- nates the center of the area in which the met
sage. message is valid. This may be expressed in tens,
units, and tenths of degrees of latitude and longi-
b. Two types of ballistic met messages are
provided for the artillery. The type 2 message tude (512 = 51.21 = 51 ° 12' north latitude,
is used with air defense artillery. The type 3 and 018 = 01.8' = 01' 48' west longitude).
message is used with field artillery cannon and When octant code 9 is used in group 1, the six
free rockets, firing on surface targets, and is digits or letters represent the coded location of
the meteorological unit that produced the met
the type with which the field artillery is concerned.
message.
(c) Group 3. The first two digits in
21-3. Ballistic Met Message
a. The data contained in cannon artillery fir- group 3 (07) represent the day of the month on
ing tables are based on the International Civil which the message becomes valid. The next three
Aviation Organization (ICAO) atmospheric digits (095) indicate the hour at which the met
structure. The firing tables are arranged in a se- message becomes valid in tens, units, and tenths
quence and a format that coincide with the se- of hours (0930). The hours refers to Greenwich
mean time. (GMT). In a ballistic met message
quence and format of the ballistic met message.
produced by some allied nations, the last digit in
b. The met message is divided into an introduc- group 3 indicates the number of hours the message
tion and a body (fig 21-1). will remain valid. A 1 indicates 1 hour; a 2, 2
(1) The introduction to the met message hour; and so on through 8. A 9 represents 12
consists of four six-character groups. hours. US met stations do not attempt to predict
(a) Group 1. The first three letters the number of hours a met message will remain
(MET) in group 1 designate the transmission valid. The last digit in group 3 of a met message
as a met message. The fourth letter (B) indi- produced by the US met station is always a 0.
cates that it is a ballistic met message. The In combat, US forces normally receive met data
first digit (3) indicates that it is a type 3 met on a 2-hour schedule.
message. The last digit (0) designates the octant (d) Group 4. The first three digits of
of the earth in which the met station is located. In group 4 (049) indicate the altitude of the met

21-1
 FM 6-40

station meteorological datum plane (MDP) above

*mean sea level in tens of meters (490 meters).
INTRODUCTION
The next three digits (982) indicate the at- IGROUP I-- -METB3O 512018- --- GROUP 21
mospheric pressure at the MDP, expressed as a -- GROUP 4]
IGROUP 31-- -070950 049982-
percentage (to the nearest 0.1 percent) (98.2
percent) of the ICAO standard atmospheric
pressure at mean sea level. When the value is
BODY
100 percent or greater, the initial digit 1 is omit- 002618 009976
ted, e.g., 101.6 percent would be expressed as 016 012618 009978
in the met message. 022720 008978
(2) The body of the met message consists 032924 004981
of up to 16 met message lines (00 through 15) 042927 002982
053129 004987
and each line consists of two six-digit groups.
Each line contains the ballistic weather data for
a particular altitude zone. Ballistic data are Figure 21-1. The ballastic met message.
weighted averages of the conditions that exist
from the surface up through the altitude zone the ICAO standard density. Thus, air density is
indicated by the line number. 98.1 percent. If the value is 100 percent or
(a) The first two digits of the first group greater, the initial digit 1 is omitted.
constitute the met message line number which
identifies the altitude zone. The lines are num- 21-4. Selection of Meteorological Message
bered in sequence from 00 (surface conditions) Line
One of the keys to the proper solution of the met
through 15 (18,000 meters). Line number 03 is message is the selection of the proper line of
used as an example in (b) through (e) below.
the message. The proper line is that for the alti-
(b) The next two digits in this group tude closest to the summit of the trajectory.
(29) indicate the direction from which the bal- a. The maximum ordinate (height of the sum-
listic wind is blowing expressed as hundreds of mit of the trajectory above the gun) is a func-
mils (2900) true azimuth. tion of quadrant elevation and muzzle velocity
(c) The last two digits in this group (24) (charge). The proper line number can be de-
indicate the speed of the ballistic wind expressed termined from the Line Numbers of Meteorologi-
in knots. cal Message table (table A) for the appropriate
(d) The first three digits of the second charge. The table is entered with the adjusted
group (004) indicate the ballistic air tempera- quadrant elevation for the point for which the
ture expressed as a percentage (to the nearest met message is to be solved.
0.1 percent) of the ICAO standard temperature. b. If a met message is being solved prior to
The initial digit 1 is omitted when the value is firing, no adjusted quadrant elevation is known
100 percent or greater. Thus, 004 indicates an and the line number is determined from the
air temperature of 100.4 percent. Complementary Range Line Number table (table
(e) The last three digits of this group B) for the appropriate charge. This table is en-
(981) indicate the ballistic air density expressed tered at the chart range and height of target
as a percentage (to the nearest 0.1 percent) of above gun, both to the nearest 100 meters.

Section II. POSITION VELOCITY ERROR

21-5. General (1) Ballistic wind (extracted from the met

a. The best way to determine corrections is message).
by registration. Corrections determined from a (2) Ballistic air temperature (extracted
registration compensate for the combined effects from the met message).
of all nonstandard conditions that existed at the (3) Ballistic air density (extracted from
time of the registration. A portion of the regis- the met message).
tration corrections compensate for nonstandard (4) Weight of projectile (received from
conditions that can be determined at the time the firing battery).
the registration is being fired. The nonstandard (5) Drift (extracted from the firing tab-
conditions that can be determined are- les).
21-2
 FM 6-40

(6) Propellant temperature (measured at the rection by the muzzle velocity unit correction,
gun position). which is determined from the Ground Data table
(7) Rotation of the earth (extracted from (table F). The sign of the AV range correction is
the firing tables). always opposite the sign of the AV. If the AV
b. Corrections for the nonstandard conditions range correction is plus, extract the unit correc-
listed in a above can be computed by use of the tion from the Decrease column. If the AV range
firing tables. correction is minus, extract the unit correction
c. There are ballistic variations from firing from the Increase column.
table standards that cannot be measured (for e. Compute the velocity error in meters per
example, tube wear, moisture content of the pro- second by algebraically subtracting the change W
pellant and shell surface finish). Corrections for muzzle velocity for propellant temperature (para
these unknown variations are included in the 21-8) from AV (d above).
corrections determined from a registration. For
convenience, the total of the unknown varia- 21-7. Entry Range
a. The range (entry range) at which to ex-
tions are grouped together and termed position
tract unit corrections from the firing tables must
velocity error (position VE). The variations that
be determined. The entry range is the sum of
compose position VE include-
the chart range to the point for which the met
(1) Factors affecting developed muzzle velo-
message is being solved and the complemen-
city.
tary range. Complementary range is the range
(2) Factors affecting the ballistic coefficient
correction corresponding to the complementary
of the projectile.
angle of site and is determined from the firing
(3) Mechanical limitations and small errors
tables. To determine complementary range, en-
in survey, charts, FDC equipment, met, and fire
ter the Complementary Range Line Number table
control instruments.
(table B) with the chart range to the nearest
d. Position VE is a measure of weapon and
100 meters and the height of target above the
ammunition performance expressed in terms of
meters per second (m/s). gun to the nearest meters. Interpolation for
height of target above the gun may be neces-
21-6. Determination of Position Velocity Error sary.
The position velocity error can be determined Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 5
only when the observations upon which the met GB (M3 propellant), chart range 7020, altitude
message is based are concurrent with a regis- of battery, 237, altitude of target 500. There is
tration. The procedure for determining position no base piece displacement for range.
VE is accomplished by the following steps: Height of target above gun is + 263 meters.
a. Determine the total range correction from Enter table B at range 7000 and height of tar-
the registration as described in paragraph 20-3. get above gun + 263.
Note. The total range correction may also be computed Height of target above gun
as follows: Subtract the entry range (para 21-7) (to the 7000 +200 (+263) +300
nearest meter) from the range corresponding to the 54 (72.3) 83
adjusted elevation plus complementary angle of site. Complementary range is +72 meters. En-
b. Compute the met range correction as de- try range is 7092 (7020 + 72). For entry into
scribed in paragraph 21-8. For convenience, cor- tables F, H, and I, the nearest listed value to
rections for nonstandard projectile weight and entry range is used.
rotation of the earth together with corrections b. If a met is being solved and speed of com-
for ballistic range wind, air temperature, and putation is of primary consideration, it may not
air density are considered in the met range cor- be necessary to mathematically interpolate for
rections. comp range. Instead, it may only be necessary to
c. Determine the AV range correction by alge- visually interpolate table B in order to deter-
braically subtracting the range correction from mine the value of entry range with which to
the total range correction. The symbol '%V" is enter the tables. However, care must be used if
used to represent the total variation from stand- this visual interpolation is used in this table.
ard muzzle velocity. In the present context, z V is
the sum of YE and the change to muzzle velocity 21-8. Computation of Meteorological Cor-
due to change in propellant temperature. rections
d. Convert the AV range correction to AV in Met range and deflection corrections are com-
meters per second by dividing the zV range cor- puted concurrently. Firing table data are based

21-3
FM 6-40

on an assumed standard trajectory that exists d. Determine the complementary range and
under prescribed standard conditions of weather enter it on the form. Add the complementary
and materiel. Unit corrections for nonstandard range to the chart range (achieved range) to
conditions are contained in the firing tables. If determine the entry range (para 21-7). Enter
the variation between an existing condition and the entry range on the form.
the assumed standard condition has been meas- e. Since grid convergence seldom exceeds 50
ured, the FDC can determine a correction for mils and the ballistic wind is measured to the
that variation by multiplying the variation by nearest 100 mils, the true azimuth given in the
the appropriate unit correction. The Met Data met message is considered to be the grid azi-
Correction Sheet (DA Form 4200) is used as an muth-it requires no conversion. Compute the
aid in computing met corrections. (DA Form chart direction of the wind by subtracting the
4200 is available through normal AG publica- direction of fire from the direction of the ballis-
tion supply channels.) An example of the solu- tic wind. Enter the Wind Components table
tion of a met message and the use of the met (table C) with the chart direction of the wind
data correction sheet (fig 21-2) is shown be- and determine the components of a 1-knot wind.
low. Enter the components on the form.
Example: Assume that a 155-mm howitzer f. Compute the range wind and crosswind
M109 battery has registered and the following (to the nearest knot) and enter them in the
information is available: appropriate spaces.
Adjusted data to registrationpoint:
Elevation 368 mils g. Determine the difference in altitude be-
Quadrant elevation 374 mils tween the meteorological datum plane (MDP)
Deflection .-------........ 3,209 mils and the battery (A h). Enter the Temperature
Time 24.6 and Density Corrections table (table D) with
Chart data to registrationpoint:
A h (to the nearest 10 meters) to determine the
Range --------------------- 7,230 m eters
Deflection .......... 3,220 mils corrections to air temperature and density. Ap-
Site .... + 6 mils ply the corrections and enter the corrected tem-
Additional information: perature and density in the appropriate blocks.
Latitude of battery 340 N
Altitude of battery
h. Enter the Propellant Temperature table
321 meters
Altitude of registration (table E) with propellant temperature to the
point 358 meters nearest degree to determine the change to muzzle
Azimuth to registration velocity (to the nearest 0.1 meter per second).
point 1,820 mils (nearest mil) Enter the muzzle velocity change (to be used later
Weight of projectile 5 squares in determination of VE) on the form.
Propellant temperature 620 F
Charge 5 GB (M3 propellant) i. Compute the variations from standard for
Lot -- XY range wind, temperature, density, and projec-
Concurrent met message: tile weight and enter them on the form.
METB31 344983
120950 030031 j. Enter the Ground Data table (table F) at
004717 021016 entry range (d above) rounded to nearest 100
014817 024018 meters and extract the unit corrections for drift,
025118 029019 crosswind, muzzle velocity (extract both fac-
035120 031021
tors), range wind, air temperature, air density,
045221 033023
055220 033022 projectile weight. Enter the unit corrections in
a. Enter all known data in the proper spaces the appropriate spaces on the form.
on the form, i.e., charge, adjusted quadrant ele- k. Determine the rotation corrections to range
vation, chart range (achieved range) to the (table H) and azimuth (table I) and enter the
nearest 10 meters, altitude of battery, height of corrections on the form. Rotation tables (H and
target above gun, latitude to the nearest 100, I) are entered at entry range to the nearest
direction of fire to the nearest 100 mils, propel- listed range, azimuth of fire (expressed to the
lant temperature, and weight of projectile. nearest 1 mul) to the nearest listed value, and
b. Enter data from the introduction to the latitude to the nearest 100. If the azimuth of
met message. fire (nearest mil) is exactly halfway between
c. Determine the proper met message line listed values, use the higher entry argument. For
number (para 21-4). Enter data from proper example: if the direction of fire is exactly 1300
met message line on the form. mils, enter table H at azimuth 1400.

21-4
 FM 6-40

#ET DATA CORRECTION SHEET

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; proponent agency is TRADOC.

I BATTERY DATA MET MESSAGE

,;.l;hADJDE - .... 0 !......... I .... .... AREA/
CARGE ASJ OE CHARTRG LAIAE YEESSAGE
....
OCTARTAR/RI

73,Y 7.3o 3oaN DAE TB2 1I 311 ?8.3

DAE TIME
ALTOFBTRY(,0M) 20 I2 0930 ALT MOP-
300 PRESSARE
109-l
LIME NO. WINDSIR
ALTOFMOP300 -03 0 WINSSPEEDAIR TEMP
'2 103A1t2.. AIR DENSITT
-- n,30/2 0l10
I
0+
/03,1 I0,2
/ 0+
+20 A N CORRECTION 0
ALT OF TARGETmeter)
(nearest

358
CORRCTE VAL..
CORRECTED.V.L.E.
.0
101I,9
HEIGHTOF BURST
ABOVETARGET

ALTOF WORRY
t
.... meer)

irou Dr
ALT OF ST~RY(nerest

HEIGHT OF TARGET RG
COUP 0 CHARTRG ENTRY RG
I
(xloS) ABOVEGUN(m)
41o
"i,,
II 12 mtrN
,,,,V14I
1 07!!)ZL1%
IPr ,
WIND COMPONENTSAND DEFLECTION
WHEN
DIRECTION
OF WINDIS 6400
LESS
THAN.........DTr
.I OF Co-r RII
DIRECTION
OFWINO 00M tiO F Corrt L q

c?,0)
OF FIRE
.DIRECTION
'Pss
IC OF"C,R,. R 0
OTI
RooR
. 0.Q
CHCORR
L 0.
CROSS
WIND OT S U....... CROSSWINO
WIND [SPEED 2 0 XCOMPR-L.LL... ..- GRITCORR CORR R 0. 7
RANGE INS
.WIN S ._
E,
"_
. .
-_COMP9 . 9 AS o_
MET SEFL
.KNOTSCORR
.1
0R 9.
METJANGE CORRECTION

KNOWN STANDARD VARIATIONS

FROM UNIT PLUS
VALUES VALUES STANDARD CORRECTION L MINUS

RANGEWIND 0 20 I -0. 2o.0

'RTEP /o10.10 D1 3.1 - 3. 14.
AIRDENSITY .oo. 1.9 +13.9
PROJWEIGHT 5E4 .0
ROTATION 5 x 0.87 2.
52.4 295.
52.A
M2.O
COMPUTATION OF VE

P-2.3 s3 METEA TOTAL

____RANGE
CORRECTION 3.o-d
CHANGETO MV 0MET RANGE
TM *F
ow FORPROPTEMP -0 M s Z CORRECTION -

-2. 7 M/SICORR CIRI~ CORRECTION f5

CORRECTION
OLD VE + NEWVE 2=AGV /
(

TI Z# VARIATION UNIT
MET FUZE CORRECTION
if
STANDARD
FROM CORRECTION PLUS MINUS
/9
, 2.7 0.1oo
0-0.o3)r
.. NG... ezo +0.0/a 0_230,36S3,T.''1.6
0. 260
R

AIREGT
o
I
. ,~ +0.0
-0.0(5
0415
0.028 2413
J.-3 0,•, 3

PRO WEIGH. 1. 0 - O .O 5.O , TOTALFUZE 0 .3

065 _CORRECTION
0,3?5 o. 193 ..... + .3.
035 0.1 93METFAZE
1 93 CORCIN
+0.40
..
FZE
CORRECTION
TOTALFUZE "

MET FAZECORR I. r CORRECTION

OLD FZ CORR +NEWFZ CORR +2AVG FZ CORR

TARGETNO. BATTERY DATE/TIM
F

hAFOMA'fll RELAE D FR 01/2AR 0,.WHCH OSOLTE

'IS

DAI 1"JAN 74 4200

Figure 21-2. Solution of the met message (concurrent
met).

21-5
FM 6-40

1. Compute the crosswind correction and then (-3.8) + (-3.2)

add rotation correction for azimuth, dirft cor. (2)
rection, and crosswind correction to determine V9 determined at 1400 -4.5 m/s
the met deflection correction. Average VE to be used after 1400 4.0
m. Enter the Fuze Setting Factors tble nm/s
S (-:4.5) + (-3.5)
(table J) at the chart time to the nearest liste4i
value. (Chart time is the time corresponding to (2)
the adjusted elevation and is, read under the.
hairline on the GFT.) For example, the time b. A position VE is considered valid only for
the position, weapon, charge, and propellant for
corresponding to adjusted elevation 368 m'ls is
which it was determined. When a unit has dis-
24.3. Enter table J with a value of 24 and ex-
placed and cannot register immediately, the aver-
tract the unit corrections for muzzle velocity
age VE from the previous position may be used
(extract both values), range wind, air temper-
but transfers may not be accurate. Where posi-
ature, air density, and projectile weight. Enter
tion VE for the new position has been deter-
the unit corrections in the appropriate spaces
mined, it is used while the unit is in that posi-
on the form. (The procedure for determining
tion. It is also averaged with VE's from pre-
the met fuze correction is explained in para-
vious positions for use in a future position when
graph 21-10.)
registration is not possible.
n. Determine the met range correction as fol-
lows:
(1) Multiply the variations from standard 21-10. Cemputation of Meteorological Fuze
by the unit corrections and enter the results un- Correction
a. The fuze setting corresponding to the ad-
der the column headed Plus or Minus, whichever justed elevation plus complementary angle of
is appropriate. The sign of each range correc- site approximates the correct fuze setting. In
tion is the same as the sign of the corresponding low-angle fire, comp site usually is negligible and
unit correction.
has little effect on fuze setting. For this reason,
(2) Add the values in each column. Find comp site normally is considered only for nuclear
the difference between the two columns (Plus fires or for firing large vertical angles or ex-
and Minus) and round off to the nearest meter; treme ranges. Since, under nonstandard condi-
the result is the met range correction. tions, fuze setting varies at a slower rate than
Note. Exercise particular care in using the firing
tables to insure that the correct values are extracted. For does elevation, a more accurate fuze setting can
instructions regarding entry into tables A, D, H, and I, be obtained by correcting, for nonstandard con-
read the note at the bottom of each of those tables. ditions, the fuze setting corresponding to the
adjusted elevation. The Fuze Setting Factors
21-9. Average Position Velocity Error table (table J) is designed to compensate for
a. A position VE is computed whenever a the same nonstandard conditions that affect
registration and a met message are concurrent. range.
The position VE includes all nonmeasurable vari- (1) Met fuze correction. The met fuze cor-
ations from standard conditions. Some variations rection is equal to the algebraic sum of the indi-
are relatively constant (for example, tube wear vidual fuze setting corrections required to com-
and ballistic coefficient) whereas others are un- pensate for variations from standard conditions
predictable (for example, propellant variation and is determined as follows: Extract the unit
and minor weather variations). In order to corrections from the firing tables. Multiply each
smooth out these errors, FDC personnel aver- variation from standard by the appropriate unit
age each new position YE determined with the correction. Add separately those changes that
previous velocity error (which may be an aver- increase and those that decrease the fuze setting.
age YE) determined at the same position. This Subtract the smaller sum from the larger sum.
method gives most weight to the most recently The result expressed to the nearest tenth is the
determined YE but does not disregard the pre- met fuze correction. The sign of the correction is
vious velocity errors. that of the column with the larger sum.
Example: (2) Total fuze correction. Determine the to-
YE determined at 0800 -3.2 m/s tal fuze correction by subtracting the fuze set-
VE determined at 1000 - 3.8 in/s ting corresponding to the adjusted elevation
Average YE to be used after 1000 -3.5 rn/s from the adjusted time.

21-6
 FM 6-40

(3) Position fuze correction. Determine the ample in paragraph 21-8. GFT B: Charge 5, lot
position fuze correction by subtracting the met XY, range 7,230, elevation 368, time 24.6. The
fuze correction from the total fuze correction. total fuze correction is +0.3(24.6 -24.3). The
b. The use of the Fuze Setting Factors table concurrent met message is solved and yields a
eliminates the error in assuming that the total .met fuze correction of + 0.2. This is subtracted
fuze correction is constant. The technique in- from the total fuze correction and the resulting
volved is similar to that for determining velocity position fuze correctioih (+0.1) is filed for fu-
error in that the effect of nonstandard condi- ture use. Later, a new met message is received.
tions on fuze setting is computed at the time of This message is solved as described in para-
the registration and subtracted from the total graph 21-11, and results in the following GFT
fuze correction. When a current met message is setting: GFT B: Charge 5, lot XY, range 7,230,
received, a met fuze Correction is computed in elevation 370. The met fuze correction deter-
much the same manner as a met range correc- mined from the new met (+0.1) is added to
tion. The fuze setting corresponding to-the new the position fuze correction determined from the
adjusted elevation is determined and the total earlier met (+0.1) to obtain the total fuze cor-
fuze correction (met fuze correction plus the po- rection (+0.2) to be applied to the fuze setting
sition fuze correction) is added to this fuze set- corresponding to the met corrected elevation
ting to obtain the new adjusted fuze setting. (370). Thus, the GFT fuze setting is 24.6 (24.4
Example: This is a continuation of the ex- +,(+0.2)).

21-7
PM 6-40

MET DATA CORRECTION SHEET

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATA MET MESSAGE

CHARE ADJQE CATR LTTD TYPE MESSAGE OTN AREA/UNIT

5B
3 7!q 72.3o 130°N 'F R3I 3-'*.9 3
......... (10re) 3Zo DATE
/2.
TIME
1130 ALT MOP
300
PRESSURE
103.1
LINE NO. WINDDIR WINDSPEEDAIRTEMP AIR DENSITY
ALTOFM 300 03/#Z i. 9t.
BTR- h)
"MOP 4A0 AtBCORRECTION+ 0. 0 0
ALT.O....RGETmeter) (nearest 3548 ......... /6/, I 9
CORRECTED
VALUES

HEIGHT
OF 8 URST
ABOVETARGET - -

ALTOF BURST358
r
ALT OF BTRYm(RC) I
CHeFe)
321
HEIGHTOFTARGET
(..a,) ABOVESUN(M) 437 1 +10
COMPRG
1 CHARTRG
?.30
ENTRYRG
% . Aj

WIND COMPONENTSAND DEFLECTION

................... ______0 ____,o dU,0F
WRENDIRECTION
THAN
OF WINDIS
DIR FIRE Ab
.ENS
6400N~
Pos OPcor
~ IE

DIRECTION
OF WIND 4, 00 Mai DF Cr L 4
"7,l DF Carr R14
DIRECTIONOF FIRE('*2A /8 o RTION .
DRIFT

CROS I .. S E KNOTS' .43-3 CROSSWINDL

WIND ISPEEDm COPH.7/1 '/N i OTSCORR DH 37
MET RANGE CORRECTION
42 MET______
RANGE WIND
AIRD
TEMP /0/ /
KNOWN
VALUES MP -0.
STANDARD
VALUES
VARIATION
STAN /7/ 3
UONITMINUS
CORRECTIONS KNOT R
_CORR _.

PROP . C N T MVNIGEk MET1RANGE

1-/10/./ ..
D
1 -Z3.

COMPUTATION45F0V7

vE -2.3 s
.Ml +I?.3 TOTALRANGE
..........
TEMP
....
F,F.....
FOR. ROP.TEP....
I ,
05 M........IO
.s I 8q .. E .. o.
I AV 1 -. MV UNIT
M/S 1 CORRECTION
I

~'~I
..3
V RANGE
CORRECTION
I --
TOTAL RANGE
CORRECTION -170oi
OLD VE - + NEWVE. +2= AVG VE

MET FUZE CORRECTION

VARIATION
FROM
UNIT
PLUS MINUS
7060

PROT
WEGH

POD WEGH
C 1R.0 +N
0. 13
0F.0RR,&s=
VGF CORR
CORRECTION.o
ETO
M E0TOTAL FUZE

0. J1 CORRECTION
.4.0
TARGET
NO. BATTERY DA TIMEF

-iokm-- OL
m., AN-, ..
k Aok.. ....-

DAI JAN 744200

REPLACES DA FORM 6-15.1 APR 67, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.

Figure 21-3. Application of velocity error.

21-8
 FM 6-40

Section III. APPLICATION OF METEOROLOGICAL AND

VELOCITY ERROR CORRECTIONS
21-11. Application of Velocity Error to determine an updated GFT setting. The GFT
Frequently, it is undesirable to register each setting range is 5,880 meters. The total range
time there is a significant change in weather. correction is + 110 meters. The range correspond-
In order to keep corrections for nonstandard con- ing to the adjusted elevation is 5,990 meters
ditions current in such a situation, FDC person- (5880+ (+ 110)). The hairline is placed over range
nel use a technique called met plus VE. The ma- 5,990, and elevation 295 and fuze setting 19.8 are
jor changes in registration corrections are due to read under the hairline. The elevation is the
changes in met conditions and propellant temper- adjusted elevation and the time is the new chart
ature. A new met message will provide data on time. Table J is entered with a value of 20 (19.8
correct met conditions; position VE and position 20). The met fuze correction is algebraically
fuze correction are virtually constant. added to the position fuze correction to determine
a. Determine a new current total range correc- the total fuze correction (-0.2). This value is
tion by adding the current met range correction added to the chart time (19.8) to determine the
to a AV range correction determined from the new adjusted time of 19.6 (19.8 + (-0.2). Thus,
position average VE in meters per second and the the updated GFT setting is GFT A: Charge 5,
current correction to muzzle velocity for propel- lot XY, range 5880, elevation 295, time 19.6.
lant temperature (b below). Determine a new
21-12. Determination of Range Corrections for
current total fuze correction by algebraically ad-
Targets Outside Transfer Limits
ding the position fuze correction to the current a. The use of the position VE is not restricted to
met fuze correction. Now use the updated total transfer limits of the point at which the VE
range and total fuze corrections to determine an was determined. However, corrections determin-
updated GFT setting (c below). A met message ed close to minimum and maximum usable ranges
solved by the met plus VE technique is referred for the charge are less accurate.
to as a subsequent met. (fig 21-3). b. Corrections for targets outside transfer
b. Convert the AV in meters per second to a limits can be computed by use of the met plus
AV range correction by multiplying the AV by VE technique. The met corrections are deter-
the muzzle velocity unit correction; the result is mined by use of the chart range, vertical interval,
always given the sign of the unit correction used. and direction to the target in question. AV is
The unit correction is determined at the range converted to a AV range correction by use of the
used to solve the met message and is taken from MV unit correction determined at the entry
the Decrease column if the AV is minus and from range for the target.
the Increase column if the AV is plus.
c. Use the total range and total fuze correc- 21-13. Deflection Corrections
a. Corrections for deflection and range are best
tions to determine an updated GFT setting as
follows: Algebraically add the total range correc- determined from a registration. As a result of
the initial registration, a deflection correction
tion to the GFT setting range. The result is the
scale is constructed. The deflection correction
range corresponding to the adjusted elevation.
scale indicates the total deflection correction for
Place the hairline on the GFT over this range
a given elevation. The total deflection correction
and under the hairline read the elevation and the
is equal to the met deflection correction plus
fuze setting. The elevation is the new adjusted
the position deflection correction.
elevation for the GFT setting. The fuze setting
b. A change of the total deflection correction
is the new chart time. Express the chart time to
as determined from a second registration or by
the nearest whole unit to determine the entry ar-
the met plus VE technique will modify this de-
gument into table J. Determine the chart time
before determining the met fuze correction. Alge- flection correction scale. To modify the total de-
flection correction by the correction determined
braically add the met fuze correction to the posi-
from a met message FDC personnel must know
tion fuze correction to determine the current total
the amount of the total deflection correction that
fuze correction. Algebraically add this total fuze
was due to weather. This can be determined from
correction to the chart time to determine the
a met message taken concurrently with the regis-
new adjusted time for the GFT setting. tration. If a later met message indicates a
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109. A subse- weather change, a new deflection correction scale
quent met is being solved for charge 5 green bag must be constructed. The new total deflection

21-9
FM 6-40

correction will be the algebraic sum of the posi- Adjusted deflec-

tion deflection correction brought forward and tion------------3191 mils
the new met deflection correction. Total deflection cor-
c. For example, a registration has been con- rection at the ad-
ducted and a concurrent met message has been justed elevation R 9 mils
solved for a 155-mm howitzer M109 firing charge Met deflection cor-
5 green bag. rection at 0600
(1) Corrections from the registration and hours . R 1 mil
met message are as follows: Position deflection
Chart deflection 3200 mils correction R 8 mils
Adjusted deflection Average position
(initial registra- deflection correc-
tion at 1600 tion R 7 mils
hours----------3186 mils (R6+R8=R14/2)
Total deflection cor- Note. The position deflection corrections are
rection at the ad- averaged to give most weight to the most recently deter-
mined position deflection correction.
justed elevation (4) At 1000 hours, new met corrections are
(1600 hours) R 14 mils
computed (no registration):
Met deflection cor- Met deflection cor-
rection (1600
R 8 mils rection (1000
hours) hours) L 2 mils
Position deflection
R 6 mils Average position de-
correction flection correc-
Note. The position deflection correction is held tion R 7 mils
constant and used only in the position for which it was
determined.
Total deflection cor-
(2) At 2200 hours, a new met message is rection at met
computed (no registration): corrected eleva-
Met deflection cor- tion R 5 mils
rection (2200 (5) At 1400 hours, a new message is com-
hours) --- R 10 mils puted (no registration):
Position deflection Met deflection correc-
correction R 6 mils tion (1400
Total deflection cor- hours) R 3 mils
rection at met cor- Average position
rected elevation deflection correc-
(R 10 + R 6) R 16 mils tion R 7 mils
(3) The next morning at 0600 hours a se- Total deflection cor-
cond registration is conducted and a new met rection at met cor-
message is computed: rected elevation R 10 mils
Chart Deflection d. The data in c above may be tabulated for
(0600 hours) 3200 mils ready reference as follows:

RegistrationData

Chart Adj Regis Met Pos df Avg pos Total

Time df df df corr df corr corr df corr df corr

1600 3200 3186 R14 R8 R6 R 14

2200 ---. R10 R6 R 16
0,600 3200 3191 R9 R1 R8 R7 R9
1000 L2 R7 R5
1400 1 _ __1 ---- _ R3 R7 Ri10

21-14. Deflection Corrections Outside Transfer transfer limits by solving the current met mes-
Limits sage and determining the met deflection correc-
The FDC can determine a total deflection cor- tion to the target. The met deflection correction
rection for an accurately located target outside to the target is applied to the position deflection

21-10
 FM 6-40

correction to the registration point. The result 6,400-mil zone. The current procedures for pre-
is the total deflection correction to the target. paring firing charts were developed to enhance
Example: this 6,400-mil capability.
Total deflection correction at b. When available, FADAC is used for deter-
registration point range R 5 mining corrected firing data throughout 6,400
Met deflection correction at mils and can be used for determining a GFT
registration point range R 2 setting for each 800-mil segment of the unit area
Position deflection correction R 3 of responsibility. When FADAC is not available,
Met deflection correction at these data are determined graphically by means
target range L1 of the 8-direction met technique.
Total deflection correction at c. Traditional transfer limits define an area
target range (R3 + Li) R 2 within which registrations are assumed to be
valid. These transfer limits place a severe limi-
21-15. Example-Met Plus VE tation on a 6,400-mil firing chart. The unit could
The following is an example of a met plus VE
obtain registration corrections by conducting a
computation and is a continuation of the example
registration in each 800-mil sector of the unit
presented in paragraph 21-8. The solution is
area of responsibility, but at a tremendous cost
shown in figure 21-3. Subsequent met message:
in ammunition expenditure.
METB31 344983 d. Corrections to range, deflection, and fuze
121150 030031 setting to compensate for the effects of the varia-
004116 041963 ble ballistic wind direction and velocity and for
014015 011964 earth rotation throughout the unit area of re-
024116 011964 sponsibility can be determined by use of the 8-
034218 011966 direction met technique. When these corrections
043917 013966 are combined with known position corrections,
054118 013968 lateral transfer limits can be eliminated for
Current propellant temperature: 810 F. ranges of 10,000 meters or less. For ranges
Met range correction -202 meters greater than 10,000 meters, lateral transfer limits
VE - -2.3 m/s are valid 4,000 meters right and 4,000 meters
Change to MV for propellant left of the battery registration point line. There-
temperature----------------+0.5 m/s fore, at these ranges, there will be areas between
- -V1.8 m/s successive 800-mil segments that are not covered
MV unit correction + 19.3 meters by valid deflection corrections. An additional met
AV range correction (19.3 x plus VE GFT setting must be determined to cover
1.8) --- +35 meters each area.
Total range correction (-202 +
(+35) = - 167)
e. The procedure for application of the 8-direc-
--- - -170 meters tion met technique consists of four steps:
GFT range 7,230 meters (1) Solution of a met message concurrent
Corrected range (7230 +
with a registration.
(-170)) - -- - 7,060 meters (2) Determination of a position VE, a posi-
Elevation for range 7060 370 mils tion deflection correction, and a position fuze cor-
Fuze setting for elevation 370 24.4 rection.
Met fuze correction + 0.1 (3) Solution of the met message for each
Position fuze correction +0.1
Total fuze correction +0.2 800-mil segment with reference to the registra-
tion point direction.
Corrected fuze setting (24.4 + (4) Application of the position corrections
( +0.2) ) 24.6 to met corrections for each 800-mil segment to
Position deflection correction ... R 20 mils determine valid GFT settings and deflection cor-
Met deflection correction L 4 mils rection scales.
Total deflection correction -- R 16 mils
GFT setting:
f. The position corrections (constants) deter-
GFT B: Chg 5, lot XY, rg 7230, el 370, ti 24.6 mined from an initial registration and a concur-
rent met message will be used with subsequent
21-16. 8-Direction Met Technique met messages until a new registration has been
a. Current doctrine requires that a firing unit conducted and average constants determined.
provide accurate artillery support throughout a Average constants will be used with all met mes-

21-11
FM 6-40
of the wind will have an appreciable effect on met correc-
sages subsequent to a registration for computing tions and will result in different GFT settings for each
GFT settings in all 800-mil segments. Average 800-mil segment. Because chart direction of the wind has
constants determined from the met concurrent no effect on air temperature, air density, projectile weight,
with a subsequent registration will be used in all drift, and AV range correction, these elements remain
800-mil segments except the segment containing constant for all computations.
the registration point. The GFT setting deter- (2) Corrections 800-mils right of the regis-
mined from the registration will be used until a tration point direction.
subsequent met message has been computed. (a) Met corrections.
g. Because of the small effect that base piece Range - - + 79 meters
displacement has on the azimuth to the registra- Deflection - _-- L 9 mils
tion point, the azimuth of fire need not be re- Fuze ---- 0
computed when base piece displacement is ap- (b) Total corrections (met plus position)
plied. Range (+79 +
h. An example problem of an 8-direction met (-26)) - - + 50 meters
for a 155-mm howitzer (109) is as follows: Deflection (L9 + L4) L 13 mils
(1) Data determined from the registration Fuze (0 + (-0.3)) -0.3
and concurrent met message. (c) GFT setting.
(a) GFT setting from registration. GFT A: Chg 5, lot XY, rg 5350, el 259,
GFT A: Chg 5, lot XY, rg 5350, el ti 17.2
263, ti 17.4 (3) Corrections 3,200 mils from the registra-
(b) Total registration corrections. tion point direction.
Range + 130 meters (a) Met corrections.
Deflection L 10 mils Range--------------76 meters
Fuze -0.4 Deflection4-----------L4mils
(c) Concurrent met corrections. Fuze--------------+0.2
Range ------ +156 meters (b) Total corrections (met plus position)*
Deflection L 6 mils Range (-76 +
Fuze---------------0.1 (-26)) -l100meters
(d) Position corrections (constants). Deflection (L4 + L4) L 8 mils
&V range correction -26 meters Fuze ( + 0.2 +
D eflection -- L 4 mils (-0.3))--0.1
Fuze---------------0.3 (c) GFT setting.
Note: When the direction of fire is changed in 800- GFT A: Chg 5, lot XY, rg 5350, el
mil increments, the resulting change in the chart direction 250, ti 16.8.

Section IV. EXPERIENCE CORRECTIONS

21-17. General tablish a GFT setting with this information than

Current registration or met corrections may not to ignore it until a registration has been con-
be known or obtainable in some situations; for ducted.
example, when a unit makes a hasty occupation
of position or when restrictions are placed on 21-19. Experience Meteorological (Range)
registration. In such a case, the S3 must decide Corrections
what corrections, if any, are to be applied to If a current met message is not available, the
data to improve the accuracy of fires. Except in data for a GFT setting may be improved by use
unusual cases in which conditions of the weather, of corrections for weather, ammunition, and
ammunition, and weapon are known, the S3 will weapon performance determined from previous
resort to an analysis of experience corrections met messages and registrations. Corrections bas-
as a basis for applying corrections. These correc- ed solely on such records should be used only
tions are used until met or registration correc- with extreme caution.
tions are available.
21-20. Experience Fuze Correction
21-18. Experience Velocity Error Corrections Evaluation of all previous time registrations of
The average VE or the latest VE will be used a specific fuze will invariably indicate that a rela-
as the basis for a GFT setting. It is better to es- tively constant fuze correction is required for

21-12
 FM 6-40
obtaining the proper height of burst. This factor mined, it may be due to one or more errors in
is the average fuze correction. The average fuze plotting, laying, and/or survey. The S3 should
correction, if applied to the fuze setting corre- keep in mind that errors causing the position de-
sponding to the elevation for the initial round, flection correction are difficult to isolate and
should cause the round to burst at approximately remain relatively constant for a given position.
the desired height. The fuze correction is con- Therefore, a position deflection correction for
sidered a fuze characteristic, not a correction for one position cannot be used in a new position.
weather conditions.
21-21. Position Deflection Correction
When a position deflection correction is deter-

21-13
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 22
CALIBRATION

Section I. GENERAL
22-1. Introduction one charge and, hence, it is necessary to select
a. Calibration is the comparison of the muzzle the charge that will cover the ranges most fre-
velocity of a given piece with some accepted quently fired. Grouping of weapons must be based
standard performance. That standard may be on calibration with one charge. Comparative
selected arbitrarily from the performance of a calibration data determined with one charge
group of weapons being calibrated together, as works fairly well as a basis for individual piece
in comparative calibration, or it may be the corrections for all other charges for howitzers
standard defined in the firing tables, as in ab- but not too well for guns. Absolute calibration
solute calibration. data are valid only for the specific charge fired.
b. Calibration makes it possible to group can-
nons of a given caliber and of nearly equal muz- 22-4. Frequency of Calibration
zle velocities into one battery so as to reduce the a. The type and caliber of weapon that is being
frequency with which individual piece corrections fired and the frequency (by charge) of firing
must be applied. govern the need for calibration. All new tubes
c. Calibration also permits the determination should be calibrated as soon after receipt as pos-
and application of corrections to compensate for sible. Thereafter, any weapon in service should
variations in muzzle velocity developed by in- be recalibrated at least annually. If a great deal
dividual pieces. of firing takes place, recalibration may be needed
d. The VE determined by absolute calibration more often. If an accurate and reliable record of
may be used in computing a met plus VE GFT the change in the position VE determined from
setting when no other data are available. registrations and concurrent met data is main-
tained, recalibration may not be necessary until
22-2. Ammunition
Muzzle velocity is a measure of the shooting the velocity loss becomes excessive (2 range prob-
strength of a weapon-ammunition-charge com- able errors). Wear tables can also give a gen-
bination. The muzzle velocity of a given weapon eral indication of the need for calibration.
varies from charge to charge. The only method b. Ordnance teams measure tube wear by
of determining the muzzle velocity precisely with means of a pullover gage. This gage allows a
any particular charge is to calibrate with that precise measurement of the distance between the
charge. In order to obtain a valid sampling and lands in the bore near the start of rifling. Tube
to receive the maximum value from the calibra- wear in this region is a fair indication of remain-
tion, the unit should insure that sufficient ing tube life. Wear measurements should not be
amounts of the same lot of propellant and pro- substituted for calibration, but they can be used
jectile are available. The recommended number to detect extremes in velocities within a group
of rounds for each piece during the calibration is of weapons. However, there is little reliability in
8 rounds. This number includes two conditioning a VE determined from wear measurements. Pull-
rounds (warming rounds), the result of which over gage readings can be used for grouping
may be discarded if erratic readings are obtained. weapons initially when immediate calibration is
The calibration can be conducted with fewer not feasible. Changes in the readings may be used
rounds but with some sacrifice of accuracy and as a guide in scheduling recalibration.
overall reliability. To eliminate velocity trends
22-5. Wear Tables
due to oil and dirt, the unit must insure that Wear tables may prove helpful in filling in the
the tubes are clean and dry. gaps between calibrations. Wear tables estimate
22-3. Optimum Charge the erosion of a gun tube as a result of firing
Usually, calibration is accomplished with only a certain number of rounds with specified

22-1
FM 6-40

charges. From this estimated erosion, the loss 22-7. Records

in muzzle velocity may be approximated. a. The records of all firing, including calibra-
tion, is maintained in the equipment logbook on
22-6. Heavy Artillery the Weapon Record Data (DA Form 2408-4).
a. The procedures for calibrating, grouping
the pieces, and computing and applying calibra- b. A complete record of calibration data should
tion corrections for heavy artillery are the same be maintained by the battery and by battalion.
as those for light and medium artillery. A record of each lot number and the associated
b. For the 175-mm gun equipped with the muzzle velocity data could be an aid to the opera-
M113 cannon tube, the loss in muzzle velocity tions officer. It is possible that the same lot could
per round fired is significant. Unless an equal be issued after an interval of time has passed,
number of rounds are fired by all weapons of the and a knowledge of the performance of the lot
battery, calibration data must be altered periodi- may eliminate the need for calibration. This is
cally. Therefore, an accurate record of calibra- particularly true when the unit does not fire suf-
tion data, subsequent firing, and corrections ap- ficient full service rounds to materially decrease
plied to calibration data for these weapons is the shooting strengths of its pieces.
particularly important.

Section II. CHRONOGRAPH CALIBRATION

22-8. Chronograph Calibration Techniques deflection and quadrant elevation chosen must be
Chronograph support is provided by ordnance such that the rounds fall within safety limits. The
teams and by teams organic to field artillery selection of suitable firing data is important be-
units. When chronograph support organic to the cause, once the screens have been emplaced, even
field artillery is used, calibration should be con- a small change in firing data requires reposition-
ducted in coordination with other scheduled fir- ing of the screens, which takes as much time as
ings so that ammunition need not be expended the original positioning.
specifically for calibration. (2) It is preferable to fire all pieces suc-
a. Skyscreen. The chronograph used by ord- cessively from the same position while the sky-
nance teams is usually the skyscreen. The sky- screens remain in place. The first piece to be
screen is a set of photoelectric cells that are calibrated is laid and its position staked so that
placed along a carefully surveyed base. The base sqbsequent pieces will stop on the same spot. The
is established along a prolongation of the tube. calibration team then emplaces the skyscreens by
Passage of the projectile overhead changes the sjghting through the tube. Once the skyscreens
light intensity striking the cells, which in turn have been emplaced, there is no need to lay each
activates an electric time counter. The ordnance subsequent piece by aiming circle. Each weapon
team computes the mean developed muzzle velo- pulls into the position marked by the stake; the
city of the rounds fired from each weapon and crew lays the piece by sighting through the tube
then compensates for the effect of nonstandard directly over the screens, takes a sight picture,
conditions to determine the muzzle velocity. When and corrects aiming post displacement. Since the
calibration is to be conducted by an ordnance piece is centered over the skyscreens, which have
team using skyscreen, the procedures outlined not been moved, it is laid on the selected azi-
in (1) and (2) below should be followed. muth and is, therefore, safe. The logbook for each
weapon is delivered to the ordnance team as the
(1) A bench-checked (ordnance-tested) piece comes to the firing point.
gunner's quadrant should be available and all
propellant thermometers to be used should be b. Radar Chronograph M36. Chronographs of
calibrated. A firing point with no trees and a the radar doppler type are organic to field artil-
minimum of underbrush must be chosen; the lery units. They are more flexible than skyscreen
area out to 200 meters in front of the weapon equipment and are capable of day and night opera-
must be as level as possible. An area approxi- tion. Radar doppler chronographs operate on the
mately 30 meters behind and slightly to one principle that the frequency of the transmitted
side of the firing point must be set aside for the radio waves will change when reflected from a
calibration van. A traffic pattern must be laid out moving projectile.
and enforced so that no traffic crosses the cables (1) The chronograph organic to field artil-
between the calibration van and the screens. The lery units is the radar chronograph M36. It is a

22-2
 FM 6-40

portable electronic instrument and is ideally c. Computation of Firing Data.

suited for use during tactical operations. The (1) The average MV determined by chrono-
M36 operates from a vehicle mount or a ground graph calibration for each battery is used as an
mount to the side of the piece. It measures velo- MV input to the gun direction computer M18
cities from 75 to 1,860 meters per second. It is (FADAC). For a more detailed explanation, see
laid parallel to the weapon being calibrated in the FM 6-40-3.
normal manner; i.e., by aiming circle, by re- (2) The average MV determined by chrono-
ciprocal laying, or by laying on a common aim- graph calibration for each battery may be used
ing point. in determining a GFT setting as outlined in para-
(2) After each round fired, the M36 chrono- graph 23-2. When a position VE or an average
graph measures the difference in frequencies be- position VE is available from prior registrations
tween the transmitted and received signals and and concurrent met messages, the VE is pre-
converts the difference to an indicated velocity, ferred to the MVV in making the GFT setting.
which is displayed directly in meters per second.
The readout indicates the velocity of the pro- 22-10. Example
jectile at some point along the trajectory as deter- a. A 155-mm howitzer M109 battalion has been
mined by the delay selector switch. The readout issued 18 weapons. Pullover gage readings pro-
velocity must be corrected to a muzzle velocity vided by ordnance furnish data to permit an in-
under standard conditions of gravity, surface air terim distribution of pieces to each battery. This
density, propellant temperature, and projectile initial distribution is temporary, since the wear
weight. The corrected velocity is the muzzle velo- measurement is only a slight indication of muzzle
city achieved by the weapon with the propellant velocity and is used only until calibration has
lot and charge used for the calibration. If FAD- been accomplished.
AC has been programmed with the appropriate b. An ordnance calibration team and suffici-
tape, it will perform the necessary extrapolation ent ammunition of one lot are arranged for and
and display the corrected muzzle velocity. Other- the decision is made to calibrate all weapons. The
wise the chronograph team corrects the readout S3 determines that charge 4 GB (M3 propellant)
velocity manually by means of the special extra- provides the best range coverage for this and
polation tables in TM 9-1290-325-12/2. future firings.
(3) The chronograph can follow changes in c. All weapons of the battalion are calibrated,
direction and elevation as fast as the piece can and the readings obtained for piece number 1 of
be laid. Because of this speed and the lack of Battery A are as follows:
intensive preparation required, calibration can Round number Reported MV (m/a)
be performed whenever firing is conducted and 1 -------------------------------- 311.7
an M36 chronograph is available. For a more de- 2 315.9
tailed discussion of the M36, see TM 9-1290-325- 3--------------------------316.0
4 -------------------------------- 316.8
12/1 and TM 9-1290-325-12/2. 5 316.6
22-9. Application of Muzzle Velocity 6 316.1
7 318.8
a. Grouping of Weapons. Weapons are grouped
S --- 317.0
by muzzle velocity so that the pieces in each
firing battery are as close to each other in shoot- (1) Rounds number 1 and 7 are discarded
ing strength as the situation permits. In some as erratic and the remaining six rounds are re-
instances in which one or more pieces vary con- tained. Round number 2 is used, even though it
siderably in muzzle velocity, the next higher artil- is a warming round, since it appears to be con-
lery headquarters may arrange for appropriate sistent with the other rounds. The readings of the
transfer of weapons between battalions having six rounds are averaged, and the result (316.4) is
the same caliber. the MV for this weapon and ammunition lot.
b. Selection of Base Piece. Once the pieces (2) The muzzle velocities are computed in
within the battalion have been grouped, each the same manner for the other 17 pieces in the
battery selects a weapon as the base piece. The battalion and the results tabulated.
muzzle velocity of the base piece must be near Battery Piece MV (M/8)
the average of the battery and must be such that number
the muzzle velocities of the greatest number of A 316.4
other battery pieces are within ±+1.5 meters per 311.5
312.7
second of the muzzle velocity of the base piece. 4 314.2

22-3
FM 6-40
Battery Piece MV (m/8)
number (4) The final muzzle velocities form the basis
5 315.7 for regrouping the weapons. The unit SOP re-
6 314.6 quires that long-shooting weapons be placed in
B --- -------- 1 310.4 Battery A, medium-shooting weapons in Bat-
2 307.3 tery B, and short-shooting weapons in Battery C.
3 309.3
4 308.5 The weapons ((3) above) are regrouped/as fol-
5 313.6 lows: The first six are placed in Battery A, the
6 309.7 next six in Battery B, and the last six in Bat-
---------- 1 304.1 tery C. Most of the weapons were properly
2 309.1 grouped on the basis of pullover gage readings
306.8
but some transferring was required. Battery A
305.0
309.0 weapons now consist of the following:
306.4 Piece number MV (m/a)
Al 316.4
(3) The weapons are listed in order of de- A2 (formerly A5)--------------------- 315.7
creasing muzzle velocity. A3 (formerly A6) -- -------------------. 314.6
Piece number MV (M/8) A4 -........... 314.2
A5 (formerly B5) 313.6
Al 316.4
315.7 A6 (formerly A3)---------------------312.7
A5
A6 - 314.6 (5) Piece number A4 is designated the base
A4 -- 314.2 piece. The muzzle velocity of A4 is close to the
B5 -- 313.6 average MV of the battery, and this arrangement
A3 312.7 requires that only Al have special corrections ap-
A2 311.5
Bi 310.4 plied, since Al is the only weapon with a MV
B6 --- .. 309.7 that varies by more than ± 1.5 m/s from the MV
B3 309.3 of the base piece. The exchange of piece num-
C2 --- 309.1 bers between A3 and A6 as shown is not ab-
C5 309.0 solutely necessary. It is done in this case to show
B4 --- 308.5
B2 --- 307.3
that the weapon closest in shooting strength
C3 -- 306.8 to the base piece should be in the center platoon
C6 306.4 with the base piece. Such an arrangement pro-
C4 -- 305.0 vides a close grouping in the adjustment phase
C1 -- 304.1 of observer-adjusted missions.

Section III. FALL-OF-SHOT COMPARATIVE CALIBRATION

22-11. Preliminary Considerations (The red numbered elevations are an indication of
a. General. Comparative calibration is based on the transfer limits for a one-plot GFT setting;
the premise that the total effects of nonstand- they also help to show the normal operating
ard conditions (except velocity deviation from limits for each weapon/charge combination. The
standard) have equal influence on the location of old limits of a quadrant elevation between 240
the mean point of impact of each piece. This and 460 was not weapon/charge associated and,
premise assumes that the difference in range be- therefore, in most cases was more restrictive
tween mean points of impact is an indication of than necessary.) A low quadrant elevation mini-
the difference in velocity. This assumption is mizes the effect of nonvelocity elements absorbed
valid only within certain limits. For example, it into the velocity error. The firing data (de-
does not mean that weather conditions can be flection and quadrant elevation) must be such that
ignored. Calibration should be conducted only all observers can see the bursts and that the
when the wind is relatively stable, and a fall- rounds fall within safety limits.
of-shot calibration, either comparative or absolute, c. Emplacement of Weapons. The weapons to
should not be attempted during the passage of a be calibrated should be employed in a level posi-
weather front. tion area. When the trails are spread, there
b. Quadrant Elevation. When fall-of-shot cali- should be about 2 feet between the trails of ad-
bration is being conducted, the weapon should be jacent pieces. Cant must be eliminated. The weap-
calibrated at a quadrant elevation between the ons may be laid for direction by any of the
leftmost and rightmost red numbered elevations. methods described in chapter 4. The target area
22-4
 FM 6-40

should be level and, if at all possible, should be at to the desired MPI) for each OP are determined
about the same altitude as the position area. The and announced to the observer.
weapons should be located to fifth-order survey c. Chart data from the center of the position
accuracy (FM 6-2). area to the desired point of impact are meas-
d. Observation. If possible, the target acquisi- ured from a map. A common deflection and a
tion battalion should provide the required flash common quadrant elevation are determined and
base from which the mean point of impact are used for all pieces throughout the firing. Fuze
achieved by each weapon is determined. Organic quick is always used for calibration.
observation may be used, provided the observers d. Ammunition should be prepared sufficiently
are trained and equipped to provide the high de- in advance of firing to insure uniform weather
gree of accuracy required for fall-of-shot calibra- conditioning. Propellant temperatures of at
tion. When organic observation is used, four OP's, least four rounds at each piece are measured and
each equipped with a battery commander's tele- recorded immediately prior to firing.
scope or an aiming circle, should be installed. e. Observers are alerted before firing is begun.
The OP's must be located to a survey accuracy For each round fired, the number of the piece fir-
of not less than 1:1,000 (fifth order) and tied ing and SHOT are announced when the piece is
to a common reference point of the same accuracy fired. SPLASH is announced 5 seconds before im-
(FM 6-2). Each observer records direction and pact.
vertical angle for each round. Care must be ex- f. Each piece is laid for quadrant elevation
ercised in recording so that rounds can be re- with the'same gunner's quadrant. Battery right
lated to their respective pieces. An erratic round (left) is used in order to equalize the weather con-
can be defined as one that falls more than 4 range ditions under which each piece is fired. Sufficient
probable errors away from the mean point of im- time between rounds must be allowed to enable
pact of the rounds fired. A round that obviously the observers to locate the round, record the
does not fit the pattern of the remaining rounds data for that round, and change the orienting
should be classified as erratic and should not be data for the next round if necessary. (About 30
included in the location of the mean point of seconds is sufficient for the average crew.)
impact. This necessitates a quick check of direc- g. The first two rounds from each piece are con-
tions recorded by the two flank observers be- ditioning rounds but the observers should pick
fore a piece is released from the calibration site. up the round and report and record data as a
If, for the same round, both of these observers check of the system and procedures.
recorded a direction quite different from all others h. Firing should be completed as rapidly as
in that group, then an additional round should be possible. If a piece misfires, that piece is called
fired from that piece. The decision to fire addi- out, the observers are notified, and firing of the
tional rounds is made by the officer in charge. other pieces is continued.
e. Accuracy. To insure maximum accuracy, the i. Before the pieces are released, a check with
officer in charge should brief all personnel on the observers should be made to make sure that
the importance of the calibration. A reliable sys- data for all rounds have been recorded and to see
tem of communications and exchange of com- if any rounds were erratic. If any rounds were
mands, data, and information should be developed erratic or if the observers missed any rounds, ad-
for the conduct of firing. It is especially import- ditional rounds should be fired immediately.
ant that bubbles be centered exactly before each
round is fired. The pieces should be serviced and 22-13. Determination of Range To and Alti.
checked to insure that they are in proper firing tude Of the Mean Point of Impact for
condition. One bench-checked (ordnance-tested) Each Piece
gunner's quadrant should be used on all pieces. a. When the target acquisition battalion pro-
At least one calibrated powder thermometer per vides the flash base, it furnishes the grid coordi-
piece should be obtained before the firing. nates and altitude of the mean point of impact for
each piece. When the unit provides its own obser-
22-i12. Conduct of Firing vers, the S3 must examine the observers' record-
a. Each piece is placed over its surveyed stake. ed data in order to detect erratic rounds and ques-
Trunnions are leveled, and the pieces are bore- tionable observer data.
sighted and then laid. Tubes must be cleansed
b. When sufficient usable rounds have been ob-
of all oil film and then dried. tained, the MPI range for each piece is determined
b. Orienting data (direction and vertical angle by the following procedures:

22-5
FM 6-40

(1) Compute the average azimuth from each

OP for each piece.
(2) Form three target area bases by using
selected pairs of OP's (fig 22-1). 4 qwtw "oa.---1
(3) Compute three sets of grid coordinates
for each mean point of impact, one from each of 3 2
Bases used:
the three bases.
(4) If there is an appreciable difference in OPI and OP 4
the three sets of coordinates (20 meters or more --- OP I and OP 3
--- OP 2and OP 4
radially), perform a graphic check (d below).
(5) Average the three sets of coordinates Figure 22-1. Target area bases.
to arrive at the mean MPI location.
(6) Using the coordinates of the piece and area. However, the altitude of the mean points
the MPI location for that piece, compute the of impact may vary even though a relatively
range to the mean point of impact for each piece. level impact area is selected. Therefore, to obtain
c. The altitude of the MPI is determined as a valid comparison of the ranges achieved by
follows: Compute the altitude of the MPI from each piece, the unit must correct the measured
each OP and average the four altitudes to de- ranges to the ranges that would have been
termine the mean altitude. (If accurate maps are achieved had all rounds landed at a common
available, the MPI altitude may be measured altitude.
from the map.) b. The procedure for correcting the measured
d. If survey, observer orientation, and observer ranges for differences in altitudes of the MPI is
readings are correct, all rays, as plotted from as follows:
the respective OP's, will theoretically intersect (1) Select a reference altitude. Any con-
at a common point. Normally, however, the rays, venient altitude may be used. The lowest MPI
either for a single round or a mean point of altitude is commonly used as the reference alti-
impact, will not intersect but will form a polygon tude.
of error. If observer data appear to be of ques- (2) Subtract the reference altitude from
tionable accuracy, a graphical check on the the altitude of the mean point of impact.
magnitude and nature of the polygon of error (3) Multiply the difference in altitude by
should be made as follows: Plot all OP's on a the cotangent of the angle of fall. (The co-
gridded sheet to a scale of 1:6,250 and plot the tangent of the angle of fall is determined from
azimuth of the round or mean point of impact in the Supplementary Data table (table G) at the
question as rays from the respective observation measured range to the MPI rounded to the near-
posts. If the graphical check indicates that only est 100 meters.) If the altitude of the MPI is
one observer is appreciably in error, delete these greater (less) than the reference altitude, the
data and use the data of the other three observers. sign of the correction is plus (minus) (fig 22-2).
If more than one observer is in error, consider the (4) Add the range correction determined
data from all observers to be equally valid, be- in (3) above to the measured range to determine
cause it is not possible to pick out the specific the corrected range.
observers at fault. The size of the polygon of er-
ror accepted is a good measure of the accuracy
of resultant range data and, hence, the calibra- TRAJECTORY
tion itself. The smaller the polygon, the more ac-
curate the calibration. A graphical check should
be made on the common reference point before MPI ALTITUDE B>
firing begins. 01 \c
REFERENCE ALTITUDE
22-14. Adjustment of Ranges for Differences
C A>\
in Altitude b
a. A valid comparison of the ranges achieved
by the pieces being calibrated could be obtained
Side a-Difference in altitude between MPI's
if all pieces were at the same altitude and if Side b-Range correction
all mean points of impact were at the same .4 A-Angle of fall
altitude. The unit can establish a common alti- Side b= side a x cot.4 of fall
tude for the pieces by selecting a level position
Figure 22-2. Correction for difference in altitude.

22-6
 FM 6-40

22-15. Selection of the Standard Piece 14) must be corrected. The final comparative VE
In a comparative*calibration, the piece that of a particular piece is the VE that would have
achieved the longest corrected-range is chosen as been attained if the ammunition fired by that
the standard piece. Its corrected range is the weapon had the same propellant temperature as
standard with which the corrected ranges of the the ammunition of the standard piece. The pro-
other pieces are compared. The comparative VE cedure for correcting the VE for propellant tem-
assigned to the standard piece is 0 meters per se- perature variations is as follows:
cond. a. Enter the Propellant Temperature table
(table E) and determine the change to muzzle
22-16. Determination of Comparative Veloc- velocity for propellant temperature for each piece.
ity Error
b. To determine the correction to VE for each
The procedure for determining the comparative piece, subtract (algebraically) the change to muz-
VE of a piece is s follows: zle velocity for propellant temperature from that
a. Determine the difference between the cor- of the standard piece.
rected range of the piece in question and the c. For each piece, add the correction (b above)
corrected range of the standard piece. to the VE determined as prescribed in paragraph
b. Enter the Ground Data table (table F) at 22-16. The result is the final comparative VE.
the corrected range (rounded to the nearest 100
meters) of the piece'in qupstion. Deternilinq the
correction for a decrease in muzzle velocity of 22-18. Example
A 155-mm howitzer M109 battalion has complet-
1 meter per second.
ed firing a fall-of-shot comparative calibration
c. Divioe the difference in range (a above) by with charge 7, quadrant elevation 310. All pieces
the muzzle velocity unit correction"(b above). were at the same altitude. The following data
The result is the comparative VE. The sign of have been determined (data for only four pieces
the comparative VE is always minus, since the
are shown):
longest shooting piece is the standard.
Average
Piece Computed range Altitude of MPI propellant
number (meters) (meters) temperature
22-17. Correction of Velocity Error for Pro- (Fahrenheit)
pellant Temperature Variations 1 9665 320 830
A valid comparative VE Can be determined only 2 --- 9710 316 800
if all weapons fire ammunition with the same 3 9790 321 800
4 9610 325 780
propellant temperaturp. Precautions should be
taken to keep all propellants at the same tempera- a. The MPI ranges are corrected for differ-
ture. If there is apy variation in' the average ences in altitudes between mean points of im-
propellant temperatures of the individual weap- pact. The lowest MPI altitude (316 meters) is
ons, the comiarative VE's determined (para 22- selected as the reference altitude.
Computed Altitude Difference Cotangent Range Correc-
Piece range of MPI in altitude of angle correction range
number (meters) (meters) (meters) of fall (meters) (meters)
1 9665 320 2.1 +8 9673
+4
23------------------------ 9710 316 0 2.1 0 9710
34 -------------
------------------------ 9790 321 +5 2.1 +10 9800
4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9610 325 +9 2.2 +20 9630

b. Piece number 3 is selected as the standard c. The VE's are determined as follows:
piece because it is the piece with the greatest cor-
rected range (9800).
Corrected Difference MV unit
Piece number range from std rg correction VE
-127
1-------------------------9673 21.1 -6.0 m/s
2-------------------------9710 -90 21.1 -4.3 m/s
3-------------------------9800 0 0 M/s
4-------------------------9630 -170 21.0 -8.1 m/s

22-7
FM 6-40

d. The VE's are corrected for differences in piece and all other pieces. The final comparative
propellant temperature between the standard VE's are shown below.
Change to Correction to
Piece number PT MV for PT VE for PT VE Final VE
1---------------------- 830 F +2.2 -0.5 -6.0 -6.5 m/s
2 800 F +1.7 0 -4.3 -4.3 m/s
3---------------------- 800 F +1.7 0 0 0 m/s
4--------------------- 780 F +1.4 +0.3 -8.1 -7.8 m/s

22-19. Comparative Calibration by Battery Battery C to bring it to the VE obtained with

At times calibration of all batteries on the same Battery A; hence - 1.2 m/s must be applied to all
day may not be practicable. In such cases, each VE's in Battery C.
battery conducts a separate calibration. The data (4) When the correction factors ((2) and
from the separate calibrations are then adjusted (3) above) have been applied, the calibration
to a common level so that the weapons can be data can be rewritten (adjusted to a common
properly grouped within the battalion. level) as follows:
a. The first battery to calibrate its weapons
A B C
also calibrates one piece from each of the other
Weapon VE Weapon VE Weapon VE
two batteries. These pieces are later used as con-
trol pieces by their respective batteries. Al 0 B1 -0.6 C1 -2.7
A2 -1.2 B2 +0.9 C2 -1.5
b. The separate calibrations are conducted and A3 -2.1 B3 +1.8 C3 -3.0
data computed as outlined in paragraphs 22-12 A4 -2.4 B4 +0.3 C4 -3.3
through 22-18. A5 -3.7 B5 -0.9 C5 -1.2
c. The different sets of data are adjusted to a A6 -4.6 B6 -1.6 C6 -2.4
common level by application of a correction to
the VE's of the second and third batteries to (5) The weapons can now be listed in order
calibrate. The correction to be applied to the VE's of decreasing shooting strength and the VE's
of each battery is number of meters per second adjusted so that the longest shooting weapon has
required to bring the VE of the control piece when a VE of 0; the correction required to bring the
calibrated with its own battery to the VE of the longest shooting piece to 0 must be applied simi-
control piece when calibrated with the first bat- larly to all weapons.
tery.
(1) Example: Battery A is calibrated first;
Order of s trength First adjusted
Battery B, second; and Battery C, third. The VE
Final adjusted
VE
VE's determined from the separate calibrations B3 +1.8 0
are as follows: B2 +0.9 -0.9
B C
B4 +0.3 -1.5
A
Al 0 -1.8
Weapon VE Weapon VE Weapon VE B1
-0.6 -2.4
Al- -0 B1* -2.4 C** -1.5 B5 ------
----- - 0.9 -2.7
A2- -1.2 B2 -0.9 C2 -0.3 A2 -1.2 -3.0
A3- -2.1 B3 0 C3 -1.8 C5 -1.2 -3.0
A4- -2.4 B4 -1.5 04 -2.1 C2 ------------
- - -1.5 -3.3
A5- -3.7 B5 -2.7 C5 0 B6 - - - - - - -1.6 -3.4
A6- -4.6 B6 -3.4 C6 -1.2 A3 -2.1 -3.9
BI*- - -0.6 A4 -2.4 -4.2
C*- -2.7 C6 -2.4 -4.2
*Battery B control weapon. 01
------- 2.7 -4.5
"Battery C control weapon. C3 - ----- -3.0 -4.8
(2) A correction of +1.8 m/s must be ap- C4 - -- -3.3 -5.1
A5 ------- -5.5
plied to the VE for B1 obtained with Battery B 3.7
A6 -4.6 -6.4
to bring it to the VE obtained with Battery A;
hence, + 1.8 m/s must be applied to all VE's in (6) The final adjusted VE's are the basis
Battery B. for regrouping the weapons. They represent com-
Similarly, a correction of -1.2 m/s parative calibration VE's equal to battalion cali-
must (3)
be applied to the VE for Cl obtained with bration VE's.

22-8
 FM 6-40

Section IV. FALL-OF-SHOT ABSOLUTE CALIBRATION

22-20. Preliminary Considerations each battery should be selected. If comparative

a. Nonstandard Conditions. The effects of muz- calibration data are known or later determined,
zle velocity must be isolated from the effects of all pieces can be brought into an acceptable state
all other nonstandard conditions; however, cer- of absolute calibration as shown in the example
tain deviations from this basic requirement are in paragraph 22-23a.
accepted in present techniques and will be noted. d. Other Considerations. Other preliminary
Careful preparation must be made for obtaining considerations for absolute calibration are the
and using met data. Coordination between the same as those for comparative calibration.
officer in charge of the calibration and the officer
in charge of the met station is essential. Ideally, 22-21. Conduct of Firing
the location of the met station should be a point An absolute calibration is conducted in the same
between the weapon and target and should be manner as a comparative calibration except that
such that the balloon would pass as near the fire by battery right (left) is not used. Each
summit of the trajectory as possible. The time of piece will complete firing before the next piece
the met passage and the time of firing should be fires. Each piece should be fired as rapidly as pos-
coordinated. sible consistent with the capabilities of the weap-
b. Selecting the Quadrant Elevation. The QE on and personnel involved so that range effects
fired should be such that the maximum ordinate due to changes in weather are minimized. Speed
will coincide with an altitude represented by a should not, however, take precedence over ac-
line number of the met message. The method of curacy.
bringing an acceptable QE (240 to 460 mils)
into agreement with a line number of the met mes- 22-22. Computation of Absolute Velocity
sage involves the use of the Supplementary Data Error
table of the firing table. The following example a. To compute the VE, first locate the MPI
illustrates the method of selecting the QE to be for each weapon by using the method described
fired in calibrating a 155-mm howitzer M109 in paragraph 22-13. Then compute site by us-
with charge 5 GB, M3 propellant. ing the difference in altitude between the piece
and the mean point of impact. Subtract the site
Altitudes represented by met line numbers
from the QE fired to determine the elevation
Line 02 --- 500 meters
1,000 meters
fired. Enter the Ground Data table and inter-
Line 03 --- -
Line 04 -- 1,500 meters polate for the range corresponding to the eleva-
Line 05 --- 2,000 meters tion. This is the standard horizontal range that
would have been achieved if all conditions had
From the Supplementary Data table, a maximum
been standard at the time of firing. Subtract the
ordinate of 500 meters results in a horizontal
range of approximately 6,000 meters. The quad- developed MPI range from the standard (firing
table) range. The resultant difference in range is
rant elevations for ranges in the vicinity of 6,000
the range correction necessary to compensate for
meters are in the vicinity of 296 mils, a good
all nonstandard conditions at the time of firing.
QE for calibration. The range corresponding to
a maximum ordinate of 500 meters is 6,037 me- b. Compute range corrections for all known
ters. The corresponding QE is 298.3 mils. For nonstandard conditions except propellant tem-
convenience, this QE can be rounded to 300 mils perature by using met data taken at the time of
for firing the calibration. firing. All unit corrections are determined at the
Note. The GFT provides a more rapid solution to the range (nearest 100 meters) to the mean point of
choice of the QE to fire. This is accomplished by placing impact. The line number is that corresponding
the manufacturer's hairline over one of the met check to the QE fired.
gagepoints between the red numbered elevation limits.
The QE is then read from the elevation scale under the c. Subtract the met range correction from the
hairline. total range correction determined as described in
c. Selecting Pieces for Calibration. It is some- a above. The result is the correction in meters
times desirable to bring only a limited number to compensate for AV. Compute the V by divid-
of pieces into a state of absolute calibration. Pre- ing the xV range correction by the MV unit cor-
ferably, three pieces per battalion are selected, rection (determined at MPI range). If the AV
although one is sufficient. The base piece, or a range correction is plus (minus), the MV unit
piece with average wear measurement within correction is taken from the Decrease (Increase)

22-9
FM 6-40

column. Determine the VE by subtracting the with an ordnance chronograph calibration, the
muzzle velocity change for propellant tempera- officer in charge should not be unduly alarmed
ture from AV. The propellant temperature used if the muzzle velocity variation computed is of a
is the average of all propellant temperatures re- different magnitude. Such a difference can be
corded at the piece. caused by-
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge
5 GB, M3 propellant: (1) A difference in projectile lot efficiency
MPI range 5,630 meters (overcoming air resistance) between the lot used
Site in the calibration and the lot used in constructing
+ 6.4 mils
QE fired 300 mils
the firing tables. The difference in projectile lot
Elevation efficiency may show up as an increase or a de-
- 293.6 mils
crease in range not otherwise accounted for.
(300-6.4)
The range corresponding to elevation 293.6 mils (2) Limitations in accurately determining
is 5,964 meters. met data.
The total range correction to compensate for all
(3) Limitations of computational proce-
nonstandard conditions is +334 meters (5964
dures and firing tables.
-5630).
Assume that a met message has been solved and (4) Errors in survey.
a met range correction of +172 meters has (5) Errors in the QE used (to include bar-
been determined. rel curvature).
The AV range correction is + 162 meters (334 -
e. The officer in charge should examine the
172).
The unit correction for muzzle velocity (Decrease
magnitude and sign of the differences (VE minus
MVV) and recheck computations for any sample
column, range 5600) is + 15.8 (meters).
that deviates from the pattern followed by most
The AV = +162/15.8 = 10.3 m/s.
of the weapons. In the following example, piece
The propellant temperature is 530 F.
4 should be rechecked:
The change to muzzle velocity for propellant
temperature is -0.8 m/s. The VE is -9.5 m/s Piece number VE MVV Difference
(-10.3 - (-0.8)). 1.................. .3 -5.5 -1.8
d. The VE of -9.5 m/s in the example in c 2 -9.1 -7.6 -1.5
above approximates absolute calibration for this 3------------------ .6.7 -4.6 -2.1
4-------------------- U1.3 -6.4 -4.9
weapon-ammunition combination. However, if
5-------------------- -8.2 -7.0 -1.2
such a calibration is conducted in conjunction 6------------------ -7.6 -6.1 -1.5

Section V. REDISTRIBUTION OF WEAPON9

22-23. Grouping of Pieces According to Velo- remaining 1/3 in the remaining battery (normal-
city ly Battery B). Within batteries, the base piece
a. Grouping After Calibrationby Fall of Shot. should be the piece with the shooting strength
A list by tube number of all pieces calibrated, nearest the battery average. The unit can
ranging in order from the strongest shooting equalize wear among the tubes in service by
piece to the weakest, should be prepared for
habitually assigning to the longest shooting
grouping the pieces. These pieces should then be
pieces missions that do not require all the pieces
assigned to batteries on the basis of their shoot- of the battery. The following examples illustrate
ing strengths; i.e., the strongest 1/3 in one bat- the method of grouping pieces according to shoot-
tery (normally Battery A), the weakest 1/3 in ing strength:
another battery (normally Battery C), and the
VE comparative Adjustment of VE's
Tube number calibration to absolute scale Battery*
51180 0 A-3.4Al
51242 -0.3 -3.7 A2
51177** -0.9 -4.3 A3 (base piece)***
51359 -1.2 -4.6 A4
51628 -1.5 -4.9 A5
51032 -1.5 -4.9 A6
51768 -1.8 -5.2 BI

22-10
 FM 6-40

VE comparative Adjustment of VE's

calibration to absolute scale Battery*
Tube number

51535---------------------------- -2.4 -5.8 B2

51640 -- 3.0 -6.4 B3 (base piece)***
51819--------------------3.4 -6.8 B4
51225 -- 3.7 -7.1 B5
51275---------------------------- -4.0 -7.4 B6
51393---------------------------- -4.3 -7.7 C1
51410 -- 4.3 -7.7 C2
51733------------------------4.6 -8.0 C3
51366 -- 4.9 -8.3 C4
51136 -- 5.8 -9.2 C5 (base piece)***
51250---------------------------- -6.7 -10.1 C6
*Assignment to batteries only; does not imply piece numbering within batteries.
**Absolute calibration performed with this tube.
***If the designation of the average piece as the base piece causes calibration corrections to be carried on one or more of the pieces, another
piece may be designated as the base piece.

Note. When more than one weapon in a battalion is b. When either MVV's or VE's of the absolute
in a state of absolute calibration with the same am- type are to be used as a basis for computation
munition combination, the adjustment of VE's to the in the met plus VE technique, the following fac-
absolute scale employs the mean difference between the
comparative VE and respective absolute VE, as shown tors should be considered:
below. (1) When both MVV's and VE's are availa-
Compara- Absolute ble from the same calibration, the VE's normally
Piece number tive VE VE Difference will prove more successful in present techniques.
1 --------------------- 0 -3.7 -3.7 The VE's at least partly compensate for variations
2 --------------------- 0.3 -4.3 -4.0 in projectile lot efficiency (from the firing table
3 ---------------------- 0.9 -4.3 -3.4 lot) and in barrel curvature, whereas the MVV's
Mean -3.7 do not.
Therefore, - 3.7 meters per second should be ap- (2) Velocity errors are subject to errors of
plied to the comparative VE's of all weapons to met data and survey. They are also subject to
adjust to the absolute scale. This includes apply- limitations of present computing procedures.
ing the mean difference to the comparative VE's (3) The MVV or VE used in this respect is
of the weapons that fired the absolute calibration valid only for the weapon-ammunition combina-
and thereby reduces the errors caused by non- tion for which it has been determined.
velocity elements that are contained in the ab- c. The following rules should be used as a guide
solute VE's determined by firing. in applying calibration data when MVV's and
b. Grouping After Calibration by Chronograph. VE's are both available:
The results of chronograph calibration (MVV's)
are absolute calibration data. 'These data permit (1) Muzzle velocity variations are prefer-
the most effective grouping and are also the basis red to either type of fall-of-shot calibration data
for the most reliable corrections for variations for grouping pieces and computing individual
in shooting strength between weapons. When piece corrections. An absolute calibration should
MVV's or VE's of either the comparative or ab- not be conducted for the sole purpose of group-
solute type are determined concurrently, the ing piece or computing individual piece correc-
MVV's should be used as the basis for grouping tions.
and subsequent computation of individual piece (2) Velocity errors of the type obtained
corrections. from registration and concurrent met are prefer-
22-24. Computation and Application of Cali- red to absolute VE's for computing corrections
bration Corrections to firing data (and determining GFT settings),
a. Once the weapons have been calibrated and as in the met plus VE technique. In the absence
grouped, corrections must be applied to compen- of absolute VE's, MVV's can be used for met
sate for the differences in shooting strength be- plus VE computations; comparative VE's cannot
tween the base pieces of the batteries within the be used for this purpose.
battalion and for the differences in shooting
strength between the base piece and other weap- (3) If MVV's and comparative VE's only
ons within each battery. The computation and are available, the MVV's are preferred for group-
application of these corrections are explained in ing pieces and for computing individual piece
chapter 23. corrections and corrections to firing data.

22-11
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 23
CALIBRATION, POSITION, AND SPECIAL CORRECTIONS

Section I. CALIBRATION CORRECTIONS

23-1. General (4) Using the GFT setting for the register-
Calibration corrections 'are corrections to com- ing battery, determine the elevation and fuze
pensate for the variations in the shooting setting corresponding to the VE corrected range
strengths of the pieces in a unit. Calibration cor- ((3) above).
rections are used primarily- (5) Construct the GFT setting for the non-
registering battery as follows:
a. For deriving GFT settings for nonregister-
(a) Place the hairline over the GFT range
ing batteries from the registration of one bat-
to the registration point for the registering bat-
tery.
tery and draw the elevation gageline over the
b. In combination with position corrections for
elevation determined in (4) above.
deriving special corrections.
(b) Draw the time gageline over the fuze
c. For correcting firing data for those weapons
setting obtained. This applies the registration
whose shooting strengths vary by more than
total fuze correction to the fuze setting corres-
±_1.5 meters per second from that of the base
ponding to the elevation determined in (4) above.
piece.
Example: Battery B (155-mm howitzer
23-2. Determination of GFT Settings for Non- M109) has registered and determined the follow-
registering Batteries ing GFT settting: GFT B: Charge 5, lot YS
a. When only one battery of a battalion equip- (GB, M3 propellant), range 6820, elevation 368,
ped with weapons of the same caliber is allowed time 23.3. The VE's for the base pieces are-
to register, the GFT setting of the registering A: - 0.9 mi/s.
battery is used by the nonregistering batteries B: -3.0 m/s.
in the absence of any better information. If cali- C: -5.0 m/s.
bration VE'S of the base piece of the batteries The comparative VE'S of the base pieces for A
are known, these VE's may be used in obtaining and C are-
the nonregistering batteries GFT settings of an A: + 2.1m/s (-0.9 - (-3.0)).
accuracy that will approach the accuracy of GFT C: -2.0 m/s (-5.0 -(-3.0)).
settings that would have been obtained if all bat- The muzzle velocity unit corrections are-
teries had registered. A: -17.7 (Increase column)
b. The procedure for determining the GFT C: +18.4 (Decrease column)
setting for a nonregistering battery is as fol- The VE range corrections are-
lows: A: -40 meters (-17.7 x +2.1 = -37).
(1) Determine the comparative VE of the C: +40 meters (+18.4 x -2.0 = +37).
base piece of each nonregistering battery by sub- The VE corrected ranges for Batteries A and C
tracting the VE of the base piece of the regis- are-
tering battery from the VE of the base piece of A: 6780 (6820 - 40).
the battery in question. C: 6860 (6820 +40).
(2) Determine a VE range correction by Using the GFT setting for Battery B and the cor-
multiplying the comparative VE ((1) above) by rected ranges determined for Batteries A and C,
the muzzle velocity unit correction corresponding read the elevation and fuze setting under the ap-
to the entry range for the registering battery. propriate gagelines. The GFT settings are-
(3) Determine the VE corrected range for GFT A: Charge 5, lot YS, range 6820, ele-
the nonregistering battery by algebraically ad- vation 365, time 23.6.
ding the VE range correction to the GFT range GFT C: Charge 5, lot YS, range 6820, ele-
of the registering batttery. vation 371, time 24.0.

23-1
FM 6-40

c. The procedure for determining GFT settings d. The procedure for determining the calibra-
for nonregistering batteries by use of calibration tion correction for an individual piece of a bat-
corrections is based on the assumption that if dif- tery is as follows:
ferent weapons fire a registration from the same (1) Determine the comparative VE of the
location, at the same time, and on the same piece with respect to the base piece by subtract-
registration point, the differences in adjusted ing the calibration VE of the base piece from
data would be caused by the differences in shoot- that of the piece in question.
ing strength of the invididual weapons. There- (2) Determine the muzzle velocity unit cor-
fore, the FDC can determine the GFT setting for rection from the Ground Data table at the entry
each nonregistering battery by compensating for
range (to the nearest 100 meters). Extracting
the difference between the comparative VE's of the unit correction from the Decrease (Increase)
the base pieces. (Since it is assumed that the column if the sign of the comparative VE ((1)
weapons fired the same registration, then the above) is minus (plus).
GFT setting range for the nonregistering bat-
teries will be the same as that of the registering (3) Determine the calibration correction in
battery.) meters by multiplying the comparative VE by
the muzzle velocity unit correction.
23-3. Calibration Corrections for Individual (4) Determine the calibration correction in
Pieces of a Battery mils by dividing the calibration correction in
a. Calibration corrections to compensate for meters by the change in range for a 1-mil change
the variations in shooting strength of the pieces in elevation (m/mil). Determine the meters per
of a battery are applied to the quadrant elevation. mail factor from the Ground Data table at the
The individual piece correction is based on the entry range to the nearest 100 meters.
variation of the shooting strength of each piece
Example: A 155-mm howitzer M109 battery
compared with that of the base piece.
has been assigned a final protective fire at a
b. In area fire, calibration corrections should chart range of 7,130 meters. Calibration correc-
be applied to any piece whose VE varies by more tions are to be applied. The comparative VE's
than ± 1.5 meters per second from that of the from a calibration with charge 5 GB (M3 pro-
base piece. Calibration corrections for various pellant) are as follows:
ranges may be computed and tabulated on a card,
Piece number Calibration VE
which is furnished to the chief of section. The
1 -------------- -- 2.1 m/s
chief of section determines the appropriate cor- -2.7 m/s
2 --------------
rection and applies it to the announced quadrant 3 (base piece)---------------------------3.0 m/s
elevation. 4 --- 3.4 m/s
c. When special corrections are to be used for 5 ------------- -4.3 m/s
achieving a particular burst pattern, calibration 6 ------------------------------------- 4.3 m/s
corrections are determined and applied to all Following the procedure described in d above,
pieces in the battery. compute the calibration correction as follows:

Piece Calibration Meters Calibration

Comparative MV unit correction per mil correction
No. VE corrections (meters) factor (Mils)
1 +0.9 x -18.2 -16 13 -1
2 +0.3 x -18.2 -5 13 0
3 0 x 0
4 -0.4 x +19.0 +8 13 +1
5 -1.3 x +19.0 +25 13 +2
6 -1.3 x +19.0 +25 13 +2
Note. The calibration correction in meters takes the sign of the MV unit correction factor.

e. If time fuze is to be used, a calibration fuze Calibration fuze calibration correction

correction corresponding to the calibration cor- correction in meters
rection for range (elevation) must be determined difference in fuze setting 100 meters
and applied. Use the following proportion for for 100-meter range
determining the time correction: change
 FM 6-40

Determine the difference in fuze setting for a the" calibration correction in meters is plus
100-meter range change from the Ground Data (minus).
table at the elevation for the base piece. Extract
the fuze settings corresponding to the tWo listed f. When a GPT with a current GFT setting
elevations that bracket the base piece elevation is available, determine the corrections for each
and determine the difference in the two fuze set- piece as described in d(3) above and algebraically
tings. If the base piece elevation is listed in the add the corrections to the GFT range. Place the
firing table, use the fuze setting corresponding hairline of the GFT over the corrected range and
to the base piece elevation and that corresponding read the elevation and fuze setting under the
to the next higher (lower) listed elevation when appropriate gagelines.

Section Ii. POSITION CORRECTIONS

23-4. General ter of the board represents the battery center.
a. Position corrrections are corrections for in- b. To facilitate measurement, assign each
dividual pieces to compensate for the difference small square of the base of value of 5 meters.
between the pattern formed by the pieces in the If, for example, a piece is 30 meters right of,
position area and the desired pattern of burst at and 20 meters behind, the battery center, plot the
the target. Position corrections may be required piece location 6 squares right of, and 4 squares
because of abnormal dispersion or concentration below, the center of the board.
of the pieces or because of the location, size, or c. Place an index for reading deflections on the
shape of the target. base opposite the referred deflection. For weap-
b. Generally, position corrections are applied ons that aire equipped with the 0 to 6400 mil
in area missions only if the depth of the position panoramic telescope, use the red arrow at the 0
is abnormally great. A deflection difference is index for reading deflections and renumber the
usually used in an area mission to correct for an scale as indicated in figure 23-2.
abnormal width of battery. d. For an open sheaf, draw on the base, lines
c. In rare cases, corrections may be needed for parallel to the direction-of-fire arrow (fig 23-2).
differences in the altitudes of the pieces. The Draw the lines to the same scale as that used for
correction for vertical displacement will be negli- plotting the piece locations and equally spaced
gible and is ignored unless the terrain is ex- according to the effective width of the burst. For
tremely rugged. The correction for the range a converged sheaf, the center of the board re-
effect is determined as follows: Use the GST to presents the point of convergence of the sheaf.
compute the amount of site necessary to correct For a special sheaf, plot each desired point of
for vertical displacement of the piece from the burst.
battery center. Multiply this change in site by
the meters per mil factor from the tabular firing 23-6. Computation and Application of Posi-
tables or, using the GFT, apply the site as a tion Corrections
change in elevation to determine the equivalent After the plotting board has been prepared, posi-
range correction. Combine the range correction tion corrections in meters for deflection and range
obtained with other position corrections to de- for each piece of the battery may be graphically
termine.the total correction. obtained for any desired direction of fire. The
plotted positions represent not only the piece
23-5. Preparation of MIO or M17 Plotting positions but also the uncorrected burst positions
Board for Determining Position Correc- in the target area.
tions a. Set off the direction of fire on the plotting
When the M10 or M17 plotting board is used for board by rotating the transparent disk until the
determining position corrections, the piece loca- desired deflection is opposite the index.
tions and the desired sheaf must be plotted to b. The deflection correction in meters for each
scale on the transparent disk of the plotting piece (burst) corresponds to the distance and di-
board. The piece locations are given in the bat- rection (right or left) between the plotted burst
tery executive officer's report (oral or sketch (fig and its appropriate place in the constructed sheaf.
23-1) ).
Starting with the right burst, move each burst to
a. Aline the centerline of the transparent disk the nearest sheaf line, with no more than one
(red 32 at the top) so that it coincides with the burst to a line. The bursts need not be placed in
arrow on the gridded base of the board. The cen- the sheaf in the numerical order of piece num-
23-3
 FM 6-40

lNo4

140 meters

meters 15 meters 30 meters 40 meters

INoI

30 meters

50 meters

INo 3

Figure 23-1. Executive officer's sketch of an abnormal battery position.

bers. Convert the correction in meters to a cor- for charge 5, GB, (M3 propellant), fuze quick,
rection in mils by dividing the shift in meters open sheaf.
by the chart range in thousands to the nearest (1) Remove the disk from the plotting board
hundred meters (mil relation). If a GST is avail- and draw six lines parallel to the arrow 50 meters
able, divide the shift in meters by the chart apart, with one of the two centerlines 25 meters
range in thousands to the nearest 10 meters by right and the other 25 meters left of the arrow.
use of the C and D scales and the M gage point (Scale is one small square = 5 meters.)
(e(1) below). Use procedures outlined in para- (2) Replace the disk and orient the 0-3200
graph f(1) below whenever the GST is available. line of the disk over the arrow, with the red 32
c. The range correction in meters for each on the disk at the head of the arrow.
piece (burst) corresponds to the distance and di- (3) Plot the pieces on the disk.
rection (over or short) between the plotted burst (4) Rotate the disk until 2850 (red scale)
and the line at chart range (center of board) is opposite the red arrow.
perpendicular to the direction of fire. (5) Determine the deflection correction in
(1) Convert the range correction in meters meters required to move each burst to the ap-
to a correction in mils of elevation by dividing propriate place in the sheaf.
the correction in meters by the meters per mil Number 1 right 55 meters
factor. Number 2 right 10 meters
(2) Convert the range correction to a time Number 3 right 30 meters
correction in the manner described in paragraph Number 4 left 47 meters
23-Se. Number 5 left 6 meters
d. The following example illustrates the pro- Number 6 left 64 meters
cedure for computing and applying position cor- (6) Convert the deflection correction in me-
rections by use of the plotting board. A 155-mm ters to a correction in mils by dividing the cor-
howitzer M109 battery has been laid, collima- rection in meters by the chart range in thousands
tors have been emplaced, and deflection has been to the nearest hundred meters.
reset to 3200. The pieces are distributed as shown Number 1 right 10 (55/5.7)
in figure 23-1. The final protective fire assigned Number 2 right 2 (10/5.7)
to the battery is at a chart range of 5,710 meters. Number 3 right 5 (30/5.7)
The chart deflection to the FPF is 2,850 mils. Number 4 left 8 (47/5.7)
The long axis of the FPF is perpendicular to the Number 5 left 1 (6/5.7)
direction of fire. Determine position corrections Number 6 left 11 (64/5.7)
23-4
 FM 6-40

(7) Determine the range correction in me- (1) Prepare the plotting board by. following
ters required to bring each burst to the line at the steps in d(1) through (4) above.
chart range perpendicular to the direction of
(2) Determine the deflection correction in
fire.
meters for each piece (d(5) above).
Number 1 - 14 meters
Number 2 -48 meters (3) Convert each deflection correction in
Number 3 + 37 meters meters to a deflection correction in mils by use
Number 4 -33 meters of the C and D scales and M gagepoint on the
Number 5 + 38 meters GST.
Number 6 +1 mil (+22/16) Number 1 R10 (R55/5.71)
(8) Convert the range correction in meters Number 2 R2 (R10/5.71)
to a correction in mils of elevation by dividing Number 3 R5 (R30/5.71)
the correction in meters by the meters per mil Number 4 L8 (L47/5.71)
factor for the chart range to the nearest 100 Number 5 Li (L6/5.71)
meters. Number 6 Lii (L64/5.71)
Number 1 -i1 mil (-14/16)
Number 2 -3 mils (-48/16) (4) Determine the deflection correction to
Number 3 + 2 mils (+37/16) be applied in the following manner. With the
Number 4 -2 mils (-33/16) manufacture's hairline over the chart range (57-
Number 5 + 2mils (+38/16) 10) the elevation (298) is read under the eleva-
Number 6 + 1 mil (+ 22/16) tion gageline. Enter the deflection correction
e. Position corrections may also be applied by scale and extract the total deflection correction
using the GFT in conjunction with the M17 plot- (L2). This value is then applied as follows:
ting board. This method should be employed when- Number 1 R10 + L2 = R8
ever possible, and especially when a valid GFT Number 2 R2 + L2 = 0
setting is being used. If a valid deflection correc- Number 3 R5 + L2= R3
tion scale is available, the total deflection correc- Number 4 L8 + L2,= L10
tion must be determined and algebraically ap- Number 5 Li + L2 = L3
plied to the position correction for deflection. Number 6 Lii + L2 = L13
(1) The deflection correction for each piece The corrections just determined are applied
is determined as in b above except that the cor- to the chart deflection (2850) to determine the
rection in meters is converted to mils, using the deflection to fire each piece:
GST, by dividing the shift in meters by the Number 1 2850 + R8 = 2842
chart range in thousands to the nearest 10 me- Number 2 2850 + 0 = 2850
ters. The total deflection correction (determin- Number 3 2850'+ R3 = 2847
ed from the deflection correction scale at the Number 4 2850 + L1O = 2860
elevation corresponding to the target range and Number 5 2850 + L3 = 2853
using the GFT setting) is algebraically added to Number 6 2850 + L13 = 2863
the correction determined above. The result is
applied to the chart deflection using the LARS (5) Determine the range correction in me-
rule. ters for each piece (d(7) above).
(2) The individual elevations and times to (6) Determine the corrected range for each
be fired are obtained by applying the range cor- piece by applying the range correction to the
rections determined from the plotting board to nearest 10 meters to the chart range.
the chart ranges. The hairline is placed over Number 1 - 14 ( -10)
these corrected ranges and the corrected elevations Number 2 - 48 ( -50)
and times are read under their respective gage- Number 3 + 37 ( +40)
lines. Number 4 - 33 ( -30)
f. The following example illustrates the pro- Number 5 + 38 (+.40)
cedure for applying position corrections by use Number 6 + 22 (+ 20)
of the GFT in conjunction with the plotting board. Note. Since chart range is determined to the
Battery and target data are the same as those in nearest 10 meters each range correction is also expressed
the example in d above. The GFT setting in use to this accuracy.
is GFT B: Chg 5, lot XY, rg 6360, el 344, ti (7) Determine the elevation and times for
21.8. each piece (e (2) above).

23-5
 FM 6-40

Elevation Time Elevation Time

Number 1 297 19.1 Number 4 296 19.0
Number 2 295 18.9 Number 5 300 19.3
Number 3 300 19.3 Number 6 299 19.2

Figure 23-2. Use of the M17 plotting board.

23-6
 FM 6-40

Section Ill. SPECIAL CORRECTIONS

23-7. General Use the procedure described in paragraph 23-6e,

Special corrections are individual piece correc- determine the difference in fuze setting for a
tions applied to deflection, fuze setting, and quad- 100-meter change in range at the elevation to
rant elevation to place the burst in a precise the target before special corrections are applied.
pattern so that the burst of each piece falls
(theoretically) at a planned point on the target. 23-9. Application of Special Corrections
In the rare cases in which they are used, special a. Deflection. The position correction for de-
corrections normally are computed at the bat- flection is added to the chart deflection and total
talion fire direction center. Special corrections deflection correction, and the total deflection for
are a combination of calibration corrections and each piece is announced.
position corrections.
b. Time. The special correction for time is ap-
23-8. Determination of Special Corrections plied to the common fuze setting, and the total
a. Deflection. The special correction for de- time for each piece is announced.
flection is solely a position correction and is de- c. Elevation. The special correction for eleva-
termined as described in paragraph 23-6b. If a tion is added to the common quadrant elevation
total deflection correction can be determined it and the total quadrant elevation for each piece
is applied as outlined in paragraph 23-6f.
is announced.
b. Range. To determine the special correction
for range for each piece, add the calibration d. Example. The following is an example of
correction in meters and the position correction the commands for special corrections:
for range in meters. Then, convert the total cor-
rection in meters to a correction in mils of ele- BATTERY ADJUST.
vation by dividing the total correction by the SPECIAL CORRECTIONS.
meters per mil factor determined at chart SHELL HE, LOT XRAY YANKEE,
range. When the GFT is being used, add the CHARGE 5.
special correction for range in meters to the FUZE TIME.
chart range to determine the corrected range. BATTERY 1 ROUND.
To determine the elevation and time for each DEFLECTION, NUMBER 1, 3249; NUM-
piece, place the hairline of the GFT over the BER 2, 3250; NUMBER 3, 3250; NUM-
corrected range and read the elevation and time BER 4, 3253, NUMBER 5, 3249; NUM-
under the hairline or, if a GFT setting has been BER 6, 3252.
constructed, under the respective gagelines. TIME, NUMBER 1, 23.9; NUMBER 2, 24.2;
c. Time. The special correction for fuze setting NUMBER 3, 23.8; NUMBER 4, 23.9;
is determined by the following formula: NUMBER 5,24.4; NUMBER 6, 24.4.
QUADRANT, NUMBER 1, 371; NUMBER
Special correction for 2, 376; NUMBER 3, 369; NUMBER 4,
Special fuze correction range in meters
371; NUMBER 5, 380; NUMBER 6, 379.
difference in fuze - 100 meters
setting for a 100-meter
change in range

23-7
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 24

FDC PROCEDURES FOR SPECIAL SITUATIONS

Section 1. INTRODUCTION
24-1. General factors from the firing tables will be the chart
a. The characteristics of different types of range determined to the point at which the
projectiles and certain types of missions require observer desires special ammunition fired (usu-
special consideration by the FDC. Considera- ally fire-for-effect range). Normally, it is not
tion must be given to differences in projectile necessary or practical to determine complemen-
weight and changes in the effects of drag (de- tary range because the possible increased ac-
pendent upon specific projectile-fuze combina- curacy does not justify the additional time re-
tions). quired for computing complementary range.
b. Observer procedures for special situations However, complementary range should be con-
are discussed in chapter 13. sidered for missions that do not require an ad-
justment and when the adjustment phase is con-
24-2. Entry Range ducted with the same projectile-fuze combination
The entry range for extracting unit correction that is to be fired in effect.

Section II. CHEMICAL PROJECTILES

24-3. General fective screening agent but produces no casualty
a. Chemical agents may be used to kill, injure, effect. Smoke HC readily absorbs and retains
or harass personnel, to deny observation or use moisture; it is more effective in rain or mist than
of an area, or to burn materiel. The fire direction it is in dry air.
procedures discussed in this section are applic- c. Colored Smoke. Colored smoke is a base-
able to chemical agents fired in chemical projec- ejection projectile that is normally used for pre-
tiles. arranged signals or for aiding the observer in
b. Paragraphs 13-1 through 13-5 describe the identifying his rounds. Colored smoke is fired
uses of chemical projectiles and prescribe ob- with time fuze. Except for the color of the smoke
server procedures for the adjustment of chemical (red, green, or yellow), colored smoke is simi-
projectiles. lar to HC smoke (white).

24-4. Smoke Projectiles 24-5. FDC Procedures for Adjustment of Pro-

a. White Phosphorus. Projectile WP is a burst- jectile, WP
ing projectile that produces smoke, incendiary a. When fire for effect is to be fired with white
effect, and casualty effect. Against most targets, phosphorus, the adjustment is conducted with
superquick fuze action is used. The action of HE, fuze quick.
the fuze and burster charge breaks the projec- b. WP projectiles are heavier than HE pro-
tile and scatters the phosphorus particles above jectiles. Therefore, when a change is made from
the ground. Since WP smoke rises, or pillars, it HE to WP, the FDC must apply a correction to
is not suited for maintaining a smokescreen; compensate for the difference in the weights of
however, it is excellent for the initial buildup of the projectiles. The correction is determined in
a smokescreen. the following manner:
b. Smoke HC. Projectile smoke HC is a base- (1) Determine the difference in the weights
ejection projectile that produces white smoke. It (squares) of the projectiles by subtracting the
is used primarily for screening. Smoke HC is al- weight of the HE used in the adjustment from
ways fired with time fuze. Smoke HC is an ef- the weight of the WP.

24-1
FM 6-40

(2) Determine, from ,the Ground Data quests smoke and continues the adjustment until
Table, the correction for an increase in projectile the smoke is at the proper location and height of
weight of 1 square at fire-for-effect chart range. burst. If more than one point is needed for
(3) Determine the correction by multiply- screening an area, the FDC may apply special
ing the difference in projectile weight ((1) corrections by using the M17 plotting board or
above) by the unit correction ((2) above). Ex- the observer may adjust smoke onto each point.
press the result to the nearest 10 meters. The procedure for firing base-ejection smoke is
(4) Apply the correction to fire-for-effect as follows:
chart range. Place the hairline of the GFT over (1) Determine the fuze setting for fuze time
the corrected range and read the elevation un- by subtracting 2.0 from the fuze setting read un-
der the elevation gageline. der the time gageline.
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge (2) Adjust the height of burst by increas-
5 GB (M3 propellant) ing or decreasing site in accordance with the
observer's correction. (No height-of-burst cor-
Fire-for-effect chart rection (20/R) is applied when the adjustment
range-- 6,040 meters with fuze time is begun.)
Comp range (VI + 30 c. Base-ejection smoke HC normally is the
meters) + 6 meters same weight as HE; therefore, a weight correc-
Entry range (6040 + tion is not required for smoke HC. However,
(+6) = 6046 = 6000)_ 6,000 meters base-ejection colored smoke is considerably light-
Weight of projectile er than HE and the FDC can improve the ac-
HE 4 squares curacy of colored smoke by applying a weight
Weight of projectile correction.
WP 7 squares
Difference in weights 24-7. Building and Maintaining a Smoke-
of projectiles + 3 squares screen (Smoke HC)
a. The unit should fire two rounds per point
Weight of projectile
of impact as rapidly as possible to form an ade-
unit correction
quate smokescreen quickly and then maintain
(range 6000) +25 meters the smokescreen by firing at the minimum rate
Range correction (+ 25)
necessary. The minimum rate of fire is governed
x 3) = +75 or 80) _ + 80 meters largely by the velocity of the wind. A guide for
Corrected range (6040 selecting the rate of fire for the 105-mm and
+ 80) 6,120 meters 155-mm howitzers in maintaining a screen is
Place the hairline over 6,120 meters and shown below.
read the elevation under the elevation gageline. Rate of fire per point of impact
c. When necessary, the adjustment may be (number of seconds between rounds)
Wind velocity
continued with one piece firing WP until it is (miles per hour) 105-mm howitzer 155-mm howitzer

in the proper place. The correction for projec- 60 120

tile weight is considered constant for a parti- 10 40 80
cular mission and need not be changed during 15 30 60
the adjustment. Not". The above rates must be modified according to
what the observer sees on the ground.
b. The spacing of the points of fall, which
24-6. FDC Procedure for Adjustment of HC
may be as great as 400 meters or as small as 30
Smoke meters, depends on the speed and direction of
a. When HC smoke is to be used, the adjust-
ment is begun with one piece firing HE, fuze the wind and the size of the front to be screened.
quick, and the lowest practical charge. Using The points of fall are based on the observer's
the lowest practical charge reduces the possibil- request and are changed as necessary to correct
ity of rupturing the canisters or scattering for changes in weather and the tactical situa-
them on impact. An interior piece should be tion.
used in the adjustment. This will facilitate ad- 24-8. Toxic Chemical Projectile
justment on additional points left or right of the a. When toxic chemical projectiles are used,
initial adjusting point if they are needed. particular attention must be given to selection of
b. When the observer has adjusted to within the area into which the chemical projectiles will
100 meters of the adjusting point, he usually re- be fired. Wind direction and velocity and tem-

24-2
 FM 6-40

perature gradient are factors of great import- weight of the toxic chemical projectile and must
ance in this selection and determine the number apply an additional correction to compensate for
of chemical projectiles required for achieving the the increased drag (based on a 1 1/2 percent
desired results. If friendly troops are downwind increase in air density). These corrections are
from the target area, they must mask. See FM determined as shown in the example below.
3-10 for information concerning the computa-
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 5
tion of safety distance. GB (M3 propellant).
b. Toxic chemical agents are employed in
either a vapor (nonpersistent) form or a liquid Fire-for-effect chart
droplet (persistent) form. A different fire di- range 6,040 meters
rection technique is required for achieving the Weight of projectile
best results with each form. HE 4 squares
(1) When a chemical projectile is used for Weight of projectile
producing a nonpersistent vapor hazard in the GB 7 squares
target area- Difference in weights of
(a) A point-detonating fuze normally projectiles - + 3 squares
should be used. Weight of projectile
(b) Surprise fire is essential. Sufficient unit correction
artillery must be used so that all rounds impact (range 6000) + 25 meters
within 30 seconds. Range correction
(c) A separate point of impact is as- (25 x 3) + 75 meters
signed to each battery-size unit. Air density correction
(2) When a chemical projectile is used for for 1 percent
contaminating the target area with persistent (range 6000) - + 10.0 meters
liquid droplets- Range correction
(a) A low airburst normally should be (10.0 X 1 ) -- + 15.0 meters
used. Corrected range
(b) Surprise fire is not essential. (6040 + 90) 6,130 meters
(c) Each group of rounds is fired at 'a Place the hairline over 6,130 meters and
different point of impact. Normally, zone fire read the elevation under the elevation gageline.
will give the best coverage.
c. In computing firing data for transfer of Note. Refer to the introductory portion of the
appropriate firing table for other projectile-fuze combina-
fire, the FDC must apply a correction to the HE tions that require air density corrections because of the
GFT setting to compensate for the increased increased effect of drag.

Section III. ILLUMINATNG PROJECTILES

24-9. General failures; however, use of the drogue chute re-
a. Illuminating projectiles are provided for the quires fuze activation prior to main chute deploy-
105-mm and 155-mm howitzers. The uses of il- ment.
luminating projectiles and the procedures for
the adjustment of these projectiles are covered
24-10. Selection of Charge
in paragraphs 13-6 and 13-7. When an illuminating projectile is to be fired,
b. This section is devoted primarily to the the lowest possible charge should be selected in
FDC procedures applicable to the 155-mm howit- order to reduce the possibility of ripping the
zer firing illuminating projectile M485 and fuze parachute when the flare is ejected from the
M565. FDC procedures for the 105-mm howitzer projectile.
are the same except as otherwise indicated in
this discussion. 24-11. Chart Data
c. The major improvements in the M485 pro- a. The HCO plots the location and announces
jectile over other illuminating projectiles are chart data as in any other mission.
greater illumination, a longer burning time, and b. The VCO determines and announces the
a slower rate of descent. In addition, the M485 vertical interval between the battery and the
employs a drogue chute, which reduces chute ground level in the area to be illuminated.

24-3
FM 6-40

24-12. Firing Data designated scale, graphical firing, 155AH-

In converting chart data to firing data, the com- 21LLM485. A complete set of GFT's consists
puter must consider the type of adjustment to be of two rules. Each rule consists of a cursor and
conducted. a base, which is 18 inches long and 3 1/2 inches
a. Deflection. Deflection corrections determin- wide. A set of scales for a single charge is in-
ed by firing HE are disregarded. The deflection scribed on each side of a base. The scales for
to be fired depends on the type of adjustment. charges 1 and 3 are on rule 1. The scales for
(1) One gun. The chart deflection is fired. charges 5 and 7 are on rule 2. There is suffi-
(2) Two guns. The chart deflection is fired cient overlap between these four charges to per-
by both pieces. mit the elimination of charges 2, 4, and 6. Charge
(3) Two guns, range spread. The chart de- 1 data start at a range of 500 meters; thus it is
flection is fired by both pieces. possilble to illuminate the firing position and the
(4) Two guns, lateral spread. The chart area immediately in front of the firing position.
deflection minus 5 times 100/R is fired by the Fuze activation and parachute deployment at the
right piece. The chart deflection plus 5 times shorter ranges of charge 1 occur on the ascend-
100/R is fired by the left piece. ing leg of the trajectory. The scales on the GFT,
(5) Four guns. The chart deflection is fired from top to bottom, are as follows:
by the two interior pieces. The chart deflection (1) 100/R scale. The 100/R scale denotes the
minus 5 times 100/R is fired by the right piece. number of mils necessary to shift the burst 100
The chart deflection plus 5 times 100/R is fired meters laterally for a given range.
by the left piece. (2) Range scale. The range scale is the
b. Elevation and Fuze Setting. Range correc- basic scale on the GFT and all other scales are
tions determined from firing HE may be used plotted with reference to it. Range is read to
(para 24-14d). The range at which elevation
the nearest 10 meters.
and fuze setting for each piece are determined
(3) Elevation-to-impact scale. The eleva-
depends on the type of adjustment. tion-to-impact scale is graduated in mils. Low-
(1) One gun. The chart range is fired. angle elevations increase from left to right and
(2) Two guns. The chart range is fired by
are read to the nearest mil. For charge 1 only,
both pieces. high angle elevations to impact are printed on
(3) Two guns, lateral spread. The chart the right side of the scale. The high-angle ele-
range is fired by both pieces. vations increase from right to left and are
(4) Two guns, range spread. The chart printed in red. The elevation-to-impact scale is
range plus 500 meters is fired by one piece and used for determining the range (on the range
the chart range minus 500 meters is fired by the scale) to which a nonfunctioning projectile
other piece. (dud) will travel.
(5) Four guns. The chart range is fired by
the flank pieces. The chart range plus 500 meters (4) Height-of-burst scales. At the left and
is fired by one interior piece and the chart range right of the main body of each set of scales are
minus 500 meters is fired by the other interior the height-of-burst scales, which are graduated
piece. in 50-meter increments. For all charges except
charge 1, the scales extend from 350 meters to
Note. When illuminating projectiles other than 950 meters. The scales for charge 1 extend from
M485 are fired, the lateral spread is plus and minus 4
times 100/R and the range spread is plus and minus 400
350 meters to 900 meters. (At the lowest range
meters. for charge 1, the QE required to reach 950 me-
ters exceeds the capability of the weapon.)
24-13. Illuminating Graphical Firing Table (5) Quadrant elevation scale. The quadrant
a. General. Graphical firing tables have been elevation scale indicates for each listed height
developed for use with illuminating projectiles of burst the QE necessary to achieve that height
M118 and M485 (155-mm) and M314 and M314- of burst and the desired range. The QE scale
A2E1 (105-mm). The description of the scales is graduated in mils and is read to the nearest
(b below) and the determination of firing data mil. The QE's for charge 1 are for both low-
(para 24-14 and 24-15) are basically the same angle fire and high-angle fire, depending on the
for all models of illuminating graphical firing range and the height of burst desired. The QE's
tables. for charges 3, 5, and 7 are for low-angle fire
b. Description of the Graphical Firing Tab- only.
les. The graphical firing table for the M485 is (6) Fuze setting scale. The fuze set-

24-4
 FM 6-40

ting (FS) scale consists of a red line for each Example: The following example illustrates
full fuze setting for the M565 fuze. The value the construction of the GFT setting and the de-
of each line is printed in red at the bottom of termination of quadrant elevation and fuze set-
the scale. Fuze setting is read for the desired ting:
range and height of burst to 0.1 accuracy by HE GFT setting: GFT B: Chg 5, lot
interpolation. XY, rg 5840, el 302
Chart range to the point to be illumin-
24-14. Determination of Data with the Illum-
ated: 7,260 meters
inating Graphical Firing Table
a. Quadrant elevation and fuze setting for a Vertical interval: + 60 meters.
given range and charge are determined as fol- (1) Place the hairline of the cursor over ad-
lows: Place the hairline over the range to the justed elevation 302 on the elevation-to-impact
point to be illuminated. Determine the height- scale.
of-burst scale to use by adding the vertical in- (2) Draw the range gageline over the GFT
terval to the nearest 50 meters to the optimum setting range (5,840 meters) and mark the gage-
height of burst. Read the quadrant elevation at line RG.
the intersection of the hairline and the selected (3) Place the range gageline over the
height-of-burst scale. Determine the fuze setting chart range (7,260 meters) to the point to be il-
to fire by interpolating between the red fuze set- luminated.
ting arcs for the point of intersection of the (4) Determine the height-of-burst scale to
hairline and the selected quadrant elevation. use.
b. A heavy black arrow on the quadrant ele- (a) Optimum HOB: 600 meters.
vation scale indicates the part of the trajectory (b) Vertical interval: +50 meters (near-
which is at or near the summit and which does est 50-meter increment).
(c) Height-of-burst scale
not exceed by 50 meters the height of burst to use: 650
which it represents. (600 + (+50)).
c. The optimum height of burst for all other (5) Read, at the intersection of the hairline
illuminating projectiles is 750 meters, the M485, and the 650-meter quadrant elevation scale, the
because of the longer burning time and slower quadrant elevation to fire: QE 547.
rate of descent, has an optimum height of il- (6) Interpolate between the red fuze setting
lumination of 600 meters above the area to be arcs bracketing the point of intersection of the
illuminated. hairline and the 650-meter quadrant elevation
d. The M485 is ballistically similar to the scale to obtain the fuze setting to fire: 26.6.
M107 HE projectile. If a current HE GFT set- Note. The procedure for determining the quadrant
elevation and fuze setting for the ascending branch is the
ting is available, the FDC can achieve greater same as the procedure for the descending branch.
initial accuracy with the M485 by constructing
the HE GFT setting on the illuminating GFT. 2.4-15. Determination of Firing Data Based on
This is possible because the range scales are Subsequent Observer Height-of-Burst
constructed logarithmically rather than linearly. Corrections
On the illuminating GFT, the GFT setting geo- Data based on subsequent height-of-burst cor-
metrically applies a constant range K instead of rections are determined in the following man-
a variable range K, which is possible on the ner:
slant scale GFT's; however, the error is negli- a. Determine the height-of-burst scale to use.
gible, considering the size of the area of illumi- (1) The observer always gives corrections
nation. Construct the GFT setting on the illum- to height of burst in multiples of 50 meters.
inating GFT by placing the hairline of the cur- (2) The computer algebraically adds observ-
sor over the adjusted elevation on the elevation- er corrections to the height of burst previously
to-impact scale and draw on the cursor a gage- used to obtain the height of burst for the next
line parallel to the hairline and through the GFT round(s).
setting range on the range scale. Mark this gage- b. Using the appropriate quadrant elevation
line RG. Determine data by placing the range scale, determine the quadrant elevation and fuze
gageline over the range to the point to be illum- setting as outlined in paragraph 24-14.
inated on the range scale and reading the quad-
rant elevation and fuze setting at the intersec- 24-16. Determination of Firing Data with the
tion of the selected quadrant elevation scale and Tabular Firing Tables
the hairline. a. Elevation and Fuze Setting. For each 100 me-

24-5
FM 6-40

ters in range, change 1 to the firing tables shows Although this problem illustrates the techniques
the elevation and fuze setting for the optimum used for four guns (range and lateral spread), a
height of illumination (600 meters above the separate study of the data used for pieces number
pieces) and the change in elevation and fuze set- 1 and number 6 will illustrate the techniques used
ting for a 50-meter change in height of burst. for two guns, lateral spread and study of the data
(Chart range is rounded to the nearest 100 meters used for number 2 and number 5 will illustrate the
in all cases.) techniques used for two guns, range spread.
b. Height-of-Burst Correction. The observer a. Known Data.
may make height-of-burst corrections in incre- Shell M485
ments of 50 meters during adjustment. To de- Lot ZW
termine the total height-of-burst correction, the Charge-----------------5GB (M3
computer adds the observer's cumulative height- propellant)
of-burst correction and the vertical interval 352 meters
Altitude of battery
(para 24-11b) rounded to the nearest 50 meters.
The corrections to elevation and fuze setting b. Chart Data.
'23496
are determined as follows: Deflection to target
(1) Divide the total height-of-burst correc- Range to target ( 5630
tion by 50. This gives the number of 50-meter Altitude of target 413
increments. c. Determination of Deflection to Fire.
(2) Determine from the firing tables the 100/R corresponding to
15
changes in elevation and fuze setting for a 50- range 6630
meter change in height of burst corresponding to 500/R (5 x 15 = 75) 75
the new chart range. Number 1 deflection
(3) Multiply the number of 50-meter in- (3496 + R75) 342.1
crements from (1) above by the values from (2) Number 2 and 5 deflection
above. (chart df) - 3,496
c. Data to be Fired. The fuze setting to be Number 6 deflection
fired is the sum of the fuze setting (a above) (3496 + L75) 3571
and the fuze setting correction for height of d. Determinationof QuadrantElevation.
burst (b above). The quadrant elevation to be Optimum HOB ......... 600 meters
fired is the sum of the elevation (a above) and Vertical interval
the elevation correction for height of burst. (413 - 352 = +61) +50 meters
24-17. Corrections (nearest
The proper height of burst, time of burning, 50-meter
and distance between bursts of adjacent rounds increment)
may vary from one projectile lot to another be- Height-of-burst scale
cause of variations in the illuminant. Storage (600 + (+50)) 650 meters
conditions and extended periods of storage may Number 1 QE (rg 6630) 498 mils
cause variations in performance of the illumin- Number 2 QE (rg 6630
ant. Large variations from the optimum height - 500 = rg 6130) 467 mils
of burst can be expected. To prevent waste of am- Number 5 QE (rg 6630
munition, the FDC personnel must record the + 500 .= rg 7130) 536 mils
corrections from all adjustments and determine Number 6 QE (rg 6630) 498 mils
the best height of burst for each ammunition e. Determinationof Fuze Setting.
lot. A correction to obtain the best height of
burst should be applied at the start of the adjust- Number 1 time (el 498) 23.1
Number 2 time (el 467) - 20.6
ment.
Number 5 time (el 536) 25.9
24-18. Example Number 6 time (el 498) 23.1
This example illustrates the manner in which Height-of-burst scale 650
initial and subsequent fire commands are deter- f. Subsequent Fire Commands. When the ob-
mined for illuminating projectile. The comput- server has been able to identify a target, he ini-
er's record for this mission is shown in figure tiates another call for fire for HE and continues
24-1. The GFT setting given in the example in using the illumination as described in paragraph
paragraph 24-14d will be used for this mission. 13-7.

24-6
 FM 6-40

FDC COMPUTER'S RECORD

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY 8 IDATE/IME RECEIVED TIMECOMPLETED JTG

CALL FOR FIRE qt lM4 67t?140 TOT DE INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS
&pL
e/ "F /Oj CORR 0INITIALFIRECOMMANDS
7 3 jz j A/r/?*O V// DF 3 ?96 + ADJUST SP INSTR$ ecoP?
I £,..U IV AD " A/,':" RG , EL SH L44 LOT ,
FIRE ORDER
UNIT(S).M&:1.?. MF . rt 76 r3 SI CHG $" FZ 7
BASIS FOR CORR -61 -
MF 4 - IN EFF
DISTR SH.,t-TI
LOT . CHG FZ ___ _, PC.Uln, DF TI
__/RDS; SPREAD 100/R15Qf1RISIJFSOrSII AMMO
TIME ..
,______' "E 7/
T I-.-N QE EXP
OBSERVER CORRECTIONS SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS
SH DEV RG HOB SH,CHG CHART CHART DF FS HOB SI EL QE AMMO
FZ FZ,MF RG DF CORR FIRED CORR CORR EXP
1 663,3v!?7 /$
V411_ -,
- -13o-- - , zo. - -67

S5 7130 l3u g , .3
6 6 630 3XI1I 3/qqi
f
6 26 3 Y
- o.. fq UO 7,eo0 f 3
"?g7 - 24 -#

6£ 7799 _0,oI

t,.oo t# r € I g ?'0.'o
3117 753 O " .C,5"/-

00 - -

EXPENDE

REMAINING
$/i0_ DATA FOR REPLOT ro
GRID IALTJFz JTGT
A MMUNITION
TYPE

LOTAL

DA FORM 3622, 1 Jan 74 REPLACES DA FORM 3622, 1 AUG 70, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.

Figure 24-1. Completed computer's record, illuminationmission.

24-7
FM 6-40

Section IV. PROPAGANDA PROJECTILE

24-19. General 24-20. FDC Procedure for Firing Propaganda
a. Artillery may be used for delivering psy- Projectile
chological warfare leaflets. Pinpoint accuracy is The data for firing propaganda projectile are
not required for propaganda missions. Twenty- determined in the same manner as that for an
five rounds from a 105-mm howitzer normally HE mission with the following exceptions:
will cover an area 500 by 500 meters. Corps ar- a. The height of burst above ground is ini-
tillery or higher headquarters normally issue the tially 100 meters. Wind velocity and direction
order to fire propaganda projectile and specify may affect the leaflets in such a way that a lower
the area to be covered and the amount of am- height of burst may be requested by the observer.
munition to be expended.
b. There is no standard propaganda projec- b. A correction to compensate for the varia-
tile. Ordnance prepares and issues the ammuni- tion in weight from that of a standard projectile
tion. Usually, an HC smoke projectile with the must be determined and applied to chart range.
filler and booster replaced by leaflets is used. Or- Elevation and fuze setting are determined at the
dnance must weigh the projectile and mark the corrected range by use of the GFT. If available,
weight on the projectile. a GFT setting for HE should be used.

Section V. ASSAULT FIRE

24-21. General corrections. During the remainder of the mis-
a. Assault fire is a special technique of indi- sion, a two-man team, consisting of a deflection
rect fire. One weapon, emplaced in defilade, fires computer and a quadrant computer, determines
on a target at a short range with the maximum the data that will place the burst directly on the
charge that will clear the intervening crests. target.
Because of the small vertical probable error of Note. If the angle T is less than 100 mils, the FDC
artillery weapons, assault fire is most effective team may use the 100/R and C factors during the adjust-
against a target with a significant vertical di- ment phase rather than plot the observer's corrections on
mension. the M17 plotting board.
b. The FDC for the mission normally is located (1) Before the start of the mission, the de-
at or near the weapon. Observer procedures for flection computer prepares a deflection shift card
assault fire are discussed in paragraphs 13-9 (fig 24-2) for the chart range to the target as
through 13-14. an aid in computing the required deflection
c. The assault fire mission must be carefully changes. He prepares the card by using the C and
planned and executed. FDC personnel, as part of D scales and M gagepoint of any GST. He sets
the assault fire team, plot the target on the firing
charts, compute initial data, and prepare deflec- Deflection shift card Chart range 1,500 meters
tion shift and quadrant change cards. Careful
preparations and planning and accurate initial Observer's deflection Deflection shift
data result in a short adjustment phase in an as- Correction (in meters) (in mils)
sault fire mission. 1/2 1/4
1
3/4
24-22. FDC Procedures for Assault Fire 2 11/4
a. Normal observed fire and FDC procedures 3 2
are used during the adjustment of an assault fire 4 3
mission. If FADAC is not available, the tabular 5 3
firing tables normally are used for determining 6 4
initial firing data because the shorter ranges for
7 5
the higher charges are not shown on the graphical
8 5
firing tables.
9 6
b. After the initial firing data have been de-
10 7
termined, the M17 (M10) plotting board is used
for determining corrections until the observer
announces vertical corrections rather than range Figure 24-2. Deflection shift card.

24-8
 FM 6-40

the range to the target on the C scale opposite

the observer's correction on the D scale and
reads the deflection shift in mils opposite the M
gagepoint. Deflection shifts in mils are rounded
to the nearest whole mil for observer corrections
greater than 2 meters and to the nearest 1/4 mil
for observer corrections of 2 meters or less.
(2) Deflections can be set off to 1/4 mil on
weapons equipped with the M100-series sights.
The use of a deflection board (fig 4-15) is re-
quired for other sights. The deflection board (fig
4-15) is used for setting off deflection in units of
1/4 mil. To determine a new deflection to include
the observer's corrections, the computer applies
the required deflection shift to the previous de-
flection by use of the LARS rule (left, add; right,
subtract).
Example: Chart range 1,500 meters.
Figure 24-3. Quadrantchange card.
Previous Observer's
deflection correction Deflection shift New deflection
fired (meters) from card (mils) command whole mil for observer corrections greater than
3210 Right 7 Right 5 3205 2 meters and to the nearest 1/10 mil for observer
3205 Left 4 Left 3 3208 corrections of 2 meters or less. The gunner's
3208 Left 2 Left 1 1/4 3209 1/4 quadrant is used throughout the mission. To de-
3209 1/4 Right 1 Right 3/4 8208 1/2 termine a new quadrant to include the observer's
3208 1/2 Left 1/2 Left 1/4 3208 3/4 correction, the computer applies the required
(3) The quadrant computer prepares in ad- quadrant change to the previous quadrant fired.
vance a quadrant change card (fig 24-3) for the Example: Chart range 1,500 meters.
chart range to the target as an aid in computing
Previous Observer's QE change
the required quadrant change (to the nearest QE correction from card New QE
fired (meters) (mils) command
1/10 mil). The quadrant card is prepared in the
same manner as the deflection shift card. Quad- 30.0 Up 4 +3 33.0
33.0 Down 2 -1.4 31.6
rant changes in mils are rounded to the nearest 31.6 Up 1/2 31.9
+0.3

Section VI. DESTRUCTION MISSIONS

24-23. General 24-24. FDC Procedures for Destruction Mis-
a. The purpose of a destruction mission is
to destroy a target by one or more direct hits. sion
a. The correct deflection for a destruction mis-
There are two primary considerations in the se-
lection of the weapon-charge combination to be sion is determined in the same manner as that
used: The projectile must be large enough to ac- for a precision registration.
complish the mission and the weapon-charge
b: An adjusted quadrant elevation is deter-
combination should give the smallest PER p0s- mined after six definite FDC spottings in fire
sible. Most destruction missions should be fired for effect have been obtained. The adjusted QE
by medium or heavy artillery; however, in some is computed and used to the nearest 0.1 mil.
situations light artillery can be effective. The Firing is continued, if necessary, with the ad-
8-inch howitzer is an excellent weapon for'a justed QE (nearest 0.1 mil). A new adjusted
destruction mission because of its small prob- QE is computed after each succeeding group of
able error and the effectiveness of its projectile. six definite FDC range spottings. If a second ad-
b. A destruction mission is a precision mis- justed QE is required, 1/2 of the computed ele-
sion. Because the destruction of the target is the vation change is applied to the previous adjusted
objective, the observer, not the S3, will termin- quadrant elevation. If a third adjusted QE is re-
ate the mission as soon as destruction of the quired, 1/3 of the computed elevation change is
target has been accomplished. applied. If a fourth adjusted QE or succeeding

24-9
FM 6-40

adjusted QE's are required, 1/4 of the computed The first adjusted QE is 244.5 mils.
elevation change is applied. The S3 directs the use of fuze concrete-
c. When a proj ectile-fuze combination other piercing.
than HE, fuze quick, is desired, the change is FT 155-AH-2 data:
made after the first adjusted QE has been com- Correction for fuze CP (1 percent in-
crease in air density) = +7.4
puted. If the ballistic properties of the desired
combination are different from those of the ori- meters
ginal combination, appropriate corrections for C factor = 5.8 mils
the nearest listed chart range must be applied. Correction to be applied:
Example: 155-mm howitzer (M109), charge 5 +7.4/100 x 5.8 = 0.43
Increase in QE = +0.4 mil
GB (M3 propellant), shell HE, fuze quick, range
5040.

Section VII. FINAL PROTECTIVE FIREC

24-25. General Length of
A final protective fire (FPF) is an immediately FPF
available prearranged barrier of fire designed to
impede enemy movement across defensive lines Width of sheaf
or areas. The FPF is used for establishing pre-
arranged close-in defensive fires in coordination
with other means including other artillery fires,
minefields, obstacles, final protective machinegun
fires, and mortar final protective fires. Each bat-
tery is assigned one final protective fire. The bat-
Width of sheaf
tery is normally laid on the FPF when it is not
firing other missions. The FPF may be fired on
Figure 24-4. Final protective fire.
prearranged signal or on call as often as neces-
sary. When possible, the data for the FPF should
each battery can limit its fire to the width of an
be verified or corrected by the firing of check
open sheaf. Assigning a battery a final protective
rounds.
fire that necessitates shifting fires greatly reduces
Characteristics of Final Protective Fires the effectiveness of the FPF as a barrier of fire.
24-26.
The firing of a battery final protective fire, either b. Preparation of Data. The final protective
individually or in coordination with final pro- fire may be at an angle to the direction of fire.
tective fires of other batteries, is based on the Special corrections to place each burst in the pro-
following: per position normally are used. Map data for an
a. Width of Final Protective Fire. The width FPF are taken from the center point of the FPF
(or the length: of the FPF (fig 24-4) assigned line. The computer determines corrections for each
to a battery should not exceed the width that piece by use of the M17 plotting board and base
can be covered by a single battery without shift- their corrections on the angle between the FPF
ing its fire. That is, the width of the FPF should and the direction of fire. Firing data are deter-
not exceed the width of an open sheaf (as mined by use of normal procedures except for-
shown in table 2-1). If the width (length) of (1) Distribution. A final protective fire is
the area to be covered exceeds the width of an fired with special corrections.
open sheaf, greater protection is obtained if suf- (2) Method of fire. The method of fire is
ficient reinforcing artillery is emplaced so that continuous fire at maximum rate.

Section VIII. COMBINED ADJUSTMENT

24-27. General nated by one observer or the S3. When direct com-
a. Observer procedures for combined adjust- munications between observers is impossible, the
ments are described in paragraphs 13-15 through FDC must coordinate the operations for the ob-
13-20. servers.
b. Targets or adjusting points may be desig- c. Only one piece is used in adjustment.

24-10
 FM 6-40

24-28. FDC Procedure for Combined Adjust- QE fired (el 289) +

ments, Observation Posts Plotted site (+6)) 295 mils
a. For combined adjustments, the target is
Deflection fired (df
plotted and firing data are determined in the nor-
corr 0) 3,427 mils
mal manner. Orientation data for the OP's may
Measured range to
be determined in the manner prescribed in para-
burst location 5,790 meters
graph 19-29. Correction for range
b. After the initial round has beenl fired and (5900 - 5790) + 110 meters
the observers have reported the directions (or Corrected range
deviations), rays are drawn from each OP at the (5900 + 110) 6,010 meters
reported directions. The intersection of the rays Elevation corresponding
is the location of the burst. Range and deflec- to 6,010 meters 297 mils
tion corrections to place the burst at the target New QE (297 +
are measured. New firing data are computed and (+ 6)) -- - - - - - 303 mils
fired. Measured deflection to
Example: 155-mm howitzers M109, charge burst location 3,433 mils
Deflection correction
5 GB (M3 propellant).
(3427 -3433) R6 mils
Chart range to target 5,900 meters New deflection
Chart deflection 3,427 mils (3427 + R6) 3,421 mils

Section IX. SOUND, FLASH, AND RADAR MISSIONS

24-29. Target Acquisition Elements times be limited by poor visibility and adverse
a. Target Acquisition Battalion. The field artil-
terrain. The flash ranging platoon is used for-
lery target acquisition battalion (FATAB) as'
(1) Locating hostile artillery and other
signed to corp artillery has the means for locating
hostile targets in the area.
targets, adjusting and registering friendly artil- (2) Adjusting and registering friendly
artil-
lery fire, and assisting in the calibration of artil-
lery.
lery. The target acquisition batteries of the bat-
(3) Assisting in the performance of com-
talion contain sound, flash, and radar platoons,
parative calibration of cannon artillery by provid-
which are deployed to cover common areas in sup-
ing the mean burst location.
port of the corps artillery mission. c. Radar. The AN/MPQ-4A radar is organic
b. Target Acquisition Platoon. The target ac- to the target acquisition battery, field artillery
quisition platoon organic to the direct support
target acquisition battalion (FATAB), and per-
battalion has the means for locating targets and
forms the counterbattery role. It is also organic
adjusting and registering friendly artillery and
to the target acquisition platoon of the direct sup-
mortars. port artillery battalions and performs the coun-
24-30. Target Acquisition Techniques termortar role. Radar operations are not affected
The techniques employed by sound, flash, and by poor visibility due to darkness or fog; however,
radar units are covered in FM 6-122 and FM heavy rain or snow can reduce the capability
6-161. of radar. Although the mobility of the radar is
somewhat reduced in mountainous terrain, radar
24-31. Capabilities and Limitations
The capabilities of sound, flash, and radar comple- can be effective in such terrain because of the
high angle of fire used. The AN/MPQ-4A is used
ment each other.
a. Sound. The operation of sound ranging equip- for locating hostile artillery and mortars and
ment is not affected by poor visibility; however, for registering and adjusting'friendly artillery
high winds interfere with the-operation of sound and mortars. This radar also has the capability
ranging equipment. Sound ranging is employed of providing survey information when normal
for locating hostile artillery and registering survey means are not available. The AN/MPQ-4A
is limited in its ability to locate hostile field artil-
friendly artillery.
b. Flash. Flash ranging is the most accurate liery firing low trajectory because of the inherent
means of locating targets; however, the efficiency countermortar design features of the radar.
of the flash ranging observation posts may at Radars are subject to detection and electronic
countermeasures i.e., jamming and deception.

24-11
FM 6-40

These vulnerabilities are minimized by the appli- agency (e.g., sound platoon) before firing com-
cation of appropriate electronic security (ELSEC) mences. The commands SHOT and SPLASH are
and electronic counter-countermeasure (ECCM) always given for each round.
procedures. FM 32-5 and FM 32-20 contain per- (2) All adjustments are conducted with one
tinent details. weapon.
(3) The adjusting agency may give refined
24-32. Target Designation corrections (e.g., RIGHT 110, ADD 550), which
a. Target location reports normally include would not be given by a ground observer, be-
the coordinates (grid or polar) and altitude of cause the burst is located accurately.
the target, the times the target was active, the (4) Sound-on-sound adjustments must be
accuracy of the location, and a description of the conducted with fuze quick.
target. In the absence of survey control, target (5) Normally, an adjustment by sound,
acquisition elements can report targets in relation flash, or radar will require less ammunition but
to a reference point, previous targets, or a re- the adjustment may be slower than an adjustment
gistration point that has been located relative to by conventional means, since each round must be
both the firing unit and the locating agency. Sound plotted before corrections are determined.
and radar units must determine the altitudes of
targets from maps; however, flash platoons can 24-34. Conduct of Registration
always determine relative altitudes. a. Artillery can be registered by means of sound
b. The location of a target or registration ranging, flash ranging, and radar. However,
point can be given to a target acquisition agency sound ranging can be used only for an MPI re-
either as grid coordinates or as a shift from a gistration and, since sound ranging is the least
known point. accurate of the three means, it should be used
only when the other means cannot be used.
24-33. Adjustment of Fire
a. The accuracy of the location, the type of b. The coordinates and altitude of the registra-
target, and the time available determine whether tion point (point selected for HB or MPI) should
a target located by sound, flash, or radar may be be determined by the firing battalion in coordina-
attacked with or without adjustment. tion with the target acquisition element. For a
b. When targets are to be attacked without high-burst or mean-point-of impact registration,
adjustment, FDC procedures are the same as the number of rounds fired is determined at the
those used for any fire-for-effect mission. The FDC; however, the target acquisition element
sound ranging platoon may request that one round may request one or more rounds fired AT MY
be fired after the fire for effect to plot the loca- COMMAND in order to orient the observers or,
tion of the effect, because sound tapes are dif- in the case of sound ranging or radar, to insure
ficult to read when many rounds are bursting at positive identification. A specified interval be-
one time. tween rounds may also be requested. For each
c. When sound, flash, or radar is used for con- round fired, the target acquisition element deter-
ducting the adjustment of fire on a target, the mines the location of the round and reports
FDC will receive a standard call for fire and this location to the FDC. This enables the FDC
subsequent corrections. The procedures are the to determine the validity of each round. Sound
same as those used in a normal adjustment by an and flash elements report the location of each
observer except as indicated in (1) through (5) round by grid coordinates, whereas radar ele-
below. ments report the location either by grid coordin-
(1) Time of flight is given to the adjusting ates or by polar coordinates.

Section X. GUNNERY PROCEDURES FOR IMPROVED

CONVENTIONAL MUNITIONS
24-35. General a. FiringBattery.
Gunnery procedures for the delivery of improved (1) A major consideration of ICM is identi-
conventional munitions (ICM) can be broken fication. The projectile is painted olive drab and
down into three areas-firing battery, observer, is marked with the model number and, normally,
and fire direction center. Basic gunnery proce- a band of yellow diamonds around the ogive. For
dures for standard HE ammunition also apply some 105-mm projectiles, the container and the
to ICM; however, there are some variations with ammunition box, rather than the projectile, will
which personnel must become familiar. be marked with the band of diamonds. Strict

24-12
 FM 6-40

segregation must be maintained because these Range and deviation are corrected from the center
markings may become obscured by dirt. of the effects pattern. Height of burst is corrected
(2) Fuzes used with ICM are the M548 and in 50-meter increments. How far UP or DOWN
the M565 fuzes only. In all fire commands, the the observer should go depends on the experience
fuze must be specified by model number. Fuzes gained with adjustment of this round. The basic
M548 and M565 are identical except that the criterion is that if a large number of duds are
M548 has a point-detonating mode and the M565 observed or if the effects pattern appears too
does not. Neither fuze has a booster. The M63 small, the observer should give an UP correction.
and XM34 fuze setters are used to place settings This correction should not exceed 100 meters
on these fuzes. The fuze setting for firing ICM until the observer becomes familiar with the ef-
is critical; therefore, extreme care must be taken fects of changes in height of burst.
in setting the fuze. (6) When adjusting close-in fires with ICM,
(3) Normal storage, handling, and emer- the observer must start the adjustment at least
gency destruction procedures also apply to ICM. 600 meters from friendly troops, depending on
(4) ICM cannot be fired in direct fire as that the relative positioning of the weapons, target,
term is presently defined. However, direct fire and friendly troops and on the wind direction
tables are included in the addenda to certain firing and speed. The adjustment should be made with
tables and are used by the chief of section for the entire battery and corrections should be made
firing ICM in close-in battery defensive fires. from the near edge of the effects pattern.
These tables contain the quadrant and fuze setting
c. Fire Direction Center.
for estimated ranges between 300 and 3,000 me-
(1) The procedure for computing data for
ters. Wind direction and speed must be considered
firing ICM is applicable under the following con-
when ICM is fired in close-in battery defensive
ditions:
fires in order to preclude danger to friendly troops.
Also included in the addenda are tables designed (a) Observer adjustment. The adjustment
to provide rapid response indirect fire that can be may be conducted with either HE or ICM. Ad-
used for close-in battery defensive fires. For justment with ICM is not recommended since
actual direct fire in battery defensive fires, the Bee- it eliminates the element of surprise.
hive round is still preferred. (b) Met plus VE. Current met correc-
tions must be available.
b. Observer. (c) K-transfer. Current registration cor-
(1) In order to aid the FDC, the observer rections must be available.
may include an estimation of wind direction and
speed in the call for fire. An accuracy of 100 mils (2) FDC procedures for ICM involve the use
in direction and 5 knots in velocity is desirable. of appropriate firing table addenda for deter-
A smoke or WP round may aid the observer in mining low-level wind corrections and ballistic
making his estimation. corrections to give the proper trajectory for ICM.
(2) ICM is most effective against soft tar-
gets, such as troops in the open. The observer 24-36. Example
must be familiar with and must be capable of The following example illustrates the procedures
advising the supported commander on the ef- for firing ICM. Although the M449A1 projectile
fects produced by HE, and those produced by ICM and M109 howitzer are used in the example, these
and the effectiveness of ICM in various types of procedures are applicable to all weapons when
terrain. firing ICM (fig 24-5).
(3) Some malfunctions (duds) do occur a. Known Conditions.
with 1CM, particularly from low air bursts. The Battery coordinates 3971016255
observer must report all duds and erratic rounds. Battery altitude 432 meters
Duds should be treated as potential mines or boo- Target coordinates 3873023200
bytraps. Target altitude 451 meters
(4) Surprise fire is most effective and desir- Battery laying:
able with 1CM. When current corrections are not Azimuth 350 mils
available, the observer should adjust with HE on Referred deflection 3,200 mils
a point near the target and then shift and fire for GFT setting:
effect with 1CM on the target. GFT A: Chg 5, lot YZ, rg
(5) Procedures for the adjustment of ICM 6480, el 344, ti 22.4
are similar to those for the adjustment of HE. Total deflection correction RiO

24-13
FM 6-40

FDC COMPUTER'SRECORD
For use of this form, see FM 6.40; the proponent aoency is TRAOrC"
BATTERY DATEJTIME RECEIVED TIME COMPLETED TGT
CALL FOR FIREZ&pMrA
3 73 Z O, /
L?
,//"
TOT DF
FCORR
1 INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS
-O
CeOMA~/IP// , v7; P ________DF_______ 9y ADJUST SP INSTRg
RG t 70 FL 9,'/
H f - "LOT

FIRE ORDER: S . CHG FZ .',t?

UNIT(S). 14 MFT $/.
BASIS FOR CORR 'MF 2f RY IN EFF
DISTR CM. SH
LOT . ' CHG .X FZ, M'a 1DF36 e47 TI 3 ,'
RDS;.
TIME'-'3 SPREAD.TQE
TIME TGT4Ar . ,6ZL.. ________7_____________________

OBSERVER CORRECTIONS .. SUBSEOUENT FIRE-. COMMANDS'

- _-
SH DEV RG HoB SH,CHG CHART CHART DF FS TI HOBSI
FZ FZMF RG DF CORR FIRED CORR CORR SExP
Cc R.
. w I , e.z .1

c.// tpYT 7030 C). //'t/

/.

DATA FOR REPLOT

GRID ALT FZ TGT
AMMUNITION
TYPE
LOT _

ON HAND
RECEIVED ,,
TOTAL __ _ __

EXPENDED ______.______

REMAINING

DA FORM 3622, 1 Jan 74 REPLACES DA FORM 3622, 1 AUG 70, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.

Figure 24-5. Computer's record, ICM.

24-14
 FM 6-40

Line 01 of a current met and fuze setting to the wind-displaced plot for
message 013418 947115 projectile HE M107.
b. Determination of QE to Target for HE Pro- Elevation 381 mils
jectile. Site + 3 mils
Chart range 7,030 meters QE 384 mils
Site + 3 mils Fuze setting 24.6
Elevation 386 mils f. Firing Data for Projectile M449A1.
QE- - - 389 mils (1) Apply the total deflection correction to
the target to the chart deflection to determine the
c. Correction for Low-Level Wind.
deflection to fire.
(1) Determine wind direction and speed
Total deflection cor-
from line 01 of the met message or from the ob-
rection for elevation
server's estimate.
3,400 mils 381 R9
Wind direction
18 knots Deflection to fire
Wind speed
A, FT 155-ADD- (3696 + R(-)9) 3,687
(2) Enter column 1, table
HE QE to the nearest (2) Enter column 1, table A, at the value
E-1, charge 5G, with the
the low-level nearest the adjusted QE (385) to obtain the cor-
listed value (390) and determine
rection to QE from column 2. Express the cor-
wind correction factor from column 7.
rection to the nearest mil and add it algebraically
Low-level wind cor-
to the adjusted QE.
rection factor ......... 3.8 m/knot
Adjusted QE 384
(3) To determine the targe displacement for
low-level wind, multiply the wind speed by the Correction to QE +33
low-level wind correction factor and express the QE to fire 417
result to the nearest 10 meters. (3) Enter column 1, table B, with the ad-
justed fuze setting (2.4.6) to obtain the correction
Target displacement
(18 x 3.8 = 68.4) 70 meters to fuze setting from column 2. Algebraically add
the correction to fuze setting to the adjusted fuze
d. Target Displacement. Place the center of the setting to obtain the fuze setting to fire.
target grid over the target and set off the met Adjusted fuze setting 24.6
wind direction (3400) opposite the north index. Correction to fuze
This places the arrow pointing into the wind. Dis- setting -1.1
place the target plot toward the arrowhead (into Fuze setting to fire 23.5
the wind) by 70 meters. Measure chart data to the (4) Data to fire are as follows:
wind-displaced plot: Deflection 3,687
Range 6,970 meters 23.5
Time
Deflection - 3,696 mils
Quadrant - 417
e. Determinationof QE and Fuze Setting. Using Note. Additional information concerning im-
the GFT and the GFT setting, determine the QE proved conventional munitions is contained in FM 6-141-1.

Section Xl. DEAD SPACE

24-37. General grazing point of the trajectory; i.e., the point
Dead space is the area within the maximum nearest the battery where the trajectory inter-
range of a weapon that cannot be covered by fire sects the ground (fig 24-6). The far limit is the
from a particular position because of intervening first point of impact beyond the near limit, or
obstacles, the nature of the ground, the char- grazing point. Additional limits, particularly at
acteristics of the trajectory, or the mechanical very short ranges, may be imposed by the char-
limitations of elevating and depressing the tube. acteristics of the fuze fired. These additional
Dead space areas can be determined only with limits are often undeterminable owing to varying
an accurate contour map. Trajectories for all factors of the position, weapon, and ammunition.
charges, low- and high-angle fire, must be consid- Some examples of possible additional limits due
ered in the computation of dead space. Dead to fuze characteristics are as follows:
space is a more serious problem for guns than a. VT fuzes have a minimum arming time
it is for howitzers. range, short of which they will not function.
24-38. Limits b. Time fuzes are restricted to the minimum
The near limit for any dead space area is the and maximum effective functioning times.

24-15
 FM 6-40

,QE 305mils

E 305mils
-'---IQ E 240mils _T_
a Grazing point (near point) b b
b Far point
c Dead space
Figure 24-6. Dead space profile.

24-39. Determination of Dead Space and 5 meters (or the proper vertical clearance
Dead space may be determined by the quadrant for fuze VT) at piece-crest range (para 4-9).
elevation ray method. The dead space for one (4) Determine additional dead space areas
ray is determined, and the process is repeated along the ray in the same manner as that de-
for such additional rays as necessary to clearly scribed in (1) and (2) above.
indicate the extent of the dead spaces. b. Adjacent rays should form an angle no
a. The procedure for each charge and type of greater than 100 mils except in very symmetrical
fire is as follows: terrain. In extremely hilly terrain, it may be
(1) Draw a ray on a map overlay from the necessary to determine dead space at 50-mil or
plotted position of the piece through the desired smaller increments. The smaller the increments,
point on the intervening terrain feature. Deter- the more accurate the dead space diagram. Dead
mine by inspection the highest point of the crest space for additional rays is determined in the
considered. Determine the quadrant elevations of same manner as that described in a above.
this point and other points on the ray that are
50 to 100 meters beyond the highest point of the 24-40. Dead Space Chart
crest. The point requiring the greatest quadrant a. FDC personnel may outline the area of dead
elevation marks the beginning of the dead space space on a chart or map by connecting points of
and is known as the grazing point. determined quadrant elevation, corresponding to
(2) Determine the point of impact, or far the same hill crest, on adjacent rays. Dead space
limit of dead space, by finding a point beyond is shaded or labeled.
the crest that requires the same quadrant ele-
b. Unless directed otherwise, dead space charts
vation as the grazing point. The process is one
forwarded to higher headquarters need show only
of trial and error. Select by inspection a test point
dead space areas for low-angle and high-angle
of impact based on the range corresponding to the
fires without regard to charge. Dead space charts
quadrant elevation for the grazing point and
for the battalion FDC should be improved as
determine the quadrant elevation for the test point.
time permits. Improved charts should show charge
If the quadrant elevation is less than that for capabilities as well as dead space areas for low-
the grazing point, the point is in dead space;
angle and high-angle fires.
if the quadrant elevation is greater than that for
the grazing point, the point is beyond dead space. c. In rugged terrain, it may be necessary to
Repeat the process until the point of impact is determine whether a target is in dead space
located to the desired degree of accuracy. prior to the completion of a dead space chart.
(3) When friendly elements occupy the ter- The procedure described in paragraph 24-39a is
rain that is being considered, quadrant elevation used for determining the dead space on a ray
must be increased by safety factors of 2 forks drawn from the battery to the target.

'24-16
 FM 6-40

Section XII. MISCELLANEOUS

24-41. Data Sheets artillery is required to fire from one grid zone
Since prearranged fires are fire-for-effect mis- into another. When this situation occurs, the grid
sions, the FDC must determine and maintain coordinates of points and the azimuth of lines
current corrections to chart data and correct fire from the grid of one zone must be transformed
commands for these missions. To facilitate main- to the grid of the adjacent zone. This transforma-
taining current chart and firing data for pre- tion will put the target and the firing unit on a
arranged fires, battalion FDC personnel normally common grid. Transformation of grid coordinates
predetermine these data and enter them on the and azimuths can be accomplished by means of
Firing Battery Data Sheet (DA Form 4199). computations as outlined in FM 6-2 graphically
(DA Form 4199 is available through normal AG as outlined in b below, or by FADAC as outlined
publication supply channels.) If time permits, in FM 6-40-3.
the computer at the battery fire direction center
b. GraphicalZone to Zone Transformation.
converts the data from the battery data sheet to
(1) Map construction. Each US military map
individual piece data and enters these data on the
that covers an area within 25 miles of a UTM
Firing Battery Section Data Sheet. (DA Form
grid zone junction has printed around the border
4007). A sample firing battery data sheet is
two sets of grid line numbers. One set is printed
shown in figure 24-7. The form is self-explana-
in black and the other, corresponding to the ad-
tory except for the following:
joining zone, is printed in blue. The marginal
a. The times entered indicate when firing is information indicates the color that applies to
started and lifted. each zone.
b. Time of flight normally is omitted. When
time of flight is significant, as it is for fires on (2) Designation of the primary zone.
positions about to be assaulted by infantry, TOT (a) Either of the two adjoining zones may
fire, high-angle fire, or fires at extreme ranges, be designated as the primary zone.
time of flight is entered and is used at the battery (b) Designation of the primary zone is
to modify the listed time of firing. dependent on one or more of the following:
c. Columns for special corrections and zone 1. Where most of the action is expected
using the common UTM zone junction longitudinal to occur.
d. The remarks column contains any special 2. Unit SOP.
instructions. 3. The commander's guidance.
e. When new corrections are obtained, the old 4. Anticipated future operations.
commands are lined out and the change is entered. (c) Generally, unit SOP dictates how the
primary zone will be designated and which pro-
24-42. Fire Capabilities Overlay cedure will be used to determine the grid conver-
The fire capabilities overlay of the battalion gence factor; however, in the absence of an SOP,
shows the area that can be reached by the com- these decisions are made by the controlling artil-
bined capabilities of the batteries of the battalion lery headquarters.
as directed. The area that can be reached by 2/3
of the pieces in deflection and range is the fire (3) Preparationof the maps.
capability of the battery. The fire capabilities (a) Once the primary zone has been de-
overlay of the battalion, as reported to higher signated, the map is prepared for transformation
artillery headquarters, may show the area that of data from one zone to another. If more than
can be reached by each battery or may show the one map is used, fasten the two maps together,
combined coverage of all the batteries. The over- using the common UTM zone junction longitudinal
lay is used in conjunction with the dead space line for orientation.
overlay for determining areas not covered by (b) Superimpose the grid of the primary
units to fire on targets. For detailed information zone over the adjacent zone by use of a straight-
and illustrations of the fire capabilities overlay, edge.
see FM 6-20. (c) Draw the east-west grid lines into the
adjacent zone by aliming the straightedge with the
24-43. Universal Transverse Mercator Grid tick marks around the border and number the
Zone Transformation grid lines with j e appropriate values.
a. General. Occasionally, throughout the (d) Drav the north-south grid lines by
world, operations may take place in an area where alining the straightedge with the appropriate

24-17
13
FIRING BATTERY DATA SHEET
For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is US Army Training and Doctrine Command.
BA T T E R Y
BATTERTUATE
C O O R D IN A T E S

,, aco 93
l
AL I UD.F..TR
OF BATTERY
C/7.
YT M EL

,oo 0
TIEDATE
A

/-00 FPAGE
N O.

CHART DATA FIRE COMMANDS

TIME TIME DEFLECTION RANGE SITE DIFF ALT CORR HG CORR DF TI

TGTOFDFzoE E REAK
NO. COORDINATES OF
ZOEIEMSHKFZS

FROM TO (Sec) CORR CHART EL SITE HT INDIVIDUAL INDIV

F HT OF OF BURST LOT MF SHEAF CORR
BURST CORRECTION

AF 5383+

AF 538,43 D'O,+40
053t o53 0 3O3 +13E D

A'530(p31 3435 24'O 3- 323 FIE 5

2Iq 3b525 os o ,q/ L'/ £LEVATIO4"#
Zoo zo~ ~ VT
METER ~ ~ ~ . Z/°/ 0 y B(3'
z38qo
4 .3(, TOT
O., 3oz, 053 _ 02543
.3 60,_,
z o/R +Q x B(9)

M IE~nA A AOlk.O
I
REPLACES DA FORM 6-14, 1 NOV 63, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.
UA JAN 74 4199
Figure 24-7. Firing battery datasheet.
 FM 6-40

tick marks along the border of the map and ing grid coordinates, polar plot, or shift from a
number the grid lines with the appropriate values. known point. His map will require no superim-
Note. Use a distinctive colored line in drawing posed grid lines and his azimuth-measuring in-
the superimposed grid to facilitate rapid transformation struments should be declinated for the same grid
of data and to reduce the possibility of error. line as the location used in his call for fire.
(4) Determination of the grid convergence (3) FDC procedures.
factor. The grid convergence factor is used for (a) Ip the FDC, all grid coordinates and
converting an azimuth from the grid of one azimuths should be in terms of the primary
grid zone to that of an adjacent grid zone. This zone.
factor is determined from the marginal informa- (b) The firing charts which may be used
tion of the maps or from a current Army Ephe- as the primary method of computing firing data
meris. or used in conjunction with FADAC, should also
(a) The marginal information printed on be in terms of the primary zone.
US military maps gives the grid convergence (c) On the battle map, the primary zone
(grid declination) at the'center of the map should be superimposed over the secondary zone.
sheet. When the map sheet is within 25 miles The battle map is used for converting grid co-
of a grid junction, the grid convergence for each ordinates from the secondary zone into grid co-
zone is given. One convergence is easterly and one ordinates of the primary zone. First, plot the
westerly. The grid convergence factor is the sum grid coordinates, using the printed grid lines of
of these two figures expressed to the nearest the secondary zone, and then read the new grid
10 mils. coordinates for this point, using the superimposed
(b) The convergence factor may also be grid lines of the primary zone.
computed by use of table 15, TM 6-300-(current (d) The grid convergence factor is det-
year) (Army Ephemeris). ermined to the nearest mil'and expressed to the
1. Determine the northing coordinate of nearest 10 mils. It is generally determined only,
the firing unit by using the grids of both the pri- once for a firing position.
mary and the secondary zones. (4) FDC operation. For a target that falls
2. Add these two values and divide by in the primary zone, the mission is processed by
2 to obtain the average northing. This is the standard gunnery procedures as outlined herein.
argument for entry into the table. For a target that falls in the secondary zone,
3. Enter the appropriate table for the the procedures are modified as outlined in (a) and
latitude of the area. Use the average northinp (b) below.
coordinate and enter column N to the nearest
(a) Target location by grid coordinates.
listed value and determine the correction factor
When grid coordinates of a target in the secon-
in mils from column G.
dary zone are received by the FDC, they must be
(c) The sign of the convergence factor can transformed into the primary zone.
be determined from the following chart: 1. The VCO plots the secondary zone
Northern Hemisphere Southern Hemiaphere
grid coordinates on his battle map and reads the
East to west, sign is - East to west, sign is +
West to east, sign is + West to east, sign is - corresponding primary zone grid coordinates from
Note. In the Southern Hemisphere; subtract the average the map.
northing coordinate from 10,000,000 before entering the 2. The HCO plots the grid coordinates
table. of the primary zone.
c. Gunnery Procedures. 3. The computer applies the grid con-
(1) General. The fire direction procedures vergence factor to the reported OT azimuth and
necessary to rapidly calculate accurate firing data announces the converted azimuth to the HCO.
across a UTM grid zoiie junction are based on The HCO orients the target grid over the target
three primary considerations. on the converted azimuth.
(a) Standard or normal call for fire pro- 4. At this point, the target location has
been completely transformed into the primary
cedures are utilized.
(b) The firing charts should remain as zone and the remainder Of the mission is computed
simple and uncluttered as possible. in the standard manner.
(c) The system should be capable of easily (b) Target location by pokar plot or shift
controlling a number of firing units. from a known point. When an observer in the
(2) Observer procedures. The observer sends secondary zone locates a target by polar plot or
the target location in the normal manner by US- by a shift from a known point, the observer's

24-19
FM 6-40

location or the known point must be plotted on HCO orients the target grid over the known point
the chart. Therefore, the grid coordinates have on the converted azimuth.
already been converted to the primary zone and
the HCO moves the RDP to the plot on the chart. 2. Again, the target location has been
1. The computer applies the grid con- completely transformed into the primary zone and
vergence factor to the observer's OT azimuth and the remainder of the mission is processed in the
announces the converted azimuth to the HCO. The standard manner.

Section XIII. 8-INCH HOWITZER-NUCLEAR DELIVERY

24-44. General 24-46. Accuracy
a. Procedure. This section describes fire direc- All firing data are determined to the same ac-
tion techniques for delivery of the 8-inch howitzer curacy as that required for standard gunnery
nuclear round. Delivery techniques for the 8-inch procedures.
howitzer nuclear round are the same as standard
gunnery procedures with the exception of the de- 24-47. Selection of Delivery Technique
termination of the fuze setting and the addition a. Considerationsin Selection of Delivery Tech-
of ballistic corrections for the nuclear round. nique. Listed below are some of the considera-
b. Nomenclature. tions in the selection of a delivery technique.
(1) The high-explosive spotting round (HES The S3 must evaluate all considerations in mak-
M424) is used for registrations and adjustments. ing his decision.
(2) The nuclear round (NUC M422) is used (1) The tactical situation.
for fire for effect. (2) The commander's guidance.
c. Preferred Techniques. The two preferred (3) The desirability of surprise.
techniques for the delivery of nuclear rounds (4) The weather conditions.
from an 8-inch howitzer are- (5) The availability of spotting rounds.
(1) The met plus VE technique. (6) The time available.
(2) The K-transfer (GFT) technique. (7) Restrictions on registrations.
d. Observer's Adjustment Technique. If the in- (8) Survey.
formation necessary for the employment of a pre- (9) The validity of the GFT setting, velo-
ferred technique is not available, an adjustment city error, deflection, and total fuze correction.
and fire-for-effect (observer adjustment) techni- b. Registrations. In a nuclear war, it is anti-
que may be used. cipated that the unit will register (three-round
high burst) at least one weapon with shell HES
24-45. Requirements for Delivery Techniques immediately after occupying the position. This
The requirements for the use of the various de- registration will establish a position VE to be
livery techniques of 8-inch nuclear rounds are used for the met plus VE technique and a GFT
as follows: setting to be used for the K-transfer technique.
a. Met Plus VE. The following data must be c. Accuracy of Techniques. The accuracy of
available: each technique depends on the situation and the
(1) Accurate survey data for the gun and available data. There are so many variables that
target. one technique cannot be considered the most ac-
(2) Registration data for shell HES. curate technique under all conditions. General
(a) Valid position VE. guides are as follows:
(b) Valid deflection correction. (1) The met plus VE technique will pro-
(c) Valid position fuze correction. bably be the most accurate method under most
(3) Current met data. conditions, particularly when the target is in a
b. K-transfer (GFT). The following data must fringe area or outside the transfer limits or when
be available: the registration data are not current. The ac-
(1) Accurate survey data for the gun and curacy of this technique depends on the validity
target. of the met messages and the accuracy of the
(2) Valid GFT setting, and total deflection target location.
correction. (2) The K-transfer method will yield an
c. Observer Adjustment. The observer must be accurate solution if concurrent registration data
in a position from which he can observe and are used. If the target is accurately located and
adjust the rounds. in proximity to the high-burst registration, the

24-20
 FM 6-40

accuracy should equal or, possibly, exceed that of must be considered in the determination of the
the met plus VE technique. In the fringe areas total fuze correction. A greater fuze setting is
of the transfer limits, the accuracy can be ex- required for delivering a projectile to a point at
pected to decrease. The principal disadvantage of a given range plus a 200-meter vertical interval
this system is that the unit usually must fire a than to a point at the same range but at the same
registration in order to develop current data. altitude as the weapon. This difference in fuze
(3) The observer adjustment technique is setting is in direct relationship to the comple-
the least desirable method for several reasons. mentary angle of site (complementary range).
The accuracy of this technique depends on the (This is also true in the delivery of conventional
ability of the observer to see the effect of the high-explosive projectiles for all weapons. How-
burst on the ground and on the size of the ever, in firing conventional HE projectiles, the
observer's bracket. This technique is used when vertical intervals and complementary angles of
the other techniques cannot be used. The disad- site are normally small and, consequently, have a
vantages are the time consumed, loss of surprise, negligible effect on the fuze setting.) The pro-
requirement for an observer to be in position, cedure for determining the total fuze correction
inaccuracy of fire (normally, a 100-meter bracket is as follows:
is split), and number of rounds (HES) used in (a) Determine the angle of site and site
adjustment. (GST).
d. Time Requirements. The time required to (b) Determine the complementary angle
prepare the fire commands for delivery of a nu- of site (site minus angle of site).
clear round depends on the situation and the data (c) Determine the fuze setting for the
available. If a current GFT setting is available, adjusted elevation plus the complementary angle
the K-transfer technique will be the fastest. The of site (GFT).
next most rapid solution is met plus VE. The K- (d) Subtract the fuze setting for the ad-
transfer technique will be the slowest if a regis- justed elevation plus the complementary angle of
tration must be fired, because of the time re- site from the adjusted fuze setting.
quired to register. The time required for the ob- Note. When using the tabular firing tables for
server adjustment technique depends on the speed determining the total fuze correction, add the comple-
of adjustment. mentary range to the chart range for the achieved high-
burst location and then interpolating for elevation plus
e. Ballistic Correction. Except for table M, complementary angle of site in table F of the firing
the firing tables used for determing firing data for tables.
delivery of the 8-inch nuclear round (projectile
NUC M422) are based on firing of the spotting
(2) The following example illustrates the
round (projectile HES M424). Table M is based determination of the total fuze correction with
on comparative firing of projectile HES M424 and the GFT and GST (charge 1, projectile HES):
projectile NUC M422. Because of ballistic differ-
Chart data to high-burst location:
Range --.-- 3,490 meters
ences, a spotting round and a nuclear round fired
with the same data will not burst at the same Height of burst
point. Therefore, when a nuclear round is to be above gun----------+162 meters
fired, corrections to quadrant elevation and fuze Adjusted Data for the
setting must be determined. For each quadrant high burst:
elevation listed, table M gives a correction for QE-389 mils
quadrant elevation and a correction for fuze Fuze setting 15.9
setting to compensate for theToballistic differ- Total fuze correction:
ences between the two rounds. determine the Fuze setting fired 15.9
corrections, enter table Mgwith the final quadrant Site to high burst
elevation determined for projectile HES M424 to ( +162/3490; chg
the nearest listed value and the height of burst 1, TAG, GST) + 53 mils
above gun to the nearest 1 meter. The values of Angle of site ( + 162/
the corrections can usually be determined by 3490; C and D
visual interpolation. scales GST)----+47 mils
f. Determination of Total Fuze Correction. Comp site ( + 53 -

(1) Because of the large vertical intervals (+47)) - -+6 mils

involved in the delivery of nuclear rounds, com- Adjusted elevation
plementary angle of site (complementary range) (389 - ( +53) ) --- 336 mils

24-21
 FM 6-40

Adjusted elevation plus 24-49. Example-Determination of Position

comp site (336 + VE, Position Deflection Correction, and
(+6))-------------342 mils Position Fuse CorreCtion
Fuze setting for ad- a. Chart Data to Point,Selected for High Burst.
justed elevation plus Deflection,---------------348 mils
comp site (GFT) -- _ _ 16.5 Range------------------9,820 meters
Total fuze correction Height above gun -------- + 180 meters
(15.9 - 16.5)--------0.6 b. Determination of Firing Data for High-
(3) The total fuze correction is added to the Burst Registration (Charge 3, Shell HES). It
fuze setting for the elevation plus complementary is mandatory that the first rdund of the high-
angle of Site to the target. burst registration be observed. Therefore, the fir-
g. Position Velocity Error. ing data for the high-burst registration must re-
(1) Position VE includes the total deviation flect as many of the known nonstandard condi-
from standard for the weapon, ammunition, fir- tions as possible. The average position VE of the
ing chart, and survey which cannot be accounted weapon and cUrrent met data should be applied
for and for which corrections cannot be deter- to the firing data.
mined except by firing. The following factors in (1) QE tb be fired.
relation to position VE for nuclear delivery must
Total range correction
be considered: based on the average
(a) Nuclear delivery units will have a
higher survey priority than other units. position vE and cur-
rdnt met------------160 meters
(b) If registration is permitted, only one Elevation for corrected
registration may be fired for each position.
range (9820 +
(c) Manufacturer's tolerances are less for -160) ------ 306 mils
the spotting and nuclear rounds than for con-
Sitad (+ 180/9820; chg
ventional ammunition.
(2) Accordingly, the position VE is contin- 3, TAG, GST)-------+20 mils
ually averaged at every opportunity. Judgment QE (306 + (+20)) ---- 326 mils
must be used in the continual averaging of these (2) Fuze setting to be fired.
velocity errors. A large deviation of a new posi- Angle of site (+ 180/
tion VE from the average position VE should be 9820; C and D
viewed critically, and the reason for the deviation scales, GST) - + 19 mils
should be determined and isolated. If the reason Comp site ( +20 -

cannot be determined, it is usually better to omit (+19))-+1 mil

this position VE when the average is being com- Elevation plus comp
site (306 + (+1)) __ 307 mils
puted.
Fuze setting----------27.3
24-48. Met Plus VE Met fuze correction 0
a. Determination of Position Velocity Error, Average position fuze
and Total Deflection Correction. The procedures correction --- - +0.1
for determining the position VE and total de- Fuze setting to fire - 27.4
flection correction for shell HES are the same as (3) Deflection to be fired.
those for determining the position VE and total Current met deflection
deflection correction for HE as described in chap- correction R4 mils
ter 21. The position VE and total deflection Deflection (3148 +
correction for nuclear delivery should be deter- R4)--------3,144 mils
mined as soon as possible after occupation of posi- Note. When using the tabUlar firing tables for de-
tion and should not be delayed until the receipt termining the quadrant elevation and fuze setting to be
of a nuclear mission. fired, determine the entry range from the complementary
b. Determinationof the Total Fuze Correction. range table. Use the entry range to determine the eleva-
The procedure for determining the total fuze cor- tion: plus complementary angle of site to determine the
quadrant elevation.
rection for shell HES is the same as that for c. dhart Data to the Achieved High-Burst Lo-
determining the fuze correction for HE as out- cation (GraphicSolution or Computed).
lined in chapter 21 except that comp site must Deflection -- 3,147 mils
be taken into account as outlined in paragraph Range 9,520 meters
24-47f. Height of burst above gun +157
+ meters

24-22
 FM 6-40

d. Determination of the Total Range Correc- Fuze Correction. The position VE and position
tion. fuze correction are determined as shown in figure
QE fired 326 mils 24-8.
Site (+157/9520, chg 3, i. Determination of Position Deflection Correc-
TAG, GST) +18 mils tion.
Adjusted elevation (326 Total deflection corl'ection
- R3 mils
- (+18))-------------308 mils Met deflection correction - R4 mils
Range for elevation 308 Position deflection correc-
9,700 meters tion----------------- Li mil
(GFT)------------ -
Total range correction I. Results.
Position VE--- -1.3 m/s
(9700 - 9520)----------+180 meters
Note. When determining the total range correction Position fuze correction 0
from the tabular firing tables subtract the range corre- Position deflection correc-
sponding to the elevation plus complementary angle of tion---------------- Li mil
site from the entry range to the achieved high burst.
e. Determinationof the Total Fuze Correction. 24-50. Application of MET Plus VE
Fuze setting fired---------27.4 a. The application of met plus VE is the same
Angle of site (+ 157/9.52, as that for shell HE (chap 21) except for the
GST)-----------------+17 mils fuze setting (use elevation plus comp site) and
Comp site ( + 18 - the ballistic corrections. When the met plus VE
(+17))---------------+ 1mil technique is used, the data will be computed to
Elevation + Comp (site the target. The GFT setting will be kept current
308 + (+1))----------309 mils by use of met plus VE for emergencies; for
Fuze setting corresponding example, when there is insufficient time to com-
to elevation plus comp pute met plus VE to the target.
site (309)---------------27.5 b. The ballistic corrections are determined as
Total fuze correction indicated in the example in paragraph 24-51.
(27.4 - 27.5)------------ 0.1
f. Determination of the Total Deflection Cor- 24-51. Example-Application of Met Plus VE
rection. This example is a continuation of the example
Deflection fired----------'3,144 mils in paragraph 24-49. The worksheet for the com-
Deflection to chart location putations (DA Form 4207) is shown in figure
of high burst-----------3,147 mils 24-10. DA Form 4207 is attached to the DA
HB registration deflection Form 3622, on which are recorded the fire mis-
correction (total deflec- Sion, the fire order, the initial fire commands,
tion correction) -R3 mils and the statement "See attached nuclear work-
sheet."
g. Determinationof the Met Range Correction,
a. Chart Data to Target.
Met Deflection Correction, and Met Fuze Cor- meters
Range------------------10,520
rection. The met corrections are determined as Desired height of burst
shown in figure 24-8.
above gun--------------+150meters
Battery laid on azimuth, 3,248 mils
Deflection
2000, deflection 3200
Azimuth fired------------2,053 mils b. Solution of Met Message for Met Range Cor-
rection, Met Deflection Correction, and Met Fuze
Weight of projectile-------244 pounds
Altitude of gun-326 meters Correction. The met message is solved as shown
Altitude of burst------483 meters in figure 24-9.
Propellant temperature 660 F Weight of projectile 241 pounds
Latitude of gun------34 ° N Propellant temperature 75 .0 F
Concurrent ballistic met Altitude of battery 326 meters
message: Altitude of target---------336 meters
METB39 MIFMIF 070550 049982 Height of burst above
002618 009976 012618 009978 target-+140 meters
022720 009978 032927 004981 Chart deflection to target 3,248 mils
042928 002982 053129 004987 Battery laid on azimuth -- 2,000 mils
Referred deflection 3,200 mils
h. Determination of Position VE and Position m/s
Position VE---------------1.3
24-23
 FM 6-40

MET DATA CORRECTION SHEET

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATA MET MESSAGE

r .JCHARGErADJOE
3, . 952,6
CHART
RG LATITUDE TYPEMESSAGE
13O°N METIF OCTANT AREA/UNIT
IMI#MIF
[ATO
1
ALT......(10) TR
330 07
ATE TINE
0530 A4D
L0
PRESSURE
8 2
ALT Or MOPI LINE NO. WINODIR I WINOSPEEDAIRTEMP AIR DENSITY
........ 903 A9o
Z I ?8.1.
.TRV.IV DP/IA,).- (0 A ..
CONNECTION 0,3 Q
(nearest
CORRECTEDVALUES
ALT.O....RGETmeter)
if ?3 ........ /00.41 9 9. 7

HEIGHT
OF BURST
ABOVETARGET - - -

ALT.......RST
AL
FSTR" (nearest
ALTOF RDmeter) .:?P/
T T
HEIGHTOF ARGET COMP RU CHART RG YEN
R R

WIND COMPONENTS AND DEFLECTION

WHEN DIRECTIONOF WINDISo C r, 3
DIRECTIONOF WIND 2960 MoL DF Cor, r?
PoS OF Carr LI
CH
RDIRECTI.
OFIND /oo
..
,(ON CORR L...
.o.
CROSS
WIND
I SPEED
IlND WINO~~OR
.....C?
071/
LLKOS Q
-....SPERCMP
.y
O RR CORR....
N/I..... . ./
RS ID
0J

WIND [SPEED xCOMp - .i 7 E KNOTS CORNRjjj

MET RANGECORRECTION

KNOWN STANDARD VARIATIONS

FROM UNIT PLUS MINUS
VALUES VALUES STANDARD CORRECTIONS

/0
AIRTEMP
D
RANGE....

/00.V
_ _0

.100%
D /90.7
K +C.I
5..3.
172.9

9
. ~ ......
?).
7 ... 0.3 -33.5 loI,
0
PROJWEIGHT 2WAsZI/sI+ 4.O
1
A
ROTATION33 X 0.87

7. 2.6

METRANGECORR 1341+.3
COMPUTATION OF VE

VE -/.3 D +2/.9 TOTALRANGE / 0

PRO 6 40 CHANGE TO MV LM.S..ME TUN
/
... F FOR PROPTEMP N
COECTIG

AV MVUNIT AV RANGE

~* I MIS ORRETI~N(.7 CORR RANGEi-

ECTION
TOTAL

+ NEWVE 2 = AVGVE ..... CMIS

OLDVE

T 2 ,
8 VARIATION MET FUZE CORRECTION

FROM UNIT
STANDAR
D CORRECTION PLUS MINUS 3
,v ,/9+CAS + Ci)
2 F- CAS 309
To'0
RANE.WIND
D IR TEMP n.0.00 FS -,oL-t-CA 6 -

____ I -L)*005 0.009, 27....

RDEUTyI 06

10MFUZE

TOTALFUZE

OLD FZ CORR +t NEWFZ CORR + =AV FZOR

26
TAGTN.BATTERY
. . ..... . ..
DATE/TIME

o0 r, 00 30 ryi
I
UA,, 4200 JA,,7,,,,
FO RM EPLACES
,.oo . DA FORM 6-ID, 1
., ,.o.,,, H, oo ,
APR 67, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.-

Figure 24-8. Met data correction sheet (DA Form 4208) (K-transfer, 8-inch nuclear
round).

24-24
 FM 6-40
MAET.DATACQRRECTItN SHEET
For use of this form, see FM 6-40; proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATA MET MESSAGE

CHARGE IA.J
QE CHAR... LATITUDE..YPE MESSAGE OCTANT AREWUNIT

Ie/ 10521J3ON MET 33 9 MIFPRESSURE

MIF
.........
(10M) 330 07
DATE TIME
0'73o 'H90
o
ALT MOP 98.O
LINENO. WINDDIR WINDSPEEDIAIRTEMP AIR DENSITY
ALT OFMOP 90 lo / 0 25 /oo.8 Al.3
.TRYA-SMOPAB -/(A0 ABCORRECTION Q 03 1
ALT OF TARETee'r) 33(v CORRECTEDVALUES i. / 989
HEIGHT
OF BURST
ABOVETARGET
-- 11*0
ALTOF BURST 7b
(nearest
ALT OFOTRYmete,) 3 2,
(buft ........
H GUNTCO ]I+HT,5F
+/.5
M
P RG
+ al # /oI
CHARTRG
Io1, si#,
ENTRYRG
'sU
WIND COMPONENTSAND DEFLECTION

WRENDIRECTION
...
OF WINDIS]
. IR FIRE ADD
LENSTRAN .R
6NOON r F CO R 4Po
DIRECTION
OF WINDoo MET OF RR R
ToT DF CORRk R 3
5ROT ATION
OF FIRE
DIRECTION

CRART DIRECTIONOF WINDJ _ _RR_.... . 6

CRO.WIND LCP2NOTSx . 52 CROSSWIN L
AIRD
DESI EOD 9E o 0. I .1 N...CORR9
ROION SPEE 5 x COMPHAD _NTCR4

MET RANGE CORRECTION

KNOWN STANDARD VARIATIONS

FROM UNIT
VALUES VALUES STANDARR CORRECTIONS REL O .N

WIND
RANGE 0 ____ Al-_10T___ ___L

... ,o.-.35 x o-67, / 30.4

ROPG WID CAGE 0MVARTRAG

ATEMP *F FR0RP %
0EP ~ ORCTO - 0
9.~0
1

COMPUTATIONOF VE

vE -1.3 ,.... D423-0 .....

CORRECTION
TEMP. . 3 •.. OR..R.P.TEMP 0. M/S -. Z;2 -f CORRECTION
.... ' /

M
-0.7
-vUNIT
Mws ICORRECTIO
-o AVRANGE
t3.01,CORRECTION 1+ 6
TOTALRANGE
+.......... . 0 /S -2001
OLD.VE + NEWVE

o30 MET FUZE CORRECTION

VARIATION UNIT
FROM CORRECTION PLUS MINUS /0,320
ST ANDAR CORRECTION
D

AV__0.7.-.4/ 0. 02?' /
RANGEWIND T i~'.o,' v04R 10520, 6L 3Y2
[AIR TEMP I 00.003 0.003
AIR DENSITY I - +0.050 o.055 -30,0
D" TOTAL FUZE
PROJ WEIGHT. I -. I0.0/00. 0/6 CORRECTION

0. 121 6.032. .......... N

METFUZE -+0./
0.03 ~ FAZE
CORRECTION
0.0TOTAL FUZE
METFAZECORN CORRECTION +0

OLD FZ CORR +NEWFZ CORR - + 2 = AVGFZ CORR

TARGETNO.BATR DATE/TIME

L .. . B07
. O200MAR 72
REPLACES DA FORM 6-15, 1 APR 67, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.
DA I FORM 4200
JAN 74

Figure 24-9. Met data correction sheet (DA Form 4207) (met plus VE, 8-inch nuclear
round) plus VE.

24-25
 FM 6-40

Position deflection correc- Fuze setting (30.0 + 0.1) 30.1

tion------------------L1 mil Fuze correction for the
Position fuze correction 0 .ballistic difference + 0.4
Charge------------------3 (Enter the ballistic correction table, table M,
Current ballistic message: in the tabular firing table, with the nearest
METB39 MIFMIF 070750 049980 listed QE and the height of burst above gun
004211 011970 014214 011971 to the nearest meter. These are the same
024320 009971 034422 009973 entry arguments used to obtain the ballistic
044225 008973 054229 008972 correction for QE).
Note. The line number to be used in solving the Fuze setting to be fired
met message can be determined by use of table B. How-
30.5
Note. When determining the fuze setting from
ever, a more accurate determination can be made by use the tabular firing tables, add the fuze setting corre-
of an inferred QE and table A. A QE can be inferred sponding to the elevation plus complementary angle of
from the current GFT setting and the chart data to the site (d above) to the total fuze correction and the fuze
target. correction for the ballistic difference.
c. Application of Position VE. The application f. Determinationof Deflection.
of position VE to determine the total range cor- Chart deflection 3,248 mils
rection is shown in figure 24-9. Position deflection correc-
d. Determination of QuadrantElevation. tion ..
- Li mil
Total range correction -200 meters Met deflection correction R4 mils
Chart range--------------10,520 meters Total deflection correction R3 mils
Corrected range Deflection to be fired 3,245 mils
(10,520 + -200)--------10,320 meters g. Firing Data.
Elevation for corrected Deflection --- 3,245 mils
range 342 mils Fuze setting 30.5
Site (+150/10,520, GST) __ +16 mils QE 367 mils
QE---------------------358 mils
QE correction for ballistic 24-52. K-Transfer GFT Technique
difference--------------+9mils a. General. The K-transfer GFT technique is
based on a GFT setting,. and a total deflection
(Enter the ballistic correction table, table correction. Corrections are determined from an
M, in the tabular firing table with the HB registration, normally with three rounds of
nearest listed QE and the height of burst HES shell. The ballistic difference between the
above gun to the nearest meter. If the spotting round and the nuclear round must be
QE falls exactly halfway between two applied in the same manner as in the met plus
listed values, the more even entry argu- VE technique. The difference, if any, between
ment is selected. For example, HES QE the projectile weights and the propellant tem-
315 falls halfway between listed values 310 peratures of the spotting round and the nuclear
and 320. Therefore, 320 is selected as the round must also be applied.
entry argument into table M). b. Determination of GFT Setting. The proce-
QE to be fired------------367 mils dure for determining the GFT setting is the same
Note. When determining the QE from the tabular
firing tables, obtain the elevation plus complementary
as that for HE ammunition except in the con-
angle of site for the total range correction plus the entry struction of the time gageline which is construct-
range (chart range plus complementary range) to the ed as follows:
target and add the angle of site and the ballistic cor- (1) Determine the complementary angle of
rection to determine the quadrant elevation to be fired. site.
e. Determinationof the Fuze Setting. (2) Determine the fuze setting for the ad-
Angle of site ( + 150/10,520; justed elevation plus comp site.
C and D scales .......... +15 mils (3) Determine the total fuze correction by
Comp site ( +16 - ( +15) ) +lmril subtracting the fuze setting corresponding to ele-
Elevation plus comp site ...... 343 mils vation plus comp site from the fuze setting used
Fuze setting for elevation to fire the high-burst registration.
plus comp site - - 30.0 (4) Add the total fuze correction to the fuze
Position fuze correction 0 setting corresponding to the adjusted elevation.
Met fuze correction + 0.1 The result is the adjusted (GFT) fuze setting
Total fuze correction + 0.1 at the level point. Move the hairline of the cursor

24-26
 FM 6-40

8-INCH NUCLEAR COMPUTATION

MET PLUS VE
For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY B DATE 1AI1OV jPIECE NUMBER 2 TARGET NUMBER Y0 /IO0

ITEM

1. HOB ABOVE GUN (from met form)

2. CHART RG TO TGT ...............

3. TOTAL RG CORR (from met)

:.: ::::.t.:::
......
..........
-200
4. CORR RG, 2 plus_3 (1
Om) I/) "R '

5. EL 4 (MNL) 3Y
6. SITE (VIlIAT RG2) 1
7. ANGLE OF SITE (C & D SCALES) -t Is-
8. QE FOR SPOTTER,_5 plus 6 "s59

9. BAL CORR FOR NUC (TABLE M) (lr/) *

10. QE TO FIRE, 8 plus 9 .............
3(o.7 1
11. COMP SITE,_6 minus 7 1 -f-I
12. EL 5 3q2
13. EL plus, COMP SITE, 11 plus i2 ,"z 11,

14. FS 13 L)
15. TOTAL FZ CORR (to tgt)

16. FS FOR SPOTTER, 14 plus 15

17. BAL FZ CORR FOR NUC (TABLE M)

18. FS TO FIRE, 16 plus 17 30.3

19. DF TO TGT

20. TOTAL DF CORR (to tgt)

21. DF TO FIRE, 19 plus 20 3 aqs

DA FORM 4207, 1 Jan 74

Figure 24-10. DA Form 4207, 8-inch nuclear met plus VE worksheet.

to the GFT setting range and construct the ele- the same as those for conventional HE ammuni-
vation gageline at the adjusted elevation and the tion.
time gageline at the adjusted fuze setting to d. Application of Data to a Target. The GFT
the level point. setting is used int the normal manner for deter-
c. Determination of Total Deflection Correc-' mining the elev~ttion. The fuze setting is deter-
tion. The total deflection correction is determined mined by placing the elevation gageline over the
in the normal manner; that is, go from chart elevation plus comp site and reading the fuze set-
deflection to adjusted deflectior' and establish a ting under the time gageline. The QE and fuze
deflection correction scale. The transfer limits are setting are corrected for the ballistic differences

24-27
 FM 6-40

as indicated in paragraph 24-47e. The total de- total fuze correction, and total deflection correc-
flection correction is determined from the deflec- tion is illustrated in figure 24-11.
tion correction scale.
24-54. Example-Application of K-Transfer
24-53. Example-Determination of GFT Set- Technique
ting, and Total Deflection Correction This problem is a continuation of the problem
a. Known Data. in paragraph 24-53. Projectile weight (shell nu-
Shell --------- HES clear) is 240 pounds; current propellent tempera-
Lot--------------------xY ture is 740 F.
Charges 3 a. ChartData to Target.
Weight of projectile 241 pounds Range------------------10,470 meters
Propellant temperature 660 F Deflection---------------3,132 mils
Altitude of battery 318 meters Altitude of target---------341 meters
b. Fired (Adjusted) Data for High-Burst
Desired height of burst above
Registration. target-----------------+150
Deflection meters
3,239 mils
Fuze setting . . 26.7 b. Determination of Entry Range. Entry range
QE---------------------325 mils is necessary for determination of unit correc-
c. Chart Data to High-Burst Location. tions for projectile weight and propellant temper-
Deflection 3,235 mils ature (c below). Visual interpolation usually is
Range - -- -- 9,370 meters possible because entry range is used to the near-
Height of burst above gun -_ + 184 meters est 100 meters.
Complementary range (Enter
d. Determinationof Adjusted Elevation.
table B at chart range and
Site (+184/9370; chg 3,
height of burst above gun) + 28 meters
TAG, GST) -. - ..- + 21 mils Chart range--------------10,470 meters
Elevation (325 - (+21) 304 mils
Entry range--------------10,498 meters
e. Determination of GFT Fuze Setting.
Site +21 c. Determination of Corrections for Difference
Angle of site (+ 185/9370 C in Projectile Weight and Propellant Temperature.
and D scales, GST) + 20 mils (1) Correction for projectile weight.
Comp site (+21 - (+20)) + 1 mil Weight of projectile
Adjusted elevation----------304 mils (nuclear)----------240 pounds
Adjusted elevation plus comp Weight of projectile
site (304 + (+1)) -- 305 mils used for registration _ 241 pounds
Fuze setting fired 26.7 Variation from registra-
Fuze setting for elevation tion value----------Decrease/1
plus comp site-27.1 pound
Total fuze correction (26.7 - Unit correction deter-
27.1)-----------------0.4 mined at entry range
Fuze setting for adjusted (10,500)------------1 meter
elevation--------------27.1 Correction------------1 meter
GFT fuze setting---------26.7 (2) Correctionfor propellant temperature.
f. Determinationof Total Deflection Correction. Change to muzzle veloc-
Adjusted deflection 3,239 mils ity for current pro-
Chart deflection------3,235 mils pellant temperature
Registration deflection cor- (740 F)------------+0.8 m/s
rections (center of the de- Change to muzzle veloc-
flection correction scale) _Left 4 mils ity for propellant tem-
g. Results. perature at registra-
GFT B: Chg 3, lot XY, rg 9370, tion (66 ° F)-------- -0.8 m/s
el 304, ti 26.7 Variation from registra- Increase
Total deflection correction __ Left 4 mils tion value ----------- 1.6 m/s
The worksheet (DA Form 4208) for the com- Unit correction (deter-
putations used in determining the GFT setting, mined at entry range) -22.4 meters
Correction - 36 meters
24-28
 FM 6-40

(3) Total range correction for projectile h. Computation of the K-transfer problem is
weight and propellant temperature. simplified by use of a K-transfer worksheet (DA
Form 4208) (fig 24-11).
Correction for projectile
weight plus correction
24-55. Observer Adjustment
for propellant tem- a. General. If the information necessary to
perature ((-1) + employ either the met plus VE or the K-transfer
(-36) = -37 or technique is not available, an adjustment may be
-40.) made with shell HES followed by fire for effect
d. Determinationof QuadrantElevation. with shell NUC. The procedure will differ from
Range plus projectile weight the normal HE adjustment in that the observer
and propellant tempera- must conduct a simultaneous adjustment of de-
ture differences (10,470 + viation, range, and height of burst to the normal
(-40))---------------10,430 meters 20 meters. Deflection, elevation, site, 100/R, and
Elevation (use GFT with fuze setting are determined in the same manner
GFT setting)-__--364 mils as those for the HE projectile. The fuze setting
Site (+173/10,470; chg 3, is not determined by use of the elevation plus
TAG, GST)- -- -+19 mils comp site method during the adjustment phase
QE shell HES (364 + because the vertical interval will automatically
(+19))---------------383 mils correct for small errors during the adjustment.
QE ballistic correction (En-
b.Initial Data. For the first spotting round,
ter the ballistic correction
an angle of site based on a vertical interval of 20
table in the tabular firing
meters and the GT range must be computed and
tables with the QE to the
added to the site for the ground location in the
nearest listed value and the
same manner as that for conventional time fire.
HOB above gun to the
+ 10 mils When a subsequent height of burst correction
nearest meter.) --------
mils is given by the observer, the computer uses the
* QE to be fired------------393
100/R factor to determine the height-of-burst
e. Determinationof Fuze Setting.
mils correction in mils which is applied to the previous
Site--------------------+19
site. For example, the observer's height-of-burst
Angle of site (+ 173/10,470
+ 17 mils correction is UP 20, 100/R is 29 mils, and the
C and D scales, GST) -
previous site is + 8 mils. Multiply 29 mils by 0.2
Compsite ((+19) - (+17)) +2 mils
mils and determine a height-of-burst correction of
Elevation----------------364 +5.8 mils, or +6 mils. Combine this with the
Elevation plus comp site (364 previous site and determine a new site of + 14
+ (+2))--------------366 mils
mils.
Fuze setting for elevation
plus comp site (time gage- c. Fire-for-Effect Data.
line)------------------31.3 (1) The chart data are determined in the
Ballistic fuze correction same manner as in the adjustment phase. The
(tableM)--------------+0.5 observer's fire-for-effect request should place the
Fuze setting to be fired - - 31.8 burst over the target with a height of burst of 20
f. Determinationof Deflection to be Fired. meters. The height above the target must be cor-
Chart deflection----------3,132 mils rected by the difference between the height of
Total deflection correction the last round in the adjustment and the desired
(deflection correction height above target for the nuclear round. For
scale)---------Left 5 mils example if the observer requests LEFT 20, ADD
Deflection to be fired----3,137 mils 50, UP 5, FIRE FOR EFFECT and the desired
g. Firing Data. height of burst above target for the nuclear
Target YX1l01 round is + 180 meters, a height-of-burst correc-
Shell----------Nuclear tion of UP 165 must be applied. Since the ob-

, Lot-----------WY
Charge---------3
Deflection--------3,137 mils
server is striving for a 20-meter height of burst,
the request for UP 5 indicates that the last round
was 15 meters (20 - 5 = 15) above the target.
Subtracting the 15 meters already achieved from
Fuze setting-------31.8
QE-----------393 mils the desired 180 meters results in a height-of-burst

24-29
 FM 6-40

8-INCH NUCLEAR COMPUTATION

K-TRANSFER
For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY B DATE /Z NAOV PIECE NUMBER 2 TARGET NUMBER

ITEM
1 ALT OF TGT ...........
....
2. ALT OF BURST ABOVE TGT-.....

3. ALT OF BURST, 1 plus 2 . ............

::::::::::::........
.......

4. ALT OF BTRY
......................
..................

. NUC T ...........
..................

15. DIFFERENCE 13minusg14 Dp4 • ,

14 SPOTTER TM CORR (TABLE E) 0d8i

+iii~i~ii~4
........
.....................
.......

20.
16. CHAT(V
UNIT CORR TOATGf
(TABLE F) -2 L[
17.
21. CORR
AN GLE FOR PROP TM,D 1SC.E...................[[[[[[H[[[H[
OF SIWTC X 16 (m) ![i[[[i[[[[[[ii[iH[

3. BNT CORR C (TABLIEoM)..l)

N(TABLE + 0 ..

213. NGLEP
OFOSIT (A&LD SAE) .- /t 17 i#i# i! ;;;;

22. QIFOERESPOTE, 19 inus1__ 38€/ [[!i[[H~[[[~~[H[[

24. QE SPOTTER22 pIs 23us 3

25. COMP SITE 20 minus 21 +

I
26. EL 19
27. EL plus COMP SITE, 25 plus 26
28. FS 27 (GFT)31.3
29. BAL 'CORR FOR NUC (TABLE M)
30. FS TO FIRE, 28 plus 29 ..................
31. DF TO TGT .....
32. DF CORR (FROM SCALE USING EL 19) L f.
33. DF TO FIRE 31 plus 32 1.
37
74
DA FORM 4208, 1 Jan
Figure 24-11. DA Form 4208, 8-inch nuclear (K-transfer) worksheet.

24-30
 FM 6-40

correction of UP 165 meters. If the observer Map altitude of the target _ 336 meters
requests LEFT 20, ADD 50, FIRE FOR EF- Desired height of burst above
target-----------------+180 meters
FECT and the desired height above target is
+ 180 meters, a height-of-burst correction of UP Projectile weight (HES and
20 = 160). Since NUC)-----------------242 pounds
160 must be applied (180 -
the observer did not make a height-of-burst correc- Projectile temperature (HES
and NUC-) - 700 F
tion, the height of burst is correct (20 meters).
(2) Because of the large height-of-burst cor- b. Determination of Initial Data For Charge
rection required, site (angle of site plus comp 1. The initial data for charge 1 are shown in
site) instead of the 100/R value (which is only figure 24-12.
an angle of site) must be considered. Also, the c. Determination of Subsequent Data. Subse-
fuze setting must be corrected by the amount of quent data are shown in figure 24-12.
comp site involved. Therefore, both site and angle d. Determination of Fire-for-Effect Data. Fire-
of site must be computed by use of the height- for-effect data are shown in figure 24-12.
of-burst correction and the fire-for-effect range. (1) Determinationof quadrant elevation.
The site is included as the height-of-burst cor- Height of burst in rela-
rection to the last site fired. The comp site is tion to the target and
determined (site minus angle of site) and added the last round fired
to the elevation for the fire-for-effect range in (20-5)------------+15 meters
determining the fuze setting. A range correction Desired height of burst
for the differences in projectile weight and in above target + 180 meters
propellant temperature must be applied, if ap- Height-of-burst correc-
propriate, before the elevation and the fuze set- tion (180 - 15) - +165 meters
ting are determined. Site correction ( + 165/
(3) The QE for the spotting round is the 3500; chg 1, TAG,
elevation corresponding to the chart range plus GST)--------------+54 mils
the range corrections for propellant temperature Entry range (3500 +
and the projectile weight, plus the site for the (+52)) (not required
additional height above target, plus the last site in this example be-
fired. cause PT and PW cor-
(4) Ballistic corrections to QE and fuze set- rections are not neces-
ting are determined at the QE for the spotting sary--------------3,552 meters
round and the total height of burst above gun Elevation for range 3500
(sum of initial vertical interval, the observer's (GFT)-------------319 mils
net height-of-burst corrections, and the desired Site (last site fired ( + 9)
height of burst above the target). + site correction
(5) The QE to be fired is the QE for the (+54))------------+63 mils
spotting round ((3) above) plus the ballistic QE for spotting round _-382 mils
QE correction. Total target height
(6) The fire-for-effect deflection is the chart above gun (desired
deflection to the final target pin location. HOB above target
(7) The time to be fired is the fuze setting (+180) + vertical
corresponding to the elevation plus comp site, interval (+18) +
plus the total fuze correction (if any), plus the observer's net correc-
ballistic correction ((4) above). tion (-5) )-----+193 meters
QE ballistic correction
24-56. Example-Observer Adjustment Tech- (+ 193 HOB and 380
nique QE)--------+ 10 mils
The FDC computer's record for an observer ad- QE to fire nuclear
justed mission is shown in figure 24-12. round------392 mils
a. Chart data to Initial Location Requested by (2) Determinationof fuze setting.
Observer. Angle of site for HOB
Range----------3,460 meters correction (+ 165/
Deflection------ __ 3,289 mils 3500; C and D scales,
Altitude of the battery - 318 meters GST)---------+48 mils

24-31
FM 6-40

FDC COMPUTER'S RECORD

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY B DATE JTIME RECEIVED ITIME COMPLETED ITGT

CALL FOR FIREYY
I o6 3 7cS, / ~j 6RI.O
/ o TOT DF
CORR 0 INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS
/$/P 8/As,2.Y1#?'A0 DF #/ ADJUST SP INSTR
F ______RG 3 46 EL 3/f SH //e'd LOT ,x
U NIT(S)
FIRE ORDER:"Iz&
, MF / (SIt- CH FZ /
BASIS FOR CORR C -#6 MF / '/l 6RV4C IN EFF
DISTR.i . arXY SH .€
LOT VL. CHG I FZTL DFT
TIM RDS; SPREAD TGT Al
TIME A 9E
IMQ0ER620/REEXPFSjlOE2 , 6 AMOxP
A (
SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS___
OBSERVERCORRECTIONS
to
SH SH,CHG CHART CHART DF FS HOBSAMMO
FZ DEV RG HOB FZ,MF RG DF CR, R FIRED CORR TI CORR IEL OE EXP
L3 ooD20 63 306 0 3 6 __ 6, - 16 33
R2 0 -00,.U /o___03 0 3A 19 Z3
*.'. '
10-- trm 7vc3.00
, 32q7 0 2Z97 ,", , F_39

160

t ,, j - €.~ L#.
/r. L,/~ tT

"C o O 2. - L..#

DATA FOR REPLOT

GRID IALT JFZ ITGT
________ __ __ _ ___AMMUNITION

TYPE___ _

ON HAND _

RECEIVEDii ___

TOTAL_____
EXPENDED ____ ___
REMAINING
&7 ="-FOR---
LJA tIUIM OOlZ, i Jan /4 REPLACES DA FORM 3622, 1 AUG 70, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.

Figure 24-12. Observer adjustment techniques.

24-32
 FM 6-40

Comp site for HOB cor- Fuze setting to fire

rection (+ 54 - (+15.7 + (+0.3)) 16.0
(+48))------------+6 mils (3) Determination of deflection.
Elevation + comp site Deflection (chart deflec-
(319 + 6) ----- 325 mils tion to FFE location) 3,297 mils
Fuze setting for eleva-
tion plus comp site, (4) Fire-for-effect data.
(325)-15.7 Deflection 3,297 mils
Ballistic fuze correction Fuze setting 16.0
(+ 193 HOB and 380 QE 392 mils
QE)---------------+0.3

Section XIV. 155-MM HOWITZER-NUCLEAR DELIVERY

24-57. General in which position VE and position fuze correc-

a. Procedure. This section describes the fire tions are assumed to be zero.
direction techniques for delivery of the 155-mm d. Alternate Techniques. If the information
howitzer nuclear round. Nuclear delivery tech- for the employment of the preferred technique
niques for the 155-mm howitzer parallel standard is not available, the following techniques may be
gunnery procedures whenever possible; however, used:
the lack of a ballistically matched spotting round (1) Adjustment with HE rounds and fire
requires modifications to normal procedures. Test for effect with nuclear rounds.
firings have indicated that corrections derived (2) K-transfer (HE GFT setting).
from a high-burst registration with projectile
HE M107 introduce errors when these corrections 24-58. Requirements for Delivery Techniques
are applied to data for the nuclear round. The The requirements for the use of the various de-
magnitude of these errors is comparable to that livery techniques for 155-mm nuclear rounds are
of errors introduced when the position VE and as follows:
position fuze correction for the nuclear rounds a. Met Correction Techniques. The following
are assumed to be zero. When the met correction data must be available:
technique is used, all nonmeasurable conditions (1) Accurate survey data for the gun and
(position VE and position fuze correction) are target.
assumed to be standard and corrections are com- (2) Current met data.
puted only for those conditions which are re- b. Observer Adjustment. The observer must
ported in a met message and by the firing bat- be in a position from which he can observe and
tery. In those cases in which survey or met data adjust the rounds.
are not available, an adjustment may be con- c. K-Transfer (HE GFT Setting).
ducted on the target with HE projectiles armed (1) A valid GFT setting and a valid deflec-
with mechanical time fuzes. When the adjust- tion correction must be available.
ment phase is completed, the ballistic corrections (2) The target location must be accurate.
are added to the HE data and the nuclear round (3) The target must be within transfer
is fired in effect. If current met data are not limits.
available but a valid HE GFT setting exists, the
K-transfer procedure can be used when weapon 24-59. Accuracy
and target locations are known and the target All data are determined to the same accuracy as
is within transfer limits. The HE data to the that for standard gunnery procedures.
target are computed, ballistic corrections are ad-
ded, and the nuclear round is fired in effect. 24-60. Selection of Delivery Technique
a. Considerations in Selection of Delivery
b. Nomenclature. The 155-mm nuclear round Technique. Listed below are some of the consider-
consists of the XM454 projectile, the XM32E1 ations in the selection of a delivery technique.
sequential timer, the T361 VT fuze, and the XM72 The S3 must evaluate all considerations in mak-
propellant. ing his decision.
c. Preferred Technique. The preferred tech- (1) The tactical situation.
nique for the delivery of nuclear rounds from a (2) The commander's guidance.
155-mm howitzer is the met correction technique, (3) The desirability of surprise.

24-33
FM 6-40

(4) The availability of met. ment and elimination of the requirement for a
(5) The time available. current met message and computation of correc-
(6) Restrictions on registration. tions for the target.
(7) Survey. d. Time Requirements. The time required to
(8) The validity of the GFT setting and prepare fire commands for firing a nuclear round
deflection correction. depends on the situation and the data available.
b. Registrations. It is anticipated that the unit If a current GFT setting is available, the K-
will have adequate met support and will obtain transfer technique will be the fastest. The next
a valid HE GFT setting and a total deflection most rapid solution is the met correction tech-
correction by registering or by computation. nique. The K-transfer technique will be the slow-
c. Accuracy of Techniques. The accuracy of est if a registration must be fired, because of the
each technique depends on the situation and the time required to register. The time required for
available data. There are so many variables that the observer adjustment technique depends on
one technique cannot be considered the most ac- the speed of adjustment.
curate technique under all conditions. General e. Ballistic Corrections. The 155-mm howit-
guides are as follows: zer firing tables used for nuclear delivery are con-
(1) The met correction technique will pro- structed for projectile, atomic, XM454. When HE
bably be the most accurate method under most projectile M107 is used in the observer adjust-
conditions. Even though a current met message ment technique or when an HE GFT setting is
and an HE deflection correction are available, used for determining corrections, correction for
the assumption that the VE and fuze correction deflection, fuze setting, and quadrant elevation
are zero introduces some errors into the met to compensate for ballistic differences between
correction technique. These errors are approx- the HE projectile and the nuclear projectile must
imately the same as those that would occur if cor- be determined from table 0 of the firing tables.
rections obtained from registering with HE pro- Table 0 is entered with the final QE for projectile
jectile, M3 or M3A1 propellant (charges 4 and 5), HE.
and fuze time were applied to nuclear data
(charges 1 and 2). Thesq errors are less than 24-61. Example-Met Correction Technique
those that would occur if corrections obtained The met data correction sheet and the FDC com-
from registering with HE projectile and M4A1 puter's record for the following sample mission
or M4A2 propellant (charge 7) were applied are shown in figure 24-13 and figure 24-14, re-
to nuclear data (charge 3). The accuracy of this spectively.
technique depends on the amount (unknown) by a. Weapon-Ammunition Data.
which the VE varies from standard, on the vali- 155-mm howitzer M109
dity of the met message, and on the accuracy Altitude of battery--------273 meters
of the target location. Latitude of battery-340 N
(2) The observer adjustment technique is Laying information:
required when a current met message is not avail- Azimuth-------------5,700 mils
able or when the battery or target is not ac- Deflection------------3,200 mils
curately located. The disadvantages are the time Propellant temperature 540 F
and HE ammunition consumed, the loss of sur- Projectile weight- 118.5 pounds
prise, the inaccuracy of applying HE data to the Charge--------------3 GB (M3
nuclear round, and the inaccuracy of fire (nor- propellant)
mally, a 100-meter bracket is split). Timer temperature-540 F
(3) The accuracy of the K-transfer techni- b. Chart Data.
que when current registration data are used Deflection to registration
depends on the validity of applying HE data to point---------3,180 mils
the nuclear round. If the target is accurately Deflection to target-----3,014 mils
located and is in proximity to the registration Azimuth to target-----5,886 mils
point, the accuracy should approximate that of Range to target-------11,440 meters
the observer adjustment technique. In the fringe Altitude of target-----342 meters
areas of the transfer limits or outside the trans- Height of burst above target + 25 meters
fer limits, the accuracy can be expected to de- c. Datafrom Registration.
crease. The principal advantages are the capa- Adjusted deflection-----3,176 mils
bility of delivering nuclear fires without adjust- Met deflection correction - -R6 mils

24-34
 FM 6-40

Total deflection correction -_ R4 mils Desired height of burst

Positiondeflection correction L2 mils (XM454)--------------+30 meters
d. Recent Ballistic Meteorological Message. c. Adjustment with Projectile M107, Fuze
METB31 344983 260750 021982 Time, for 20-Meter Height of Burst.
001409 984017 011312 984025 1 -400
021115 968031 031217 959026 2 +200
041422 942017 051527 920009 3 -100
e. Qudrant Elevation. Add the entry range to 4 Time R10 + 50
the total range correction (fig 24-13) to deter- 5 U10, FFE
mine the corrected entry range. Determine the d. Data Obtained from Round 5.
elevation plus comp site for the corrected entry Projectile----------------M107
range and the angle of site to obtain the quadrant Fuze-------------------M564
elevation. Deflection-------------- 3,324 mils
Corrected entry range Time-------------------23.1
(11,458 + (+187)) 11,640 meters QE---------------- - -259 mils
Elevation plus comp site for e. Site Correctionfor 30-Meter Height of Burst
corrected entry range 405.8 mils for ProjectileXM454.
Angle of site-------------+8.4 mils +10 (12/100) = +1 mil
Quadrant elevation--------414.2, or f. Corrected QE for ProjectileM107.
414 mils 258 + (+1) =-259 mils
f. Deflection. Add the new met deflection cor- g. Corrections from Table 0, FT 155AJ-2.
rection and the position deflection correction at Deflection Li mils
the registration point to the chart deflection. Timer setting-------------0.4
Corrected deflection-------3,017 mils QE--5 mils
g. Timer Setting. h. Corrections from Table K, FT 155-AJ-2.
Timer setting for 11,640 Correction to timer for timer
meters----------------35.1 temperature -- - 0
Intermediate timer setting i. Fire-for-Effect Datafor ProjectileXM454.
(35.1 + (-0.2))--------34.9 Deflection---------------3,325 mils
Correction for timer tem- Timer setting-22.7
perature---------------0 QE 254 mils
Timer setting------------34.9 24-63. Example-K-Transfer Technique
h. Fire-For-EffectData. The FDC computer's record for the following
Deflection---------------3,017 mils sample mission is shown in figure 24-16.
Timer setting-------------34.9 a. Weapon-Ammunition Data.
QE---------------------414 mils 155-mm howitzer M109
Laying information:
24-62. Example-Observer Adjustment Tech- Azimuth-------------6,200 mils
nique Deflection-3,200 mils
The FDC computer's record for the following XM454 charge--------3
sample mission is shown in figure 24-15. Timer temperature--------600 F
a. Weapon-Ammunition Data. b. ChartData.
155-mm howitzer M109 Deflection to target 3,142 mils
Laying information: Range to target -- 9,910 meters
Azimuth 800 mils Vertical interval-----------+ 47 meters
Deflection 3,200 mils Desired height of burst 30 meters
M107 charge 7 c. GFT Setting and Total Deflection Correction.
XM454 charge 3 GFT B: Chg 7, lot XY, rg 10,420, el 354, ti
Timer temperature 850 F 30.8
Total deflection correction to
b. ChartData. target---------L4 mils
Deflection to target 3,327 mils
Range to target --- -- 8,780 meters d. Data for ProjectileM1O7.
Site to target + 7 mils Site-----------+9 mils
100/R 12 mils Deflection--------3146 mils

24-35
FM 6-40
MET DATA CORRECTION SHEET
For use of thisform,see FM 6-40;proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATA MET MESSAGE

....... ITUDE
CCHARGErADJOE. TPE MES O
.CTANT IAREA/.UNIT

.3 1,A4#0 130"N MlET B 3 / 3, 96.3

DATE TIME ALT MOP PRESSURE
ALT Or STRY (10o) 7e> 26 0790 2 10C) 98,2A
LIRENO. WINDDIR WINOSPEEDAIRTEMP AIR DENSITY
ALT OP MOP 0 '-/oo I9.2 /0/.?
.TR- IA) oMDP Ah CORRECTION+
. 0./ 0.
(nearest CORRECTED
VALUES
.....
ARO E T meter) .3 .. .95/0/o/
HEIGHT
OF BURST

ABOVE...A.GET

ALT OF BTRy(nearest
meter) 2 73
HEIGHTOF TARGET
( ,,s,> ~~ ~ [COMP
RG
~// ~
..... ../ !t,'4#0
CHARTRUG I ENTRYG
/,t /
WIND COMPONENTSAND DEFLECTION
WHEN
DIRECTION
OF WIND
IS 6400 o OF C R L2

OS
LESSTHANDIR FIRE A.DD... OR L
DIRECTION
OF WINO / VqET OF CORR Ll
7900_TOTAL DF CORR L3
......... NWN 55 0 SANAD ARAIOSFRM UNI ....
ROTATION1 0,. o.2
DRIFT
CHART.D.R.C.ION.OF.WI.D /900oCORR. .//.7

WIND SP.......... 6KNOTSl0l.Se ....

MET RANGECORRECTION

KNOWN STANDARD VARIATIONS

FROM UNIT PLUS MINUS

VALUES VALUES STANDARD CORRECTIONS

NE WIND U U & -//o

DENSITY
AIR ...........~,/ 100% /. 9/? i.'r5
f5 c7
....... 1185 I LL
Ij 410.0 /9.0
NOTAUTIO
N ?0 x O.7 1/90)

/o0 o0 &.o
S6.O
RETRNRE COHRR0E

COMPUTATIONOF YE
I I
VE D=+Z4(. TOTALRANGE
CORRECTION
P...
TEP..F.O ,,o CHANE.T. MV....AI
PO TEMP...... . 5.0 .,S
M/S
/ - Z/ MET RANGE
CORRECTION
- I
UN -50 MVUNIT
MIS I CONNECTION+2-Yo51CONNECTIOIN .
AV..ANNE
4123
a -- .-- - I - - i -- - - - -- - i . a016f w i
TOTALRANGE
-j_
OLD VE VE
+HNEW +U AVGVE M/S

TI 35 MET FUZE CORRECTION

VARIATION UNIT
STAN ARO CORRECTION PLUS MINUS

v I 50 -0. D 04z30
RANGE-IND ..... N+ 0
7+o -oo& 0.036
AIR TEMP Iw *7~ 5I .3 __

AIR DENSITT 6 i.i -oo 0.05 o

..........HT /g +0oz 00o i/ ....
CORRECTION
METFUZE

___ __ ~C.)L)O
/* ~ ~,(JiA.CONNECTION z

__________0,0?o CORRECTION
TOTALFUZE

METFUZECOHN c0. 2 A/ I CONNECTION

OLDFZ CORR -+NEW FZ CORR + 2=AVGFZCORR

TARGETNO. BATTERY OUTE/TIME

11111111
m 0, - A A Ak no
REPLACES DA FORM 6-15, 1 APR 67, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.
DA FORM 4200
Figure24-18. Met data correction sheet,

24-36
 FM 6-40

FDC COMPUTER'S RECORD

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.
BATTERY j DATE p JTIME RECEIVED 1 TIME COMPLETED TGT
0600 O630 A-- -
'CALLFOR FIRE~'AO /41F.*^ TOT DF L3 INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS
&RICR632R9_______4tr_3____C
O
H08 * S /NP CNvAr,)4jp-A DF 301V, ADJUST SP INSTR
m/v C, ri/ FF4' RG// qV0 EL 1405 SH 4' .' LOT Qj
FIREUNTS).
ORDER- TC' 3' /Z
Td:T 3-AS"1 Sl+ HEC G3
00"'1, CHG FZ
F r"/C
UNIT(S) A2 MF# ____
BASIS FOR CORR 1L- s&cn: r MF 4 P44C IN EFF
DISTR SHD C/7 T
LOT , CHG 3 FZ DE0/R12 TI 3',"'?
1 RDS; SPREAD OOR2R ,FSOE AMMO
TIME Adm TGT .V.- QE ' EXP
OBSERVER CORRECTIONS SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS
M" D GSH,CHG CHART CHART DF FS HOB AMMO
SH DEV RG HOB FZ,MF RG DF CORR FIRED CORR CORR EEXP
FZ -

E Al -7r. /Ij 8T FO Glq

-roLL y,-cr/

L0/?& P _ _ ME/MO7
IFoR ,6 4 = qN / . T,' ,

DATA FOR REPLOT

GRID ALT IFZ fTGT
AMMUNITION
TYPE
ON HAN'D
RECEIVED,, ___ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ___ ____ ____ ____ ____ _ _ _

TOTAL ___

EXPENDED__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ____ ___ _ _ _

REMAINING

DA FORM 3622, 1 Jan 74 REPLACES DA FORM 3622, 1 AUG 70, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.

Figure 24-14.155-mm NUC met plus VE misaion.

24-37
FM 6-40

FDC COMPUTER'S RECORD

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.
BATTERY DATE 12,o *c fTIME o~s3c
RECEIVED
o TIME COMPLETED
o TGT . .
-

CALL FOR FIREZE/PAMe/,

8MCORR 0 INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS

BA' A ,A,.YA A, C / /A P D 3327 ADJUST SP INSTR

RG 4?7,0 EL 264PSH //l16' LOT eyeI

FIRE ORDEPC, _SI t,7_Ci ,7_FZ

UNIT(S)- L MF,'0W
BASIS FORrS@T"-SH
DISTR- CORR jp#'f=or Q& -67 MF4/ / $'c" C(/ IN EFF
Y, CHG 7 FZ OAF 3397 TI

a.LRDS; SPREAD Z10/R20/RS FS1OSI AMMO

TIME TGT /7Z 0Q0 0-- QE 267 EXP
OBSERVER
MF CORRECTIONS sUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS mm

SH RG HOB SH,CHG CHART CHART R DF FS TI HOBI SI EL OE AMMO

VRHFZ FZ,MF RG DF FIREDlCORR CORR[ EXP
200 94Y00332333
o L 7w12V2 Z
-100 2 <-,/ e) ^ -a I
tol -4-2 <*1 s73 '2712
LA.7e
CV IUfid)
19%4 1 1 L-"
I-
ri IRiea +-q.<'0 FR r/ 0 21714.*2 44(? 2 WQ 2-0P1 /7)
U OFF
- - ___ ___ i3Z.J -O,/ .3o/) f/o __

,I .
.5LL
#PC 1 3__--,# 2:7£L5

1L~~li JL ~CO. 'V &4j. 0 -oif ,vc BSA'.CW~i

go -
ppA -1 aZe -
V-2-'a__&/c - _ -

DATA FO'R'REPLOT
GRID jALT IFZ TGT
AMMUNITION
TYPE___ _

LOT
ON HAND ___ ___

RECEI-VED
TOTAL__ _ _ _ _

EXPENDED ____ _____ _ _______

REMAINING
DA FORM 3622, 1 Jan 74 REPLACES DA'FORM 3622, 1 AUG 70, WVHICH IS OBSOLETE.

Figure 24-15. 155-mm nuclear mission (observer adjustment).

24-38
 FM 6-40

Time-------------------28.7 24-64. VT Fuze

QE---------------------335 mils Firing the XM454 projectile with the variable
e. Correctionsfrom Table 0, FT 155-AJ-2. time option provides a higher probability of ac-
Deflection-Li mils hieving the desired height of burst than firing
Timer setting--------------0.6 the projectile with the sequential timer option.
QE----------------------10 mils When the variable time option is used, the T361-
f. Correctionsfrom Table K, FT 155-AJ-2. E2 VT fuze is armed by the XM32E1 sequential
Correction to timer for timer timer at a predetermined time. Establish this
temperature------------0 predetermined time by subtracting a back-off
time from the fuze setting computed for the
g. Corrections from Table L, FT 155-AJ-2. XM32E1 sequential timer. The back-off time var-
Backoff time for VT fuze _--1.8 ies with the fuze temperature. Table L of the
h. Fire-for-Effect Data for Projectile XM454. XM454 firing tables lists the value to be sub-
Deflection---------------3,147 mils tracted from the computed time in determining
Timer setting-------------26.3 the time to be set on the XM32E1 sequential
QE---------------------325 mils timer.

24-39
FM 6-40

FDC COMPUTER'S RECORD

For use of this form, see FM 6-40; the proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATE 4o .cTIME RECEIVED TIME COMPLETED JTGT

,,6?tD
CALL FOR FIRE/8jp$,, lCORR TOT DF
) INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS
+- 3
- 3 OJPIVc b!c!T!
4//oV
pCIRG
DF 3/
9/0
Z
EL32r SH
ADJUST
A161
SP INSTR
LOT 01V

FIRE ORDER: 4 / SI CHG 3 FZ

UNIT(S) 1. vp;0,INF
-AF
BASIS FOR CORR 14#4e 60 wm10-Q
MF4/ (V C IN EFF
DISTR SH_____
. . S.DFJ/17TIa
LOT CHG IFZ 100/R20/Ri SFS11O(SSI
.RD;SPREAD 0AMMO
TIME --,. TGT - QE32XS EXP
OBSERVER CORRECTIONS SUBSEQUENT FIRE COMMANDS
SH
M DEV RG HOB SHCHG
'CTI CHART CHART DF FS SIE
HOBSILE EAMMO
X
FZ - FZ,MF RG DF ORR FIRED CORR CORR -EXP

tr __ iL~~L _ _ r __ _

now

O__ of
_
I _ ___
__
,,.OvucC1FTQ I c,M.t.. - -0

zoco
F rtw ,

/v vc___ vt" .1
2fL

GI PI 1ALT jF -T
C' 4?w 25

AMMUNITION
TYPE

ON HAND
RECEIVEDi ____

TOTAL__ ___ _ _ _ _

EXPENDED __ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ ___

REMAINING

REPLACES DA FORM 3622, 1 AUG 70, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.

DA FORM 3622, 1 Jan 74

Figure 24-16. 155 NUC K-transfer mission.

24-40
 FM 6-40

Section XV. FIRING WITHOUT A FIRING CHART

24-65. Introduction e. Elevation can be determined from either the
a. A field artillery battery must be able to tabular firing tables or the graphical firing table.
deliver timely fire even though a fire direction f. Initial fire commands are given in the pre-
center is not available to produce firing data. scribed manner (para 4-28 through 4-49).
There are numerous solutions for converting the
observer's call for fire to fire commands without 24-68. Determination of Angle T
a complete set of fire direction equipment and a a. The chart operator prepares the M17 plot-
firing chart. The solution presented in this sec- ting board.for use by initially placing the 0-0-32
tion is simple and rapid. graduation on the disk opposite the center of the
b. Actions that must be taken in preparation vernier scale. A mark is then placed on the
for firing without a firing chart fall into three rotating disk opposite the number representing
phases- the observer-target azimuth (labeling it 0) and
(1) Determination of data with which to another mark is placed on the disk opposite the
fire the initial round (s). number representing the gun-target azimuth
(2) Conversion of the subsequent correc- (labeling it G) (fig 24-17).
tions announced by the observer with respect to b. When the 0 is opposite the red arrow at
the observer-target (OT) line to corrections (in the top of the board, the board is oriented in the
meters) with respect to the gun-target (GT) line. OT position (fig 24-18). When the G is opposite
(3) Determination of firing data. the red arrow, the board is in the GT position
(fig 24-17).
24-66. Occupation of Position c. The angle T determined initially is retain-
The firing battery occupies position and is laid ed throughout the mission unless the weapons
by use of the procedures described in paragraphs shift more than 200 mils from the deflection
4-1 through 4-8. The executive officer estimates fired on the initial round.
the azimuth on which to lay the battery from
his knowledge of the situation or determines the 24-69. Conversion of Observer's Subsequent
azimuth from a map (if available). Corrections To Corrections With Re-
spect to the Gun-Target Line
24-67. Determination of Firing Data for Ini- a. During the adjustment, the observer fol-
tial Round(s) lows normal observer procedures.
Firing data for initial round(s) are determined
b. The chart operator converts the observer's
as follows:
a. The observer sends the call for fire, follow- shifts to corrections with respect to the GT line,
ing the procedures described in chapter 9. The by use of the M17 plotting board.
target may be located by any of the methods (1) The center of the plotting board al-
described in chapter 8. ways represents the location of the last burst.
(2) The chart operator places the rotating
b. On receipt of the call for fire, the executive disk in the OT position and plots the observer's
officer determines the direction and range to the shift on the disk. Any convenient scale may be
target. used. Most shifts can be plotted when a value of
(1) The executive officer may estimate the 10 or 20 meters is assigned to each small square
direction (azimuth) and range on the basis of of the grid.
his knowledge of this situation. (3) The chart operator now rotates the disk
(2) The executive officer may measure di- to the GT position. As the disk is rotated, the
rection (azimuth) and range from a map, if avail- plot of the observer's shift with respect to the
able. OT line is unchanged. The chart operator then
c. The executive officer determines deflection measures the shift with respect to the GT line
by comparing the azimuth to the target with the (center line of board) from the center of the
azimuth on which the battery was initially laid board. This shift is in meters.
and applying the difference to the referred de- Example: OT azimuth is 6400; GT azimuth
flection. is 0500. The observer's shift is RIGHT 120,
d. Site can be ignored unless the map (if avail- DROP 400. With the disk in the OT position and
able) indicates an appreciable difference in alti- each small square representing 20 meters, plot
tude between the battery position and the target. the shift 6 small squares to the right and 20

24-41
FM 6-40

Figure 24-17. GT position.

Figure 24-18. OT position.

24-42
 FM 6-40

Figure 24-19. Determining correctionswith respect to gun-target line.

small squares toward the bottom of the board b. Elevation. Elevation is determined by one
from the center (fig 24-18). Rotate the disk to
of the following methods:
the GT position and measure the shift with re-
spect to the GT line as RIGHT 290, DROP 300 (1) Graphical firing table. When a graphi-
(fig 24-19). cal firing table is used for determining elevation,
move the hairline of the cursor from the last
24-70. Determination of Firing Data for Sub- range fired an amount equal to the range correc-
sequent Rounds tion along the GT line and read a new elevation
a. Deflection. In determining the deflection for under the hairline (under the elevation gageline
subsequent rounds, it is necessary to convert the if a GFT setting has been constructed).
deviation corrections (in meters) with respect to
(2) Tabular firing tables. When the tabular
the GT line to mils and apply the correction in
firing tables are used for determining elevation,
mils to the previously red deflection. To convert
determine the C (change in elevation for a 100-
deviation in meters to deviations in mils, mul-
meter change in range) at the initial range and
tiply the 100/R value for the range to the target
use this value throughout the mission. The C
by the meter deviation divided by 100. Compute
used is the tabular value rounded to the nearest
the 100/R value (100 divided by the range in
even mil. When the range correction along the
thousands of meters) or set the hairline of the
GT line has been determined, compute an ele-
GFT over the range and read 100/R under the
vation change by multiplying the C by the range
hairline. change divided by 100. Apply the elevation
Example: Continuing the example in para-
change to the last elevation fired in order to
graph 24-69, determine the 100/R to be 20 mils.
determine the elevation for the next round.
Convert the deviation correction in meters,
Example: Weapon, 155-mm howitzer M109,
RIGHT 290, to a deviation correction in mils,
charge 5 green bag, initial range 5200, initial
RIGHT 58 (290/100 = 2.9 x 20). The deflection
elevation 247. C is determined to be 6 mils. The
announced to the weapons is DEFLECTION range change with respect to the GT line is
3142 (3200 + R 58, or 3200 -58).
determined to be DROP 300. The elevation

24-43
FM 6-40

change is computed to be -18 mils (300/100 = to firing data by use of the procedure described
3 x 6). The elevation for the next round is 229 in paragraph 24-70.
(247 -18). 24-72. Procedure when M17 Plotting Board
is Not Available
24-71. Small Angle T When the M17 plotting board is not available,
the executive officer may direct the observer to
When the angle T is less than 100 mils, the OT adjust with respect to the GT line. The observ-
line and the GT line may be considered to be the er's shifts are then converted directly to firing
same. The observer's shifts need not be convert- data by use of the procedure described in para-
ed to the GT line but may be converted directly graph 24-70.

24-44
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 25
FDC PROCEDURES FOR HIGH-ANGLE FIRE

25-1. General b. Range. The range scale, on which range is

a. High-angle fire is fire delivered at eleva- expressed logarithmically in meters, is applic-
tions greater than the elevation corresponding able to all charges appearing on one side of the
to the maximum range for a charge. Conse- base. Range is read to the nearest 10 meters.
quently, within the high-angle elevations for c. Elevaiton. Elevation is expressed in mils
charge, range decreases with an increase of and increases from right to left. Elevation is
elevation and increases with a decrease of ele- read to the nearest mil.
vation. High-angle fire is used in firing into or d. 10-mil site. The values on the 10-mil site
out of deep defilade. It may be requested by the scale denotes the site for each 10-mil angle of
observer or ordered by the S3. site for the elevation and charge selected. Num-
b. Most howitzers are capable of attacking bers are printed in red. The sign of the site is
targets effectively with high-angle fire. High- opposite that of the angle of site.
velocity weapons (guns) normally are not used e. Drift. The values on the drift scale are ex-
for high-angle fire because their high velocities pressed in mils and denote projectile drift. Drift
result in extremely high maximum ordinates, is always to the right.
long times of flight, and large probable errors. f. Time of flight. The time of flight scale is
Even with howitzers, high-angle fire results in graduated in seconds and indicates projectile
high maximum ordinates and correspondingly time of flight.
long times of flight. g. Care must be taken in reading the high-
c. To assist the observer in identifying his angle GFT so as not to read the scales incor-
rounds, FDC personnel will announce SPLASH rectly. On the high-angle GFT, the elevation,
5 seconds prior to impact. They may give the drift, and time of flight scales increase in the
time of flight when they announce SHOT. They direction opposite to the range scale.
must always announce time of flight to an air
observer. To provide security for the battery lo- 25-3. Fire Order
cation, the FDC may code the time of flight. When high-angle fire is to be used, the S3 will
d. The principal difference between low-angle omit the charge from the fire order. The charge
fire and high-angle fire is that in high-angle is determined by the adjusting battery compu-
fire an increase in elevation will cause a decrease ter (para 25-5). If the decision to fire high-
in range. angel is made by the S3, based on his estimate
of the situation, the words "high angle" will be
25-2. High-Angle GFT substituted in the fire order for charge; however,
In high-angle fire, as in low angle fire, the basic if high-angle fire is included in the observer's
sources of ballistic data are the current tabular call for fire, it need not be repeated in the fire
firing tables for each cannon. To simplify the order.
determination of firing data FDC personnel may
use the high-angle GFT. The high-angle GFT 25-4. Fire Commands
consists of one rule, with ballistic data for a. Fire commands for high-angle fire must in-
charges 1 through 5 on one side and data for clude the command HIGH-ANGLE to alert the
charges 5 through 7 on the other side. Data for gun crews that a high-angle mission is to be
charge 5 is included on both sides to facilitate fired. This command follows the ammunition lot
changing charges during a mission. The scales number. All other commands in a precision mis-
on the high-angle GFT, from top to bottom, are sion and the commands for the adjusting battery
as follows: in an area mission are the same as those for low-
angle fire.
a. 10O0/R. The high-angle 100/R scale is identi- b. The charge (which may change during the
cal to the low-angle 100/R scale. adjustment), the fuze setting (for VT fuze),

25-1
FM 6-40

and the quadrant elevation (which cannot be point of impact approximately parallel to, and
used until the piece is to be loaded) are omitted very near, the ground.
in the initial fire commands to the nonadjusting b. The maximum lethality against personnel
batteries. For example- in the open is attained with high-explosive pro-
Adjueting Battery Nonadjuating Battery
jectile and fuze VT. This combination has the
BATTERY ADJUST BATTERY ADJUST.
SHELL HE.
advantages of a lateral spray effect obtained
SHELLHE
LOT XRAY YANKEE LOT XRAY YANKEE. with fuze quick and the effectiveness of a very
HIGH ANGLE, HIGH ANGLE (charge low airburst.
CHARGE 4 is omitted). c. Because the side spray is horizontal, high-
FUZE QUICK--- FUZE QUICK. angle fire normally is less effective than low-
CENTER 1 ROUND, angle fire against personnel in trenches or fox-
BATTERY 4 ROUNDS
IN EFFECT BATTERY 4 ROUNDS. holes, regardless of the fuze used.
DEFLECTION 2992 - DEFLECTION 2847.
WAIT, OUT (further 25-7. Deflection
commands are not given a. Drift is a function of time of flight. (For
until fire for effect). convenience in low-angle fire, drift is considered
QUADRANT 1173. a function of elevation.) Thus, drift is appre-
c. The charge, the fuze setting (if any), and ciably greater in high-angle fire than in low-
the quadrant elevation for the nonadjusting angle fire because of the increased time of flight.
batteries are determined and announced when b. In high-angle fire, drift changes too rapid-
fire for effect is ordered. ly to permit the use of a deflection correction
scale such as that used in a low-angle fire. Be-
25-5. Selection of Charge cause drift changes a great amount for a rela-
In selecting the charge to be used, the adjusting
tively small range change, a correction to com-
battery computer, supervised by the S3, selects
pensate for drift, which is determined at the ele-
the charge that is least likely to require chang- vation to be fired, is included in each deflec-
ing because of subsequent corrections from the
tion to be fired. Since drift is to the right, the
observer. There is some degree of overlap in correction is always to the left. The correction is
ranges covered by various charges. If there ap-
always applied to the sum of the chart deflection
pears to be a choice between two charges, the and the deflection correction (if any).
computer selects the lower charge in order to Example: 155-mm howitzer, charge
5, high
reduce time of flight and tube wear. It may be
angle.
necessary to change charges during an adjust-
ment if the observer's initial target location was Chart Deflection Drift Piece
Range Elevation deflection correction correction deflection
inaccurate. 8500 1062 3200 0 L45 3245

25-6. Fuze 25-8. Site

The most effective fragmentation of any burst Although site has a relatively small effect be-
occurs in a plane at approximately right angles cause of the large angle of fall in high-angle
to the line of fall. This fragmentation is almost fire, site always is included in a registration, in
parallel to the ground in high-angle fire. Conse- a transfer mission, and in a mass mission. In
quently, if time fuze is fired, a very slight error other high-angle missions, site is ignored if the
in height of burst may result in a burst suffi- angle of site is no larger than plus or minus 30
ciently high to cause significant loss of fragmen- mils. Since in high-angle fire range decreases as
tation effect. Because of the large height-of-burst elevation increases and range increases as eleva-
tion decreases, a minus site must be used to
probable error, time fuze normally is not em-
compensate for a plus vertical interval and a plus
ployed in high-angle fire. The steep angle of fall
site must be used to compensate for a minus ver-
eliminates the possibility of ricochet fire. Fuze
tical interval.
quick or fuze VT normally is used.
a. Standard FDC procedures concerning site
a. Fuze quick is very effective when used in in high-angle fire are as follows:
high-angle fire against personnel in the open be- (1) The VCO computes and announces the
cause the projectile is almost vertical at the in- angle of site for each high-angle mission. Since
stant of detonation. Since the side spray of the there is no GST for high-angle fire, the VCO
burst contains most of the fragmentation, the computes the angle of site by use of the C and
effect is a spray in all directions out from the D scales of any graphical site table.

25-2
 FM 6-40

(2) Considering the size of the angle of Quadrant elevation

site and the type of mission to be fired, the com- (1062 + (p-5))------1,057 mils
puter decides whether site will be included. d. If a change in charge is required during the
(3) Regardless of whether site is included, conduct of the mission, site should be recomputed
the computer does not include the height-of- for the new charge.
burst correction (20/R) when VT fuze is to be
fired because the decending branch-of the tra- 25-9. Precision Registration
jectory in high-angle fire is almost vertical. High-angle precision registration procedures dif-
fer from low-angle precision registration proced-
b. When the tabular firing tables are used in ures in several respects.
computing site, the computer extracts from the
supplementary data table for the charge the com- a. Since range increases (decreases) as eleva-
plementary angle of site factor corresponding tion decreases (increases) in high-angle fire, the
to the initial elevation to be fired. The sign of the fork and elevation change are applied according-
complementary angle of site factor for a plus ly.
angle of site is minus; for a minus angle of site, b. High-angle fire introduces large amounts of
it is plus. Because the complementary angle of drift into the trajectory. Additionally, the value
site factor in high-angle fire always is greater of drift changes with each small change in
than 1 mil, the complementary angle of site al- range. This increased rate of change in drift in-
ways will be greater than the angle of site. To troduces a unique situation whereby deflections
determine the site, the computer algebraically fired at various elevations contain different
adds the complementary angle of site to the amounts of drift. In order to minimize the error
angle of site, which produces a site with sign caused by this condition the FDC must give spe-
opposite that of the angle of site. cial consideration to the computation of the cor-
c. Use of a special site scale on the high-angle rect deflection.
graphical firing table simplifies the determina- (1) During the adjustment phase, no use
tion of site for high-angle fire. The site scale is is made of line shots.
located just below the elevation scale. This scale (2) No attempt is made to change the value
is referred to as the 10-mil site scale. The read- of deflection until after the full even fork bracket
ing obtained from this scale gives the site for a has been established. At this time, the normal
10-mils angle of site at the elevation and charge procedure would apply. Definite deflection spot-
that is being used. To determine the site for any tings determined at either end or both ends of
point, divide the angle of site to that point by the fork bracket may be utilized.
10 and multiply the quotient by the factor read
from the 10-mil site scale. The value obtained c. Site must be algebraically subtracted from
will be slightly less accurate than the value the adjusted quadrant elevation to determine the
computed from the tabular tables. The 10-mil adjusted elevation. The correct site can be de-
site factor, considered negative, when multi- rived only by successive approximation, since
plied by the angle of the site and divided by 10, comp site is a function of elevation and not of
will produce the proper sign and amount of the chart range. Correct site is determined when the
site. The sign of the site will be opposite that of site computed agrees with or is within 1 mil of
the angle of site. the previously computed site. The last site com-
puted is the correct site.
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 5 Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 3
(GFT). (fig 25-1) (DA Form 4198 (Record of Precision
Chart range------8,500 meters Fire) ).
Elevation corresponding Angle of site . . +26 mils
to chart range 1,062 mils Adjusted QE 1074 mils
Altitude of battery 400 meters Site fired during regis-
Altitude of target 509 meters tration -- - 9 mils
Vertical interval + 109 meters 10-mil site factor cor-
Angle of site (C and D responding to eleva-
scales, GST) + 13 mils tion 1083 -4.0 mils
lO-mil site factor First apparent site (26/
(GFT)--------4.1 10 x (-4.0)) =
Site (13/10 x (-4.1) _-5 mils -10.4- - -10 mils

25-3
FM 6-40

(First apparent site is Total deflection correc-

within 1 mil of site tion ----- L40 mils
fired.) Drift correction corre-
Adjusted elevation 1,084 mils sponding to adjusted
elevation .
- L48 mils
d. GFT settings for high-angle fire are estab- GFT Deflection correc-
lished in the same manner as those for low-angle tion ---------------. R8 mils
fire. For the example in c above, the GFT set- g. If no high-angle registration has been con-
ting is GFT B: Charge 3, lot ZT, range 5420, ducted, a GFT deflection correction of zero will
elevation 1084. be used. If a charge other than that with which
e. Standard transfer limits are not applicable the registration was conducted is to be fired, the
to high-angle fire because of the short range GFT deflection correction for the charge nearest
span of each charge. Corrections are considered the charge to be fired is used.
valid for the charge used in determining the cor-
rections and are considered valid for other 25-10. Preparation of Graphical Equipment
charges as shown in table 25-1. a. Construct the GFT setting by placing the
Table 25-1. Transfer Limits, High Angle hairline over the adjusted elevation for the
Weapon Charge registered Transfer limits charge and drawing a range gageline through
with
the GFT setting range. This will facilitate using
105-mm the GFT setting for other charges when only
how All ranges, charges 1 through
1, 2, 3, 4, 5
5. one high-angle registration has been conducted.
6 -- Charge 6 only, ± 1,500 b. The GFT deflection correction for each
meters.* charge is placed on the GFT adjacent to the data
7 --- Charge 7 only, ± 1,500 for that charge. It is used in a fire mission by
meters.* algebraically adding it to the value of drift
155-mm how 1, 2, 3, 4 All ranges, charges 1 through
for each round to be fired to determine the total
and 8-inch 5.
how. 5 ------Charge 5 only, ± 1,500 deflection correction.
meters.*
6 - Charge 6 only, ± 1,500 25-11. Data for Replot
meters.* a. The purpose of replot in high-angle fire is
7 ---- -Charge 7 only, ± 1,500 the same as that in low-angle fire (para 20-15).
meters.*
* - 2,000 meters for registration point ranges greater than 10,000
b. Regardless of whether site is included dur-
meters. ing the adjustment, the correct site must be
f. The adjusted deflection is equal to the cor- algebraically subtracted from the adjusted (fire-
rect deflection plus the correction for lateral base for-effect) quadrant elevation to obtain the ad-
piece displacement. The total deflection correc- justed (fire-for-effect) elevation. The range at
tion is determined by subtracting the chart de- which the target is plotted is determined from
the adjusted elevation. During the adjustment,
flection from the adjusted deflection. Because
the 10-mil site factor may change considerably.
drift is so large and changes so rapidly, construc-
Therefore, the effective site at the end of the ad-
tion of a deflection correction scale is not con-
justment will be different from that used in the
sidered practical for high-angle fire. Instead, the
initial firing data. This error must be corrected
correction for drift corresponding to the adjust-
if the target is to be plotted at its correct range.
ed elevation is algebraically subtracted from the
total deflection correction. The result is called Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, GFT set-
the GFT deflection correction and is considered ting (from prior registration is GFT B: Charge
to be a constant for all factors except drift. 5, lot WY, range 7050, elevation 1145.
Angle of site-----+20 mils
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge Adjusted QE-----1,162 mils
3, high angle. lO-mil site factor corre-
Adjusted elevation 1,084 mils sponding to elevation
Correct deflection 3,188 mils 1162 -- -- 2.0 mils
Correction for BP dis- First apparent site
placement -R6 mils (+2.0) x (-2.0) =
Adjusted deflection ..... 3,182 mils - 4.0------ -- 4 mils
Chart deflection 3,142 mils

25-4
 FM 6-40
RECORD OF PRECISION FIRE
For use of this form, see FM 6-40;proponent agency is TRADOC.

BATTERY DATE/TIME OBSERVER E P TGT

AlIqoC 7 50 14
GFT SETTING TOTAL DF CORR
GFT" B CHG 3 LOT Z: T RG 5z/,Zo EL /A4TI 1 9
CHART DATA INITIAL FIRE COMMANDS T
TOT DF
DF 3/2 CORR 1.5/ BP DISP ADJUST %( R
•RG 5 30 EL 1/05 ACH RG SH /..V, LOTZT//L A
ADJUSTED DATA SI -? KN FZ CORR CHG 3 FZ Q
DF , /2 S - 4s, ,, MF gp L
EL /0ag F: IOP SI FAC -3. DF ,3193 G
TIME _/ 2 F: 8 ANGLE T /7O QE ________

RD LOTFZ MF CHART CHART DF TIME OBSR SPOTTING FDC

ELCORREQE OR SPOTTING
NO RG D.F.. (o) FIRED FIRED CORRECTION RG DF

( _ 5_.5o31 q2 L 3
351 //Q 09 L3o + oo
- ___ SSo 314 4# 3188 /MI'./o45 /0 _ _

_ _ o
57/o 319(" 4319Z '. 7 1/058 R.a
_ _57_ 4 31
J/Lt 4)#3/89 /060 /05/ +R " R
_3185) (0
IOed, L. "
S_1 31) io2L3 -R
319_10-5 -R

o70 ____ /0 75 -R -" R

12
__/_107_
__
+LN 4 A
13 'MAN -__/0,100

14 /AEL 12.7 CO-R D -

15 AM / 074( _,-3R-FOR JO____LQ RL6
16 g-ITgFr%(-9 A0T1 OF ._____
IT / rAPP-L - C R1.__
18 S R/ 0 -8 TOT DF " R -

'9 IST AP i 10) (-to

- -0 DR r CORR _ __

20 AGREWS T IhN 0F SITE E CFT OFcoRR

21 A__;FEL_(-7
22

24
.EPLACE.DA.FOM.
.-... .. 1.OCT.. WHCH.IS.. SOET... .
REPLACES DA FORM 6-12, 1 OCT 64, WHICH IS OBSOLETE.
DA FORM 4198, I Jan /4

Figure 25-1. Record of precision registration,high-angle fire

First apparent adjusted Second apparent site

elevation (1162 - (+2.0) x (-1.9).=
(-4))-------------1,166 mils .- 3.8 -4 mils
10-mil site factor corre- Second apparent site
sponding to elevation agrees with first ap-
1166 -1.9 mils parent site

25-5
FM 6-40

Adjusted elevation angle fire, massing or transfer of fire is less reli-

(1162- (-4)) 1,166 mils able in high-angle fire than in low-angle fire.
Range corresponding to However, under stable weather conditions, suc-
elevation 1166 (use cessful transfers of fire within a single charge
GFT setting) used in are practicable. The small area of range cov-
replotting target 6,780 meters ered by each charge prevents establishment of
c. After the adjusted elevation has been de- definite transfer limits. Consequently, every ef-
termined as described in b above, the GFT de- fort should be made to obtain observation and
flection correction for the charge (or, if no GFT to adjust each battery that is to fire on the
deflection correction has been determined for the target.
charge fired, the GFT deflection correction from b. If several batteries are to mass on a target
the nearest charge that does have a GFT deflec- when only one battery is to adjust, site should
tion correction) and the drift correction are sub- be computed at the initial range for each battery.
tracted from the fire-for-effect piece deflection. Site should be recomputed for the nonadjusting
If no GFT deflection correction has been deter- batteries whenever it is necessary to recompute
mined, only the drift correction is subtracted site for the adjusting battery (e.g., when the
from the fire-for-effect piece deflection. The re- adjusting battery changes charges) or should
sult is the deflection for replotting the target. be recomputed for an individual nonadjusting
Example: 155-mm howitzer M109, charge 5. battery when it changes charges.
FFE piece deflection -3,245 mils c. During an adjustment, the 10-mil site fac-
Adjusted elevation 1,166 mils tor may change considerably. As a result, the site
Drift correction corre- at the end of the adjustment will differ from
sponding to adjusted that used in the initial commands. However, the
elevation L62 mils error in range due to false site will be essentially
GFT deflection correc- the same for all batteries.
tion for charge 5..... L15 mils
25-13. Duties of Fire Direction Personnel
Total deflection correc-
The duties of fire direction personnel in high-
tion (L62 + Li5) L77 mils
angle fire are the same as those in low-angle
Replot deflection (3245
- L77)
fire except for minor modifications as shown be-
3,168 mils
low:
d. If the terrain is rugged or if a large range
change has been made since the angle of site a. If the observer does not request high-angle
was first computed (the angle of site may be first fire but the S3 decides that high-angle fire will
computed at the beginning of the mission or at be used, the command HIGH ANGLE will be
the onset of determining replot data), the angle given in lieu of the charge in the fire order.
of site is recomputed for the replotted location Example: BATTALION, BRAVO, USE
of the target. The new map altitude is used in GFT, LOT ZULU TANGO, HIGH ANGLE
determining the new angle of site. If the new FUZE VT IN EFFECT, 2 ROUNDS, TARGET
angle of site differs by more than 1 mil from the ALFA FOXTROT 7604.
angle of site previously computed, a new adjust-
b. When adjustment is required before mass-
ed elevation and a corrected range for replotting ing the battalion, the battery that is centrally
the target must be obtained. This process is re-
located should normally be designated as the
peated until the correct angle of site (one that
adjusting battery to eliminate large differences
agrees with or is within 1 mil of that previously in range.
computed) and adjusted elevation have been de-
termined. The procedure for reporting data is the c. For all mass missions, batteries should fire
same as that used for low-angle fire except that center range, since large range dispersion can
the type of fire and charge used are included: be expected.
for example, GRID _____, ALTITUDE d. The VCO determines and announces angle
FUZE
,___ -, HIGH ANGLE, of site for all missions.
CHARGE , TARGET____ e. The computer--
(1) Selects the charge to be fired.
25-12. Massing and Transfers (2) Combines the drift correction, the
a. Because of the high maximum ordinates GFT deflection correction, and the chart deflec-
and long times of flight encountered in high- tion to determine the deflection to fire.

25-6
 FM 6-40

, (3) Determines site when the angle of site

is larger than a plus or minus 30 mils or when a
registration, transfer mission, or mass fire mis-
sion is to be fired.

25-7
 FM 6-40,

CHAPTER 26
OBSERVED FIRING CHARTS

Section I. INTRODUCTION
26-1. General may fire white phosphorous, colored smoke, or a
Immediate delivery of supporting fires must not high airburst (HE or WP). Subsequent firing
be delayed because of incomplete survey or the data are based on the observer's corrections.
lack of suitable maps. When survey control and Fire direction procedures in the conduct of fire
maps are not available, an observed firing chart are generally the same as those used with a sur-
is constructed. An observed firing chart is a veyed firing chart. After the mission has been
chart on which the relative locations of the bat- completed, the observer may use the target as a
tery position(s) and targets are established by known point in reporting other target locations.
the adjustment of fires. An observed firing chart c. As long as the ballistic variable of weather,
normally is constructed on a grid sheet. materiel, and ammunition remain constant, any
previously fired target may be refired with the
26-2. Initial Observed Firing Charts same data. If the ballistic conditions do not re-
a. If the battery initial chart is an observed main constant inaccuracies will occur in sub-
firing chart, the battery center is assigned as- sequent firing. The battery should conduct a regis-
sumed grid coordinates and an assumed altitude; tration as soon as possible in order to provide a
e.g., grid 20004000, altitude 400 meters. The grid means of determining subsequent ballistic changes
sheet is appropriately numbered based on the and to increase the accuracy of relative locations.
assumed battery location and a deflection index
is constructed based on the azimuth of lay. The d. The FDC should plot on the firing chart
relative location of the battery and target can targets fired in order to provide additional means
now be established by the adjustment of fire. of target location. The last pinhole will provide
sufficient accuracy and should be noted with tick
b. The observer's call for fire must include marks and a target number.
MARK CENTER OF SECTOR as the target lo-
cation if no other method of locating the tar- e. In situations in which survey control does
get is feasible. The fire direction officer deter- not exist and maps are either inaccurate or non-
mines the direction of fire and a safe range based existent, the countermortar or counterbattery
on his knowledge of the situation. The chart op- radar can be used to place the artillery battalion
erators determine the data for the initial round on a common grid and provide common direction
from the estimated direction and range to for the massing of fires. Detailed information
the center of the observer's sector. To assist the regarding radar charts is given in paragraphs
observer in locating the first round, the battery 26-31 and 26-32 and FM 6-161.

Section II. BATTERY OBSERVED FIRING CHARTS

26-3. General c. Conduct a precision registration (fuze
The procedure for constructing an observed fir- time, if possible) on the registration point.
ing chart consists of the following steps: d. Determine the adjusted data.
e. From the adjusted data, determine the di-
a. Have the observer select a registration rection (azimuth) and distance (range) from
point in the center of the zone of fire. the registration point to the battery.
b. Assign this point assumed grid coordinates f. Polar plot the battery center from the reg-
and an assumed altitude and plot it on the firing istration point.
chart. Since this point is completely arbitrary, a 26-4. Construction of the Observed Firing
grid intersection is preferred. (Example: Grid Chart
2000040000, altitude 400 meters, long axis of the a. The battery is plotted on the back-azimuth
grid sheet north-south, southwest corner 1833.) of the azimuth of fire. If an impact registration
26-1
 FM 6-40

is fired and site cannot be approximated, the b. The vertical interval between the battery
battery is plotted at a range corresponding to and the registration point should be estimated
the adjusted quadrant elevation. If a time regis- if possible. The estimated vertical interval is
tration is fired, the range corresponding to the used in determining site (by successive approxi-
adjusted time is used. The derived site is used for mation) and the battery altitude in the following
determining the relative altitude of the battery. manner:
The deflection index is constructed at the ad- (1) Determine the range corresponding to
justed deflection and a deflection correction scale the adjusted quadrant.
is prepared so that large deflection corrections (2) Use this range and the estimated ver-
are not required. tical interval to compute a first apparent site.
b. One of the sources of inaccuracy in an ob- (3) Apply the site to the adjusted QE to
served firing chart is the inclusion of false site determine an elevation.
which results in a corresponding error in the (4) Determine the range corresponding to
polar plot range. Errors due to false site can be this elevation.
reduced by use of time fuze and by selection (5) Use this range and the estimated ver-
of the charge that minimizes the height-of-burst tical interval to compute a second apparent site.
probable error. (6) Continue successive approximation un-
c. The battery observed firing chart may be til the site agrees with or is within 1 mil of the
consolidated into a battalion chart if all batter- previously computed site. Use last site computed
ies register on the same registration point (para to determine the adjusted elevation and use the
26-12 through 26-15) or if the batteries have adjusted elevation to determine the back plot
been tied together by survey with respect to one range.
another (para 26-26). (7) Apply the vertical interval to the as-
26-5. Determination of Direction for Polar sumed altitude of the registration point to deter-
Plotting mine the altitude of the battery.
a. At the completion of the registration, the
battery executive officer measures the azimuth 26-7. Determination of Range and Altitude,
or the orienting angle (if an orienting line has Time Plot, Site Unknown
a. The major sources of error in range in an
been established).
observed firing chart, percussion plot, are the
b. When an orienting line has not been es-
lack of an accurate site and the effects of un-
tablished, the executive officer measures the azi- known variations from standard conditions. If
muth of fire after registration. The battery cen-
the site is unknown or incorrect, the derived ad-
ter is polar plotted on the back-azimuth of the
justed elevation is in error by the amount of the
measured azimuth.
error in site. Determining the polar plot range
c. When an orienting line has been established,
from a false elevation introduces a false range.
the battery executive officer will measure the
However, the effect of site on the fuze setting is
orienting angle after the registration. The azi-
usually small. Therefore, the adjusted time can
muth of fire is then computed (azimuth of ori-
be used as a good indicator of the adjusted ele-
enting line minus the orienting angle equals the
azimuth of fire). The battery center is then polar vation and the polar plot range.
b. Derive a site by subtracting the elevation
plotted from the registration point on the back-
corresponding to the adjusted time (minus the
azimuth of the azimuth of fire.
average fuze correction, if any) from the ad-
26-6. Determination of Range and Altitude, justed quadrant elevation. Using the GST, de-
Percussion Plot termine the vertical interval by multiplying the
a. When maps and survey data are not avail- polar plot range by the derived site. Determine
able the determination of accurate site is im- the altitude of the battery by applying the ver-
possible. However, every effort must be made to tical interval to the assumed altitude of the
determine the approximate site. If the determin- registration point.
ation of even an approximate site is not feasible, Example: Time plot, site unknown. A 155-
the site is assumed to be zero. mm howitzer M109 battery using charge 5 has
The range for polar plotting is the range corres- registered on a registration point.
ponding to the adjusted elevation (adjusted QE Adjusted QE-----315
minus the site); the hairline of the GFT is Adjusted time --- 20.4
placed over the adjusted elevation and the range Average fuze correc-
is read under the hairline. tion--------None

26-2
 FM 6-40

Range corresponding to responds to the fuze setting fired (adjusted

time 20.4----------6,140 time) and is equal to the elevation plus the comp
(polar plot range). site to the registration point. Subtracting the
Elevation corresponding elevation plus comp site from the adjusted quad-
to time 20.4 305 rant elevation for the registration point gives the
Derived site (315 - angle of site to the registration point. The angle
305)---------------+10 of site thus determined and the range corres-
Vertical interval (+10 ponding to the adjusted time can be used in com-
X 6140) (GST) + 55 puting the vertical interval and the site to the
Altitude of registration registration point.
point (assumed) 400 c. The procedure for conducting an executive's
Altitude of battery (400
-55)-------------345 high burst is as follows:
(1) After the time registration, the battery
c. When an average fuze correction is known, executive officer is sent the following command:
the accuracy of site and elevation is increased OBSERVE HIGH BURST REGISTRATION,
by determining the adjusted elevation in the MEASURE ANGLE OF SITE, 3 ROUNDS,
following manner: ADJUSTED DEFLECTION (so much), AD-
(1) Subtract the average fuze correction JUSTED TIME (so much), ADJUSTED QUAD-
from the adjusted time. RANT ELEVATION (so much). The executive
(2) Read the adjusted elevation correspond- officer estimates the increase in site necessary
ing to the adjusted time. to cause the bursts to be visible from the battery
position and adds it to the announced quadrant
26-8. Determination of Range and Altitude, elevation. He then has the base piece fire three
Time Plot, Site Known rounds at the adjusted deflection, the adjusted
If an approximate site is known, data are deter-
time, and the increased quadrant elevation. The
mined as follows:
a. Determine the polar plot range in the same executive officer measures the angle of site to
manner as described in paragraph 26-7. each burst with an aiming circle or a BC scope
(battery commander's telescope) set up in the
b. Use the known site to determine the alti-
vicinity of the base piece. He then reports the
tude of the battery.
average observed angle of site and the quadrant'
c. Derive the elevation by subtracting the
known site from the adjusted quadrant of ele- elevation fired.
vation. (2) The FDC determines the site to the re-
gistration point, the adjusted elevation, and the
26-9. Determination of Site by Firing (Execu- vertical interval between the battery and the re-
tive's High Burst) gistration point in the following manner:
An approximate site of an accuracy approaching (a) Determine the elevation plus comp
survey accuracy may be determined from a mod- site for the executive's high burst by subtract-
ified high-burst registration fired after a preci- ing the average angle of site reported by the
sion registration. battery executive officer from the quadrant eleva-
a. Fuze setting (time), for a given charge, is tion fired. The elevation plus comp site thus deter-
a function of elevation plus complementary angle mined is also the elevation plus comp site to the
of site. Therefore, if the fuze setting is kept con- registration point.
stant but the quadrant elevation is varied, the (b) Determine the angle of site to the re-
elevation plus comp site to each of the resulting gistration point by subtracting the elevation plus
points of burst is constant. comp site from the adjusted quadrant elevation
b. If, after a registration, a group of rounds to the registration point.
is fired with the adjusted time but with a quadrant (c) Using the C and D scales of the GST,
elevation large enough to raise the point of burst determine the vertical interval between the bat-
so that the burst is visible from the gun posi- tery and the registration point by multiplying
tion, the angle of site to the burst can be mea- the angle of site ((b) above) by the range to the

, sured. The measured angle of site is subtracted

from the fired quadrant elevation. The re-
sult is the elevation plus comp site to the burst
registration point in thousands to the nearest 10
meters.
(d) Using the appropriate site range scale
(QE = elevation + angle of site + comp site). of the GST, determine the site to the registration
The elevation plus comp site thus determined cor- point by dividing the vertical interval by the

26-3
FM 6-40

range to the registration point. Do not move Note. If graphical equipment is not avail-
the cursor of the GST from the position it was able, site may be determined in the following manner:
in when the VI was determined in (c) above. Comp site factor for range 5960 (6000) -------- -0.070
Comp site (9 X (-0.070)) -- 0.6
(e) Derive the adjusted elevation by sub- ------
10
Site (-9) + (-0.6)= (-9.6)
tracting the site ( (d) above) from the adjusted
quadrant elevation.
Example: A 155-mm howitzer M109 regis- d. After understanding the theory on which
tered on a point with charge 5. The adjusted the determination of site by firing is based, it
data for the registration point included adjusted may be easier to use the "got minus asked for"
time (fz M564) 19.7 and adjusted quadrant rule (fig 26-1) in computing the angle of site.
elevation 302 mils. The report from the executive For the example in c above, if the angle of site
officer following the high burst was OBSERVED to the registration point had been zero, the in-
ANGLE OF SITE PLUS 14, QUADRANT crease in quadrant elevation to 325 (increase of
FIRED 325. The registration point site, adjusted +23 mils "asked for") would have caused the
elevation, and vertical interval are determined as burst to occur at a measured angle of site + 23
follows: mils. Since the bursts actually occurred at a mea-
Range corresponding to sured angle of site + 14 mils ("got"), the angle
adjusted time (19.7)- 5960 of site to the registration point must be -9 mils.
QE fired for high The formula (fig 26-1) used is angle of site to
burst ------ 325 registration point = got minus asked for =
Average angle of site to + 14 - ( + 23) = -9. Convert this angle of site
high burst +14 to site in the manner described in c above.
Elevation plus comp site
to high burst 311 26-10. Deflection Index
After the battery has been polar plotted on the
Adjusted QE to registra-
chart, the deflection index is constructed at the
tion point -302
adjusted deflection.
Elevation plus comp site
to registration point - 311 26-11. GFT Settings
Angle of site to registra- The GFT setting for a battery using an observed
tion point (302-311) -9 firing chart is made in the usual manner. Place
Vertical interval (-9 the hairline over the chart range (polar plot
x 5.96, C and D range) and draw the elevation gageline through
scales, GST) -53 the adjusted (derived) elevation and time gage-
Site (-52.6/5960, GST) -10 line through the adjusted time. Elevation and
Adjusted elevation (302 time gagelines will be constructed even though
- (-10)) -- 312 they are located on the hairline.

Section III. BATTALION OBSERVED FIRING CHART

26-12. General as those for the construction of a battery ob-

a. A battalion observed firing chart is based on served firing chart. This section will describe the
the concept that points located with respect to a techniques used in the construction of the batta-
common point are located with respect to each lion chart.
other. If each firing battery of a battalion has
registered on the same registration point and 26-13. Determination of Direction for Polar
has been located on the firing chart using the Plotting
procedures outlined in paragraphs 26-4 through The direction used for polar plotting each battery
26-11, the batteries are then considered to be is determined in the manner prescribed in para-
plotted in correct relationship to each other. Be- graph 26-5.
cause the batteries are located correctly with re-
26-14. Determination of Range and Altitude
spect to each other, the fires of the battalion may
Percussion Plot
be massed on any target located by the adjust- a. Range and altitude for each battery may be
ment of one of the batteries. determined in the manner described in para-
b. The principles involved in the construction graph 26-6.
of a battalion observed firing chart are the same b. If the relative altitudes of the batteries of

26A
 FM 6-40

QE 325 mils (To HB)

23 mils ("asked for")

EL 311 mils
(actual elevation plus
comp site)
QE 302 mils (adjusted)

Got - asked for = +14 - (+)23 = -9 mils angle of site

Figure 26-1. "Got minus asked for" diagram

meters. The vertical intervals between the other

the battalion can be determined, the accuracy of
batteries and Battery B are as follows: Battery
the firing chart can be improved. One battery is
A, -48 meters; Battery C, +34 meters. The ad-
selected as a reference battery and its polar plot
justed data included the following:
range and altitude are determined in the manner Battern Adjnsted QE
described in paragraph 26-6. The altitude and A --------------------------------------- 337
323
range for each of the other batteries are deter- B ---------------------------------------
C --------------------------------------- 320
mined in the following manner:
Determine the battery altitudes and polar plot
(1) Compute the vertical interval between
ranges as follows:
the battery in question and the registration point
Battery B:
by applying the difference in altitude between
Altitude of registration
the battery in question and the reference battery point -------------- 500
to the vertical interval from the reference bat-
tery to the registration point. Altitude of Battery B - 500
Vertical interval - 0
(2) Compute an apparent site for the bat-
tery in question by using the vertical interval Site ----------------- 0
Adjusted elevation
((1) above) and the range corresponding to the
(323-0) -- 323
adjusted quadrant elevation for the battery.
(3) Derive an apparent adjusted elevation by Range corresponding to
subtracting the apparent site from the adjusted adjusted elevation 323
quadrant elevation. (polar plot range) - 6,410
(4) Compute a new site by using the vert- Battery A:
Altitude of Battery B - 500
ical interval and the range corresponding to
the apparent adjusted elevation and determine a Vertical interval (with
new adjusted elevation. If the n .w site varies by respect to Battery B) -48
Altitude of Battery A - 452
more than 1 mil from the appartnt site, continue
successive approximation until two successive Altitude of registration
sites agree or are within 1 mil. point - 500
+48
(5) When the apparent site is within 1 mil Vertical interval -----

of the last site computed, determine the adjusted Range corresponding to

elevation. The polar plot range is the range cor- adjusted quadrant ele-
responding to this adjusted elevation. vation 337 mils ---- 6,620
Example: The batteries of a 155-mm howit- First apparent site
zer M109 battalion have registered on a com- (+48/6620, GST) - +8
mon registration point with charge 5 green First apparent adjusted
bag. The assumed altitude of the registration point elevation (337 -
and Battery B, the reference battery, is 500 (+8)) ------------ 329

26-5
FM 6-40

Range corresponding to Example: The batteries of a 155-mm howi-

first apparent ad- tzer M109 battalion have registered on a com-
justed elevation, 329 mon registration point with charge 5. The as-
mils,--------------6500 sumed altitude of the registration point is 400
Second apparent site meters. The adjusted data included the follow-
( + 48/6500, GST) +8 ing:
This site agrees with the Adjusted Adjusited
Battery QE time
last site computed;
therefore, it is used to A - -- 21.0
327 ----- ------------
B 330 21.7
determine the ad- C 339 22.2
justed elevation (337
- (+8))----------329 The site for Battery B, determined from an exe-
cutive's high burst, is -5 mils. A common GFT
Range corresponding to
setting is constructed and the polar plot ranges
adjusted elevation 32.9 and altitudes are determined as follows:
mils (polar plot Battery B
range)-------------6,500 Adjusted quadrant ele-
Battery C vation 330
Altitude of Battery B 500 Site (executive's high
Vertical interval (with burst) -5
respect to Battery B) + 34 Adjusted elevation (330
Altitude of Battery C 534 - (-5)) -- 335
Altitude of registration Range corresponding to
point--------------500 adjusted time 21.7 6,460
Vertical interval -34 (polar plot range)
Range corresponding to Vertical interval (-5 x
adjusted quadrant ele- 6460, GST) - -29
vation, 320 mils ____6,370 Note. Since a common GFT setting is to be used
First apparent site in determining site for the other batteries and since the
(-34/6370, GST) -6 vertical intervals for these batteries will be based on site,
First apparent adjusted the vertical interval computed for the battery that fires
the executive's high burst is also based on site, not angle
elevation (320 -
of site.
(-6)) --- 326 Altitude of registration point 400
Range corresponding to Altitude of Battery B 429
first apparent ad- The common GFT setting con-
justed elevation, 326 structed from these data is
mils---------------6,460 GFT B: Chg 5, lot
Second apparent site rg 6460, el 335, ti 21.7.
( - 34/6460,GST) -6 Battery A: Note: To derive site for the other
This site agrees with batteries, move the hairline to the adjusted time
the last site computed. for the battery in question, read the elevation
Therefore, the ad- under the elevation gageline of the common GFT
justed elevation is 326 setting, and substract this elevation from the ad-
mils. Range corre-
justed QE.
sponding to adjusted Adjusted time -- 21.0
elevation 326 mils
(polar plot range) __6,460 Adjusted elevation (elevation
gageline) --------- 323
26-15. Determination of Range and Altitude, Adjusted quadrant elevation -- 327
Time Plot Site (327-323) +4
a. The range and altitude for each battery may Range corresponding to ad-
be determined as described in paragraph 26-7.
justed time 21.0 (polar plot
b. If the site for one battery can be deter- range)--------------------6,290
mined by an executive's high burst, a common Vertical interval (+4 x 6.29,
GFT setting can be constructed and used for +22
GST) - --
determining the sites for the other batteries of Altitude of registration point 400
the same caliber. Altitude of Battery A -- - 378

26-6
 FM 6-40

Battery C rive the adjusted elevation by subtracting the

Adjusted time -- 22.2 site from the adjusted quadrant elevation.
Adjusted elevation (elevation Example: The batteries of a 155-mm howi-
gageline) 344 tzer M109 battalion have registered on a common
Adjusted quadrant elevation 339 registration point with charge 5. The vertical in-
Site (339 - 344) -5 terval between Battery A and Battery B is + 9
Range corresponding to ad- meters; between Battery C and Battery B, -6
justed time 22.2 (polar plot meters. The assumed altitude of the registration
range) - ---- 6,570 point is 400 meters. The adjusted data are as fol-
Vertical interval (-5 x 6570, lows:
Adjusted Adjusted
GST) -29 Battery QE time

Altitude of registration point -- 400 A 330 20.8

Altitude of Battery C 429 B 323 20.5
C 320 20.0
Adjusted
Altitude Site Elevation
Battery Range (meters) (mils) (mils) After conducting its registration, Battery B fired
A 6290 378 +4 323 an executive's high burst and determined the site
B 6460 429 -5 335 to the registration point to be + 9 mils and the
C 6570 429 -5 344 vertical interval to be + 50 meters.
Adjusted
elevation
Battery Range Altitude Site
c. If the relative altitudes of the batteries are 359 323
A 6.240 +7
known by survey, one battery may fire an execu- B 6160 350 +9 314
tive's high burst to determine its site and altitude C 6040 344 +10 310
with respect to the registration point. The alti-
tudes of the other batteries with respect to the d. Each battery may fire an executive's high
registration point may then be computed. Com- burst to determine the site to the registration
pute site by using the vertical interval between point (para 26-9). Range, altitude, and adjusted
the battery and the registration point and the elevation are determined as described in para-
range corresponding to the adjusted time. De- graph 26-8.

Section IV. REPLOTTING TARGETS ON THE OBSERVED FIRING CHART

26-16. General at the FFE deflection minus the total deflection
The considerations for replotting targets on the correction at the FFE elevation (determined by
observed firing chart are the same as those for replot).
replotting targets on the surveyed firing chart
(para 20-17) except that the target coordin- 26-19. Point-Detonation Fuze
ates will not be sent outside the battalion that Targets fired with point-detonating fuze are re-
has established its own arbitrary grid system. plotted on the observed firing chart in the same
manner as on the surveyed firing chart, except
26-17. Replotting Targets with Refinement that, since maps normally are not available, any
Data information indicating the altitude of the target,
a. The observer must give refinement data such as the observer's up or down corrections,
whenever the mean burst location is not on the is used in determining the vertical interval. The
adjusting point. All refinement data are plotted site (the vertical interval will not change) and
and converted into firing data regardless of the adjusted elevation are then determined by
whether the observer requests additional fires, successive approximation (para 26-14b.)
requests recording of the target, or announces
END OF MISSION.
26-20. Fuze VT
b. For the discussion in the following para-
graphs, the terms FFE deflection and FFE ele- Targets fired with fuze VT are plotted on the
vation refer to the final firing data or the firing observed firing chart in the manner described
data determined from refinement data. in paragraph 26-19.
Targets fired with fuze time are replotted
on the observed firing chart in the manner de-
26-18. Replot Deflection
The target is plotted on the observed firing chart scribed in paragraph 20-20.

26-7
 FM 6-40

Section V. OBSERVED FIRING CHART FOR MORE THAN ONE

BATTALION
26-22. General
Massing the fires of more than one battalion by
use of an observed firing chart is possible pro-
810
vided common control can be established. Com-
mon control can be achieved if aiming circles are Div reg pt1
I 128
uniformly declinated. A common registration
320/\
point with assumed grid coordinates and an as-
sumed altitude must be designated for all bat-
talions. Also, one battery of each battalion must \Bn reg pt I
be registered on the common registration point.
The area in which fires can be accurately massed
is smaller than the area represented by the ob-
IIll A
served firing chart for one battalion. The com- \
\Ill
paratively great distance between battalions will
introduce errors that increase as the distance \ /I
between the common registration point and the \ Il'
target increases. The relative altitudes of the com- \ I |
mon registration point and the battalion position \ I
areas must be known if several widespread bat-
talions are to mass their fires effectively. Higher
headquarters is responsible for selecting the re-
gistration point, assigning the arbitrary grid
coordinates and altitude, and coordinating re- I \ A
I B A
gistration. Registration may be coordinated by as- C
signing times for conducting registrations or by
requiring a single battalion to register one bat- Figure 26-2. Battalion observed firing chart based on
tery of its own and one battery from each of the registrationon a division artillery registrationpoint.
other battalions involved.
26-24. Construction of Observed Firing Chart
26-23. Construction of Observed Firing Chart for More Than One Battalion (Tracing
for More Than One Battalion Paper Method)
The plotting method of constructing each bat- An alternate, but less accurate, method of con-
talion observed firing chart is as follows (fig structing an observed firing chart for more than
26-2). one battalion is the tracing paper method. The
a. Polar plot the registering battery from the chart is constructed as follows:
common registration point designated by higher a. Plot the battalion registration point, the
headquarters. The back-azimuth of the adjusted batteries, and fired targets on the battalion chart.
azimuth and the distance derived from the ad- After registration, polar plot the common re-
justed data are used in polar plotting. gistration point from the registering battery on
b. Polar plot the battalion registration point the battalion chart. Compute the altitude of the
from the registering battery position. The azi- common registration point.
muth and distance (to the battalion registration b. Make an overlay of the battalion chart in-
point) that were determined previously from re- cluding all points plotted on the battalion chart.
gistration on the battalion registration point are c. Plot the common registration point on the
used in polar plotting. chart for more than one battalion at the grid
c. Register the other batteries of the battalion
coordinates specified by the higher headquarters.
and then polar plot the batteries from the bat-
d. Draw a ray on the chart for more than one
talion registration point in the normal manner.
battalion in the direction of the back-azimuth of
d. If the battalion registration point and the
the adjusted azimuth from the registration on the
common registration point are not within trans-
fer limits or if different charges are used, estab- common registration point.
e. Place the overlay over the chart for more
lish separate GFT settings and separate deflec-
than one battalion and orient the overlay so that
tion correction scales.
the common registration point is over its chart

26-8
 FM 6-40

location and the registering battery is over the g. Reconcile all altitudes with the altitude as-
ray (d above). signed to the common registration point.
f. Pinprick the locations of the batteries, bat- h. Construct on the chart for more than one
talion registration point, and targets through the battalion deflection indexes based on the adjusted
overlay onto the chart for more than one bat- data for the battalion chart.
talion.
Section VI. OBSERVED FIRING CHART WITH INCOMPLETE SURVEY
26-25. General one battery and a position area survey is as fol-
a. A position area survey may sometimes be lows:
used in conjunction with the observed firing a. Establish a common orienting line (OL)
chart until the surveyed firing chart is avail- for the battalion, if possible; otherwise, estab-
able. That part of the chart established by firing lish an orienting line for each battery.
must be plotted to the same scale as that part ob- b. Starting from any convenient point, run
tained by survey. a traverse to locate all battery positions hori-
b. The following typical situations might neces- zontally and vertically with respect to each other
sitate the use of an observed firing chart based and to establish common directional control for
on the registration of one battery and a posi- all orienting lines.
tion area survey: c. Plot the battery positions, altitudes,
(1) Lack of time or ammunition precludes and orienting lines on tracing paper to the same
registering all three batteries. scale as that for the chart to be used. This over-
(2) The battalion displaces by echelon. Data lay, including the measured grid azimuth of the
can be ready for the remaining batteries when orienting lines, constitutes the position area sur-
they arrive at the new position. vey as delivered to the fire direction center.
(3) The battalion is to displace after dark. d. Register one battery on the registration
A single howitzer can be brought up and regis- point; from the adjusted data, start the observed
tered during daylight so that data can be ready firing chart by plotting the registering battery.
for the entire battalion when it arrives. e. Derive the azimuth of fire from the mea-
(4) Alternate positions have been occupied sured orienting angle of the registering bat-
and firing must begin without registration from tery and use the derived azimuth of fire for the
those positions. direction-of-fire line of the battery on the over-
(5) Fire from positions to be occupied is not lay of the position area survey.
permitted before a certain hour but massing is f. Orient the overlay so that the battery center
required immediately after that time. In such a on the overlay is over the registering battery
situation a single registration may be performed center on the firing chart. Rotate the overlay
from an alternate position. Data can then be pre- until the direction-of-fire lines on the chart and
pared for the nonregistering battery positions the overlay coincide. Pinprick the locations of
after they have been connected to the registering the nonregistering batteries and then label the
battery position by means of a position area sur- locations with the proper altitudes in relation to
vey. the registering battery.
g. Measure the azimuth from each nonregister-
26-26. Procedure for Construction of Observed ing battery to the registration point. The azi-
Firing Chart, Position Area Survey Only muth of each battery orienting line minus the de-
The procedure for constructing a battalion.. ob- termined direction of fire equals the orienting
served firing chart based on the registration of angle for laying the battery.

Section VII. RADAR FIRING CHARTS

26-27. General b. Radar chart, no maps or survey.
Three techniques can be used in conjunction with c. Radar chart, relative location of register-
radar-observed high-burst registration in cons- ing piece and radar determined.
tructing a firing chart. The techniques are as 26-28. Time Plot Observed Firing Chart Im-
follows: proved by Radar
a. Observed firing chart improved by radar In most cases the radar is in position and ready to
(time plot). observe by the time the firing batteries have com-

26-9
 FM 6-40

pleted registration. The time plot chart improved e. Chart data consisting of range, deflection,
by radar may be constructed as soon as the re- and site are then determined from the battery
gistration of all batteries and a radar-observed to the high-burst location.
high-burst registration by one of the batteries f. The GFT setting is determined. The GFT
have been completed. The radar will supply data setting range is the chart range (e above). The
for an accurate GFT setting and deflection cor- adjusted elevation is the quadrant elevation fired
rection. The time plot observed firing chart im- in the radar-observed high-burst registration
proved by radar is the most accurate type of ob- minus the site (e above). The adjusted time is the
served firing chart that can be constructed. Con- fuze setting fired in the radar-observed high-burst
struction of a firing chart must not be delayed to registration.
await the availability of a radar. g. The total deflection correction is computed.
The total deflection correction is equal to the de-
26-29. Advantages of Radar Improved Chart flection fired in the radar-observed high-burst re-
The radar-improved chart has the following ad- gistration minus the chart deflection. The total
vantages over a time plot observed firing chart: deflection correction is used by all batteries to
a. An accurate range and an accurate verti- modify their adjusted azimuths.
cal interval can be obtained from the radar loca- h. The common registration point is plotted on
tion of the high burst. An accurate site can be another chart at an assumed grid and an assumed
determined and then used in deriving an accurate altitude. The batteries will be polar plotted from
adjusted elevation (the site is subtracted from the common registration point.
the QE fired). When the GFT setting derived i. The polar plot direction is determined as fol-
from the radar-observed high-burst registration lows:
is applied to the adjusted data from a registra- (1) The azimuth of fire for each battery is
tion on the registration point, polar plot range determined in the manner described in para-
and altitude can be determined accurately. graph 26-5.
b. The direction in which the batteries are (2) The azimuth of fire for each battery is
polar plotted from the registration point is im- then modified by the total deflection correction
proved by the amount of the deflection correc- (g above). Since azimuth increases as deflec-
tion determined from the radar-observed high- tion decreases, the azimuth of fire must be cor-
burst registration. rected in the opposite direction of the total
deflection correction and by the same amount of
26-30. Procedure for Construction of Radar-
the total deflection correction.
Improved Chart (3) The polar plot direction for each bat-
a. All batteries are registered on a common re-
gistration point and an adjusted deflection, an ad- tery is the back-azimuth of the corrected azimuth
justed azimuth or orienting angle, an adjusted of fire ((2) above).
time, and an adjusted quadrant elevation are j. The polar plot range is determined by use
determined. of the GFT setting from the radar-observed high-
b. The radar is located by survey with respect burst registration. The time gageline is placed
to one battery, and the locations of the battery over the adjusted time to the registration point,
and radar are plotted on a firing chart. The bat- and the range is read under the hairline.
tery fires a high-burst registration observed by k. With the time gageline over the adjusted
the radar using the same procedures outline in time, the adjusted elevation to the registration
paragraphs 19-36 through 19-39. The point se- point is read under the elevation gageline. The
lected for the high burst should be- site to the registration point is determined. The
(1) As close as possible to the common re- site is equal to the adjusted quadrant elevation
minus the derived adjusted elevation. The vertical
gistration point.
interval and altitude of the battery are computed.
(2) Low enough that the site is less than
1. The deflection index is constructed at the ad-
50 mils.
c. The radar section provides the FDC with justed deflection.
the average direction, the average distance, and m. The GFT setting from the radar-observed
the average vertical angle from the radar to the high-burst registration is used for all firing from
high burst location. the radar-improved charts.
d. The high burst location is polar plotted from Example: All batteries of a 155-mm howi-
the radar location on the firing chart by the fire tzer M109 battalion have registered on a common
direction center. registration point (assumed altitude 400 meters)

26-10
 FM 6-40

with charge 5, lot WZ. Adjusted data are shown Total deflection correc-
below: tion----------------R15 R15 R15
Corrected azimuth to
Adjusted Adjusted Adjusted Adjusted
Battery azimuth deflection QE time registration point ----. 6031 6119 6214
Polar plot azimuth ----. 2831 2919 3014
A 6046 3151 280 18.0
Range (corresponding
B 6134 3166 274 17.6
adjusted time)-------- 5420 5320 5220
c 6229 3171 269 17.2
Elevation--------------277 271 264
(1) A traverse is run between the radar Adjusted quadrant ele-
antenna and the base piece of Battery B. The vation--------------280 274 269
locations of the radar antenna and Battery B Site (adj QE-el)--------+3 +3 +5
Vertical interval--------+ 15 +15 +24
are plotted on a firing chart. The radar is 6 meters Altitude--------------385 385 376
above the base piece of Battery B. Deflection index con-
(2) Battery B fires a high-burst registra- structed at deflec-
tion over the registration point with the follow- tion----------------3151 3166 3171
ing data: charge 5, lot WZ, deflection 3166, time
17.6, quadrant 287. 26-31. Radar Chart
(3) The radar section reports the data to When radar is not available, there is no easy
the high burst location as AVERAGE DIREC- and practical method by which a battalion can
TION 6074, AVERAGE DISTANCE 4360, AVER- occupy positions during darkness without maps
AGE VERTICAL ANGLE PLUS 17. The high or prior survey and be prepared to mass effec-
burst location is polar plotted from the radar. tive fires at daylight. However, when radar is
The high burst location is 73 meters above the available, the FDC can construct an observed
radar ( + 17 x4.36, GST). firing chart, called a radarchart, that will permit
(4) Chart data from Battery B to the high- the battalion to mass fire effectively. The radar
burst location are measured as deflection 3,181 chart is not as accurate as an observed firing
mils, range 5,320 meters. chart improved by radar. The construction of the
(5) The GFT setting is determined as fol- radar chart is based on the firing of a high-burst
lows: registration by each battery.
Height of high burst with re-
spect to radar----------- +73 26-32. Construction of Radar Chart
Height of radar with respect to The procedures for construction of the radar
Battery B+------------------+6 chart are as follows:
Height of high burst with re- a. The radar is oriented by use of the aiming
spect to Battery B -- - +79 circle and the radar location is plotted on the
Chart range, Battery B to high firing chart at assumed grid coordinates and an
burst---------------------5,320 assumed altitude.
Site, Battery B to high burst b. The batteries are laid by azimuth on the
(GST: Chg 5; +79/5320)- +16 approximate azimuth to the center of the sector.
Adjusted elevation (287-16) 271 -
c. A high-burst registration, observed by radar,
GFT B: Charge 5, lot WZ, is fired by the base piece of each battery at a
range 5320, elevation 271, time safe range and a safe fuze setting.
17.6. d. The average direction, average distance, and
(6) The total deflection correction is deter- average vertical angle, to each of the high-burst
mined as follows: registrations are reported to the FDC.
Chart deflection, Battery B to e. Each high burst is polar plotted on the firing
high burst-----------------3,181 chart with respect to the radar.
Adjusted deflection------------3,166 f. The altitude of each high burst is deter-
Total deflection correction R15 mined by use of the radar range and vertical
(7) The polar plot data are computed by use angle.
of the GFT setting ((5) above), the total deflec- g. Each battery is back plotted on the chart
tion correction ((6) above), and the adjusted data from its high-burst location.
from the common registration point. (1) Each high burst represents the registra-
Battery tion point of the battery that fired the high
A B C
Adjusted azimuth to burst.
registration point ... 6046 6134 6229 (2) The battery is polar plotted from its

26-11
 FM 6-40

high-burst location on the back-azimuth of the c. The radar chart can be used in massing fires
azimuth at which the high burst was fired. on targets reported by radar and on targets
(3) The range at which the battery is plotted that have been adjusted on by one battery.
is the range corresponding to the fuze setting at
which the high burst was fired. 26-34. Radar Chart, Registering Piece Located
h. The altitude of the battery is equal to the If the relative locations of the radar and the re-
altitude of its high burst minus the vertical in- gistering piece can be established, the accuracy of
terval between the battery and the high burst. the radar chart can be substantially improved,
The vertical interval is determined by use of since a GFT setting a total deflection correction
the GST. (The derived site is multiplied by the can be established. The relative locations can be
range at which the battery is plotted.) established by survey or the registering piece can
i. The deflection index is constructed for each be moved to the radar position.
battery at the adjusted deflection (deflection a. When one battery position is located in re-
fired). lation to radar after a radar chart without sur-
vey or maps has been constructed, a GFT setting
26-33. Evaluation of Radar Chart and deflection correction can be derived from the
The radar chart is fundamentally a time plot ob- registration of that battery. When the register-
served firing chart, sites unknown, except that ing piece is moved to the radar position, another
each battery has its own registration point. The high-burst registration must be fired to estab-
accuracy of the radar chart is slightly less than lish a GFT setting and a total deflection correction.
that of the time plot observed firing chart sites b. When the radar is located relative to one
unknown. battery prior to the initial registration, the high-
a. The accuracy of the radar chart can be in- burst registration of that battery is used to es-
creased and usable battalion transfer limits can tablish the GFT setting and the total deflection
be obtained if the three high-burst registrations correction.
are fired as close as possible to the same point. c. The GFT setting and the total deflection
b. Without survey, pointing data for the radar correction (a and b above) are applied in back
to each of the high bursts cannot be determined plotting each battery from its respective high-
accurately. For this reason, the radar section burst location for a radar chart in the same
usually must move the antenna in azimuth and manner as for an observed firing chart improved
elevation after the first round is fired in order to by radar. However, the chart thus established
observe succeeding rounds through the orienting is not as accurate as the observed firing chart
telescope. Therefore, each registration usually will improved by radar, since the high bursts are
require seven or eight rounds. not at a common point.
Section VIII. TRANSFER FROM OBSERVED FIRING CHART TO SURVEY FIRING CHART
26-35. General have registered, each may have a different GFT
As soon as the surveyed firing chart is avail- setting.
able, it should replace the observed firing chart.
The observed firing chart is retained until all b. The deflection index is constructed at the
targets have been transferred to the surveyed referred deflections. The deflection correction
firing chart. The transfer of information is scale to be used with the surveyed firing chart
made as soon as possible. is based on the surveyed chart GFT setting with
the total deflection correction indicated at the
26-36. GFT Settings and Deflection Index adjusted elevation.
a. The procedure for determining of GFT set-
tings and constructing the deflection indexes for 26-37. Transfer from Observed Firing Chart
use with the surveyed firing chart is the same to Surveyed Firing Chart, Percussion
as that followed when the surveyed firing chart Fuze
is available at the time the registration is fired.
Determined the adjusted elevation by subtracting a. The procedure for transfer of targets from
the site, as computed from the surveyed firing the observed firing chart to the surveyed firing
chart, from the adjusted quadrant elevation. chart is the same as that for replotting observed
Measure the range on the surveyed firing chart. targets on the surveyed firing chart (para 20-
Draw the time gageline over the adjusted time 18). Data for replot of a target are obtained
for each registration. When all three batteries from the adjusted data for that target. (Deter-

26-12
 FM 6-40

mination of adjusted data and replot data is the range under the hairline. For a target fired
discussed in paragraph 26-39.) with time fuze, place the time gageline over the
(1) The target is plotted on the surveyed adjusted time and read the range under the
firing chart at the FFE deflection from the ob- hairline.
served firing chart minus the total deflection cor- c. Site and Elevation (PercussionFuze).
rection at the FFE elevation. The total deflec- (1) Determine the altitude of the target
tion correction is obtained from the surveyed from a map or from the observer's call for fire.
chart deflection correction scale. For example, the observer requested FROM
(2) If a map is not available, any informa- REGISTRATION POINT 1, RIGHT 350, ADD
tion indicating the altitude of the target, such 400, UP 20. The target is 20 meters above the
as the observer's up or down correction, is used registration point.
for determining the vertical interval. The site (2) Determine the site by successive ap-
and the adjusted elevation are determined by proximation. Site is based on the vertical inter-
successive approximation (para 26-14b). val (difference in the altitude of the battery
(3) The surveyed firing chart GFT setting and target) and fire-for-effect range.
is used in deriving the range from the adjusted (3) Use the final adjusted elevation in de-
elevation. termining the final plot range.
b. When more than one registration has been d. Site and Elevation (Time Fuze). The ad-
conducted, the elevation used in establishing the justed elevation must be determined for each tar-
GFT setting is selected from the registration that get. Determine the adjusted elevation by placing
most nearly coincides with the time of firing on the surveyed GFT setting time gageline over the
the targets. adjusted time and reading the elevation under
the gageline. Derive the site by subtracting the
26-38. Transfer from Observed Firing Chart
elevation from the adjusted quadrant elevation
to Surveyed Firing Chart, Time Fuze
Targets fired with time fuze are transferred (minus 20/R at fire-for-effect range).
from the observed firing chart to the surveyed Example: Personnel of a 155-mm howitzer
firing chart in, the same manner as targets fired battalion have completed a survey and are trans-
with percussion fuze, except for the following: ferring targets from an observed firing chart
a. The relationship between range, adjusted (percusssion fuze) to a surveyed firing chart. The
time, and adjusted elevation is fixed by the sur- surveyed firing chart GFT setting is GFT B:
veyed firing chart GFT setting. Charge 5, lot XT, range 6070, elevation 310.
b. The time gageline is placed over the ad- Target AF7401 is to be replotted on the surveyed
justed time. Range is read under the hairline, firing chart. No map is available.
and the adjusted elevation is read under the ele- Date from computer's record
Fire-for-eff ect data Observer's vertical correction
vation gageline. Fuze Deflection Range QE
c. The adjusted elevation is subtracted from Q 3216 6400 354 From Reg Pt 1, UP 70
the quadrant elevation (minus 20/R at fire-for-
effect range) in determining the site. The site Total deflection correction from de-
and the range (b above) are used in determin- flection correction scale---------L7
ing the vertical interval. Altitude of battery-------------420
Altitude of registration point
26-39. Transfer to Surveyed Firing Chart, (survey)--------------------438
Computer Records Available Altitude of target (438 + 70) 508
When the computer's records are available, the Vertical interval---------------+88
data for replotting targets on the surveyed firing Apparent site of target (GST)
chart are determined as described in a through (88/6400)----------+15
d below: Quadrant elevation fired-----354
a. Deflection. Determine the deflection at Apparent adjusted elevation
which to replot the target on the surveyed firing (354- (+ 15))---------339
chart in the manner described in paragraph 26- Apparent range for replot
(GFT)-----------6490
37a( 1).
b. Range. Determine range with the GFT set- Site (GST) (88/6490)------+ 15
ting for the surveyed firing chart. For a target Replot range - -6,490

fired with percussion fuze, place the elevation Replot deflection (3216- L7) 3,209 ---

gageline over :the adjusted elevation and read *Agrees with first apparent site.

26-13-
 FM 6-40

PART FIVE
MISCELLANEOUS
CHAPTER 27
TARGET ANALYSIS AND ATTACK

27-1. General (1) Target depth. All area targets are as-
The commander or his designated gunnery offi- sumed to be approximately 250 meters in depth;
cer must consider certain factors when deciding unless otherwise specified by the observer 250
to attack a target or when planning fires. Con- meters is the depth of battery three rounds from
formity to the scheme of maneuver of the sup- a 105-mm howitzer battery and is approximate-
ported unit and evaluation of the enemy are fac- ly the depth of battery one round from a 155-
tors of primary concern. For detailed informa- mm howitzer battery. A target greater than 300
tion concerning field artillery tactics, see FM 6- meters in depth may be attacked as two targets.
20. For detailed information concerning nonnu- No special corrections are required for achiev-
clear lethality and effects, see the FM 6-141- ing a standard depth.
series manuals. (2) Scales. Three scale designations for
targets have been selected.
27-2. Description of Target
The method of attacking a target depends large- (a) Scale 0. Scale 0 designates those tar-
ly on the description of the target. The descrip- gets ranging from a virtual point to approxi-
mately 100 meters in width. Scale 0 targets can
tion of the target includes type, size, density,
be assumed to be 75 meters wide. It is assumed
cover, mobility, and importance. To determine
the proper type of projectile, fuze, caliber of that a parallel or an open sheaf of any caliber
will more than cover a scale 0 target. A situa-
weapon, and necessary ammunition expenditure,
tion in which it can not be predicted that the
the observer and the S3 must consider carefully
mean point of impact will fall on the center of
the description of the target. The description of
the target (e.g., unobserved fires) may dictate
the target is also a guiding factor in determining
the use of a parallel or open sheaf with a scale
the type of adjustment and the speed of attack.
a. Fortified targets or armor must be destroy- 0 target. If the mean point of impact is adjusted
onto a scale 0 target, ammunition will be wasted
ed by precision fire, assault fire, or direct fire
in which projectiles and fuzes appropriate for during fire for effect if a parallel or open sheaf
is used. The observer should normally use a con-
penetration are used. The highest practicable
verged sheaf when adjusting onto a scale 0
charge should be used in assault fire and direct
fire to increase penetration and to decrease ver- target.
tical dispersion. The charge with the smallest (b) Scale 1. Scale 1 designates targets
probable error (PE), should be used in precision that are wider than scale 0 and up to 300 meters
fire to decrease horizontal dispersion. If the tar- in width; scale 1 targets are assumed to be 250
get is flammable, projectile WP should be mixed meters in width. This figure has been chosen
with projectile HE-WP to ignite materiel and because it bears a convenient relationship to the
HE to cause fragmentation damage. effective front covered by the parallel sheaf of a
b. A target consisting of both personnel and 105-mm, a 155-mm, or an 8-inch howitzer bat-
materiel normally is attacked by area fire, in tery.
which airbursts or impact bursts are used to neu- (c) Scale 2. Scale 2 designates targets
tralize the area. The selection of caliber, projec- that are greater than 300 meters and up to 450
tile, and fuze is influenced by the extent of dam- meters in width; scale 2 targets are assumed
age desired. to be 350 meters in width. This figure has been
c. Since the precision with which the observer chosen because it represents the effective front
(or other target acquisition agency) can deter- covered by the 105-mm, 155-mm, or 8-inch howit-
mine the dimensions of the target is limited and zer battalion firing one round, parallel sheaf, at
since area targets are seldom precisely delineated, the target center.
standard terms have been adopted for conven- (3) Standard target sizes. Standard target
ience in target reporting. sizes of any dimensions may be adopted to satis-

27-1
FM 6-40

fy conditions encountered. The dimensions of a b. Normally, a battalion should not fire with
target are needed for computations in deter- a range spread greater than 1 C (100 meters),
mining the type and volume of fire required to since a greater spread will not give uniform cov-
achieve the desired results. A few fixed sizes erage of the target. When choosing the range
meet the requirement. spread to be used, the S3 should consider the
27-3. Results Desired probable error, the lethality of the weapon-ammu-
The method of attacking a target is influenced nition combination, and the effect desired.
by the results desired. Results are of four types- 27-6. Maximum Rate of Fire
destruction, neutralization, harassing, and inter- a. The greatest effect is achieved when sur-
diction. The methods of attacking targets to prise fire is delivered with maximum intensity.
achieve the desired results are as follows: Maximum intensity is best secured by massing
a. Destruction fire-Fire delivered for the sole the fires of several batteries or battalions using
purpose of destroying materiel. time-on-target (TOT) procedures. The intensity
b. Neutralization fire-Fire delivered for the of fires available by firing many rounds from a
purpose of reducing the combat efficiency of the few units is limited by the maximum rate of
enemy by hampering and interrupting the fire fire (b below).
of his weapons, by reducing his freedom of ac- b. The maximum rates of fire shown in table
tion, by reducing his ability to inflict casualties 1-1 are guides. These rates cannot be exceeded
on our troops, and by severely reducing his move- without danger of damaging the tube. To main-
ment within an area. Most artillery fire missions tain these rates (either to maintain neutraliza-
seek to neutralize the target. Neutralization is tion on one target or to attack a series of tar-
often maintained by the use of fires of less in- gets), the pieces must be rested or cooled from
tensity at varying intervals following the initial previous firing. The lowest charge possible
fires. should be used during periods of prolonged fir-
c. Harassing fire-Fire delivered for the pur- ing, since heating is more pronounced with
pose of disturbing the rest, curtailing the move- higher charges.
ment, and lowering the morale of enemy troops
by the threat of casualties or losses in materiel. 27-7. Amount and Type of Ammunition
d. Interdiction fire-Fire delivered for the a. The amount of ammunition available is an
purpose of denying the enemy the unrestricted important consideration in the attack of tar-
use of an area or a point. Interdiction fire is gets. The available supply rate will not be ex-
usually of less intensity than neutralization fire. ceeded except by authority of .higher headquar-
ters. When the available supply rate is low,
27-4. Registration and Survey Control missions should be limited to those that contri-
a. Effective transfers are accomplished best bute the most to the mission of supported units.
when data from survey and current registra- When the available supply rate is high, mis-
tions are available or when current met mes- sions that may affect planned or future opera-
sages and muzzle velocity data are available. tions and some missions that require massing
When survey, registration, and met data are not of fires without adjustment may be fired.
available or are inadequate, targets should be b. The selection of a charge with which to at-
attacked with observed fires, since unobserved tack a target depends on the range, the terrain,
fires may be ineffective in such cases. and the type of ammunition to be used. The
b. To the extent posssible, surveillance to de- maximum range for the charge selected for an
termine the results of fire for effect should be adjustment should be at least 1/3 greater than
obtained on all missions. Accurate fire for effect the range to the target when data are ob-
without adjustment is highly effective against tained by precise methods to insure that the tar-
targets composed of personnel or mobile equip- get can be reached. If possible, a charge giving
ment. All destruction missions and missions fired an elevation to the target of 240 to 460 mils
at moving tagrets must be observed and fire for should be selected for howitzers. For flat-tra-
effect adjusted to the target. jectory weapons, there is a greater overlap in
27-5. Area To Be Attacked charges and no specific rule can be applied.
a. The size of the area to be attacked may be c. The type of ammunition selected to attack
determined by the actual size of the target or a target depends on the nature of the target and
by the area in which the target is known or on the characteristics of the ammunition avail-
suspected to be. able for the cannon to be used.

27-2
 FM 6-40

d. The effects of HE ammunition vary with elevation, charge, and fuze setting. If the time
the fuze employed. element fails to function with fuze time, fuze
(1) Since the effective fragmentation of an quick action occurs upon impact. When fuze
HE projectile fired with an impact fuze is great- time is used, the height of burst can be adjusted,
est if the projectile lands on hard ground at a but, because of dispersion, not all bursts will be
large angle of impact, the lowest charge that at the desired height. The highest practicable
can be used without excessive dispersion will charge should be used with fuze time to mini-
give the greatest effective fragmentation (fig mize the height-of-burst probable error.
27-1). When the projectile passes through trees, A height-of-burst probable error greater than
the detonation may occur in the foliage and ef- 15 meters is considered excessive.
fectiveness may be either improved or lost, de- (c) Fuze delay. Fuze delay may be used
pending on the density of the foliage and the to obtain airbursts by ricochet. If the angle of
nature of the target. impact is small and the surface the projectile
(2) The three types of fuzes that are used strikes is firm, the projectile will ricochet be-
with HE ammunition to obtain airbursts are fore detonating and produce airbursts (fig 27-
proximity (VT) fuze, time fuze, and delay fuze 3). Because of the uncertainty of ricochet ac-
fired to ricochet. These fuzes are discussed be- tions, fuze delay to obtain ricochets should not be
low in order of effectiveness. fired without observation. The highest practic-
(a) Fuze VT. Fuze VT detonates auto- able charge should be used to obtain ricochet
matically upon approach to a reflective object. bursts with fuze delay. If the angle of impact
Fuze VT is used to obtain airbursts (fig 27-2) is too great, the projectile will penetrate before
without the necessity of adjusting height of detonating and produce mine action (fig 27-4).
burst. If the VT element fails to function, fuze Fuze delay can be used to destroy earth and
quick action occurs upon impact. The height of log fortifications and is effective against some
burst of fuze VT varies with the terrain in the masonry and concrete targets. Fuze delay should
target area. If the terrain surrounding the tar- not be used against heavy armor.
get area is wet or marshy, the height of burst
will be increased. Light foliage has little effect (3) Greater penetration against masonry
on VT fuze, but heavy foliage will increase the or concrete can be obtained with HE ammuni-
height of burst by about the height of the fol- tion by use of a concrete-piercing fuze. There are
iage. Since VT fuze is not limited by range and two types of concrete-piercing fuzes: nondelay,
since the height-of-burst probable error for VT used primarily for clearing rubble, and delay,
fuze is smaller than that for time fuzes, VT fuze used for greater penetration. The HE projectile
is preferred to time fuze for long-range targets with fuze delay is used at intervals to clear
and for targets that must be attacked with high- away rubble and blow apart shattered frag-
angle fire or that must be attacked at night. The ments. The effectiveness of various calibers of
greater the angle of fall, the closer the burst will weapons against concrete is shown in table 27-1.
be to the ground. When the target is close to
friendly troops, the lowest practicable charge
should be used to obtain a large angle of fall.
(b) Fuze time. Airbursts may be ob-
tained by the use of fuze time (fig 27-2). The
height of burst is determined by the quadrant
K

Trjectory,' K" / / .

Figure 27-1. Effect of impact burst with fuze quick. Figure 27-2. Effect of airburstwith VT or time fuze.
FM 6-40

e. High-explosive antitank projectiles are de-

f, ide spray signed for attacking armor targets.
(1) The HEP-T M327 projectile is avail-
A -Nsespable for the 105-mm howitzer. The physical
MJose spray characteristics and functioning of this projec-
tile are classified and are covered in TM 9-1300-
Base spray_,, 7 /S
ide spray203-2.
spray (2) The 155-mm howitzer and larger weap-
Tac- ons using HE ammunition with fuze quick with
FAOf direct hits in the direct fire role are effective
against armor because of the size and explos-
Figure 27-3. Effect of airburst with fuze delay ive power of the projectiles.
(ricochet). f. Chemical ammunition is used for producing
casualties and for incendiary, screening, and
marking purposes. Among the types of fillers
used in chemical projectiles are toxic agents,
white phosphorus, smoke HC, and colored smoke.
(1) Projectiles filled with toxic agents are
particularly useful for causing casualties in for-
, tified positions or installations. See FM 3-10 for
detailed information on the use of chemical pro-
jectiles. Toxic chemicals may be used at low
expenditure rates to harass the enemy and re-
quire them to wear protective masks for pro-
longed periods.
(2) The influence of weather (direction and
speed of wind, temperature gradient) has a great
deal to do with the effectiveness and tactical
desirability of chemical agents. If favorable
.......... .weather conditions exist, toxic agents will be
,more effective than HE on a round for round
Figure 27-4. Mine action, fuze delay, basis in some situations.

Table 27-1. Effect on Concrete

Number of rounds falling in

Thickness* of concrete perforated circle of given diameter"
by single round (face perpendi- necessary to perforate various
cular to line of impact) thicknesses* of concrete at
Cannon and projectile (M) Thickness given ranges
(maximum charge) (meters)
Range (meters) Range (meters)
900 2,700 3,600 900 .700 3,600

105-mm howitzer; HE M1, fuze M78 [ 0.9 5 10 12

series ... ......
--------------.--.. 64 .48 .46 1.5 14 27 33
2.1 27 53 64

155-mm howitzer; HE M107, fuze 0.9 1 1 2

M 78 series --------------------- 1.19 .98 .82 1.5 3 5 9
2.1 7 11 18

8-inch howitzer; HE M106 fuze M78 F 0.9 1 1 1

series -------------------------------- 1.68 1.43 1.22 1 1.5 1 2 4
t 2.1 3 5 8
*Thickness perforated is based on a line of impact perpendicular to the surface. The effectiveness decreases rapidly when the line of impact is
other than perpendicular to the surface. Ricochets will occur when the line of impact is 200 to 35' or more from the perpendicular. The higher the
striking velocity, the greater the angle may be before ricochet occurs. After the surface has been chipped, the angle may be still greater.
"Diameter of circles used as a basis for data.
10 5-mn how itze r --------------------------------- --------
.-- ----------------------------------------.. .. ...... . ... .. .. ... . . . .... 0 .9 m ete r.
15 5-m m h o w itze r ------------------------------. ------.
---------. -----------------... . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . ... .. . . ... . .... .. 1.2 m e te rs.
---------------.
8-in ch h ow itzer .................................................. ....... .... ...........- 1.5 m eters.

27-4
 FM 6-40

27-8. Considerations in Selection of Units for located may justify the fire of several units to
Fire insure coverage.
a. The unit selected for a mission must have (7) Critical targets. The emergency nature
cannons of the proper size and caliber to cover of certain targets may justify the use of all
the target area quickly, effectively, and econo- available artillery fire. Enemy counterattack for-
mically. Many targets are of such size as to al- mations are such targets.
low a wide choice in the selection of the number (8) Dispersion. At extreme ranges for a
of batteries or battalions to be used. If the unit given cannon and charge, fire is less dense. More
selected to fire cannot mass its fire in an area as ammunition is required to effectively cover the
small as the target area, ammunition will be target. The selection of a unit to fire along the
wasted. Conversely, if a unit can cover only a long axis of the target in order to obtain the
small part of the target area at a time, surprise maximum effect from dispersion may be required
is lost during the shifting of fire and the rate of when the target is at an extreme range. At nor-
fire for the area as a whole may be insufficient mal elevations, probable error and dispersion do
to secure the desired effect. The decision of not present a serious problem.
whether to have many units firing a few rounds (9) Maintenance of neutralization and in-
on a large target or a few units firing many terdiction. Neutralization and interdiction fires
rounds is often a critical one (b below). may be maintained by the use of a few small
b. Many overlapping factors affect the selec- units rather than all the units that fired for ef-
tion of units and the number of rounds to fire fect. A unit may be able to fire other missions
on a target. Some of these factors are discussed during the same period that it is maintaining
in (1) through (10) below. neutralization or interdiction fires.
(1) Availability of artillery. When the (10) Vulnerability of targets. Some targets
number of available artillery fire units is small, should be attacked rapidly with massed fire while
more targets must be assigned to each artillery they are vulnerable. Examples of such targets
unit. are truck parks or personnel in the open.
(2) Size of the area to be covered. The size
27-9. Technique of Attack
of the area to be covered must be compared with The technique of attack is determined by an
the effective depth and width of sheaf to be used analysis of the capabilities of the cannons and
by the battery or batteries available. ammunition available and the terrain in the tar-
(3) Increased area coverage. Targets great- get area. High-angle fire may be needed for fir-
er in depth and width than the standard sizes ing into or out of defiladed positions.
discussed in paragraph 27-2c can be covered
by- 27-10. Typical Targets and Method of Attack
(a) Increasing the number of batteries a. Enemy material and fortifications and per-
firing. sonnel in sufficient numbers to justify ammuni-
(b) Dividing the target into several tar- tion expenditure are generally artillery targets.
gets and assigning portions to different batteries. However, artillery is not effective against mine-
(c) Shifting fire laterally or using zone fields and barbed wire.
fire with a single battery or with a number of (1) Minefields. HE ammunition is ineffec-
batteries controlled as a single fire unit. tive for clearing minefields. The mines are deton-
(4) Caliber and type of unit. The projec- ated only by direct hits. Artillery fire fails to
tiles of larger calibers are most effective for de- clear the minefields and only increases the prob-
struction missions. High-velocity guns are de- lem of locating and removing the mines by hand
sired for maximum penetration of fortifications. and of moving equipment across the mined area.
(5) Surprise. For surprise, a few rounds (2) Barbed wire. The employment of artil-
from many pieces are preferred to many rounds lery to breach wire requires extravagant use of
from a few pieces. ammunition.
(6) Accuracy of target location. The impor- b. Typical targets and suggested methods of
tance of certain targets that are not accurately attack are listed in table 27-2.
 Table 27-2. Typical Targets and Suggested Methods of Attack

Type of
Type of target adjustment Weapon Projectile Fuze Type of fire Remarks

Group I
Armored vehicles Observed, All (pref 155- HE, HEAT, VT, ti, Q Neutralization, (1), (2), (3),

(rendezvous). unobserved. mm or larger). HEP. destruction,

assault.
Armored vehicles Observed -- All (pref 155- HE, WP, VT, ti Neutralization, Projectile HE to force tanks to "buttor
(moving). mm or larger). HEAT, HEP. destruction, up," and personnel outside the tani
T
assault, to take cover or disperse. WP ma
blind vehicle drivers and fires may b e
started from the incendiary effect oi ri
outside fuel tanks, but it may als 0
obscure adjustment. (2).

Vehicles Observed, All HE, WP Q, VT, ti Neutralization, (1), (2), (4)

(rendezvous). unobserved, destruction.

Vehicles Observed All -HE, WP - Q, VT, ti Neutralization, (2), (4), (8)

(moving). destruction.
Weapons Observed All (pref 155- HE Q, CP, delay__ Destruction, Airbursts are desirable if weapon
(fortified). mm or larger). neutralization. firing. After weapon has been silenced o,
it is attacked for destruction. Choic e
of fuze is determined by type of forti
fication. See fortifications.
Weapons Observed, All ------------- HE, WP VT, ti Neutralization, (1), (2), (4).
(in open). unobserved, destruction.
Group II
Boats ------------ Observed ---- All ------------- HE ----- VT, ti Neutralization, Airbursts against personnel mannin g
direct. boats. Destruction by direct fire.
Bridges ---------- Observed, All (pref 155- HE-------------Q, CP, delay Destruction, Direction of fire preferably with lon on
g
unobserved. mm or larger). harassing, axis of bridge. Destruction of perma
interdiction. nent bridges is accomplished best by
knocking out bridge support. Fu2
quick for wooden or pontoon bridge

Buildings Observed, All HE, WP - - -Q

---- Neutralization (4).

(frame). unobserved.
Buildings Observed, All (pref 155- HE-------------CP, delay, Q Destruction, Several weapons can be converged o
(masonry). unobserved. mmor larger). neutralization one building. In destroying masonr :y
of large areas. buildings, the fact that rubble aidIs
defensive fighting and delays friend] y
mobile elements must be considered (,
Fortifications Observed All HEAT, HE Q-------- Destruction, Fire should be adjusted at apertures of
(armor). (large caliber) assault, steel turrets and pillboxes. (5). Use
HEP. direct. highest practicable charge.
 Fortifications Observed All (pref 155- HE-------------CP, delay, Q Destruction, Use highest practical charge. (5)
(concrete). mm or larger). assault,
direct.
Fortifications Observed -- All (pref 155- HE-------------Delay, Q -- Destruction, Use highest practical charge. ().
(earth, logs, mm or larger). assault,
etc). direct.
Personnel Observed, All ------------- HE VT, ti, Q - Neutralization, TOT missions are most effective. Fuz
(in open). unobserved. harassing. quick should be fired at lowest practi-
cal charge (steep angle of fall gives
better fragmentation). Intermittent
fire is better than continuous fire. (1)
Personnel Observed ---- All ------------- HE, WP -------- VT, ti, delay Neutralization, Airbursts are necessary. Surprise nol t
(dug in). (ricochet). harassing. necessary. WP is useful in driving
personnel out of holes and into open

Personnel Observed ---- All (pref 155- HE-------------Delay, Q ---- Destruction, (5).
(in dugouts or mm or larger). assault, t
caves), direct.
Personnel Observed, All -HE ---- Q, VT, ti, Neutralization _ (4).

(under light unobserved. delay

cover). (ricochet).
Roads and Observed --- All (pref 155- HE -- Delay, CP -- Destruction ---- Attack critical points: defiles, fills, cross
railroads. mmor larger). ings, culverts, bridges, and narro
portions. Direction of fire should co
incide with direction of road.
Unobserved _ All ------------- HE -VT, ti, Q - Harassing,
interdiction.
Supply Observed, All - - HE, WP -- Q, VT, ti Neutralization, (1), (4).

installations, unobserved. destruction.

' Area is neutralized with projectile HE (airbursts if practical). Surprise is essential to produce casualties.
2 Materiel remaining in area should be attacked for destruction by use of appropriate projectile and fuze.
8 Projectile HEAT may be used in fire for effect provided that ranges and observing distances are short enough to permit spotting rounds.
4 Projectile WP should be combined with HE when the target contains flammable material and the smoke will not obscure adjustment.
5 Projectile HE with fuze quick is fired at intervals to clear away camouflage, earth cover, and rubble.
6 The first objective in firing on moving vehicles is to stop the movement. For this purpose a deep bracket is established so that the target will not move out of the initial bracket durn Ig
adjustment. Speed of adjustment is essential. If possible, the column should be stepped at a point where vehicles cannot change their route and where one stalled vehicle will cause others to stop
Vehicles moving on a road can be attacked by adjusting on a point on the road and then timing the rounds fired so that they arrive at that point when a vehicle is passing it. A firing unit o r
several units, if available, may fire at different points on the road simultaneously.
I Other references:-
a. (C) FM 6-141-1, Nonnuclear Employment of Field Artillery Weapons Systems (U).
b. (S) FM 6-141-2, Nonnuclear Employment of Field Artillery Weapons Systems (U).
c. Graphical Effects Table, Artillery Weapons (USAFAS).

an
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 28
SERVICE PRACTICE

Section I. SERVICE PRACTICE PROCEDURES

28-1. General safety card is prepared in accordance with AR

a. Service practice is a practical exercise in 385-63.
which all elements of the gunnery team are c. Officer in Charge of Firing. The officer in
trained in the use of service ammunition. Each charge of firing is responsible for all aspects of a
service practice should begin with a tactical sit- training exercise that involves firing live ammu-
uation given by the officer in charge of firing. nition. He is responsible for safety. Normally,
The primary purpose of service practice is to he has safety officers to assist him.
train artillerymen to adjust artillery fire. Fire d. Safety Officer. The safety officer at the fir-
direction personnel and the firing battery are ing point represents the officer in charge of fir-
also trained in their duties during service prac- ing. Orders prohibiting firing that are issued
tice. Prescribed gunnery procedures and techni- by the safety officer can be rescinded only by
ques should be used except when judgment clear- the officer in charge of firing. The safety officer
ly indicates that a departure from normal pro- should interfere as little as possible with the de-
cedure will expedite the mission. livery of fire. The safety officer will not be de-
b. The service practice is part of the tactical tailed to check or correct errors in laying or
field training of field artillery units. All elements servicing the pieces that do not affect safety nor
of training, to include mobility, communication, will he be assigned any additional duties during
tactical employment, and conduct of fire, should firing.
be combined in the service practice.
c. A service practice is an instructional me- 28-3. Training Prior to Service Practice
dium and, like any military drill, should be con- a. The gunnery techniques and procedures
ducted with briskness and precision. The officer involved in a service practice must be taught
in charge of firing must make full use of the before the unit conducts service practice.
service practice and must allow no lulls in the b. The service practice OP is not the place to
exercise. Observers must conduct each mission learn conduct of fire procedure. All participating
in a brisk, businesslike manner. personnel should be thoroughly familiar with
d. This chapter will serve as a guide in train- the procedures before going to the observation
ing personnel in observer procedures for the con- post. They can learn these procedures by firing
duct of fire. simulated missions. A simple and effe tive method
for practicing simulated missions is te "match
28-2. Roles of Key Personnel box problem." Matchbox problems require no
a. Installation Commander. The commanding equipment except a small object, such as a match-
officer of an installation is responsible for the box, and a piece of paper on which a mil scale has
maintenance and the assignment of the firing been drawn to represent the scale of the reticle in
ranges allotted to his command. He must insure the binoculars. At least two persons, one acting as
that the safety precautions prescribed in AR the observer and the other as the instructor,
385-63 are followed. A range officer assists the should work together. The observer faces the
commanding officer in all matters pertaining to target and mil scale and announces the call for
firing ranges. fire and the OT distance to the instructor; the
instructor stands beside the table and announc-
b. Range Officer. The range officer is respon- es the message to observer and SHOT. After
sible to the commanding officer for the prepara- announcing SHOT, the instructor places the top of
tion and maintenance of the firing ranges. Among a pencil on the table for a moment to simulate
his responsibilities are the preparation, authen- the burst. The observer spots the burst for range
tication, and distribution of safety cards. The (OVER or SHORT) and for deviation (the num-

28-1
FM 6-40

ber of mils, in relation to the mil scale, the burst post arrangement. Preparation must include a
is right or left of the OT line). He announces his thorough check of communications and a check
spotting (e.g., LEFT 40, ADD 400). This pro- with range control to insure that the range is
cedure is continued until the mission is com- clear and that it is safe to fire.
pleted. The instructor critiques the mission. The b. An orientation on the terrain must be given
instructor and the observer then change places to all observer personnel and should include the
and conduct another mission. limits of the target area. A good method is to
describe a tactical situation involving the loca-
tion of friendly troops, zones of action, and final
objective. For subsequent target designation,
the orientation should define reference points
and the direction to one or more of the points.
If possible, these points should be on the horizon
STarget--,,_ 6 Burst
and not more than 200 mils apart.

c. The observers should be given pertinent

parts of the battery executive's report and any
Fol ded pae information available at the fire direction center
that will assist them in calling for fire. Types of
fuzes and projectiles available should not be
given at this time. The observer should be told
Observers line of
to consider all types of fuzes and projectiles au-
sighting thorized in the basic load in selecting the ammu-
nition for his mission.
28-6. Designation of Targets
a. Targets should be designated in a uniform
manner. This enables the personnel to become
Figure 28-1. Matchbox problem setup.
accustomed to a routine and to devote their ef-
28-4. Preparation for Service Practice forts to making precise measurements. The of-
Well in advance of the scheduled service prac- ficer in charge should designate each target by
tice, the officer in charge should- announcing the size and nature of the target
a. Make a ground reconnaissance of the area and its location relative to the nearest reference
and select an observation post that will give the point and the skyline. The targets should be
desired angle T and provide observation. realistically described in a sound tactical loca-
b. Prepare a map and plot the locations of tion; e.g., observation post on a point that affords
the batteries, observation post, safety limits, and observation or mortars in defilade.
registration points. b. Target locations should be exact (devia-
c. Select appropriate reference points and tar- tions should be checked with a battery command-
gets. er's telescope). Immediately before he designates
d. Obtain the safety card from the range of- a target, the officer in charge should verify his
ficer. The officer in charge of firing must check description of the target by observing the tar-
the safety card and, if it is not correct, he get through his fieldglasses.
must reconcile the differences with the range
c. The types of targets selected must be var-
officer. One copy of the approved safety card is ied so that observers must consider selection of
delivered to the safety officer(s) prior to the the proper fuze and projectile. Each target must
service practice, and one copy is retained by the
be described realistically. The following are ex-
officer in charge of firing.
amples of proper designations or targets:
28-5. Procedures at the Observation Post (1) WITH YOUR GLASSES-TO IDEN-
a. The officer in charge of firing must arrive TIFY TWO MORTARS FIRING, FROM THE
at the OP sufficiently in advance of the partici- LONE TREE GO LEFT 85 MILS AND DOWN
hating personnel to insure that the observation FROM THE SKYLINE 15 MILS. THIS WILL
post is properly organized and that all observers PLACE YOU ON YELLOW MATERIEL.
will have a good view of the target area. Figure THAT IS THE ADJUSTING POINT. IS
28-2 depicts a typical nontactical observation THERE ANYONE WHO DOES NOT IDENTI-

28-2
 FM 6-40

4t
I mpact areo

TO

I,.Observe,

5M

i.$
4- •a--- 3M 1-
|

, FDC is approximately 50
Meters from OP
BC scope

Figure 28-2. Typical nontacticalobservation post arrangement.

FY THE ADJUSTING POINT? PREPARE ror and effects of met conditions may at times
YOUR CALL FOR FIRE. exceed 10 percent of range. This potential error
(2) WITH YOUR GLASSES-TO IDEN- also makes the use of time fire hazardous until
TIFY A STALLED TANK, FROM MARKER after registration corrections have been ob-
GO LEFT 70 MILS AND DOWN FROM THE tained. The best data available should always be
SKYLINE 12 MILS. THIS WILL PLACE YOU used.
ON WHITE MATERIEL. THAT IS THE TAR- e. After the target has been identified, the
GET. IS THERE ANYONE WHO DOES NOT observer should be given enough time to prepare
IDENTIFY THE TARGET? PREPARE YOUR initial data; 1 minute is normally adequate in
CALL FOR FIRE. the early stage of training. The first mission
d. When targets are being selected, cLreful
should be fired against a target of opportunity
consideration should be given to prescribed to create an air of realism. Registration can fol-
safety limits. No target should be assigned so low. For safety reasons, targets selected prior to
close to a boundary that a reasonable bracket a registration should be located near the center
(200 meters) cannot be obtained. It is impera- of the impact area. All observer personnel should
tive that the officer in charge of firing insure prepare initial data for each mission and keep a
that the first round fired will land in the impact record of the missions fired.
area. When firing is to be conducted at long 28-7. Supervision of Firing
ranges and under unfavorable weather condi- a. The officer in charge must instill confidence
tions, the range error resulting from velocity er- in observer personnel and arouse and maintain

28-3
FM 6-40

their interest in the service practice. He must a. A restatement of the assigned mission.
take maximum advantage of time and ammuni- b. A statement that the mission was completed
tion to teach proper observer procedures. The in a satisfactory manner or was not completed.
officer in charge must enforce silence of the per- c. A concise analysis of the mission. In his
sonnel on the observation post during a mission analysis, the officer in charge should stress points
so that the observer is not distracted. of instructional value. He should state the good
points of the mission and then state teh unde-
b. The observer must understand that the sirable features. He should point out violations
successful completion of the mission is his re- of procedure and stress the importance of ad-
sponsibility. A good policy is for the officer in herence to prescribed procedures, the observance
charge not to interfere with the conduct of a of which increase the probability of obtaining
mission unless safety is jeopardized or ammuni- good results. He should make recommendations
tion is in short supply or unless an observer for improvements. The analysis should follow the
makes repeated errors that if continued, would sequence of the mission, but it should not be a
decrease the instructional value of the mission. round-by-round discussion.
In such cases, the officer in charge may give help d. A request for comments or questions.
or he may reassign or stop the mission.
c. The observer must spot the burst as soon as 28-9. Other Considerations
Service practices should be conducted from vari-
it occurs. The officer in charge should stress the
ous observation posts and different impact areas
fact that determination of accurate firing data
should be used. Periodically, service practice with
by the FDC depends on accurate spottings and
corrections by the observer. maximum range and a large angle T should be
conducted to acquaint observers with the effects
28-8. Critiques of dispersion. As the observer becomes proficient
The officer in charge should conduct a construc- in the adjustment of fire, service practice should
tive and impersonal critique immediately after be conducted from tactical observation posts.
each mission. The critique should be specific, lim- Points on which the observer is graded should
ited to essentials, and conducted generally in the include selection of approach routes, use of cover
following order: and concealment, and firing of the mission.

Section I. STANDARD TIMES FOR ARTILLERY FIRE

28-10. General volume of accurately placed fire. Adjustment re-

The mission of the artillery is to deliver accurate quires prolgoned use of wire and radio com-
and timely fire in support of infantry and armor. munication and thus invites enemy jamming of
If the mission is to be accomplished, certain stan- rado, which results in overloading of wire lines.
dards of accuracy and speed must be met. Total In addition, as t'me for firing increases, exposure
times required for a mission measure the efficiency time to enemy counterbattery measures is in-
of a unit as a whole. A continuous program of creased. The mission requiring adjustment can be
timing by commanders should assist in locating divided into three phases-the initial data phase;
and eliminating time losses. The ultimate goal the adjustment phase; and the fire-for-effect
must be to reduce the time required for an ad- phase.
justment to the absolute minimum to make it
a. The initial data phase starts when a target
closely approximate the effectiveness of fire with-
is seen or identified and ends when the first
out adjustment. This goal can be accomplished
round of adjustment is on the way. During this
if commanders will constantly stress the necessi-
phase, the target has not been alerted and ur-
ty for timely determination of accurate initial
gency will depend on the nature of the target.
data and for smooth, efficient functioning of all
For example, a faster reaction time is required
members of the artillery team.
for attacking a column of infantry than for at-
tacking a command post. More time spent in this
28-11,. Fire Mission Phases phase may reflect better initial data and, con-
The mission requiring an adjustment is only a sequently, less time and fewer rounds for comple-
substitute for the more effective surprise mission. tion of the mission. However, when personnel
The adjustment results in a loss of surprise and, are being trained under service practice condi-
consequently, the kill capabilities of a sudden tions, stress must also be placed on speed in

28-4
 FM 6-40

the initial data phase to emphasize the import- (1) Improving initial data.
ance of speed in accomplishing the artillery mis- (2) Decreasing the number of adjusting
sion. rounds required.
b. The adjustment phase starts when the ini- (3) Speeding the action of personnel
tial rounds land. From that instant on, the tar- through better training and elimination of lost
get is warned and evasive action can and will motion.
be taken. b. The timing standards shown in table 28-1
c. The fire-for-effect phase starts when the ob- are based on average terrain and weather condi-
server announces FIRE FOR EFFECT and ends tions, impact fuze in adjustment, impact or VT
when he announces END OF MISSION. The fuze in fire for effect, initial data within 400
fire-for-effect rounds normally should follow the meters of the target, a time of flight not greater
last rounds of adjustment as quickly as possible. than 25 seconds, and observer distance of 3,000
meters or less. Although no standard times are
28-12. Standards of Proficiency given for weapons other than 105-mm and 155-
a. Timing standards should be used only as a mm howitzers, the times listed can be used as
guide in measuring the overall efficiency of a a guide for all artillery pieces. The only change
field artillery unit. Accuracy must not be sacri- required for other artillery pieces will be to al-
ficed to obtain speed. Faster adjustments and re- low more time for loading and laying the larger
duction of exposure time depend on- cannons and usually for longer times of flight.

Table 28-1. Standards of Proficiency (Speed) for Artillery Fires

IIStandards-minutes and seconds
Type of fire Element Event timed Weapon u i Excellent
Superior Very
satis- Satis-

factory factory
Determination and transmission of initial Note 3 01 00'01 30 02 00 02 30
data. (Time from last word of target
identification to last element of observer's
call for fire.)
Observer Per group of rounds, determination and Note 3 00 12 00 15 00 18 00 21
transmission of corrections. (Time from
last burst to last element of observer's
correction.)
Plotting target and determination of firing Note 3 00 30 00 45 01 00 01 15
data for initial rounds. (Time from last
element of observer's call for fire to
quadrant command to battery.)
Area fire ------- Fire direction Per group of rounds, determination of Note 3 -- 00 15 00 20 00 25 00 30
center. firing data subsequent to initial rounds.
(Time from last element of observer's
correction to quadrant command to bat-
tery.)
Mass battalion after FFE is ordered by Note 1 00 42 00 52 01 02 01 12
olserver. (Time from observer's FFE to Note 2 00 57 01 07 01 17 01 27
SHOT for the last battery.)
Inifal rounds in adjustment. (Time from Note 1 00 15 00 20 00 25 00 30
FDC quadrant to SHOT.) Note 2-- 00 30 00 35 0040 00 45
Firing Per group of rounds, subsequent to initial Note 1- 00 10 00 15 0020 0025
battery. rounds. (Time from FDC quadrant to Note 2 --- 00 25 00 30 00 35 00 40
SHOT.)
FFE, battery one round. (Time from FDC Note 1 --- 00 15 00 20 00 25 00 30
quadrant to SHOT for the last round.) Note 2 -- 00 30 00 35 00 40 00 45
Overall firing Time from first SHOT to SHOT for the Note 1--- 04 40 06 37 07 14 08 11
time. last round in FFE. (Based on four groups Note 2 05 55 06 52 08 28 09 27
of rounds in adjustment.)

28-5
 FM 6-40

Standards-minutes and seconds

Type of fire Element Event timed Weapon Very Satis-

Superior Excellent factor
satis- factory

Determination and transmission of initial Note 3 --- 01 00 01 30 02 00 02 30

data. (Time from last word of target
identification to last element of observer's
call for fire.)
Observer Per round, determination and transmission Note 3 00 10 00 13 00 16 00 19
of corrections. (Time from burst to last
element of observer's correction.)
Per round in FFE, determination and trans- Note 3 _ _ 00 08 00 11 00 14 00 17
mission of spotting. (Time from burst to
last element of observer's spotting.)
Plotting target and determination of firing Note 3 --- 00 30 00 45 01 00 01 05
data for initial round. (Time from last
element of observer's call for fire to
quadrant command to battery.)
Per round, determination of firing data Note 3 -- 00 15 00 20 00 25 00 30
Precision Fire direction subsequent to initial round. (Time from
registration. center. last element of observer's correction to
quadrant command to battery.)
Initial round in adjustment. (Time from Note 1 - 00 15 00 20 00 25 00 30
FDC quadrant to SHOT.) Note 2 00 30 00 35 00 40 00 45
Firing Per round, subsequent to initial round, in- Note 1 -- 00 10 00 15 00 20 00 25
battery. cluding FFE. Note 2 --- 00 25 00 30 00 35 00 40
Overall Adjustment only. (Time from first SHOT Note 1 -- 04 00 04 52 05 44 06 36
problem to SHOT for first round in FFE (based Note 2 _- 05 00 05 52 06 44 07 36
time. on four rounds in adjustment).)
Per round fired. (Time from SHOT to next Note 1 _- 01 00 01 15 01 30 01 45
SHOT. Includes report of instrument Note 2 --- 01 15 01 30 01 45 02 00
MPI or HB Overall firing readings from two OP's.)
registration. time. Total registration time. (Time from first Note 1 ....- 07 00 08 45 10 30 12 15
SHOT to last OP report of registration.) Note 2 _- 08 45 10 30 12 15 14 00
Battery mission. (Time from last element of Note 1 --- 00 45 01 00 01 15 01 30
Fire for effect Overall call for fire to SHOT.) Note 2 -- 01 00 01 15 01 30 01 45
without problem Battalion mission. (Time from last element Note 1 -_ 00 57 01 12 01 27 01 42
adjustment. time. of call for fire to SHOT for last battery Note 2- 01 12 01 27 01 42 01 57
to fire.)
Note 1-105-mm howitzer. Note 2-155-mm howitzer. Note 3-Both 105-mm and 155-mm howitzers.
Note. The standards in table 28-1 do not separate telephone and radio operator time intervals. The efficiency of
operators can be judged by the number of read-backs required. If communications personnel are not efficient, the total time
standards will not be met.

28-6
 FM 6-40

c. Table 28-2 is a detailed breakdown of timing averaged for the "excellent" column for area fire
in table 28-1.
Table 28-2. Service Practice Timing
Time
From- To-- interval (in
seconds)
Target identified Observer ready with call for fire 74
Observer initiates call for fire Observer completes call for fire 16
Observer completes call for fire Deflection sent to pieces 38
Deflection sent to pieces ..................... Quadrant sent to pieces 7
Quadrant sent to pieces . .. . . Quadrant announced by chiefs of sections - -

Quadrant announced by chiefs of sections Last chief of section reports READY 13

Last chief of section reports READY -- -- Pieces are fired 2
(Pieces are fired.) ----------------------- (SHOT announced to observer.) (4)
Target identified -------------------------------------- Pieces are fired - -155

Initial rounds burst in target area Observer completes subsequent corrections 15

Observer completes subsequent corrections Deflection sent to pieces -14
Deflection sent to pieces Quadrant sent to pieces -- 6
Quadrant sent to pieces -.------ Quadrant announced by chiefs of sections - 4
Quadrant announced by chiefs of sections ----- Last chief of section reports READY 8
Last chief of section reports READY ------ Pieces are fired 3
Initial rounds burst in target area -- Subsequent rounds or fire-for-effect rounds are fired 50

28-7
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 29
NAVAL GUNFIRE SUPPORT

Section I. INTRODUCTION

29-1. General 29-2. Characteristics of Naval Gunfire Weap-

Naval gunfire (NGF) and close air support are ons
employed in amphibious operations prior to the Naval gunfire weapon characteristics are shown
landing of artillery units and in coastal opera- in table 29-1.
tions for reinforcing artillery. When naval gun-
fire is used in support of land forces, the Navy is 29-3. Communication Procedure
responsible for control and command. Naval gun- Normal artillery communication procedure is
fire should be requested only for attacking tar- used in requesting naval gunfire.
gets that cannot be engaged adequately by the
artillery and for supplementing artillery fires.

Section II. CALL FOR FIRE

29-4. General bility. However, by requesting REDUCED
Normally, the call for fire for NGF support fol- CHARGE the chances of engaging are increased
lows the same format as that for artillery sup- due to the trajectory being steeper on the de-
port. However, in the first call for fire to a parti- scending branch.
cular ship, the observer must specify the unit of (2) Ammunition. Ammunition for naval
measure to be used (i.e., meters or yards). gunfire is similar to standard ammunition for
artillery; however, the terminology is different.
29-5. Elements and Sequence of Call for Fire Shell high-capacity or antiaircraft common, fuze
The following elements are transmitted in the se- quick, will be used, as appropriate, if the type of
quence indicated. projectile and/or fuze action are not specified by
a. Observer Identification-Same as that for the observer.
artillery fires. (a) High Capacity (HC). Equates to HE,
b. Warning Order-Same as that for artillery fuze quick.
fires except that a target number is sent by the (b) Anti-Aircraft Common (fuze quick),
observer as part of the warning order. Equates to HE, fuze quick.
c. Location of Target-Same as that for artil- (c) Anti-Aircraft Common (fuze time).
lery fires except that the observer may shift to a Equates to HE, fuze time.
new target from the target being fired on pro- (3) Distribution of fire. Distribution of fire
vided the new target is within 1,000 meters of the is not given by the observer for naval gunfire.
target from which the shift is made and END
(4) Danger. The observer announces DAN-
OF MISSION has not been given. To shift to a
GER followed by the direction and distance of
new target, the observer precedes his call for fire
friendly forces from the target whenever any
with FRESH TARGET. The command FRESH
f'riendly forces are within 1,500 meters of the
TARGET insures that the information gained
target. If friendly forces are within 600 meters
from previous adjustments is not lost and normal-
of the target, the observer announces DANGER
ly bracketing may not be necessary.
CLOSE.
d. Description of Target-Same as that for
For example: "DANGER CLOSE 500
artillery fires.
SOUTHEAST"
e. Method of Engagement-Same as that for
artillery fires with the following exceptions: f. Method of Fire and Control--Same as that
(1) Trajectory. Naval gunfire trajectories for artillery fires with the following exceptions:
are quite flat and there is no high angle capa- (1) Method of fire.

29-1
FM 6-40

(a) Salvo fire is used for all missions. Be- ed with one gun for destruction fires and two
cause the ship is moving, it cannot fire battery guns for neutralization fires.
right/left. (2) Control. When the observer wants the
ship to adjust the fire, he identifies the target
(b) Normally, the observer requests the and specifies the effect desired and, as the final
number of guns for use during adjustment and element of the call for fire, announces SHIP
the armament to be used. Normally, fire is open- ADJUST.

29-2
 Table 29-1. Characteristicsof Naval Gunfire Weapons
Maximum Maximum
Rate of fire Types of ammunition Types of fuzes effective range effective range
Ship Class Armament* (rounds/min) (yards) (meters)
Heavy cruiser (CA) Baltimore - -- - 9-8"/55 3-4 HC,AP Q, D, ti 26,000 23,800
12-5"/38 15 HC,ilium, WP Q, D, ti, VT 15,000 13,700
Salem9--------------- 9-8"/55 10 HC,AP Q, D, ti 26,000 23,800
12-5"/38 12-15 HC, ilium, WP Q, D, ti, VT 15,000 13,700
Guided missile heavy 6-8"/55 3-4 HC, AP Q, D, ti 26,000 23,800
cruiser (CAC). 10-5"/38 15 HC,illum, WP Q, D, ti, VT 15,000 13,700
2-S-A**
missile
launchers
Light cruiser (CL) 12-6"/47 10 HC, AP Q, D, ti, VT 21,000 17,200
12-5"/38 15 HC,illum, WP Q, D, ti, VT 15,000 13,700
Guided missile light 3 to 6--6"/47 4 HC,AP Q, D, ti, VT 21,000 17,200
cruiser (CLG). 2 to 6-5"/38 15 HC,illum, WP Q, D, ti, VT 15,000 13,700
Destroyer (DD) ......... Sumner - 6-5"/38 15 HC,illum, WP Q, D, ti, VT 15,000 13,700
Sherman - 3-5"/54 20 HC,illum, WP Q, D, ti, VT 22,500 20,600
Rocket ships Landing ship med 10-5'" S-S*** 30/barrel HC-- -- 5 to 10,000 9,100 max
rocket (LSMR) 8-5" S-S***
Inshore fire support rocket
ship launchers 35 HC Q, D, VT 5 to 10,000 9,100 max
*Number of tubes--diameter of bore/number of calibers.
*Surface to air.
**Surface to surface.

1
C03
'
FM 6-40

Section III. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE

29-6. General indication of direction and distance; for example,
The procedures used in the adjustment of naval TREND SOUTHWEST, 50 meters per salvo.
gunfire are essentially the same as those used in e. Fresh Target-The term used by the obser-
field artillery fire. All terms used in field artillery ver to indicate that he wishes to shift to a new
adjustment are also used in the adjustment of target within 1,000 meters of the target being
naval gunfire. fired on.
f. Neglect-The term used to inform the ob-
29-7. Terms server that the last rounds were fired with in-
Terms used in the adjustment of naval gunfire correct settings.
that are uncommon to the field artillery observer g. Will Not Fire-The term used to indicate
are given in a through j below. that, for safety or other reasons, the ship is un-
a. Delay--The term used to indicate that the able to fire; for example, the ship is under attack.
ship is not ready to fire. The term "delay" is h. Salvo Fire-The term used to describe the
followed by an estimated time at which the ship method of fire in which a number of weapons
will be ready. are fired at the same target simultaneously.
b. Straddle-The term used to indicate that i. Danger-The term used to indicate that
multigun fires straddle the target. friendly forces are within 1500 meters from the
target.
c. Large Spread-The term used to indicate
j. Spreading Fire-The term used by the ob-
that the distance between bursts is excessive. server to inform the ship that fire is about to be
d. Trend-The term used to indicate that fires distributed over an area target. It is followed by
are creeping off the target. It is followed by an an appropriate correction.

29-4
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 30
ARMOR EMPLOYED IN A FIELD ARTILLERY MISSION

30-1. General 30-3. Observer Procedure

a. Tank guns normally are not used in the Field artillery observer procedures as covered in
field artillery (indirect fire) role because part three of this manual are used in conducting
of tank guns and the smal bursting radius of the indirect fire with tanks.
high velocity, flat trajectory and short tube life
of tank guns and the small bursting radisu of the 30-4. Fire Direction
a. Firing Chart. The location of each tank pla-
ammunition. However, under exceptional circum-
toon is plotted on the field artillery firing chart.
stances, the force commander may decide to em-
A deflection index is constructed at zero deflec-
ploy tanks in an indirect fire role under the opera-
tion by orienting the left edge of the arm of the
tional control of the supporting field artillery. range-deflection protractor in the direction on
The tank unit may be either attached to the
which the tanks are laid and drawing the index
field artillery units or given a reinforcing mission.
on the chart at the center graduation of the mil
The field artillery unit is responsible for fire con-
scale on the arc. The RDP is numbered for read-
trol, communication, and survey. If the tank unit
ing shifts of 500 mils right or left of the direc-
is attached, the field artillery unit is also re-
tion of lay as follows:
sponsible for ammunition, fuel, rations, and
(1) Number the center graduation 0.
other supplies. Whether attached or reinforcing,

, the tank unit must retain the capability of im-

mediately reverting to its primary role.
b. This chapter deals with the gunnery tech-
(2) Number each succeeding 100 mil grad-
uation to the right "LI" through "L4" and each
succeeding graduation to the left "Ri" through
"R4". The last graduation on each end need not
niques used when the tank unit is under the con-
be numbered. For reading shifts greater than
trol of the field artillery. For information on the
500 mils, additional indexes must be constructed.
mission and the tactical employment of tank
If tank weapon firing tables are not available to
units, on the characteristics of tanks and tank
the fire direction center, the tank unit normally
fire control equipment, and on direct fire with
fires only observed fires in the indirect role. If
tank weapons, see the 17-series field manuals.
tabular or graphical firing tables are available,
30-2. Ammunition a registration should be conducted and correc-
a. HE and WP projectiles are available for tions applied as outlined in chapter 20. Correc-
firing in 90-mm tank guns (M48A3 tank). HEP tions sent by the observer during adjustment
and WP projectiles are available for 105-mm tank are plotted using the target grid as outlined in
guns (M60 and M60A1 tanks). chapter 16.
b. A typical basic load will include approxi-
mately 25 percent HE or HEP, 15 percent WP, b. Fire Commands.
and 60 percent antitank ammunition. Since a (1) Fire command information is sent from
tank unit can be committed to mobile combat at the fire direction center to the tank unit fire
any time, this basic load should not be used in control officer (FCO), who is responsible for tank
the indirect fire role. If possible, ammunition fire. The FCO converts this information to a pla-
toon fire command and sends it to the tanks. The
should be prestocked for this purpose. FCO requires the range from the platoon target,
c. HE projectiles (90-mm tank guns) are is-
sued with combination superquick and delay the difference in elevation, the direction, and
target description. An example is shown:
fuzes. Combination mechanical time and super-
quick or concrete-piercing fuzes may be obtained 12,000 UP 10

, and substituted for the issued fuzes if required.

Separate fuzes are not available for the 105-mm
tank guns (M60 and M6OA1).
Note. See TM 9-1300-203 and table 1-2 for further
FROM REFERENCE POINT, RIGHT
115
MORTARS FIRING
(a) 12,000, UP 10. The range informa-
information on ammunition. tion (12,000) is given to the nearest 100 meters.

30-1
FM 6-40

When the target is at a different altitude from of the command if firing a round with an ad-
that of the tank, an angle of sight is computed justable fuze other than fuze quick; e.g., HE
in mils and included as part of the information DELAY.
(UP 10). The complementary angle of sight for (c) Mortars Firing. The nature of the
high-velocity guns is negligible and is ignored. target is announced to the tank unit as a portion
(b) From Reference Point, Right 115. of the fire command.
The direction information is given in terms of (d). Deflection 3127 RIGHT. This portion
a reference point. In the indirect fire role, the of the fire command is the direction and must
tanks are laid in an azimuth, and this azimuth be computed by the FCO using the direction in-
is considered the reference point. When the tank formation sent from the FDC and drift data
is laid, the azimuth indicator is zeroed. Direc- contained in tank firing tables. Once the direc-
tions are given as right or left of the reference tion of the gun has been computed, and drift
point (azimuth on which laid). Aiming posts may accounted for, it must be converted to a reading
be set out and alined on a common deflection, that can be applied to the tank azimuth indi-
usually at zero, or 2,600 or 2,800 mils to the right cator. The tank azimuth indicator is numbered
front. Since the tank does not have a panoramic left, from zero to 3,200 mils, and from that point
sight, the aiming post deflection is merely an again from zero to 3,200 mils. Because of this,
offset angle. During lulls in the firing, the gunner a direction and an azimuth to the left of the
checks a tanks displacement by using the aiming reference point are the same, but to the right
posts without traversing the turret (tube) back the two numbers are different, and always sum
to the aiming circle. up to 3200. A direction "RIGHT" or "LEFT"
(c) Mortars Firing. The nature of the must be included in the command since this de-
target is announced to the tanks as a portion of termines which direction along an axis the tubes
their fire command. point.
(2) Once the fire control officer has the fir- (e) Quadrant + 430. The FCO obtains the
ing information of range, elevation, direction, superelevation angle from the fire tables and
and target description, he must convert this data combines it with the angle of sight announced
so that a fire command can be sent to the tanks. by the FDC. The tank weapons may be laid for
The tanks must receive the range information as elevation by using either the gunner's quadrant
a quadrant reading, which includes the angle of or the elevation quadrant. Since the range of
sight and the elevation for range. The tank weap- most tank weapons is limited by the inability to
ons may be laid for elevation by using either elevate to high angles, it may be necessary either
the gunner's quadrant or the elevation quadrant. to dig in the rear of the tanks or to place the
Likewise, the direction command must be modi- tanks on a ramp which slopes away from the
fied so this data can be placed on the tanks direction of fire.
instruments. An example of a platoon fire com- (f) At My Command. Fire. The com-
mand issued by the fire control officer, is shown mand to signal when a tank is ready is AT MY
in the following fire command. COMMAND. The command to open fire is FIRE.
PLATOON In tank gunnery, this command is the last ele-
HEP ment in the sequence of fire command because
MORTARS FIRING the tank gunner is trained to hold his fire until
3127 RIGHT the command FIRE is received.
QUADRANT + 430 Note. When required, other fire commands used
AT MY COMMAND. FIRE. by the artillery (e.g., pieces to fire, method of fire) are
sent to the tanks in the simplest and most understandable
(a) Platoon. The normal method of em- manner. Commonsense and liaison between artillery and
ploying tanks in an indirect fire role is by platoon armor should overcome difficulties caused by lack of
(fire tank guns). To alert all fire weapons that formal procedure. This problem is further alleviated
they will fire the command is PLATOON. To through the use of prearranged data sheets.
alert all pieces to follow with one tank firing in c. Distribution. The normal width of a tank
adjustment, the command is PLATOON AD- platoon front in the position area is about 150
JUST, NUMBER THREE (The number three meters. For tanks armed with 90-mm guns, a
piece firing in adjustment). parallel sheaf produces an effective pattern of
(b) HEP. The ammunition command is bursts with this position area width. For tanks
similar to that for field artillery except that the armed with guns of other calibers and for posi-
word "shell" is omitted and the fuze is also part tion areas of different widths, it is necessary

30-2
 FM 6-40

to adjust the width of sheaf in order to obtain the arragned data sheets. Survey control, meteoro-
most effective pattern of bursts. logical computations, prearranged data sheets,
and assistance in laying the tanks may be pro-
30-5. Alternate Methods vided by the supported artillery. Interdiction and
Other methods, that may be employed in con- harassing missions are the types of mission most
trolling the indirect fire of tanks are as follows: effectively handled by use of data sheets.
a. Independent Method. The tank unit uses
fire direction equipment and personnel organic to 30-6. Survey
the tank battalion to form, with artillery as- The survey necessary for the indirect firing of
sistance, a fire direction center. the tanks, such as the establishment of their posi-
tion area locations, is performed by the field
b. Semi-Independent Method. The tank unit artillery battalion before the arrival of the tanks
handles its own indirect fire missions from pre- or as soon after their arrival as possible.

30-3
 FM 6-40

APPENDIX A

REFERENCES

A-1. Publication Indexes

Department of the Army Pamphlets of the 310-series should be consulted frequently for latest changes
or revisions of references given in this appendix and for new publications relating to material cov-
ered in this manual.
A-2. Army Regulations
75-1 Malfunctions Involving Ammunition and Explosives, Reports Control
Symbol AMC-132 (MIN)
310-25 Dictionary of United States Army Terms
310-50 Authorized Abbreviations and Brevity Codes
385-63 Regulations for Firing Ammunition for Training, Target Practice, and
Combat
A-3. Department of Army Pamphlets (DAPam)
108-1 Index of Army Motion Pictures and Related Audio-Visual Aids.
310-series Index of Military Publications
A-4. Field Manuals (FM)
6-2 Field Artillery Survey
6-20 Field Artillery Tactics and Operations
6-70 105-mm Howitzer, Light, M102, Towed
6-75 105-mm Howitzer M101 Series, Towed
6-77 105-mm Howitzer M52, Self-Propelled
6-79 105-mm Howitzer M108, Self-Propelled
6-81 155-mm Howitzer M114, Towed
6-88 155-mm Howitzer M109, Self-Propelled
6-90 8-inch Howitzer M2, Towed
6-92 155-mm Howitzer M44, Self-Propelled
6-94 175-mm Gun M107, Self-Propelled and 8-inch Howitzer Ml10, Self-
Propelled
6-115 The Field Artillery Searchlight Battery
6-120 The Field Artillery Target Acquisition Battalion and Batteries
6-122 Artillery Sound Ranging and Flash Ranging
6-125 Qualification Tests for Specialists, Field Artillery
6-140 Field Artillery Organizations
6-160 Counterbattery Radar Set AN/MPQ-10A
6-161 Radar Set AN/MPQ-4A
11-40 Signal Corps Pictorial Operations
17-12 Tank Gunnery
21-5 Military Training Management
21-6 Techniques of Military Instruction
21-26 Map Reading
21-30 Military Symbols
23-92 4.2-inch Mortar M30
(C) 32-5 Signal Security (SIGSEC) (U)
(C) 32-20 Electronic Warfare (U)
100-5 Operations of Army Forces in the Field

A-1
FM 6-40

A-5. Technical Manuals (TM)

5-581A General Drafting
6-230 Logarithmic and Mathematical Tables
6-240 Slide Rule, Military, Field Artillery
9-325 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Howitzer, Light,
Towed, 105-mm M101 and M101Al.
9-1015-215-12 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual: Mortar 4.2-inch:
Cannon M30 on Mount M24 or M24A1; and Mortar, Sub-caliber, 60-mm:
M31
9-1015-234-12 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual: (Including Repair
Parts and Special Tools Lists) Howitzer, Light, Towed: 105-mm, M102
9-1025-200-12 Operator and Organizational Maintennce Manual: Howitzer, Medium,
Towed: 155-mm M114 and M114A1; and Howitzer, Medium, Towed,
Auxiliary Propelled, 155-mm, M123A1
9-1300-200 Ammunition, General
9-1300-203 Artillery Ammunition
9-2300-216-10 Operator's Manual, Gun, FA, SP, 175-mm, M107 (2350-436-6635)
and Howitzer, Heavy, SP, 8-Inch, Ml10 (2350-439-6243)
9-2300-216-20 Organizational Maintenance Manual, Gun, FA, SP, 175-mm, M107 (2350-
436-6635) and Howitzer, Heavy, SP, $-Inch, Ml10 (2350-439-6243)
9-2350-217-10 Operator's Manual, Howitzer, Light, SP, 105-mm, M108 (2350-440-8810)
and Howitzer, Medium, SP, 155-mm, M109 (2350-440-8811)
9-2350-217-20 Organizational Maintenance Manual, Howitzer, Light, SP, 105-mm, M108
(2350-440-8810) and Howitzer, Medium, SP, 155-mm, M109 (2350-440-
8811)
11-287 Radio Sets AN/VRQ-1, AN/VRQ-2, and AN/VRQ-3
30-245 Image Interpretation Handbook
38-750 The Army Maintenance Management System

A-6. Firing Tables (FT)

8-J-4 Cannon, 8-inch Howitzer; M2 and M2A1 on Howitzer, Heavy, Towed:
8-inch, M114 Cannon, 8-inch Howitzer; M47 on Howitzer, Heavy, Self-
Propelled, Full-Tracked: 8-inch, M55 Cannon, 8-inch Howitzer: M2A1E1
on Howitzer, Heavy, Self-Propelled: 8-inch, Ml10 Firing Projectile,
HE, M106, Projectile, Chemical, M426.
8-ADD-A-1 Firing Table Addendum to FT 8-J-4 for Projectile HE, M404
8-0-4 Cannon, 8-inch Howitzer: M2 and M2A1 on Howitzer, Heavy, Towed:
8-inch, Ml15, Cannon, 8-inch Howitzer: M2A1E1 on Howitzer, Heavy,
Self-Propelled: 8-inch, Ml10 Cannon, 8-inch, Howitzer: M47 on Howit-
zer, Heavy, Self-Propelled, Full-Tracked: 8-inch, M55; Firing Projec-
tile HES, M424, Projectile, Atomic, M422.
105-H-7 Cannon, 105-mm Howitzer, M2A2 and M2A1 on Howitzer, Light, Towed,
105-mm, M101A1 and M101 and Cannon, 105-mm Howitzer, M49 on
Howitzer, Light, Self-Propelled, Full-Tracked, 105-mm, M52A1 and
M52, Firing Cartridge, HE, Mi; Cartridge, Gas, Persistent H and HB,
M60, Cartridge, Gas, Nonpersistent, GB, M360, Cartridge, Smoke, WP,
M60, Cartridge, Smoke, BE, M84 and M84B1 (HC and Colored), Car-
tridge, Illuminating, M314A2E1; Cartridge, HEP-T, M327 Cartridge,
Antipersonnel, XM546
105-ADD-B-2 Firing Table Addendum to FT i05-H-6 for Cartridge, HE, M444
155-ADD-E-i Projectile, HE, M449A1 (M449E2) ; Projectile HE, M449 (T379), Projectile,
HE, M449E1
155-ADD-F-i Addendum to FT 155-Q-4 for Projectile, HE, M449A1 (M449E2), Pro-
jectile, HE, M449 (T379) Projectile, HE, M449E1
155-AH-2 Cannon, 155-mm Howitzer, M126E1 and M126 on Howitzer, Medium, Self-
Propelled: 155-mm, M109, Firing Projectile, HE, M107; Projectile,
A-2
 FM 6-40

Smoke, WP, Ml10; Projectile, Smoke, BE, M116 and M116B1 (HC and
Colored); Projectile, Gas, Persistent, HD, Ml10; Projectile, Gas, Per-
sistent, H, Ml10; Projectile, Gas, Nonpersistent, GB, M121A1; Pro-
jectile, Gas Persistent, VX, M121A1; Projectile, Illuminating, M118,
M118A1, M118A1B1, M118A2 and M118A2B1; Projectile, Illuminating,
M485E2, M485E1 and M485
155-AJ-2 Firing Tables for Cannon, 155-mm, Howitzer, M126E1 and M126 on
Howitzer, Medium, Self-Propelled
155-AM-1 Firing Tables for Cannon, 155-mm Howitzer, M185 on Howitzer, Medium,
Self-Propelled, 155-mm, M109A1 and Howitzer, Medium, Self-Propelled,
155-mm M109A1B Firing Projectile, HE M107 Projectile, Smoke, WP,
Ml10 Projectile, Smoke BE, M116, M116B1 (HC and Colored/Projec-
tile) ; Projectile, GasPersistent, H and HD, Ml10 projectile, gas, nonper-
sistent, GB, M121A1 Projectile, Gas Persistent, VX, M121A1 Projectile
Illuminating, M485A2 and M485A1
105-AS-2 Cannon, 105-mm Howitzer, M103, on Howitzer, Light, Self-Propelled:
105-mm, M108, Firing Cartridge, HE, M1; Cartridge, Gas, Persistent,
H, M60; Cartridge, Gas, Persistent, HD, M60; Cartridge, Gas, Non-
persistent, GB, M360; Cartridge, Smoke, WP, M60; Cartridge, Smoke,
BE, M84 and M84B1, (HC and Colored); Cartridge, Illuminating,
M314A2E1; cartridge, HEP-T, M327 (Also Applicable to Howitzer,
Light, Towed: 105-mm, M102)
105-ADD-F-I Firing table Addendum to FT 105-AS-2 for Cartridge, HE, M444
155-Q-4 Howitzer, Medium, Towed, 155-mm, M1i4A1 and M114; Howitzer, Medi-
um, Self-Propelled, Full-Tracked, 155-mm M44A1 and M44; Howitzer,
medium, Towed, Auxiliary Propelled, 155-mm, M123A1; Firing Pro-
jectile, HE, M107; Projectile, Smoke, WP, Ml10; Projectile, Smoke,
BE, M116 and M1i6B1 (HC and Colored); Projectile, Gas, Persistent,
HD, Ml10; Projectile, Gas, Persistent, H, Ml10, Projectile, Gas, Non-
Persistent, GB, M121A1; Projectiles, Gas Persistent, VX, M121A1;
Projectile, Illuminating, M485E2, M485E1 and M485.
175-A-1 Cannon, 175-mm gun: M113, Mii3E1 on gun, Field Artillery, Self-Pro-
pelled: 175-mm, M107 Firing Projectile, HE, M437A2, M437A1.

AF publications supply channels.)

A-7. DA Forms (Available through normal
2408-4 Weapon Record Data
3622 FDC Computer's Record
3623 Firing Battery Recorder's Sheet
4007 Firing Battery Section Data Sheet
4176 Target Grid, Scale 1:25,000 Meters
4198 Record of Precision Fire
4199 Firing Battery Data Sheet
4200 Met Data Correction Sheet
4201 High-Burst (Mean Point of Impact) Registration Computation of HB
(MPI) Location
8-inch Nuclear Computation--Met Plus YE
4207 8-inch Nuclear Computation--K Transfer
4208

A-8. Miscellaneous Publications

164 Joint Radio and Telephone Procedure for Conduct of Artillery and Naval
Gunfire
QSTAG 224 Manual Fire Direction Equipment, Target Classification and Methods of
Engagement for Post--1970
QSTAG 225 Call for Fire Formats
QSTAG 246 Radio Telephone Procedures for the Conduct of Artillery Fire
A-3
 FM 6-40

APPENDIX B
CALL FOR FIRE FORMATS
(QSTAG 225)

CHAPTER 1
OBSERVER'S CALL FOR FIRE FORMAT
ELEMENTS OF A CALL FOR FIRE
B-1. The Elements of a Call for Fire Are:
a. Observer identification.
b. Warning order.
c. Location of target.
d. Description of target.
e. Method of engagement.
f. Method of fire and control.
OBSERVER IDENTIFICATION
B-2. This is the establishment of communication between the observer
and the Fire Direction Center/Command Post (FDC/CP).
WARNING ORDER
B-3. The basic warning order is "Fire Mission." One of the following
may be included to indicate the number of guns:
a. If less than a battery is desired-the number of guns is specified
with Right, Left or Centre, if applicable.
b. Battery.
c. Battalion/Regiment.
d. Division.
e. All available.
Examples:
(1) "Fire Mission-One Gun."
(2) "Fire Mission-Two Guns Left."
(3) "Fire Mission-Regiment/Battalion."
B-4. The Warning Order is a request unless prior authority has been
granted to order calls for fire. If the number of guns is not indicated the
FDC/CP will allocate the number of guns.
LOCATION OF TARGET
B-5. The location of the target may be given in one of the following
ways and is amplified in the succeeding paragraphs:
a. By a grid.
b. By a target number or a known point.
c. By a reference from a known point.
d. By polar coordinates.
B-6. By a Grid.
a. The grid will be given in terms of eastings and northings to the degree
of accuracy required by the type of engagement.
Example:
(1) "Grid 321654."
(2) "Grid 42137856."

B-1
FM 6-40

b. Altitude is normally given by the observer. If it is not given it is

determined in the FDC/CP.
B-7. By a Target Number or a Known Point. The recorded target or the
known point must be known to both the observer and the FDC/CP.
Examples:
(1) "ZT 1242."
(2) "AB 1014."
(3) "Registration Pointl."
B-8. By Reference From a Known Point.
a. The designation and location of the known point must be known to
both the observer and the FDC/CP. This may be a registration point, a
recorded target, or a prominent terrain feature.
b. The reference from the known point will include the direction, hori-
zontal correction (shift) and the vertical correction (shift) if any, to the
new target.
Examples:
(1) "From ZT 1234, Direction 1200,
Right 400, Drop 200, Up 50."
(2) "From Registration Point 1,
Direction 2610, Left 600, Add 400, Down 20."
B-9. By Polar Coordinates. (To be used only when the position of the
observer is known by the FDC/CP.) Polar coordinates consist of the
direction, distance and vertical correction (shift) if any, from the observer's
position to the target. A vertical correction (shift) is accepted as being
metres unless mils are specified.
Examples:
(1) "Direction 1240, distance 2000,
Up 50."
(2) "Direction 1240, distance 2000.
Up 25 Mils."
B-10. Direction.
a. When the observer anticipates that he will be required to adjust
or correct the fire, he will send a direction.
b. The direction is normally the horizontal clockwise angle measured
by the observer from grid north to the target and is ordered to the
nearest 10 mils, e.g., "Direction 1240."
c. If the ground observer wishes to use the line GT as a reference line
he will order "Direction GT". If direction is not ordered by the air
observer, the line GT is understood.
d. If the observer wishes to use an arbitrary reference line other than
the line observer-target or gun-target, he will order it in the normal way,
e.g., "Direction 1440."
DESCRIPTION OF TARGET
B-il. The observer indicates any or all of the following target features:
a. Target Type. Provides information as to type of target, e.g., battalion
assembly area.
b. Degree of Protection. Provides information relative to the target
protection, e.g., company dug in along ridge.
c. Approximate Size. Provides dimensions of the target in metres e.g.,
200 by 100.
d. Attitude. Provides information relative to the longer axis of the target
and given to the nearest 50 mils, e.g., attitude 2450.B

B-2
 FM 6-40

METHOD OF ENGAGEMENT
B-12. The method of engagement of the target includes:
a. Type of engagement.
b. Trajectory.
c. Ammunition.
d. Distribution of fire.
B-13. Type of Engagement. This indicates to the FDC/CP any special
procedures. If the type of engagement is not given, the convention is that
an area neutralization mission is required. Types of special engagement
which may be given are:
a. "Registration"-a fire mission conducted to determine the correction
for shooting.
b. "Mark"-to indicate that the observer is going to fire rounds either:
(1) To orient himself in his zone of observation, or
(2) To indicate targets to ground troops, aircraft, or fire support
ships.
c. "Destruction"-the engagement of a target with the purpose of
destroying it.
d. "Danger Close"-when the target is within 600 metres of friendly
personnel. The limits and special procedures are designed to insure the
safety of friendly personnel.
B-14. Trajectory. This is the determination to use high or low angle. The
order will be "High Angle"-if no order is given the convention is to fire
at low angle.
B-15. Ammunition. This element indicates the type of ammunition and
may include the volume required.
a. Type. If a type of ammunition is not specified it is assumed that HE
fuze quick is required. Ammunition is specified as follows:
(1) The ammunition required in adjustment and in fire for effect is
specified by the shell or fuze as shown below:
(a) Shell. "HE." "Illuminating," "WP," or "Smoke" (including
colour other than white).
(b) Fuze. "Quick," "VT," "Time," "Delay" or "Concrete Piercing."
(2) If the type of ammunition required in adjustment and in fire for
effect is different, this is stated by specifying the type of ammunition to-
gether with the terms, "in adjustment" or "in effect" as applicable. When
HE fuze quick is to be used in either phase it need not be stated.
(3) Examples:
(a) "Delay"-HE Delay is fired during adjustment and fire for
effect.
(b) "VT in Effect"-HE fuze quick is used in adjustment and VT
at fire for effect.
(c) "WP in Adjustment"-WP is used in adjustment and HE fuze
quick at fire for effect.
(d) "WP in Adjustment, HE Time in Effect"--WP is used in
adjustment and HE fuze time at fire for effect.
b. Volume: The volume is a request for the number of rounds to be fired
from each gun in fire for effect and, in addition, serves as a warning for
the preparation of an unusual quantity or special type of ammunition.
B-16. Distribution of Fire. Orders are necessary to insure that fire is
distributed adequately to cover any given target. If no specific order is
given, batteries will fire with planes (lines) of fire parallel. Orders which
may be used include:
a. "Converge"--Planes (lines) of fire and range are concentrated on a
point.

B-3
FM 6-40

b. "Cancel Converge"-This order is used to cancel "Converge".

c. "Open"-Points of impact or bursts that are separated by the maxi-
mum effective width of the burst of the shell fired.
d. Distribution of fire for target illumination will follow the procedure
given in STANAG 2088.
METHOD OF FIRE AND CONTROL
B-17. This includes certain control elements which indicate the control to
be exercised by the observer over:
a. Whether adjustment is to be made, or fire delivered without adjust-
ment.
b. Method of fire.
c. Time of delivery of fire.
B-18. The orders to be used are:
a. "Adjust Fire." Fire to be adjusted by the observer. The first round is
fired when ready unless "At My Command" is ordered. "Adjust Fire"
may be preceded by "Number _ _"or "One Gun," or "Two (or more)
Guns," "Right/Left"; if not Center will be used.
b. "Platoon or Battery/Right or Left." Guns fire one round in sequence
from the Right or Left as ordered.
c. "Fire for Effect." The type and quantity of ammunition authorized
to be fired from each gun as quickly as possible.
d. " Rounds, Fire for Effect." Number of rounds ordered to be
fired from each gun as quickly as possible when the number of rounds to
be fired is other than that authorized.
e. "Continuous Illumination." If no interval is given by the observer the
FDC/CP will determine the interval by the burning time of the illuminat-
ing ammunition in use. If any other interval is required it will be indi-
cated in seconds.
f. "Coordinated Illumination." The observer may order the interval be-
tween illuminating and HE in seconds to achieve a time of arrival of the
HE coincident with optimum illumination, or he will use normal "At My
Command" procedures.
g. "At My Command"... "Fire." Used when the observer wishes to
control the moment of firing for any reason. The order "Fire" is given af-
ter the fire unit has reported "Ready" and when the observer wishes it to
fire.
h. "TOT." The method of firing on a target in which various artillery
units and naval gunfire support ships so time their fire to assure the initial
rounds strike the target simultaneously at the time required.
i. Interval:
(1) At Platoon or Battery/Right or Left, an interval ordered in
seconds is the time between one gun firing and the next gun firing. Five
seconds is the standard interval.
(2) At rounds of fire for effect the interval is the time in seconds
between successive rounds from each gun.
I. "Cannot Observe." A type of fire control to indicate that the spotter or
observer will be unable to adjust fire, but believes a target exists at the
given location and is of sufficient importance to justify firing upon it
without adjustment or observation.
k. "Cease Loading." The command used during firing of two or more
rounds to indicate the suspension of inserting rounds into the weapons.
1. "Check Firing." A command to cause a temporary halt in firing.
m. "Continuous Fire." In field artillery and naval gunfire, loading and
firing at a specified rate or as rapidly as possible consistent with accuracy
within the prescribed rate of fire for the weapon. Firing will continue until
 FM 6-40

terminated by the command "End of mission" or temporarily suspended by

the command "Cease loading" or "Check firing."
n. "Followed by...." Part of a term used to indicate a change in the
rate of fire.
o. "Ready." The term to indicate that a weapon or weapons are aimed,
loaded and/or prepared to fire.
p. "Repeat." A command or request to fire again the same number of
rounds with the same method of fire.
CANCELLATION OF ORDERS
B-19. All fire orders are cancelled by "Cancel-" except when they contain
a quantity or type of ammunition. Orders containing a quantity or type of
ammunition are cancelled by a new order for quantity or type of ammuni-
tion, and the new order takes effect immediately.
REPORTS TO OBSERVER
B-20. Message to Observer. When the observer's call for fire is received,
the FDC/CP to which it has been directed will prepare and transmit a
"Message to Observer" as soon as possible. The "Message to Observer"
may include the elements shown in the table below. When any element has
been specified by the observer in his call for fire, it may be omitted from
the "Message to Observer," providing the FDC/CP can meet the observer's
requirements, otherwise it must be included.
Serial Element Remarks
1 Units to fire
2 Projectile The standard projectile is HE and the standard fuze
and/or fuze is Quick. If this element is omitted in the observer's
call for fire and the standard is provided, no report
of this element is required.
3 Number of
rounds from
each gun
for fire for
effect.
2 Projectile The standard projectile is HE and the standard fuze
and/or fuze is Quick. If this element is omitted in the observer's
call for fire and the standard is provided, no report
3 Number of of this element is required.
rounds from
each gun for
fire for
effect.
4 Target 1. UK/CA/ASCP where appropriate.
number 2. US FDC will always send a target number.
Examples:
(1) Battalion, WP, five rounds, target AG 1428.
(2) Regiment, VT, three rounds, target ZT 1462.
B-21. Shot
a. Adjustment by thie center gun (s) of the battery/troop is standard.
b. The observer will be informed of the guns used in adjustment by
UK/CA/AS CPs.
c. During "Battery Right/Left" individual guns may be reported shot
e.g. "Shot 1," "Shot 2" etc.
B-22. Splash*. Splash is always reported during high angle fire, when
shooting with air observers and when requested by the ground observer.
B-23. Time of Flight. Reported when requested by observer.
*The United States will use the following definition for "Splash." "Splash is always reported. Ave
second. prior to predicted impact during high angle fire, when shooting with air observers and when
requested by the ground observer."

B-5
FM 6-40
B-24. Neglect. Neglect is reported when for any reason a shell is fired with
incorrect data. Another shell is fired at the correct data without any order
from the observer.
B-25. Rounds Complete. Rounds complete is always reported when fire for
effect is completed.
B-26. Target-Recorded. This may be reported by the FDC/CP when it
has recorded the data of the fire mission.

B-6
 FM 6-40

CHAPTER 2

ARTILLERY HEADQUARTERS CALL FOR FIRE FORMAT

FORMAT
B-27. A format is required to enable an artillery headquarters to send calls
for fire to higher, lower and adjacent artillery headquarters.
B-28. The format follows closely the observer's call for fire format. The
elements are:
a. Identification.
b. Warning order and size of fire unit to engage.
c. Target location.
d. Description of target.
e. Method of engagement. The following elements are sent if they are
different from standard.
(1) Type of engagement.
(2) Trajectory.
(3) Ammunition.
(a) Type of shell and/or fuze.
(b) Volume to be fired from each gun.
(4) Distribution of fire.
f. Method of fire and control.
(1) Fire for Effect.
(2) TOT.
B-29. Example of a divisional call for fire.
Fire Mission Division
ZU 2714
Brigade Headquarters
High Angle
VT 5 rounds
TOT 1325

B-7
FM 6-40

ANNEX A TO QSTAG-225
AN AREA TARGET ENGAGED BY A BATTERY
Observer •:US
Guns UK/CA/AS .

SERIAL OBSERVER'S ORDERS REPORTS TO OBSERVER

1 Observer's identification
2 Fire Mission.
3 Grid 456123 Altitude 120
4 Direction 4790.
5 Vehicle park in wood.
200 by 100, Attitude 800.
6 Adjust Fire.
7 Battery 5 rounds.
8 Shot 5.a
9 Right 200.
10 Shot.
11 Drop 400.
12 Shot.
13 Add 200.
14 Shot.
15 Drop 100
16 Shot.
17 Drop 50OFFE.
18 Shot.
19 Rounds complete.
20 End of Mission.
Three vehicles burning.
a Identification of adjusting gun.

B-8
 FM 6-40

AN AREA TARGET ENGAGED BY A BATTERY

ANNEX B TO QSTAG-225
Observer UK/CA/AS
Guns US
SERIAL OBSERVER'S ORDERS REPORTS TO OBSERVER
1 Observer's identification.
2 Fire Mission Battery.
3 Grid 456123 Altitude 120
4 Direction 4790.
5 Vehicle park in wood.
200 by 100 Attitude 800.
6 Adjust Fire.
7 Battery identification
6 rounds. AG 7115.
8 Shot.
9 Right 100. Add 400.
10 Shot.
11 Drop 200.
12 Shot.
13 Drop 100.
14 Shot.
15 Drop 50. 1 round, FFE.
16 Shot.
17 Rounds complete.
18 5 rounds, FFE
19 Shot.
20 Rounds complete.
21 Record as target.a
End of Mission. Three vehicles burning.
a Request by observer for target to be recorded.

B-9
FM 6-40

ANNEX C TO QSTAG-225
AREA TARGET ENGAGED BY BATTERY FIRING TIME IN EFFECT
Observer : US
Guns : UK/CA/AS
SERIAL OBSERVER'S ORDERS REPORTS TO OBSERVER

1 Observer's identification.
2 Fire Mission.
3 Grid 341652 Altitude 120
4 Direction 1690.
5 Platoon in open, radius 150.
6 Time in effect.
7 Adjust Fire.
8 Battery 4 rounds.
9 Shot 3.
10 Add 200.
11 Shot.
12 Right 40. Drop 100.
13 Shot.&
14 Time. Add 50.
15 Shot.
16 Up 40.
17 Shot.
18 Down 10 FFE.
19 Shot.
20 Rounds complete.
21 Record as target.
End of Mission.
Platoon dispersed.
22 Target ZP 1040 recorded.
a Adjustment to 100 metre bracket is done with fuze quick.
b On the request for fuze time the CP orders three guns in adjustment with fuze setting predicted and
20/R applied.
c The observer makes correction to HOB by ordering Up/Down. These corrections are converted by the
CP to corrections to fuze setting.

B-10
 FM 6-40

ANNEX D TO QSTAG-225
AREA TARGET ENGAGED BY A BATTALION FIRING VT IN
EFFECT
Observer UK/CA/AS
Guns US
SERIAL OBSERVER'S ORDERS REPORTS TO OBSERVER

1 Observer's identification
2 Fire Mission Battalion
3 Grid 432176 Altitude 120
4 Direction 4420
5 Battalion assembly area 300 by 200,
Attitude 4200
6 VT in effect, 8 rounds
7 Adjust Fire a
8 Report time of flight
9 Battalion, Adjusting battery iden-
tification, 4 rounds, AB 1420.
10 Shot, time of flight 27 seconds.
11 Drop 400.
12 Shot.
13 Add 200.
14 Shot.
15 At my command FFE
16 Battalion Ready.
17 Fire.
18 Shot
19 Rounds complete.
20 Cancel at my command
Repeat.
21 Shot.
22 Rounds complete.
23 Record as target. End of Mission. Heavy
casualties, Battalion dispersed.
a Adjustment is done with fuze quick by two guns.

B-11
FM 6-40
ANNEX E TO QSTAG-225
AREA TARGET ENGAGED BY A REGIMENT FIRING VT IN
EFFECT
Observer UK/CA/AS
Guns US
SERIAL OBSERVER'S ORDERS REPORTS TO OBSERVER

1 Observer's identification.
2 Fire Mission.
3 Grid 432176 Altitude 120
4 Direction 4420.
5 Company assembly area. Radius 200.
6 VT in effect.
7 Adjust fire.R
8 Regiment 6 rounds. ZT 1764.
9 Battery identification. Shot 4.
10 Drop 400.
11 Shot.
12 Add 200.
13 Shot.
14 Drop 100.
15 Shot.
16 FFE.
17 Shot.
18 Rounds complete.
19 Repeat.
20 4 rounds.b
21 Shot.
22 Rounds complete.
23 Record as target. End of Mission. Heavy
casualties. Company dispersed.
24 Target ZT 1764 recorded.
a Adjustment is done with fuze quick by one gun.
b CP has allowed only an additional 4 rounds.

B-1 2
 FM 6-4O

ANNEX F TO QSTAG-225
REGISTRATION
SERIAL OBSERVER'S ORDERS REPORTS TO OBSERVER
1 Observer's identification.
2 Fire Mission (one gun)a
3 Registration point 1.
4 Direction 1240.
5 Registration b
6 Adjust Fire.
7 Shot 0O
8 Right 70, add 200
9 Shot.
10, Drop 100.
11 Shot.
12 Add 50.d
13 Shot.
14 Add 25.
15 Shot.
16 Repeat.
17 Shot.
18 Drop 25.
19 Shot.
20 Record as registration point 1 at Add 10.t
21 Time Repeat."
22 Shot.h
23 Up 40.
24 Shot.
25 3 Rounds FFE.
26 Shot.
27 Rounds Complete.
28 Record as time registration point at
Down 10. End of Mission.
a Additional guns may be ordered/requested to verify the validity of the registration.
b Converge by SOP (Piece displacement).
e If the PEr is 25 meters or more, this will be reported to the observer.
dThe observer now obtains a verified 25m bracket or bracketing rounds unless a report has been made
from the FDC/CP that the PEr is in excess of 25m (see c. above) when a verified 50m bracket is used. A
verified bracket consists of two pairs of rounds fired at the same data or at data 25m apart bracketing
the registration point. A target hit or range correct spotting may be considered equivalent to a pair of
rounds at the same data bracketing the registration point. Corrections for deviation are made after the
split of the 50m bracket only when a shift is necessary to obtain positive range spottings. Deviation
corrections for rounds fired at the same data should be made with respect to their estimated mean point
of impact. When a deviation correction causes a second round at one end of a 25m bracket to be fired at
data different from the first round, an additional round should be fired at the new data to verify the
bracket.
e A verified 25m bracket has been established by observation on serials 12, 14, 16 and 18.
As the registration point is equidistant between the two pairs of rounds which established the 25m
bracket, the registration point is recorded at the mid-point. If it is found that the registration point lies
nearer the last pair of rounds fired, this data is recorded without command. If it is found that the
registration point lies nearer to the pair of rounds previously fired, this data is recordered by ordering
Add/or Drop 25, as appropriate. A final refinement in deviation may be made if necessary, to move the
mean point of impact of the adjusting rounds over the registration point.
9 On the order "Time Repeat," using the predicted fuze setting, a round is fired at the data recorded to
the registration point with the elevation increased by the equivalent of 20/R.
h The fuze length is adjusted by ordering corrections to the height of burst (HOB) until the mpb of
four rounds fired at the same data is 20 meters above the registration point. The rules for the adjustment
of the fuze are:
(1) If a groundburst is obtained, the HOB is raised 40 meters. This is repeated if necessary, until an
airburst is obtained.
(2) Three further rounds are then fired at the same data. If three airbursts are obtained the HOB of
the mpb of these three rounds and the previous round is assessed and a correction is ordered to bring the
HOB to the correct height, i.e., 20 meters. If two airburst and one groundburst are obtained, the HOB is
correct. If three groundburst are obtained, the HOB is correct at Up 20. If two groundburst and one/
airburst are obtained, the HOB is corerct at Up 10. Corrections to the HOB are ordered to the nearest 10
meters.

See footnotes at end of annex F.

B-13
FM 6-40

ANNEX G TO QSTAG-225
DESTRUCTION
SERIAL OBSERVER'S ORDERS REPORTS TO OBSERVER

1 Observer's identification.
2 Fire Mission (one gun).
3 Grid 723459 Altitude 120
4 Direction 1680
5 Stalled tank.
6 Destruction.
7 Adjust Fire.
8 Shot.a
9 Right 40, add 200.
10 Shot.
11 Drop 100
12 Shot.
13 Add 50.
14 Shot.
15 Drop 25.
16 Shot.
17 Repeat.
18 Shot.
19 Add 25.b
20 Shot.
21 Drop 10 3 rounds FFE 40 seconds.c
22 Shot.
23 Shot.
24 Shot.
25 Rounds complete.
26 Repeat.
27 Shot.
28 Shot.
29 Shot.
30 Rounds complete.
31 Repeat.
32 Shot.
33 Shot.
34 Shot.
35 Rounds complete.
36 End of Mission. Tank destroyed.
a If the PEr is 25 m or more this will be reported to the observer.
b A verified 25m bracket is obtained, unless the observer is informed that the PEr is in excess of 25m
when a verified 50m bracket is established.
c A group of rounds is ordered to be fired at the split of the bracket. If it is found that the target lies
nearer to one of the pair of rounds which established the bracket, FFE is opened at this data.
During FFE the observer makes any necessary correction to fire based on the observation of a previous
group or groups of rounds.
A report of shot will be made for each round fired.
The observer may specify the interval of time between each round in the group.

See footnotes at end of Annex G.

B-1 4
 FM 6-40

ANNEX H TO QSTAG-225
QUICK/DELIBERATE SMOKE
SERIAL OBSERVER'S ORDERS REPORTS TO OBSERVEiR
1 Observer's identification
2 Fire mission 5 guns.'
3 Grid 123456.b Altitude 120
4 Direction 1260.
5 Screening 4 minutes.'
6 Smoke in effect 10 rds.d
7 Linear 1000 attitude 1750.'
8 Adjust fire.
9 Shot.
10 Left 150, add 400.
11 Shot.
12 Drop 200.
13 Shot.
14 Smoke, add 100.
15 Shot.
16 Up 100.
17 Shot.
18 At my command (2 rds followed by 8 rds)
FFE (30 sec). t
19 Ready.
20 Fire.
21 Shot.
22 Rounds complete.
23 End of mission.
a Indication of number of guns required to take part and hence the number of points.
b Crid reference of the up-wind point. (Point 1). The adjusting gun is directed at this point.
e The observer's e3timate of the length of time screening if required.
d The observer's estimate of the total ammunition requirement. May be omitted by the US observer.,
e This indicates that five points with 200 meters between each point are required. The grid reference, or.
the point at which adjustment is finished, is always Point 1. Point 2 is 200 metres from Point 1 on the
indicated attitude of 1750 mils; point 3 is 200 meters from Point 2, etc. Guns engage the appropriately
numbered points. May be omitted in Quick Smoke Missions.
f Items in brackets may be omitted by the US observer. The interval is that required to provide a
continuous screen under prevailing conditions. At this point and throughout the FFE phase, the observer
may order/request a round of smoke or HE to be fired on one of the other points, or other changes as
necessary to maintain an effective smoke screen.

B-15
 FM 6-40

APPENDIX C
RADIO TELEPHONE PROCEDURES FOR THE CONDUCT OF
ARTILLERY FIRE
(QSTAG 246)

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION

C-1. Purpose
Radiotelephone Procedures for the Conduct of Artillery Fire has been prepared to describe the use of
radiotelephone procedures as it shall be employed for radiotelephone communications between Field Ar-
tillery Forward Observer and Field Artillery Fire Direction Centers.
C-2. Publications (Reserved for National References)
C-3. Phonetic Alphabet
When necessary to identify any letter of the alphabet, the standard phonetic alphabet shall be used. The
phonetic alphabet is published in ACP 125.
C-4. Pronunciationof Numerals
When numerals are transmitted by radiotelephone, the rules for pronunciation of numerals, published
in ACP 125, will be observed.
C-5. Precedence
Calls for fire will be considered equivalent to IMMEDIATE messages and will be accorded the considera-
tions of that precedence classification. Fire missions, once in progress, will be interrupted only by FLASH
messages.
FM =4

CHAPTER 2
APPLICATION
C-6. General
The radiotelephone procedure used for the adjustment of field artillery
fire deviates somewhat from communication procedures published in ACP
122 and ACP 125 in that abbreviated procedure is used in those instances
where no confusion will exist. The deviations normally ,consist of one or
more of the following:
a. Elimination of call signs (call words) after identities have been es-
tablished. Under certain circumstances, when identification is required,
transmissions are identified by the use of call sign suffix words, letters
or numbers only.
b. A short phrase read-back method of transmission is automatically
accomplished without the special operating instructions of "READ BACK".
c. Divergence from the normal or abbreviated normal message format.
Examples of radiotelephone procedures used for the adjustment of field ar-
tillery are given in the following articles.
C-7. Short PhraseRead-Back Procedures
a. To facilitate the transmission of firing data and to minimize requests
for repetitions which otherwise might be necessary, the call for fire, mes-
sage to observer, subsequent corrections and fire commands will, where ap-
plicable, be transmitted in short phrases consisting of one or more elements
of firing data.
b. Each phrase is read-back by the receiving operator, without operating
instructions to do so, exactly as it was received.
c. The length of each phrase, or the number of elements of firing data
included in each transmission should be commensurate with the state of
training and experience of the individuals concerned and established pro-
cedure.
Example 1-Preliminary Call. The Field Artillery Forward Observer
(FO) should make a preliminary call to the Fire Direction Centre (FDC) :
thereby establishing communication, before tranmitting the call for fire.
FO DARK ERRAND 18, THIS IS
DARK ERRAND 44, FIRE
MISSION, OVER
FDC DARK ERRAND 44, THIS IS
DARK ERRAND 18, FIRE
MISSION, OUT
Note. US call signs are used for illustrative purposes only. It is not the intention of
this document to indicate that the US call sign procedure is to be adcpted by the BCA
nations. Additionally, all examples are based on a US artillery battalion organization.
It is not the intention of this document to indicate that such organization be adopted
by the BCA nations.
Example 2-Call for Fire. Communication now established, the FO
continues with the call for fire.
FO FROM REGISTRATION POINT 1,
DIRECTION 5940, OVER
FDC FROM REGISTRATION POINT 1,
DIRECTION 5940, OUT
FO RIGHT 600, ADD 800,
UP 20, OVER
FDC RIGHT 600, ADD 800,
UP 20, OUT
FO COMPANY ASSEMBLING,
ADJUST FIRE, OVER

C-2
 FM 6-40

FDC COMPANY ASSEMBLING,

ADJUST FIRE, OUT
Explanation:
a. Voice call signs are dropped after communication has been established.
b. When there is an alternative means of communication or a separate
fire direction channel available to the observer, fire direction center, and
the firing battery(s), the transmission of call signs is unnecessary.
c. When radio is the only means of communication and a separate fire
direction channel is not available to the observer, fire direction center, and
the firing battery(s), or when communications are difficult or multiple
missions are being fired, the transmission of call sign suffix words, letters
is mandatory.
Example 3-Message to Observer
FDC BATTALION, BRAVO, 5 ROUNDS
TARGET AF 7214, OVER
FO BATTALION, BRAVO, 5 ROUNDS
TARGET AF 7214, OUT
Explanation:
Type of fuze to be fired is not announced by FDC to FO unless it differs
from that requested.
Example 4-Subsequent Corrections. Assume that the firing batteries
received their fire commands over another means of communication. The
adjusting battery has notified the FDC, SHOT.
FDC SHOT, OVER
FO SHOT, OUT
FO LEFT 100, DROP 400, OVER
FDC LEFT' 100, DROP 400, OUT
FDC SHOT, OVER
FO SHOT, OUT
FO ADD 200, OVER
FDC ADD 200, OUT
FDC SHOT, OVER
FO SHOT, OUT
FO ADD 100, OVER
FDC ADD 100, OUT
FDC SHOT, OVER
FO SHOT, OUT
FO DROP 50, FIRE FOR EFFECT, OVER
FDC DROP 50; FIRE FOR EFFECT', OUT
Example 5-Fire for Effect
FDC SHOT, OVER
FO SHOT, OUT
FDC ROUNDS COMPLETE, OVER
FO ROUNDS COMPLETE, OUT
Explanation:
The FDC notifies the FO when the guns begin firing for effect and when
they have completed firing for effect.
Example 6--End of Mission; Reporting Effect on Target
FO END OF MISSION, 50 CASUALTIES,
COMPANY DISPERSED, OVER
FDC END OF MISSION, 50 CASUALTIES,
COMPANY DISPERSED, OUT

C-3
FM 6-40

CHAPTER 3
SPECIAL APPLICATION
C-8. General
There are four instances of special application of the use of radiotelephone
in the adjusting of field artillery fire of sufficient note to warrant illus-
trating their use. The first is the use of a relay station between the Field
Artillery Forward Observer and the Fire Direction Center. The second
is the use of SPLASH. The third is radiotelephone procedure used in con-
ducting a simultaneous mission. The fourth is the transmission of fire
commands between the Fire Direction Center and the Firing Battery(s).
C-9. Relay Procedure
In circumstances where direct radio contact between the Forward Ob-
server and the Fire Direction Center cannot be established because of
distance, terrain, etc., and pending the availability of automatic retrans-
mission equipment, the following relay procedure is prescribed and will be
used by all concerned as applicable.
Example 7-Relay Procedure. Assume that direct radio contact cannot
be established between the FO and the FDC. However, for example, the
Artillery Liaison Officer (DARK ERRAND) is able to contact both the FO
and the FDC. Hearing no reply to the preliminary call, the Liaison Offi-
cer will, without instructions or request, transmit as follows:
LO DARK ERRAND 18, THIS IS DARK ERRAND 76,
FROM DARK ERRAND 64, FIRE MISSION, OVER
FDC DARK ERRAND 76, THIS IS DARK ERRAND 18,
FIRE MISSION, OUT
LO 76, OUT
Communication now established the FO continues with the call for fire.
To permit the originator to correct any mistake by the relay a pause of 5
seconds should be made between the relay station transmission and the
check back.
FO FROM REGISTRATION POINT 1
DIRECTION 940, RIGHT 600, OVER
LO 76, FROM REGISTRATION POINT 1,
DIRECTION 940, RIGHT 600, OVER
FDC FROM REGISTRATION POINT 1,
DIRECTION 940, RIGHT 600, OUT
LO 76, OUT
The mission will continue to be sent in this manner until all elements of
the call for fire have been received and read back by the FDC.
The relaying station reads back that portion of the call for fire request
transmitted by the FO and transmits the information to the FDC. The
suffix number of the relay station is retained to ensure that the originating
and receiving stations are not confused.
FDC BATTALION, BRAVO 5 ROUNDS,
TARGET BG 7112, OVER
LO 76, BATTALION, BRAVO 5 ROUNDS,
TARGET BG 7112, OVER
FO BATTALION, BRAVO 5 ROUNDS
TARGET BG 7112, OUT
LO 76, OUT
The mission continues to be sent, relayed and acknowledged in this manner
until it is completed.

C-4
 FM 6-40

Explanation:
The relay procedure described above illustrates the method employed by
an intermediate station in relaying a call for fire. The relay was accom-
plished without the aid of operating instructions, address designations,
etc. However, when necessary, the originating station will use whatever
transmission instructions are required to accomplish the mission.
Example 8-Correcting a Mistake During the Relay Procedure. If the
relay station answers back incorrectly, the originator immediately sends
"WRONG, OVER", which is answered back "76 WRONG, OVER". The
correct order is then sent, again preceded by "WRONG. " and there-
after the normal rules of correction procedure apply.
FDC BATTALION, BRAVO, 5 ROUNDS
TARGET BG 7112, OVER
LO 76, BATTALION, BRAVO, 5 ROUNDS
TARGET BG 7211, OVER
FDC WRONG, OVER
LO 76, WRONG OVER
FDC WRONG, BATTALION, BRAVO, 5 ROUNDS
TARGET BG 7112, OVER
LO 76, WRONG, BATTALION, BRAVO, 5 ROUNDS
TARGET BG 7112, OVER
FO WRONG BATTALION, BRAVO 5 ROUNDS
TARGET BG 7112, OUT
LO 76, OUT
Example 9-Correcting a Mistake by a Transmitting Operator.
If a transmitting operator makes an error, he transmits the proword
"CORRECTION" followed by the last word, group, proword or phrase
correctly transmitted. Transmission then continues.
FO RIGHT 100, ADD 200,
CORRECTION
RIGHT 100, DROP 200, OVER
LO 76, RIGHT 100, DROP 200, OVER
FDC RIGHT 100, DROP 200, OUT
LO 76, OUT
C-10. Splash.
In the circumstances where the warning "SPLASH" must be transmitted
to the Forward Observer the following radiotelephone procedure will apply.
Example 10-SPLASH Procedure. Assume that the FO has requested
"SPLASH" from the FDC. When the guns have been fired, the following
will be transmitted:
FDC SHOT OVER
FO SHOT, OUT
FDC SPLASH, OVER
SPLASH istransmitted 5 seconds prior to the burst of the
projectile.
FO SPLASH, OUT
FO LEFT 100, DROP 400, OVER
FDC LEFT 100, DROP 400, OUT
FDC SHOT, OVER
FO SHOT, OUT
FDC SPLASH, OVER
FO SPLASH, OUT
C-il. Simultaneous Missions
There are times when it becomes necessary to fire two or more missions
simultaneously on the same fire direction net. When this situation arises,

C-5
FM 6-40

it is necessary that stations identify their transmissions in order to avoid

confusion. The battalion fire direction center controls all simultaneous
missions. All stations, when sending or transmitting, use their own suffix
number. In the following example, the battalion fire direction center in-
dicates that Alpha Battery will fire for FO 1 (24) and that Bravo Battery
will fire for FO 2 (25). The transmissions will be made on Fire Direction
Net 1.
Interruptions should only be made in this procedure during a natural
pause. Such pauses are:
a. After the call for fire and before firing the first round.
b. After a report of shot, i.e., during the time of flight.
Example 11-Simultaneous Mission

FO 1 DARK ERRAND 18, THIS IS DARK ERRAND 24,

FIRE MISSION, OVER
BN FDC DARK ERRAND 24, THIS IS DARK ERRAND 18,
FIRE MISSION, 29 AVAILABLE, OVER
FO 1 29 AVAILABLE, OUT
FO 1 DARK ERRAND 29, THIS IS DARK ERRAND 24,
FIRE MISSION, OVER
'A' FDC DARK ERRAND, 24, THIS IS DARK ERRAND 29,
FIRE MISSION, OUT
FO 1 GRID 432181, DIRECTION 800, OVER
'A' FDC GRID 432181, DIRECTION 800, OVER
FO 1 TWO MGs FIRING, VT ADJUST FIRE, OVER
'A' FDC TWO MGs FIRING, VT ADJUST FIRE, OUT
'A' FDC ALPHA, 5 ROUNDS, TARGET BJ 7829, OVER
FO 1 ALPHA, 5 ROUNDS, TARGET BJ 7829, OUT
'A' FDC SHOT, OVER
FO 1 SHOT, OUT
FO 2 DARK ERRAND 18, THIS IS DARK ERRAND 25,
FIRE MISSION, OVER
BN FDC DARK ERRAND 25, THIS IS DARK ERRAND 18,
FIRE MISSION, 49 AVAILABLE, OVER
FO 2 25, 49 AVAILABLE, OUT
FO 2 DARK ERRAND 49, THIS IS DARK ERRAND 25,
FIRE MISSION OVER
'B' FDC DARK ERRAND 25, THIS IS DARK ERRAND 49,
FIRE MISSION, OUT
FO 2 25, GRID 422189, DIRECTION 980, SURVEY
PARTY IN OPEN
ADJUST FIRE, OVER
'B' FDC 49, GRID 422189, DIRECTION 980, SURVEY
PARTY IN OPEN, ADJUST FIRE, OUT
FO 1 24, RIGHT 100, DROP 200, OVER
'A' FDC 29, RIGHT 100, DROP 200, OUT
'B' FDC 49, BRAVO, 3 ROUNDS, TARGET BJ 7716, OVER
FO 2 25, BRAVO, 3 ROUNDS, TARGET BJ 7716, OUT
FO 1 24, ADD 100, OVER
'A' FDC 29, SHOT, OVER
FO 1 24, SHOT, OUT
FO 2 25, LEFT 50, ADD 100, OVER
'B' FDC 49, LEFT 50, ADD 100, OVER
'B' FDC 49, SHOT, OVER
FO 2 25, SHOT, OUT

C-.6
 FM 6-40

Explanation:
The missions continue in this manner until one firing unit has completed
its task. Thereafter, suffix numbers are omitted.
C-12. Fire Commands.
(Fire Commands between the fire direction center and the firing batteries
-national procedures).

C-7
 FM 6-40

INDEX

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

ABCA Precision fire------------- 13-29- 13-15, Description and schematic dia-

13-22, 19-21 gram----------------------3-4 3-3
19-42. Determining instrument direction 4-22 4-17
Absolute calibration------------- 22-1, 21-1, Distances from metallic ob-
22-2, 21-9 jects 3-4 3-3
22-11 Reciprocal laying - -- 4-3 4-2
Absolute V5, computation----------22-22 22-9 Measuring azimuth to a point __ 4-23 4-17
Accidents, firing battery ---- 5-23 5-9 Orientation - --- 4-2 4-1
Accuracies, target location by obser- Aiming point and deflection 4-7 4-6
ver 8-2 8-1 Aiming point, distant --- 3-3 3-2
Accuracy requirements, firing battery 5-4 5-1 Aiming posts:
Adjust, definition-----------------4-30 4-21 Accuracy requirement --- 5-4 5-2
Adjust fire----------------------9-8 9-3 Deflections by caliber weapon __-4-4 4-4
Adjusted azimuth: (See correct azi- Description - --- 3-3 3-2
muth) Distances for placement 4-4 4-4
Adjusted deflection: Airbursts:
Determination with base piece dis- Appearance -- -10-3 10-1
placement------------------20-12 20-6 Effect with fuze delay
Registration with more than one (ricochet) -- 27-7 27-3
lot------------------------19-41 19-21 Effect with fuze time 27-7 27-3
Adjusted elevation: Effect with fuze VT 27-7 27-3
Mean point of impact and high Air density 2-24 2-16
burst registrations----------19-34 19-14 Air observer:
Computation ----------------- 19-14 19-5 Adjustment of fire 12-11 L 12-3
)
Adjusted time--------------------19-19 19-8 Adjustment procedures -- 12-1( 2 12-3
Adjusting point-------------------10-2 10-1 FFE 12-12 12-3
Adjusting point, auxiliary---------13-22 13-11 Initial data 12-6 7 12-1
Adjustment: Missions, FDC procedure 18-11 18-10
Assault Fire-----------------13-10 13-8 Preflight preparations 12-4 12-1
Combined 24-27 24-10 Air resistance, factors affecting 2-25 2-16
FFE after-------------------11-6 11-2 Air temperature------------------2-10, 2-9,
Gun-target line method--------13-25 13-11 2-25 2-16
Height of burst--------------10-12 10-8 Aircraft, laying --- 4-8 4-6
High-angle fire---------------13-21 13-11 Altitude -- 2-4 2-1
Adjustment of: Ammunition:
Artillery fire------------------10-1 10-1 Care and handling 5-9 5-6
Fire, air observer-------------12-1, 12-1, Components of complete round 1-10 1-5
12-10 12-3 Field storage 5-21 5-9
Fire by sound 13-26 13-11 For assault fire 13-7 13-7
Illuminating shell 13-4 13-4 For attack of armor targets 27-7 27-7
Long-range artillery 12-3 12-1 For illumination 13-4 13-3
Range, bracketing 10-9, 10-5, Fuze 1-14, 1-5,
10-11 10-6 5-14 5-7
Range, spottings--------------10-1( D 10-5 Primer 1-11, 1-5,
Smoke base ejection, FDC 24-6 24-2 5-15 5-8
Adjustment phase: Projectile 1-13, 1-5,
Area------------------------10-2 10-1 5-11 5-6
Precision registration----------19-5 19-1 Propelling charge 1-12, 1-5,
Adjustment procedure: 5-12 5-6
Air observer-----------------12-1. 9 12-1, Rate of consumption 27-6 27-2
12-10,
12-11 12-3 Replacing in containers 5-19 5-8
10-11 12-3 Types - ----- 1-10 1-5
Use of bracket 10-6 Ammunition lot and charge, fire
10-1 10-1 18-2
When to adjust order element --- 18-5
Aiming circle: Ammunition lot:
Common mistakes 5-10 Fire command 4-33 4-21
5-26

Index-I
FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Registration with more than FFE - 13-11 13-8
one ----------------------- 19-41 19-21 Initial data - 13-9 13-7
Ammunition lots: Mission example 14-7 14-9
Manufacturing specifications-_ 2-8 2-4 Preparatory operations 13-6 13-7
Record ------ -------------- 4-33 4-21 Procedure 4-51 4-28
Segregation ------------------ 5-18 5-8 Assurance and assurance graphs 2-45 2-28
Ammunition, separate loading: Assurance, SSHP 2-45 2-28
Positioning of propellant in the Atmosphere, standard 2-19 2-13
chamber -.... 2-9 2-6 At my command:
Angle: Control element of call for fire '9-8 9-3
Method of fire 4-24
2-15 12-10
Fall -- -4-37
Fall, effect on VT fuze -------- 10-4 LO-1 Attack of target. (See target, attack)
2
Impact 2-15 -10 Augmentation of map data 7-8 7-2
1
Measurement by target grid ___ 16-19 L6-8 Auxiliary adjusting point - 13-22 13-11
2
Site - -- 2-14 2)-10 Axial observer in high-burst regis-
Site, complementary 2-14 .-10 tration 4-27 4-20
Site, computation---------- 17-6 17-1 Azimuth:
Site to crest, measuring ---- 4-10 4-10 B ack ----------------------- 3-2 3-1
Yaw ---- 2-25 2-16 Correction for error in bore-
Angles, measurement: sighting 4-24 4-17
By hand------------------ 8-4 8-2 Definition - 3-2 3-1
With panoramic telescope -- 3-5 3-3 Indexes (Range-deflection pro-
Angle T: tractor) --- 16-16 16-6
Determination in precision regis- Measuring correct (by execu-
tration --- 19-6 19-2 tive) - - --- 4-20 4-16
Determination without firing Reporting correct (by executive) 4-19 4-16
chart 24-67 24-41 Shift --- 4-6 4-5
Effect when large----------- 10-8 10-5 Azimuth to a point, measuring 4-23 4-17
Effect when small -- 10-8 10-5
18-11 18-6 Back-azimuth 3-2
Measuring and announcing
Announcement of numbers - 4-28 4-20 Ballistic coefficient -- 2-25 2-17
Antitank shell (HEP)----- 1-13 1-5 Ballistics:
Definition 2-6, 2-3,
Apex angle:
Determination from two deflec- 2-10 2-9
tions 4-11 4-10 Exterior 2-10 2-9
Target area base 13-17 13-9 Interior - - 2-6 2-3
Appearance of bursts------ 10-3 10-1 Measurable nonstandard condi-
Application of special corrections, tions 2-19 2-13
example 23-9 23-7 Bands, rotating (velocity dis-
11-6 11-2 persion)-- - 2-9 2-6
Area fire, FFE-----------------
Area fire, mission, example------- 14-4 14-4 Barrel curvature 2-25 2-17
4-45 4-26 Base ejection projectile 1-13 1-6
Arm signals--------------------
Arming time, VT fuzes ---- 4-13 4-12 Base of trajectory 2-13 2-10
Armor: Base piece- -- 3-3 3-1
Ammunition for attacking --- 27-7, 27-2, Base piece displacement, cor-
30-2 30-1 rections- - -- -- 20-12 20-6
Employed in a field artillery mis- Battalion:
sion 30-1 to 30-1 FDC, personnel --------.---- 15-7 to 15-2
30-6 15-14
Fire order ------------------- 18-5 18-1
Artillery:
1-2 S2, duties-- 15-6 15-2
Characteristics and capabilities- 1-9
1-1 S3, d u ties -___ 15-8 15-2
Emplacement-----------------1-5
1-2 Battalion observed firing chart. (See
Employment, principles - 1-7
27-2 observed firing chart. battalion).
Projectiles, lethality-----------27-7
Targets, methods of attack 27-2 27-1 Battery:
Types-----------------------1-8 1-2 Center 3-3 3-1
Units, standards of proficiency - 28-12 28-5 Executive, duties--------------5-6 5-2
Artillery fire, accuracy and speed Executive, records and data
standards----------------------28-10 28-4 checked 5-8 5-3
Assault fire: Executive, report 4-17 4-15
Adjustment ------------------ 13-10 13-8 Observed firing chart. (See ob-
Ammunition------------------13-7 13-7 served firing chart, battery.)
13-7 Reciprocal laying 4-3 4-2
Conduct of-------------------13-6 -
24-8 Battlefield illumination - 13-3 13-3
FDC procedures--------------24-22 --

Index-2
 FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Bias targets (SSHP) ------------ 2-43 2-27 Trajectory 10-19 10-10

Book: Type of projectile-------------10-22 10-10
Gun--------------- 5-8 5-3 Characteristics of field artillery
Weapon record 5-8 5-3 weapons-----------------------1-9 1-2
Boresighting: Charge--------------------------17-2 17-1
Correction for after registra- Fire command----------------4-28 4-28
tion 4-24 4-17 Propelling ------------------- 1-12 1-5
Definition --- 5-5 5-2 Selection in attacking a target _ 27-7 27-2
Bracket, use- - 10-11 10-6 Selection in high-angle fire- 25-5 25-2
Bracketing - - --- 10-11 10-6 Charges:
Burst, height of, adjustment ......... 10-12 10-8 Correlation between------------2-9 2-4
Burst, point 2-15 2-10 Range overlap between---------2-8 2-4
Bursts: Chart:
Air, effect 27-7 27-2 Dead space 24-37 24-15
Appearance 10-3 10-1 Observed firing 26-1 to 26-1
Distribution 2-5 2-1 6-34
Im pact, effect ---------------- 27-7 27-2 S-3-------------------------16-2( 6 16-14
Ricochet, effect 27-7 27-2 Chart data:
By piece at my command ......... 4-37 4-24 Illuminating projectile---------24-9 24-3
C, change in elevation without firing Mean-point of impact and HB
chart ---- 24-67 24-41 registration ---------------- 19-3:3 19-33
CP fuze----------------------- 10-4, 10-1, Recording--------------------18-1( 0. 18-6
27-7 27-2 Chart deflection, determination -- 16-2,4 16-14
CVT fuzes. (See variable time fuzes.) Chart range, determination---------16-244 16-14
Caliber, field artillery weapons- 1-8 1-2 Charts, firing. (See firing charts.)
Calibration: Check firing:
Absolute fall of shot----------22-20 22-9 Signals----------------------4-45 4-26
Adjustment of ranges for differ- Chemical projectiles---------------24-3, 9 24-1,
ences in altitude------------22-14 22-6 2.7-7 27-2
Comparative calibration by bat- Burster type---------------- 1-13 1-5
tery-----------------------22-19 22-8 Care and handling 5-17 5-8
Comparative, fall of shot --- 22-11 to 22-4 ChRef fire direction computer, duties 15-9 15-2
22-18 Chronographs 22-8 22-2
Frequency ------------------- 22-4 22-1 Circle, aiming. (See aiming circle.)
Grouping of pieces after--------22-9 22-3 Classification, field artillery
Heavy artillery ------ 22-6 22-2 weapons 1-8 1-2
New Weapons----------------22-4 22-1 Coefficient, ballistic 2-25 2-17
Ordnance support-------------22-4 22-1 Coefficient change, ballistic (BCC) -- 2-25 2-17
Selection of standard piece ---- 22-15 22-7 Collimator, infinity- - --- 3-3 3-2
Tube conditioning-------------22-9 22-3 Colored smoke burst, appearance 10-3 10-1
Types-----------------------22-1 22-1 Combined adjustment 13-12 13-8
Calibration corrections: FDC procedure, OP's plotted 24-28 24-11
Application ------------------ 22-4 22-1 Combined observation:
For individual pieces of a bat- Mean point impact and HB regi-
tery, example---------------22-10 22-3 stration ------------------- 13-16, 13-9
13-17
Calls for fire: Conduct of fire - -13-12 13-8
Corrections ------------------ 9-109 9-5, Equipment 13-13 13-8
10-6 10-3
Other missions -13-16 13-9
From higher headquarters ---- 9-11 9-5
Sequence of elements - 9-1 Commands, fire:
9-1
10-10 Common mistakes in execution 5-25 5-9
Subsequent 10-17
9-8 Correction ------- 4-49 4-27
Cannot observe 9-3
1-2 Examples 4-41 4-26
Capabilities of field artillery weapons 1-9 4-20
Initial fire 4-28
Card, safety 6-5 6-2 4-26
Repetition 4-44
Cartridge cases, care and handling -- 5-13 5-7 S'equence 42 4-21
3-2 seune-------------------- 4-29
Center, battery 3-3
Common errors and malpractices,
Center of sector, marking rounds 8-8 8-7 18-17
FDC 18-28
Change: Common mistakes and malpractices,
Control 10-27 10-11 FB --------- 5-24- 5-9
Distribution 10-21 10-10 5-27
Fuze 10-23 10-10 Communitcation:
Method of fire 10-20 10-10 Fire direction 18-26, 18-13
OT direction 10-18 10-10 18-27

Index-3
FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Intrrtbattery and voice 4-44 4-26 Target location-------------- 8-5 8-2

18-26 18-13 Coppering ---- 2-9 2-7
Radio, fire direction
Wire, fire direction 18-27 18-13 Correct deflection, precision regi-
22-1, 22-1, stration, FFE------------ 19-10, 19-2,
Comparative cailbration 19-11 19-3
22-19 22-8
Comparative calibration, fall of shot. Correct azimuth:
(See calibration, comparative, fall Correction for error in bore-
sight-------------------- 4-24 4-17
of shot.) 4-16
Measuring by executive------- 4-20
Comparative VE: 4-19 4-16
Correction for propellant tem- Reporting by executive-------
perature variation 22- 17 22-7 Corrections:
Determination 22- 16 22-7 Application:
Calibration 22-24 22-11
Determination of, example 15- 9 15-2
Met and VE------------- 21-15 21-11
Compass M2 laying for direction by 20-2 20-1
grid azimuth-------------------4-7 4-6 Registration
Ballistics 2-10 2-10
Complementary angle of site (comp 20-3 20-1
site)--------------------------2-14 4, 2-10, Base piece displacement -
17-6 17-1 By observer 10-6 10-3
Complementary range 2-14 2-10 Calibration, computation, and
17-6 application --- 23-1 23-1
Comp site - 17-1
Call for fire, errors in 9-10 9-5
Computer: 2-6
Duties 15-10 15-3 Change in weight of projectile -_ 2-9
5-20 5-8
Duties during high-angle fire 25-13 25-6 Data for computation
Computer, chief fire direction -- 15-9 15-2 Deflection:
Computer's record, example using Determination for high-angle
18-14 fire 25-7 25-2
fuze time 18-28
Met 21-14 21-10
Concrete piercing fuze ---- 27-7 27-2
20-12 20-6
Conditioning of tube 2-9 2-4 Registration ---
Outside transfer limits -- 21-14 21-10
Conditions, nonstandard, determina-
tion 2-24, 2-16, Determination with respect to
20-1 GT line------------------ 24-69 24-41
20-1
Deviation 10-8 10-5
Conduct of fire: 9-5,
Absolute calibration------------22-22 22-9 Errors-----------------------9-10,
10-29 10-11
Assault fire------------------13-6 13-7 4-27
Combined observation----------13-12 13-8 Fire commands---------------4-49
20-5 20-3
Comparative calibration 22-11 22-2 Fuze total after registration
10-26
10-10
Gas projectile----------------13-2 13-1 Height of burst -----
21-3
Illuminating projectile---------13-4 13-3 Met-------------------------21-8
21-12
Observer not oriented----------13-23 13-11 Met, experience---------------21-19
2-4
Searchlight illumination--------13-5 13-6 Nonstandard conditions--------2-9
20-1
Smoke projectile--------------13-2 13-1 Range, determination-----------20-3
21-7 21-3
Continuous fire-------------------4-37 4-24 Range total
20-1 20-1
Control, call for fire--------------9-8 9-3 Registration
10-11 Scale, deflection (construc-
Control change-------------------10-27 20-7
tion of)----------------20-15
Control chart:
16-12 Site by observer, assault
Horizontal_-------------------16-20 13-7
16-20 16-12 fire - ------ 13-9
Vertical ---------------------
Control lot----------------------2-8 2-4 Special. (See special correc-
tions.)
Control operator: 2-14
15-11 15-3 Unit -------------------- 2-21
Horizontal ------------------- 21-9
15-3 Velocity error, application 21-11
Vertical_---------------------15-12
Converged sheaf------------------2-5 2-2 Velocity error, propellant
22-7
Opening by individual shifts 4-7 4-6 temperature variation --- 22-17 24-11
Conversion: Counterbattery radar--------------24-31
17-7 17-2 Counterbattery radar, FDC proce-
Yards to meters (GFT) - 24-32
24-12
17-7 17-2 dure- -------------------------
Yards to meters (GST)
Creeping (adjusting close to friendly
Conversion of data for direction, forces)-----------------------10-11
10-6
4-5
executive's procedure------------4-6
Crest: 4-10,
Coordinate scale:
Measuring and plotting---------16-8 16-2 Determination of MQE 4-12, 4-12
16-2 4-14
Use of----------------------16-8 4-10 4-10
Measuring angle of site 4-10
Coordinates: 4-11
Measuring range
Determination of (coordinate 2-25 2-16
8-2 Curvature, barrel---------------
scale)8---------------------5

Index-4
 FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Curvature of earth, effect on pro- Density, air----------------------2-25 2-16

jectile --- 2-25 2-18 Departure, line-------------------2-14 2-10
Curve, normal probability ......... 2-33 2-21 Description of target--------------9-6 9-2
Destruction mission-FDC
Data, firing -.... 2-1 procedure----------------------11-4, 11-1,
p
Data for replot: 24-24 24-9
High-angle fire---------------25-11 25-4 5-7
Detonation, premature-------------5-14
Low-angle fire----------------20-17 20-9 10-5
Deviation corrections--------------10-8
Data sheets, section---------------24-41 24-17
Deviation spottings:
Dead space: Air observer-----------------12-11 12-3
Chart-----------------------24-40 24-16 10-3
Ground observer--------------10-7
Determination ---- 24-39 24-16
Diagram:
Limits ------- 24-38 24-15 6-2
Safety-----------------------6-6
Profile-----------------------24-37 24-15 6-6
Safety stake------------------6-14
Declination constant---------------3-2 3-1 7-3
Visibility -------------------- 7-8
Deflection------------------------33 3-3 4-28
Direct fire ------- 4-52
Adjusted---------------------20-12 20-6
Direct illumination, searchlight
Base piece displacement correc- mission------------------------13-5 13-6
tion_----------------------20-3 20-1 3-3
Direct laying---------------------3-3
Chart, determination-----------16-24 16-14
Direction:
Computer's determination ------ 19-11 19-3 2-1
Definition--------------------2-2
Correct----------------------19-10 19-2 4-25
Fire command----------------4-38
Correct, reporting-------------4-18 4-16 4-16
Of fire, measuring the azimuth __ 4-20
Correction, announced in initial Verifying laying--------------4-5 4-4
fire command---------------4-38 4-25
Dispersion:
Correction for error in boresight 4-24 4-17 2-19
and probability---------------2-28
Correction, high-angle fire------25-7 25-2 2-22
Deflection probable error-------2-36
Corrections, registration, total - 21-11 21-9 2-20
Deflection zones---------------2-32
Difference, use and computation 4-26 4-20 2-22
Fork------------------------2-35
Difference (fire command) ------ 4-38 4-25 Pattern----------------------2-31 2-20
Dispersion zones--------------2-32 2-20 2-21
Probability curve-------------2-33
Effects of exterior ballistics --- 2-26 2-19 2-22
Range probable error----------2-34
FFE phase of precision registra- Range zones------------------2-32 2-20
tion-----------------------19-11 19-3 2-20
Rectangle--------------------2-32
Fire command----------------4-38 4-25 2-32 2-20
Scale ----
Firing data------------------17-3 17-1 Scale, use--------------------2-32 2-20
High-angle fire----------------25-7 25-2 2-4
Velocity---------------------2-9
Limits, safety diagram---------6-10 6-3 Vertical probable error---------2-37 2-23
Limits, high-angle fire safety Displacement, base piece, cor-
diagram ------------------- 6-13 6-5 20-1
rections------------------------20-3
Mean 2-29 2-20 Distance, determination by:
Outside transfer limits---------.1-12 21-9 Air observer-----------------12-9 12-2
Probable error----------------2-36 2-22 Computation ----------------- 8-3 8-1
Referred, for each caliber Estimation-------------------8-3 8-1
weapon--------------------4-4 4-4 Distant aiming point, use----------3-3 3-2
Special corrections-------------23-8 23-7 Distribution (element of fire order) - 18-5 18-1
Deflection board------------------4-51 4-28 Distribution, change ----- 10-21 10-10
Deflection correction scale: Distribution:
Differences in drift------------20-13 20-6 Bursts-----------------------2-5 2-1
GFT------------------------20-14 20-7 Fire on a target--------------11-7 11-2
GFT fan---------------------20-15 20-8 Pieces-----------------------4-36, 4-24
Met-------------------------21-14 21-10 22-23 22-11
Deflection index: Do not load (method of fire) 4-37 4-24
Construction ----------------- 16-22 16-12 Drag 2-25 2-16
Supplementary, construction --- 16-22 16-13 Drag coefficient 2-25 2-16
Deflection shift card, assault fire --- 24-22 24-8 Drift:
Deflections for placement of aiming 20-7
Deflection correction scale 20-14
posts--------------4-4 4-4 2-19
Effect on deflection 2-26
Delay fuze: 25-2
Effect of an air burst (ricochet) 10-3, High-angle fire 25-7
- 10-1, 2-16
Droop, muzzle 2-25
27-7 27-3
Mine action 10-3, 10-1, Earth curvature, effect on
27-3 projectile--------------------- 2-25 2-18
27-7
Ricochet action 10-3, 10-1, Earth, rotation:
10-9 Effect on deflection 2-26 2-19
10-15

Index-5
FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

0
Effect on range ------------- 2-26 2-19 Experience corrections---------- 21-17, 21-12,
Effects: 21-21 21-13
Air density---------------- 2-25 2-16 Exterior ballistics-----------------2-10 2-9
Ballistic coefficient- -- 2-25 2-17
2-25 2-18 FDC (See fire direction center.)
Curvature of earth ----- 10-8 10-5
2-26 2-19 Factor, OT--------------------
Deflection 8-4
2-26 2-19 Factor, sine---------------------8-6
Drift
2-16 Fall:
D roop ----------------------- 2-25 2-10
2-26 2-19 Angle----------------------2-15
Lateral jump-....... 2-10
2-26 2-19 Line------------------------2-15
Lateral wind -........ 7-2
Fan, observed fire--------------- 7-8
M uzzle velocity ---------------- 2-25 2-16
Nonstandard air temperature - 2-24 2-16 Field artillery:
Fire power----------------- 1-7 1-2
Range .------------------------ 2-25 2-17 1-1 r-
2-25 2-17 Gunnery team------------- 1-6
Range wind------------------- 7-1
Rotation of earth 2-25 2-18 Observation---------------- 7-1
Weapons, caliber------------ 1-8 1-2
Time of flight 2-27 2-19
Weight of projectile--------- 2-25 2-16 Weapons, characteristics and
capabilities --------------- 1-9 1-2
Elements of calls for fire ..... 9-1 9-1 5-9
Elevating the tube 5-4 5-2 Field storage of ammunition--------5-21
Final protective fires--------------4-46, 4-27,
Elevation: 24-9
5-4 5-1 24-25
Accuracy requirement
Adjusted --- 19-34 19-14 Fire:
Area 11-5 11-2
Adjusted, computation 19-14 19-5 24-21 24-8
FFE phase of precision registra- Assault
At my command------------- 4-37 4-24
tion 1-9-13 19-4 4-37 4-24
Firing data 17-5 17-1 At will---------------------
Continuous 4-37 4-24
Illuminating projectile ........ 24-12 24-5 24-23 24-9
Line of 2-14 2-10 Destruction ----
Direct 1-5, 1-1,
Maximum (low angle) ......... 6-9 6-3 4-52 4-28
Minimum quadrant ........... 4-9, 4-10, 4-37 4-24
6-7 6-2 Do not load-----------------
FPF----------------------- 4-46, 4-26,
Quadrant 2-14, 2-10, 24-25 24-9
4-40 4-25 27-3 27-2
Elevation gagelines, construction 20-7 20-3 Harassing------------------
High angle----------------- 13-18, 13-10,
Employment of fire power ---.-- 1-7 1-2 25-1 25-1
End of mission --- 4-43 4-26 1-1
Entry range -- -- -- 21-7 21-3 Indirect----------------------1-1 27-2
Equipment, plotting 16-8 Intensityo------------------- 27-6
16-2 27-2
Erosion------------------------ 2-9 2-5 Interdiction------------------27-3
Massed - -1-7 1-1
Error, probable. (See probable error.) 27-2
Errors, correction 9-52 Maximum rates---------------27-6
9-10, 10-10
10-29 10-11 Method, change---------------10-20
Methods -- ------ -- - 4-37 4-23
Execution of fire commands, common 27-2
59 Neutralization --------------- 27-3
mistakes-----------------------5-25 5-2 Precision -------------------- 11-1 11-1
Executive's command post----------5-6 5-2 Results desired---------------27-3 27-2
Executive's high burst (site by -4-37 4-23
4-19 Shifting
firing)-------------------------4-25 4-26
Executive's report------------- 4-17 4-15 Signal -4-45
Transfer of, high angle--------25-12 25-6
Executive: 24-17
Checks settings during firing - 4-48 4-27 Fire capabilities overlay-----------24-42
Conversion of data for Fire commands:
Common mistakes in execution _ 5-25 5-9
direction-------------------4-6 4-5
4-49 4-27
Correcting fire commands-------4-49 4-27 Correction -------------------
Determination of MQE with Determining and announcing
from chart data------------18-8 18-4
MQE card-----------------4-15 4-14
Examples -------- 4-41 4-26
Duties ---------------------- 5-6 5-2
Preliminary------------------18-7 18-4
Measuring the azimuth---------4-20 4-16
Purpose of------------------4-28 4-20
Measuring the orienting angle ._ 4-21 4-16
Recording by computer---------18-22 18-12
Reporting corrected azimuth - 4-19 4-16
- 4-44 4-26
Reporting corrected deflection - 4-18 4-16 Repetition --
4-29 4-21
Reports made-----------------4-47 4-2.7 Sequenceo-------------------
Training and operation of firing Fire direction:
battery -------------------- 5-1 5-1 Battery procedures------------18-23, 9 18-12,
Verifying laying of guns-------4-5 4-4 to 18- 25 18-13

Index-6
 FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Command 15-3 15-1 Recording--------------------18-6 18-4

18-12
Communication 18-26 18-13 Firing, report to battalion S2-------18-21
Principles -__ -- 15-2, 15-1 Firing battery:
5-9
15-5 Accidents---------------------5-23 5-1
15-1 15-1 Accuracy requirements---------5-4 3-2
Tactical and technical ----
1-6, 1-1, Common terms----------------3-3
Fire direction center------------- 24-17
15-4 15-1 Data sheet-------------------24-41 5-2
Charts 16-26 16-14 Equipment checks-------------5-5 5-2
15-9 15-2 Operation--------------------5-6
Chief fire direction computer -. ---------------- 1 3-1
Common errors and Organization- 4-1
-- 18-29 18-17 Procedures-------------------4-1 1-1
malpractices
18-26 18-13 Purpose_---------------------1-6
Communication --- 5-3
Equipment 16-27 16-15 Recorder's duties--------------5-7 5-3
18-5 18-1 Recorder's sheets_------------5-7 5-3
Fire order--------------------- 5-8
18-21 18-12 Recorders and data maintained 5-3
Firing, report of battalion S2 -- Section data sheets------------5-8
18-2 18-1 5-1
Organization --- Training_--------------------5-2
15-7 15-2
Personnel, battalion---------- Firing charts:
Personnel, duties in high-angle 24-41
25-13 25-6 Firing without----------------24-65 24-41
fire 24-67
18-4 18-1 Initial ---------------------- 16-1
Plotting target locations Maps- ----------------------- 16-2
Principles of operation------- 15-5 15-1 26-1
Observed -------------------- 26-1
Procedure during adjustment of 16-1
24-3, 24-1 Purpose----------------------16-5 16-12
smoke base ejection---------
24-5 Preparation------------------16-22 16-8,
24-8 Radar-----------------------16-17,
Procedure for assault fire 24-21 26-12
26-34 6-1
Procedure for illuminating
projectile_------------------24-9 24-3 Surveyed 16-6 6-1
Types 16-6
Procedure for high-angle fire -- 25-1 25-1 16-23 16-13
6400-mil capability
Procedure for missions by air
observer 18-17 18-10 Firing data:
Determination without a firing 24-65 24-41,
Fire direction center: chart -....
Procedure in destruction 24-67 24-41
mission--------------------24-23 24-9 17-1 17-1
Procedure in time on target General 24-12, 24-4,
18-11 Illuminating projectile 24-4
mission--------------------18-20 24-13
18-15 1 R-R
Procedure using time fuze 19-13
Procedure using VT fuze 18-16 18-9 High-burst registration----------31 19-13
Procedures for propaganda Mean point of impact-----------19-31
projectile ------------------ 24-19 24-8 Firing tables: 2-15
Procedures for targets located Extracting data from.----------2-22 2-13
by sound, flash or radar 24-29 24-11 Purpose.---------------------2-20 2-14
Records----------------------18-22 18-12 Unit corrections---------------2-21 4-6
Spottings, FFE phase of pre- Flare, laying--------------------4-8 24-11
cision registration 19-8 19-2 Flash ranging-------------------24-31 24-12
Fire direction computer -15-10 15-3 FDC procedure-----------------24-33 5-8
Fire for effect: Flash reducers, care and handling -- 5-16 8-1
Assault fire 13-6 13-7 Flash to bang-------------------8-3
FDC procedure - 18-12 18-6 Fork: 2-22
General----------------------11-1 11-1 Definition.--------------------2-35
Observer adjusted mission -- 11-6 11-2 FFE phase of precision 19-4
Precision registration----------11-2, 11-1 registration------------------19-12
11-3 Forward observer. (See observer.)
Surveillance -..... - 11-8 11-2 Friendly troops, firing close to by 10-6
observer- ---------------------- 11
Fire missions: 8 9-7 9-2
18-14 Fuze action, calls for fire -----------
Communication procedure-------18-213 21-12
18-8 Experience-------------------21-20
Multiple---------------------18-1! 1:8 21-18 21-12
28-11 28-4 Meteorological, computation of
Observer adjustment, phases ---
20-15 20-7
18-14 Total
Sample mission---------------18-2E 4-23
Sequence of processing thru Fuze, fire command---------------4-35 1-5
FDC ---------------------- 18-5 18-1 Fuze interchangeability chart -- 1-10
Fire order: Fuze setting: 17-1
18-4 Computer's determination - -- 17-4
Announcing------------------18-6 4-25
18-1 Fire command----------------4-39
Elements---------------------18-5 24-4
25-1 Illuminating projectile---------24-12
High-angle fire----------------25-3

Index-7
FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragra]phs Page

Minimum, safety officer's HE bursts, effects -10-3 10-1
determination 6-8 6-2 HE projectile--------------------1-13 1-5
Fuzes: For use with VT fuze 5-11 5-6
Care and handling - 5-14 5-17 Hand measurement of angles-------8-4 8-2
Change in, subsequent Harassing fire-------------------27-3 27-2
spottings 10-23 10-10 Heavy artillery-------------------1-8 1-2
Concrete piercing 27-7 27-3 Calibration ------------------ 22-6 22-2
Delay - 10-4, 10-2, Computation of data for safety66
10-15 10-9 limits---------------------6-6 6-2
Employment according to type Wear tables ------ 22-5 22-1
target 10-3, 10-1, Height of burst:
27-2 27-1 Adjustment ... -10-12
--- 10-8
High-angle fire- --- 25-6 25-2 Corrections ------------------ 10-26 10-10 r
Impact 1-14 1-5 Corrections for illuminating
Interchangeability - ---- 1-14 1-5 projectile-------------------24-15 24-5
Quick---------------------- 10-4 10-3 Delay fuze-------------------10-15 10-9 A
Quick, effect of impact -- 27-7 27-3 Probable error----------------2-28 2-22
Quick, replotting of targets Spottings--------------------10-13 10-9
attacked 20-18 20-9 VT fuze -------- 10-16 10-9
Time 1-14, 1-5, High-angle fire:
10-4 10-1 Adjustment 13-18 13-10
Types 1-14 1-5 Charge 25-5 25-2
VT. (See Variable time fuze.)-_ 1-14, 1-5, Data for replot - 25-11 25-4
10-4 10-1 Deflection 25-7 25-2
Gagelines, elevation and time 20-7
------ 20-3 Determination of safety limits 6-13 6-5
Gas projectiles: Employment 13-18 13-10
Care and handling------------5-17 5-8 FDC equipment, preparation ... 25-10 25-4
Conduct of fire---------------13-1 13-1 FDC personnel duties 25-13 2.5-6
Graphical firing table (GFT): FDC procedure 25-1 to 25-1 to
Ballistic scale----------------17-10 17-3 25-12 2.5-6
Care of---------------------20-11 20-6 Fire commands 25-4 25-1
Deflection correction scale 20-14 20-7 Fire order 25-3 25-1
Deflection indexes--------------16-22 16-12 Fuze - 25-6 25-2
Measuring and plotting 16-13 16-4 Massing and transfer of fires 25-12 25-6
Numbering --- 16-22 16-12 Maximum quadrant elevation 6-13 6-5
Setting----------------------20-7 20-3 Record of precision
Supplementary deflection registration 25-9 25-3
indexes--------------------16-22 16-13 Registration -- 25-3
Graphical firing table (GFT) setting. Replot data 25-4
(See settings, GFT) Site - 25-2
Graphical firing tables 17-11 17-3 Transfers 25-12 25-6
Graphical site table 17-7 17-2 High burst:
Graphs, assurance----------------2-45 2-28 Executive's (site by firing) 4-25 4-19
Grid azimuth: Laying 4-8 4-6
Correction for error in High-burst registration:
boresighting -------------- 4-24 4-17 Adjusted elevation,
Laying for direction (aiming determination 19-34 19-14
circle)---------------------4-2 4-1 Advantages 19-27 19-12
Laying for direction (M2 Chart data 19-33 19-14
compass)-------------------4-7 4-6 Example---------------------19-35 19-15
Measuring with protractor - 16-7 16-2 Firing data------------------19-30 19-13
Shifting ------- 4-6 4-5 Firing procedure--------------19-31 19-13
Grid declination -3-2 3-1 Orientation of observers ------- 19-29 19-12
Grid line --------- 3-2 3-1 Selection of point at which to
Grid north-----------------------3-2 3-1 register ------------------- 19-28 19-12
Grid sheet firing chart 16-4 16-1 High-explosive bursts effects-------10-3 10-1
Grid, target----------------------16-19 16-8 High-explosive projectile-----------1-13 1-5
Gun book -- -- -- 5-8 5-3 High-explosive projectile, for use
Gun target line: with VT fuse-------------------5-11 5-6
Air observation -------- -.-.-- 12-7 12-2 Horizontal control chart-----------16-20 16-12
Method of adjustment - 13-25 13-11 Horizontal control operator
15-3
Gunnery: (HCO)------------------------15-11
Problem and solution ---------- 1-5 1-1 2-13
Horizontal velocity component-------2-18
Team ----- 1-6 1-1 17-3
Hundred-over-R (100/R)-----------17-11

Index-8
 FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Lateral wind, deflection effect - 2-26 2-19
Hundred percent (100 percent) 2-25 2-18
2-31 2-20 Latitudinal effects on projectile
rectangle ---------------------- Laying:
By aircraft, high burst or flare 4-8
Improved conventional 4-6
24-12 D irect --- ----------------- 3-3 3-3
munitions----------------------24-35 3-3
3-3
Identification of observer, call for Indirect- -
fire-__-9-3 4-3 4-2
1-5 Reciprocal 4-5 4-4
Igniter charge-------------------1-11 Verification ----------------
5-6 Without aiming circle 4-7 4-5
Igniter pads, disposal-------------5-12
Level point of trajectory 2-13 2-9
Illuminating projectile:
24-3 Light artillery .................. 1-8 1-2
Charge, selection_-------------24-10
24-3 Limits, lateral (executive's report) 4-17 4-16
Chart data-------------------24-11
13-3 Limits, transfer .................. 20-6, 20-3
Conduct of fire---------------13-4 20-9
24-16 24-5 20-16
Corrections ------------------
13-3 3-2 3-1
Employment, factors affecting -- 13-3 Line, grid 3-2
24-4 Line, orienting ------..... ...... 3-3
Firing data------------------24-12
24-3 Line number, met message 21-4 21-2
General_---------------------24-9
6-5 Line:
Safety diagram6----------------613 2-10
24-6 Departure
Illuminating mission, example-------24-18 2-14
2-10
Elevation 2-14
Illumination: 2-10
13-3 F a ll ------------ .- --- ----. . 2-15
Battlefield--------------------13-3 2-10
13-6 Impact 2-15
Direct and indirect------------13-5 2-14 2-10
12-3 S ite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .
Mission, air observer-----------12-10 8-1,
13-5 13-6 Location of target (call for fire) 8-1,
Searchlight -----------------
9-5 9-1
Impact:
Angle2-----------------------15 2-10 Lot, ammunition:
1-5 4-21
Fuzes-----------------------1-14 Fire comm and -........ 4-33
2-15 2-10
2-10 Registration with more than
Line ----------------------- 19-40
2-10 one 19-21
Point.-----------------------2-15 Lots, ammunition:
2-21
Impact burst, effect of-------------27-7 - Manufacturing specifications 2-9 2-5
Impact registration verification- -19-23
4-33 4-23
Increments, powder, disposal of- -5-12 R ecord ---------- ------------
5-8
Index: Segregation ---- 5-18
-------------.
16-12
Deflection, construction---------16-22 M2 compass, laying for direction by
Supplementary deflection, g rid a zim u th .......- 4-7 4-5
16-22 16-13
construction ---------------- M10 plotting board:
Indirect: 24-65 24-41
1-1 Firing without a firing chart
Fire 1-5
13-5 13-6 Use for determining position 23-3
Illumination ---------------- 3-3 corrections -_ 23-5
Laying -.-- 3-3 ..................-3-2 3-1
Magnetic azimuth
3-1
Initial: Magnetic declination -3-2
3-1
Data phase, observer adjusted 28-4 Magnetic north - .......------------ 3-2 3-1
mission.-------------------28-11 2-10 Map and azimuth terms ...........-3-2 16-2
Elements of trajectory.---------2-14 26-1 Map pins 16-8 8-7
Firing chart------------------26-2 Marking rounds (observer's) 8-8 1-2
Instructions, special (fire 4-21 Massed fires -1-7 25-6
command)---------------------4-31 4-17 High-angle fire 25-12 28-1
Instrument direction, determination - 4-22 27-2 Matchbox problem ---------------. 28-3
Intensity of fire----------------- 27-6
1-5 Maximum elevation, high-angle 4-16
Interchangeability of fuzes.----------1-10 27-2 fire 4-17 2-9
Interdiction fire-------------------27-3 2-3 Maximum ordinate --- _- 2-13
Interior ballistics-----------------2-6 2-1 Maximum quadrant elevation:
Interval, vertical--2-4 6-5
Intrinsic elements of trajectory --- 2-13 2-10 High-angle fire---------------6-13 6-3
Invalid impact registration-----19-23 19-10 Low-angle fire __-6-9 2-20
Invalid registrations, causes .....- 19-22 19-9 Mean deflection 2-29 2-20
Invalid registrations, abbreviated Mean point-of-impact_-------------2-29 2-26
procedure------------19-26 19-11 Most probable position 2-41
Mean point-of-impact registration: 19-14
2-25 2-16 Adjusted elevation & time 19-34
Jump -- 19-12
2-26 2-19 Advantages ------------------ 19-27
Jump, lateral------------------- 19-14
Chart data 19-33
4-17 19-15
Lateral limits, executive's report - 4-16 Example problem-__ 19-35
19-13
Lateral shift, computation using Firing data------------------19-30
19-31 19-13
8-6 8-4 Firing procedure-___
sine factors--------------

Index-9
FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

27-3 27-2
Location after firing - --- 19-32 19-13 Neutralization fire -
19-12 New weapons tolerances ...... 2-9 2-4
Orientation of observers--------19-29
Selection of point at which to Nonstandard conditions:
register_-------------------19-28 19-12 Determination 2-22 2-15
2-20 Effect ---- 2-24 2-16
Mean Range ---------------- 2-29
Measuring: Nonstandard muzzle velocity, factors
4-16 causing - _ 2-9 2-4
Correct azimuth---------------4-20
4-10 Nonuniform ramming- -- 2-9 2-5
Angle of site to crest----------4-10
4-17 N ormal p ro b ab ility cu rve ..... ..... 2-33 2-21
Azimuth to a point------------4-23
Orienting angle---------------4-21 4-16 North:
Range to crest----------------4-11 4-10 G rid ----------- -------------- 3-2 3-1
Magnetic . . . 3-2 3-1
Measuring and plotting: 3-1
16-4 True -__ -- 3-2
Coordinate scale--------------16-12
16-5 Nuclear delivery techniques:
0
Plotting scale- - 16-14
16-4 8-inch howitzer 24-44 to 24-20
Protractor (angle)_-----------16-13
16-15 16-5 24-55
Range deflection protractor - 24-57 to 24-33
1-2 155-mm howitzer
Medium artillery------------------1-8 24-63
18-5 18-1
Message to observer 4-28 4-70
21-11 Numbers, announcement
Met and VE, application.-----------21-15
21-11
8-direction met technique ---------- 21-16 OT direction:
21-8 21-3 10-10
Met corrections, computation -- Change in- - - 10-18
21-12 8-3
Met corrections, experience ------- 21-17 Determination 8-6
21-3 10-5
Met data correction sheet.-----------21-8 OT fatcor- _ 10-8
21-9
Met deflection correction.-----------21-13 Observation:
21-9 22-5
Met deflection correction scale-------21-13 For calibration---------------22-11
Met message, NATO: From high performance
21-1 12-1
Contents_--------------------21-3 aircraft -12-3
21-4 21-2 7-1
Line number General -------- 7-1
21-1 7-1
Octant designation code--------21-3 Purpose of-------------------7-2
21-11 24-31 24-11
Solution of, example_----------21-15 Sound, flash and radar
21-1 1-2
Types-----------------------21-2 Visual and electronic 1-7
Meteorological datum plane Observation, combined:
21-2 13-8
(MDP)------------------------21-3 Conduct of fire -13-12
17-7 17-2 13-8
Meters to yards conversion, GST -- Equipment 13-13
9-2 13-8
Method of engagemet-------------9-7 4-23 Other missions -13-12
Method of fire and control----------4-37 10-10 Mean point of impact and
Change----------------------10-20 HB registration 13-14, 13-8,
2-1 f
19-12
Mil, definition--------------------21
8-1 19-27
Mil relation, observer------------- 8-3
Observation post, procedures
Military slide rule: during service practice ------- 28-2
13-10 28-5
Arrangement 13-17 Observed fire fan 7-8 7-3
27-3
Mine action, fuze delay-------------27-7 10-1 Observed firing charts:
Mine action burst, appearance-------10-3 Battalion 26-12 to 26-4
Minimum quadrant elevation: 26-15
4-12 4-10
Computation ----------------- 4-10 Battery 26-3 to 26-1
Determination ---------------- 4-9 26-11
6-5
High-angle fire---------------6-13 Description 26-1 26-1
6-3
Low-angle fire----------------6-9 For more than one battalion 26-22, 26-8
4-10 4-10
To clear visible crest.---------- 4-12 26-24
Vertical clearances -- 4-14 26-2 26-1
4-14 Initial firing chart
Minimum quadrant elevation card - 4-15 26-35 26-12
6-2 Transfer to surveyed chart
Misfires, procedure----------------6-4 With incomplete survey - 26-25, 26-9
Mission, destruction. (See 26-26
destruction missions.)
Multiple fire missions--------18-13 18-18 Observed firing chart, battalion:
Muzzle velocity: Determination of direction
26-13 26-4
Determination---------2-9 2-4 for polar plotting
Factors affecting---------2-25 2-16 Determination of range and
New weapon tolerances-----2-9 2-5 altitude:
Percussion plot 26-14 26-4
Nonstandard, factors causing -- 2-9 2-5
Standard------------2-8 2-4 Determination of range and
26-15 26-6
Variation (MVV) - - 22-9 22-3 altitude, time plot----
General 26-12 26-6
NATO met message----------21-3 21-1 Observed firing chart, battery:
Naval gunfire support __30-1 30-1 Deflection indexes -- 26-10 26-4

Index-il0
 FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Determination of direction for Radiotelephone, FDC-----------15-13 15-3
polar plotting--------------26-5 26-2 Ordinate, maximum---------------2-13 2-9
Determination of range and Orientation, observer--------------7-5 7-2
altitude: Orienting angle:
Percussion plot------------26-6 26-2 Computation-----------------4-2 4-1
Determination of range and Correction for error in
altitude, time plot, site boresight ------------------ 4-24 4-17
known---------------------26-8 26-3 Description 3-3 3-2
Determination of range and Measuring-------------------4-21 4-16
altitude, time plot, site Orienting the aiming circle -... 4-2 4-1
unknown-------------------26-7 26-2 Shift.------------------------4-6 4-5
Determination of site by firing Orienting line--------------------3-3 3-2
(executive's HB)------------26-9 26-3 Orienting station 3-3 3-2
GFT settings-----------------26-11 26-4 Origin of trajectory -------------- 2-13 2-9
Observed firing chart for more than
Panoramic telescope, description and
one battalion:
use- -------------------------- 35 3-3
Construction of (Plotting) ---- 26-23
26-8 Parallel sheaf-------------------- 2-5 2-1
Construction of (tracing paper Pattern, dispersion 2-31 2-20
method) ------------------- 26-24 26-8 Pattern, elliptical-----------------2-31
General----------------------26-22 Percussion plot, observed firing 2-20
Observer:
chart--------------------------26-6 26-2
Adjustment of precision Percussion primers- - 1-11 1-5
registration ---------------- 19-5 19-1 Photomap ....----------------- 16-3 16-1
Auxiliary map data------------7-8 7-2 Pieces to fire - -4-36
Axial (HB registration) 4-27 4-20 Pieces to follow ------------------.4-30 4-23
Corrections ------------------ 10-3 Plotting: 4-21
10-6
Determination of distance------8-3 8-1 By polar coordinates 16-18
Duties-----------------------7-3 7-1 16-8
Common errors and mal-
Identification, call for fire-------9-3 9-1 practices ...................- 18-29
Location of known points-------7-6 18-17
7-2 Equipment -16-8
Marking rounds---------------8-8 16-2
8-7 Observed firing chart for more
Measurement of angles--------8-4 8-2
18-than one battalion ---- 26-22 26-8
Moving, FDC procedure--------18-18 18-11 Target locations at FDC -...... 18-4
Orientation, mean-point-of- 18-1
Tick marks-------------------16-9 16-2
impact or HB registration ___ 19-29 7-2 Using coordinate scale---------16-12
Orienting for direction---------7-5 7-1 Using plotting scale------------16-10 16-4
Preparatory operations---------7-4 7-11Using protractor -- 16-13 16-4
Purpose --------------------- 1-6, 16-4
7-1, Using range deflection
7-2 10-3 protractor------------------16-15
Spottings--------------------10-5 Using target grid -16-19
16-5
Sequence of processing a 16-8
mission--------------------9-1 9-1 Plotting board M1O:
Firing without firing chart 24-72 24-44
Target location when
disoriented ----------------- 13-23 13-11 Use for determining position
corrections------------------23-5 23-3
Observer, air:
Adjustment procedures---------12-10 12-3 Plotting equipment -- 16-8 16-2
Fire for effect----------------12-12 12-3 Plotting pins 16-8 16-2
Initial data------------------12-6 12-1 Plotting scale:
Preflight preparations --------- 12-4 12-1 Measuring and plotting distances 16-14 16-5
Range estimation--------------12-9 12-2 Measuring coordinates of a
Spotting line-----------------12-7 12-2 point -- 16-11 16-4
Plotting a point from coordin-
Observer-target direction:
Change------------10-18 10-10 Pit ates-----------------------16-10 16-4
Determination---------8-6 8-3
Observer-target factor-------10-8 10-5 Adjusting-----------10-2 10-1
Officer in charge of firing------28-2 28-1 Aiming------------3-3 3-2
28Measuring azimuth 4-23
Oily tube-------------2-9 28Of burst .. .. .. .. .. .. . 2-15 4-17
One hundred over R(100/R)-----17-11 173Of impact - -- 2-15 2-10
One hundred percent (100 percent) 2-10
Reference-----------3-3
rectangle------------2-31 2-0 Polar coordinates: 3-2
Open sheaf------------2-5 22Plotting------------16-18
16-8
Operator: Target location - 8-7
15-3 Polar plot:
8-6
Horizontal control (HCO) 15-11
Vertical control (VCO)-----15-12 15-3 Example --- - - 8-7
8-7

Index-I
FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Indexes on chart (range-deflec- Projectile:
tion protractor) - 16-16 16-6 Care and handling 5-11 5-6
Sequence of target locating ele- Change in type (call-for-fire) - 10-22 10-10
ments--------------------- 9-1 9-1 Effect of HE 10-3 10-1
Polar plotting: Element of call for fire 9-1 9-1
Determination of direction 26-5 26-2 Fire command 4-32 4-21
Preparation of range-deflection Horizontal velocity component __ 2-18 2-13
protractor - 16-21 16-12 Initial velocity 2-16 2-10
Position area sketch------------ 4-16 4-15 Lay (due to rotation of earth) 2-25 2-17
Position corrections 23-4 23-3 Rotational effects during flight - - 2-25 2-18
Computation and application -- 23-6 23-3 Types 1-13 1-5
Use of M10 plotting board --- 23-5 23-3 Projectile, weight:
Powder: Computing corrections 2-20 5-8
Bags, disposal 5-12 5-7 Exterior ballistics 2-10 2-9
Bags, position in chamber ---- 2-9 2-6 Interior ballistics 2-6 2-3
Care and handling 5-12 5-7 Variation in muzzle velocity-. 2-25 2-16
Moisture content 2-9 2-6 Weight zone 2-9 2-6
Residues 2-9 2-7 Propaganda projectile- - 24-19 24-8
Precision fire 11-1 11-1 FDC procedure-_ 24-20 24-8
Precision registration: Propellant:
ABCA 19-42 19-21 Care and handling-.... 5-12 5-6
Adjustment phase--- 19-5 19-1 Moisture content 2-9 2-7
Angle T, determination --- 19-6 19-2 Performance, charge-to-charge 2-9 2-7
Correct deflection, conditions --- 19-10 19-2 Residues-.... 2-9 2-7
Correct deflection, FFE phase -- 19-11 19-3 Temperature ....... 2-9 2-6
Examples------------------- 14-2, 14-1, Temperature, correction of VE-_ 22-17 22-7
19-15 19-5 Propellants, nature -- 2-7 2-3
Factor S---------------------19-9 19-2 Propellants, separate loading:
FDC spottings, determination _ 19-8 19-2 Positioning in chamber 1-12, 1-5,
Fire for effect phase-----------19-7 19--2 2-9 2-6
Fuze quick 11-2 11-1 Propelling charge:
Fuze time--------------------11-3 11-1 Care and handling 5-12 5-6
High-angle fire----------------25-9 25-3 Increments 1-12 1-5
Initial fire commands, example 4-41 4-26 Positioning in chamber 1-12, 1-5,
Record of: 2-9 2-6
Impact-------------------19-15 15-5 V ariation in MV ............... 2-9 2-4
High-angle fire------------25-9 25-3 Protractor:
Time_--------------------19-20 19-9 Description 16-8 16-2
Verification-------------------19-23 19-10 Measuring and plotting of an
Pressure-travel curves--------------2-7 2-3 angle -- 16-13 16-4
Primer, ammunition---------------1-11 1-5 Radar firing charts 26-27 26-9
Primers: Radar improved chart:
Care and handling------------5-15 5-8 Protractor, range deflection:
Percussion--------------------1-11 1-5 Common errors and malprac-
tice s --------------- 18-29 18-17
Probability: 2-19 Measuring and plotting 16-15 16-5
and dispersion----------------2-28- -2-46 2-19 Numbering for measurement of
Computation------------------2-28 2-1 deflection--
16-21 16-22
Curve------------------------2-33 2-26 Proximity fuzes. (See Variable time
Single Shot------------------2-42 2-24 fuzes.)
Tables-----------------------2-40
Tables, use-------------------2-39 2-24 Quadrant change card. assault fire 24-22 24-8
Probable errors: Quadrant elevation:
Application-------------------2-39 2-24 Determination by computer 6-9 6-3
Definition---------------------2-30 2-20 Fire command 4-40 4-25
Deflection---------------------2-36 2-22 Firing data- - - 17-9 17-3
Developed--------------------2-46 2-28 Maximum, high-angle fire -_ 6-13 6-5
Height of burst---------------2-38 2-22 Maximum, low-angle fire 6-9 6-3
Range-----------------------2-34 2-22 Method of computation ...... 2-14 2-10
Vertical----------------------2-37 2-22 Minimum, high-angle fire 6-13 6-5
VT fuzes---------------------2-38 2-23 Minimum, low-angle fire 6-7 6-2
Special corrections applied 4-40 4-25
Profile:
Quick fuzes. (See fuzes: quick.)
Dead space-------------------24-37 24-15
Use-------------------------7-8 7-3 Radar, counterbattery 24-31 24-11

Index-12
 FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Radar, countermortar ...... 24-31 24-11 Record of precision fire (See preci-
Radar chart: sion registration, record of.)
Construction ----------------- 26-30 26-10 Rectangle:
Evaluation- -- - 26-33 26-12 Dispersion- --- 2-31 2-20
Observed firing ----------------- 26-31 26-11 Hundred percent (100%) ........ 2-31 2-20
Registering piece located 26-34 26-12 Refer ---- -- - - - 3-3 3-3
Radar registrations 19-37 19-18 Reference point 3-3 3-3
Radar improved chart: Referred deflections, by caliber wea-
A dvantages ......----------- 26-29 2 6- 1 0 p on ....... ....... --- ------------- 4-4 4-3
Construction--- 26-30 26-10 Registration 18-4 18-8
Radar improved time plot observed Application of corrections 20-2 20-1
firing chart 26-28 26-9 Mean point-of-impact 24-34 24-12
Radar ranging, FDC procedure --- 24-28 24-11 Corrections 20-1 20-1
Radio communication, fire direction _ 18-26 18-13 High-burst -........ 19-27 19-12
Radiotelephone operators, FDC 15-13 15-3 Point, characteristics - 19-4 19-1
Ramming-uniform and nonuniform 2-9, 2-5, Point, marking rounds to orient
5-4 5-1 observer---- 8-8 8-7
Range: Precision. (See precision registra-
Adjustment, ground observer 10-9 10-5 tion.)
Adjustment, air observer 12-11 12-3 Purpose 19-2 19-1
Bracket 10-11 10-6 Time. (See time registration.)
Chart, determination 16-24 16-14 Types ------------------------ 9-3 19-1
Complimentary- - - 2-14 2-10 Validity 19-A 19-9
Correction, determination 20-1 20-1 With more than one lot 19-40 19-21
Correction, targets outside trans- Replot data - --- 20-17 20-9
fer limits 21-12 21-9 Replot data, high-angle fire 25-11 25-4
Corrections (call for fire) --- 9-10, 9-5, Replotting targets - 20-17 20-9
10-6 10-3 Report, executive's ............... 4-17 4-15
Dispersion zones ............. 2-31 2-20 Reports 4-47 4-27
Horizontal distance...... 2-3 2-1 Reporting correct azimuth --- 4-19 4-16
Ramming, nonuniform 2-9 2-5 Reporting correct deflection ------- 4-18 4-16
01
Range: Request, fire. (See calls for fire.)
D efinition --------------------- 2-3 2-1 Ricochet burst:
Effects 2-25 2-16 A ppearance --- -----------------10-3 10-1
Estimation by air observer 12-9 12-2 Effect- - 27-7 27-3
Mean 2-29 2-20 Factors which determine rico-
2-22 chet--------------------- 10-4 10-2
Probable error----------------2-34
Spottings -------- 10-1(
) 10-5 Height of burst adjustment 10-15 10-9
Special corrections-------------23-7 23-7 Rotating bands--cause of velocity
dispersion - -------------------- 2-9 2-6
Standard (relation of air resist-
ance and projectile efficiency). 2-23 2-15 Rotating of earth:
To crest, measuring------------4-11 4-10 Deflection range --- ------------ 2-25, 2-16,
Wind------------------------2-25 2-17 2-26 2-19
Round, ammunition. (See ammuni-
Range and deflection corrections for
tion.)
targets outside transfer limits 21-1 2, 21-9,
21-4 2).1-10 S factor ---------- 19-9 19-2
Range deflection protractor: (See S 2 duties ........................ 15-6 15-2
Protractor, range deflection) S3 duties------------------------15-8 15-2
Safety card -------------- - 6-5 6-2
Range spread:
Call for fire------------------9-7 9-2 Safety diagram:
Element of fire order -- 18-5 18-1 Construction from visible refer-
ence point-----------------6-12 6-4
Ranging: Deflection limits after registra-
Flash------------------------24-3 1
) A 411
Z4L-11
tion . ... .. .. .. 6-10 6-3
Radar-----------------------24-3 1 24-11 Receipt of safety card ------- 6-2 6-2
Sound-----------------------24-3 1 24-11
Safety officer:
Ranging rounds-------------------12-9 12-2 6-2 6-2
Duties before firing ------------
Rates of fire, maximum------------27-6 27-2 6-3 6-2
Duties during firing
Reciprocal laying-----------------4-3 4-2 6-11 6-3
Sample problem -
Record as target-----------------11-8 11-2 6-1 6-2
General duties----------
Recorder, duties --- ------ 5-7 5-3 5-10 5-6
Safety precautions, ammunition -__
Recorder's sheet-------------------5-7 5-3 6-14 6-5
Safety stake diagram
18-1 6-5
Recording call for fire--------------18-3 Safety stakes -- 6-14
Recording laying for direction ----- 4-4 4-3 18-28 18-14
Sample missions

Index-i3
FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Scale: Illuminating---------------- 24-8 24-2
17-10 17-3 Propaganda----------------- 24-19 28-8
Ballistic, GFT- -
Smoke---------------------- 24-4 24-1
Coordinate, measuring, and plot- 16-2 13-1, 13-1,
ting ----------------------- 16-8 Toxic chemical--------------
8-2 24-8 24-2
Coordinate, use by observer 8-5
26-6 24-1
Deflection correction ---------- 20-13 White phosphorous (WP)------24-4
20-14 20-7 Shift from a known point:
Deflection correction, GFT 21-9 8-2
Deflection correction, met 21-13 Location---------------------8-6
16-2 16-8
Plotting----------------------16-8 Plotting with target grid ------ 16-19 9-1
Plotting, measuring, and plot- Sequence in call for fire---------9-1
16-4
ting-----------------------16-10 Shift from a known point and a spot- 12-2
13-1,
Screening1------------------------2-24-3 ting line, air observation---------12-8
24-1 Shift from an azimuth to an orienting
4-5
Searchlight illumination: angle-------------------------4-6
13-3 13-3 4-5
Conduct of fire--------------- Shift from one azimuth to another 4-6
14-6 14-15
Sample mission--------------- Shift from one orienting angle to
24-41 24-17 4-5
Section data sheets-------------- another------------------------4-6
1-8 1-2 37 4-23
Self-propelled artillery - --....... Shifting fire--------------------
5-3 5-1 8-2
Service of the piece drill -------- Shifts by observer---------------8-6
4-47 4-27
Service practice: Shot --------------------------
4-26
Accuracy and speed standards for Signals, arm and hand------------4-45
28-10 28-4 8-4
artillery fire-------------- Sine factors---------------------8-6
28-2 28-1 Single shot hit probability (SSHP):
Key pers onnel--------------- 2-26
28-5 28-2 Computation-----------------2-42
OP procedures-------------- 2-27
28-4 28-2 For bias targets-------------2-43
Preparation-----------------
28-10 to 28-4 to Site:
Standards of proficiency- 28-5 2-10
28-12 Angle of--------------------2-14
28-5 4-25 4-19
Table of timing--------------28-12 By firing (executive's HB) --
28-1
Training, prior---------------28-3 Complementary angle of (comp
2-10
Settings: site)-----------------------2-14
4-27
During firing, checking.---------4-48 Determination and announcement
4-39 4-25 18-4
Fuze ------------------------ by VCO --------------------. 18-9
Settings, GFT: Firing data 17-6 17-1
Correction for base piece displace- High-angle fire 25-8 25-2
20-1 2-14 2-10
ment----------------------20-3 Line of-....
20-3
General----------------------20-7 Observer corrections during as-
20-5 13-10 13-8
More than one lot------------20-9 sault fire
Nonregistering battery, exam- To crest, measuring angle of .. 4-10 4-10
23-1 7-2
ple------------------------23-2 Sketch, terrain -7-8
20-4, 20-1, 22-2
Range and fuze corrections ---- Skyscreen equipment-.... 22-8
20-2 13-9
20-b Slide rule, military ................ 13-17
20-8 20-5
Selection------------------- 16-1 Smoke base ejection, FDC procedure
16-6 13-2 13-1
Surveyed firing chart-------- in adjustment
Sheaf: Smoke burst, appearance ---------- 10-3 10-1
2-5, 2-1, 13-1,
Converged------------------ Smoke screen 13-2,
4-26 4-20 24-2
24-6
Converged, opening by individual Smoke projectiles 24-4 24-1
4-7 4-6 24-31 24-11
gun shifts---------------- Sound ranging ------------------
2-5, 2-1,
Open---------------------- 4-20 Special corrections:
4-26 Announcement by computer 4-31 4-21
Parallel-------------------- 2-5 Application- - 23-9 23-7
2-5 2-1 4-25
Special--------------------- Applied to fuze setting --- 4-39
24-41 2.1-17 4-40 4-25
Sheets, section data------------- Applied to QE
Determination-_ 23-8 23-7
Shell: (See Projectile.) 1-5
1-13 Instructions ---------------- 4-31, 4-21,
Armor piercing------------- 1-5
1-13 23-7 23-7
Base ejection--------------- 1-5
chemical-------- 1-13 pattern of bursts 2-5 2-1
Burster-type 13-1, Obtaining
13-1, 4-31 4-21
Chemical------------------- 24-1, Special instructions fire command
13-2, 2-1
27-2 Special sheaf-...... 2-5
24-3,
27-7 Spottings:
1-5 10-5 10-3
By observer -- -------------
High explosive----------------13 19-8 19-2
Determination by FDC
High explosive, for use with VT 5-6 Deviation - 10-7 10-3
fuze-----------------------5-11 24-12 10-13 10-9
ICM-------------------------24-35 Height of burst ......

Index-14
 FM 6-40

Paragra]phs Page Paragraphs Page

Range 10-10 10-5 By air observer ---- *----------12-8 12-2
Spotting line determination by air Data, sequence of annc )uncement- 9-1 9-1
observer .......- 12-17 12-2 Grid coordinates 8-2
Stakes, safety--------------------6-14 6-5 Marking rounds ----- 8-8 8-7
Standardization of Terminology, call Methods 8-1,
for fire -- -- 9-2 9-1 9-5 9-1
Standard range -- 2-23 2-15 Observer disoriented 13-11
Station, orienting ------------------- 3-3 3-2 Plotting *----------16-10 to 16-4
Storage of ammunition in the field _ 5-21 5-9 16-12
Summit of trajectory -- 2-13 2-9 Polar coordinates ---- 8-7 8-6
Superquick fuze. (See fuzes: quick.) Shift from known point8---------6 8-2
Supplementary deflection indexes, con- Targets:
struction 16-22 16-13 Armor, ammunition for attack-
Surprise fire - 1-7 1-1 ing------------------------30-2 30-1
Surveillance of fire for effect ...... 11-8 11-2 Bias (SSHP)-----------------2-43 2-27
Surveyed firing charts: Located by sound, flash, or radar,
GFT settings and deflection in- FDC procedures-------------24-31 24-11
dex -....... 26-36 26-12 Replotting--------------------20-17 20-9
Target replot, example 2.0-18 20-9 Targets, attack:
Transfer .....-. 26-35 26-12 Ammunition available----------27-7 27-2
Transfer, to, percussion fuze _ 26-37 26-12 Area to be attacked------------2.7-5 27-2
Transfer, to, time fuze ......... 26-38 26-13 Method of engagement---------9-7 9-2
Types- - 16-6 16-1 Selection of units to fire -- 27-8 27-5
Switchboard operator, FDC, duties _ 15-14 15-3 Techniques 27-5
2.7-9
Table, graphical firing 16-8, 16-2, Technical fire direction 15-1 15-1
17-11 17-3 Telescope, panoramic--------------3-5 3-3
Table, graphical site 16-8, 16-2, Temperature, air 2-25 2-17
17-7 17-2 Temperature powder:
Table: Effects 2-9 2-6
Ammunition chart 1-10 1-4 Executives report 4-17 4-15
Characteristics and capabilities of For computation of corrections 5-20 5-8
artillery weapons-----------1-9 1-3 Terminal elements of trajectory 2-15 2-10
Effect on concrete (weapons) - 27-7 27-2 Terrain sketch 7-8 7-2
Fuze interchangeability---------1-14 1-5 Tickmarks 16-9 16-2
Maximum rate of fire---------27-6 27-2 Time, adjusted 19-9 19-8
Open sheaves 2-5 2-2 Time, arming (VT fuzes) 4-13 4-12
Service practice timing - 28-12 28-5 Time, determination of fuze setting
Standards of proficiency (speed) by computer - 18-15 18-8
of artillery fires------------28-12 28-5 Time correction, experience 21-20 21-12
The call for fire--------------9-10 9-4
Tables, probability----------------2-40 Time fuzes:
2-24 Adjusting height of burst
Tactical fire direction--------------15-1 10-12, 10-8,
15-1
Target: 10-14 10-9
Altitude, determination Adjusting with low height of
16-25 16-4
Area base burst - 10-13 10-9
-13-17 13-9
Circular, conversion to equivalent Calibration correction 23-3 23-2
square---------------------2-44 2-28 Effect of air burst ............ 27-7 27-3
Description-------------------9-6 FDC procedure 18-15 18-8
9-2
Designation, sound, flash and Functioning-...... 1-14, 1-5,
radar----------------------24-30 10-4 10-1
24-11
Grid, common errors and mal- In precision fire 11-3 11-1
practices-------------------18-27 Replotting of targets atttacked 20-20 20-11
18-17 23-7
Grid, misorientation, procedure to Special corrections 23-8,
correct---------------------16-19 23-9
16-8
Grid, use--------------------16-19 Targets employed against 10-4 10-1
16-8
Nature----------------------9-6 Time of flight 2-27 2-19
9-2 Time of opening fire
Target analysis and attack: 18-15 18-8
Description-------------------27-2 Time on target missions, FDC pro-
27-1
Maximum rate of fire-----------27-6 c e d u re --------------------------- 18-20 18-11
27-2
Registration and survey control - 27-4 27-2 Time plot observed firing chart:
Results desired---------------27-3 27-2 Determination of range and alti-
Target hits------------------19-6 19-2 tude, site known 26-8 26-3
Target location: Determination of range and
Accuracies---------------------.8-2 8-1 altitude, site unknown 26-7 26-2

Index-15
FM 6-40

Paragraphs Page Paragraphs Page

Time registration: Probable error, determination --- 2-30 2-20
Abbreviated procedure 19-21 19-9 Replotting of targets attached - 20-19 20-10
Example 19-20 19-9 Targets employed against------10-4 10-2
Fuze setting 19-18 19-8 Velocity, muzzle. (See muzzle velo-
Procedures for determining ad- city.)
justed time ------- 19-19 19-8 Velocity components---------------2-18 2-13
Validity conditions 19-,22 19-9, Velocity dispersion----------------2-9 2-4
19-24 19-10 Velocity error:
Verification 19-25, 19-25, Absolute, computation---------22-22 22-9
19-26 19-26 Application-------------------21-11 21-9
Time setting ------- .--- 4-39 4-25 Average---------------------21-19 21-12
Tolerances of new weapoins 2-9 2-4 Comparative, determination -- 22-16 22-7
Total fuze correction-__ ------------. 20-5 20-3 Computation of---------------21-9 21-6
Towed artillery ........ ------ ------ 1-8 1-2 Corrections, experience---------21-16 21-11
Toxic chemical projectile -13-1, 13-1, Determination of V------------21-6 21-3
24-8 24-2 General----------------------21-5 21-2
Training of firing batte]ry .5-2 5-1 Propellant temperature variation
Trajectory: correction------------------22-17 22-7
Angle of fall ----------- 2-15, 2-10, Velocity trends-------------------2-9 2-4
2-18 2-13 Verification:
Base ------------ 2-13 2-9 Impact registration------------19-23 19-10
Change ----------- -----------.. 10-19 10-10 Time registration--------------19-25, I
19-11,
Definition ---------- ----------- 2-11 2-9 19-26 19-11
Elements .. ..... ----------- 2-12 2-9 Vertical:
F orm ------------- ----------- 2-16 2-10 Clearance, MQE------------- 4-12 4-10
In atmosphere ...... 2-17 2-13 Control chart 16-26 16-14
In vacuum-.... -- 2-16 2-10 Control operator (VCO) 15-12 15-3
Initial elements 2-14 2-10 Dispersion 2-37 2-22
Intrinsic elements _-2-13 2-9 Interval 2-4, 2-1,
O rigin ------------ ---..-...... 2-13 2-9 16-25 16-14
Site and comp site ----------- 2-14 2-10 Interval, determination 16-25 16-14
Summit- -- -- - - - 2-13, 2-9, Probable error 2-37 2-22
2-18 2-13 Shift 8-6 8-2
Terminal elements - - 2-15 2-10 Velocity components 2-18 2-13
Transfer limits - -- ---- 20-10, 20-6, Visibility diagram 7-8 7-2
20-16, 20-9, VT fuzes. (See variable time fuzes.)
21-12 21-9
2-9 --- 2-4 Warning Order (call for fire) 9-4 9-1
Trends velocity ---.
Weapon record book------------- 5-8 5-3
True azimuth ----- 3-2 3-1
Wear of tube 2-9 2-5
True north- -- *-----------3-2 3-1
2-9 --- 2-7 Wear tables 22-23 22-11
Tube conditioning ---
-2-92-7 Weight of projectile 2-9, 2-6,
Tube wear----------
2-25 2-16
Unloading the piece - 5-22 5-9 White phosphorous (WP) projectile:
Unobserved fire missions -13-26
13-11 Action 24-4 24-1
Adjustment of, FDC procedures 13-2, 13-1,
Valid time registration 19-10
-19-24 24-5 24-1
Validity of registrations 19-22 19-9 And HE 9-7 9-2
Variable time fuzes: Appearance of burst 10-3 10-1
Angle of fall ---- 10-16 10-9 Care and handling 5-17 5-8
Arming time --- 4-13 4-12 Wind:
Care and handling 5-14 5-9 Lateral--------------------- 2-26 2-19
Computation of MQ] E (low-angle Range 2-25 2-17
fire) 4-12, 4-10, 18-13
4-12 Wire communications, fire direction - - 18-27
4-14
14-14 4-12 2-16,
Crest clearances - Yaw, angle 2-25,
27-7 27-3 2-19
Effect of air burst 2-26
18-9
FDC procedure, whEan using --- 18-16
Functioning 1-14, 1-5, 4-24
Zone fire----------------------- 4-37
10-4 10-1
Zone dispersion----------------- 2-32 2-20

Index-16
 FM 6-40
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

CREIGHTON W. ABRAMS
General, United States Army
Official: Chief of Staff
VERNE L. BOWERS
Major General, United States Army
The Adjutant General

Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-11A requirements for Field Artillery Cannon
Gunnery (Qty rqr block no. 44).

* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1974-713-213/5088

 DATE
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO PUBLICATIONS
TO. (Forward to proponent of publication) (Include ZIP Code) FROM: (Activity and location) (Include ZIP Code)

Commandant
US Army Field Artillery School
Fort Si Oklahoma 3500
SECTION A - ALL PUBLICATIONS EXCEPT RPSTL AND SC/SM
PUBLICATION NUMBER DATE TITLE
FM 6-40 28 .June 1974 Field Artillery Cannon Gunnery
ITEM PAGE PARA- LINE FIGURE TABLE
NO. NO. GRAPH
,N__N" NO. * NO. NO. ( RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
N(Exact wording of recommended change must be given)

• Reference to line numbers within the paragraph or subparagraph.

SECTION B - REMARKS (Any general remarks or recommendations for improvement of publications)

TYPED NAME, GRADE, OR 'rITLE AND TELEPHONE NUMBER SIGNATURE

FORM 202 -1 o01

uAI OVL7UL028I(Test)
 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
POSTAGE AND FEES PAID

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

DoD-314

OFFICIAL BUSINESS
PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE, $300

Commandant A
US Army Field Artillery School
ATTN: ATSF-CTD-DD
Fort Sill, Oklahoma 73500

----------------- ------------------. Fold here - then fasten at top ..........................................................

..------------
A-Sa

VI ~)UUUVUUV DoQ~~(n RVaGPpfi

KO~vgNoR

~VGOV ©GIOv

CG~dGQG©vwI, ©VGoIOVI, a

Vca VI MJ'JG

Ad us~mo Pvocdia Lv GIVd OL ovvevII

Fveav Sh~

VIVG (lD Vod O@ a IGN d~

@~jUR
IdIROVI1 VdVIIU o pggZJ Og
z* Vd OMVR
w 0 ve
'N %c R
t§o O~vaoz~G~uG
Lda e og(3 VRla'LVV.

n-1ccd~%~o V TT~o (2A *Ror vAuu Fhu5C

' W @ h

AMAV FO*VG

MQ)VR
U wJUUvII 'UU

ChgLg1 w 01 winr
Ix i4'6 V~OA duvsn1
z LI rJ t,4--4T0i 1f.1&

NDveV o*G£1O'

VoGVVOVI
Do ~~L~LA'U XLi4

b& 4I'OI %a~ II£1 VId 1.

.adUNvWRVJ
~ UVV£1 L~C~VI3£1VG£IO I~
Oaii
A sS"v U
DV D~VO~d I L7I'Vo~VOdI 1 IVQ~ ~OV
~ dVOVIIVV VI ~IVO SS3misflO1V
wiow

P/'so
qd OV AWOOS

AWH I O ILMJW OG